New method of learning to read, write, and speak the Italian language

This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project
to make the world's books discoverable online.

It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject
to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books
are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover.

Marks, notations and other marginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the
publisher to a library and finally to you.

Usage guidelines

Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing this resource, we have taken steps to
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying.

We also ask that you:

+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for
personal, non-commercial purposes.

+ Refrain from automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help.

+ Maintain attribution The Google "watermark" you see on each file is essential for informing people about this project and helping them find
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it.

+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liability can be quite severe.

About Google Book Search

Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web

at|http : //books . google . com/

^m^

tV I^18.53,£>4ff

D. APPLETON db CO:S PUBLICATIONS.

(Ekratioital C^rt-Sook?.

BdLANDBVUiIjirS Reading Booki, tIz.?—

1. Primary Reader. 18ma . • 10 I 3. Third Reader. 16 mo. .

2. Beoond Reader. 16mo. ... 17 | 4. Fourth Reader. 12mo.
Ooorae of Reading. 12mo.

Th€
bj ban
1- emir
•npem

8HA
OLA
BSAI

QUA

Thi
mar, %\
ttoann
■al cot

QUil
OOV

Thl
and A I
Then
work i

MU]

]

LAT

0«niMU!

PZ2I

It
arepr
Ingil
■tept

HARVARD COLLEGE
LIBRARY

THE GIFT OF
KENNETH BALLARD MURDCXaC

CLASS OP 1916
PROFESSOR OF ENGLISH

$25

88

76

1 00

1 25
76

1 00
62

45

60

1

. 1

60

. 1

25

n-

. 1

00

ra

84

1

60

. 1

50

r

BBV^ ^ 68

<* « « of Rome. 18mo 60

TheM worics are well adu>ted to the wants of jonng pnplla, fftving them the moet im-
portant flwts clothed in a a^le at once pleasing and comprenenfltble^

ARNOIiD'S History of Rome. 8to 8 00

— — -— Iiectares on Modem History. 12mo. 1 26

PX7TZ and ARNOIiD'8 Manual of Anoient Oeography A History 1 00 ^

MediaBval Oeography and History 12mo. 75 <

Modem do. do. 12rao 1 00 ^

As Text-Books for stndents, there are none in the ^oeseislon of the pnblio which are |

better adapted, than Pnti and Arnold's, to unfold the philoaophj of History, or to implant
in their minds its leading principles

^H-?>*<^

A APPLETONd CO:S PUBLIO^TIONS,

-V^

8PAU)INa'S History of Bngliflh Literattire. 12mo. |

•* W« mbcKtatinsly MoiKiMd it m th« beM work ia cxifltAiiM. not only m • toxtrliook, balfer th* «m of
privaM itadcata who h«v« aat •» band a telwably eoiDsi«t« libnr^ of EacUah litoTstora.

•*•- — — ' ' '-1J7 phUo«)ptiie«L ilapartieolar eiiUeiaasMBKMrtii

Nwm Tori Owmr »md Aifmrcr.

" iM p«0»«*l.

J «M«« ai« tniJ; phUofttpbieal, ila (Mtrtieolar eiitieiaas alaiHrt iavariably ouukwl by OTlttTBtod

OOXTSDTS History of Modem Philosophy. 2 Tola. 8vo.

**Th«ath«able«t«adBoitiwpii]«rworkorawrittr,wbuMpoiaUdii«Hod« b»T«taii«b«dth« chorda of ■»•
dora sMw^aad tbiilM thfoa(b tka aaiuliof tbouHada b almort orory quarter of tho alvUiaed world."—

TATIiOR'B Manual ot Ancient and Modem History. Sya . .
tt Ancient, separately, |1 25. Modem, $1 60.

* WaeannI bttiaxprcaiOHrdMidad ^tpreralorthU Uamal of Hnlory. ItU aaamnary of aO that lainoil
klaoftbo world ; a book nhad Bot only for Iha porpooM of dinet tuition, bat aaa
-Journal tf CbouMTM.

DjfciwS ]>igest of Laws, Customs, Manners, and Xnstitationa of
Ancient and Modem Nations. 8vo !

OREBirS History of the Middle Ages. 12ma

Atlas of MedisBval Oeography. 8Ta

MANaNAIiIi'S Historical Questions. With American Additiona.
12mo.

BCABSHABC8 History of England. Edited by Eliza Robbins. 12mo.

KOHIiRAUSCH'S History of Germany. 1 toL Byo.

QXnZOT*8 History of Oivilization. Notes by Professor Henry. 12mo.

MISCELLANEOUS.

BOJB8SBN and ARNOIJ>'8 Mannal of Grecian and Roman AntL
qnities.

OUMBONG'S Olass-Book of Physiology

EVBRXSTT'S System of English Versification. 12mo.

GRAHAIhTS English Synonymes. Edited by Professbr Beed. 12mo.

JAEGER'S Olass-Book of Zoology. ISmo.

KZIIGHTUEnrS Mythology of Greece and Rome. ISmo

OTIS' Easy Iieasons in I«andscape Drawing. Fiye Parts. . . .

Do. do. Bound in 1 toL

■ Stodies of Animals. Five parts.

Do. do. Bound in 1 voL •...,...

First XiesBons in Pencil Drawing.

PAIiBOER'S First Ziessons in Book-Keeping. Price

BLANK BOOK to aoeompuij above. 19 oent&
BEIiyS Dictionary of the English Zjanguage. With Derivations, Ac.

*TIua b an admirable work tor tiia oia of mIuwIs : tta g«Mnl wpamxity to othar works of ili cIum it Indu-

ROBBinrS' Guide to Knowledge

XKTRIGHT'S Primary Iiessons \ txt^ Ohild's First Bock.

TOUMAITS Olass-Book of Ohemistry. 12mo., 840 ps^es, ....
This work bifkota mere manual of laboratorr 6peratloB8, bnta book of Prloclplea, clearly
•xplstned in thoir application to nsefol arta and aflkin of life. Nnroeroas teachere who noa
tlitt Work attest that it dlseloaes thla beaatiftal scieoee in a new and attractive aspect.

' — Ohart of Ohemistry accomplishes, for tf!e first time^

tsa Chemistry, what Mapa and Charts have for Oeography, Astronomy, Oeology,
and the other natural sciences, by presenting a new and admirable method of illos-
tnttnc this highly interesting and beaati'fhl Bcienoe. Its plan is to repreeent
cfaomfeal composition to the eye by colored diagrams, the areas of which ezprass
proporiloiial qoantltiea.

[Oonlimiad In and of thia rolnaa.]
.Vi-^

■'yJh

i ^JS

/

)

3 2044 102 868 692

<^-'

'V^Cb

D, ippkUm 4* Company puhUsh, uniform mth the Grammar^

. A PROGRESSIVE

ITALIAN READER,

Prepared with reference to the American edition of
OLLENDORFF'S ITALIAN GRAMMAR,

WITH NOTES AND A VOCABUI^EYy

fiT FELIX FORESTI,

FrqfimoT qfih/t UaKan Language and LUeraiure in the I7til0»«iv»iy ^llbe Cify qf

New-York and Columbia College,

^

OLLENDORFPS

NEW METHOD

• or LEABNINO TO

KEAS, WRITE, AND SPEAK

TBX

ITALIAN LANGUAGE

ADAPTED FOR

THE USB OF S6H00I£ AND FRITATE TEACHERS.

WITH ADDITIONS AMD OOBRBCTIONS

Bt FELIX FORESTI, LL. D.,

OF TBI ITALIAir LABODAflB ABB UTBBATVRB DT OOLYJMBIA OOLLMI
ABD IB TBB UBIVBHCITT 3F TBX CIT7 OF BXW-TOBX.

NEW- YORK:
D. APPLETON & COMPANY, 200 BROADWAY.

1853.

^iducT 1^1^.5 3 c4?

hAfiV'.M?t/ C'^.tj? I'pffA:^^

6in OF
fiOF. KENNETH i^ mmcCt

Emtbbbii, according to Act of Congress, In the year 1846^ Of

D. APPLETON & COMPANY,

In tho Clerk's Office of the District Court for the Southern Distiiot oi
New-York.

NOTICE.

A Kby to the Exercises of this Grammar is pablished in a
■ei>arate volume.

PREFACE.

Mt system of acquinnga living language is founded on t&e
principle, that each question neariy contains the answei
which one ought or which one wishes to make to it The
slight difference between the question and the answer is
always explained before the question : so that the learner
does not find it in the least difficult, either to answer it, or to
miLke similar questions for himself. Again, the qnestioc
containing the same words as the answer, as soon as the
master pronounces it, it strikes the pupil's ear, and is there-
fore easily reproduced by his speaking organs. This prin-
ciple is so evident, that it is impossible to open the book
without being struck by it

Neither the professor nor the pupils lose an instant ot
time. When the professor reads the lesson, the pupil an
swers ; when he examines th» lesson written by the pupil
he speaks again, and the pupil answers; also when he
examines the exercise which the pupil has translated, he
speaks and the pupil answers: thus both are, as it were,
contimially kept in exercise.

n FRBFACB.

The phrases are sq arranged that, from the beginping to
the end of the method, the pupil's curiosity is excited by the
want of a word or an expression : this word or expression is
always given in the following lesson, but in such a manner
as to create a desire for others that render the phrase still
more complete. Hence, from one end of the book to the
other, the pupil's attention is continually kept alive, till at
last he has acquired a thorough knowledge of the language
which he studies.

The numerous and pressing demands for this, the English
ind Italian part of my Method, make me hope that my
endeavours towards facilitating the study of foreign lan-
guages in England will on this, as on former occasions, be
crowned with success ; and should it meet with as extensive
favour as all my other publications have found at the hands
of the public^ I shall be amply rewarded for the many yean
of labour it has cost me.

•*> Rm SI Rmttuso, Pabv.
July 85, 1846.

OSSERVAZIONE

PEL PROFESSORE ITALIANO

L'autore di questo metodo non ha il minimo dubhio di
renir criticato nella scelta delle frasi e dei vocaboli di cui si
servl nell corso dell' opera : la lingua italiana, ricca di tante
bellezze fornitele da una letteratura di piu di sei secoli, oSre
una scelta d' espressioni qualche volta imbarazzante per lo
studioso ; ma V autore, attenendosi a solido appoggio, prefer
il Manzoni, fira i modemi scrittori il piu unanimemente
stimato in fktto di precisione e di buon gusto*

EXPLANATION OP SOME SIGNS USE?D IN THIS BOOK.

Expressions which vary either in their constraction or idiom from
the English are marked thus : t
A hand (1X9*) denotes a rale of syntax or constraction.

PREFACE TO THE AMERICAN EDITION.

The thanks of all who ane interested in the cultivation of the
Italian language and literature in the United States are justly due
to the enterprising publishers of this American edition of Ollen-
dorff's New Method. Teachers and scholars are now, for the
first time, provided with a clear, philosophical; and well^tgested
Granomar, by means of which a thorough and correct knowledge
of Italian may be gained with comparatively little labour, and in a
space of time that will be deemed incredibly short by those who
have confined themselves to the tedious systems heretoibre in use.
My experience in teaching long since convinced me that a work
of thb description was needed in America ; aad^ after a careful
perusal of Ollendorff's Method, I do not hesitate to commend it
to the public, as in every respect worthy of the great and well-
deserved fame of its author.

Scarcely a week passes among us that is not marked by the
advent of one or nx>re new books to facilitate the acquisition of
foreign languages. Grammars, Manuals, and Treatises, fall
rapidly from the press, flutter for a moment, and disappear,
like snow-flakes upon a river. Each claims to be superior, in
its method of teaching, to all its predecessors, if not absolutely infal-
lible in every important detail. Pedantic vanity and the desire
of gain crowd the republic of letters with eager aspirants, the
character of whose productions unerringly corresponds to the
meanness of the motives that gave them birth. Hence the faint
hope of any important improvement at the present day, particu-
lariy in those favoured countries where freedom of the press is
enjoyed.

X PBBFACB TO THE AMBKICA2V EDITION.

Now it will be found upon examination that all the details of
these different modes of teaching languages are resolvable into the
two following methods : —

1. The classical, scholastic, or scierUific method. In this the
practice is almost entirely subordinated to abstract, formal rules,
which are prominently brought forward and hold the first place.

2. The empirical or practical method. Here a commencement
b made with the concrete tongue : almost exclusive attention is
given to the living practice, the grammatical principles of the
language being either postponed or subordinated, or perhaps
altogether neglected.

Of the first method I had harsh experience in the happy days
of my youth, as did also, probably, all my cotemporaries. We
studied, alas! in the old-fashioned colleges. In the beautiful
land of my native Italy I applied myself to the Latin, Italian, and
French ; and oh, what days of vexation and toil ; what slow and
tedious progress ! It could not be otherwise, for the method did
violence to every process of nature. It had nothing in it to excite
the attention or engage the sympathies of the pupils. In speaking
a foreign language we enjoy the pleasing satisfaction of expressing
our own thoughts and feelings in a form at once novel and attrac-
tive ; but the method of which I am speaking can never aflS)rd this
advantage but in the slightest degree, as a slowly-piled, granite-
faced Cyclopean substructure of grammatical rules b considered
an indbpensable preliminary to any attempt at speaking. And
while the student reluctantly submits hb understanding and
memory to the task of encountering these barren formulas and .
abstract rules, he b never called to make an attempt to connect
the sound of hb written, though rarely spoken words, with the_
objects to which they belong; but* instead thereof is obliged to
work out the connection in the slowest and most painful manner
possible, by means of hb mother tongue and a dictionary. To
learn foreign languages by such a system in a pleasing, rapid,*
and practically useful manner, b obviously impossible. Question
the hopeful youths in European colleges who are compelled to
pursue by thb method the study of Greek and Latin — ^the sup-
posed principal foundations of human knowledge ; questicm them,
and you will find Uiat after four or five years of tedious drilling

PRSFACB TO THB AMERICAN EDITION. X\

ihej are unable, in every thing that constitutes a practical know-
ledge of these languages, to get beyond an awkward and painful
crawl. Iron energy and vaulting ambition will now and then
spur on a solitary individual ; but the many flag, and flagging, in
the study of languages; is equivalent to retrc^ression.

I came to the United States strongly impressed with the
absurdity of this classical method. Exiled by long and sorrowful
political misfortunes from my native land, and compelled to engage
in the humble occupation of teaching my mother tongue, I felt
awaken within me my ancient disgust for such a method, and
immediately commenced, as my pupils well know, with an oral
system resembling that of Professor Ollendorff.

The empirical or practical system is in accordance with nature.
It may be that experimental philosophy, which, since the days of
Bacon and Galileo, has fbr ever dethroned the ancient jargon of
the schools of l^ic and metaphysics, has also contributed to the
in^rovement of the method of teaching languages ; or it may be
that the two constant facts, that a child learns so easily its mother
tongue, and an adult so readily a foreign language, by residence
in a country where it is spoken, .could not be forgotten. But
whatever may have been the immediate cause of the improve-
ment, it is certain that books of practical oral teaching have sup-
plied a deficiency that was deeply and extensively felt in thb
country, as is evidenced by the welcome reception and rapid sale
of Mr. Arnold's Latin Lessons, and the French and German
Grammars of Professor Ollendorff.

Ollendorff's Method possesses the distinctive characteristic of
commencing with the concrete practice on the simplest elements.
The grammatical forms and syntactical rules are gradually
developed by means of this, practice, which consists mainly of
common and familiar conversations on the most orainary subjects,
f n a word, it is the grammar put into a conversational form ;
it thereby serves its purpose admirably — ^because,

1. There is a direct appeal to the ear, the natural organ by
which a language is acquired.

2. Tins appeal b made under circumstances in which a direct
relation is established between the sound and the thing signified :
JO painful series of steps is to be taken through the grammar.

Xii PBSFACE TO THE AWE&ICAN EDITION.

dictionary, and the idiom of another language, before the conneo
tion is made.

8. The appeal is made with such, familiar phrases as cannot
fail to excite strongly the attention and engage the sympathies
of the scholar.

It is, in short, a very close imitation of the method by which
a child learns its mother tongue, or an adult th^ language of a
foreign country in which he resides.

An Ehigllsh and Italian Grammar of this description has been
hitherto unknown in this country. Teachers of Italian have been
under the necessity of supplying, by their Own ingenuity, the
deficiency of a well-ordered method. By availing themselves of
Ollendorff's Grammarthey will therefore lighten their own labour,
and at the same time cheer and encourage their pupils, and hasten
Aeir progress. By this means they will also pay a well-deserved
compliment to those who, by their enterprise in this publicatioDi
have expressed a feeling of sympathy and veneration for the lan-
guage and literature of our beloved Italy.

In order to increase the advantages to be derived from studying
Italiaa by Ollendorff's Method, a Reading Book, with the title,
CresUmazia Italiana, has also been issued by the publishers of
this Grammar. Such a work, as every teacher of languages
knows, is always needed by. pupils. The Crestamaxia Italiana.
contains interesting extracts selected from the best Italian j)rofes-
sors of modem times. The most involved passages and the
idioms are explained by means of a glossary at the end of each
piece, so that the work may serve at the sime time for exercises
in reading, trsAslating, and committing to memory.

F. F.

Oahimbia College, SeptmJkr, 1846.

FIRST LESSON.'
Lezimte Prima.

DEFINITE ARTICLE.

IfASCULlNB SINGULAR.

iWhen the word begins

with any consonant except », followed by anothai
consonant.)

AccumU9e^

the.

of the.

to the.

the.

from the.

Nimmatieo, fl.
QenUito, del.
Daiioo, al.
Aoeujniivoy il.
JlMo^, dal.

HaTe youl

1 Ayete t Ha EUa 7<

' To Paorassoas.'^Each lesson should be dictated to the pupils, who
abould pronounce each word as soon as dictated. The pro&saor should also as>
erdae his pupils byputting the questions to them in various ways. Each lepapp
includes three operations : the teacher, In the first place^ looks over the azer-
ciaes of the most attentive of his pupils, putting to them the questions
contained in the printed exercises; he then dictates to them the next lesson ;
and, lastly, pats fresh questions to them on all the preceding lessons. The
teacher may divide one lesson into two, or two into three, or even make two
Sato one, according to the degree of intelligence of his pupils.

* It is, perhaps through an abuse of dvilzation that the use of the
second person plursl yau has been introduced into modem languages. The
Italians, however, go still further, and use, as the pronoun of address, even in
^waking to a man, the third person singular feminine, EUa^ which they begin
with a large letter, out of deference for the person they speak to, and to distin-
guish it from the third person ftnoinino. It relates to Vo^tra SignoHa (con-
tracted : Votrignoria, abridged F. S,t yovr worship), which is understood.
then are, howevor, three ways of addressing a person, via. :—
1. Darddiu, to say thou.
S. Datdd voif to say you.

% Dor dd Lei, {EOa, nominative,) to f peak in the third person.
WsB-adnealed peraoBs use the sacond person singular lii, thon, only in

1

FIRST LBSSON.

7m, Sir, I haTe.

THm.

The hat.
Have you the ball
Ves, Sir, I have the hat

The bread.

The salt.

The soap.

Si, Signore,* Fho.

11' (before «, followed by a conaonant

h I and before a Towel, f).
UcappeUo.
HaEUaUcappeUol
S^ Sli^ore, ho 11 cappello.
II pane.
Uaale.
II aapone.

DBFIMITB ARTICLE, MASCULINE SINGULAR,
When the word begins with », followed by a consonant (or with x).

Norn,
Oen,
Dai,
Aec

AbL

the.
of the.
to the.

the.
from the.

The looking-glass.
The boot.
The sugar.

Norn,

lo.

Gen.

deUo.

Dai.

aUo.

Aee,

lo.

AM.

daUo.

Lo specchio.

Lo sti?ale.

Lo zucchero.

- speaking to their intimate friends. It is also used in all sorts of poetry. The
second person plural, roi, you, is used towards servants, but towards other
persons It is a mark of familiarity. The third person, eOo, she, is most gener •
ally used as the pronoun of address, and you may be sure never to give offence
in using it, either towards your superiors or inferiors. But as we must know
how to speak to our servants and intimate friends, as well as to other persons,
we have in the course of our method made use sometimes of the one, somo-
tlmes of the other, and sometimes of both ways ef expression, giving, however,
always the preference to EUa,

In speaking in the third person singuUr, EUa is used for tb^ subject or nomi-
native; Lei^ La, Le, for the other cases : and in speaking in the same manner
to more than one person, the plural of those pronouns must be made use o^
/la., JSZb or JSZtoio, for the subject or nominative, and Loro^ Lt^ for the other
cases. These pronouns being feminine, the adjective must needs agree with
them. Ex.: K EUa amUnia? or simply: l eontmta? are you satisfied?
(literally: Is she satiBfiedl) Come aia EUa? or simply: Come eta? how do
you do? (literally: how is she?) Le parlor I speak to you (literally: I speak
to her). £Sono euo (or U di LeS^ devoHeeimo eervo, I am your most devoted ser-
vant (literally : I am her most devoted servant). Ho veduio U di Lei (or U euo)
eignor fraietto, or else UfraieUo di V, S., I have seen yoor brother (literally :
I have seen her Mr. brother), i. e. the brother of your worship.

> When Signor Is followed by a noun, it has no e at the end, except when it
begins with s, followed by a consonant. Ex. : U Signer AleeeandrOf Mr. Alex-
aadert U Signer Conie, Count: a Signor Abate, Abbot; U Signore Si^om^
Hs. Stephen.

raunr imssov.

Oht. X When tii0 wmd b^gfaw with a TO^d th« Mme anide Is m
a^ with dda dilineaM ooljr, that for the letter o an apoetrophe C) i«

Abm the.

i^m. r

Cte, oftbe.

Gm. dOP.

ZXiC totfae.

Did. aiP.

Jo; the.

Aec r

AbL fimmthe.

JOL daOr.

Theooat

L*abito»UTeeaiiik.

The man.

L'qoiiio.

My hat, \ flmlocappeno.

06a. BL In Itafiaa the definite article pieeedea the poaaeariTe

Tow braad.
HaYo you my hati
Tea^ Sir, I have your hat

HaTo yo« your breadi

Tea, Sir, I haTe my bread.

HaTo yoo my aogarl

Tea^ Sir, I hare your eogar.

Ob». C. When the word beginning with ^ or with «^ followed bya
aanty la preceded by another word, the article is not io^ but tL

cndiLd]
{ B Toatio pane.
iHaEUa ilmiocappellol
( Ayete il mio cappeUo 1

SI, Signoie, ho U| fj^ I ۥ!

pello.« ■
CHaEQaUdiLei panel
( Avete il Tostro pane 1
SI, Signore, ho fl mio pane.

Si, Signore, ho H dl Lei snccheio.

WJdeh or what ?

I Quale for Chef

Obf: D, Whkk or what Is more generdly rendered by e^ when the nooii
iollowB Immediately, and by ^uale (plnal ^uaU) when it la separated from It*
Bnt whai is preferably rendered by che, and vkkh by fnolt (abridged
9m0.

Which hac have yont
I hare my hat

dnal cappeDo ha EDal
Ho il mio cappeUo.

* The first of fheae expresrfons is genendly used by weB-edncated persona.
< Tliat Is to my,Ucapp^ttodi F. &, the hat of your worridp.

* Rxi Eee§da^apade: quaUtdUU? Hera are two 8Wordl^ whidi wUI you
hmt itiaHfraq9€aHUMmioimUif Which oftheoa hooks an mfawl

nSBT IA880N.

Which bread hswe 7011?
I haT6 your bread.
Which Boap have youl
I have my eoap.
Which coat have youl
I have your coat.

Che pane ba EDal
Ho il di Lei pane.
Qua! aapone haEUa?
Ho il mio aapone.
Che abito ha Ella?
Ho il di Lei abito.

EXERCISE.

Have you the bread ?— Yes^ -Sir, I have the bread. — ^Have you
your bread ? — ^I have my bread. — ^Have you the salt 1 — I have
the salt. — Have you my salt? — ^Lhave your salt. — Have you the
soap.— Tes, Sir, I have the soap. — Have you your soap ? — I have
my soap. — ^Which soap have you ? — ^I have your soap. — ^Have
you the sugar? — ^I have the sugar. — ^Have you your jsugar? —
I have my sugar. — Which sugar have you ? — ^l have your sugar 7
— ^Which boot have you ? — ^I have my boot. — Have you my boot 7
^-I have your boot. — Which bread have you ? — ^I have my bread.
—Which salt have you? — ^I have your salt. — ^Have you the
looking-glass ? — ^I have the looking-glass. — ^Which looking-glass
have you ? — I have my looking-glass. — ^Have you my looking-
glass ? — ^I have your looking-glass. — ^Have you the coat ? — ^Yes,
Sir, I have the coat. — Which coat have you ? — I have my coat.
—Have you my coat ? — ^I have your coat.^

T Pupils desirouB of making rapid progreee may compose a great many
pbraaea, in addition to thoee we have giten them in the exercises } but they
must pronounce them aloud, as they write them. They should also make
separate lists of such substantives, adjectives, pronouns, and verba, as they
meet with in the course of the lessons, in order to be able to find those words
more easily, w<heB they require to refer to them in writing their lessons.

SECOND LESSON.
LezimM Seeonda.

It.

Lo (sometimes jQ.

Hmre you my hati

HaEUailmiocappeUof

Tea, Sir, I have it.

Si, Signore, V ho.

Good.

Buono.i

Bad.

Caaivo.

Pretty.

Vezzoeo, leggiadro, Tago, grailoso,

Uno.

Handsome, finoor beautiful.

BeUo.«

Ugly.

Brutto.

Old.

Vecchio.

The cloth.

11 panno.

Hie wood.

n legno.3

Tb^ thread.

11 refe.

11 fiizzoletto, il mocdeUno,

The waietcoat.

U gittbbetto.

The cotton.

11 cotone.

The dog.

Ucane.

The horse.

II cavallo.

HaTC yoa the fine dogl

HaEUaUbelcane?

Yes, Sir, I have it.

81, Slgnoie, V ho.

Nat.

Non.

I bare not.

Non bo.

I haTO not the bread.

Non ho il pane.

No, Sir.

No, Signore.

HaTe yon my old hat t

Avete 11 mio Tecchio cappeUo t

No, Sir, I have it not.

No, Signore, non V ho.

> Where two words happen to finieh with the same Yowel, we generally
Boppress, for the sake of euphony, that of the first word, as : buonpannOf good
doth ; huon giorno, good morning ; instead of : buono pannOf buono giamo. But
the suppression does not take place when the second word begins srith • fol-
lowed by a consonant

s Before a consonant (not before • followed by a consonant) iel is employed,

* Wood for fuel is femlnhie, and is rendered by laUgna.

SECOND I^ESSOn.

Which dog have you 1
I ha^ my pretty dog.
Whleh handkerchief have yon 7
I hKW your pretty cotton liandlter-
ohlel

Uual cane ha Ella 1

Ho il mio bei cane.

dual fazzoletto ha EUal

Ho U di Lei bel fazzoletto di

. tone.

Of.

\Di.

!V abito di panno.
nv

The doth ooat, , ._ . .,

I ( n veatito di panno.

Ob9. A, The preposition tU (like de in French) is always put between the
name of the thing and the name of the matter of which it is made, and this is
in Italian always the last

TIm cotton handkerchief.

Theguit.

The leather.

The gold.

The lead.

The iron.

The candlestick.
The wooden gun.
The leaden horse.
The golden candlestick.

II fazzoletto di cotone.

Lo schioppo.

II cuoio.

L' oro.

Ilpiombo.^

II ferro.

II candeliere.

Lo schioppo di legno.

II cavallo di plombo.

II candeliere d' oro.

Obt. B, The preposition di loses its i before a vowel, as may be seen iron
the example above.

Which gun have yon 1

I have the iron gun.

Which candlestick have you?

I have the fine golden candlestick.

Have you my fine wooden horse?

No, sir, I have it not.

Che schioppo ha EUa 1

Ho lo schioppo di ferro.

Che candeliere ha EUa?

Ho il bel candeliere d* oro.

Ha Ella 11 mio bel cavallo di legno 1

No. Signore, non 1* ho.

* It will not be amiss for those who are acquainted with the French and*
Latin languages to noticej that whenever the letter /is found In those languages
after btf, p, it is in Italian changed into u Ex. : —

Lead, French, plomb; Italian, piombo.

neur, . . fiore.

c blanc, . . bianco,

< blanche, . . bianca.

plain, . . pieno.

temple, templo.

Flower,

White,

Fun,
Temple,

THUS LESSON. 7

BXERCISE.
2.

Have you my fine hone ?— Yes, Sir, I have it. — ^Have you m^
old waistcoat 7 — No^ Sir, I have it not. Which dog have you ? —
I have your pretty d(^. — ^Have you my ugly handkerohief ?—
No, Sir, I have it not.— Have you the good cloth ? — ^Yes, Sir, 1
have it. — Have you my ugly gun ? — No, Sir, I have it not. —
Which gun have you ? I have your fine gun. — Which candle-
stick have you ? — ^I have the golden candlestick. — ^Have you my
golden candlestick ? — ^I have not your golden candlestick. — ^Which
boot have you ? — ^I have the leathern boot. — ^Have you my wooden
gun ? — ^No, Sir, I have it not. — Have you the good bread ? — ^I
have not the good bread. — ^Which waistcoat have you I — ^I have
my fine cotton waistcoat. — ^Which soap have yoy ? — ^I have my
old soap. — Which sugar have you ? — ^I have your good sugar. —
Which salt have you 7 — ^I have the bad salt.— Which coat have
you ? — ^I have my old cloth coat. — Have you my ugly wooden
candlestick? — THo, Sir, I have.it not. — Have you my leaden
gun 1 — ^No, Sir, I have it not. — ^Have you my pretty coat ? — ^No,
Sir, I have it not.— Which horse have you 7 — ^I have your iron
hmrse. — ^Ha^e you my fine hat ? No, Sir, I have it not.

THIRD LESSON.
Lezwne Terza.

Somethifigi any ikmg.

Htm Ton any difngl
lb. %i

iQualche earn,
Aleuna comu
c Ha Ella qnalehe ooni
i Ha Ella aleuna coaaY
( Ho qualehs coaa.
C Ho alcana eoaa.

THIRD LBSSON.

Nothing, or not any thing.

Orrfmplyi
NuUa (before the ye/b).
e Non ho niente.
) Non ho nulla.
i NoUa ho.

Obt. A, NuOa may simply be used fot notking, not any ttuMg: but
stands before the verb.

Nothing, not any thing.
I have nothing.

{ Nan nimte,

\ Non nuUa.

The wine.

My money (cash).

The silver (metal).

Of silver.
The silver candlestick.

The string.

The ribbon, the tape.
The golden ribbon.

The button.

Theco£^.

The cheese.

Are you hungry 1

I am hungry.
I am not hungry.'

Are you thirsty 1

1 am thirsty.
I am not thirsty.

Are you sleepy 7

r f>m sleepy.
I am not sleepy.

Something, or any thing good.
Have you any thing good 1

Nothing, or not any thing had.
Nothing, or not any thing had.
(have nothing good.

II vino.

II mlo denaro {or danaro).

L'argento.

D'argento

II candeliere d'argento.

II cordone.

II nastro.

U nastro d*oTo.

II bottone.

IlcafiB.
( II cacio.
I II formaggio.

JtHaEIla&me''
ct Avete &me7

t Ho fiime.

t Non ho fame.
(tHaEliasete?
it Avete sete?

t Ho sete.

t Non ho sete.
^t HaEIlasonno'?
c t Avete sonnol

t Ho sonno.

t Non ho sonno.

Qualche cosa di humo.

\ ^* ^^ I qualche cosa di baono t
i Avete )

{ Non—niente di eaitivo.
( Non — nulla di eattivo.

Ob suolt]
Nulla di cattivo (before the

verb).
r Non ho niente di buono.
^ Non ho nulla di buotto.
( Nulla ho di buono.

THiKD wtaaon. 0

•te. B, QiuUAe oqm^ fwnr-TnimU. mm— miaa, nloilf or nttflo, Mqntn 41
vben tliey are before an ad jectiye.

HaYe you any thing pvettgri
I haTe notUBg |int(y«

WhiUf

What hlTe you 1

What havo you goodi
I have the good coiiee.

Are you afraid 1

I am afraid.
I am not afraid.

Areyottwanni

lam wann.
I am not wann.
Areyoucoldl
lamaotoold.

CHaEUa)

i Arete jq^iilcfceooaadivagol

{ Non ho niente di vago.
i NuUa ho di leggiadro.

UChef
Icheeotaf
(Cosa?
rChehaEUal
^ChecoeahaEUal
CCoeahaEUa^

Che ha EUa di buono 1

Ho dd (aome) buon cafl9.
^tHaEllapaural
C t ATete paura7

t Ho paunu

t Non h6 paunu
{HaBlUcaldo?
( Avete calddl

t Ho caldo.

t Non ho caldo.

tHaEUafreddol

tNonhofroddo.

EXERCISE.

8.

Haye yeu my good wioe 7—1 haye it.— -Have you the good gold ?
—I haye it not. — ^Haye jrou the moEiey ? — ^I haye it.*— Haye you the
gold ribbon ?— No, Sir, I have it not. — ^Haye you your silver can-
dlestick 7— Yes, Sir, I have it.— What have you 7—1 have the
good cheese. I have my cloth coat.— Have you my silver button 7
— I have it not.— Which button have you 7-**I have your beautiful
gold button. — ^Which string have you 7 — ^I haVe the gold string.
— ^Have you any thing 7 — ^I have something. — ^What have you 7
— I have the good biwd. I have the good sugar.— Have you
any thing good 7 — ^I have nothing good. — ^Have you any thing
handsome 7 — ^I have nothing handsome. I have aemething ugly.
—What have you ugly 7 I have the ugly dog. — ^Have you any

I The third expreeaion is theleaat ooneet,and uaed only in ooBTeraatiott.

10

flOtlETV LI880N.

thing pretty ? — ^I have nothing pretty. I have «omddiing old.—
What have you old ? — I have the old cheese. — ^Are you hungry ?
— ^I am hwigry.-7-Are you thirsty ? — ^I am not thirsty.— Are you
sleepy ? — ^I am not sleepy. — ^What have you beautiful f — I have
your beautiful dog. — ^What have you bad ? — ^I have nothing bad.
—Are you afraid ? — ^I am not afraid. — ^Are you cold 7 — ^I am cold.
— ^Are you warm ? — I am not warm. — ^Which thread have ydu I
— I have your good thread. — ^Have you the fine horse ? — ^No, Sir,
I have it not. — Which boot have you ?-J have my old leather
boot. — Which handkerchief have you ? — ^I have your fine cotton
handkerchief. — Which waistcoat have you t — ^I have my pretty
doth waistcoat. — ^Which gun have you ? — ^I have your fine silver
gun. — ^Have you any thing pretty ? — ^I have nothing pretty. — ^Have
you any thing ?— ^I have nothing.

FOURTH LESSON.
Lezione QuarUu

rQuel.
Thai. < QueOo.

(QuelP.
Ob». Qti«{ is used before a consonant, qudlo before § followed by a consonaati
tod giidir before a vowel. Ex. :—

That book. I Quel Ubro.

That looking-glass. Q:aeUo specchio.

That coat. Qnell' aUto.

Ofike.
Of the dog.

Del (genitive before a conso-
nant).

BeUo ( before $, followed

by a consonant).

^Deir ( before a vowel).

Dele

FOITRTH LESffQU.

11

Orihebooc.
or thai

Dello MivBle

DelPablto.

DeVi

QftlwtaUor.

Orthabdko:.'

Qfthei

Dalfarnmlo.
Ddi

Thai or ike one.

TiM aeigiaioiii'i^ or Aal of 4ii Adgli-

boor.
The bakei't, or tbat of the baker.
The man'e, or that of the n^n.

Or.

HaTo yon my book or the neigh-

boin'e?
I Iwve the neighboiii's.
Have you my bread or that of the

bakerl
IhaTByoari.

I hBT« mttthe baker's.

OneOoddTidBOL

dneOo dd fimalo.
QneOo deir Qono. -

O.

(HaSDa)fl mio Bbn
( AYete ) viciiiol
HoqueUodd viciiio.

{HaEOa^ll mio

paac^ o qnelhi <

C Avete ) Ibnialol
HoUdlLet Ho fl

Non ho qQeDo dd fimalo.

Ho 11

Wiie or my own. i

or mine.

From mine. ANathe.

[Dmlo.

I Ddmlo.
I Ddmlo.

Tours.

OfyoiBB. Gtn,

From youm AJU^

The friend.

Of the friend.

That of the friend.

The stick.
Hie thimble.
TheooaL
My brother.

Qyostro. Dsno. UdiLeL ^

Dd Tostro. Dd soo. Dd di Let
Dd Tostro. Dd soo. Dd di Let

L'amlco.
DelFamioo.
Qneilo deir amico.

ni

nditali.

ncaiboiie.

MiofrateDo.

Aile. There is no article befon the poesesdvto pronova in Ihs
when it is immediately foDowed by a nomi of quality or kindred.

My dear brother. ; n,mio caro fimteUo.

My brother's, or that of my brother, t Qaello dl mio frateQa
Your friend's, or that of your IHend. I Qudlo del voetro (dl Ld)

13 FOURTH LBSSON.

EXERCISES.
4«

Have you thaVbook ? — ^No, Sir, I have not. — ^Which book have
you ? — ^I have that of the neighbour. — Have you my stick, or thai
of my friend ? — ^I have that of your frieodl— Have you my breao
or the baker's ? — ^I have the baker's. I have not yours. — ^Have
you the neighbour's horse. — ^No, Sir, I have it not. — ^Which horse
have you ? — ^I have that of the baker.«-Have you your thimble
or the tailor's. — ^I have my own.-^Have you the pretty gold string
of my dog? — ^I haye it not.— Which string have you ? — ^I have
my silver string. — ^Have you my gold button or the tailor's ? — ^I
have not yours ; I have the tailor's. — ^Have you my brother's coat
or yours ? — ^I have your brother's. — Which coffee have you ? — ^I
have the neighbour's. — ^Have you your dog or the man's ?— I have
the man's. — ^Have you your friend's money ?— I have it not.—
Are you cold ? — ^I am cold. — ^Are you afraid ? — ^I am not afraid.
— ^Are you warm ?— I am not warm. — ^Are you sleepy t — ^I am
not sleepy ; I am hungry. — ^Are you thirsty ? — ^I am not thirsty.

5.
Have you my coat or the tailor's ?— I have the tailor's. — ^Have
you my gold candlestick or that of the neighbour? — ^I have yours.
— ^Have you your coal or mine ? — ^I have mine. — ^Have you your
cheese or the baker's? — ^I have my own.— -Which cloth have
you ? — ^I have that of the tailor. — Which boot have you ? — I have
my own- — ^Have you the old wood of my brother ? — ^I have it not.
— ^Which soap have you ? — I have my brother's good soap. — ^Have
you my wooden gun, or that of my brother ? — ^I have yours.—*
Which waistcoat have you ? — ^I have my friend's cloth waistcoat.
— ^Have you your leather boot or mine ? — ^I have not yours ; I '
have my own. — ^What have yoji ? — ^I have nothing. — Have you
any thing ? — ^I have nothing.— Have you any thing good ? — ^I have
nothing good. — ^Have you any thing old ?-:-I have nothing old.-^
What have you pretty ? — ^I have my friend's pretty dog. — ^Hav«
you my handsome or my ugly stick ? — I have your ugly stick.-—
Are you hungry or thirsty ?

FIFTH LESSON.
liezione Quinia.

The merchant.
Of the shoemaker.
The boy.
The knife.
The spoon.

n mercante.
Del calzoUk).
nragazzo.'
HoQlteUo.
U cncchiaio.

HaTe yon the merchant's stick or
yours.

Neither.

Nor.
I have neither the merchant's stick

nor mine.
Are you hnngry or thirsty 1
lam neither hungry nor thirsty.
Are you warm or cold 1
I am neither warm nor cold.
HaTe you the wine or the bread?
I tiare neither the wine nor the

bread.
I have neither yours nor mine.
I have neither my thread nor the

tailor's.

Avete il bastone del mercante, h ■
▼ostio?

Ne.

Non ho il bastone del mercantCi nd II

mio.
t Avete iamei o sete?
t Non ho fame, nd sate,
t Avete caldo, o freddo7
t Non ho caldo, ni freddo.

Avete il vino, o 11 pane?

Non ho II vino, ni II pane.

Non ho il Tostro^ nd il mio.
Non ho 11 mio refe, nd quelle del
sartore.

The cork.
The corkscrew.
The umbrella.
The honey.
The nail.
The iron nail.
The hammer.
The carpenter.
The Frenchman.

Whathav*? yfu?

or.
What is the matter with you?

11 luracciolo.

II tiiatnracciolaL

L' ombrello, 1' ombreUa (i

II miele.

11 chiodo.

n chiodo di lerro.

11 marteUo.

11 legnaiuolo.

nPrancese.

rChecosaavate?

KCosaavete?

CCheavete?

14 7IPTH LB8S0N.

] { Nan — nienU (menie).
Nothing. I I jvim-miBa {nulla).

I haTe nothing, or < t Non ho nlente.

Nothing \B the matter with me. i ^ "^ ^on ho nulla.

[8 any thing the matter with you 7 j ♦ -^▼e^ qualche cosa 1

Nothing i. the matter with me. J l^''^ ^^ °f*'','*-„ , ,

I ( Non ho nulla (nulla ho).

EXERCISES.
6.
I am neither hungry nor thirsty. — Have you my boot or the
shoemaker's 1 — I have neither yours nor the shoemaker's. — ^Have
you your knife or the boy's ? — I have neither mine nor the boy's. —
Which knife have you ? — I have that of the merchant. — ^Have you
my spoon or the merchant's ? — ^I have neither yours nor the mer
chant's ; I have my own. — Have ypu the hotoey or the wine ? — f
have neither the honey nor the wine. — Have you your thimble or
the tailor's 1 — I have neither mine nor the tailor's. — Have you your
corkscrew or mine ? — ^I have neither yours nor mine ; I have the
merchant's. — ^AVhich cork have you ? — ^I have the neighbour's. —
Have you the iron or the silver nail ? — ^I have neither the iron nor
the silver nail ; I have the golden nail. — Are you warm or cold ?
— ^I am neither warm nor cold ; I am sleepy. — ^Are you afraid ?—
I am not afraid. — Have you pny hammer or the carpenter's ? — I
have neither yours nor the carpenter's. — Which nail have you ?—
1 have the iron nail. — Which hammer have you 1 — ^I have the
wooden hammer of the carpenter. — Have you any thing ? — ^I have
something. — What have you? — ^I have something fine. — What
have you fine 1 — I have the Frenchman's fine umbrella. — ^Have
you the cotton or the thread tape ? — ^I have neither the cotton nor
the thread tape.

7.

Have you your gun or mine 1 — I have neither yours nor mine.
— ^Which gun have you ? — ^I have my friend's. — Have you my
cotton handkerchief or that of my brother ? — ^I have neither yours
nor your brother's. — Which string have you ? — ^I have my neigh
hour's thread string. — ^Have yon the book of the Frenchman or
that of the merchant ? — I have neither the Frenchman's nor the

SIXTH LESSON.

15

mendiant's. — Whidi book have you ? — ^I have my owh. — ^What
is the matter with you 1 — ^Nothing. — Is any thing the matter with
you ? — ^Nothing is the matter with me. — ^Are you oold ? — I am not
cold ; I am warm. — Have you the cloth or the cotton ?— I have
neither the cloth nor the cotton. — Have you any thing good or bad ?
—I have neither any thing good nor bad. — ^What have you ? — I
have nothing.

SIXTH LirSSON
Lezione Sesta.

The bee( the oz.
ThebiBcuit
Qf the captain.
Of the cook.

Havell

You have.

You have not.*
Ami hungry 1
Yon are hungry,
You are not hungry.
Amlafraidl
Yon are afraid.
You are not afraid.

Amlaahamedl
You are not ashamed.

Are you I

I am yfhfl*nf»d
AmlWTongl
Ton are wrong.

Yon are not wrong.
Amirightl
Yon are tight
Vot an not right

II manzo, U bue.
n biscotto.
Del capitano
Del cuoco.

Hoiol

ATete. Ella ha.

Nonavete. EUanonha.

tHofameiol

t Avete fame. Ella ha fiune.

t Non aTete fame. Ellanonha&me.

tHopauraiol

t ATete paura. Ella ha panra.

tNon aTete paura. Ella non ha
paura.

t Ho Tergogna io7
1 1 Non aTete Tergogna.
! t Ella non ha Tergogna.
jt Ha Ella Tergogna 1
i t ATete Tergogna. ^

t Ho Tergogna.

tHotortoiol

t ATete torto. EUa ha torto.
1 1 EUa non ha torto.
! t Non aTete torto.

t Ho io regional
1 1 EUa ha ragione.
i t ATete ragione.

t Ella non ha ragione.
Non aTete ragione.

i;

16

SIXTH LESSON.

UavalOMiudll
Touhaveit.
You haTe it noL

llave X any thing goodi

YovL have nothing good.

ITou have neither any thing good nor
bad.

What have II

Have I the carpenter'e hammer?
You have it not.
Have you it 7
C have it not
Have lit?

The butter.
The mutton.
The milk.
The penknife.

Which one ?
That of the captain, or the captain'a
That of the cook, or the cook'e.

The fine one.

The ugly one.

\m. 1 right or wrong?

Tott are neither right nor wrong.

iTou are neither hungry nor thirsty,
c^ou are neither afraid nor aehamed.

BoioUchiodol

L'avete. EUa lo ha (lo ha or I* ha>
Non r avete. Ella non lo ha (or
non r ha).

Ho io qualche ooea di buonol
( Ella non ha ) niente (nulla) di buo-
c Non avete ) no.
( Ella non ha ) niente di buono nd di
\ Non avete > cattivo.

<Chehoio1
c Checosahoiol

Ho io il martello del legnaiuolo 1

Non r avete. Non 1' ha.

L' avete voil LohaEUa?

Non r ho.

L'hoiol

II burro, il butlrro..
II caatrato (roontone).
11 latte.
II temperino.

Quale f

Quello del eapltano.
Quello del cuoco.
II bello.
11 brutto.

t Ho ragione, o torto 1
^ t Ella non ha nd ragione, nd torto.
( t Non avete nd ragione, nd torto.
^ t EUa non ha nd fame, nd aete.
c t Non avete nd fiime, xA aete.
c t Ella non ha nd paura, xA vergogna*
{ t Non avete nd paura, nd vergogna.

Have I your butter or mine 7
Vou have naither youra nor mine.

Ho il voatro butirro, o il mio7
( EUa non ha nd U di Lei, nd il mio.
c Non avete nd il voatro, nd ii mio.

EXERCISES.
8.
I have neither the baker's dog nor that of my friend. — Are you
ishamed I— I am not ashamed. — Are you afraid or ashamed ? — ^I

SIXTH LSSSON* 11

am neither afraid nor ashamed. — Have you my knife ?— Which ?
— ^The fine one. — ^Have you my beef or the cook's? — ^I have
neither yours nor the cook's. — Which have you*? — I have that of
the captain. — ^Have I your biscuit? — ^You have it not.'— Am I
hungry or thirsty ? — ^You are neither hungry nor thirsty. — Am I
warm or cold ? — ^You are neither warm nor cold. — Ami afraid ?
— ^You are not afraid. You are neither afraid nor ashamed.—
Have I any thing good ? — You have nothing good.*— »What have
1 1 — ^You have nothing. — ^Which penknife have I ? — ^You have that
of the Frenchman. — ^Have I your thimble or that of the tailor ?-*
You have neither mine nor that of the tailor. — Which one have I ?
— ^You have your friend's. — ^Which umbrella have I? — ^You have
mine. — ^Have I the baker's good bread? — ^You have it not. —
Which money have I ? — ^You have your own. — Have you my iron
gun ? — ^I have it not. — Have I it ? — ^You have it. — Have I your
mutton or the cook's ? — ^You have neither mine nor the cook's.—
Have I your knife ? — ^You have it not. Have you it ?— I have it.
— ^Which biscuit have I ? — ^You have that of the captain. — ^Which
cloth have I ? — ^You have the merchant's. — Have you my coffee
or that of my boy ? — ^I have that of your good boy. — Have you
your cork or mine ? — ^I have neither yours nor mine. — What have
you ? — ^I have my brother's good candlestick.

9.
Am I right ? — ^You are rights — Am I wrong ? — ^You are not
wrong. — ^Am I right or wrong ? — ^You are neither right nor wrong ;
you are afraid. — ^You are not sleepy. — ^You are neither warm nor
cold. — ^Have I the good coffee or the good sugar? — ^You have
neither the good co^e nor the good sugar. — ^Have I any thing
good or bad ? — ^You have neither any thing good nor bad. — ^What
have I ? — ^You have nothing. — ^What have I pretty ? — ^You have my
friend's pretty dog, — ^Which butter have I ? — ^You have that of
your cook. — ^Have I your corkscrew or the merchant's ? — ^You
have neither mine nor the merchant's. — Which milk have you ?
— ^I have that of the Frenchman. — ^Which penknife have you ?—
I have the silver penknife of my neighbour. — Which have I ?—
You have that of the old baker. — ^Which have you ? — I have that
of my old tailor. — What is the matter with you ?— I am afraid. —
Have I any thing"? — ^You have nothing.

SEVENTH LESSON.
Lezione Settimct,

Who?
Whohasi
Who has the knife 7
The man has the knife.
The i|ian has not the knife.
Whohasitl.
The boy has it.
The boy has it not

The chicken.
The chest, the trunk.
The bag, the sack.
The ship.
The yonng man.
The youth.

Chi?
Chi ha 1
ChihaUcolteUol
L' uomo ha il coltello.
L* uomo non ha il coltello.
Chilohal
Lo ha il ragazzo.
I] ragazzo non V ha.

II poUastro (il poUo).

11 baule (11 forziere).

II sacco.

11 bastimento.

II giovane (11 giovine).

L' adolescente (il giovinetto).

He.

{EgU (for persons).
Esso (for persons and for
things).
Ei or e' (also for persons).
Ob», A. EgU is used for persons, CMofor persons and for things, and e< or e*
for persoaS) but not generally before a vowel or before s followed by a conso-
nant.

Ha has.
He has the chest
He has not the chest.

He has it.
He has it not

EgUha(essoha,egU&i)

Egli ha U baule.

Ei (e*) non ha il baule.
I E^ (esso) r ha.
i Ei (e*) r ha.

Ei(e')nonrha.

I The letter h is never pronounced in Italian. What proves this is, that il
may be entirely omitted, and a grave accent be put In its stead on the three first
persons singular and third person plural of the verb overs, to have ; and in-
stead of Ao^ I have ; ha^ thou hast ; Ao, he (she) has ; kanno^ they have, we may
write : d, dj, d, itnno. This kind of orthography has been followed by 3Uta$'
tdcto, but is not generally approved.

SBVSIITH LBSaOM.

Ifl

Barnhbl

Has he tlw knife 1
Has the man 1
Has thefiiendl
Haathebakerl
Has the young manl

rHaegli?

^HaeMol

^Ha?
HaegliUcoltellol
HaP uomol
Ha V amicol
Hailfomaiol
HailgiOTanel

The RngHahtnan-

i L' Ingleae.

Is the man hungry 1 jt

£fe is hungry. ; t

He is not hungry. i t

He is neither hungry nor thirsty. , t
Is your brotlier warm or ooldl '. t

Is the man afraid or ashamed 7 1 1

Is the man right or wrong 1 t

Has tlie boy the hammer of tlie car-
penter 1
He has it.
He has it not.
Has the baker it 1
What has my friendl

HiSf her, Iters.
Has the servant his tnmk or minel

He has his own.

Somebody or any body, \
wme one or any one (indefinite /
pronouns). )

Has any body my bookl
Somebody has it
Who has my stick 1

Ha lame P nomo9

Ha fame.

Non lia lame.

Non ha ni fame, nd sete.

Ha caldo o freddo ii di Lei fimteib?

Ha paura o veigogna P nomo 7

Ha ragione o torto V uomo 1

Ha il ragaxzo il marteUo del le>

gnaiuolol
L'ha.
Non P ha.
L' hailfomaiol
Che ha il mio amicol

Tlie rice.

Uriso.

The countryman, the peasant.

11 oontadino, il pi

Tbeserrant.

11 serrltore. il ser

His or her penknife.

11 sno lemperino.

His or her dog.

11 suo cane.

The bird.

L' uccello.

His or her foot

Il8nopiede(pid).

His or hereye.

nsttooochio.

His money.

n sno denaro.

The tea.

ntd.

Hsuo.

Ha il serrltore il sno fondera^ o II

miol
Ha U sno (ha U suo propiio).

Qualcheduno, qualcunOf or
oZctcfto, iahmo.

Ha qnakmno il mio libro 1
Quaidieduno P ha.
Chi ha II mio bastonsi

20 SBV£NTH LB880N.

No onCi nobody, not any body.
Sohody has your stick.

Nabody has It

Nesauno, niuno, venmo.
Neasono ha il vostio bascone.
r NessuDo 1* ha.
< Niuno V ha.
^ Veruno 1' ha.

Ob9. B, In using aietmo for no mu, nobody^ noi any body^ It mutt always be
accompanied by non; but fuwtmo, nttoM, and venma, require nm only when
they follow the verb.

Who lias your gun 1
Nobody has it.

ChihaUdlLeischioppol
' Alcuno non 1' ha.

Nonl* hanessuno.

Non V ha niuno.

Non r ha Teruno.

Non r ha aleuno.
I Nessuno 1* ha.

EXERCISBS.

10.

Who has my trunk.?*-rThe boy has it. — Is he thirsty or hungry 1
—He is neither thirsty nor hungry. — Haa the man the chicken 1
— He has it. — Who has my waistcoat ? — The young man has it. —
Has the young man my ship 7 — ^The young man has it not.—
Who has it?— The captain has it.— What has the youth ?— He
has the fine chicken. — ^Has he the knife ? — He has it not. — ^Is he
afraid ? — He is not afraid. — ^Is he afraid or ashamed ? — He is
neither afraid nor ashamed. — ^Is the man right or wrong ? — ^He is
neither right nor wrong. — ^Is he warm or cold ?^He is neither
warm nor cold. — Who has the countryman's rice? — My servant
has it. — ^Has your servant my penknife or his ? — He has neither
yours nor his. — Which penknife has he ? — ^He has that of his neigh-
bour ? — ^Who has my old boot ?— Your shoemaker has it. — What
has your friend ? — He has his good money. — Has he my gold ? —
He has it not. — Who has it ? — ^The baker has it. — ^Has the baker
my bird or his ? — ^He has his. — Who has mine ? — ^The carpenter
has it. — ^Who is cold ? — ^Nobody b cold. — ^Is any body warm ?—
Nobody is warm. — Has any body my chicken ? — Nobody has it.
—Has your servant your waistcoat or mine ? — He has neither
yours nor mine. — Which has he ? — ^He has his own.

aEVBHTH LB8SOII. 21

11.

Ha8 any ooe my gun ? — No one bas it. — ^Has the youth my
book ?— He has it not.^-What has he ? — ^He has nothing. — ^Has
he the hammer or the nail ? — He has neither the hammer nor the
nail. — ^Has he my umbrella or my stick ? — ^He has neither youi
umbrella nor your stick. — ^Has he my ooflfee or my sugar ? — ^He
has neither your coflfee nor your sugar ; he has your honey.—
Has the boy my brother's biscuit or that of the Frenchman ?*->
He has neither that of your brother nor that of the Frenchman ;
he has his own. — ^Have I your bag or that of your friend I — ^You
have neither mine nor my friend's ; you hayeyour own. — ^Who
has the peasant's bag ? — ^The good baker has it.-«Who is afraid ?
— ^Thc tailor's boy is afraid. — ^Is he sleepy t — ^He is not sleepy. —
Is he cold or hungry I — ^He is neither cold nor hungry. — ^What is
the matter with him I — Nothing. — ^Ha« the peasant my money ?
— ^He has it not. — ^Has the captain (got) it ? — ^He has it not ? —
Who has it ? — ^Nobody has it. — ^Has your neighbour any thing
good ? — ^He has nothing good. — ^What has he ugly I — ^He has no-
thing ugly. — ^Has he any thing ?— He has nothing.

12.

Has the merchant my cloth or his ? — ^He has neither yours noi
his. — ^Which cloth has he ? — ^He has that of my brother^-^Wbich
thimble has the tailor I — ^He has his own. — ^Has your brother his
wine or the neighbour's ? — ^He has neither his nor the neighbour's.
— ^Which wine has he? — He has his own. — ^Has any body m}
gold ribbon? — Nobody has it. — ^Who has my silver string?—
Tour good boy has it. — Has he my wooden or my leaden horse ?
— ^He has neither your wooden nor your leaden horse ; he has his
friend's leathern horse. — ^Is any body wrong? — Nobody is wrong.
— ^Who has the Frenchman's good honey ? — ^The merchant has it.
— Has be it ? — ^Yes, Sir, he has it. — ^Are you afraid or ashamed ?
— I am neither afraid nor ashamed. — ^Has your cook his mutton ?
— ^He has it. — ^Have you my bread or my cheese ?— I have neither
your bread nor your cheese. — ^Have I your salt or your butter ? —
Tou have neither my salt nor my butter. — ^What have I ? — You
have yoor mutton. — ^Has any body my gold button ? — No one has
it.— Who has< the tea ? — ^Which ? — ^Mine. — ^Your servant hm it.
—Which tea has the Englishman ?— He has his own.

EIGHTH LESSON.
* Leziane Oitava.

Tlio tailor.

The tne.

His looking-glais.

HiamattraM.

The atrangar (the foreigner).

Theforaigner.

The garden.

The gloTe.

Thia or that ox,
Thia m- that hay.
Thia or that boot.

Thia or that friend.
Thia or tliat man.
Thia or that aaa.

TJttfbook*
Thai hook.

Have yon thia or thatbookl
I have tliia one, I haTo not tliat <

limaiinaio.

L'albero.

II ano apecehii.

n ano materaaao.

Lo atraniero, lo atraaiem.

li foreatiero.

ngiardino.

llgnanta

Qneato, o quel hue.
Queato, o quel fleno.
Questo, o quello ativale.

dueato, o qneir amico.
Queato, o quell' udmo.
Ctueato, 0 quell' aaino.

Quegio Ubro (coiuto lihro)»
Quel Ubro.

Ha Ella queato Ubro o quellol
Ho queato, non ho quello.

0BCLEN8ION OF THE DEMONSTRATXYE PRONOUNS.
Qvesto (coiesto), queUo.

XASCTTLnrB

SINGULAR.

^^'^ X dnaato^ thia.

duellOb

that.

Gen. Di qneato, of thia.
Dot Aqueato, tothia.
IM. Da queato, from thia.

Di quello,
AqueUo,
Da quello^

of that

to that.

from that.

Qb9, A. DemonatiatiTe pronouns are never preceded by an artide, pieptil
liona being the worda employed before tham.

BMBTB LBS80N.

38

This one. j Questo {coieslo).

That one. \ QueUo.

Ob». B. Q^uto dedgnates tlw object near the person who tpeaki^ cslflte
the object distant from the person who q>eaki, and near the person spoken to ;
but quills diiaignalwi at the same time the object distant from both the person
who speska and that spoken to.

Hare I this or that?

Von have thl% you have not that

Hm the man this hat or that 1

Ho io qnesto o qnellot
EUa ha qnesto^ non qneUo.
Ha P nomo qnesto
qneDo?

But.
He has not this, but that
He has thU^ hnt not that.

Ma.

Non ha qnesto, ma qneDo.
Ha qnesto^ iha non qneOoi

The note, the billet, or the ticket.
The granary.
The con.

I]blgttetto(Tigttetto).

Ilgrsnaio.

Ilgrano.

Have you this note or that ?
\ have not this, bnt that. j

I have this, but not that. |

Has the neigfabonr this I66king-glass '

or that?
He has this, but not that. I

Ha EUa qnesto biglietto, o qpieBol
Non ho qnesto, ma ho queOo.
Ho qnesto, ma non ho qnello.
Ha 11 Tidno qnesto

qnello 1
Ha questo^ ma non ha qnello.

Th» horse-shoe. | H ferro da esTdki

iM*. C. ITie preposition da is made nse of between t
when the latter expnsses the nse of the Ibnner.

The wine-bottle.
The oil-bottle.
'AemUk-pot.
The bottle of wine.
The botOe, the oiL

Hfiasco* dsTino
n fiasco da olio,
n Tsso da kite,
n fiasco di Tino.
U fiasco, r oUo.

That or which (reladve pro-j

noun). I

Have yon the noia which my brother j

haal I

I have not the note wUcfa your bro- ■

thsrhas? |

Have yon the horse wUch I have 1
t have tha horse wlileh yon have. '

\U quale.
HaEDa il bigUetlo che ha nfofra-

teilol
Non ho U Uglietto che Ite il dl Lei

fimtrilo.
Ha EDa HcavaOo che Io hoi
Ho il cavaUo che ha Y. 8, oche vol

arete.

(•N.B. The word ftsttfgflM la nsed also instead of /k«B.l

24 BIOBTH LBSaOlf

Thai wMck, the one which.

I haya not that which yon have.
I have not that which he haa.
Have I the glove which you havel
Von have not the one which I have.

{ quel che,
I QueUo che.
Non ho quelle che ha EUa.
Non ho qoeUo che egli ha.
Ho io 11 guanto che ha Voasignoiia I
Non avete quello che ho io.

EXERCISES.
13.

Which hay has the stranger ? — ^He has that of the peasant. — .
Has the sailor my looking-glass ? — He has it not. — ^Have you this
glove or that ? — I have this. — Have you the hay of my garden or
Uiat of yours 1 — ^I have neither that of your garden nor that of
mine, but I have that of the stranger. — Which glove have you ?
— ^I have that of the sailor. — ^Have you his mattrass ? — ^I have it.
— Which thread has the sailor ? — He has his own. — ^Who has my
good note ? — ^This man has it. — ^Who has that gun 1 — ^Your friend
has it. — ^Have you the com of your granary or that of mine ? — I
have neither tl^at of your granary nor that of mine, but I have that
of my merchant. — Who has my glove ? — That servant has it. —
What has your servant ?-^He has the tree of this garden. — ^Has
he that man's book ? — ^He has not the book of that man, but he
has that of this boy. — ^Has the peasant this or that ox ? — He has
neither this nor that, but he has the one which his boy has.— ^Has
this ass his hay or that of the horse ? — He has neither his nor that
of the horse. — Which horse has this peasant 1 — He has that of
your neighbour. — Have I your note or his ? — ^You have neither
Mine nor his, but you have that of your friend. — Have you this
aorse's hay ? — I have not his hay, but his shoe. — ^Has your brother
my note or his 1 — He has neither yours nor his own, but he has
the sailor's. — Has the foreigner my bird or his own ? — He has
that of the captain. — ^Have you the tree of this garden ? — I have
it not. — ^Are you hungry or thirsty ? — ^I am neither hungry nor
thirsty, but I am sleepy.

Has the sailor this bird or that 1 — ^He has not this but that.~>
Haa your servant this stick or that ? — He has this, but not that.*

BIOBTH LESSON. 25

Has your oook this chicken or that? — ^He has neither this nor
that, but he has that of his neighbour. — Am I right or wrong ? —
You are neither right nor wrong, but your good boy is wrong. —
Have I this knife or that 1 — ^You have neither this nor that. —
What have I ? — ^You have nothing good, but you have something
bad. — ^Have you the chest which I have ? — I have not that which
you have. — ^Which horse have you ? — ^I have the one which your
brother has. — Have you the ass which my friend has ? — ^I have
act that which he has, but I have that which you have. — Has your
friend the looking-glass which you have or that which I have ? —
He has neither that whidi you have nor that which I have, but he
has his own.

15.

Which bag has the peasant ? — He hfis the one which his boy
has. — ^Have I your golden or your silver candlestick ?— You have
neither my golden nor my silver candlestick, but you have my
iron candlestick. — ^Have you my waistcoat or that of the tailor?
— ^I have neither yours nor that of the tailor. — Which have you ?
— I have that which my friend has. — ^Are you cold or warm ?^-
I am neither cold nor warm, but I am thirsty.-— Is your friend
afraid or ashamed ? — ^He is neither afraid nor ashamed, but he is
sleepy. — ^Who is wrong ) — ^Your friend is wrong. — ^Has any one
my umbrella ? — ^No one has it. — ^Is any one ashamed I — No one
IS ashamed, but my friend is hungry. — Has the captain the ship
which you have or that which I have ? — ^He has neither that which
you have, nor that which I have. — Which has he ?— He has that
of his friend. — ^Is he right or wrong ? — He is neither right nor
wrong. — ^Has the Frenchman any thing good or bad ? — ^He has
aeither any thing good nor bad, but he has something pretty. —
What has he pretty ?— He has the pretty looking-glass. — ^Has he
(he good biscuit ? — ^He has it not, but his neighbour has it.— Has
the Englishman the wine-bottle 1 — ^He has the wine-bottle, but he
has not the bottle of wine.'-*Which shoe {Ujtrro) has your baker ?
—-He has that of die horse. — ^Has he my oil-bottle ?— He has not
your oil bottle, but he has your milk-pot.

NINTH LESSON.
L^zume Nona.

DECLENSION OF THE DEFINITE ARTICLE MASCULINE IN
THE PLURAL

(when the word begins with a consonant, except « followed by anotlier

consonant).

PLVBAU

PLVBAUB.

Mateolino.

JVbm.

the.

Norn.

I.

Gm.

« of the.

Gen,

Deiorde>.

Dot.

to the.

Dot.

Ai or a'.

Aee.

the.

Aee.

I.

Abl

from the.

AbL

Daiorda*.

TBS POBMATXON OP THE PLITBAL.

Rule. Masculine nonns and adjectives, whaterer may be iheir
ehange it in the ploral into i. Ex.

The hats.
The books.
The good books.
Of the books.
The sticks.
Of the sticks.
The thimbles.
The dogs.
The brothers.
The merchants.
The horses.
The neighbonrs.
The good neighbonrs.
Of the neighbours.
The peasants.
The servants.

I cappelli.

lUbxi.

I buoni Ubri.

DelUbri.

Ibastoni

Dei bastoni.

Iditall.

IcanL

I fratelli.

I mercanti.

IcavalU.

Ividni.

I buoni vldnl.

DeividnL

I rustici, contadini.

I domestici, i servl

NUfTH L88SON.

sn

DSCLKNaOK OF TBM DBFimTE ABTICLE MASCVLUnS IH TRiS FLVRAL
(wlien th« word begins with • followed by a eouommt, or wldi a Towai).

rLUEAL.

Nam, the.

(Ten. of the.

Ai<. to the.

Aee, the.

.d&L from the.

ThegmftB.

Theboota.

The good boota.

Tbofrlaxida.

Thei

Hie coats.

FUiBAia Mascot nio
Nam, gll
Gau degIL
IXrf. aglL
Aee. gIL

AbL dai^

Gttaehioppi.

61i stiTsIL

I bnoni stiTaH.

GliamlcL

Oli ombreHi, le ombidle.

CHi aMtl, i Teatlti, le ▼eatiiasola.

ObB. Ju When the word begina with i, an apostrophe la sabatitatad hi the
article g^li, for the letter «, thna :

^«»- J the Englishmen. ^^"^?GP1

Act, > '
Cfen, of the
DaL tothe
ilM. from the

Aee.
Cfen.
DaL

AbL

DegPlngiesL

AgTIngiesL

DsgPIngleaL

Fnsr ExcBmoir.^An notms ending in the singnlar in e, monoajrflableay
and noma haring the accent on the last rowel, aa alao words ending in <e^ do
not change their termination in the phmd. Ex.

flSng'. Fbir.

Sbigulare,

Pbtrtdc

nieking. ThekingsL

lira

lie.

The loot. Thefiset

npid.

Iptt.

The tea. Teaa.

ntd.

It«,

The coffee. Cofieea.

UcaflS.

IcaA

Tliebailifi: ThebalUfia.

Upodeati.

Ipodeati.

Sscom> ExcsmoR.— Noma ending

i; in CO and go, generally insert is

ploral the letter ik. Ex.

The cook. The cooka.

Ilcooco.

lenochL

The bag. The baga.

liaaoeo.

IsaccfaL

Tbeinn. Theinna.

L'albergo.

OttalberillL

Thedialogoe. The dialognea.

Udialogo.

1 dialog

The German. The Gennanai

BTedeaco.

ITedeadii.

The Pole. The Polea.

SPolaooo.

IPobecfaL

The fixe. Tbefiiea.

nfooco.

IfooehL

M

HINTH LS8S01I.

Tubs EzoBVTiow.^Nouni ending in ia, preeeded by a Towel, lotft tht ktiM

9 In the plural, and those in which io is preceded by a consonant, change te
the plural io Into iO Ex.

The baker.
The tpoon.
• The shoemaker.
The bookseller.
Th» uncle.
The temple.
The principle.

The bakers.
The spoons.
Thp shoemakers.
The booksellers.
The uncles.
The temples.
The principles.

II fomaio
II cuccKiaio.
II calxohdo.
II Ubraio.
Lo zio.
U tempio.
U principio.

Ifomai.
I cucehial.
IcaliolaL
lUbrai.
GUzU.
I tempU.
I principii.

06i. B. When, however, the final syllable to Is preceded bye, eft, g*, gi^ It
may in the plural be chan^ merely into i. Ex.

The looking-glass.

The eye.
The cheese.
The son.

The looking-

gUsses.
The eyes.
The cheeses.
The son&

Lo specchio. GHi speochi.

L' occhio.
II formaggio.
II Qglio.

GUoccht

Iformaggi.

IfigU.

FovnYK EzcxrrioH.— The following few words form their plural quite irra-
gutarly, Tis.

The man. The men. i L' uomo. OU nomini.

God. The gods. ' Dio. * Gli* Del.

The ox. The oxen. Ibue. Ibuoi.

Cbt. There are some masculine nouns terminated in e^ which in the plural
take the feminine termination a, together with the feminine article,* and othera
also in o, which in the plaral may take either the masculine article and termi-
nation, or the feminine ; we diall speak of them hereafter.*

1 Formerly these nouns tooki ^^ ^^ plural, but the generality of modem
authors have entirely rejected this letter from the alphabttt. The reason is that
it is pronounced like ^ and whenever it occurs In the formation of the phual, two
i's are substituted for it.

* Dio is the only word In Italian beginning with « consonant, which In tho
phiral takes the article gU instead oft.

* Nouns terminated in a, t; ti, with a few exceptions (of which hereafter), and
when they do not represent male individuals, or dignities, or professions be
lonjisg to mals individuals, are feminine ; all others are generally masculine.

* The prlnc^ are :—

Deentlnaio, the hundred.

ndgiio,

theeye-Ud.

n migliaio,

the thousand.

nmigUo,

the mile.

nmoggio,

a measure.

Lo stale,

the bushel.

Dpalo,

the pair.

V novo,

the 09.

Plur.

Lecentinaia.
Ledglia.
Lemlgliaia.
Lemiglia.
Le moggia.
Le stale.
Lepaia.
La nova.

NINTH LSSBON.

Hyjpotang-climwii
Your k>okki£-«laMes.
Have you my small looking-gbMesI

I bare not your sman looUng-glaBsea,
but I bare your hxge looking-

I mieispeediL

I Toatri ipfPcW

Ha EUa i mid piceoUB apeecUt
fNon ho i dl Lei pleeoll, ma 1 di Ld
J grandi specdiL
jNoaboidiLd pkeoB ■paecUi, aa
L ho benri, i gmiidL

Great, brge. . Gnode.' •

Little, small. I Piccolo.

06t. C. 6^nim^gr«a<; loses the syHablad^ before a oooaonant (not bcfines
followed by a consonant), and for the letter « before a vowd an apostropba is '
snbstitnted. Before a noon in the phml, beginning with a vowel, grmdimmfi
be used.

Thehrgehgt.
The laige coat.

n gran cappdh-
n gruid' abito.

Mtm

eibis.

My ermine.
Your— yours.
His. *
Our— ours.
Your— yours.
Their— theiis.

Dmio.

IlTOstro.

11 sao.

Dflostro.

Ilrostro.

nioco.

Pftrale.
ImieL

iTOSCri.

Isooi^.
Inoatri.
IvvsdL
lioio.

His books, looUng-glssses, eoats.
Our books, looUng-gMses^ coats.
Hieir booksi looking-glasses, eoata.

i snoi Ubri, speochi, aUlL
I notM Obri, apsedtf, tUtL
I Imo libri, ^pecdtf, abttl*

Which books, looking-glasses, eoatol
Which?

Qnali (quel, qua*X Hbri, speochl.

abiai
Qus]i(qualy<iua')7

These er tliose books,
niese or those coats.
Tliese or those looking-glssses.

Qud (or que*) Hbri.
Que^aUtL
Que^ qiecdiL

• There is in Italian that partienbri^, that the significatioiM>r nouns can bs
angraented or diminished by the addition of certain syllabies called augmentn-
Itres and dimlnntiTes (of wliich hereafter ; see Lesson X.). But in the pwsflm
instance we cannot make uw of tliem, on account of the contradictory answer.

< To avoid ambiguity, we say, In the third person, di ltd, instead oOf su^ I
•Mai. Ex. : Paul loves Peter and hia children, Paolo ama Pidro t i iffS flgU^
■si^or iJgUmoHtUhd: for u udng < sMt it might convey the meaning that
Puilloves his own diildrea. '

3U

NINTH LESSON.

Which books have youl

I have the ine books of four good

neighbours.
Have I his small boots 1
You have not his small boots, but you

have his large boots.
Which looking-glasses have 1 1
Vou have the pretty looking-glasses of

your brothers.
Have you the large hammers of the

carpenters?
I have not their large hammers, but

their large nails.
Has your brother my wooden guns?

He has not your wooden guns.
Which has he 1

Have you the Frenchmen's fine um-
brellas 1

I have not their fine umbrellas, but I
have their fine sticks.

Hy oxen.

Their I

His horses.

Of my gardens.

Of your horses.

Have you the trees of my gardens 7
I have not the trees of your gardens.

Of my pretty gardens.

Of my fine horses.
I have not your cotton handkerchiefs,
but I have your cloth coats.

The bread, the loaves.

auai libri avete vol? (ha Ella)?
Ho i bei libri del . vostri baonl

vicini.
Ho io i suoi piccoli sUvali 7
Ella non ha i ■ suoi piccoli stivall, ma

htf i suoi stlvali grandi.
dual! specchi ho io 7
Ella ha i leggiadri specchi del di

Lei fratelU.
Ha Ella i grandi martelU del lo^

gnaiuoli 7
Non ho i loro grandi martelli, ma

ho i loro gran chiodi.
Ha 11 di Lei fratello i miei schioppi

di legno 7
Egli non ha i d! Lei schioppi di legno.
QuaUha?

Ha Ella i begli ombrelli del Kran-

oesi?
Non ho i loro begli ombrelli, ma ho I

loro bei bastonu

I miei bnoi.
I loro asini.

I suoi cavalli.
Dei miei giardini.

Del \ ^^ ^" I cavalli.
c vostri )

Ha Ella gli alberi del miei giardini t

Non ho gli alberi dei di Lei giardioL

Dei miei leggiadri giardini.

De* miei bei cavalli.

Non ho i vostri fazzoletti di cotone,

ma ho i vostri abitidipanno.

II pane, i pani.

EXERCISES,
16.
Have you the gloves ? — Yes, Sir, I have the gloves. — Have you
my gloves ? — ^No, Sir, I have not your gloves. — Have I your look-
ing-glasses ? — You have my looking-glasses. — Have I your pretty
Handkerchiefs ? — ^You have not my pretty handkerchiefs. — Which
handkerchiefs have I ? — ^You have the pretty handkerchiefs of your
friends. — Has the foreigner our good penknives ? — He has not our

NINTH LBSSON. 81

good penknives, but our good ships. — ^Wlio has our fine horses ?-—
Nobody has your fine horses, but somebody has your fine oxen.-*
Has your neighbour the trees of your gardens ? — ^He has not the
trees of my gardens, but he has your handsome notes. — Have you
the horses' hay ? — ^I have not their hay, but their shoes (£ loroferri).
— ^Has your tailor my pretty golden buttons? — ^He has not your
pretty golden buttons, but your pretty golden threads (JUi). —
What has the sailor ? — ^He has his fine ships. — Has he my sticks
or my guns ? — ^He has neither your sticks nor your guns. — Who
has the tailor's good waistcoats? — Nobody has his waistcoats, but
somebody has his silver buttons. — Has the Frenchman's boy my
good umbrellas? — ^He has not your good umbrellas, but your good
knives. — Has the shoemaker my leathern boots? — ^He has your
leathern boots. — What has the captain? — He has his good sailors.
— ^What has our bookseller? — ^He has his good books. — ^Which
books have you ? — I have the fine books of our booksellers.

17.

Which mattrasses has the sailor? — He has the good mattrasses
of his captain. — ^Which gardens has the Frenchman ? — He has
the gardens of the English. — Which servants has the English,
man ? — ^He has the servants of the French. — ^What has your boy ?
He hds his pretty birds. — What has the merchant? — He has our
pretty chests. — What has the baker ?*-He has our fine asses. —
Has he our nails or our hammers ? — He has neither our nails nor
our hanuners, but he has our good loaves. — Has the carpenter
his iron hammers ? — He has not his iron hammers, but his iron
nails. — ^Which biscuits has the baker? — ^He has the biscuits of
his friends. — Has our friend our fine penknives?— He has not our
fine penknivesai — Which has he ? — He has the small penknives of
his merchants. — ^Which looking-glasses has your servant? — ^He
has the looking-glasses of his good merchants. — ^Has your friend
the small knives of our merchants? — He has not their small
knive^ but their golden candlesticks. — Have you these notes ? —
I have not these notes, but these silver knives. — Has the man this
or that note ? — He has neither this nor that. — Has he your book
or year friend's?— He has neither mine nor my friend's ; he has
his own — Has your brother the wine which I have, or that which

88 T£NTH LESION.

yoo hare? — He has neither that which you hare oor that whieh
I have.-^ Which wise has he ? — ^He has that of his merchants.-*
Have you the bag which my servant has? — I have not the bag
which your servant has.— Have you the chicken which my cook
has, or that which the peasant has? — ^I have neither that which
your cook has, nor that which the peasant has.— Is the peasant
cold or warm ? — ^He is neither cold nor warm.

TENTH LESSON.
Leziane Decima.

OF AUGMENTATIVES.
There are in Italian ttiro aorta of augmentativea, vis.
1. In oxVi to ezpreaa any thing great and fairge. Ex.

The hat . . the large hat.

U cappello . . 11 cappellonc.

The book . . the large book.

n libro . . il librone.

ThehaU .. the large halL

La saU . . il aalone.

The hooae . . the large house.

La casa . . il caaone.

06«. ± The augmentativea in oim are always maacidlne, though the ladl-

cals be feminine.

The door . . the 5 >"^ge <iow- I
(gate. )

La porta . . 11 portonc

The chamber . . the large chamber.

La camera . . il camerona.

2. In Accxo for the maacuUne, and ac

czA for the femlmne. These designate

mething bad or contemptible. Ex.
I he hat . . the large ugly hat. I 11 cappello . . U cappellacdo.

the table . , the large ugly table. La tavola . . la tavolaccia.

f he house . . the ugly house. I La oesa . . la casacda.

06t. Bl Nouns terminated in anu denote plenty or abundance, as : Ckn
tame, abundance of people; omome, abundance of bones.

Oba, There are noons in all these terminations, without being augmenta
tives. Ex. iZ battoM, the sick ; to ttarru, the carded wool ; U kucio, (he noose
jLjacda^ the fiice.

OP omonrnYEs.

Then are also tipo ants of diaii|iitivc% vis.
1. Orkiiid]MMaiidfliitier7iB:«i0»«Cfa^A^fiirth«i
lib, for the feminiDfr Ex.
JPiokD pcncnff poor, are deiivod :

A poor little man. I Porer

A poor Dttle woman. | Poveiina, povencta, ]

Of compaaaion in: ueda, weea, ieemda, for the maamllnp, and in; aHCM^
uzxa, ioduola, for tlie feminine, Ex.
Fromf uoBu^ tlie man, are fonned :

Tlie poor litda man. IL'nomnecii

I olo,orrc

Obe. C. Tlie diminntiveo eon^ey no bad ^^^ Hke tlie aaynieniaiipeai

and to ezpreaa a little old man, yon may nae indifferently: wnhuttia, vmhhm,
96tthietti9ii0f vteekitTtXUtf iwcBBicrrfhiie^ MeeaousoL Fiom Is cnea, yon may form :
la eatina, Is eoMtto, la ennrm, la ratnrria, la catiirrWiij to expraa the i
honae.

Obt, D. ThedtaainatiTeain«ioandtaa,ezpre8Bi
ing, and eajoling. Ex. The pretty little prince, U pi I'ncfpiaa (from yriwcy^ i
the pretty Uttle pitneam, ie prmcycwBia (from pHtidpmmh tbe fittla table, U
tevdJnio(from faeob); the pretty maO honae, acame (from caaa); the little
diamber,«li»aurteo(fromaBiMni); the Bttle cap, g ^cmtfwe (froat Wwrff a) ;
the pmtty little d(« d eofMliNo (^iom eone).

€b9, B. Tlieaeexamplea afaow that manyfemiaiMnomieiB«l
dlminntiTea in ine^ which termination ie maaniHne.

Have yon my booka or thflna of the

mani
Ihavenotyonn; I havo thoaa of tho

\ Qua or fBe*.

Ba EOa i mlei libil, o qaei (qne^

deffnomol
Non ho i di Ld, ho

TkaMwhkk.

^ Quem, the (or em).
\ Quel (or jiie'), eke*

Have yon the booka which I have?
I have thoaeiHiidi yon have.

(HaEDaifibriehehoiol .
{AveteiUfariehehoio?
r Ho qnei ehe Bib ha.
< Ho qnei cba avete voL
( Ho qaelli cheha Elhu
Haa the Bni^Mman the kidvea Ba P Ingleae i colteDi cbe avete vol
wtaldk yon have^ or thoae wUch I o qnelli che ho lol
havel

2*

M

TENTH LBSSON.

Ha hu neither those wUch you have,

nor those which I have.
WhichknlTeshashel
He hu bis own.

Non ha nd qoelU ehe vftUB toI, al

quaUi che ho io.
austtcolteUihaegUI
Haisuoi.

These books.
Those books.
Those coats.
Those looking-glasses.

Questi Ubii
auei(que')UM.
UuegU abiti.
Quegli ipecchi.

Have yon these or those books 7
These (Plur. of «Aw one).
Those (Plur. of that one).

Have I these or those 1

You have these, you have not those.

AvjBte questi Ubri, o qoelUI
Questi,
Queni-iquegli).

Ho questi, o quelU 1

Avete questi, non avete quelli.

Ho io gli specchi dei
queiUdegi*Ing|esi7
Non avete xA questi, nd quelli.

Francasi, •

Have I the looking-glasses of the

French, or those of the English?
You have neither the former nor the

latter.

Gbt. F. In Italian, as in French, ^former and Ou kUter, ffu oru and tk$
aiher, are expressed in an inverted order; quuto, queatij referring to the latter,
and qtuUo, queUi^ to the former.

Has the man these or those sticks 1
He has these, but not those.
Have you your guns or mine 1
I liave neither yours nor mine, but
those of our good friends.

Ha 1' uomo questi bastoni, o quelli 1
Ha questi, non ha quelli.
Ha Ella i di Lei schioppi, oi mieit
Non ho n^ i di Lei, nd i miei, maho ^
• quelU dei nostri buoni amid.

One

. . one book.

Uno

. . Un libro.

Oood

. . good bread.

BuottO

. . Buon pane.

Fine

. . fine horse.

Bello

. . Bel cavallo.

Great

. . great courage.

Grande

. . Gran coraggio.

Saint

. . Saint Peter.

Santo

. . San Pietro.

That

. . tliat dog.

Quello

06*. G, These adjectives lose, the two first their last vowel, the others
their last syllable, in the singular, when they precede a word beginning with a
consonant (not • followed by a consonant).

But when they precede a word beginning with a vowel, all lose their last
vowel .Ex.

The fine tree. I n beli* albero.

The large tree. I u grand' albero.

06s. B. This suppression of a letter or a syllable never takes place before a
feminine noun or before a masculine noun in the plural, except with respect t^
Ve word grandcj for we say :

TBNTH LESSON.

LaigebooKs. | Oran libit

BatwemuttMy:

Great man. i Graidf uomo.

Great men. I GrancH uomini.

Gbt. /. The word 6efio may be used in t^ plurai aa follows •

fBeUL

Fine.

Pktr. "

Bel or be'.

Begli (before • followed by
a consonant, and before a
- Towel).

EXERCISES.
18.
Have you these or those notes? — ^I have neither these nor those.
— Have you the horses of the French or those of the English ? — ^I
have those of the English, but I have not those of the French. —
Which oxen have you ? — ^I have those of the foreigners. — ^Have
you the chests which I have? — ^I have not those which you have,
but those whioh your brother has. — Has your brother your bis-
cuita or mine ? — ^He has neither yours nor mine. — Which biscuits
has he? — ^He has his own. — Which horses has your friend? — He
has those which I have. — ^Has your friend my books or his ? — ^He
has neither yours nor his, but he has those of the captain. — Have
I your waistcoats, or those of. the tailors? — ^You have neither
these nor those. — ^Have I our asses? — ^You have not ours, but
those of our neighbours. — Have you the birds of the sailors? — I
have not their birds, but their fine sticks. — Which glasses {il Me-
chiere) has your boy? — ^He has mine.— Have I my boots or those
of the shoemakers ? — ^You have not yours, but theirs.

19.

Which milk has the man ? — He has ours. — Has he our coffee I
— He has it not. — Have you our coats or those of the strangers ?
I have not yours, but theirs. — Has your carpenter our hammers
or those of our friends? — He has neither ours nor those of our
friends. — Which nails has he ? — He has his good iron nails. —
Has any one the ships of the English? — ^No one has those of the
English, but some one has those of the French. — Who has the
coolTs chickens? — Nobody has his chickens, but somebody has

80 ELEVENTH LESSON.

his butter. — ^Who has his cheese? — His boy has it. — ^Who has
my old gun?— The sailor has it. — ^Have I the peasant's bag? —
You have not his bag, but his corn.^-Which guns has the English-
man ? — ^He has those which you have. — ^Which umbrellas has the
Frenchman ? — He has those which his friend has. — Has he our
books ? — He has not ours, but those which his neighbour has.—
Is the merchant's boy hungry ? — ^He is not hungry, but thirsty.
— ^Is your friend cold or warm ? — ^He is neither cold nor warm.
— ^Is he afraid ? — ^He is not afraid, but ashamed. — ^Has the young
man the birds of our servants? — He has not their birds, but their
soap.-^Which penknives has he ? — ^He has those of his old mer-
chants.— ^Have you any thing good or bad ? — ^I have neither any
thing good nor bad, but something fine.— What have you fine ?—
I have our cook's fine beef. — ^Have you not their fine muttoD?*—
No, Sir, I have it not.

ELEVENTH LESSON.
Lezione Unde^ma.

The oomb.
The email oomb.
Tbeglasa.
Have yon my small combe 7

Thenoee.

The wood or foreet.

The work.

The jowel.

II pettine.
I II pettinino.
i II piccolo pettine.

U bicchiere.

Ha Ella i miei plocoU pettini (pel-
tiaetti)?

U

II boseo ; jdur. i. boedii.
I U lavoro, 1* opera.
! II travagiio.

Hi

BUVSNTa UUSOlt.

91

Than.

U,gU.

Hu be mj fine gli—ml

Ha esao i miei beUi UodHeill

He has tliem.

{Uha.
<Es8oUha.

HaTelttiemI

Uhoiol

Von have them.

cEllattha.
iUavete.

Ton have them noL

EUa non li ha.
i Non U svete.

Has the man my fine jeweb?

Ha 1* uomo i mlei bd giolsUI

He has them noL

Non U ha.

Has the boy (got) them t

LihalLragano?

Hie men have them.

611 uomini li hanno.

Hare the men (got) themi

Li hanno ^ uomini 7

They,

EgUnOy em (et, e').

They hare them.

Eglino 11 hanno.

They have them not.

Essi non 11 hanno.

Who has them 1

ChiUhal

TheGennan, the Gennans.

I] Tedeaco, 1 TedeschL

The Turk, the Turks.

IlTurco, ITnrehi.

The Italian, the Italians.

L' Italiano^ gl> Italiani.

Lo Spagnnok), gtt Spagnu<dL

The Russian, the Rosiians.

HRusso, iRnssi.

The American, the Americans.

V Americano, gU AmericanL

The clothes.

\ I vestiti.
^Gliabiti.

•

Some or any.^

( Sing. Ddy deOo, deJP.
\ Plttb. Dei, degU, degV-

Some or any wine.

DelTino.

Some or any bread.

0elpane.

Some or any butter.

Del bntirro.

Some or any sugar.

Dello zucchero.

Some or any money.

Deldenaro.

Some or any books.

Dei Ubri.

Some or any bnttons.

Deibottoni.

t Some or ony is sometimes expressed in Italian, and sometimes not| nearly
as in English. It is expressed when a tpianJ^ or a UttU may be understood,
otherwise it is not expressed. Ex. Give me some bread, daiemi dd pane ; I dilnk
wine and you drink water, io heoo «feo, e toi bevete aequa; we have seen nq sol-
diers, or we have not seen any soldiers, non ahbiamo veduto ooldoHs wine and
bread are sufficient for me, jKine od acqua mi baetano ; to write well we must em-
ploy good paper and good ink, per bout ocrioort biaogna adoperare bwma carta e
htMn tnddoolros the poor are often reduced to bad meat, i poneri wno wpeom.
ridoUi a eaUwa came

38

BLSYSlrTH LBSSOir.

Some 4r uy gold.

Some or any silrer (metal).

Some or any men.
Some or any friends.
Some or any coats.

Have you any wine 1
1 have some wine.
Has this man any doth 7
He has some cloth.
Has he any books 7
He has some books.
Have you any money 7
I tiave some money.

No or not any, before a noun.
I have no wine.
He has no money.

Y'ou have no books.
They have no friends.

Some or
Some or
Some or
Some or
Some or
Some or
Some or
Some or

any good wine,
any bud cheese,
any excellent wine,
any excellent coffee,
any good books,
any pretty glasses,
any fine coats,
any old wine.

Dell' oro.
Dell' argento.

DegliuomiiiL
DegU amici.
DegU abiU.

Avetedelvino7

Ho del vino.

Ha del panno quail' i

Ha del panno.

HaeglideiUbri7

Ha libri.

Avctedenaro7

Hodenaro

N(m,

Non ho vino.

Nonhadanaro.
j Ella non ha librL
i Non avete libri.

Non hanno amici.

Dei buon vino.
Del cattivo formaggio.
Del vino ecceUente.
Dell eccellente cafid.
Dei buoni libri.
Dei leggiadri bicchleri.
Dd begli abiU.
Del vino vecchio.

Have you any good butter 7

I have no good butter, but some excel-
lent cheese.

Has this man any good books 7

He has not any good books.

Elas the merchant any pretty gloves 7

He has no pretty gloves; but some
pretty jewels.

\ Ha Ella buon burro 7
! Avete buon burro 7
Non ho buon burrOi ma ho eccel-
lente formaggio. "
Ha buoni libri queli' uomo 7
Non ha buoni libri.
Ha leggiadri guanti il mercante 7
Non ha leggiadri guanti, ma ha leg-
giadri gioiclU.

What has the baker 7

He has some excellent bread.

The painter.

Some coals.

The pencil {pt a painter).

The picture.

The pencil

Che ha il fomaio 7
Ha del pane ecceUente.
11 pittore.
Carbone.
II pennello.
U quadro.

II lapis {la matUa, a feminine noun).

SLSVENTH LESSON. 39

EXERCISES.
20.
Have you my fine glasses ? — ^I hare them. — ^Have you the fine
horses of the English ? — ^I have them not. — Which sticks have
you ? — ^I have those of the foreigners. — ^Who has my small combs ?
— ^My boys have them. — ^Which knives have you ? — I have those
of your friends. — ^Have I your good guns? — ^You have them not,
but your friends have them. — Have you my pretty birds, or those
of my brothers 1 — ^I have neither yours nor your brothers^ but
my own. — ^Which ships have the Germans? — The Germans have
no ships. — ^Have the sailors our fine mattrasses? — They have
them not- — ^Have the cooks (got) them ? — ^They have them. — Has
the captain your pretty books ? — He has them not. — Have I them ?
— You have them. You have them not. — ^Has the Italian (got)
them? — He has them. — ^Have the Turks our fine guns?— They
have them not. — ^Have the Spaniards thenf?^— They have them.
— ^Has the German the pretty umbrellas of the Spaniards ? — He
has them. — Has he them? — ^Yes, Sir, he has them. — ^Has the
Italian our pretty gloves? — ^He has them not. — ^Who has them?
— ^The Turk has them. — ^Has the tailor our waistcoats or those of
our {riends? — ^He has neither the latter nor the former. — ^Which
coats has he? — He has those which the Turks have. — ^Which
dogs have you? — ^I have those which my neighbours have.

21
Have you any wood ? — ^I have some wood. — ^Has your brother
any soap ? — ^He has no soap. — Have I any mutton ? — You have
no mutton, but you have some beef. — ^Have your friends any
money? — ^They have some money. — Have they any milk? —
They have no milk, but they have some excellent butter.— Have
1 any fire? — You have no fire, but you have some coals (m the
tmg. in ItaUan). — Has the merchant any cloth? — ^He has no
cloth, but some pretty garments. — Have the English any silver?
—They have no silver, but they have some excellent iron. — Have
you any good coffee? — ^I have no good coffee, but some excellent
wine.— Has the merchant any good books? — ^He has some good
books.— >Has the young man any milk? — He has no milk, but

M TWBLPTH LB880N.

soma eicellent tea. — Have the French any good gloves?— 1 hey
have some excellent gloves. — Have they any hirds? — They have
no birds, but they have some pretty jewels. — ^Who has the fine
pencils of the English? — ^Their friends have them. — Who has
tbd gpod biscuits of the bakers ? — ^The sailors of our captains have
them. — Have they our clothes? — ^Yes, Sir, they have them.—
What have the Italians I — ^They have some beautiful pictures.-^
What have the Spaniards? — They have some fine asses. — ^What
!)ave the Germans? — ^They have some excellent com.

22.
Have you any friends? — I have some friends. — ^Have your
friends any fire ? — They have some fire. — ^Have the shoemakers
any good boots ? — ^They have no good boots, but some excellent
leather. — Have the tailors any good waistcoats ? — ^They have no
good waistcoats, but some excellent cloth. — Has the painter any
umbrellas? — He has no umbrellas, but he has some beautiful
pictures. — Has h^ the pictures of the French or those of the
Italians? — ^He has neither the latter nor the former. — Which has
he ? — He has those of his good friends. — Have the Russians any
thing good ? — They have something good. — What have they good ?
— They have some good oxen. — ^Has any one my small combs ?
— No one has them. — Who has the peasants' fine chickens?—
Your cooks have them. — What have the bakers? — ^They have
some excellent bread. — Have your friends any old wine? — ^They
have no old wine, but some good milk.— >Has any one your golden
candlesticks? — No one has them.

TWELFTH LESSON.
Leziane Duodecima.

:same of ii^ anp of U^of U.
Some of thenif any of them, of,

Ne (is always placed before the
verb, except when this is in
the infinitive, participle, or
imperative).

TWSirTH LS880N.

HftTe foa any wioal

I bare aome.

Have yon any bread 1

I haTe not any, or nona.

Have yon any good winal

I have some good.

HaTe I any good doth?

Ton have not any good.

Haa the merchant any avgar 1

He haa some sugar.

He haa aome.

He haa not any.

Haa he any good aogar 7

He baa aome good.

He haa not any good.

Have I any aaltl

Ton have aome aalL

Ton have no aalt.

Ton have aome.

Ton haye not any.

Have yon any boota 7

I have aome boota.

I have no boota.

I have aome.

I have not any.

Haa the man any good horaea7

He haa aome good onea.

He haa not any good onea.

Has he any pretty knivea?

He haa aome pretty onea^

He haa not any pretty onea.

Haa he any money 7

He haa aome.

He haa not any.

Have onr frienda any good bnttei 7

They have aome good.

They haye not any good.

Have yon good or bad book87

I have aome good onea.

Have you good or bad bread 7

I have aome good.

VHio has aome bad wine7

Our merchant haa aome.

(HaEOaviDol
c Avetevino7

Neho.

Avetepane7.

Non ne ho.
CHaEI]abnonvino7
c Avetebnon'viiio?
(Nehodibnooo.
( Ne ho del buono.

Hoiobnonpanno7
( EUa non ne ha dl boono.
c Non ne avete di buonoi.

Ha raecharo U niereante7

Haxttochero.

Neha.

Nonneha.

Ha egii boon anecheio 7
(Nehadlboono.
( Ne ha del bnono.

Non ne ha di buono.

Hoaa]e7

Avete aale.

Non avete aale.

Ne aveta.

Non ne avete.

Avete 8tivaU7

HoatlvilL

Non ho ativalL

Neho.

Non ne ho.

Ha F nomo buoni cavaJii 7

Ne ha del buoni.

Non ne lia di boonL

Ha egU leggladri coltelU 7

Neha del ieggiadri.

Non ne ha di leggiadrL

Haeglidanaro7

Neha.

Non ne ha.

Hanno bnon buzro i noatri amid 1

Ne hanno di bnona •

Non ne hanno del booQO.

Ha EUa buoni, o cattivi iibrit

Ne ho dei bnoni.

Avete buono^ o cattivo panal

Ne ho del buono.

Chihacativovino7

Ne ha il noatro i

42

TWELFTH LESSON.

What bread haa the baker 1
He has some good.
What boota haa the ahoemakerl
He haa aome good onea.

The hatter.

The joiner.

dual pane ha il fomalo ?

Ne ha del bnono.

auaU aUvaU ha Ucalzolaio'k

Ne ha di baoni.

D cappellalo.

U falegname.

r Un (before a consonant

or

a

vowel).

-4 or one. ^ ^^ ^i^fore s followed

by

a

consonant, or when it stands

alone).

DECLENSION OF THE INDEFINITE ARTICLE.

AfojeiOme.

Nmn,

a or an.

Nam. uno.

Oen.

of a— an.

Oen. d' uno.

Dai.

toa—an.

Dot, ad uno.

Aee.

a — an.

Ace. uno.

AhL

from a — an.

AU. da uno

A or one horse.

Haye youm book 1

I have a book.

Have you a glaaa 7

I have no glass.

I have one.

Have you a good horse 1

I have a good horse.

I have a good one.

I have two good ones.

I have two good horses.

I have three good ones.

Have I a gun 7 .

You have a gun.

You have one.

You have a goo4 one.

You have two good ones.

Has your brother a friend 1

He hu a friend.

He haa one.

He haa a good one.

Un cavallo.
JHaElla)„„,ij,^,
( Avete >

Ho un libro.

J^'^"*Junbicchiere7
( Avete )

Non ho blcchiere.

Ne ho uno.

Ha EUa un buon cavallo t

Ho un buon cavallo.

Ne ho uno buono.

Ne ho due buoni.

Ho due buoni cavalll.

Ne ho tre buoni.

Ho uno schioppo 1

Ella ha uno schioppo.

Ella ne ha uno.

Ella ne ha uno buono.

Ella ne ha due buoni.

Ha un amico il dl Lei fratello 't

Ha un amico.

Ne ha uno.

Ne ha uno buono.

TWELFTH LESSON.

49

He has two good ones.

He has three good ones.
Four.
Five.
Hae your friend a fine knife 1
He has one.
He has none.
He has two of them.
He has three.
He has four.

Have jon fire good horaet?

I haye six.

I have six good and seven bad ones.

Who has a fine umbrella 7

Tlie merdiant has one.

Ne ha doe buoni.

Ne ha tre buoni.

dnattiow

Cinque.

Ha il Tostro amlco un bel colteUo 1

Ne ha uno.

Non ne ha.

Ne ha due.

Ne ha tre.

Ne ha quattro.

t f *g^"* \ cinqne buoni canUi 7

Ne ho sei.

Ne ho sei buoni e sette cattivi.

Chi ha un bell' ombreUo7 or una

bellaombrello?
II mercante ne ha uno

EXERCISES.

23.
Have you any salt ? — ^I have some. — Have you «Dy cofiee ? — ^I
have not any. — ^Have you any good wine ? — I have some good
(wine). — ^Have 3K>u any good cloth ? — ^I have no good cloth, but I
have some good money. — Have I any good sugar ? — ^You have
not any good. — Has the man any good honey ? — ^He has sorne.-^
Has he any good cheese ? — He has not any. — Has the American
any money ? — ^He has some. — ^Have the French any cheese ? —
They have not any. — Have the English any good milk? — They
have no good milk, but they have some excellent butter. — ^Who
has some good soap ? — ^The merchant has some. — Who has some
good bread? — ^The baker has some. — ^Has the foreigner any
coals ? — He has not any. — Has he any cloth ? — ^He has some. —
What rice have you? — I have some good (rice). — ^What hay has
the horse?-— He has some good (hay). — ^What leather has the
shoemaker? — ^He has some excellent (leather). — Have you any
jewels? — ^I have not any. — ^Who has some jewels? — The mer-
chant has some.— Have I any boots ? — ^You have some boots. —
Have I any hats? — ^You have no hats. — ^Has your friend any
good knives? — He has some good ones. — ^Has he any good oxen?
--He has not any good ones.-r-Have the Italians any fine horses?

44 TWELFTH LBdSON.

— They have not any fine ones. — Who has some fine asses f—

The Spaniards have some.

2A.

Has the captain any good sailors? — ^He has some good ones. —
Have the sailors any good mattrasses? — ^They have not any good
ones. — Who has some good biscuits? — The baker of our good
neighbour has some.^^Has he any bread ? — He has not any. —
Who has some beautiful ribbons? — ^The French have some. —
Who has some excellent iron nails ? — ^The carpenter has some.—
Has he any hammers? — He has some. — ^Whathanmiershas he ? —
He has some iron ones. — What is the matter with your brother ?
— Nothing is the matter with him. — Is he cold ? — He is neither
cold nor warm. — ^Is he afraid ? — ^He is not afraid. — ^Is he ashamed ?
— He is not ashamed. — ^What is the matter with him? — ^He is
hungry. — Who has some pretty gloves? — ^I have some. — ^Who
has some fine pictures? — ^The Italians have some. — ^Have the
painters any fine gardens? — ^They have some fine ones. — Has the
hatter good or bad hats? — ^He has some good ones. — Hss the
joiner good or bad wood ? — He has some good (wood).-*Who has
some pretty jewels ? — ^The boys of our merchants have some. —
Have they any birds? — ^They have not any. — ^Have you any tea?
— ^I have not any. — ^Who has some ? — ^My servant has some. —
Has your servant any clothes Y— He has not any. — ^Who has
some ? — ^The servants of my neighbour have some.

25,

Have you a pencil ?— I have one. — ^Has your boy a good book ?
— ^He has a good one. — ^Has the Grerman a good ship? — He has
none. — ^Has your tailor a good coat? — ^He has a good one. — ^He
has two good ones. — He has three good ones. — ^Who has some
fine boots ? — Our shoemaker has some. — ^Has the captain a fine
dog? — He has two. — Have your friends two fine horses? — They
have four. — ^Has the young man a good or bad gun?'-He has no
good one : he has a bad one. — Have you a cork ? — I have none.
— ^Has your friend a good corkscrew ? — ^He has two. — ^Have I a
firiend? — You have a good one. — ^You have two good friends.-—
You have three good ones. — ^Your brother has four good ones.^

TRIRTEBNTH LBSSON.

45

Has the carpenter an iron nail? — ^He has six Iron nails. — ^He has
six good onesy and seven bad ones. — Who has good beef? — Our
cook has some. — ^Wlio has five good horses? — Our neighbour has
six.-— Has the peasant any com ? — He has some. — Has he any
looking-glasses? — He has not any.* — ^Whohas some good friends?
The Turks have some. — ^Have they any money?— They have
not any. — ^Who has their money? — ^Their friends have it— Are
their friends thirsty? — They are not thirsty^ but hungry. — ^Has
the joiner any bread ? — ^He has not any.— Has your servant a
good coat? — ^He has one. — ^Has he this or that coat? — ^He has
neither this nor that. — Which coat has he ? — He has that which
your servant has. — ^Have the peasants these or those bags?—
They have neither these nor those. — ^Which bags have they?
— ^They have their own.-— >Have you a good servant? — I have a
good one. — ^Who has a good chest?— ^My brother has one.— Has
he a leathern or a wooden chest? — ^He has a wooden one.

THIRTEENTH LESSON.
Lezione Decimaierza.

How much? H&wmany?

How much bread 1
How mocii money 1
How many knlvea 1
How many men 7
How many friends 1

(My, ha.

I iMcve bat one friend.
I have but one.

Quanio? Quandf

duantopane?
doantodenaro?
QuanticolteUi?
duanti uomini?
Quantiamid?

SoUanto,
Solatnenie,
Nan — che.
^Nan — serum.
Ho loltanto un amieo 1
Ne bo aolamente !

46

THIRTEENTH LESSON.

I have but one good gun.

I have but one good one.

Vou have but one good one.

How many hones has your brother 1

He has but one.

He has but two good

Much, a good deal of, very
much.

Many,
Much bread.

A good deal of good bread.
Many men.
Have you much money?
I have a good deal
Have you much good wine 1

f have a good deal.

Too much.
Too many,

Tou have too much wine.

They have too many books.

Enough,
Enough money.
Knives enough.

LitOe,

A Utile.
A little doth.
A little salt.
A few men.
A few filends.

But UUki only a Utile, not much.

Ho soltanto un buono schioppo.

Ne ho Bolamente uno buono.

Ne avete solamente uno buono.

duanti cavali ha vostro firatellot
( Non ne ha che uno.
i Non ne ha se non uno.
t Non ne ha che due buonL
} Non ne hft se non due buooL

').

MoUo\

> mssai.

Mom )

Molto pafte (asi

Molto pane buona

Molt! uomini (assai nomini).

Avete molto denarol

Ne ho molto.

Ha Ella molto buon vinol Ha 1

del vino molto buono.
Ne ho molto.

Troppo.

Troppi,
Avete troppo vino.
Hanno troppi libri.

AhboMtanxa.
Abbastanxa denaro.
Abbastanza coltelU.

( Poco. Siag.
iPodd. Plur.
Tin poco di {a2qua$Uo).

Vn poco di panno.

Un poco di sale.

Pochi uomlnL

Pochi amici.

Non — quasi. Non^^hepooo.
Non — moUo.
Solamente poco.
y Non — se non pocOm

THIETBEIITH LESSON.

Ifol many J hufew.

I haTo bat little money.
He has few filenda.

We have bat Uttle gold.

\ Nan — cKe packi,
\ Non — se mm podd.
( Non bo ebt poeo danaio.
1 Non bo ae non poeo iknaro
( Non ha nuriii amlcL
I Ha poebi amid.
r Non abbiamo uMrito oio.
< Non abbiamo dw poeo an.
i NonabUamo ae non poeo oro.

Coniage.

CofaggiO) enofe.

Ton haTo not mneh eourage.

Non avete qnaai eoragglo.

WehaTefewfrioida.

Have we?

AbbiamolabUamonoll

We have.

Abbiamo, not abbiamo

We hare not

Non abbiamo.

Pepe.

Some vinegar.

Aceto.

Have we any vinegar ?

Abbiamo aoeto?

We have aorae.

Wehavenotany.

NonneabUano.

Have yon a good deal of money 1

c Avete molto denaiol

I have bot little of it.

^ Non ne ho ae non pooo.
c Non ne ho nidto.

Von have bq.t little of IL

Non ne aveio ee aao poeo.

He baa but little of it.

Non ne ha molto.

We have but little of it.

Non ne abbiamo ehe poeau

Have yon enongfa wine 1

Ha JEDa abbaatanza vinol

I have <Hily a Uttle, bat Mioogh.

Nonnehomolttsniaabliai

Hght

OtiD.

Nina

Novo.

Ten.

DieeL

Eleven.

UndieL

IA

48 TRIRTBSIITH LBSmi.

BXBRCISBS.

26.
How many friends have youl — I have two good friends. — Have
you eight good trunks ?-— I have nine.— -Has your servant three
coats ?-— He has only one good one. — ^Has the captain two good
ships? — ^He has only one. — How many hanuners has the carpen-
ter?— He has hut two good ones. — How many boots has the
shoemaker? — ^He has ten. — Has the young man nine good hooks ?
— ^He has only five.— How many guns has your brother? — He
has only four. — Have you much bread ? — ^I have a good deal. —
Have the Spaniards much money ? — ^They have but little.— Has
our neighbour much coffee? — ^He has only a little. — Has the
foreigner much com?— He has a good deal. — ^What has the
American? — He has much sugar. — What has the Russian?-*
He has a great deal of salt. — Has the peasant much rice ? — He
has not any. — Has he much pheese? — He has but little. — ^What
have we ? — We have much bread, much wine, and many books.
Have we much money ? — We have only a little, but enough. —
Have you many brothers? — ^I have only one. — ^Have the French
many friends? — They have but few. — ^Has our friend much hay?
— ^He has enough. — Has the Italian much cheese? — He has a
good deal. — Has this man courage? — He has. none. — ^Has the
painter's boy any pencils? — He has some.

27.

Have you much pepper? — ^I have but little. — ^Has the cook
much beef? — ^He has but little beef, but he has a good deal of
mutton. — ^How many oxen has the Grerman? — ^He has eight. —
How many horses has he? — He has only four. — ^Who has a good
many biscuits ? — Our sailors have a good many. — Have we many
notes? — ^We have only a few. — How many notes have we? — ^We
have only three pretty ones. — Have you too much butter ? — ^I have
not enough. — ^Have our boys too many books?— They have too
many. — ^Has oiir friend too much milk ? — He has only a little,
but enough. — Who has a good deal of money ? — ^The peasants

THIRTBBNTH LESSON. 49

hrnvBU good deal. — Have they many gloves? — They have not
any. — Has (he cook enough hutter ?— -He hJEis not enough. — Has
he enough vinegar ? — He has enough.— Have you niuch soap ? —
I have only a little. — ^Has the merchanjt much cloth ?— He has a
good deal. — Who has a good deal of pepper ? — Our neighbour
has a good deal.— Has our tailor many buttons ? — He has a good
many. — ^Has the painter many gardens ?— He has not many. —
How many gardens has .he? — ^He has but }wo.^— How many
knives has the Gennan ? — He has three. — Has the captain any
fine horses ?-— He has some fine ones, but his brother hits none. —
Have we any jewels ? — ^We have a good many. — ^What jewels
have we ? — ^We hitve gold jewels. — ^What candlesticks have our
friends ? — ^They have silver candlesticks. — ^Have they gold rib-
bans t — ^They have some

28.
Has the youth any good sticks?— -He has no good sticks, but
some beautiful birds. — ^What chickens has our cook ? — ^He has
9ome pretty chickens.-~How many has he ? — ^He has six.'i— Has the
hatter any hats ? — ^He has a good many.-^Has the joiner much
wood ? — ^He has not a great deal, bdt enough. — Have we the horses
of the French or those of the Germans? — We have neither these
nor those. — ^Whidi horses have ve ? — ^We-have our own. — ^Has
the Turk my small combs ?— He has them not.— Who has them ?
Your son has them. — Have our friends much sugar ? — They have
little sugar, but much honey. — ^Who has our looking-glasses ?—
The Italians have them. — Has the Frenchman this or that spoon ?
-*He has neither this nor that. — ^Has he the mattrasses which we
have ?— He has not those which we have, but those which his
Metada have. — Is he ashamed ?— He is not ashamed but afraidt

FOURTEENTH LESSON.
Lezhne Dedmaquartd.

A few hooks.

JAlcuni Uhri,
Quaiche Uhro.

Oftt. A. The nonq folloiNiiig quakht is always nsed in i\n slngunt.
HaTe 7on a few bdoks ? } Ha ElU alcmd llbri 1

' Afew.
I have a few.
Ton hare a few.
He has a few.

i Avete qMlche libm i

AlcUni (pareccM).
Ne ho alcuni (pareechi).
Ne arete pareechi.
Ne ha alcuni.

IJiave but a few books.

You have but a few books.
H« has but a few sous.
I have but a few.
You have but a few.
He has but a few.

One or a sou. Phtr. sous.
One — a franc. " francs.
One — a crown. ** crowns.

Oiher.
Another son.
Some other souar.

Hare you another horse 1
1 have another.

No oiher horse.
I have no other horse.
* I have no other.

Haye you any other horses?
I haye some others.
f liaye no others^

r Non ho se non alcuni UbrL
< Non ho se non pareechi librl
( Ho soltanto alcuni UbrL
Avete solamente alcuni UbrL
Non ha se non alcuni soldi.
Ne ho soltanto alcuni.
Ne avete soiamente alcunL
Ne ha soltanto alcuni.

Un soldo. Plur. soldi.
Un franco. " franclii.
Uno scudo. " scudi.

AUro.

Un altro soldo.
Alcuni altri soldi.

Ha Ella un altro cayallo?
Ne ho un altro.

Non — aUro cavaUo,
Non ho altro cavaUo.
Non ne ho aitro.
Ha EUa alcuni altri cayalllf
Ne ho degU altri.
Non ne ho altrL

FOTTBTBEhrtf LBSSON.

51

•TMann.
nebeari.
Tlie month.
Tile t^lnme.

n braccto {jfiwr. le bracda).
*II cirore.
nmeae.
II volume.

What 4^f of the month is it 1

Itisthefint.

< Claanti ne abblamo del i
I A quaoti aiamo del meael
C E il primo (Ne abbiamo nno).
I Siamo al primo.
( Ne abbiamo due.
I Siamo al {or ai) doe.
^ Ne abbiamo tre.'
C Siamo al {or ai) tre.
06*. B. The cardinal ntiftthers mnat be used In Italian when speaking of the

lays of the month, though the ordinal are used in EngUsh, except Uprimot the

arst.!

It a the aecondj
It is the third.

It Is the elerenth.

Ne abbiamo undid.

♦Which volnme have youj

dual volume ha Ella 1

I have the fourth.

.Ho 11 quarto.

Smgutar,

PharoL

The first.

n primo,

iprlmi.

11 secondo,

isecondi.

— third.

Ilterzo,

iterxi. ^

• — fourth.

11 quarto,

i quart!.

-.filth.

Ilquinto,

iquhitl.

— sixth.

11 sesto,

IsestL

— seventh.

11 settimo,

IsettimL

— eighth.

L' ottavo,

^OtlCfl.

— winth-

11 nono.

Inoni.

— tenth.

n decimo,

i decimi.

— eleventh.

L' nndecimo.

. gllundecimi.

— twentieth.

B venteslmo,

iventesiml.

— r twen ty -first.

Ilventeslmo-

1 ventesimi-

primo.

primL

— twenty-second.

11 venteaimo-

i ventesimi-

secondo.

secondl.

— thhtleth.

n trentesimo,

i trentealmi

— fortieth.

11 quarantesimo,

i quaranteilmL

dkc.

Ac.

Have you the first or second bookl

Ha Ella 11 pximo, 0

il secondo Ubiof

I have the third.

Hoilteno.

Which volume have you?

dual volume ha Ella 1

I have the fiAh.

Ho 11 quinto.

> HenoefbiA the learners should write the date before their task. Ex.
£Midra,ai{iior9i)qukidieidildUglionaUoiUte$^ Lon-

doQ.lSth July, 1844.

02

FOUBTB£NTH

ne lemdning numenls are :—

Twelve,
Thirteen,

Fourteen,

Fifteen,

SixteAi,

Serenteen,

Eighteen,

Nineteen,

twelfth,
thirteenth.

fourteenth.

fifteenth.

tfzteenth.

aeventeenth.

eighteenth.

nineteenth.

Twenty.
Twenty-on&
Twenty-two.
Twenty-three,* twenty-third.

Thirty,

Forty.

Fifty,

SUty,

Seventy,

Eighty,

Ninety,
A ^ one hundred,
A jr one thousand,
1 tro hundred,

fiftieth.

sixtieth.

seventieth.

eightieth.

ninetieth.

hundredth.

thousandth.

two hundredth.

Tliree hundred,
Two thousand,
A million,
Two millions.

The last.

A tenth.

Adosen.

A score.

A thirtieth.

three hundredths
two thousandth,
millionth.

CardvuA Nvmberg.
Dodici.

Tredlcl.
Quattofdid.
' Quindici.

Sedici.

^ Dlepisette, or
i Dldiaaette.
{ Dieciotto, or
i Diciotto.
^ Diecinove, or
I Dicianove.

Venti, dkc.

Vent' uno, Ac,

Ventldue, Ac,

Ventitre.

2.

Ordinal Numberg

Duodecimo.
{ Decimo terzo, ot
I Tredicesimo.
c Decimo quarto, or
i Quattordiceslmo.
( Decimo quinto, or
I Quindieesimo.
( Decimo sesto, or
I Sadiceaimo.
) Decimo settlno.

> Diciasettesimo

> Decimottavo.
{ Decimo nono.

Ventesimo teno.
Ac

Tren^ Ac.

Quaranta, Ac.

Cinquanta,

Sessanta,

Settanta,

Ottanta,

Novanta,

Cento,

MiUe,

Ducento (da-

gento).
Trecento,
Duemlla,
MilUone,
Due miHioni.
L' ultimo.

Una decina or dlclna.
Unadozzina.
Una Tentina.
Unatrentina.

Cinquantesimo

Sessanteslmo.

Settsnteslmo.

Ottanteslmo.

Novantesimo.

Centesimo.

MUlesimo.

Ducenteslmo.

Trecenteslmo.
Doe millesimo.
Hillionesimo.

Qbo, C. From tfie above msy be seen that eaito is invariable ir the plun^
•nd mOU is in the plural changed into jnUa.

FOtmTBSKTH LBSSON. 08

EXERCISES.

29.
Have jou many kniTes? — ^I have a few. — ^Have you many
^«encils ? — ^I have only a few. — Has the painter^ friend many
looking-glasses? — He has only a few.— ^Has your son a few sous?
— He has a few. — Have you a few francs ? — We have a few. —
How many francs have you ? — ^I have ten. — How many sous has
the Spaniard ? — ^He has not many ; he has oi^jf five.-— Who has
the beautiful glasses of the Italians ? — ^We have them. — ^Have the
English many ships? — ^They have a good many. — Have the
Italians many horses? — They have not many horses^ but a good
RUiny asses. — What have the Oermans? — They have many
crowns. — How many crowns have they? — ^They have eleven.—
Have we the horses of the English or those of the Germans?—
We have neither the former nor the latter. — Have we the urn*
brellas of the Spaniards? — ^We have them not, but the Americans
have them. — ^Have you much butter 9>— I have only a little, but
Plough. — >Have the sailors the mattrasses which we have ? — ^They
have Qot those which we have, but those which their captain has*
— ^Has the Frenchman many francs ? — ^He has only a few, but
he has enough.— Has your servant many sous? — ^He has no sous,
but francs enough.

80.
Have the Russians pepper? — They have but little pepper, but
a good deal of salt. — ^Have the Turks much wine? — ^They have
not much wine, but a good deal of cofiee. — ^Who has a good deal
of milk? — ^The Germans have a good deal. — ^Have you no other
gun ? — I have no other. — ^Have we any other cheese ? — We have
seme other. — ^Have I no other picture ?-*You have another. — ^Has
our neighbour no other horse? — He has no other. — ^Has your
brother no other friends? — ^He has some others. — Have the shoe-
makers no other boots ? — ^They have no others.^— Have the tailors
many coats ? — ^They have oqly a few ; they have only four.—
How many gloves have you ? — ^I have only two. — Have you any
other biscuits ? — ^I have no other. — ^How many corkscrews has
the merchant ? — He has nine. — How many arms has this man ?

54 FOURTEENTH LESSON.

— He has only one ; the other is of wood. — Wjiat heart has your
son? — ^He has a good heart.— -Have you no other servant? —
I have another. — ^Has your friend no other hirds ? — He has some
others.-— How many other birds has he ?'— He has six others.— <
How many gardens have you? — ^I have only one, but my friend
has two of them.

81.

Which volume have you ? — ^I have the ' first. — Have you the
second voligne of my book ? — I have it. — Have you the third or
fourth book ? — ^I have neithei' the former nor the latter. — ^Have
we the fifth or sixth volumes ?— We have the fifth, but we have
not the sixth volumes. — Which volumes has your friend ? — He
has \he seventh volumes. — ^What day of the month is it ? — ^It is
the eighth. — Is it not the eleventh? — No, Sir, it is the tenth. —
Who has our crowns ? — The Russians have them. — Have they
our gold ? — They have it not. — Has the youth much money ? —
He has not much money, but much courage. — Have you the
nails of the carpenters or those of the joiners ? — I have neither
those of the carpenters nor those of the joiners, but those of my
merchants. — Have you this or that glove ? — ^I have neither this
nor that. — Has your friend these or those notes ?— He has these,
but not those. — Has the Italian a few crowns ? — ^He has a few. —
Has he a few francs ? — He has five. — Have you another stick ?
I have another. — ^What other stick have you ? — ^I have anothei
iron stick. — Have you a few good candlesticks? — ^We have a
few. — Has your boy another hat ? — ^He has another. — Have these
men any vinegar ? — ^These men have none, but their friends have
some. — ^Have the peasants any other bags? — ^They have no
others.— Have they any other bread ?— They have some.

PIFTBBNTH LESSON.
' Leziane Decimaquintc^

Tlie tome (the Tolume).
Have you the firat or second yolame
of my book?

Both.

I have both.

Have you my book or my stick 1

I hnre neither the one nor the other.
The one and the other (plural).

Has your brother my gloves or his

ownl
He has both yours and his.
Has he my books- or those of the

Spaniards?
He has neither the one nor the otl^er.

THe Scotclmian/
The Irishman.
The Dutchman.

Stm, yet, some or any more.

Some more wine.

Some more money.

Some more buttons.
Have yon any more wine 1
1 have some more wine.
I have some more.
Has he any more money 1
He has some more.
Have I any more books 1
You have some more.

n tomo (il Yolume).
Ha EUa U primo, o 1 secondo tomo
delmioUbjol

U vnoeV aUro (ambidue), or

simply'am^o.
Ho 1* nno e 1' sltro. Ho ambidne.
Ha Ella il mio Ubro, o H mio baa-
tone 1
Non ho nd 1* uno nd V altro.
GKuniegUaUri.

Ha il di Lei fratello i miei guanti, o

isuol?
EgUhagUuniegUaltri.
Ha egU i miei. Ubrl, o quelli degU

SpagAuoli7
Non na gli unl nd gli altiL

Lo Scozzese.
L' Irlandese.
L* Olandese.

( Aheora, )

lAnche, \pi^<^P^
( Anco {per anco).
r Ancora vino.

< Ancora del vino (see note 1,
C XI).
e Ancoro danaro.
I Ancora del danaro.
c Ancora bottonl.
( Ancora del bottonl.

Ha EUa ancora vino 1

Ho ancora vino.

Ne ho ancora.

Ha egll ancora danaro t

NehaancQra.

Ho ancora libri 1

EUa ne ha ancora.

w

FIFTEENTH LHBSOlf.

Not any more^ no more.
I hsre no more bread.
He haf no more money.
Hare you any more butter 1
I have no more.
We have no more.
Has he any more vinegar 1
He has no more.
We have no more hooka.
We Jiave no more.
He has no more dogs.
He has no more.

Not much more, not many more.

Have you much more winel
1 have not mnoh more.
Have you many more hooka?
I have not many more.

One book more.
One good book more.
A few hooka more.
Have you a few franca more 1

I have a few more.
Have I a few more loual
You have a few more.
We have a few more.
They have a few more.

Non ho piii pane.

Non ha plii danaro.

Ha Ella ancora del hnnol

Non ne ho pih.

Non ne abbiamo pih.

Ha egli ancora aceto ?

Non ne ha plft.

Non abbianio pih Ubri.

Non ne abbiamo piik.

Non ha pih cani.

Non ne ha piii.

!Nonr-fiu moUo.
Non — fiu moUi,
Ha EUa ancora molto vino 1
Non ne ho piA molto.
Ha Ella ancora molti libr) ?
Non ne ho pi& molti.

Ancora un Ubro.
Ancora un buon libro.
Ancora alcuni llbrl (qualche libro).'
Ha Ella ancora alcuni firanehl (qual-
che franco)?
Ne ho ancora alcuni.
Ho ancora alcuni soldi ?
EUa ne ha ancora alcuni.
Ne abbiamo ancora alcunL
Ke hanno ancora akuni.

EXERCISES.

32.

Which volume of his book have you ? — ^I have the first. — ^Ifow
many volumes has this book ?•— It has two. — ^Have you my book
or my brother's ?— I have both. — Has the foreigner my comb or
my knife 1 — ^He has both. — Have you my bread or my cheese ?
I have neither the one nor the other.-^Has the Dutchman my
glass or that of my friend ? — ^He has neither the one nor the
other. — ^Has the Irishman our horses or our chests?— He has
both. — ^Has the Scotchman our boots or our waistcoats ? — ^He has
neither the one nor the other. — What has he ? — ^He has his good
iron guns. — Have the Dutch our ships or those of the Spaniards ?

PIFTBENTH LBSSON. 67

— ^Tbey have neither the one nor the other.; — ^Which ships have
they 1 — ^They have tfieir own. — ^Have we any more hay ?— We
have some more. — Has our memhant any more pepper?— rHe has
some more. — ^Has our friend any more money ?— -He has not any
more. — Has h& any more je^^ls ? — He has some more.«— Have
you any more cofiee ?— We ^have no more cofl^, hut we have
some more tea. — ^Has the Dutchman any more salt ?-^He has no
more salt, hutjie has some more hutter. — Has the painter any
more pictures ?— He has no more pictures, hut he has some more
pencils. — ^Have the sailors any more biscuits 1 — ^They have not
any more. — ^Have your sons any more books ? — ^They have not
any more. — Has the young man any more friends ?— He has no
more.

88.

Has oUr cook much more beef? — ^He has not much more.—
Has he many more chickens ? — ^He has not many more. — ^Has
the peasant much more milk ? — He has not much more milk, but
he has a great deal more butter. — Have the French many more
horses ?— They have not many more. — ^Have you much more
oil ? — I have much more. — Have we many more looking-glasses?
We have many more. — Have you one book more ? — ^I have one
mo^e. — Have our neighbours one inore garden ? — They have one
more. — ^Has our friend one umbrella more ? — ^He has no more.—
Have the Scotch a few more books?-— They have a few more. —
Has the tailor a few more buttons ?-^He has not any more.-^Has
our carpenter a few more nails ? — He has no more nails, but he '
has a few more 8ticks.-r-Have the Spaniards a few more sous ?— -
They have a few more. — ^Has the German aiew more osen ?—
He has a few more.^Have you a few more francs?*-! have no
more francs, but I have a few more crowns. — ^What more have
you ? — ^We have a^ few more ships, and a few more good sailors.
— Have I a little more money ? — ^You have a little more. — ^Have
you any more courage ? — ^I have no more. — Have you much more
vinegar ? — ^I have not much more, but my brother has a great
deal more.

84.

Has he sugar enough ?— He has not enough. — ^Have we francs
«noiq;h? — We have not enough. — Has the joiner wood enough ?

3*

58

SIXTEENTH LESSON^

—He has enough.-^Has be hammers enough ?— He has enough.
—What hammers has he ? — He )ias iron and wooden hammers.
— ^Have you rice enough ? — ^We haye not rice enough, but we
have sugar enough. — ^Have you many more gloves ?— -I have not
many more. — ^Has the Russian another ship I — He has another.
—•Has he an^er bag ?— *He has no other. — What day of the
month b it ? — ^It is the sixth. — ^How many friends have you ?r-I
have but one good friend. — ^Has the peasant too much bread ? —
He has not enough. — ^Has he much money ?— ^He has but little
money, but enough hay. — Have we the cotton or the thread coats
of the Americans ? — ^We have neither their cotton nor their thread
coats. — ^Have we the gardens which they have ? — ^We have not
those which they have^ but those which our neighbours have. —
Have you any more hooey ? — ^I have no more.— Have you any
more oxen ?— «I have not any more.

SIXTEENTH LESSON-
Lezime Dedmasesta.

Several,

Several mexu
Several childreiT.
Several knivea.

The father.

The child.

The ink.

The inkstand.

The cloak.
The cake (the paatry the pie).
The ptnall cake.
The macaroni.
The paatry-oook.
Petty-paities.

J Diversi (moUifparecchi).
I Vara.

Diversi uomlni.

Diversi fanciuUi (bambini). .

Vazii colteUl.

II padre.

II fanciuUo (U bambino).

L' inchiostro.

ncalamaio.

II maniello (il paatrano).

II pasticcio.

II pasticcino.

1 maccheroni.

D pasticciere.

Pasticclni.

8IXTBBNTH LESSON.

w

As much*
As many,

Asmueh-^as.
As many — as.

Aa mnch bread aa wine.
Aa many men aa ehildien.

Tanio.
Tand.

Tanti^y^'
\come.

Tanto paae qnanco vino (che ar

come vino).
Tanti uomini quanti fimciolli (oome

or che fandttlli). '

Have you aa much gold aa ailver 1
I have aa much of thia aa of that. \
I have aa mnch of the latter aa of (

tlia£mner. )

I have aa much of the one aa of the

other.
Here yon aa many boots aa handker-

chiefal
I have aa many of these aa of those.
I have 88 many of the former

the latter.
I have aa many of the one aa of the

other.

those. ^

' aa of (

Quite (or just), as much, as
many,
I have quite aa'mnch of thia aa of

that.
Quite aa much of the one aa of the

other.
Q,oite aa much of theae aa of those.

Quite aa many of the one aa of the
other.

An enemy, enemiea.
My dear fHend.

Dear.

The heart.

Ha EUa tanto oro qnanto argento 1
Ho tanto di qneato qnanto di qnello.

Ho tanlo deU* nno qnanCo del-

Pallitt,
Ha Ella tanU stivall qnanti &iso-

letUI

Ho tanto di qneati qnanto dl qnsUL

Ho tanto de^ nnl qnanto d«gll

altri.

AUrettamoj aUrettanU.

Ho altiettanto di qoesto qnanti di

quelle.
Altrettanto dell' nno qnanto dal-

1* altro.
Altrettanto di queati quanto di

Altrettanto degU nni qointi degii
altri.

Un nemico, nemid.

Mio caro amlco (yocative).

Caro.

II cuore.

Obi. A. Words in the singular, having one of the liquid conaonantSi I, m,
% r, before their final vowel, may loae it (except before words beginning with

-

1 Though ehe and eovru are aometlmes used as the correlatives of taniOf it is
only tolerated, and none of the great writera, or indeed no Italiana who speak
Ihdr language correctly, uae any dkil^ but quanio^ ^uoiiM, aa the oorrelatlveaof

60

SIXTEENTH LESSON.

• followed by a conionant). The vowels aiter / and r, however, are ofkener

dropped than those after m and i
The linen thread.
The faithful hearu

Your welfare.
My opinion.

l\ja diJino (instead of /2o).

11 euor (or por) fedele (instead of

euore or core).
II bm vostro (Instead Of bttu),
U parer mio (instead ofpartre^^)

More (a comparative adverb).
More bread.
'More men.
Than.
More bread than wine.
More knives than sticks.
More of this than of that.
More of the one than of the other.
More of these than of those.
More of the ones than of the others.
I hftve more of your sugar than of

mine.
He has mora of our books tisan of his
own.

Piu.

Piii pane.
Piii uomini.
CAe.

Piii pane che vino.
Piik coltelli che bastoni.
Piii di questo che di qnello.
Piil dell' uno che deU* altro.
Piti di questi che di quelli.
Piii degU uni che degli altri.
Ho piii del vostro zucchero cbe del

mio.
EgU ha pih del nostri libri che M

suoi.

ObM. B. Q^anto^ the, and come, ere employed for the comparative of
equality, but du only for the comparative of superiority and minority.

Lessy fewer.
Less wine than bread.
Less knives than sticks.

Meno.

Meno vino che pane.
Meno coltelli che baatoni.

Leas than L | Meno di me.

Obf. jC. After menOf than is rendered by di before a pronoun. Ex.
Less than he. Meno di lui.

Less than we.
Leas than you.
Less than they.

They.
As they.

Than they.

Aff much as you.
As much as he.
As diuch as they.

Meno di noi.

Meno di vol (di Le^.

Meno di loro.

Loro.

Quanto loro.
c Di loro.
I Che loro.
I Tanto qnanto Lei, EUa, vol (Lovo).
} Tanto quanto lui.
Tanto quanto loro.

> But as soon as the word following begins with • followed by a consonant,
there is no elision. We say : U wU splendcnU^ the splendid sun ; un bene t^ror
prjmaric^ an extraordinary benefit ; tin parere ttranOf a strange opiidon, and
not il nl wpUndetUtf un hen Btraordmario^ un parer atrano.

8IXTEBNTH LESSOIf* 6i

EXERCISES.
85.
Have you a horse? — ^I have several. — ^Has he several coats ?
—He has only one. — Who has several looking-glasses ? — ^My
brother has several. — What lookmg-glasses has he? — ^He has
beautiful kx>king.glasses. — ^Who has good petty-patties ? — Several
pastry-cooks have some. — Has your brother a child ? — ^He has
several. — ^Have you as much coffee as tea ? — ^I have as much of
the one as of the other. — Has this n^an a son ? — He has several.
— ^How many sons has he ? — He has four. — How many children
have our friends ? — They have many : they have ten. — ^Have we
as much bread as butter ? — ^You have as much of the one as of
the other. — ^Has this man as many friends as enemies ? — ^He has
as many of the one as of the other. — Have we as many spoons as
knives ? — ^We have as many of the one as of the other. — ^Has
your father as much gold as silver? — ^He has more of the latter
than of the former. — ^Has the captain as many sailors as ships ?
— ^He has more of the latter than of the former. — ^He has more of
the one than of the other.

36.
Have you as many guns as I ? — I have as many. — ^Has the
foreigner as much courage as we ?^— He has quite as much.—
Have we as much good as bad coffee ? — ^We have as much of the
one as of the other .^-Have our neighbours as much cheese as
milk ? — ^They have more of the latter than of the former. — Have
your sons as many petty-patties as books ? — ^They have more oi
the latter than of the former ; more of the one than of the other.
— ^How many noses has the man ? — He has but one. — How many
feet has he ? — He has several. — ^How many cloaks have you ? —
I have but one, but my father has more than I ; he has five. —
Have my children as much courage as yours? — ^Yours have
more than mine. — ^Have I as much money as you ? — ^You have
iess than I. — ^Have you as many books as I ? — ^I have less than
you.— Have I as many enemies as your father ? — ^You have fewer
than he. — Have the Russians as many children as we ? — We
have fewer than they. — ^Have the French as many ships as we ?

63 SIXtSENTH LESSON.

They have fewer than we. — Have we as many jewels as they 1
— We have fewer than they. — Have we fewer clothes than the
children of our friends ? — ^We have fewer than they.

37.

Who has fewer friends than we ?— Nobody has fewer — Have
you as much of your wine as of mine ? — ^I have as much of yours
as of mine. — Have I as many of your books as of mine l — You
have fewer of mine than of yours. — Has the Turk as much of
your money as of his own ? — ^He has less of his own than of ours.
— Has your baker less bread than money ? — ^He has less of the
latter than of the former. — ^Has our merchant fewer dogs than
horses ? — He has fewer of the latter than of the former ; fewer
of the one t)ian of the other. — ^Have your servants more sticks
tlian spoons ? — They have more of the latter than of the former.
— ^Has our cook as much butter as beef? — He has as much of the
one as of the other. — Has he as many chickens as birds.?— He
has tnore of the latter than of the former.

38.

Has the carpenter as many sticks as nails ? — ^He has as many
of these as of those. — ^Have you more biscuits than glasses ? — ^I
have more of the latter than of the former.-r-^Has our friend more
sugar than money ?— He has not so much of the latter as of the
former. — Has he more gloves than umbrellas ? — ^He has not so
many of the latter as of the former. — ^Who has more soap than- 1 ?
— My son has more.-^Who has more pencils than he? — ^The
painter has more. — ^Has he as many horses as I ? — He has not so
many horses as you, but he has more pictures. — ^Has the mer-
chant fewer oxen than we ? — ^He has fewer oxen than we, and we
have less com than he.— Have you another note ?-— I have ano-
ther.— ^Has your son one more inkstand ? — ^He has several more.
— Have the Dutch as many gardens as we ? — ^We have fewer
than they. — ^We have less bread and less butter than they. — We
have but little money, but enough bread, beef, cheese, and wine«
—•Have you as much courage as our neighbour's son ? — I have
just as much. — Has the youth as many notes as we ? — ^He has
just as many.

SEVENTEENTH LESSON.
Leziane Dedmctsettima.

OP THE iNPmmvE.

Tliere tie in Italian thne Conjugations, which are distinguished by the tennl
nation of the Present of the Infinidve, viz.

1. The first has iu infinitive terminated in abi, as :—

parlofie, to spealf ;

comprare^ to buy:

tagUare, to cut.

Z, The second in nfe, as >-

teflierny tofiBar;

peidere, to lose ;

credere, to beliere.

3. The third in in, as:-^

■entire, to feel ;

fintre^ to finish;

udtre, to hear.

Each yerb we shall give hereafter wUl harvo the number of the cteas to
which it belongs marked after it. The verbs marked with an asterisk (*) are
Irregular.

Fear.

Shame.

Wrong.

Right.

Time.

Courage.

A mind, a wish.

To work.
To speak.
Have yon a mind to work 1

I have a mind to work.

He has not the courage to speak.

Panra, timore.

Vergogna.

Totto.

Ragione, diritto.

Tempo.

Coraggio.

Deslderio or voglia.

All these words re-
quire the prepo-
sition Di, o( after
them, when fbl*
lowed by any in-
finitive yerb. Ex.

Are you afraid to apeakl
I am ashamed to speak.

• To cut.
To cut it

Lavorare 1.

Parlare 1.

Ha Ella deslderio o voglia di lavo*

rare?
Ho deslderio o voglia di lavorare.
Egli non ha coraggio di parlare.

Ha Ella paura di parlare?
Ho vergogna di parlare.

Tagliare 1.
Tagllartoi

64

SEVEirr££NTH LES60N.

Obt, In Italian, as in English, the accusative of the personal pronoutaB and
theiehitiTe tu are placed after the Infinitive ; but in Italian the pronoon is
joined to the verb in the Infinitive (which loses its final vowel), the present par-
ticiple, and in the imperative (of which more hereafter). Ex.

To cut them. i TagUarJk

To cut some. I TagUame.

Have you time to cut the bread?
I have time to cut it.
Has he a mind to cut trees 1
He has a mind to cut some.

To buy.
To bay some more.
To buy one.
• To buy two.

To buy one more.
To buy two more.

Ha Ella tempo di tagliare 11 panel
Ho tempo di tagUarHo.
Ha egli desiderio dl tagUare albert 1
Ha desiderio di tagliarne. .

Comprare {comperare) 1*
Comprame ancora.
Comprame uno.
Comprame due.

CompranM ancora uno.
Comprame ancora due

To break.
To pick up.

To m^d, to repair.
To look for, to seek.

Rompere* 2.
c Raccorre* (raccogUere*) 2.
( Raccattare 1.
r Accommodare 1.
< Raccommodaie 1.
i Assettare I.

Gercare 1.

Have you a mind to buy one more
. horse 1 I

I have a mind to buy one more. {

I

Have you a mind to buy some books'?
I have a mind to buy some, but I have

no money.
Are you afraid to break the glasses 1

I am afraid to break them.

Has he time to worki i

He has time, but no mind to work.

Am I right in buying a horse 1
Ton toe Bot wrong in buying one.

Ha Ella desiderio di compraie an-
cora nn cavallo 7

Ho desiderio di comprame ancora
uno.

Ha Ella desiderio di comprare libri?

Tin desiderio dl comprame, ma non
ho danaro.

Ha Ella paura* di rompare i bio
chieri7

Ho paura di romper^i

Ha egli tempo di lavorare7

Ha tempo, ma non ha vogUa dl
lavorare.

Ho io ngione di comprare un

vallo?
Ella non ha torto dl <

SBYBNTEBNTH LESSON. 65

EXERCISES.
39.
Have you still a mind to buy my friend's horse ? — ^I have still
a mind to buy it, but I have no more money. — Have you time to
A'ork ? — I have time, but no mind to work. — ^Has your brother
time to cut some sticks ? — ^He has time to cut some.— rHas he a
mind to cut 'some bread ? — ^He has a mind to cut spme, but he
has no knife. — ^Have you time to cut some cheese ? — ^I have time
to cut some. — ^Has iie a desire to cut the tree ? — He has a desire
to cut it, but he has no time. — ^Has the tailor time to cut the
cloth ? — ^He has time to cut it. — ^Have I time^to put the trees ? —
You have time to cut them. — Has the painter a mind to buy a
horse ? — ^He has a mind to buy two. — Has your captain time to
speak ? — He has time, but no desire to apeak. — Are you afmid
to speak ? — I am not afraid, but I am ashamed to speak. — ^Am I
right in buying a gun ? — ^You are right in buying one. — la your
friend right in buying a great ox ?— He is wrong in buying one.
«— Am I right in buying little oxen ?-^You are right in buying
some.

40.
Have you a desire to speak t — ^I have a desire, but I have not
the courage to speak. — ^Have you the courage to cut your arm ?
— ^I have, not the courage to cut it.— Am I right in speaking ? —
You are not wrong in speaking, but you are wrong in cutting my
trees. — Has the son of your friend a desire to buy one more bird ?
— He has a desire to buy one more. — Have you a desire to buy
a few more horses ? — ^We have a desire to buy a few more, but
we have no more money. — ^What has our tailor a mind to mend ?
— He has a mind to mend our old clothes. — Has the shoemaker
time to mend our boots ? — He has time, but he has no mind to
mend them. — ^Who has a mind to mend our hats ? — ^The hatter
has a mind to mend them. — ^Are you afraid to look for my horse ?
— ^I am not afraid, but I have no time to look for it. — What have
you a mind to buy ? — ^We have a mind to buy something gckxi,
and our neighbours have a mind to buy something beautiful .«—
Are their children afraid to pick up some nails 1 — ^They are not

66 SBySNTEBNf U LESSON

afraid to piok up some. — Hbyb you a mind to break my jewel 1
— I have a mind to pick it up, but not to break it. — ^Am I wrong
in picking up your gloves? — ^You are not wrong in picking them
upi but you, are wrong in cutting them. •

41.

Have you the courage to break these glasses ? — ^I have the
courage, but I have no mind to break them. — Who has a mind to
break our looking-glass ? — Our enemy has a mind to break it.— •
Have the foreigners a mind to break our guns ? — ^They have a
mind, but they have not the courage to break them. — Have you
a mind to break the captain's ship.? — I have a mind, but I am
afraid to break it. — Who has a mind to buy my beautiful dc^ ?
— Nobody has a mind to buy it. — Have you a desire to buy my
bojjutiful trunks, or those of the Frenchman? — ^I have a desire to
buy yours, and not those of the Frenchman. — Which books has
the Englishman a mind to buy ? — He has a ' mind to buy that
which you have, that which your son has, and that which mine
has. — Which gloves have you a mind tp seek ? — I have a mind
to seek yours, mine, and our children's. .

4«.

Which looking-glasses have the enemies a desire to break ? —
They have a desire to break those which you have, those which
f have, and those which our children and our friends have. — ^Has
your father a desire to buy these or those petty-patties ? — ^He has
a mind to buy these. — Am I right in picking up your notes ? —
You are right in picking them up. — Is the Italian right in seeking
your handkerchief? — He is wrong in seeking it. — ^Have you a
mind to buy another ship ? — I have a mind to buy another. — Has
our enemy a mind to buy one ship more ? — ^He has a mind to buy
several more, but he is afraid to buy some. — Have you two
horses ? — ^I have only one, but I have a wish to buy one more.

EIGHTEENTH LESSON.

Lezione DedmouAtana.

To make.
To do.

To he wilUng.
To wish:

Fare^ 1.

I

I Voler^ 2. {denderare 1.)

WOlyoul

Are you wiiliug 1

>Vuol£]la1 (^

Do you wish?

J

I win, I am wilUng, I wish.

Voglio {or vo')

WiU he? is he wilUng? does be wieh?

Vuoleglil

He WiU, he is wUUng, he wishes.

Egli Yuole.

We will, we are willing, we wish.

Vogliamo.

Volete.

They wlU, they are willing, they wish.

YogUono.

Ihon wilt, thou art willing^ thou

Vuoi.

wiBhest.

.

(Volete i;

Do you wish to make my fire?

I am willing to make it.

I do not wish to make it.

Does he wish to buy your horse 1

Hb wishes to buy it.

He does not wish to buy it.

Vuoi Ella fare U mio fuooo 1

Voglio farjo.

Non Voglio faxlo,

Vuoi egli comprare U di Lei caTallo I

Egli vuoi comprarfo.

Egli non Yuol comprarto.

To bum.

To warm.
To tear.

Thefaroth.
My bed.

< Brudare 1.
( Abbruciare 1.
i Scaldare 1.
( Riscaldare 1.
Stracdaie 1.

nbrodo.
11 mio letto.

EIGHTEENTH LESSOlf.

Togo.
With or ai the house of.
To or to the house of.
To he.
To be with the man or at the man's

house.
To go to the man or to the man's

house.
To be with his (one's) friend, or at his

(one's) friend's house.
To go to my father, or to my lather's
house.

Andare* 1.

> In casa di^ or da.

Essere* 2.
i Essere in casa dell' nomo.
( Essere dall' uomo.
i Andare in casa dell' uomo.
c Andare dair uomo.
( Essere in casa del suo amlco
( Essere dal suo amlco.
i Andare da mio padre.
( Andare in casa di mio padss.

At home.

To be at home.
To go home.

To be with me,
To go to me,
To be with him, her.
To go to him, her,
To be with us,
To go to us^

To bo with you,

In casa.

(In

■ at my house.

- to my house.

- St his house.

— to his house..

— at our house.

— to our house.

— at your house.

— to your house. ■

casa sua.
Essere in casa.
Andare a casa.

Fssere in casa mia ) ^

me.'

To go to you.

To be with them, — at their house.
To go to them, ^ to their house.

To be with some one, — at som^ one's

house.
To go to some one, -^ to some one's

nouse.

Andare a casa mia
Essere in casa sua ) da lul, dft M
Andare a casa sua > (fern.)
Essere In casa nostra Jd^nol.*
Andare a casa nostra >
!?.•»« I in «*a sua, di t.ei^
^"*^$« "vostra.divoildaLel.
^„d^ > a casa sua, di Lei f da Tol.

. S""vo8tra,dlToiJ
Essere in casa loro l^i^g^
Andare a casa lore i

Essere in casa J 1 '"*^;

C dl qualcuBO.

Andare a casa

To be with no one, — at no one's i f^^Q essere.
house. i

<di

/-in casa aim

J da nessuno.

I in casa di aJ

^daalcuno.

uno.

qualcuno.
in casa dl nessuno.

alcuno.

To go to no on^
house. '

— to no one's

r a casa di nessuno.
Non andare 7 da alcuno.

( a casa di alcuno.

1 > We cannot say in Italian da m«, da noi, when we speak of ourselves.

2 > Ex. Voglio andare a cata viia (not da me), I wish to go home. But : Aflo
fraidh vuol vmire da me. My brother wishes to come to me ; VcgUamo andara
a eaaa nostra (no^ da not), We will go home. But : Voglumo, i Signori^ venire
danoi? OentleuMn, will you come to us 1

SIGHTEBNTH LESSON.

G9

Atwhogekmue? Wiihwhom?
To whose house ? To whom f

To whom (or to whose houae) do you

wish to go 7
I wish to go to no one (to no. one's

house).
At whose bouse (with whom) is your

brotner?
He is at ours (with us).
Is be at home 1
H^ is not at home.

To drink.
Where%

i Da chi? in easa di chi ?

Da chi Yuol Ella andare 1

Non vos^o andare a casa di nearano.

DachldUdiLeifrateUol

Egli i in casa nostra.
£i egli in casa7
. Non dine

Arefou7.

E Ella 7 (SieteT0i7)

Tired.

Stance, Usso.

Are you tired 7

fe: Ella 8tanca7 (Siete lasso 7)

lam tired.

Sono stance.

I am not tired.

Ishe7

£:es^i7

He is.

EgUd.

We are.

Noi siamo.

You are.

Yoi siete.

They are.

•

Eglino aeileno sono.

Thou art.

SeL-

JBfire* or leoertf^ 2.

Doet ? ovef onde f donde f

What do you ifrish to do 7

What does your brother wish to do 7

Is. your father at homel
Whal wUI the Germans buy 7
They will buy something good.

They win buy nothing.

Do they ^ab to buy a book7

They wish to buy one.

Ho yotfwish to drink any tiling 7

! do not wSah to drink any thing.

Che vuol Ella Iare7 o che Toleto vol

Iare7
Che YuoI fare il dl Lei o suo fratello 1

E in casa vostro padre 7

Che vogUono comprare i Tedeschi7

Vogliono comprare qualche cosa di

buono.
Non TOgUono comprare niente.
Vogliono eglino comprare nn.libTo7
Yogllono compram« uno.
Yuoi EUa here qualche cosa 7
NoiP voglio beyer niente.

70 BIGHTBBNTH LX8S0N.

EXERCISES.

43.
Do you wish to work ?— I am willing to work, but I am tirod*
— ^Do you wish to break my glasses ? — ^I do not wish to break
them — ^Are you willing to look for my son ? — ^I am willing to look
for. him. — What do you wish to pick up I— I wish to pick up that
crown and that franc. — ^Do you wish to pick up this or that sou ?
— ^I wish to pick up both. — ^Does your neighbour wish to buy
these or those combs ? — He wishes to buy both these and jthose.
— Does that man wish to cut your foot ? — ^He ddes- not wish to
out mine, but his own.-^Does the painter wish to bum some oil ?
— He wishes to bum some. — ^What does the shoemaker wish to
mend ? — ^He wishes to mend our old boots. — ^Does the tailor wish
to mend any thing ? — ^He wish^ to mend some waistcoats.— la
our enemy willing to bum his ship ? — ^He is not willing to bum
his own, but ours. — ^Do you wish to do any thing ? — I do not wish
to do any thing. — ^What do you wish to do ? — ^We wish to warm
our tea and our father's coffee.*— Do you wish to warm my
brother's broth ?-<^I am willing to warm it. — ^Is your servant will-
ing to make my fire ? — ^He is willing to make it, but he has no
time.

44.
' Do you wish to speak ? — I do wish to speak. — ^Is your son wilU
ing to study ? — He is not willing to study. — ^What does he wish
to do ? — He wishes to drink some wine. — ^Do you wish to buy any
thing ? — I wbhto buy something. — ^What do you wish to buy t—
I wish to buy some jewels. — ^Are you willing to mend my hand-
kerchief?— ^I am willing to mend it. — Who will mend our son's
clothes ? — We will mend them. — Does the Russian wish to buy
this or that picture ? — ^He will buy neither this nor that. — ^What
does he wish to buy ? — ^He wishes to buy some ships.-^Which
looking-glasses does the Englishman wish to buy ?-^He wishes to
buy those which the French have, and those which the Italians
have. — ^Does your father wish to look for his umbrella or for his
slick ? — ^He wishes to look for both. — ^Do you wish to drink some
wine ? — ^I wish to drink some, but I have not any. — ^Does the
wUor wish to drink some milk ?— He does not wish to drink any ;

BfGHTBBNTH I.BSSON. 71

he is not thirsty.— -What does the captain wish to drink ? — ^He
does not wbh to drink any thing. — What does the hatter wish to
make ? — ^He wishes. to make some hats. — ^Does the carpenter wish
to make any thing ? — He wbhes to make a large ship. — Do you
wish to buy a bird ? — ^I wish to buy several.

45.
Does the Turk wish to buy more guns than knives ? — ^He wishes
to buy more of the latter than of the former. — How many cork,
screws does your servant .wish to buy ? — ^He wishes to buy three.
— Do you wish to buy many corks ? — We wish to buy only a
few, but our children wish to buy a good many. — Will your
children seek the gloves that we have ? — ^They will not seek those
that you have, but those which my father has. — ^Does any one
wish to tear your coat ? — ^No one Wishes to tear it.-^Who wishes
to tear my books? — ^Your children wish to tear them. — With
whom is our father ? — He is at his friend's.— To whom do you
wish to go ? — ^I wish to go to you. — Will you go to my house ?—
I will not go to yours, but to my brother's.— Does your father
wish to go to his friend^s ? — ^He does not wish to go tp his friend's,
but to his neighbour's. — ^At whose house is your son ? — ^He is at
our house. — Will you look for our hats, or for those of the Dutch?
— I will look for neither yours, nor for those of the Dutch, but I
will look for mine and for those of my good friends.

46.
"^m I right in warming your broth ? — ^You are right in warm-
ing it. — ^Is my servant right in warming your bed ? — ^He is wrong
in warming it. — Is he afraid to tear your coat ? — He is not afraid
to tear it, but to bum it. — ^Do your children wish to go to our
friends? — They do not wish to go to your friends, but to ours.—
Are your children at home? — They are not at home, but at their
neighbours'. — ^Is the captain at home ? — He is not at home, but
at his brothers'. — ^Is the foreigner at our brother's? — He is not at
our brother's, but at our father's. — At whose house is the English-
man?— He is at yours. — ^Is the Aknerican at our house 1 — He is
not at our house, but at his friend's. — With whom is the Italian ?
—He is with nobody ; he is at home. — ^Do you wish to go home ?
—I do not wish to go home ; I wish to go to the son of my neigh-

72 NmSTBENTH LBSSOW.

bour^x— Is your father at home ? — ^No, Sir, he is not at home.—
With whom is he ?-^Ha is with the good friends of our old
neighbour. — Will you go to any one's house ? — ^I will go to no
one's house.

47.
Where is your son ? — ^He is at home. — What will he do at
home? — He wishes to drink some good wine. — ^Is your brother
at home ? — ^He is not at home ; he is at the foreigner's. — ^What
do you wish to drink ?-*-! wish to drink some milk.-^What will
the Grerman do at home ? — ^He will werk, and drink some good
wine.— What have you at home ?— I have nothing at home. — Hits
the merchant a desire to buy as much sugar as tea ? — He wishes
to buy as much of the one as of the other. — Are you tired ? — ^I
am not tired. — ^Who is tired ? — My brother is tired. — ^Has the
Spaniard a mind to buy as many horses as asses ? — ^He wishes
to buy more of the latter than of the former .-r-Do you wish to
drink any thing ?— I do not wish to drink any thing. — How many
chickens does the cook wish to buy ? — ^He wishes to buy four.— »
Do the French wish to buy any thing ? — ^They do not wish to buy
any thing. — ^Does the Spaniaurd .wish to buy any thing ? — ^He
wishes to buy something, but he has no money. — ^Do you wish to
go (venire) to our brothers' ? — I do not wish to go to their house,
but to their children's. — Is the Scotchman at any body's house ?
— ^He is at nobody's. — ^Where is he? — ^He is at his own house.

NINETEENTH LESSON.
Lezione decimanona.

Where? WhUher? Where tof

There or (AitAer, to it, at it, in it.
To go thither .

kOve? Dove?
lOnde? Dondef

VioT ci,^

Afidarviy andard, o andart «d.

' When not united to the verb, then is expressed by in, Id, ft.

MIHBTBBICTH US801I.

78

Ok. The tebtlTe or local adverlM H andviara Joined to tho vero which kMea
its final TOweL

To he there. \ Esservi^ eeserd, ad essere Id.

hioiiyU there or thUher.
Them there, or thither.

To iakef to carry.
To send.

To leadj to take.
To conduct.

3b take U there, or thUher.

Him (object of the verb).
Them ( — ).

Him there, or ihUher.
To aend him thither.

lb tako him thither.

Them there, or thOher.
Some of it (here, or ihxiher.

To carry them thither.

To caiTj aome thllher

Win yos aend him to my fittoerl
I win aend bim thither, or to himl

The phyridan.
Toi

Ce h, ve h.
Ce U, ve U.

Portare 1.

hmare 1. Mandare 1. ^S^

(2tre3.
Menare 1.
Cord»rre*2.

{ Portarceh.
c Portaroelo.

LooxV.
LioTgU.

Ce lo, ve lo.
(InTiaredo.
ClnTiureto*
(Menarvelo.
C Condnrrelo.

Ceh {or gV). VeK {or gU).

Vene, eene.
. Portaroeli, portarrelL
Portarcene, portarrone.

rVnol EUa inTlarlo a caaa di mio
< padrel

C Yuol EUamandarlo da o a miopadrpi
r Yoglio InTianrelo.
J Yoglio inTiarodo.
] Yo^o mandanralo.
^ Voglio mandarcelo

II medico.
Venire* 8.

T4

NINETEENTH LESSON.

WhMll

To-morrow.

To-day.

Some where or tohiiherf any where

or whither.

No where, not any where.

Do you wish to go any where 1

( wish to go some where.

I do not wish to go any where.

Qnaodot

Domanl. •

OggL

In qualehe htog^^

In nesaun hugo.

Vuol Ella andare inqualclie laogol
Voglio andare in qualche luogo.
Non voglio andare in nenun laogo

TowriU.
At what o'clock 1
At one o'clock.
At two o'clock.

Half:

The quarter.

At half-past one.

At a quarter past one.
At a quarter past two.
At a quarter to one.
At twelve o'clock.

At twelve o'clock at night (midnight).

Scrivere* 2.
Ache oral
Al tocco. A un' ora.
Alle due. A due ore.

Mezzo ; /enimine, Mezza.
U quarto.

< Al tocco e mezzo.
c All' una e mezzo.

< Al tocco e un quarto.
€ Air una e nn quarto.

Alle due e un quarto.
( Al tocco meno nn quarto.
c Air una meno un quarto.

A toezzo giomo. Al vfriggfo
mezzodl.

A mezza notte.

Meno.

EXERCISES.

48.
>• we wish to go home ? — I wish to go thither. — ^Does your
ton wish to go to my house ? — He wishes to go there. — ^Is your
brothor at home ? — He is there (EgU c' i or egli o' i). — ^Whither
do you wish to go ? — I wish to go home. — ^Do your children wish
to go to my house ? — ^They do not wish to go there. — ^To whom
will you take that note ? — ^I will take it to my neighbour. — ^Will
your servant take my note to your father's? — ^He will take it
there. — ^Will your brother carry my guns to the Russian's? —
He will carry them thither, — ^To whom do our enemies wish to
carry our guns ?— They wish to carry tjiem to the Turks.—

ihkbtbbnth lbsson. 7&

Whither will the ahoemaker earry my. boots? — ^He will carry
them to your house. — ^Will he carry them home ? — ^He will not
carry them thither. — ^Will you come to me ? — ^I will not come.—
Whither do you wish to go ? — ^I wish to go to the good English.— ^
Will the good Italians go to our house ?-^They will not go thither.
— ^Whither do they wish to go ?— They will go no whero

49.
Will you take your son to my house ? — ^I will not take him to
your house, but to the captain's, — ^When will you take him to the
captain's ? — ^I will take him there to-morrow. — ^Do you wish to
take my children to the physician ? — ^I will take them thither.-^
When will you take them thither ? — ^I will take them thither to-
day. — ^At what o'clock will you take them thither ? — ^At half-past
two.— When will you send your servant to the physician? — ^I
will send him thereto-day. — ^At what o'clock?— At a quarter-
past ten. — Will you go any where ? — ^I will go some where.—
Whither will you go ? — ^I will go to the Scotchman. — Will the
Irishman come to you ? — He will come to me. — ^Will your son go
to any one ? — ^He will go to some one. — ^To whom does he wish
to go ? — ^He wishes to go to his friends. — ^Wili the Spaniards go
any wher^ — ^They will go no where.— Will our friend go to
any one ? — ^He will go tp no one.

60.
When will you take your youth to the painter's ? — ^I will take
him thither to-day. — ^Whither will he carry these birds?— He
will carry them no where.r— Wilf you take the physician to this
man ? — ^I will take him there.— When will the physician go to
your brother? — ^He will go there to-day. — ^Will you send a
servant to me ? — ^I will send one.— Will you send a child to the
painter's?- I will send one thither.— With whom is the captain ?— «
He is with nobody.— Has your brother time to come to vof
house ? — ^He has no time to come there. — ^Will the Frenchman
write one more note ? — ^He will write one more.— Has your friend
a mind to write as many notes as I ?— He has a mind to write
quite as many. — ^To whose house does be wish to send them ?—
He will send them to his friends.- Who wishes to write litUe

76

TWBZfTlETR LEBSOlf.

notes }«»The young man wishes to write some.— Do you wish to
earry many books to my father's ?-— I will (xily carry a few.

51.
Will you send one more trunk to our friend's ?— I will send
several more there. — How many more hats does the hatter wish
to send ? — He wishes to send six more. — Will the tailor send as
many boots as the shoemaker ? — ^He will send less. — ^Has your
son the courage to go to the captain's t — ^He has the courage to
go there, but he has no time. — Do you wish to buy as many dogs
as horses ? — ^I will buy more of the latter than of the fi>rmer.—
At what o'clock do you wish to send your senranUto the Dutch-
man's? — I will send him thither at a quarter to six. — ^At what
o'clock is your father at home ? — He is at home at twelve o'clock.
— ^At what o'clock does your friend wish to write his notes ? — ^He
will write them at midnight.—^Are you afraid to go to the cap.
tain's ? — I am not afraid, but ashamed to go there.

TWENTIETH LESSON.
Lezione veniesima.

TOf meaning m order to.
Have ytm money to buy bread 1

I have some to buy aome.

Will you go to your brother in order to

•eehiml
f have no time to go there to aee him.

Has your brother a knife to cut hU

bieadl
Hs has none to eat it.

Per.

Ha Ella danaro per coroprara del

panel
Ne ho per comprame.
y uole EUa andaie dal di LelfrateUo

pervederlo?
Non ho tempo di andarvl {fi an-

darvl) pervederio.
Ha un oolteUo U di Lei fratallo pel

tagUare U suo pane 1
Non ne ha per tagliailo.

TWENTIETH LESSON.

77

To sweep.

To eat.
To kin.
TosdU.

To be able {can)»
Can you ? or are you ablel
I can, or I am able.
I cannot, I am no^ al !e.
Can he 7 or is he abit 1
He can, or he is able.
He cannot, he is unable.
We can, we are able.
YoQ can, you are able.
They can, they are able.

Thou canst, art able.

Me.
(direct object or accusative).

Him.
(direct object or accusative).

{ Scopare 1.
( Spazxare 1.

Mangiare 1.

AmmoMzare 1. Ucddere* 2.

Salare 1. (Metterd^ in sale).

Potere* 2.
Pud Ella? (potete?)
Posso.
Non posso.
PudegUI
Egllpud. .
Non pud.
Postiamo.
Potete (pud).
PoBsono (ponno).

Pool.

Mi.

Lo.

To see.

Vedere* 2.

To see me.

Vederml.

To see him.

Vederlo.

To see the man.

Vedere V uomo.

To km him.

To.

A.

( Sing. Al, alio, aJT. ) {&&

To the or at the.

\ Plto. Ai (a

'),ivfi.>Le880i

( agV.

) IX.)

Singular. PhtraL

Singular,

PUiroL

To the friend. To the friends.

Air amico.

Agli amid.

To the man. To the men.

All' uomo.

Agli uomini.

To the captain. To the captains.

Al capltano.

Ai capitani.

To the coat. To the coats.

All' abito.

AgU abiti.

To the book. To the books.

AlUbro.

Ai Ubri.

To the Englishman. To the English.

Alt' Inglese.

Afi^' Inglesi.

To tha Italian. To the Italians.

All' Italiano.

Agl* Italiani.

78

TWENTIETH LESSOH.

To hmr^a hd , Gh.

(indirect object or dative). |

To me — a me. JKt.

To speak to me.

To speak to him.

To write to him.

To write to me.

To spealc to the man.

To speak to the captain.

To write to the esptain.

Can you write to me 7

I can write to you.

Can the man speak to you?

He can speak to me.

Will you write to your brother 1

I will write to him.

The basket.

The carpet.

The floor.

The caL

Pariannl.
PariargU.
Scrivergii.
Scrivermi.
Parlare all' uomo.
Parlare ai capitano.
Scrivere ai cap tano.

Pud EUascrivermil

Posso scriverle {or scriYenri).

Pud parlarie (parlarvi) V uomof

Pud parlarmi.

Vuole scrivere al di Lei fratelio 1

Voglio scrivergii.

II canestro, H paniere.

III tappeto.

II pavimento.
II gat to.

Will you send the book to the man 7
I will send it to him.

Vuole mandare 11 libro all' uomo 7
Voglio mandargiielo.

Ob9, A. When the pronoun gli precedes to or n<^ an s is inserted between
the two pronouns.

When will you send it to Um 7 | Quando vuole mandargiielo 7

I will send it to him to-morrow. I Voglio mandargiielo domani.

First person) 7^ fiw. Me.
Third person : 7>> fdnu Him.

First person : Tb iu. Us,
Second person : Tb you. You,
Third person : 7b them, TTiem,

SntOULAB.

Indirect object, Direct object,

or Dative,
Mi, or a me,
€ni,'-ahU,

Aeciuative,'
Me, or mi,
Lo,^luL

Plubal.
C^ ne, or a noL
Vt, — aeot.
Loro, — a loro.

Noi, or cL
Vi, —voL
Loro—-U,U
(fem).

Uoeshe wish tospeak toyou7 i

He does not wish to speak to me^ but I

to you. !

Vuol parlarie (parlarvi) 7
Non vuol parlare a mo^ ma a Lei, a
vol.

TWENTIETH LESSON.

79

Do yoa wish to write to him 7 i

t do not wiflh to write to him, bat to

hit brother. I

Vnoie Ella aeriTais^ 1
Non TogUo Bcrivera a lui, ma a ano
frateDo?

The fc^wlng Is the order in which the penonal pronouns miut be placed in

mo sentence «'

It to me.
It to him.
It to US.
It to you.
It to them.

Plural
Them to me.
Them to him.
Them to OS.
Them to you.
Them to them.

t Helo.
t (ffielo.
t Ce lo (ne k>).
t Veto.
Loloro.

PlunU.
tMeU.
t OUelL'
tCeU.
t VeU.
Utoro.

Ob», B. The pronouns : tnt; li, d; vi, ti, sre changed Into : nu, <€^ ec, m, m^
when they are followed by one of the prononns : A», Is, ^ gij; If^ tic

Quaado tuoI Ella mandanni il

panienl
Voglio mandarglieto (mandarreto) '
oggi.

When will you send me the basket 1
I will send it you to-day.

In the following manner the relative

pronoim tM^ some of it, is phoed with

regard to the peraonal pronoun :

Some to me.

tMoM

Some to him.

tGHene.

Some to us.

tCene.

Some to you.

t Vene.

Some to them.

Neloro.[i]

To give.

Dara* 1.

To lend.

Prestare 1.

Are yon willing to give me

some

Vttole darmi del panel or, Volet<

breadl

danni del pane.

I am willing to give yon some.

VogUodargUene (darlene), or, Voglio
darvene.

Will you lend my brother

some

Vuole prestare del danaro a mic

money?

frateUol

1 will lend him some.

Voglio prestargUene.

> N. B. The verb must be placed between ne and toro.

80

TWENTIETH LESSON.

m

H

O

Sz;

a.
<

a.

§

^8 .J ^ 4; :^

'S i ^ I i

g

i

5

ii

a

era

O ^ t> q>

ri ^ e B B B

i "B S B

i ^ *

i s" "^ ! ^

«= .- 5 :C iC 5

' "3 TJ i; oj

■a © o g B

1 I £ I a

I J ^ ^ 5

S? K g * ^

^ E E i; s

^ 5 ^ ^ 5

^ ^ jQ _a ^
CO O O O O

1^

I I I J

•s s a

I I tf tf I

^ S I 4 5

P 3 S3
090

'S 2

If

I

f 5 if ET a

^1

I 5

^ ^ ^

s

TWENTIBTH tBSSON. 81

EXERCISES.
52.

Has the carpenter money enough to buy a hammer? — ^He has
enough to buy one.-— Has the caf^tain money enough to buy a
ship ? — ^He has not enough to buy one.—^Has the peasant a desire
to buy s6me bread ? — He has a desire to buy some, but he has not
money enough to buy some. — Has your son ink to write a note ?
— He has not any to write one. — Have you time to see my
brother 1 — ^I have no tinie to see him. — Does your father wish to
see me ? — He does not wish to see you.^— Has your servant a
broom {unos eopino) to sweep the floor ? — ^He has one to sweep it.
— Is he willing to sweep it ?— -tie is willing to sweep it.— Has the
sailor money to buy some tea ? — ^He has none to buy any. — Has
your oook money to buy some beef? — He has some to buy some.
— Has he money to buy some chickens ?— He haa some to buy
some. — Have you salt enough to salt my beef ?-^I have enough
to salt it. — Will your friend come to my house in order to see
me ? — He will neither come to your house, nor see you. — ^jElas
your neighbour a desire to kill his horse ? — He has no desire to
kill it— Will you kill your friends ? — ^I will only kill my enemies.

68.

Can yoa cut me some bread ? — ^I can cut you some. — Have
you a knife to cut me some ? — ^I have one. — Can you mend my
gloves ? — ^I can mend them, but I have no wish to do it. — Can the
tailor make me a coat ? — ^He can make you one. — ^Will you speak
to the physician ? — ^I will speak to him. — Does your son wish to
see me in order to speak to me ? — ^He wishes to see you in order
to give you a crown.-*-Doe8 he wish to kill me ? — ^He does not
wish to kill you ; he only wishes to see you. — ^Does the son of
our old friend wish to kiU an ox ? — ^He wishes to kill two. — ^Who
has a mind to kill our cat? — Our neighbour's child has a mind
to kill it.— How much money can you send me ? — ^I can send you
twenty francs. — ^Will you send me my carpet? — ^I will send it
you. — ^Will you send the shoemaker any thing? — ^I will send him
my boots.— Will you send him your coats ?— No, I will send them

4*

62 TWENTIETH LESSON.

to my tailor.— Can the tailor send me my coat ? — He cannot send
it you.— Are your children able to write to me ? — ^They are able
to write to you. — Will you lend me your basket ? — ^I will lend it
you.

^ 64.

Have you a glass to drink your wine ? — ^I have one, but I have
no wine ; I have only tea. — Will you give me money to buy some ?
— ^I will give you some, but I have only a little. — Will you give
me that which you have ? — I will give it you. — Can you drink
as much wine as milk ? — ^i can drink as much of the one as of the
other. — ilas our neighbour any coajs to make a fire ? — ^He has
some to make one, but he has no money to buy bread and butter.
— Are you willing to lend him some ? — ^I am willing to lend him
some. — Do you wish to speak to the German ? — ^I wish to speak
to him. — Where is he ? — ^He is with the son of the American.*-
Does the Grerman wish to speak to me ? — He wishes to speak to
you. — Does he wish to speak to my brother or to yours ? — ^He
wishes to speak to both. — Can the children of our neighbour
work ? — They can work, but they will not.

55.

Do you wish to speak to the children of the Dutchman ? — I
wish to speak to them. — ^What will you give them ? — I will give
them good petty.patties. — Will you lend them any thing ?— I am
willing to lend them something. — Can you lend them any thing ?
— I cannot lend them any thing ; I have nothing. — ^Has the cook
some more salt to salt the beef? — ^He has a little more. — ^Has he
some more rice ? — ^He has a great deal more. — ^Will he give me
some ? — He will give you some.— Will he give some to my little
children ?— He will give them some. — ^Will he kill this or that
chicken ? — ^He will neither kill this nor that. — ^Which ox will he
kill?— He will kill that of the good peasant.— Will he kill this or
that ox ?— He will kill both.— Who will send us biscuits ?— The
baker will send you sonre. — Have you any thing to do? — I have
nothing to do.

56.

What has your son to do? — He has to write to his good friends
^nd to the captain.— To whom do you wish to speak? — I wish to

TWBNTY-PIEST LESSON.

88

■peak to the Italians and to the French. — Do you wish to give
them some money ? — I wish to give them some. — ^Do you wish to
give this man some bread ? — I wish to give him some. — ^Will you.
give him a coat ?^I will give him one. — ^Will your friends give
me some coffee? — They will give you some. — ^Will you lend me
your books ? — I will lend them you. — Will you Jend your neigh-
hours your mattrass ?-*I will not lend it them. — ^Will you lend
them the looking-glass? — ^I will lend it them. — ^To whom will you
lend your umbrellas ? — ^I will lend them to my friends. — ^To
whom does your friend wish to lend his bed ? — ^He will lend it to
nobody.

TWENTY-FIRST LESSON.
Lezione vetUesima primcu

To whom ?

A ehi f (a question followed by

the object indirect in the

dative).

Whom?

CM? (for persons.)

What?

Che f (for things.)

DBCLRN8I0N OP THE INTERROGATIVB PRONOUNS.
CM? Who?— Che? What?

For Fhr \ F^perworu.

permnu, tking9. \

Sabjeet, or ^

Nomina- (who? What 1 i Chll

tive. >

Ofagaec Indt- ^

rect in the (Of whom? Of what?

Genitive. )
Object indi- ^„ . ^

Dative.

^Whoae?

To what?

Dichi?

Achi?

Fbrthing9.

Chel

Olchel

Aotef

84

TWENTY-FIHIT LESSON.

Objeet direct, p

or AccuM- > Whom 7

tive. i

Object indi- \ „

rectinthc i ^™'",

Whati

From
what?

Chi?

Dachil

CImV

Dacfac)

Chi? who? has no plural, and always refers to persons, without distinetloa
of sex, as who in English.

Che? whati has no plural, and always relates to things.

Ob». A, In the the letter e may be substituted by an apostrophe before ■
▼owel, but not the letter iindd.

To answer.
To answer the man.
To answer the men.

Who is It 7
Of whom do you wish to speak7

What do you wish to say 7

To whom do you wish to answer?
I wish to answer my brother.

To answer him.

To answer you.

To answer them.
Ob9. B, Ijoro, them or to them, is
pronouns.

To answer the note.

To answer it

To answer the notes.

To snswer them.
To it, to them.
Will you answer my note 7
I will answer it.
Will you answer the men 7
I will answer them.
My lather withes to speak to them.

Rispondere* 2.
Rispondere all* tfomo.
Rispondere s^^ uomini.

Chid7

DichiTuolparlare7
^ Che vuol dire 7
c Che cosa tuoI direl

A chi Tuole rispondere?

YogUo rispondere a mio firateUa

Rispondergli.

Risponderie (the feminine U is hers
used out of politeness).

Risponder ioro.
not joined to the verb like the other

Rispondere al biglietto.
Risponderd, risponder? L
Rispondere ai biglietti.
Risponderd, rispondervi.
Ci or Yi.

Yuol rispondere al mio biglietto 1
YogUo risponderd (risponderd).
Yuol rispondere agli uomini?
VogHo risponder Ioro.
Mio padre tuoI pariar Ioro.

Hie theatre.
Xhe play.
The ball.

To or at the theatre.
To — at the play.
To — at the ball.
To -* at the garden.

11 teatro.
Lo spettacolo.
II balio.
Singular.
Al teatro.
Alio spettacolo.
AI ballo.
Al giardino.

Plural.
AitoatrL
Ag^i spettaoolL
AibaUi.
Ai giardini.

TWBNTT-PIRST LESSON.

60

Hie magBzine.
The warehouse.
The storehooae.
The conntlng-hoaae.
The market.

II magazzino.

II banco Qo studio).
II mercato.

There^ IhUher.

To go there, thither.

To be there.
Do yoa wish to go to the theatre?
I wish to go there,
la your brother at the theatre?

He ia there.
He is not there.
Where is he? •

a or w.

Andarci or andarvi.

Esserci or esservi.

Vttol Ella andare al teatro.

Voglio andarci (andarri).

II di Lei fratello d al teatro (or in

teatro) ?
VI «.

Non c' ^ (non vi d).
Oy»iegU?

In.

Ia your fJEither in his garden?
He is tliere.

.Where is the merchant ?
He is in his warehouse.

Nel^ neUoj neif neglU in.
^ nel Buo glardino il dl Lei padxel
EgUc'^oregliT'd.
DoY'dilmercante?
JS nel suo magazzino.

What have you to do ? | Che ha EUa da fare ?

Obs. C. The preposition io is rendered by da when it precedes an infinittvi
depending on the verb attre, to have, or ewer«, to be.

I have nothing to do.

What has the man to drink ?

He has nothing to drink.

Have you any thing to do?

I have to answer a note.

1 have to speak to your brother.

Where is your brother?

The place.
Be is In that place.
Whither does he wish to go ?
He wisties to go into the garden.
Does he wish to go to the garden ?
He wishes td go there.

Non ho da £Bur niente.

Che ha da here V uomo ?

Non ha da ber niente.

Ha Ella qualche cosa da fiire?

Ho da rispondere ad un bigliettp.

Ho da pariare al di I^ei fratello.

Dov' d suo fratello?

11 luogo.

E in questo luogo.

Ove vuol egU andare?

Yttol andare al glardino.

y ttol egli andare al glardino 1

Vaol andarci (pr andarvi).

EXERCISES.

67.

Wai you write to me? — ^I will write to you. — Will you wnie
to the Italian ? — I will write to him. — ^Will your brother write to

86 • TWBNTT-FIRST LBSSON.

the English ?— He will write to them, but they have no mind to
answer him. — ^Will you answer your friend ? — I will answer him.
—But whom will you answer ? — I will answer my good father.
— Will you not answer your good friends ? — I will answer them.
— ^Who will write to you ? — ^The Russian wishes Xq write to me.
—Will you answer him ? — ^I will not answer him.— Who will
write to our friends ?-^The children of our neighbour will write
to them. — ^Will they answer them ? — They will answer them.—
To whom do you wish to write ? — I wish to write to the Russian.
— ^Will ho answer you ? — ^He wislies to answer me, but he can-
not.— Can the Spaniards answer us ? — ^They cannot answer us,
but we can answer them.-»To whom do you wish to send this
note ? — I wish to send it to the joiner.

58.
What have you to do ? — ^I have to write. — ^What have you to
write ? — ^I have to write a note. — To whom ? — ^To the carpenter.
—What has your father to drink ?-— He has to drink some good
wine. — Has your servant any thing to drink ? — ^He has to drink
some tea. — What has the shoemaker to do? — He has to mend my
boots.^-What have you to mend ? — ^I have to mend my thread
handkerchiefs. — To whom have you to speak 1 — ^I have to speak
to the captain. — ^When will you speak to him ? — ^To-day .—Where
will you speak to him? — At his house. — To whom has your
brother to speak ? — He has to speak to your son.— What has the
Englishman to do ? — He has to answer a note. — ^Which note has
he to answer ? — ^He has to answer that of the good German.-
Have I to answer the note of the Frenchman ?— You have to an-
Bwer it. — ^Which note have you to answer ?-*I have to answer
that of my good friend. — ^Has your father to answer a note ?—
He has to answer one. — ^Who has to answer notes ? — Our chil-
dren have to answer a few. — ^Will you answer the notes of the
merchants? — I will answer them. — ^Will your brother answer
this or that note ? — He will answer neither this nor that. — ^Will
any one answer my note ? — No one will answer it.

59.
Which notes will your father answer ? — He will answer only
those of his good friends. — Will he answer my note ?— He will

TWENTY-FIRST LESSON. 87

answer it. — Have you to answer any one? — ^I have to answer no
one. — ^Who will answer my notes ?— Your friends will answer
them. — ^Have you a mind to go to the ball 1 — I have a mind to go
there. — When will you go there ?— To-day. — ^At what o'clock ?
— ^At haltpast ten.— When will you take your child to the play ?
— ^I will take him there to-morrow. — At what o'clock will you
take him there ? — ^At a quarter to six. — ^Where is your son ? — ^He
is at the play. — ^Is your friend at the ball ? — ^He is there. — Where
is the merchant ? — ^He is in his counting-hcnise. — ^Where do you
wish to take me to ? — I wish to take- you to my warehouse. —
Where does your cook wish to go ? — He wishes to go to the mar-
ket.— ^Is your brother at the market ? — ^He is no^ there. — Where
is he ? — ^He. is in his warehouse.

60.

Where is the Dutehman ? — He is in his granary. — Will you
come to me in order to go to the play ? — I will come to you, but
I have no mind to go to the play — ^Where is the Irishman ? — He
is at the market. — ^To which theatre do you wish to go ? — I wish
to go to that of the French. — Will you go to my garden or to tha*
of the Scotohman ? — I will go to neither yours nor to that of the
Scotchman ; I wish to go to that of the Italian. — ^Does the phy-
sician wish to go to our warehouses or to those of the Dutch ?—
He will go neither to yours nor to those of the Dutch, but to those
of the French. — What do you wish to buy at the market ? — I
wish to buy a basket and some carpets. — ^Where do you wish to
take them ? — ^I will take them home.

61.
How many carpets do you wish to buy 1 — ^I wish to buy two.
— To whom do you wish to give them ? — ^I will give them to my
servant. — ^Has he a mind to sweep the floor ? — He has a mind to
do it, but he has no time. — ^Have the English moiny warehouses ?
— ^They have many. — Have the French as many dogs as cats ?
— ^They have more of the latter than of the former.— Have you
many guns in your warehouses ? — ^We have many there, but we
have but little com. — ^Do you wish to see our guns ? — I will go
into your warehouses in order to see them. — ^Do you wish to buy

m

TWENTY -SECOND LESSON.

any thing 7—1 wish to buy something. — What do you wish to
Duy ? — ^I wish to buy a pocket-book {un portafoUo)^ a loi^dng-
glass, and a gun. — Where will you buy your trunk? — ^I will
buy it at the market. — Have you as much wine as tea in your
storehouses l — We Jiavc as much of the one as of the other. —
Who wishes to tear my coat ? — No one wishes to tear it.

62.

Will the English give us some bread ?— They will give you
some. — Will they give us as much butter as bread 1 — ^They will
give you more of the latter than of the former. — Will you give
this man a franc ? — ^I will give him several. — How many francs
will you give him ? — I will give him five.— Wlvit will the French
lend us ?— Thsy will lend us many books.-^Have you time to
write to the merchant ?— I wish to write to him, but I have no
time to^y.— When will you answer the German ?— I will
answer him to morrow.— At what o'clock ? — ^At eight. — Where
does the Spaniard wish to go 1 — He wishes to go no where. — Does
your servant wish to warm my broth 1 — He wishes to warm it.—
Is he willing to make my fire ? — He is willing to make it.^*
Where does the baker wish to go to ? — ^He wishes to go to the
wood. — Where is the youth ? — He is at the play. — ^Who is at the
captain's ball ? — ^Our children and our friends are there.

TWENTY-SECOND LESSON.
Leziwie ventesima seconda.

To or at Ui6 corner.

To or at the hole.

In the hole, in the holes,
^'here is your cat?
It is in the bag.

Singular,
Nel>
Al I ^"^^-

Nel buco.

Ore d il suo gatto 7

^ nel sacco.

Pbtral.
Net bttchL

^ Tht hoU is rendered by Ubuoo (mae.), and : la bum (fern.) ; but the feminine^

TWENTY-SECOND LESSON.

89

To or at the bottom.

To 0r at the bottom of the bag.
At the corner of the fire.

To or at the end.
To the end of the wood.
I'd the end of the woods.

To send for.

To go for ^ to fetch,

WiJI you send for some wine 1

I will send for some.

Will your son go for some bread 7

He will not go for any.

I wilt sL-nd for the physician.

i will send for him.

He will send for my brothers.

He will send for them.
Will you send for glasses?

I will send for some.

I In fondo.
! Al fondo.

Nel fondo del sacco.

Nel canto del fuooo.

41 fine.

AI fine del bosco.

AI fine del boschi.

What have you to do 1
I have to go to the market

What have you to drink 7

We have to drink some good wine.

You have to mend your liandkerchiefik

They have.
What have the men to do 7
They have to go to the warehouse.

Mandare a eercare.

Andare a cercare.

Vuol mandare a cercar del vino 1

Voglio mandare a cercame.

U di Lei fig^o vuol andare a cercar

del pane 7
Non vuol andare a cercame.
Voglio mandar a cercare il medico.
Voglio mandarlo a cercare.
Vuol a mandar a cercare i miei fira-

tellL
Vuol e mandarli a cercare.
Vuol Ella mandar a cercars del bic-

chieri7
Voglio mandame a cercare.

This evening (to-night).
In the evening.
This morning.

In the morning.

ChehaEUadafiure?

Ho da andare al mercato (Devo

andare al mercato).
Che hanno EUeno da bere7
Abbiamo da bere del buon vino.
Ha da raccommodare i di Ijei to-

zolettl.

Hanno.

Che hanno da fiire gU uomini 1

Hanno da andare al magazzlno.

Staaoera.

La sera, or nella sera.

Stamattina (stamane).
: La mattina, il mattino.
[ Nella mattina, nel mattino.

labuca, is used to designate a rather large hole, whilst the masculine, t^fruoo, Is
naed'to designate a rather small hole. Ex. IlgattOy ilcane I neUa buea, the
eat, the dog is in the hole; u» buco rul vegiito, a hole in the coat; gli iuxeOi
\annofaUo U toro nidoTuUa buca, the birds have made their nest in the hola

00 TWENTY-SBCOND LBSSOIV.

Now. ai present. jto.m?Ll«.p«rt».

Tkou. . 7\t.«

Thou hast— thou art. Tu hai (aiy— tu set.

John, art thou here ? { Giovanni, sei tu Ilk 7

Tea, Sir, I am. Si, Signore, ci aono.

> We have already seen (Note >, Lesson I.) in what instances the Italians oat
the second person singular; let us, in addition, observe, that it is a diark of inti-
macy among friends, and is used by parents and children, brother and sisters^
husbands and wives, towards one another : in general it implies fiunillarfty,
founded on affection and fondness, or hatred and contempt Fot, as we have
seen in the above note, is used towards servants and persons with whom we are
on a familiar footing, as: ChediU vox? What do you say? Mi avete vednio?
Have you seen me 7 Ao, turn vi ho veduiof No, I have not seen you. lo vi
dirb, I will tell you. But the most polite way of addressing a person is with
Vo99ignoria (K &), contracted and abridged from VoUra Signorioj your wor-
ship, and in speaking to persons of rank, Votngnoria Bhutriasimay Voitra Ee-^
cdLenza^ and to persons of royal blood, VoHra AlUzzOf to monarchs, Vuira
Maui^ ,

All these titles being expressed by feminine substantives in the singular, the
word Ella Is used to avoid a continual repetition of them. It must therefore
always be considered as a relative to, or a substitute for, the above titles.

According to this principle the nominative should always be EUa (as it is the
custom in Tuscany), and the accusative Lei, as: Sta Ella bene? Are you welll
Come ha Ella dormito? How have you slept 1 In Rome, however, and ths
rest of Italy, they say in the nominative also Lei (generally considered as i»
correct), as : Sta bene Lei? Are you well? Come ha dormito Lei? How have
you slept 7 and it would sound affected, if; according to the Florentine manner,
you were to use there Ella.

In addressing with EUa the participle or adjective agrees, according to the
best authors, with the feminine noun, Voetignoria. Ex. Se Ella aifoeoe etm-
piaekdaf If you had been so kind ; QuanP I giU th* EUa i arrivaio ? How long
is it since you arrived 7 (and not compiaeitdo, arriwUo),

The five cases are therefore used in the following manner : —

Voeeignoria. Ella, also Lei.

di Voeeignona. Di Lei (rao, eua),

a Voteitgnoria. A Lei, Le.

Voeaignoria, Lei, La,

da Voeeignoria. DaLeL

Obe. If a particular stress is to be put on the person addressed to, a Lei is
used in* the dative, and Lei in th/) accusative, if not Le in the dative and La In
.he accusative. If Le happens to meet with one of the pronouns, lo,la,li,Ut
ne, it Is changed into gU, as : gUelo, glida, it to you ; glidi, glide, them to you •
vlvne, some to you.

You.

N.

Your.

G.

To you.

D.

You.

Ace.

Prom you.

Abl.

TWBNTT-8BC0ND LBSSON.

91

Artt&onfiidtfiMll
I ammot fiitigiied.
Are the men tired 7

Seistanco?

Non lono stanco.

Sono stanchi gli aomlnil

EXAMPLES.

NOMIKATITB.

I Dove va Vottignoria? (or Etta? oi

E EUa Btata sexnpre bene i
Ella (JX) ha buoniielma clera.

r II riflesso di V, S. (or di V. Eee,) d
' < giusto, or il di Lei riflesso, or il
■ ^ «uo riflesso d giusto.

^ Dove sono i cli Lei guanti} or i suoi

c guanti?

C dual d la di Lei camera? or la 9ua

I camera?
lo seggo qui presso^fi Lei.

OATIVB.

Let us take a walk, if it pleases you ' Andiamo a spasso, se Le place.

{L e, if you please).
That will neither please you nor him.

Where are you going ?

Have you always been well 1
You look very well.

Your observation is right.

Where are your gloves?
Which is your room?
I sit down here near you.

I thank 3rou very humbly. I

I thank you and your uncle very much.

Listen then, I will tell it you directly. .
He is not willing to tell iC either you

or me.
To you alone I will say it
1 shall be eternally grateful to you for

it. 'I

I vdll let you see them. i

I will show them you and your sister.
I will show it to you to-morrow.
Well I to you I can refuse nothing.

Questo non placerik nd a Ijei, hd a

lui.
Le rendo devotissime grazie.
•Rendo a Lei e al Signor zlo le dovute

grazie.
Ascolti dunqne, glielo dird subito.
Non lo vnol dire nd a Lei, ni a me.

Lo dird a Lei sola.

Oliene sard etemamente obbUgato.

•

CfHeli fard vedere.
Li fard vedere a Lei e alia sorella.
Gliela (fem.) raostrerd don^ani.
Alia buon' ora ! a Lei non posso dar
un rifiuto.

ACOVSATXVB.

Do not trouble yourself; I pray.
I begged you and not your brother.
Pudon me, if I interrupt yoa.
He has interrupted you and us.
I thank you for it

Do not refuse me tliat favour, I en-
treat you.
To-morrow I shall go with you to my
eonain's.

Non s' incomodi, La prego.

Ho pregato Lei e non il frateUo.

Scusi, sa La interrompo.

EgU ha interrotto Lei e noi.

Ne La ringrazio.

Via, non mi rifiuti questo lavore, •

La scongiuro.
Domani andrd con LH dal cugliio.

^3

TWBNTY-SECONO LRSSON.

Ofr#. ii. Tho adjective in Italian, the same as in French, when it lapreeedad
by a noun or pronoan, must agree with it in number ; that is, if the noun or
pronoun is in the plural, the adjective must be put m the same number, as may
be seen from the example in the question above, and in the anpwer below.
Xhey are not tired. t Non oono stanchi.

Oba. B. It will moreover be noticed, that the adjectives in Italian form their
plural number exactly in the same manner as the nouns or substantives.
Thou wilt (wishest)— thou art able Vuoi^Puoi.

(canst).

Art thou willing to make my firel.
I am willing to make it, but I cannot.

* y noi fare 11 mio fuoco 1
Vogllo farlo, ma non posso.

Art thou afraid?

I am not afraid \ I am cold.

Art thou hungry?

t Haipaura?

t Non ho paura ; ho freddo.

t HaifiBime?

To seU.
To tell, to say.
To tell some one, to say to some one.

The word, the jest, device, motto.

Vendere 2.
Dir^ 3.
Dire a qualcuno.
< II vocabolo (la parola, ajtm, i
c II motto.
Will you tell the servant to make the 1 Vnol dire al servitore di £ue il fuoco 1

fire?
I will ten him to make it.

\ VogUo dlrgU di farlo.

X GU voglio dire di farlo, o OUelo dird

Sing, PlvT.

Thy.

Tuo. Tuoi.

Thine.

n tuo. I tuoi.

Thy book— thy books.

IltuoUbro. ItttoiUbri.

With me, with thee, with him.

Meco, teco, seco (con lui), also

me, con te.

With her.

Con iei.

With us, with you, with them.

Con noi, con vol, con loro.

Wilt thou go with me ? * | Vuoi venir meco ? con me ?

Ob9, C When a person is spoken to, the verb to ^o is rendered by vadn.
to come.

I wUl not go with thee, but with him. I j JJ**" ^^8"^ ^^"^^ '^* "• ^"^ *"J-

I c Non vo^io venir con te, ma con lul

This depends upon you.

That comes from you.

He was already twice at your house.

Qnesto dipende da Let .
Q,uesto proviene da Ld,
Ei fu gia due volte da LH,

TWBNTy-SECaND LESSON. 99

With our fileiidfl. 1 Col (plur. of coQ nosiri amid.

I will go with our good friends. | VogUo pdare coi nostri buoni Mttiim

EXERCISES.

68.
Wai you send for some sugiir ?— I will send for some. — Sou
(JgHo mio)f wilt thou go for some petty-patties ? — ^Yes, father
(fiodre mio), I will go for some. — ^Whither wilt thou go ? — ^I will
go into the garden. — ^Who is in the garden ? — ^The children of
our friends are there. — ^Will you send for the physician ? — ^I will
send for him. — Who will go for my brother ?— -My servant will
go for him. — ^Where is he ?— ^e is in his counting-house. — Will
you give me my broth ? — I will give it you.— Where is it ? — ^It
is at the comer of the fire.— Will you give me some money to
(per) fetch some milk ?— I will give you some to fetch some.—
Where is your money ?— It is in my counting-house ; will you
go for it ? — I will go for it. — Will you buy my horse ? — ^I cannot
buy it ; I have no money. — ^Where is your cat ? — ^It is in the bag.
— ^In which bag is it ?— In the bag of the granary.— Where is
this man's (di costui) dog ? — It is in a comer of the ship. — Where
has the peasant (got) his com 1— He has it in his bag. — ^Has he
a cat? — ^He has one. — ^Where is it? — ^It is at the bottom of the
bag. — ^Is your cat in this bag ? — It is in it.

64.
Have you any thing to do ? — ^I have something to do. — ^What
have you to do ? — ^I have to mend my gloves, and to go to the
garden. — Who is in the garden ? — My father is there. — Has your
cook any thing to drink ? — ^He has to drink some wine and some
good broth. — Can you give me as much butter as bread ? — ^I can
give you more of the latter than of the former. — Can our friend
drink as much wine as coffee ? — ;He cannot drink so much of the
latter as of the former.-^Have you to speak to any one ?— I have
to speak to several men.^-To how many men have you to speak ?
— I have to speak to four.— When have you to speaJc to them ?—
This evening. — ^At what o'clock ? — At a quarter to nine. — ^When
can you go to the market ? — ^I can go thither in the morning. —

94 TWSNTY^SBCOND LB880N.

At what o'clock ?— At half.past seven. — Whenwill you go to the
Frenchman ? — I will go to him to night. — Will you go to the
physician in the morning or in the evening I — ^I will gb to him in
the morning. — At what o'clock I — ^At a quarter past ten.

65.
Have you to write aa many notes as the Englishman ? — ^I have
to write less than he. — Will you speak to the Gremlan ?— I will
speak to him.— When will you speak to. him ?— Now,— Where
is be ?— He is at the other end of the wood. — Will you go to the
market 1 — I will go thither to (per) buy some cloth. — ^Do not your
neighbours wish to go to the market ? — They cannot go thither;
they are fatigued. — ^Hast thou the courage to go to the wo6d in the
evening ? — ^I have the courage to go thiUier, but not in the eve-
ning.— ^Are your children aJble to answer my notes ? — ^They are
able to answer them. — ^What do you wish to say to the servant ?
— ^I wish to tell him to make the fire, and to sweep the warehouse.
— Will ^you tell your brother to sell me his horse ? — I will tell
him to sell it you. — What do you wish to tell me 7—1 wish to tell
you sonoething. — ^Whom do you wish to see ? — ^I wish to see the
Scotchman. — Have you any thing to tell him ? — ^I have a motto
to tell him. — Which books does my brother wish to sell ? — ^He
wishes to sell thine and his own. — Will you come with me ?-*-I
cannot go with you. — ^Who will come with me ?— Nobody. — ^Will
your friend come with us 1 — ^He will go with you. — With whom
wilt thou go ?— I will not go with any one. — Will you go with
my friend ? — ^I will not go with him, but with thee. — ^Wilt thou gc
with me to the warehouse ? — ^I will go with you, but not to the
warehouse. — Whither wilt thou go ?^I will go with our good
friends into the garden af the captain.

TWENTYTHIRD LESSON.
LezUme ventesima terza.

To go out.

To remain^ to stay*

When do you wish to go out?
1 wiih to go out now.

To remain (to stay) at home.
Here.

To remain here.

There.

Will you stay here?

I wUi stay here.

Will your friend remain there?

He will not stay there.
Will you go to your brother 1
I will go to him.

The pleasure, the favour.
To give pleasure.

To do a favour.

AreyongoUig'?

I am going.

I am not going.

T1k>u art going.

Is he going 1

He goes, or is going.

He is not going.

Usdre* 8.'

SRimaner^ 2. Restore !•
Stare* 1.

Quando vuol Ella uscire?
Voglio uBcire adesso.
c Rimanere in <
/ Stare in ca

Qua, qui, in queaio luogo (Oi

( Rimaner quit, rlmaner quL
( Stare qu&, star qui.

Ld, h {ei, vi).
( Vuol Ella rimaner qua?
( Vuol Ella stare in questo luogo 1

Voglio stand (rimanervi).
( Vuol rimaner la 11 di Lei amieol
C II di Lei amico Tuol star HI

Non Tuole rimaner \k (star li).

Vuol andare dal di Lei firateUo 1

Voglio andarci.

U piaoere, il faTore.

Far piacere.
( Far un piacere.
i Rendered un serrizio (ssrTiglo)^

VaEUa(andate)?

Vado.

Non vado.

Vai.

VaegU?

EgUva.

NouTa.

' Kany Italians make use of mrUre instead of uadrtf but this is done erro-
neooaly, for wriire means, to select, lo draw lots, and not, t« go eut.

M

TWB1VT7-TBIBD LliSOll.

Are W0 going?
We go, or are going.
TJiej go. er are going.

kK» you going to your brother 1
I am going there.

Where is ho going?
He is going to his father.

Every day.
Every morning.
Bf fliy evening.

it la.

Late.
What o'clock is it?
It is three o'clock.

It is twelve o'clock.

It is a quarter past twelve.

It wants a quarter to six.
It Is half-past one.

To he acquainted with (to
know).
To be acquainted with (to know) a

Need.

To want.

To he in want of,
I want It.
I am in want of it.
An you in want of this knife 1

I am in Want of it

Are you in want of these knives?

Andiamol
Andiamo.

»vaniio.

VaEUadaldiLeifiratellol

Ci vado, vi vado (vadovL vadod

little used).
Dove va egli 1
Va da suo padre.

( SUXG, TlUtO )
I Plue. Tuui \
( Tntti i giomi.
C Ogni giomo.
( Tutte Is mattlne.
c Qgni mattino (mattiM),
( Tutte le sere.
^Ogni

hnqmu

t

Tardl.

Cheorad?

Sono le tre.
( i meszodi (d mexso giomo).
f Sonoledodici.
< ]£ mezzodi e un quarto.
c Sono le dodici e un quarto.
c Sono le sei meno un quarloi
\ Sono le cinque e tre quailL

k un' ora e meno.

Conoscere* 2.
Conoscero un uomo

Bisogno,

Aver hiscgno di, Ahhi^ognare,

Ne ho bisogno.
Ha Ella bisogno di questo col*

teUo?
Ne ho bisogno.
Ha Ella bisogno dl questl cot*

telUI

rWKNTY-THIBD UKSSOll.

I an Ib want of tlum.
I am not in want of them.

I am not in want of any thing.

Is he in want of money 7
He ia not in want of any.

Ofwhati
What are you in want of?
Wliat do you want?

Of whom?

• Ne ho biaogno.

Non ne ho biaogno.
; ( Non bo biaogno di nulla.
I c Non ho biaogno dl niente.
I Ha egli biaogno di danaiol
I Non ne ha biaogno.

(Diche?

; Dichecoaa?
! Diqualcoaa?

Di che ha Ella biaogno 1

Diehi?

OBJECT INDIRECT IN THE GENITVE OF THE PERSONAL
PRONOUNS.
Of mOp of thee, of him, of her. I Di me, di te, di lui, di lei (ne).

Of n% of you, of them. I Di noi, dl voi, di loro (ne).

la your father in want of me ?

He ia in want of you.

Are you in want of these booka 1

I am in want of them.

Is he In want of my brothers?

He Is Infant of them.

. n di Lei padre lia biaogno di me?

Ha biaogno di Lei (dl Toi).

Ha Ella biaogno di qneati libri ?

Ne ho biaogno.

Ha egli biaogno del miei frateUll
( Ne ha bisogno.
I Ha biaogno di loro.

To read.

I

EXERCISES.

66.

Will you do me a favour ?^Yes, Sir, which ?— rWill you tell
my senrant to make the fire ?-*I will tell him to make it. — Will
you tell him to sweep the warehouses ? — ^I will tell him to sweep
them. — ^What will you tell your father? — ^I will tell him to sell
you his hprse. — ^Will you tell your son to go to my father? — I
will tell him to go to him. — ^Have you any thing to tell me ? — I
have nothing to tell you. — Have you any thing to say to my
father ? — ^I have a word to say to him. — Do these men wish to
sell their carpets ? — ^They do not wish to sell them. — John, art
thou here {Id) ? — ^Yes, Sir, I am here. — What art thou going to
do ? — ^I am going to your hatter to (per) tell him to mend your

06 TWENTT-THIBD LBSSON.

hat. — Wilt thou go to the tailor to lell him to mend my coats ?«
I will go to him. — ^Are you willing to go to the market ? — I am
willing to go thither. — What has your merchant to sell ? — He has
to sell some beautiful leather gloves {guanti dipelle), combs, good
cloth, and tee wooden baskets. — Has he any iron guns to sell ?
— He has s«me to sell. — ^Does he wish to sell me his horses? —
He wishes to sell them you. — Have you any thing to sell ? — ^I
have nothing to sell.

67.

Is it late ? — It is not late. — ^What o'clock is it ? — ^It is a quarter
past twelve.— At what o'clock does the captain wish to go out ? —
He wnhes to go out at a quarter to eight ? — ^What will you do ?
•—I wish to read. — What have you to read ? — ^I have a good book
to read. — Will you lend it me ? — I will lend it you. — ^When will
you lend it me ? — I will lend it you to-morrow. — Have you a mind
to go out ? — ^I have no mind to go out. — ^Are you willing to stay
here, my dear friend? — ^I cannot remain here. — ^Whither have
you to go ? — ^I have to go to the counting-house. — When will you
go to the ball ? — To-night. — At what o'clock ? — ^At midnight.—
Do you go to the Scotchman in the evening or in the morning ? —
I go to him (both) in the evening and in the morning. — Where
are you going now ? — ^I am going to the theatre. — Where is your
son going ? — He is going no where ; he is going to stay at home
lo (per) write his notes. — Where is your brother ? — He is at his
warehouse. — Does he not wish to go out ? — No, Sir, he does not
wish to go out. — What does he wish to do ? — He wishes to write
to his friends. — Will you stay here or there ? — I will stay there.
— ^Where will your father stay ? — He will stay there. — ^Has our
friend a mind to stay in the garden ? — ^He has a mind to stay
there.

68.

At what o'clock Is the Dutchman at home ? — He is at home
every evening at a quarter past nine. — ^When does your cook go
to the market ? — He goes thither every morning at half-past five.
— When does our neighbour go to the Irishmen ? — ^He goes to
them every day. — At what o'clock ? — At eight o'clock in the
morning. — What do you wish to buy ? — I do not wish to buy ariy
thing ; but my father wishes to buy an ox. — Does he wish to buy

TWBNTY-THIRD LESSOlf. 09

this or that ox ? — ^He wishes to buy neither. — ^Which does he wish
to buy ? — He wishes to ))uy your friend's. — Has the merchant
one more coat to sell ? — ^He has one more, but he does not wish
to sell it. — Has this man one knife more to sell ? — He has not
one knife more to sell, but he has a few more guns to sell. —
When will he sell them ?— He will sell them to-day.— Wliere ?
— At his warehouse. — ^Do you wish to see my friend ? — I wish to
see him in order to know him. — ^Do you wish to ^cnow my chiK
dren ? — ^I do wbh to know them. — ^How many children have you ?
— ^I have only two, but my brother has more than I: he has six.
— ^Does that man wish to drink too much wine ? — ^He wishes to
drink too much.— Have you wine enough to drink ?— I have only
a little, but enough. — ^Does your brother wish to buy too many
petty-patties? — ^He wishes to buy a great many, but not too
many.

69.
Can you lend me a knife ? — ^I can lend you (me. — Can your
fiither tend me a book ?— He can lend you several. — ^What are
you in want ofl — ^I am in want of a good gun. — Are yoir in want
of this picture ?-r-I am in want of it. — ^Does your brother want
money ? — ^He does not want any. — ^Does he want some boots ?—
He does not want any. — ^What does he want ? — ^He wants no-
thing.— ^Are you in want of these sticks? — I am in want of them.
—Who wants some sugar ?*— Nobody wants any. — Does any body
want pepper? — ^Nobody wants any. — ^What do I want? — ^You
^want nothing. — ^Does your father want these pictures or those ?—
He wants neither these nor those. — Are you in want of me ?— I
am in want of you. — ^When do you want me ?— At present.—
What have you to say to me ? — ^I have something to say to you.
— ^Is your son in want of us ? — ^He is in want of you and your
brothers.-— Are you in want of my servants ? — ^I am In want of
them. — Does any one want my brother ?— No one wants him.—
Does your father want any thing ? — ^He does not want any thing.
—What does the Englishman want ? — ^He wants some corn.—
Does he not want some jewels ? — ^He does not want any. — ^What
does the sailor want ?— He wants some biscuits, milk, cheese, and
Wtter. — ^Will yoagive me anything? — I will give yo«
oread and wine.

TWENTY-FOURTH LESSON.
Lezione ventesima quarto.

THE PRESENT.

In regular verbs* .the present tense is formed from the Infinitive, whose tar
mination is changed into o. '

The first and second persons singular, and the first person plural, arc for all
the three conjugations terminated in the same manner, viz.

The first person singular in o. Ex.

Tlie second person singular in i.

The first person ploral in iamo.

Cli

- 1 speak,
sell.
[ serve.
r Thou speakest.
Ex. < Thou sellest.
C Thou servest.
r We speak.
Ex. ^ We sell.
V We serve.

As for the third person singular, it is for the first conjugation terminated in
a (from are^ as parlare), and for the second and third conjugations in e. The
Mcond person plural terminates for the first coi^ugation in att {ttom are^ at
parlare), for the second in eU (from «re, as vendue), and for the third in iU
(from ire, as servire). The third person plural ends for the first conjugation in
one (from ore, as parlare), and for the second and third conjugations in ono.

EXAMPLES.
iirrzNiTiTB.

Parlo.

Vendo.

Servo.

Parti.

Yendt.

Servi.

Parliamo.

Venduifno.

Serviamo.

. Parlare, to speak.

2. Vendere, to sell. :

PBXSXITT TBTSK.

h Servire, to serve.

Pint Conjugalion.

Second Coi^jugaiion.

Third Qn^atian.

Parlor I apeak.
Parli; thou speak-
est.
Parlo, he speaks.
Parliamo, we speak.
Parlare, you speak.
Parlana, they speak.

Vendo, Isell.
Vendt, thou sell-
est
Vende, heseUs.
Vendtomo, we sell.
Vendete, yon sell.
Vendono, they sell.

Servo, I serve.
Servi, thou serv-
est.
Serve, he serves.
Serviamo. we serve.
Service, you serve.
Servono, they serve.

1 As for the irregular verbs, it is impossible to give, as for the present, any
fixed rules concerning them. The learner must mark them in his list of irreg-
ular verbs as he meets with them in proceeding.

TWENTY-FOITRTH LBSSOK.

101

Cfbt. A, As the rules which I gi%'e above, on the formation of the i resent
lense, are applicable only to regular verbs, it remains now to point out the irreg-
ularities in the present tense of ail thuse irregular verbs which we liave em«
ployed already to enable the learner to use them in his exercises. They are at
follows:^

Tboae that are not given here ara^ of course, regular in the present tense.

To give.

I give, thou givest, he giTes.
We give, you give, they give.

To make, to do,

I make thou makest he makes or

or do, or dost, does.

We do, you do, they do.

I stay,
Westayi

To stay, to remain.
thou stayest, he stays,
you stay, they stay.

To drink.

I drink, thou drinkest, he drinks.
We drink, you drink, they drink.

To see.
I see, thon seest, he sees.

We Me, you see, they see.

To remain.

I remain, tliou re- he remains.

mainest,
We remain, you remain, they re-
main.

Bare* 1.

FlrH Second

TlUrd

Pawn. Person.

Ptrmm.

lo do, tu dai.

egUda.

Noi diamo. vol date,

eglinodaa-

Fare* 1 {hTmexXy facere).

lo faccio ttt lai, egli Cel

orfo,

Noi facci- vol fate, eglino faatr

amo. DO.

Starts 1 «.

lo sto, tu stai,

Noistiamo, vol state,

eglino
stanno.

Bere or hever^ 2.

Bevo, bevi, beve.

Beviamo, bevete, berono (er
beono)

Vedere* 2.

Vedo, veg- vedi,

go, or

veggio,
Vediarao or vedete,

yeggiamo,

Tedono er
veggono.

Rimaner^ 2.

ls< Pen. 2nd Pero. 9rd Pen.
Rimango, rimani, rimane.

Rimania, rimanete, rimangoiio.
mo.

s These three verbs, viz., dare,*/ara,* eiare^'* together with andan^ (which
•ee in tlie foregoing Lesson), are the only irregular verbs of the first conjuga-
tion, all the others being regular.

103

TW&XITY-POURTH LESSON,

To ftck vp.

I pick up, thou pick- he picka

est up, up.

We pick up, you pick up, they pick
up.

To say, to tell.

I say, thou eeyest, he nye.

We «y, you say, they say.

To conduct, to take.

I conduct, thou con*
ductest,
We con- you con-
doot, duct,

To come,

I come, thou com-

est.
Ws eome, you come.

To go out,

I go out, thou goest

out.
We go oat, you go out,

he con-
ducts,
tliey con-
duct.

Raccorre * 2 (abridged from

raccogliere).
Raccolgo, raccogli, raceoglie,

RaccogU-
•mo,

raccogliete, raccolgo-
no.

Dire • 3 (formerly dieere).

Dioo, did {or dV), dice.

Diciamo, dite, dioono.

Condurre* 2 (formerly coii-

ducere).
Conduco, oonduci. conduce,

Conduci-
amo,

conducete, conduce-
no.

Venire * 3.
Vfngo, vieni,

he comes.
tlieyoome.j Yeniamo, venite,
' U8cire*S,

viene
Tengoao.

he goes

out.

they go

out.

Esco,

Usdamo,

or es-

ciamo,

Ob§. B. There is no distinction in Italian between I love, do love, and ta
rfivlng. All these present tenses are expressed by amo^ I love. Ex.

escl,

usdte,
ores-
cite.

ToUn>e.

C love. ( loves.

I < do love. He < does love.
( am loving. ( is loving.

( Invest.
ThoQ 2 dost love. You
^ art loving.

love. / love.

They < do love.

We

do love,
are loving.

' are loving.

Amare 1.
Aroo, ama.

Ami,

Amiomo,

TWUNTJf-FOUKTH LKSSON.

108

To hoe, to Wccy to be fond of.
To arrangey to set in order.

Do you like him?
I do like him.
I do not like Iiim.

Amare 1.
I Ordinare 1 . Meitere ♦ (2) in
< ordine.
\Assestare 1.

L' ama £Ua7 (L' amate?) Voi?

L' amo.

Non V amo.

13r Pereonal pronouns, not standing in the nominative, take their place
before the verb, except when this ia in the InfiniUve, the present participle, or
the imperative^ for then the pronoun is joined to the verb, which loses its final
e, as we have seen in Obs. Lesson XYII.

j Vende Ella U di Lei cavaUo 7
c Vendete il vostro cavallo?

Lo vendo.
^ Lo vende Ella 1
c Lo vendete 1
Le manda egli il bigUetto 1
Egli me lo manda.
Spazza U pavimento il servitore 1 m
better, il servitore spazsa egli il
pavimento 7
Ha does sweep it. Egli lo spazsa.

Do you sell your horse?

I do sell it.

Do you sell It 7

Does lie send you the note?

He does send it me.

Does the servant sweep the floor?

To want, to miss.
To pay.

Mancare 1.
Pagare 1.

Oht, C Verbs ending in core or gore take the letter h after e or ^, in all
tenses and persons where e or ^ meets with one of the vowels, «^ ^ £z.

Art thou in want of any thing?

I am in want of nothing.

Dost thou pay for thy boots?
I pay for them.

( Manchi tu di qualche

c Tl manca qualche cosa ?

( Non manco di niente.
' c Non mi manca niente.

tPaghitui tuoistlvali?
j t Li pago.

06f. D. 7b wady to h^ in want of, may be rendered in Italian in various
manners; amongst others, also in the following:—

(Essere d* uopo^ \ ^ ^^
Essere uopo^ < '
Essere mestieri, I

To loani, to he in want of.

Are yon in want of this knife?

I in want of it.

Aver mesti-
eri di.

Le d d' uopo cotesto coltello? {Le4
mestieri cotesto coltello?) vecy lit*
tie used.
Mi i d' uopo. (Mi 6 mestieri.)

104

^rWENTY-FOUBTH L£SSON.

Are you In wint of these knives 1

I am in want of them.
I am not in want of them.

I am not in want of any thing.

Is he in want of money?
He does not want any.

Le son d' uopoquestl eoItelUI areta
d' uopo di qaesti coltellil

]lli son d* uopo. Ne ho d* oopo. *

Nob mi son d' uopo. Non ne ho d*
uopo. • •

Non mi i d* uopo niente. Non ho
d' uopo di niente.

Gli d d' uopo danaro 7

Non gliene i d* uopo.

To open.

Aprire* 3 (regular in Pre.
sent).

I open, thou openest, he opens.

Apro, apri, apre.

We open, you open, they open.

Apriamo, aprite, aprono.

Do you open liis note 1

Apre EUa (aprite,) voi U sno bigtt-
etto?

I do not open it.

Non r apro.

Does he open his eyes?

Apre egU gli occhl?

He opens them.

Egli li apre.

Whom do you love ?

Chi ama Ella (amate) voi?

I love my fiither.

Amo mlo padre

Does your father love his son ?

U di Lei p«dre ama suo fi«Uot

Hs does love liim.

Egli r ama.

Do you love your children?

AmaEUaidiLeifaneittUlt

I do love them.

Li amo.

To hke.

To he fond of.

PiaUre.*

iUke, ihouUkest, helikes.

Piaccio, piad, place.

WeUke, you like, they like.

Piacdamo, piaoete, piacdono.

Ob9. E. This verb, thesame as

doU

re* (see next Lesson), is in Italian em-

ployed impersonally with the dative of

the personal pronoun. Ex.

Are you fond of wine?

Le place U vino ?

I am fond of it.

Mi place.

What are yon fond of ?

Che Le place? (Che vi place f)

Cider.

Dd cidro.

I am fond of cider.

U ddro ml place.

What is the American fond of?

Che pUce all* Americano?

He is fond of coffee

GU place Ucafid.

The ugly man.

L' uomacdo.

To receive.

Ricevere 2.

Tofnish.

Fuiire* 3.

I finish, thou finisbest, he finishes.

Finisco, finisd, finisoa.

We finish, you finish, they finish.

Finiamo, finite, finiscMik

TWBIITY.rOURTR LK880«.

105

7%M instant.

AWinstante.

Now.

Ora.

At once.

Suhito.

Wh&t are yon going to do ?

I tin going to read.
Wliat ia he going to do?
He ia going to write a note,
ire you going to give me any tiling?
I am going to give you aome bread and
wine.

^t Che fa ora Ella?
ct Che fate ora?

t Ora leggo (ato per l^gere).

t ChefaegliaU'iffante?

t Mi da Ella wubUo qualcoaa?
t Le do tubUo pane e Tino.

Ob9.r. Instead of aayingjM«tottomo, this man ;coteitoiiofiia,tiiat man, t^
Aoliana often uae tlie plunl of the pronouns, quuto, eotctto, and tianakte as
followB :

TJdsman.
That man.

QuesU.
Cotesti.

Otherwise:

This man.

Costui (Plur. costoro, these

men).

Thai man.

Cohii (Plur. cohro, those

men).

Gbt. O, As for eottHtd, that man, it la grown obsolete.

Do you know thismsn?

I know nether this nor that one.

Do yon see this man?

I do not see this man, hut that one.

Do yoQ hear these men ?

I do not hear these men, but those.

ConoaceEllaqneati?

Non conoaco nd queatl nd qnello.

VedeEllacoatui?

Non Tedo costui, ma colui

Sente Ella coatoro ?

Non sento oostoro, ma eoloro.

To know.
We Iniow, yon know, tliey know.

Saper^ 2.

So, aai, sa.
Sappiamo, aapete, sanao.

EXERaSES.
70.
Do you love your brother ? — ^I do love him.— Does your brothei
love you ? — ^He does not love nie.-^My good child, dost thou love
roe ?-*-Tes, I do love thee. — ^Dost thou love this ugly man {quelP
uomaedo) I do not love him.— Whom do you love ? — I love my
children. — ^Whom do we love ? — We love our friends. — ^Do we like
«iy one ? — ^We like no one. — ^Does any body like us ? — ^The Aroe.

5*

106 TWBNTy.FOURTS LI880M.

rioans like ub.-^Do you want any thing I— I want nothing.—
Whom 18 your father in want of? — ^He is in want of hia servant.
— ^What do you want ? — ^I want the note. — ^Do you want this or
that note ? — I want this. — What do you wish to do with it (fame) ?
—I wish to open it, in order to read it. — ^Does your son read our
notes t — ^He does read them. — ^When does he read them ? — He
reads them when he receives them. — ^Does he receive as many
notes as I ? — He receives more than you. — ^What do you give
me ? — ^I do not give thee any thing. — ^Do you give this book to
my brother ?-^I do give it him. — Do you give him a bird ? — ^I do
give him one. — ^To whom do you lend your books ? — ^I lend them
to my friends. — ^Does your friend lend me a coat? — ^He lends you
one.-r-To whom do you lend your clothes ? — I do not lend them
to any body.

71.

Do we arrange any thing ? — ^We do not arrange any thing.—
What does your brother set in order ? — ^He sets his books in order.
-»Do you sell your ship ? — ^I do not sell it. — ^Does the captain sell
his ? — ^He does sell it. — ^tVhat does the American sell ? — ^He sells
his oxen. — ^Does the Englishman finish his note ? — ^He does finish
it-'Wluch notes do you finish ? — ^I finish those which I write to
my friends.-^Dost thou see any thing ? — ^I see nothing. — ^Do you
see my large garden I — I do see it. — ^Does your father see our
ships I— -He does not see them, but we see them. — ^How many
soldiers do you see ? — We see a good many ; we see more than
thirty. — ^Do you drink any thing ? — ^I drink some wine. — ^What
does the sailor drink ? — ^He drinks some cider.— Do we drink wine
or cider? — ^We drink wine and cider. — ^What do the Italians
drink ? — ^They drink some coffee.-T-Do we drink wine ? — ^We do
drink some.—- What art thou writing ? — ^I am writing a note. — ^To
whom ? — ^To my neighbour. — ^Does your friend write ? — ^He does
write. — ^To whom does he write ?-T-He writes to his tailor. — What
are you going to do ? — ^I am going to write. — ^What is your father
going to do ? — ^He is going to read.— What is he going to read ?«—
He is going to read a book.— What are you going to give me ?—
I am not going to give you any thing. — ^What is our friend going
to give you ? — ^He is going to give me something good. — Do you
^^w my friend ?«— I do know him.

TWSNTT-FOUItTH LBS80N. lOt

72.

Do you write your notes in the evening ? — We write them in
the morning. — What dost thou say ? — ^I say nothing. — ^Does your
brother say any thing? — ^He says something. — ^What does he
say ? — ^I do not know. — What do you say to my servant ? — ^I tell
him to sweep the floor, and to go for some wine, bread, and
cheese. — Do we say any thing? — ^We say nothing. — What does
your friend say to the shoemaker ? — He tells him to mend his
boots. — What do you tell the tailors ? — I tell them to make my
clothes. — Dost thou go out ? — I do not go out. — ^Who goes out ?^
My brother goes out. — ^Where is he going ? — ^He is going to the
garden. — ^To whom are you going ? — We are going to the good
English. — ^What art thou reading ?— I am reading a note from
my friend. — ^What is your father reading ? — ^He is reading a book.
— ^What are you doing ?— We are reading.^-Are your children
reading ?^-They are not reading ; they have no time to read.^-
Do you read the books which I read ?— »I do not read those which
you read, but those which your father reads. — ^Do you know this
man? — ^I do not know him. — ^Does your friend know him? — ^He
does know him.-^What is your friend going to do ? — He is not
going to do any thing.

73.
Do you know my children ? — ^We do know them. — Do they
know you ? — They do not know us. — With whom are you ac-
quainted ? — ^I am acquainted with nobody. — ^Is any body acquaint-
ed with you ? — Somebody is acquainted with me. — Who is ac-
quainted with you ? — The. good captain knows me. — What dost
thou eat? — I eat some bread. — ^Does not your son eat some
cheese ? — ^He does not eat any. — ^Do you cut any thing ? — ^We
cut some wood. — What do the merchants cut ? — They cut some
cloth. — ^Do you send me any thing ? — ^I send you a good gun. —
Does your father send you money ? — ^He does send me some.^
Does he send you more than I ? — He sends me more than you.— •
How much does he send you ? — He sends me more than fifty
crowns. — When do you receive your notes? — ^I receive them
every morning. — ^At what o'cl xsk ? — At half-past ten.— Is your
son coming ? — ^He is coming.— To whom is he coming ? — ^He is

108 TWENTY -fOWTH L£Si301«.

coming to me. — ^Do you come to me ? — ^I do not come to you,
but to your children.-^Where is our friend going ?-— He is ffAng
no where; he remains at home. — Are you going home/ — ^We
are not going home, but to our friends. — Where are your fnends I
— ^They are in their garden. — Are the Scotchmen in their gar-
dens 1 — They are there.

74.

What do you buy 1 — ^I buy some knives. — ^Do you buy more
knives than glasses? — ^I buy more of the latter than of the former.
— How many horses does the German buy ? — ^He buys a good
many ; he buys more than twenty of them. — ^What does your ser-
vant carry I— He carries a large trunk. — ^Where is he carrying
it ? — He is carrying it home. — ^To whom do you speak ? — ^I speak
to the Irishman.— -Do you speak to him every day ? — ^I speak to
him every morning and every evening. — ^Does he come to you I
— ^He does not come to me, but I go to him. — ^What has your
servant to do 1 — He has to sweep my floor and to set my books
in order. — ^Does my father answer your notes? — ^He answers
them. — ^What does your son break ? — ^He breaks nothing, but
your children break my glasses. — ^Do they .tear any thing ? —
They tear nothing.— Who bums my hat ?— Nobody bums it.—
Are you looking for any body ? — ^I am not looking for any body.
— ^What is my son looking fi>r ? — He is looking £>r his pocket-
book. — What does your cook kill ? — He kills a chicken.

76.

Are you killing a bird ? — ^1 am killing one. — How many chick-
ens does your cook kill ? — He kills three of them. — ^To whom do
you take my boy ? — I take him to the painter. — When is the
painter at home ? — He is at home every evening at seven o'clock.
— What o'clock is it now ? — ^It is not yet six o'clock. — Do you go
out in the evening ? — ^I go out in the morning. — Are you afraid
to go out in the evening ? — I am not afraid, but I have no time
to go out in the evening. — Do you work as much as your son ? —
I do not work as much as he. — ^Does he eat as much as you ?^
He eats less than I. — Can your children write as many notes as
my children? — They can write just as many. — Can the Russian

TWENTY-FIITH LESSOR.

lOd

drink as much wine as cider ? — He can drink more of the laUer
than of the former. — When do our neighbours go out? — ^They go
out every morning at a quarter to five. — Which note do you send
to your father ? — I am sending him my own. — Do you not send
mine? — ^I am sending it also. — To whom do you send your
clothes ? — I send them to nobody ; [ want them. — ^To whom do
your sons send their boots ? — They send them to no one ; they
want them.

*«* We should fill volumes were We to give all the exercifles that are appU-
jable to our lessons, and which the pupils may very easily compose by them-
selves. We shall, therefore, merely repeat what we have already mentioned at
the commencement :— Pupils who wish to improve rapidly ought to compose a
great many sentencca in addition to those given ; but they must pronounce
them aloud. This is the only way by which they will acquire the habit of
■peaking fluently.

TWENTY-FIFTH LESSON.
Lezione ventesima quirUa.

To go to the play.
To be at the play.

Andare* alio spettacolo.
Essere* alio spettacolo.

To bring.

To find.
The butcher.
The sheep.

What^ or the thing which.

Do yon And what you looic for (or

what you are looking for)?

1 And what I k>ok for. >

I ilod what 1 am looking for. i

{ Recare 1.
I Poriare 1.

Trovare 1.

II maceUalo.

II montone.

c Cid che.
< Quel che.
' Quanto.

Trova £Ua eld che cereal o
vol quel che cercate 1

Trovo cid che cerco.

110

TWBKTY-FirrH LB8S0K.

He does not find what he is looking

for.
We find what we look for.
They find what they look for.
I mend what yon mend.

1 buy what yon bay.

I pay what you pay.
Are yon in want of money 1
I am not in want of any.
Do you take him to the play 7
I do take him thither.

Egli non trova dd ohe

Troriamo cid che oerchfauna
Egiino trovano dd che oereano.
Asaetto dd che aaeetta Ella, aaselto

od Bccomodo cid che Ella aaeetta.
Compro quello che compra Ellk

(comprate voi).
Pago quanto paga EUa.
Manca Ella di danaro 1
Non ne manco.

Lo condace Ella alio epettacolof
Ve lo conduco.

To study.

Instead of.

I Studiare 1.

( In luogo di.
( Invece di.

Obi. In$Uad qf is in English foUowed by the present parttdple^ whilst in
ItsUan it is followed by the infinitive.

To play.
ToUsten.
To hear.
Instead of listening.

Instead of playing.

Do you play instead of studying?

I stndy instead of playing.

That man speaks instead of listening.

Giuoeare I.
Ascoltare 1.
Sentire 3.
{ Invece d' ascoltare.
I In loogo d' ascoltare.
{ In luogo di giuoeare.
I Invece di giuoeare.
Oiuoca Ella inveoe di stodkrsl
Studio invece di giuoeare.
Ctuesti parla inveoe d' ascoltare.

To ache.
To complain.
The finger.
I complain — thou complainest.
We complain — they complain.
Tou complain — he complains.
Have you a sore finger 1
Have you the headache 7
I have a sore finger.
I have the headache.

Has your brother a sore footi
He has a sore eye.
We have sore eyes.

Dolere.*

Dolersi.*

Ildito(plar.l0ififti,fi3m.).

Bli dolgo or doglio — ti dnoU.

Ci dogliamo ~ d dolgono.

Vi delete — dduole.

t Leduoleildito?
t Le duole il capo (la testa) 1
t H dito mi duole.
t II capo (la testa) mi duole. Ho

mal di testa,
t Duole U piede al di Ld fratdtol
t 6U duole V occhio.
t Ci dolgono gli oochi.

TWBMTY-FIFTH LESSON.

Ua

Tbe study (a closet).

The desk.

Tbe elbow.

Thebaek.

The arm.

The knee.
1 iMre a sore elbow.
Tlioii hast a pain in thy baek.
He baa a sore arm.
Yon haYe a sore knee.

Do yon lead instead of writing?
Does yonr brother read Instead of

apealdng?
Does the servant make the bed?
He makes the fire instead of making

the bed.

To learn.
To learn to read.
I learn to read.
He leans to write.

Lo scrittoio. Lo studio.

ho scrittoio.

II gomito.

Ildorso.

U braccio (plur, le braceia).

U ginocchio (plur, le ginocehia).

Mi duole 11 gomito.

Tl dude il dorso.

Gli duole il braccio.

Vi duole il ginocchio.

Legge Ella invece di scriverel
Legge il di Lei fratello invece di

parlare?
FaillettoUservltorel
Egli & il fooeo inYOoe di fare fl

tetto.-

Imparare 1.
Impaiare a leggere.
Imparo a leggere.
Egil impara a scrivere.

EXERCISES.

76.

Do you go to the play this evening ? — ^I do not go to the play.
—What have you to do 1 — ^I have to study. — At what o'clock do
you go out ? — ^I do not go out in the evening. — Does your father
go out ?— He does not go out. — ^What does he do? — He writes. —
Does he write a book ? — He does write one. — ^When does he
write it ? — He writes it i|i the morning and in the evening. — ^Is
he at home now ? — ^He is at home (He is).— Does he not go out ?
— He cannot go out ; he has a sore foot.-^Does the shoemaker
bring our boots ?— He does not bring them. — ^Is he not able to
work ? — ^He is not able to work ; he has a sore knee. — ^Has any
body a sore elbow ? — My tailor has a sore elbow. — ^Who has a
sore arm ? — ^I have a sore arm.-^Do you cut me some bread ?^
I cannot cut you any ; I have sore fingers (mi dogUono le dUa).-^
Do you read your book ? — I cannot read it ; I have sore eyes
^mi dcghano gU occhi), — Who has sore eyes ? — The French have

113 TWENTY-FIFTH LBS80K.

sore eyes. — ^Do they read too much ? — They do not read elioagn
— ^What day of the month is it to-day ? — ^It is the third. — ^What day
of the month is it to-morrow ? — ^To-morrow is the fourth.— Are you
looking for any one ?'— I am not looking for any one. — What is
the painter looking for? — He is not looking for any thing.—
Whom are you looking for ? — I am looking for your son.— Have
you any thing to tell him ? — I have something to tell him.-^What
have you to tell him ? — I have to tell him to go to the play this
evening.

77.
Who is looking for me ? — ^Your father is looking for you. — ^Is
any hody looking for my brother ? — Nobody is looking for him.
Dost thou find what thou art looking for ? — ^I do find what I am
looking for. — ^Does the captain find what he is looking for ?-*He
finds what he is looking for, but his children do not find what
they are looking for. — What are they looking for ? — ^They are
looking for their books. — ^Where dost thou take me to? — ^I take
you to the theatre. — Do you not take me to the market ?-»I do
not take you thither. — ^Do the Spaniards find the umbrellas which
they are looking for ? — ^They do not find them.^Does the tailor
find his thimble ? — ^He does not find it. — ^Do the merchants find
the cloth which they are looking for ? — ^They do find it.— What
do the butchers find ? — They find the oxen and sheep which they
are looking for. — What does your cook find ? — ^He finds the chick-
ens whfch he is looking for. — What is the physician doing ?^
He is doing what you are doing. — What is he doing in his study I
— He is reading. — ^What is he reading ? — ^He is reading your
father's book. — ^Whom is the Englishman looking for ?— He is
looking for his friend, in order to take him to the garden. — ^What
is the German doing in his study ? — He is learning to read. —
Does he not learn to write ? — He does not learn it (P impara). —
Does your son learn to write ? — He learns to write and to read.

78.

Does the Dutchman speak instead of listening ? — He speaks

mstead of listening. — ^Do you go out instead of remaining at

home ? — I remain at home instead of going out. — Does your son

play instead of studying ? — He studies instead of playing.— -When

TWENTY-FIFTH LBSSON. 11»

does he study I — ^He studies every day. — In the morning or in the
eyening ? — ^Tn the morning and in the evening. — Do you buy an
umbrella instead of buying a book ? — I buy neither the one nor
the other. — ^Does our neighbour break his sticks instead of break,
ing his glasses ? — He breaks neither. — What does he break ? —
He breaks his guns. — Do the children of our neighbour read ? —
They read instead of writing. — What is our cook doing ? — He
makes a fire instead of going to the market. — Does the captain
give you any thing 1 — He does give me something. — ^What does
he give you 1 — He gives me a great deal of money. — Does he
give you money^ instead of giving you bread ? — He gives me
money and bread. — Does he give you more cheese than bread ?
-»He gives me less of the latter than of the former.

79.
Do you give my friend less knives than gloves ? — I give him
more of the latter than of the former. — What does he give you ?
— ^He gives me many books instead of giving me money .-^Does
your servant make your bed ? — He does not make it. — What is
he doing instead of making your bed ? — He sweeps the study in
stead of making my bed. — Doos he drink instead of working ?*
He works instead of drinking. — ^Do the physicians go out ? — ^They
remain at home instead of going out. — Does your servant make
coffee ? — He makes tea instead of making coffee. — ^Does any one
lend you a gun? — ^Nobody lends me one. — What does your,
friend lend me ? — He lends you many books and many jewels.-^
Do you read the books which I read 1 — I do not read the one
which you read, but the one which the great captain reads.— -Are
you ashamed to read the books which I read ? — I am not ashamed^
but I have no wish to read them.

SECOND MONTH.

Secondo mtse.

TWENTY-SIXTH LESSON.
Leziane veniesima sesta.

Do you letxn French 7

I do learn it«
I do not learn it.

The Pole.

The Roman.

TheGhreek.

The Aral^ the Arabian.

The Syrian.

( Impara Ella il franceael

I Impara Ella V idioma firanoetB (ei

^ la lingua f ranoeee) 7

L' imparo.

Non r imparo.

Prench.

Ilfranoese.

Engllah.

L' ingleae.

German.

litedesoo.

« Italian.

LMtaUano.

Spaniah.

Lo spagnuolo.

Polish.

11 poloneae.

Rmnian.

Ilnisso.

Latin.

11 UUno.

Greek.

Ilgreco,

Arabian, Arabic.

L'arabo.

Syrian, Syriac

II siriaco.

I learn ItaUan.

Imparo V italiano.

If y brother learns German.

HiolrateUo impara

II Polacco.
II Romano.
II Greco.
L* Arabo.
II Siriaco.

A re you an EdgUahman 7 I fe Ella Inglese 7

No, Sir, I am a Frenchman. | No, Signore, sono Francese.

()h9. A. When the indefinite article is used in English to denote qnalltlea,
ha Italians make use of no article.

TWENTY-SIXTH LESSON.

115

He la a Gennan.

la he a tailor?

No^ he is a ahoemaker.

Egll i Tedeaeo.

EegUaartol

No, egU i calaolaio.

The fool. II PI12Z0.

He ia a fool. EgU a pazzo.

The eyening. , La aera.

The day.

{ IIgiomo(Ud!).

^Denderare 1.

To wish.

Dare* (conjugated Lesson

XXIV).
Augurare 1.

i wiah yon a good morning.

Le do (auguro) U buon giomo.

Obg. B. Often the indefinite article in Engliah anawera to the definite

article fai Italian. '

Does he wish me a good eTenlng 1

Hi da (augnra) egli'to buona sera?

He wishes you a good morning.

Egli Le da (angura) U bnon giomo.

He liaa a large noae.

Egli ha il naao grande.

He haa bine eyea.

Egli ha^/t occhi azzorri.

Blae.

Black.

Nero, negro.

Long. Lungo.

A large knife.

tin coltellone.

A large man.

Tin ttomone.

A French book.

Un libro franceae.

Un Ubro ingleae.

French money.

Danaro Irancese.

Engliah soap.

Sapone faiglese.

Do yon read a German book?

Legge Ella un libro tedeaeo ?

I read an Italian book. Leggo un libro itajiano.

To listen to some one.

To listen to something.

What or the thing which.
Do you Uaten to what the man telle
you?

t qualcuno.
f AscoUare \uho.

\dlcuHO.
cqualcosa.
f AscoUare <.quakhecosa.
( alcuna cosa,
Cid che, fuel che^ ^[uanio,
i Aacolta EUa cid che 1* 1000 Le
dice?

116

TWBNTY-SIXTH LESSON.

I listen to it

He Ustens tolvitti ^11 him.
Do you listen io whst I tell you 1
Do you listen to met

I do listen Io you.
Do you listen io my brother?
I do not listen to him.
Do you listen to the men 1
I listen to them.

t L' ascolto.

t Egli ascolta cid che gli dieo. ^
t Ascolta Ella quel cbe Le dieo 1
t fii ascolta {or «n' ascolta) EUal

mi ascoltate voi 1
t La ascolto {or L' ascolto).
t Ascolta Ella mio frateUol
t Non r ascolto.
t Ascolta Ella guegU uominit
t Li ascolto.

To take away.

To take off.
Do you take your ha: offi
I taice it off.

Does he take off his coat?
He does take it off.
He does not take it off.
Do your cliildren take off their boots?

They do take them off.
Vott take your gloves off

We take off our glovet.
We take them off.

Portar vm llevare) 1.

Levarn 1.

t Si leva Ella ilcappello?

t Helolevo.

t Levaai egO I* ablto ?

t Se Io leva.

t Non se Io leva.

t Si levano git ativaU i di Lei Cm-
ciulU?

t Se U levano.
( Ella si leva i guanti.
C Vi levate i guanti.

t Ci leviamo i guanti.

t Ce U leviamo.

Correggere^ 2.
Corregge i dl Lei temi suo padre?

II tema.

To correct.
Does your .father correct your exer-
cises?

The exercise.

Ob9. C. There an in Italian many nouns terminated in a, for the moat part
derived from the Greek, which ara masculine.

The exercises. I I temi.

He corrects them. I ISgU U corregge.

To speak French.

To speak English.
Do yon speak French?
No, Sir, I apeak English.

To take.

To dilnk coffee

Parlare francese.
Parlare inglese.
Parla Ella francese t
No, Signore, parlo ing^eae.

Prendere* (regular in the
present).

r t Prcndere U cafii.
1 1 Prendere dot caii2 {or simply pren-
darecafid).

TWBNTY-STXTH LESSON.

m

To drink tea.

Do yon drink tea 1

I do drink some.

Do you drink tea every day 1

I drink some every day.

My father drinka coffee.

He drinks cofiee every morning.

My brother drinks tea.

He drinka tea every moming.

To take away.
Who takes away the book 1
The Frenchman takes it away.
Does any one take away the

j t Prendere U td.

1 1 Prendrre dd ti (pretidero id).

t PrendeEUadflta?

t Ne prendo.

t Prende Ella U ii ogni giomol

t Lo prendo ogni giorno.

t Mlo padre prende del cafid.

t Prende U cafid ogni mattina.

t Mt& fratello prende del td.

t Prende U td ogni mattina.

IS?

No one takes them away. i

What do you take away 1 .

1 take away your boots and your

brother's clothes. I

Poriar via.
ChiportaviailUbro?
Lo porta via il Francese.
Ctualcuno porta via i bicchieri 1 Porta

via qualcuno i biccliieri?
Nessuno li porta via.
Che cosa porta te via?
Porto via i di Lei stivali ^ i vestiti

del di Lei frateilo.

EXERCISES.

80.

Do you go for any thing ?-^I do go for something.— What do
yoii go for ? — ^I go for some cider. — ^Does your father send for any
thing? — ^He sends for some wine. — ^Does your servant go for
some bread ?-— He goes for some.-^For whom does your neigh*
hour send ? — ^He sends for the physician. — ^Does your servant take
off his coat in order to make the ifire ? — He does take it off in
order to make it. — ^Do you take off your gloves in order to give
me some money ? — ^I do take them off in order to give you some.
— Do you learn French ? — ^I do learn it. — Who learns English ?
— The Frenchman learns it. — Does your brother learn German ?
—He does learn it. — ^Do we leam Italian ? — ^You do learn if. —
What do the English leam ? — ^They leam French and German.
— ^Do you speak Spanish ? — ^No, Sir, I apeak Italian. — Who speaks
Polish ?— ^My brother speaks Polish. — ^Do our neighbours speak
Russian? — They do not speak Russian, but Arabic. — ^Do you
speak Arabic ? — No^ I speak Greek and Latin. — What knite have
you ?— I have an Englidi knife. — ^W^hat money have you there ?

118 TWBNT7-8IZTR LESSON.

Is it Italian or Spanish money f— It Is Russian money.— Have
you an Italian hat ? — ^No, I have a Spanish hat.-— lAre you an
Bnglishman ? — ^No, I am a Frenchman. — ^Are you a Greek ? —
No, I am a Spaniard.

81.

Are these men Grermans? — No, they are Russinng. -Do the
Russians speak Polish ? — They do not speak Polish, hut Latin,
Greek, and Arabic. — ^Is your brother a merchant ? — ^No, he is a
joiner. — ^Are these men merchants ?— No, they are carpenters.-^
Are you a cook ? — ^No, I am a baker.— Are we tailors ? — ^No, we
are shoemakers. Art thou a fool ? — ^I am not a fool. — ^What is
that man 1 — He is a physician. — ^Do you wish me any thing I-*
I wish you a good morning. — ^What does the young man wUi
me ? — He wishes you a good eveaing. — ^Do your children come to
me in order to wish me a good evening 1 — ^Th^ oome to you in
order to wish you a good morning. — ^Has the Grerman black eyes ?
— No, he has blue eyes. — Has this man large feet ? — He has little
feet and a large nose. — Have you time to read my book ? — I have
no time to read it, but much courage to study Italian. — ^What dost
thou do instead of playing ? — ^I study instead of playing.— Dost
thou learn instead of writing ?^-I write instead of learning. —
What does the son of our friend do ?•— He goes into the garden
instead of doing his exercises.— Do the children of our neighbours
read ? — ^They write instead of reading. — ^What does our coc^ ?
— ^He makes a fire instead of going to the market. — ^Does your
father sell his ox ? — ^He sells his horse instead of selling hii ox.

82.
Does the son of the painter study English ? — ^He studies Greek
instead of studying English. Does the butcher kill oxen? — ^He
kills sheep instead of killing oxen. — ^Do you listen to me ? — ^I do
listen to you. — ^Does your brother listen to me 7 — ^He speaks instead
of listening to you.— Do you listen to what I am telling you ? — ^I
do listen to what you are telling roe. — ^Dost thou listen to what thy
brother tells thee ? — I do listen to it. — ^Do the children of the phy-
sician listen to what we tell them ? — ^They do not listen to it.— Do
you go to the theatre ? — ^I am going to the warehouse instead of
going to the theatre.-— Are you willing to read my book ? — ^I am

TWBNTY-SEYBNTH LESSON. 110

willing to read it, but not now ; I have sore eyes. Does your
father correct my exercises or those of my brother ?-*He corrects
neither yours nor those of your brother.— Which, exercises does
he correct ? — ^He oorrecta mine. — ^Do you take off your hat in
order to speak to my faiher ? — ^I do not take it off in order to
speak to him.— ^Do you take off your boots ? — ^I do not take them
off.— Who takes off his hat I — My friend takes it off.^-Does he
take off his gloves? — ^He does not take them off. — What do these
boys take off? — They takeoff their boots and their clothes. — Who
takes away the glasses? — Your servant takes them away. — ^What
do your children take awsgr ? — ^They take away the books and my
notes. — ^What do you take, away? — ^I take away nothing. — ^Do we
take away any thing ? — ^We take away our father's penknife and
our brothers' trunks. — Do you give roe English or German cloth ?—
I give you neither English nor German cloth ; I give you French
cloth. — ^Do you read Spanish ? — ^I do not read Spanish, but Ger-
man.— ^What book is your brother reading?— He b reading a
French book. Do you drink tea or coffee in the morning ? — ^I
drink tea. — ^Do you drink tea every morning? — I drink some
every morning. — ^What do you drink ? — ^I drink coffee. — What
does your brother drink ? — He drinks tea. — ^Does he drink some
every morning ? — ^He drinks some every morning. — ^Do your chil-
dren drink tea ? — They drink coffee instead of drinking tea.—
What do we drink ?-— We drink tea or coffee.

TWENTY-SEVENTH LESSON.
Lezione veniesima seitima.

To wely to moUten.
To show.
I show.

Bagnare 1.
( Mostrere 1.
I Far vedere.

Facdo vederab Mottro.

130

TWENTY-SEVBNTH LSSSON.

Thou showesi.
He shows.

To show some one.

Do yon show me your gun 7

I do show it you.

What do you show the roan'Z

I show him my fine clothes.

The tobacco.
Tobacco (for smoking).

Snnir.

To smoke.
Hie gardener.
The Talet.
The concert

To intend.

The ball.

Do yon Intend to go to the ball this

evening?
I intend to go thither.

Pal vedere.
Fa vedere.

MostrL
Mostra.

ii?«reJ"-'-~-

I

jHifaElhivedere I
( Mi mostra EUa 1

11 dl Lei schiop-
pol o volete
mostrarmi U
voetro schiop-
po?

Glielo faccio vedere.

Che taostra Ella all' uomol

Oil mostro i miei begli Mtl

II tabacco.

Del tabacco da fumare.
{ Del tabacco In polvere.
c Del tabacco da naso.

Fumare 1.
Ugiardiniere.
II cameriere.
U concerto.

; Pensare 1. i ^^ °°* ^^ • P"P^
[lntendere*2,3 -J^on before the

^ C infinitive.
[ n hallo.

i La festa da ballo.
Pensa EUa andare alia festa da ballo

stassera (or qnesta sera) 1
Penso andarci.

To know.
To sufim.
Do you know haw to swim 1

Sapere* 2. (Lesson XXIV).
Nuotare 1.
SaEllanuotare?

Ob§. 7b know is in English followed by how to before the infinitive, whilst
n Italian the infinitive joined to the verb tapere is not preceded by any particle.
Do you know how to write 7 I Sa Ella scrivere 7

Does he kn'ow how to read 1 | Saegli leggere 7

To etXtinguish.
Do you extinguish the fire 7
I do extinguish it.
He extinguishes it.
Thou extinguishest it.

Spegnere* 2 (or spengere* 2)
Spegne Ella il fuoco 7
Non lo spengo.
Egli lo spegne.
Tu lo spegni.

TWXNTY-SBVENTH LB880N.

TV iighi^ fn kindle. \ Ateendertl* 2.

131

Often.
]>• yoa •ften go to the ball 7

As often M yon.

Am often es I.
As often es he.

As often as they.

Do yoa often see my father 1

Oftener.
I eee him oftener than yon.

Not so often.

Not so often asyon.
Not so often as^L
Not so often as they.

Spesso {spesse tfoUe, sooente)^
Ya Ella speaeo alia festa da baK^t

fCori apeaao che Lei, o tanto speaeo
qnanto yoi.
Cok spesso come LeL
Speaeo qoanto Lei.
Cosi epesso che me.
. Cosispe^^ come InL
< Cos) spesao come lonK
( Speaeo come lore.

Vede Ella spesso mio padre Y
Piu spesso.
Lo vedo pih speaeo di Lei.

( Meno spesso.
i Non tanlo spesso.

Meno aorente dl Lei.

Meno speaeo di me.

Meno spesao di loro.

BXERCISBS.
88.

What does your father want 1 — ^He wants some tobaooo. — ^Will
you go for some ? — ^I will go for some. — ^What tobaooo does he
want ? — ^He wants some snuff.^^Do you want tobacco (for smok-
ing) ? — I do not want any ; I do not smoke. — ^Do you show me
any thing ? — ^I show you gold ribbons (dei nasiri d' oro). — ^Does
your father show his gun to my brother? — ^He does show it him.
•^Does he show him his beautiful birds ? — ^He does show them to
him. — ^Doea the Frenchman smoke ?— <fie does not smoke. Do
you go to the ball ? — I go to the theatre, instead of going to the
ball. — ^Does the gardener go into the garden ? — ^He goes to the
market instead of going into the garden.^— Do you send your valet
{il cameriere) to the tailor ? — ^I send him to the shoemaker instead
of sending him to the tailor. — ^Doea your brother intend to go to
the ball this evening 1 — He does not intend to go to the ball, but

6

1S3 TWENTY-SEVBNTH LBSSOIf.

to the concert— When do you intend to go to the concert ? — ^1 in,
tend to go there this evening. — At vhat o'clock ? — At a quartef
past ten. — ^Do you go for my son ? — ^I do go for him. — ^Where is
he ? — He is in the counting-house. — ^Do you find the man whom
you are looking ibr? — ^I do find him. — Do your sons find the
friends whom they are lookiog for ?— They do not find them.

84.

Do your friends intend to go to the theatre ? — ^They do intend
to go thither. — When do they intend to go thither ? — ^They intend
to go thither.to-morrow. — ^At what o'clock? — At half past seven. ,
— What does the merchant wish to sell you ? — He wishes to sell
me some pocket-books. — Do you intend to buy some f — ^I will not
buy any. — Dost thou know any thing ? — ^I do not know any thing.
— What does your little brother know ? — He knows how to write
and to read ? — ^Does he know French ? — He does not know it. —
Do you know Grerman ? — ^I do know it. — ^Do your brothers know
Greek ? — ^They do not know it, but they intend to study it. — Do
you know English ? — ^I do not know it, but I intend to learn it. —
Do my children know how to read Italian 1 — ^They know how to
read, but not how to speak it. — ^Do you know how to swim ? — I
do not know how to swim, but how to play. — ^Does your son know
how to make coats ? — He does not know how to make any ; h^ is
no tailor. — Is he a merchant ? — He is not {non V e). — What is
he ? — He is a physician. — ^Do you intend to study Arabic ?— -1 do
intend to study Arabic and Syriac. — Does the Frenchman know
Russian? — ^He does not know it, but he intends learning it —
Whither are you going ? — ^I am going into the garden in order to
speak to my gardener. — ^Does he listen to you ? — ^He does listen
to me.

85.

Do you wish to drink some cider ? — ^I wish to drink some wine ;
have you any ? — I have none ; but I will send for some. — ^When
will you send for some ? — ^Now.— Do you know how to make tea ?
I know how to make some. — ^Where is your father going ? — He
.goes no where ; he remains at home. — Do you know how to
write a note ? — I know how to write one. — Can you write exer-
uisesl — I can write spme. — Dost thou Conduct any body? — I

TWENTY-EIGHTH LESSON. 1S5

«oiidaot nobody. — ^Whom do you conduct ? — ^I oonduct my son.
'—Where do you oonduct him? — ^I conduct him to my friends to
{per) wish them a good morning. — Does your servant conduct
your child ? — ^He conducts htm.— Whither does he conduct it ?—
He conducts it into the gwden. — ^Do we conduct any one ? — ^We
conduct our diiidren. — ^Whither are our friends conduothig their
sons f— They are conducting them home.

86.

Do yoa extinguish the fire ? — ^I do not extinguish it.^-Does
your servant light the fire ? — ^He does light it. — ^Where does he
light it ? — He lights it in your warehouse. — ^Do you often go to
the Spaniard ? — ^I go often to him. — Bo yOu go oftener to him
than I ? — ^I go oftener to him than you^^ — ^Do the Spaniards often
come to you?—- They do come often to me. — ^Do your children
oftener go to the ball than we ?— Theiy do go thither oftener than
you.— Do we go out as often as our neighbours 1— We do go out
oftener than they. — ^Does your servant go to the market as often
as my cook ? — ^He does go thither as often as he^— Do you see
my father as often as I ? — ^I do not see him as often as you.—
When do you see him ?— I see him every morning at a quarter
to five.

TWENTY-EIGHTH LESSON.
Leziane ventesitna otiava.

We have aeen in many of the foregoing leMons and ezerdaea that the Italians
have no particular way to construe interrogative lentences ; all depends on the
tone with which the sentence is pronounced. The English interrogative aux-
iliaries, da and am, therefore, arsBot generally rendered in Italian. Sometimes
rhey may be rendered by forte, which sigitifiesptHk^w, why, as wiU be seen
by the following examples .— •

i34

Do I wlshl
Amiable?
Am I doing 7

T\V£NTV.KI«iH 'H LiiS30!f.

{Vogllol

( Voglio fonel

j P0880 7

cpoBsofondl

S Paceio (or fo) 1

CFaccio forte?

What am I doing?

Whatdolaay?

Wliera am I going to?
To whom do I speak ?

Am I going?

Am I coming?
You are coming.
Do you tell or aay ?
I do say or tell.
He says or tells.
Wliat does he say?
We say.
Uo I speak?
Do I love or like ?

( Coaa facdo ?
CChecosafacdo?
(Coaadico?
^ Che dico ?

Ore Yado ?

A cU parlo ?

Vado? Vadoforse?

Vengo ? Vengo forse 7

EUayiene.

Dice Ella?

Dico.

EgUdice.

Che dice egtt?

Didamo.

Parlo 7 Parlo forse 7

Amo ? Amo forse 7

Are you acquainted with that man 7

I am not acquainted with him.

Is your brother acquainted with him?

Uti is acquainted with him.

Do you drink dder?

I do drink dder, but my brother drinks

wine.
Do you receive a note to-day 7

] do receive one.

What do we receive?

What do our children recdve 7

They vecdve some books.

ConosoeEllacolul? oqaeir4iomoY

Non lo conosco.

Lo conosoe il di Lei fratello 7

Egli lo conosce.

Beve Ella del cidro?

Bevo del ddro, ma mio frateUo bera
del vino.

Riceve Ella oggi un biglietto ?
( Ne ricevo uno.
I Lo ricevo.^

Chericeviamo?

Che ricevono i nostri ftncinUI?

fiaai rioovono del UbrL

To hegin^ to commence.
I begin to speek.

SFrincipiare 1.
Cominciare 1 (incondneiare).
Prindpio (incominclo) a parlare.

1 l/no, in the sense of an indefinite article, can in Italian never stand at the
end of a sentence; in its stead the pronoun is used before the verb^ or joined
10 it.

TWXN.y-BIGHTH LESSON.

135

Before.

Do yon speak More you Ustcn 1
Does he go to the market before he
breakfaatal

( Prima dS..

< Innanxi di {che).

( AvanH di,

Parla EUa prima d' aacoltarel
Va egU al mercato prima di &r cola
sione.

To breakfast. |

He goes thither before he writes.
Do you take off your gloves before you i
take oiT your bOoU 7

Far colathne.
Egli d ya prima di scrlvere.
Si leva EUa i guanti prima di levars!
gUstivalil

To depart, to set out.

When do you intend to depart 1
I intend to depart to-morrow.

Well.

Badfy.
Do I speak well?
You do not speak badly

Partire* d (regular in Pres*

ent).
Quando pensa EUa partire 1
Penso partire domani

Bene.
Male.
Parlobene?
EUa non parla

Does your brother know ItaUan 7 ' 1 Sa T itaUano U di Lei frateUo 1
ObB. When a tense of a verb is a monosyUable, or when it has the accent on

the last syllable, the pronoun may follow it, but the consonant must be doubled.

This appties more generaUy to poetry than prose. Ex.

He knows IL . Egli saUo (instead of h so).

Who knows EngUsh 7 I Chi sa P Inglese 1

My father knows it. | Mio padre saUo(/o fs is more elegant).

EXERCISES.

87.

Do I read well ? — ^You do read well. — ^Do I speak welt ? — You
do not speak well. — ^Does ray brother speak French well ? — He
speaks it well. — ^Does be speak German well? — ^He speaks it
badly. — Do we speak well ? — ^You speak badly. — Do I drink too
much ? — ^You do not drink enough. — Am I able to make hats ?—
You are not able to make any ; you are not a hatter.— -Am I able ^
to wrilc a note ? — ^You are able to write one. — Am I doing my
exercise well ? — ^You are doing it well. — What am I doing ?— You

126 TWSNTT-EIGHTH LESSON.

are doing exercises.— What is my brother doing ? — He is dping
nothing. — Whut do I say 1 — ^You say nothing. — Do I begin to
speak ? — ^You do begin to speak. — ^Do I begin to speak well ? —
You do not begin to spaak well (a parlar hene)^ but^to read well
(ma a legger bene). — ^Where am I going ? — ^You are going to
your friend. — ^Is he at home ? — ^Do I know ? — ^A«n I able to speak
as often as the son of our neighbour ? — ^He is able to speak oftener
than you. — Can I work as much as he? — You cannot work as
much as he. — ^Do I read as often as you ? — You do not read as
often as I, but you speak oftener than I. — ^Do I speak as well
{cost bene) as you ? — ^You do not speak so well as I. — ^Do I go
(vengo) to you, or do you come to me ? — ^You come to me, and I
go (vengo) to you. — When do you cOme to me ? — ^Every morning
at half past six.

88. ^

Do you know the Russian whom I know ? — I do not know the
one you know, but I know another. — Do you drink as much cider
as wine ? — I drink less of the latter than of the former. — ^Does
the Pole drink as much as the Russian l—iie drinks just as
much. — ^Do the Germans drink as much as the Poles? — ^The
latter drink nu>re than the former. — Dost thou receive any thing?
—I do receive something. — ^What dost thou receive ? — I receive
some money. — ^Does your friend receive books ? — He does receive
some. — ^What do we receive ? — We receive some cider. — ^Do the
Poles receive tobacco ? — ^They do receive some. — ^From whom (da
chi) do the Spaniards receive money ? — They receive some from
the (degV) English, and from the (dai) French. — ^Do you receive
as many friends as enemies ? — ^I receive less of the latter than of
the former. — From whom (da cM) do your children receive
books*? — ^They receive some from me and from their friends.
— Do I receive as much cheese as bread ? — ^You receive more of
the latter than of the former. — ^Do our servants receive as many
waistcoats as coats ? — ^They receive less of the latter than of the
former. — ^Do you receive one more gun ? — ^I do receive one more.
* — How many more books does our neighbour receive ? — He re
ccives threa more.

TWENTT-EIGHTH LB8S0N. 127

89.

When does the foreigner intend to depart ? — ^He intends to de-
part to-day. — ^At what o'clock ? — At half past one. — ^Do you in-
tend to depart this evening ? — ^I intend to depart to-morrow. —
Does the Frenchman depart to-day ? — He departs now. Where
is he going to ? — He is going to his friends. — Is he going to the
English ? — He is going to them (ci va), — ^Dost thou set out to-
morrow ? — I set out this evening. — When do you intend to write
to your friends ? — ^I intend to write to them to-day. — ^Do your
friends answer you ? — They do answer me. — Does your father
answer your note ? — He answers it. — Do you answer my broiners'
notes ? — I do answer them. — ^Does your brother begin to learn
Italian? — He begins to learn it. — Can you speak French? — ^I
can speak it a little. — Do our friends begin to speak German ?
— ^^^y ^^ begin to speak it. — ^Are they able to write it ? — They
are TOe to write it. — Does the merchant begin to sell ? — He does
begin. — ^Do you speak before you listen ? — ^I listeh before I speak.
— Does your brother listen to you before he speaks ? — ^He speaks
before he listens to me. — Do your children read before they
write? — ^They write before they read.

90.

Does your servant sweep the warehouse before he goes to the
market ? — He goes to the market before he sweeps the warehouse.
— Dost thou drink before thou goest out ? — I go out before I drink.
— ^Do you intend to go out before you ~ breakfast ? — I intend
to breakfast before I go out. — ^Does your son take off his boots
before he takes off his coat? — ^He neither takes off hb boots
nor his coat. — Do I take off my gloves before I take off my hat ?
— ^You take off your hat before you take off your gloves. — Can
I take off my boots before I take off my gloves ? — ^You can-
not take off your boots before you take off your gloves.-4-At
what o'clock do you bfeakfast ? — ^I breakfast at half past eight. —
At what o'clock does the American breakfast ? — He breakfasts
every day at nine o'clock. — At what o'clock do your children
breakfast ? — They breakfast at seven o'clock. — ^Do you go to my
iathcr before you breakfast ? — ^I go to him before 1 breakfast.

TWENTY. NINTH LESSON.
Lezione veniesima nona.

We hare teen (Lessons XVI and XXVILI that the comparatlye of equality
\f. formed bj came^ tanto^ quanio, altreitanto, eoais ^the comparatiye of superiority
b> pUtt and that of minority by fwno. As for the superlatire, it is formed by
changing the last vowel of the a4jective for the masculine into iuimo, and for
the feminine into uHma. Ex.

Pomtivt,

Comparative,

SuptdaUv*.

Learned,

more learned, most learned.

Dotto,

pih dotto.

dottissimo.

Poor,

poorer,

poorest

Povcro,

piik povero,

poverissimo.

Wise,

wiser.

wisest

Savio,

pih savio.

saYiissimo.'

Pious,

more pious,

most pious.

Pio,

piii pio,

pUasimo.

Rich,

richer,

richest.

Ricco,

piii ricco.

ricchissimo

Cool,

cooler.

coolest.

Fresco

pii)i fresco.

fresd^^mo

Bxoad,

broader.

broadest.

Largo^

pi& largo.

larghissimo.

Often,

oftener.

most often.

Spesso,

pih spesso,

spessisaimo.

Oba, A. From these examples it may be seen that the snperlatiye is always
formed by joining to the a4jective in the plural the syllable aftnio.

Oba, B. The relative superlative, L e. when the article Hu is joined to moH
or UaH^ la expressed by U piitt U mma, for the masculine, pnd by la ptd, la mtnot
for the feminine. Ex.

The greatest
The smallest
The finest
The leaQt^ne.

n pih grande.
n meno grande.
npihbeUo.
11 meno bello.

This book is small, that ii smaller, and
this U the smaUest of all

This hat is large, but that is larger.

Is your hat as large as mlnel

It is larger than yours.
tt is not so large as yours.
Are our neighbour's children as good
as ours 1

Questo libro d piccolo, qudlo d pilk

piccolo e ootesto d il pih piccolo di

tuttl.
Clnesto cappello d grande, ma quello

d piil grande.
II di Lei cappello d cos) grande come

ilmiol
k pih grande del di Let
& meno grande del di Lei.
I fimciuUi del nostro vidno sono cod

savi come i nostril

1 Many grammarians form the plural of jovto into Mvt, instead of mvjC
According to this formation the superlative- would be mnitdmo, Instead of

TW^NTT-MIMTB LRSSMr.

12^

itey are better than ours. *

Tbeif are not so good as ours.

Re is the happiest man in the world.

SflB9 pift sst! dei noatti
Soul) meno savi dei nostri.
Egli d fl piik felioe degli uomini (er
fimgliuomini).

A yery fine book.
Very fine books.
A yery pretty kniie.
VeryweU.

I Un belUaaiad Ilbro.
I Dei belUssiml librl.
I Un leggiadrlssimo colteila
Benissimo.

That man is extremely learned. | Questi d dottissimo.

This Urd is very pretty. | Ctuesto uccello d vexxosissimo.

Obt. Cf. MoUo and tumd serre also to form absolute superlatives. < Ex.

Very wise. I Molto savio.

Very large. I Assai grande.

Ofrs. D, The prefix orei also senres to form an absolute superlative. Ex.

Very handsome. i Arcibello.

Extremely long. I Arcilunghlssimo.

ObB, E. To some words the particle ttra may be prefixed to form an absoluts
superlative. Ex.

Over rich. I Straricco.

Over done (cooked). I Straootto.

Obs, F, The ibIlDwIng a^jectivea are irregular In the formation of their

comparatives and superlatives i

Gk>od, better^

Bad, worse, the worst

Great, greater, gieatest

Little, less, the least

PoaUive, Comparathe. Sttpertatige.
Boono, migUore, ottimo.
Cattivo, peggiore, pessimo.
Grande, magglore, massimo.
Piccolo, minore, minimo.

▲ovnss.

WeU,

better.

the best Bene,

megUo,

ottimamente.

Bed,

wors^

peggto.

TIm least noise hurts me.
The least thing hurts him.

II minimo strepito mi h,
La minima oosa gli fit male.

06ff. G. In Italian the tepetition of the positive forms a superlative. Ex.
A very leaned man. i Un uomo dotto dotto.

The weather is very cold. { II tempo dfttsddofireddo.

This seems to me most ugly. Ctuesto mi sembra brutto bmtto

She is the finest woman in the world. E la bella delle belle.

Obs. B. Superlative adverbs are lormed by joining to the a4jective In
Hhm plural the terminatloo ssCmoiiunic. Ex.

6*

.80

TWENTY-NINTH LBSSOIf.

Learned — inoet learnedly.
Prudent — most prudently.
— moat richly.

Dv tio — doMlwimamenCe.
Prudtnte ^- pmd— tlaalmamente
Ricoo — rtochkdmamenta.

Whose?
Whoaehaiiathial

his.
It la my brother'a hat
It ia the hat of my brother.
It ia my brother'a.
Who haa the fineat hat1 j

Whoaehatiathefineati \

That of my father ia the fineat.
Whoae ribbon la the handaomer,
youraormine?

Do yon read aa often aa II

I read oftenor than you.

Doea ha read aa often aa II

Ha reada and writea aa often aa you.

Do your chlldran write aa lanch aa

wel
Th«y write more than you.

_ •

We read more than the children of our

frienda.
To whom do you write.
We write to our friesda.
We read good hooka.

Di chi f

Di chi d queato eappeUo 1

B.

E U oappelio di mio frateUo.

Chi ha U pih bel oappelio 1

Quello di mio padre d il pii)i bello.
dual d il pih bel naatro, U di Lei, i
voatrooilmio?

Legge Ella coal apeaao come io 7
Leggo piii apeaao di Lei.
Legge egll coai apeaao come io 1
EgU legge e acrive coal apeaao come

Ella {or legge e acrive apeaao al

pari di Lei).
Scrivono qnanto noi 1 di Lei fiui

ciuUi?
figlino aer^ono pi& di Loro, or plh

di Vol
Noi leggiamo piili del lanciuIU del

noatri amicL
AchiacriveteVoll
Scriviamo ai noatri amicL
Leggiamo del buoni libri.

EXERCISES.
91.

Whose book is this ?— It is mine.— Whose hat is that ?— It is
my father's. — ^Are you taller than I ? — ^I am taller than you. — Is
your brother as tall as you ? — ^He is as tall as I. — ^Is thy hat as
bad as that of my father ? — ^It is better, but not so black as his. —
Are the clothes of the Italians as fine as those of the Irish ? — They
are finer, but not so good. — Who have the finest gloves ? — The
French have them. — Who has the finest horses ? — Mine are fine»

tWENTY-NLNTH LEaSON. 131

yours are finer than nfine ; but those of our fiiends are the finest
of all. — ^Is your horse good ? — It is good, but yourd is better, and
that of the Englishman is the best of all the horses which we
know. — Have you pretty boots ? — ^I have very pretty ones, but
my brother has. prettier than I. — ^From whom (da chi) does he
receive them ? — He receives them from his best friend.

92.

Is your wine as good as mine ? — It is better. — ^Does your mer-
chant sell good knives ? — He sells the best knives that I know
{che eonoscay subjunctive). — ^Do we read more books than the
French ? — We read more than they ; but the English read more
than we, and the German^ read the most (t piu). — Hast thou ' a
finer garden than that of our physician ? — ^I have a finer one than «
he (del suo), — Has the American a finer stick than thou ? — ^He
has a finer one. — ^Have we as fine children as our neighbours ? —
We have finer ones. — ^Is your coat as pretty as mine ? — ^It is not
so pretty, but better than yours. — ^Do you depart to-day ? — ^I do
not depart to-day. — ^When does your father set out ? — He sets out
this evening at a quarter to nine. — Which of these two children
is the better (savio) ? — The one who studies is better than the one
who plays. — Does your servant sweep as well as mine ? — ^He
sweeps better than yours. — Does the Englishman read as many
bad books as good ones ? — ^He reads more good than bad ones.

93.

Do the merchants sell more sugar than oofifee ? — ^They sell
more of the latter than of the former. — ^Does your shoemaker
make as many boots as mine ? — He makes more than yours. —
Can you swim as well (con hene) as my son ? — ^I can swim bet-
ter than he ; but he can speak French better than I. — ^Does he
read as well as you ? — ^He reads better than I. — ^Does the son of
your neighbour go to market ? — No, he remains at home ; he has
sore feet. — ^Do you learn as well as the son of our gardener ? —
I learn better than he, but he studies better than I. — Whose gun
is the finest ? — ^Yours is very fine, but that of the captain is still
finer, and ours is the finest of all. — Has any one finer children
than you ? — No one has finer ones. — Does your son read as often
as I ? — He reads oftener than you. — Does my brother speak

183

TBIEtlETH LESSON.

French as often as you ? — He speaks and jreads it as often as I.
— Do I write as much as you ? — ^You write more than I.^-Do
our neighbours' children read Grerman as often as we 7 — ^We dc
not read it as often as they.— Do we write as often as they ? —
They write oftener than we, — ^To whom do they write ? — ^They
write to their friends.— Do you read English books ?-*We read
French books instead of reading English books.

THIRTIETH LESSON.
Leziane trentesima.

To believe.
Toyuion.

I put on my hat

He pats on his gloves.

Do yon put on your boots 7
We do put them on.
What do your brothers put onl
They put on their clothes.
Whither do you conduct ue 7
I conduct yon to my &ther.

Do yon go out.

I do go out.

Dowegoont7

We do go out

When does your &ther go out 7

JBarly.

Credere 2.

Mettere,* mtUerei.
( Metto 11 mlo cappello.
( fiCl metto il cappello.
K Si mette i guanti.
c Hette 1 suoi guanti.

Si mettono gli sUYaU.7

Ce li mettlamo.

Che si mettono i dl Lei firatelli 7

Si mettono i lore TestitL

Oye mi conduce &lla7

La conduce dal padra mio, (er vi
condnco da mio padre.

£8ceElU7orUBidteyoi7

Esco.

Usdamo Noi7

Useiamo.

Quando esoe il di Lei padief

As early as you.

(' Per tempo.
Di buon' ora,
A hum* era.
Presto.
( CotfL per tempo come _
( Coai di bHon' ora come

THIRTIETH LB8SON.

Ba ifomquU w early as you.

EgU eaoe cori par tampa <
or che Vol.

188

lEIla,

tsote.

Tardi.

Too.

Troppo.

Too late.

Too aoon, too early.

Too large, too great.
TooUttle.

i Troppo tardl.

; e Troppo di buon' oia (troppo a haon*

1 ] ora).

: C Troppo per tempo. Troppo preato.

I Troppo gw>de.

J Troppo piccolo.

Too much.

1 Troppo.

Do you speak too muchl
1 do not speak enough.

Paria Ella troppo 7
Non parlo abbastanza.

Jjaier than yoii.

Piu tardi di Lei.

1 go out later than you.

Esco plii tardi di LeL

Do you go to the play as early as 1 1
I go thither earlier than you.
Sooner.

Earlier.

Doea your frther go thither earlier
thanll

Ha goea thither too early.

Ya Ella alio spettaoolo oori di hwamf

ora come io 1
Ci vado piik di buon' ora di Lei (pih

presto di Lei).
Piu presto (pm totto)*
^ Pm per tempo.
I Pill di bium' ora.
Ci va 11 di(piii preato di ma 1
Lei padre cpi& per tempo di ma 1

oi V { troppo dl buon* ora.
i.ivaj^

: tioppo presto.

Do you speak already 7
Not-^et.

I do not speak yet

Do you finish your note 7

I do not finish it yet

Do you breakfast already 7

Do you

(rid digia.

ParlaElladigilL7
{ Non — ancora.
( Non — per anco.

Non parlo ancora (par aneo).

Finisce Ella U di Lei bi^iattol

Non lo finisco ancora.

FaEllagiacolaziona7

VieneEllaaTedermi7 VeniieToia
▼edermi7

Obt. A. Verbs of motion always require the preposition a (od bafora a iwwei),
and Verba of real the preposition In. Ex.

134

IHIUTIErH LESSON.

I go to 0M my children.

1 lend for tome wine.

I am sending for the physician.

I am going to the theatre.

I stay in the garden (In the room).

Vado a vedere i miei fiuMliilli.
Mando a cercare del vino.
Mando a cercare il medico
Vado al teatro.

Resto in giardino (in camera), or ma
ne ltd in camera.

ObM, B, But as we have seen in the foregoing lessons, the infinitive is ii<
Italian sometimes preceded by di (Lesson XVII.), sometimes by a or od (Les-
sons XXV., XXVIir., and this), sometimes by per (Lesson XX.), and some-
times it is simply used without any of these prepositions before it. The latter
is the case when it is joined to one of the following verbs, some of which have
already been exemplified in some of the preceding lessons, such as: voUre^* to
wish, to be willing (Lesson XVIII.) ; poUrct* to be able, can (Lesson XX.) ;
far t^dtrtf to show (Lesson XVXII.) ; pemare, intcruUrc, to intend to (Les-
sons XXVII. and XXVIII.).

Bisognare,

to be requisite.

Negare,

to deny.

Calcolare,

to intend to

Osare, ardire,<

k to dare.

to believe.

Parere,*

to appear.

Degnare o ;;
degnarsl, 1

to deign.

Pensare,

to think.

Potere,*

to be able (can).

Deaideraie,

to wish.

Pretendere,*

to pretend.

Dichiarare,

to declare.

Sapere,*

to know.

Dovere,*

to owe.

Sembrare,

to appear.

Fare,*

to do.

Sostenere,*

to maintain.

Intendere,*

to hear, to intend.

Vedere,*

to see.

Lasdare,

to let.

Volere,*

to be willing, to ^

It is necessary to do that.
I intend going to the play.
He thinks he Is able to do it.
He deigns to give it me.
He wishes to speak to the king.
I declare I cannot do that.
I ought to go there.
He sends me word.

'I intend to speak to him.
He lets me do it.
He says he cannot do it.
I dare to go there ;' I dare to do it.
They seem to say.

I intend tamake a journey.
Can you give me a franc 7
He pretends he can do it.
I can do it ; I know how to do it.

Bisogna far cid.

Calcolo andare alio spettaoolo.

Egli crede poterlo fare.

Kli si degna darmelo.

Egli desideraparlare al re.

Dichiaro non potere &r cid.

Devo andarci.

EgU mi la dire, or Egli mi manda ■

dire.
Intendo parlargU.
EgU me lo lascia &re.
Egli nega poterlo fieoe.
Oso andarci ; aidisoo fario.
Eglino paiono dire, or semhra ebs

essi dicono.
Penso far un viaggio.
Pod EUa darmi un franco 7
Egli pretende poterlo fare.
So&rlo.

THIRTIETH LESSON.

185

Be teeiiw to taave a wish to do it

I malntnin I can do it.'

We eee liim come.

Win yoa do me a layoiur ?

Egli aembra voleilo &ra.
SoBtengo aaperlo ftre.
Lo vediamo Tenire.
Tnol Ella farm! im plaoere 1

06t. C. Further, there is oo preposition before the infioitiye wlien it to naed
in an abeolute eenae. Ex.

To eat too much la dangerous.
To speak too much is foolish.
To do good to those that have offended
ns^ la a commendable action.

Mangiart troppo d pericoloso.
PaHar troppo d imprudente.
Fardel bene a qnelD ohl ci lianno of-
ieso, d un* atione loderole.

EXERCISES.

94.

Do you put on another coat in order to go to the play ?— I do
put on another. — ^Do you put on your gloves before you put on
your boots ? — ^I put on my boots before I put on my gloves.—
Does your brother put on his hat instead of putting on his coat ?
— ^He puts on his coat before he puts on his hat. — Do our children
put on their boots in order to go to our friends ?-*They put them
on in order to go to them. — ^What do our sons put on ? — ^They put
on their clothes and their gloves.-^Do you already speak French 1
— ^I do not speak it yet, but I begin to learn. — Does your father
go out already ?— He does not yet gp out. — ^At what o'clock does
he go out? — He goes out at ten o'clock. — ^Does he breakfast be-
fore he goes out ? — ^He breakfasts and writes his notes before he
goes out. — ^Does he go out earlier than you ?^ go out earlier
than he. — ^Do you go to the play as often as I ? — ^I go thither as
often as you. — ^Do you begin to know that man ?— 4 do begin to
know him. — ^Do you breakfast early ? — ^We do not breakfast late.
—Does the Englishman go to the concert earlier than you I — He
goes there later than I. — ^At what o'clock does he go thither ?—
He goes thither at half-past eleven*

05.

Do you not go too early to the oonoert ? — ^I go thither too late.
—Do I write too much ? — ^You do not write too much, but you
speak too much.-^Do I speak more than you ? — ^You speak more
than I and my brother. — ^Is my hat too large ? — ^It is neither too

186 TfllRTIBTB LB880N.

large nor too small. — ^Do you speak French oftener than Bnglish t
*-I speak English oflener than French. — ^Do your friends huy
much com ? — They buy but little. — Have you bread enough ?
— ^I have only a little, but enough. — ^Is it late ? — ^It is not late. —
What o'clock is it ? — It is one o'clock. — ^Is it too late to go to
your father ? — ^It is too late to go to him. — ^Do you conduct me to
him ? — ^I do conduct you to him. — ^Where is he ? — ^He is in his
counting-house.— Does the Spaniard buy a hone I-— He cannot
buy one. — ^Is he poor ?-*He is not poor ; he is richer than you.
— ^Is your brother as learned as you ? — He is more learned than
I^ but you are more learned than he and I.

96.
Do 3rou know that man 7 — ^I do know him.— Is he learned 1—
He is the most learned of all the men that I know {amasea, sub.
junptive). — ^Is your horse worse than mine ? — ^It Is not so bad as
yours.— Is mine worse than the Spaniard's ? — ^It Is worse ; it is
the worst horse that I know {canascCf subjunctive).— Do you give
those men less bread than cheese ? — ^I give them less of the latter
than of the former. — ^Do you receive as much money as your
neighbours ? — ^I receive much more than they. — ^Who receives
the most money ?— The French receive the moet.^3an yoorson
already write a note ? — He cannot write one yet, but he begins
to read a little. — ^Do you read as much as the Russians ?— We
read more than they, but the French read the nxMt (piuditutU).
~-Do the Americans write more than we ?— They write less than
we, but the Italians write the least (meno di ftOft).- Are they as
rich as the Americans ? — ^They are less rich than they.^-Are
3rour birds as fine as those of the Irish ? — ^They are lesa fine than
theirs, but those of the Spaniards are the least fine. — Do you aell
your bird t— I do not sell it ; I like it too much to sell it.

THIRTY-FIRST LESSON.
Lexione trentesima prima.

THE PAST PARTICIPLE.

The past participle, when it is regular,! always terminates in to. It is formed
from the infinitive, whose termination is for the first conjugation changed intc
alo, thus: paHar^^-^pariato i for the second into tttOf thus : vendere^-vendtUo i
and for the third into tto, thus : tcrvire •troUo. Examples :—

SECOND COirJUQATION.

p. p. ^ Jf/. p. p.

parlato. Venders, to sell, vtnduio.

eompraio. Credere, to believe, eredtUa.
Mudiaio, Ricevere, to receive, rieenUo.

FIBST CONJVOATIOir.

Inf.

Parlare^

Comprore,

Stndiin^

to speak,
to buy,
to study,

ServtTfl^
Sentire,
Dormtre,

To he — been.

TBUO COKJUOATlOlf.

to serve,
to hear,
to sleep,

P. P.

Hrvito.
Btntpto.
dormito.

Es9ere* — siato.^

Have you been to market 1 E Ella stata al mercato 7

Obs. In Italian the auxiliary verb ettere * is conjugated in its compound
with the help of the same auxiliary, and not as in English.*

I have been there.
I have not been there.
Have I been there 1

Ton have been there.
You have not been there.

Has he been there 1
He has been there.
He has not been there.

Yi sono stato.

Non vi sono stato.

Yi sono stato 7
i Yi siete stato.
t Ella vi d stata.
\ Ella non vi d stata.
! Non vi siete stato.

Yidstatoegli?
Egli vi d stato.
Egli non vi d stato.

> When it is irregular it will be separately noted.

* The pupils, in repeating the irregular verbs already given, must not fall to
mark In their lists the past participles of those verbs.

' The same is the case in Gorman. Ex. : 3(( bltt ba gnoeftn, I have been
there* (See German Method, lesson XLIII.)

138

TRIETT-F1B8T LSSSON.

Ever*
Never.

HaTB you been at the ball 7

Have you ever been at the ball 1

I have never been there.
Thou hast never been there.
He has never been there.

You have never been there.

Already or yet.

Have you already been at the play t
I have already been there.

You have already been th^re.

NofyeL

I have not yet been there.
Thou hast not yet been there.
He haa not yet been there.

You have not yet been there.
We have not yet been there.

MaL

Nan — mat,

' Siete Btato al Dallo (alia festa da
i ballo)?

E Ella Btata al ballo (alia feata da
[ baUo)7

Siete mai atato al ballo 7
[ E Ella Btata mai alia feata da ballo 1

Non vl Bono mai atato.

Tu non vl sol mai atato.

Non vi d tnai stato.
' Non vl siete mai Btato.
I Ella non vl d mai atata.

Gid, di gid,

E Ella gill atata alio spettaooloT

Vi Bono gl& Btato.
r Ella vi d g\\ Btata.
[ Vi siete gi& stato.

Nan — aneara (non jfer snco),

Non vi Bono stato ancora.

Non vl sei per anco atato.

Egli non vl d ancora stato.
( Non vl siete atato ancora.
C Ella non vl d per anco atata.

Non vl alamo per anco atatl.

Have you already been at my father*B 7 '
I have not yet been there. I

fe Ella giJL Btata da mio ptdrel
Non vi Bono per anco atato.

Where have you been this morning 7
I have been In the garden.
Where haa thy brother been 7
He haa been in the warehouse.
Haa he been there aa early aa 1 7
He has been there earlier than you.

Ove d Ella atata atamane7
Sono stato nel giardino.
Ove d atato tuo fratellol
Egli d Btato nel magaxzino.
Vi i Btato coat presto come io 1
Vi d Btato plii presto di Lei.

EXERCISES.

97.

Where have you been ? — I have been at the market. — Have

you been at the ball ? — I have been there. — Have I been to the

play ? — ^You have been there. — Hast thou been there?— I hav<^

TmETY-iiBsr uasov. 180

not b&tn 'th^re.—Has your soa evecbeeii at Ihe theatre? — He has
never heen there. — ^Hast thou already heen in my warehouse ? —
I have never heen there. — ^Do you intend to go thither f— I intend
to go thither % — When will you go thither ? — ^I will go thither to-
morrow- — ^At what o'clock ? — At twelve o'clock. — Has yomr
brother already been in my large garden ?-^He has not yet been
^^re. — ^Does he intend to see it ? — ^He does intend to see it —
when will he go thither ? — He will go thitHer to-day. — ^Does
he intend to go to the ball this evening 1-^He intends to go
thither. — ^Have you already been at the ball 1 — ^I have not yet
been there. — ^When do you intend to go thither ? — ^I intend to
go thither to-morrow. — Have you already "been in the French-
man's garden ? — ^I have not yet been in it. — ^Have you been
in my warehouses? — ^I have been there. — ^When did you go
there? — ^I nf^nt there this morning. — Have I been in your
eounting-hoyse or in that of your friend ? — ^You have neither
been in miqe nor in that of my friend, but in that of the Eng.
lishman. ^

98..
Has the Italian been in our warehouses or in those of the
Dutch ? — ^He has neither been in ours nor in those of the Dutch,
but in those of the Germans. — Hast thou already been at the
market ? — ^I have not yet been there, but I intend to go thither.-*
Has our neighbour's son been there? — ^He has been there. —
When has he been there ? — ^He hite been there to-day. — ^Does the
son of our gardener intend to goto the market? — ^He intends to
go thither. — What does he wish to buy there ? — ^He wishes to buy
there some chickens, oxen, com, wine, cheese, and cider. — ^Have
you already been at my brother's ? — ^I have already been there. —
Has your friend already been there ? — He has not yet been there.
-^ave we already been at our friends' ? — ^We have not yet been
there. — Have our friends ever been at our house ? — ^They have
never been there. — Have you ever been at the theatre ? — I have
never been there. — Have you a mind to write an exercise ? — I
have a mind to write one. — To whom do you wish to write a note ?
— ^I wish to write one to my son.— Has your father already been
at the concert t-^He has not yet been there, but he intends to go

140 THIftTT-FI&ST LESSON.

there.— Does he intend to go there to-day I — He intends to go
there to-morrow.— At what o'clock will he set out l^-tie will set
out at half-pfast six* — Does he intend to leave (fariire) before he
breakfasts i — He intends to break&st before he leaves.

99.
Have you been»to the play as early as I ? — ^I have been there
earlier than you.^-Have you often been at the concert? — ^I have
often been there.— ''Has our neighbour been at the theatre as often
as we ?— He has been there oftener than we.-^Do our friends go
to their counting-house too early ? — ^They go thither too late. — Do
they go thither as lafb as we ? — They go thither later than we. —
Do the English go to their warehouses too early ? — They go
thither too early. — Is your friend as often in the counting-house
as you ? — ^He is there oftener than I. — What does hi do there ?—
He writes. — Does he Vrite as much as you ? — He writes more
than I. — ^Where does your friend remain?— He remains in bis
oounting-house.4Doe» he not go out ? — He does not go out. —
Do you remain in the garden ? — ^I remain there. — Do you go to
your friend every day ?*-I goto him everyday. — ^When does he
come to you ?-^He comes to ne every evening. — Do you go any
where in the evening ?— »I gb no where ; I stay at home. — ^Do
you send fi>r any one ?— ^ send fi>r my physician. — ^Does your
servant go for any thing ?«— He goes for some wine.— Have you
been any where this morning t— I have been no where^^-^Where
has your fiither been ? — ^He h* been no where.-— When do you
drink tea ? — ^I drink some every moming.-*Does your son drink
coffee ?— He drinks tea. — ^Have you been to drink some ooffee f
•^I have been to drink some*

»

••

THIRTY. SECOND LESSON.
Lezione trentesima seconda.

To have^had.

Have jou had my book 7
I have not had it.
Have I had it?
Tou have had it
Ton have not had it.
Thon haat not had it.
Has he had It?
He haa had it
He haa not had it.
Hast thou had the coat ?
Ihavenotliadit.

Averf^ — aotUo.

Ha Ella avuto il mio Ubro.l

Non r ho avnto.

L* hoavntoio?

L* ha avuto.

Non i' ha amto.

Non V hai avato.

L' ha egli avuto?

Egli V ha avuto.

Egli non V ha avnto.

Hai avuto I'abito?

Non r ho avuto.

Have you had the bookf ? | Ha Ella avuto i Ubri ?

fE^ The past participle in Italian (the same as the adjective, Oba. A, Les-
son XXII), when It is proceded by its object, must agree with it in number ;
that is^ if the object is In the plural, the past participle must be put in the same
number. It may, however, also agree when followed by its object ; but the
past participle of eMcr«, to be^ must always agree in number ani gender with
iu subject Ex.

A have had them.
I have not had them.
Havelhadthami
Tou have had them,
Tou have not had them.

Has he had them?
He has had them.
He has not had them.

Have 3rou had any bread ?
1 have had some.
I have not had any.
Have I had any?
Tou have had i

Li ho avutL

Non 11 ho avuti.

Li ho io avuti?

Li ha avuti.

Ella Non 11 ha avuti.

avete avuti.
Li ha egli avuti?
Egli 11 ha avuti
Non 11 ha avuti.

Vol non U

Ton have not had any.

Has he had any?
H» has not had any.

Ha Ella avuto del pane?

Ne ho avuto.

Non ne ho aVUto.

Ne ho avuto io ?

Ella Ne ha avuto, or Vol ne avete

avuto.
Ella Non ne ha avuto. Vol non n«

avete avuto
Ne Ne ha egli avuto ?
Egli non ne ha avuto.

142

THIRTY-SBCONlf LESSON.

Have you had any knives? '
I have had some,
I have not had any.

What has he had 1
He has had nothing

Ha EUa avuto del eoltelU t
Ne ho avuti.
Non ne ho avuti.

Chehaeg^avuto?
Egii non ha avnto niente.

Have you been hungry?
I have been afiaid.

He has never been either right or
wrong.

t Ha EUa avutoCude 1
t Ho Bvuto paura.

t Egii non ha mai avuto torto qI
ragione.

To take place.

Thai (meaning thai thing).

Does the ball take place this evening?

It does take place.

It takes place this evening.

It does not take place to-day.

f Averluogo.
Cidf quello.
t Ha luogo stassera la festa da hallo \
t Ha luogo.

t Essa ha luogo questa sera,
t Non ha luogo quest* oggl.

When did the ball take place?
It took place yesterday.

t dnando ha avuto luogo la festa dt

baUo?
t Ha avuto luogo ierL

Yesterday.
The day hefore yesterday.

leri.

V altro ieri.

How many times (how often) ?

Once.

Twice.

Thrice (three times).
Kany times.
Seteral times.

^ Quante volte ?

i duante fiate? (not much used.)

Una volta.

Due volte (fiate).

Tre volte.

Holte volte.

Yarie volte (diverse volte).

Formerly.

AUretoUe{aJiravoiia).
AUrefate.

f Qualche voSa.

Sometimes.

} TalvoUa.

I Tahra.

Do you go sometimes to the baU?

YaEUa qualche volta aUa festa da

baUo? or andate vol alia feMda

hallo?

I go sometimes.

Vi vado qualche volta.

THIRTY-SECOND LESSON.

143

Gh>oe.

0one thither.
Hxn you gone thither sometimes?
I hafd gone thither often.

Oftener than yoa.

Have the men had my trunk 1

They have not had it
Who has had i: 1
Have they had my knives?
They have not had them.

Andato.

Andatoci (andatovi).

Vi d Ella andata qualche voltal

Ci Bono andato apesso.

Pih spesso di Lei.

Hanno avuto il mio banle gli

mini?
tfon lo hanno avuto.
ChiP ha avuto?
Hanno avuto i miei coltelU?
Non li hanno aviiti. i

Ho avuto fo torto di eomprar Ubri ?
Non lia avuto torto di co'mpnume.

Have I been wrong in buyfng books ?
Vou haye not been wrong in buying

some.

Singing rejoices. It cantare rallegnu

Obs, The infinitives and adverbs are sometimes used in Italian substail*
lively, and preceded by the article.

Jesting is permitted. Lo Kherzare d permesso.

Flatt^^ry is despicable., , L* adular4 d cosa vile.

I do MOt icnow either when or how. | lo non so nd i/ qiumdo, nd U canu.

EXERCISES.

100.

Have you had my pocket-book ? — ^I have had it.-^Have you
had my glove ? — ^I have not had it. — Hast thou had my umbrella ?
— ^I have not had it. — Have I had your knife 1 — ^You have had it.
— When have I iiad it ? — ^You have had it yesterday. — Have I
had your gloves ? — ^You have had them. — ^Has your brother had
my wooden hammer ? — ^He has had it. — Has he had my golden
ribbon ? — He has not had it. — ^Ha'^e the Englbh had my beauti-
ful ship ? — They have had it. — ^Who has had my linen (di Uno)
handkerchi^ ? — Your servants have had them. — ^Have we had
the iron trunk of our good neighbour ? — ^We have had it. — ^Have
we bad his fine gun ? — ^We have not had it. — ^Have we had the
mattresses of the foveigners i — ^We have not had them. — Has the
American had my good book ? — He has had it. — ^Has he had my
silver knife ? — He has not had it. — Has the young man had the
first volume of my work ? — He has not had the dmi, but the

144 THIRTY-SBCOND LS8S0N.

seoond.-^Has he had it ? — ^Yes, Sir, he has had it.— -When haa
he had it ? — ^He has had it this morning. — ^Have you had any
sugar ? — ^I have had some.— Have I had any pepper ?-^Yt)u have
not had any.— Has the cook of the Russian oaptain had any
chickens ?— He has had some. He has not had any.

101.
Has the Frenchman had good .wine f-— He has had some, and
he has still {anoora) aome.— -Hast thou had large books I — ^I have
had some.— Has thy brother had any ? — ^He has not had any.—
Has the son of our gardener had any butter ?«— He has had some.
—Have the Poles had good ' tobacco ? — ^They have had some.—
What tobacco have they had ?-^They have had tobacco and snuflT.
—Have the English had as much sugar as tea t — ^They have had
as much of the one as of the other. — ^Has the physician been
right?— He has been wvong.-^Has die Dutchman been right
or wrong? — ^He has never been either right or wrong. — ^Have
I been wrong in buying honey ? — You have been wrong in buy-
ing some. — ^What has the painter had ?— He has Itad fine
pictures.— Has he had fine gardens ? — ^He has not had any.-*
Has your servant had my boots ?— He has not had them.— What
has the Spaniard had? — ^He has had UQthing.^^ho has had
courage ? — ^The English sailors have had some. — ^Have the Ger-
mans had many friends ? — They have had many. — ^Have we had
more friends than enemies ? — We have had more of the latter
than of the former. — ^Has your son had more wine than cider ? —
He has had more of the latter than of the former. — Has the Turk
had more pepper than com ? — ^He has had less of the latter than
of the former.— Has the Italian painter had any thing ? — ^He has
had nothing.

102.
Have I been right in writing to my brother ? — ^You have not
been wrong in writing to him. — Have you had a sore foot ? — 1
have had a sore eye. — Have you had any thing good ? — I have
had nothing bad. — ^Did the ball take place yesterday ? — ^It did not
take place. — ^Does it take place to-day ? — It takes place to-mor--
row.— When does the ball take place ? — ft takes place this eve-

THIBTT-SBCOND LBSSCSf. 146

nitig.— Did it take place the day be&re yesterday 1 — ^It did take
place. — ^At what o'clock did it take place ?— »It took place {ha
mnOo luogo) at eleven o'elock.-— Did you go to my brother's ? — I
.went thither .-T-How many times have you been at my friend's
house ? — ^I have been there twice. — ^Do you go sometimes to the
theatre ?— -I go thither sometimes (iahoUa), — ^How many times
have you h^ea at the theatie ?<p*-I have been there only once. —
Have you sometimeff been at the ball t — ^I have often been there.
—•Has your brother ever gone to the ball 2 — ^He has never gone
tlu0ier.-^Has your father sometimes gone to the ball ?— He went
tibither ibrmerly.— Has he gone thither as often as you ?— He has
gone thither eftener than I. — ^Doat thou go sometimes into the
garden ? — ^I go thitber sometimes. — ^Hast thou often been there ?
—I have often been there I — ^Does your old dook often go to the
market f — He goes thither often. — ^Doee he go thither as often as
my gardener ?-^He goes thither oftener than he. — Did that take
place % — ^It did take place. — ^When did that take place ?

103.
Did you formerly go to the ball? — ^I went thither sometimes.-*
When hast thou been at the concert I— I was there (vt sano siaio)
the day before yesterday. — ^Didst thou find any body there I — I
ibund {nan vi ho iravato) nobody there. — ^Hast thou gone to the
ball oftener than thy brothers ?-^I have not gone thither so often
as they. — ^Has your friend often been at the play ? — ^He has been
there many times. — ^Have you sometimes been hungry ? — I have
often been hungry. — ^Has your valet (i7 cameriere) often been
thirsty ? — ^He has never been either hungry or thirsty. — ^Did you
go to the play early ? — I went thither late. — ^Did I go to the ball
as early as you ? — ^You went thither earlier than I. — ^Did your
brother go thither too late ?-^He went thither too early. — ^Have
your brothers had any thing ?— They have had nothing.-VWho
has had my sticks and gloves ?-«Your servant has had both.-—
Has he had my hat and my gun t — ^He has had both. — Hast
thou had my horse or my brother's ? — ^I have had neither yours
nor your brother's. — Have I had your note or the physician's ? —
Tou have had neither the one nor the other. — What has the phy-
aician had ? — He has had nothing.— Has any body had my gold

7

146

THXRTT-THtRD LBSSOR

candlestick ? — ^Nobody has had it.-
knives ? — ^Nobody has had them.

rHas any body had mysiWet

THIRTY-THIRD LESSON.
Lezione trentesima ierza.

OP THE PRETERITE INDEPINITE.

(PASSATO FROSSIMO.)

TUi tense is formed ae the perfect tense Is In English, viz. from the present
of the auxiliary and the past participle of the verb you coiyugate. Examples :—

I have studied this morning.

I studied yesterday.

I studied last month.

I have studied this month.

Last month.

7b makey to do — made^ done,
Wliat have you done 7

I have done nothing.

Hia that shoemalcer made my boots %

He lias made them.
He lias not made them.

To put — fnU, .

To pat on — fiU on.
Have y«Lf ut on your boots 7
I haora pat them on.

To lifir-^lified.

To take off-^iaken off.

Have you taken off your gloves 7
I have taken them off.

Ho studiato quests mattina.

Ho studiato ieri.

Ho studiato ii mese passato (scorvo).

Cluesto mese ho studiato.
{ II mese passato.
hi]

I mese scorso.

Fare*—fatto.

Che ha Ella &tto7 or Che avetebtto

Voi7
Non ho fatto niente.

Ha fiitto 1 mlei stivali ootesto ealx»>

lBio7 (or quel oalxolaio).
Li ha latti.
NonUhafattL

Metlerc*-^-meuo.

Mettersi^ — messoH.
t SidEUamesalgUsavalll
t Me 11 sono mess!.

Levare — levaio.

Levarsi — UvaUm.

t SidEllalevaaiguantil
t Me U 8ono leyafi

THIST7.THIRD LBSSON.

147

To teUj to »ay^^4M, Mtdd.
Have jon nid the devioetl
I have aaUl them.
Haye jrou told me the device 7
I have told you the device.
I have told it you.

Dire^^-^detio.

HaElladettoimoitil

Li ho detti.

Mi ha EUa detto il motto 1

Le ho detto U motto.

OUel' ho detto, or Ve P ho detto

Tlie device^ the motto.

I n motto.

Thai (meaning IhtU (hmg).

This (meaning this thing).

Has he told you that?
He baa told me that.
Have I told you that 1
Tou have told me that.

It.
Have yon told it mol

do.
Quesio.

Le ha detto ddl
Mi ha detto dd.
Le ho detto io queato 1
EUa mi ha detto queato.

Lo, r.

Mel' haBQadettal

Ob9, A. Wheaever the pxoDonnSi mi, d; ^ vi; «; are followed by lo^ Io, li
gH^U^iUfV^ letter % 1^ changed into e; and instead of saying mLU^wila^viu
H^ dke., we must say me to, m«&i,mdK,ee to, Ac. These pronouns are separated
when used before the verl^ but joined together when they stand after it. Ex-
amples!

I imagine it

I promise it thee.

Tou may aasnro yourself of it.

I have told it you.

I have not told it you.

Has he told it you 1

He has told it me.

He has not told it me.

Have you told him thati

I have told it him.

Ma Io figuro.

71s to prometto.

Potete assicurarMne.

GlieV ho detto.

Non glieP ho detto.

GUel* ha egU detto 1

Egli me r ha detto.

Egll non me V ha detto.

Oil ha detto ella dd 0 questo 1

GlieF ho detto.

Ofts. J9. When the pronoun ^ji is followed by to, to, K, to, n^ it takes sn 1^
and forms but one word with the pronoun that follows it C»a always precedes
to, Is, ft, to, ne, thus: gUdo, gHda, it to him; eUdsgUOe^ them to himi giliMi^
some to him ; and not to gU^ dc.

I beg ofyou to speak to him of it i Vi prego di parlar^ffKene.
Have yon told it them 1 1 L* ha EUa detto loro 1

I have told it thsoi. I L' ho detto loro.

Have you spoken to the men 1
I have spoken to them.
To whom did you speak 1

Ha EUa pariato agU uominil
Ho pariato loro.
AchihaEUapailatol

148

TBiSTT-THntD LESSCMI.

Axe yon the brother of my Mend 1
So.

te Ella fratello del mio amioot
Lo,

Ob». C The |>ronoun lo, whi<;h it eometiniee expressed in English by eo^
end more elegantly omitted, may in Italian relate to^a substantive, an a4jective,
or even a whole sentence. It alters neither gender nor number, when it relatea
to an adjective or a whole sentence. Sometimes U is used instead of 20^ as ; ii
90, 1 know it, instead of lo to, Ex.

I am.
Are you rich 1
I am not.
Is he learned 7
He is.
He is not.
Are our nelghboors as poof as they

sayl
They are so.
Did your brother go to the ball the day

before yesterday?
1 do not know.

To wriie-^-wriUen.

Which notes have you written 1
I have written these.
Which devices has he written 1
He has written those which you see.

To drink, — drunk.

To see, — seen.

To read, — read {pa&t pari.).

To be acquainted — been acquainted
with. with.

Which men have you seen 1

I have seen those.

Which books liav<e you read ? I

I have read those which you have lent |

me.
HaT8 you been acquainted with thoae

men?
I liave not been acquainted with them.

Have you seen any sailors 1
I have seen some.
I have not seen any.

Lo sono {U sono).

E Ella ricca 1 Siete fOi ricco 1

Non lo sono.

teegUdottol "

Egli Pi{orlo i),

Egli non f d (or non 2o^).

Sono cosi poverl i nostri vidni come

lo dicono {or, U dicono) 1
X<osono.
k suto alia liBata da hallo fl di Lai

fratellol*altroieri1
Non loto.

Scrivere* — scritio.

dual biglietti ha Ella scrittil

Ho scritto questl.

Quai motti ha egli seritti 1

EgU ha scritto quelU ch' Ella vede.

Here • (bevere), — bevnto.
Vedere*, — veduto (visto),

Leggere% — Ictto.
Conoseere^ — conosdnto.

Che uomini ha Ella veduti t^sti)Y

Ho veduto (visto) quelU.

duaiiibrihaElUlettil

Ho lecto quel ch' Ella mi ha prestati.

Ha Ella conosciuto qu^i uomini?
Non li ho conoecintl.

Ha Ella veduto del marlnai?
Ne ho veduti (visti).
Non ne ho veduti.

THUITT-THIBD vBSSON.

U§

'^ To can.
To ihrow.
To throw away.

Who calls me?
Your &tlMr calls you.
Haye yon called the men?
1 have called them.

i>o you throw your money away 1
I do nok throw it away.
Who throws away his books 1
Have you tlirown away anjr tiling 7
I have thrown away my gloves.
Have yon thrown them away 1
I have thrown them away.

Chiamare 1.

Gettare 1.

OeUqrma.

Chi mi chiama?
La chiama il di Lei padre.
Ha Ella chiamato gli uominil
Li ho chiamati.

Oetta Ella via ildi Lei danarot

Non lo getto via.

Chi getta viai propri Ubri)

Ha Ella gettato via qnakoml

Ho gettato via i mid goantL *

Li ha EUa gettati via7

Li ho gettati via.

EXERCISES.

104.

Have you anf thing to do ?— I have nothing to do.— What hast
thou done ? — I have done nothing. — Have I done any thing ?•—
You have done something. — ^Wbat have I done ? — You have torn
my books. — ^What have your children done ? — ^They have torn
their clothes. — What have we done ? — ^You have done nothing ;
but your brothers have burnt my fine books. — Has the tailor al-
ready made your coat? — ^He has not yet made it.— Has your
shoemaker already made your boots? — He has already made
them. — Have you sometimes made a hat ? — ^I have never made
one.— Have our neighbours ever written books ?— Tbey wrote
some formerly. — ^How many coats has your tailor made ?*— He
has made twenty or thirty.— Has he made good or bad coats ?— •
He baa made (both) good and bad. — Has your father put on his
coat ?— He has not yet put it on, but he is going to put it on.— -
Has yotir brother put his boots on ? — He has put them on. — Have
our neighbouis put on their boots and their gloves ?— They have
put on neither {quesU ni quelU), — ^What has the physician taken
away ? — ^He has taken nothing away. — What have you taken

160 THIBTY-THIBD LBSSOM.

eif f.^1 have taken off my large hat. — ^Have your childr^ taken
off their gloves ? — ^They have taken them off. — ^When did the
ball take place ? — It took place the day before yesterday. — Who
has told you that ? — My servant has told it me. — ^What has your
brother told you ?^-^e has told me nothing. — ^Did I tell you that 1
— ^You did not tell it me. — Has he told it you ? — He has told it
me. — ^Whohas tQld it your neighbour ? — ^The English have told it
him. — ^Have they told it to the French ? — ^They have told it them.
—Who has told it you ?— Your son has told it me.— Has he told
it you ? — ^He has told it me. — Are you willing to tell your friends
that ?*— I am willing to tell it them.

105.

Are you the brother of that young man 1 — ^I am.— Is that
3roung man your son ?— He is.-**Are your friends as rich as they
say ?— They are so. — ^Are these men as learned as they say ?—
They are not so. — ^Doyou often sweep the warehouse ? — I sweep
it as often as I can. — ^Has our neighbour money enough to buy
some coals ? — ^I do not know. — ^Did your brother go to the ball
yesterday ? — ^I do not know. — Has your cook gone to the mar-
ket?— He has not gone thither. — Is he ill (malato) ? — He is. —
Am I ill ? — ^You are not. — Are you as tall as I ? — ^I am. — Are
you as fatigued as your brother ? — ^I am more so than he. — ^Have
you written a note ? — ^I have not written a note, but an exercise.
—What have your brothers written:? — ^They have written their
exercises.- When did they write them ? — They wrote them yes-
terday.— ^Have you written your exercises? — ^I have written
them. — ^Has your friend written his ? — ^He has not written them
yet.*^Wfaich exercises has your little brother written ? — He has
written his own. — Have you spoken to my father ? — ^I have spo-
ken to him. — ^Wheti-did you speak to him ? — ^I spoke to him the
day before yesterday. — ^How many times have you spoken to the
captain ? — 'I have spoken to him many times. — Have you often
spoken to his son? — ^I have often spoken to him. — To which
men has your friend spoken ? — He has spoken to these and to
those.

THIRTY-THIRD LESSON. 15

100.
Have you spoken to the Russians ? — ^I have spoken to them.-^
Have the English ever spoken to you ? — ^They have often spoken
to me. — What has the German told you 1 — ^Hetold me the words.
— ^Which words has he told you ? — He has told me these words. —
What have ypu to tell me 1 — ^I have a few words to tell you. —
Which exercises has your friend written ?-^He has written those;
-^Which men have you seen at the market ? — I have seen these.
— Which books have your children read ?r— They have read those
which you have lent them. — ^Have you seen th^se men or those ?
-*I have seen neither these nor those.-^Which men have you
seen ? — I have seen those to whom (a ad) you have spoken. —
Have you been acquainted with those men ? — ^I have been ac-
quainted with them. — With which boys has your brother been ac-
quainted ?— He has been acquainted with those of our merchant.
— Have I been acquainted with these Frenchmen ? — ^You have
not been acquainted with them. — ^Which wine has your servant
drunk ? — He has drunk mine. — Have you seen my brothers ? — ^I
have seen them.-^Where have yoU seen them ? — ^I have seen
them at their- own house (in casa /bro). -^^Have you ever seen
Greeks ? — ^I have never seen any. — Has your brother seen any ?
— ^He has sometimes seen some. — ^Do you call me ? — ^I do call
you. — ^Who calls your father ? — My brother calls him. — ^Dost thou
call any one^ — ^I call no one. Have you thrown away your hat ?
— ^I have not thrown it away. — ^Does your father throw away any
thing ? — ^He throws away the notes which he receives.-^Have
you thrown away your nails ? — ^I have not thrown them away.—
Dost thou throw away thy book ? — ^I do not throw it away ; I want
it to study Italian.

THIRTY-FOURTH LESSON.
Lezi&ne trentesima qtuurta.

To light (Undle)

— lighted or Ut.

Aecendere*

— >aooeM.

To ft^MT'W^'f

—. extinguished.

Spegnere*

— •panto.

To open,

— opened.

Aprire*

— aperto.

To conduct,

— conducted.

Condurre *

— eondotta

To pick up (gather),

— picked up
(gathered).

Raccorre*

— racoolto.

To answer,

— answered.

Rispondere •

— risposto.

To take.

— taken.

Prendere •

— preso.

To break,

— broken.

Rompere*

— rotto.

To know, -

-known.

Sapere*

— saputo.

To be able (can), -

-been able (could).

Potere •

— potttto.

To be willing, -

-been willing.

Volere*

— TOlUtO.

Togire,

- giyen.

Dare*

' — dato.

NEUTER VERBS.
In neuter verbs the action is intransitive ; that is, it remains in the agent.
They are coi^ugated like the active. The latter, however, always form theii
past tenses with the auxiliary oMftf,* to have ; the fleater verbs, on the con-
trary, take utertf* to be » and their past participle must agree in gender and
number with the subject. (See i;^ Lesson XXXII.) Those neuter verbsi
which are conjugated with the auxiliary to hate in English, and estera in Italian,
will always be marlced.

Togo,

— gone.

Andare*

— andato.

To stay.

-stood.

Stare*

— stato.

To remain,

— remained.

Rimanere*

— rimaso, or rimasCo.

To set out,

— set out (pad part,).

— partito.

To go out.

— gone ouL

Usdre*

— uscito.

To come,

''Come {pott part).

Venire*

— venuto.

Did you stay long in that country 1

When did you go to the balll

I went thither at midnight.
Did he remain long in Paris 1
He remained there a y^ar.
Has your father set out 7
Have your friends set out?
They have not set out.

E Ella stata molto tempo in qnesto

Quando d Ella andata alia fetta d«

baUol
Vi Bono andato a mexxa notta.
fi egli rimasto molto in Paiigll
Ci i rimasto un anno.
E partito 11 di Lei padre 1
Sono partiti i di Lei amid?
Non sono partiti.

THIRTY-FOUIITB LESSON*

153

When dtd your brotbera so oat 1
Tbej went out at ten o'clock.
Did tbe men come to your &ther 1

They did come to him.

duandoBono nsdtiidlLelfiatellit

Sono neciti alio died.

Sono yennti dal di Lei padre gli no*

mini? (better) gli nominlaonov^

nud dal di Lei padre 1
Ci sono venntL

i¥hich firea have you extinguished 1

Which warehousee have you opened 1

Hare you conducted them to the store-
house?

I have conducted them thither.

Which books have you taken 7

How many notes have you receiyed 1

I liave receiyed but one.

Which firea has he-lighted 1

Have you opened the trunks?

I have opened them.

Which nails has the carpenter piciced
up?

To pick up — picked up.

Which notes have you answered ?
To answer a note.

Which books has he taken ?

Bave they broken the glasses?

They have not broken them.

Bkre you the gloyes which I ga^e
you?

1 have had them, but haye them no

Quai fuochi ha Etta spenti ?
Che raaga^zfaii ha Ella aperti ?
Li ha Ella condotti al mag>itrino ?

Ce U ho condotti.

auaiUbrihaEllapresi?

Quanti bigUetti ha Ella rioeynti ?

Ne ho riceyuto solamente uno.

dual fuochi ha egU acceei?

HaEllaapertoibanU?

LihoapertL

Q,uai chiedi ha raccattatl illegnai*
nolo?

Raccattare — raccattato.
t A quai biglietti ha Ella rlsposto?
t Rispondere • ad un biglletta

auailibrlhaeglipresi?

H^n6 eglino rotto i bicchieril

Non ii hanno rotti.

Ha Bllaiguanti cheLehodati? or
ayete yoi i guanti che yi ho datll

Li ho ayutl, ma non li ho pih.

Ujm.

Thebeneh.
Upon the bench.
Upon it.

Under.

Under the bench.

Under it (underneath).
Where is my hat?
It is upon the beneh.
Are my gloves on the bendi ?

fliey aie under it.

< SoprHf
( Sovra.

n banco (ki scanno),
c Sopra 11 banoo.
{ Sul banco.

Sopra (diMopro).

Satto.

Sotto il banoo.

Sotto (dissotto).

Oye d il mio cappello ?

fe sopra 11 banco.

Sono sopiB il banco (or sul banco) «

miei guanti?
Sono aotto (diasotto).

i94

nQBTT-FOUKTH LSSSOlf.

Do fou learn to read 7

I do (learn i^.

I learn to write.

Hare you learnt to speak %

I have (learnt it).

In the storehouse.

Thestoye.
In the stove.
Xn it or within.

Tovxuh.

To get or to have
mended,

To get or to have

washed.
To get or to hare

made,
To get or to have

swept,
To get or to luiTe

got or had
mended.

got or had
washed.

got or had
made.

got or had
swept

got or had
sold.

To get the coat mended.
Tp hare it mended.
To get them mended.
To get somo mended.

Are jou getting a coat made (do you

order a coat) 1
I am getting one made (I order one),
X hare had one made.
HaTe you had your coat mended 1

I haTe had it mended.
I haTe not had it mended.-
I have had my boota mended.

I have had them mended.

Ham yon not seen my boo*s 3
I hare seen it.

Impart iSBa a l^ggscet

Imparn

Imparo a scfhrefc.

Ha Ella imparato a parlare I

Ho imparato.

Nel magazzino.
I( fomello (la stufa).
Nel fomello (nella stula).
Dentrb (al di dentro).

Lavare 1.

ft Far rassettare,

t Far raccomo-
[ dare,
t Far lavare, '

t Far&re,

t Far spazzare,

t Far vendere,

— latto

tare,
fiitto racea

— modare.

— fiitto lavare.

— fiitto £u:e.

-* fatto spas>

zare.
T- latto vendere.

t Far raccomodare P abito.
't Fark) raccomodare.
t Farli raccomodare.
t Fame raccomodare.

t Si fit ellafitteun abito 1

t Me lo laccio fare.

t Me ne son fatto fare uno.

t Ha EUa fktto raccomodare il dl

. Lei abito?
t L' ho latto raccomodare.
t Non 1' ho fiitto raccomodare.
t Ho fiitto raccomodare i miel

stivaU.
t Li ho fatti raccomodare.

Asciugare 1.

Non ha EUa vednto 11 mio libro 1
L' ho veduto (visto).

* Learners ought now to use In their ezereises the adverbs of time, place, i
number, menUoned in Lessons XIX., XXU., XXIII., and XXXII.

THISTT-iFOURTU LfiSSON.

155

When did you see nqr brother 7

I'saw him the day before yesterday.
Where did you aee him 1
I saw him at the theatre.

Qnando? j^^'!

duando ha Ella yeduta mlo fra-

teUol -
L' ho veduto V altro ieri.
DoiFS I' ha ZUa Teduto 7
L' ho Tedttto al teatro.

EXERCISES.
107.
Where are your brothers gone ? — ^They are gone to the theatre.
— ^Haire your friends left (parUre) ? — ^T^ey have not yet left.—
When do they set out? — This evening. — ^At what o'clock ? — ^At
half-past nine. — When did the French boys come to your brother?
— ^They came to him yesterday. — Did their friends come also ?—
They came also. — ^Has any one CQme to us ? — The good Germans
have come to us.— ^Who has come to the English ? — ^The French
have come to them. — When did you drink some wine ?— ^I drank
some yesterday, and to-day. — Has the servant carried my note ? —
He has carried it. — ^Where has he carried it? — ^He }^as carried it
to your friend. — Which notes haVe you carrifed ? — I have carried
those which you have given me* to carry. — ^To whom have you *
carried them ? — ^I have carried them to your father. — ^Which books
has your servant taken ? — He has taken those which you do not
read.-^Have your merchants opened .their warehouses ? — They
have opened them.-t Which warehouses have they opened?—
They have opened those which you have seen. — ^When have they
opened them ?! — ^They have opened them to-day. — Have you con-
ducted the foreigners to the storehouses ? — I have conducted them
thither. — ^Which fires have the men extinguished ? — ^They have
extinguished those which you have perceived {scortiy — Have you
received any notes ? — ^We have received some.— How many notes
have you received ? — ^I have received only one ; but my brewer
has received more than I : he has received six.

108.
Where is my coat ? — ^It is on the bench. — Are my boots upon
the bench ? — ^They are under it. — Are the coals under the bench ?

156 THIETY-FOURTH LESSON.

— They are in the stove. — ^Have you put some coals into the stove ?
—I have put some into it. — Are you cold ? — I aTi not cold. — ^Are
the coals which I have seen in the stove ? — ^They are in it. — Are
my notes upon the stove ? — ^They are in it (within). — Have you
not been afraid to burn my notes ? — ^I have not been afraid to bum
them. — ^Have you sent your little boy to the market ? — ^I have
sent him thither. — When did you send him thither ? — This mom*
ing. — ^Have you written to your &ther ? — ^I have written to him.
— ^Has he answered you ? — He has not yet answered me. — Are
you getting your floor swept ? — ^I am getting it swept. — Have
you had your counting-house swept ? — ^I have not had it swept
yet, but I intend to have it swept to-day. — Have you wiped your
feet?— I have wiped them. — Where did you wipe them? — ^I
wiped them upon the carpet.-^Have you had your benches
wiped ? — I have had them wiped. — 'What does your servant wipe ?
— He wipes the knives. — ^Have you ever written to th6 physician ?
I have never written to him. — ^Has he sometimes written to you ?
— He has often written to me. — What has he written to you ? —
He has written something to me. — How many times have your
friends written to you ? — They have written to me more than
twenty times. — ^Have ybu seen my sons ?— I have never seen
them.

109.

Have you ever seen any Greeks ? — ^I have never seen any.—
Have you already seen a Syrian ? — I have already seen one. —
Where have you seen one ? — At tht theatre. — Have you given
the book to my brother ? — ^I have given it to him. — ^Have you
given money to the merchant ? — I have given him some. — How
much have you given to him ? — ^I have given him fourteen
crowns. — Have you given any gold ribbons to the children of our
neighbours? — I have given them some. — Wilt thou give me some
wine ? — ^I have given you some already. — ^When didst thou give
me some ? — I gave you some formerly. — Wilt thou give me some
now ? — ^I cannot give you any ; I have none. — Has the American
lent you money ? — He has lent me K)me. — Has he often lent you
some ? — He has sometimes lent me some. — Has the Italian ever
lent you money ?-f-He has never lent me any. — ^Is he poor ?— '

THlETY-FpURTH IsBSSON. 157

He is not poor ; he is richer than you. — Will you lend me a
ciown ? — ^I will lend you two. — Has your boy eon^e to mine ?-
He has come to him. — When ? — ^This morning.— At what o'clock ?
—Early.— Has he come earlier than I ? — ^At what o'clock did
70U come ? — I came at half-past five.-^tie came earlier than you.

110.
Has the concert taken place? — ^It has taken place.-^Did it
take place late ? — ^It took place early. — At what o'clock 1 — ^At
twelve.-^At what o'clock did the hall take place ? — ^It took place
at midnight. — Does your brother learn to write ? — He does learn.
— ^Does he know how to read ? — ^He does not know how yet. —
Do you know the Frenchman whom I know ? — I do not know the
one whom you know, but I know another. — ^Does your friend
know the same (f tnedesimi) merchants as I know ? — He does not
know the same (t medesinu), but he knows others. — Have you
ever had your coat mended ? — I have sometimes had it mended.
•—Hast thou already had thy boots mended ? — ^I have not yet had
them mended. — Has your brother sometimes had his waistcoats
mended ?— He has had them mended several times {akune voUe).
—Hast thou had thy hat or thy waistcoat mended ? — I have nei-
ther had the one nor the other mended. — Have you had your
gloves or your handkerchie& mended .? — ^I have had neither the
one nor the other mended.^Has your father had any thing made ?
—He has not had any thing made.^^Have you looked for my
gloves ? — ^I Jiave looked for them. — Where have you looked for
them ? — ^I have looked for them upon the bed, and have found
them under it. — Have you found my notes in the stove ? — ^I have
found them in it. — Have you found my boots under the bed ? — I
have found them upon it. — How long did you stay in that coun-
try ? — I stayed there two years. — ^Did your father remain long at
the ball ? — He remained there only a few minutes.

THIRTY-FIFTH LESSON.
Lezione trentesima quinia.

-^understood.

— waited.

^^ intended
(heard).

Promettere* — prmneuo.

t Comprender^ — eon^eeo.

< Intend^e^ — inteeo,

( Capire^ — capUo.

SAUendere* ^—atteso,

Aspeliart^ — aspeWUo.

IfUendere^ — inteeo.

TopromUe
Tamndersiand

To wait

To intend {to
hear).

Ob». Compound and derivative verbs are generaUy conjugated like tlieif
primitives : thus the verb proikettere* is conjugated like metUrt*, to put (Lee-
son XXKIII), eomprender^, like prtnder^, to take (Lesson XXXIY), ottcif
cbrc* and intender^t like tenden^^ to tend.

Do yon promise me to come?
I do promise you.

What have yon promised the mani
I have promised him nothing.

Mi promette EUa di venire 1
Olielo prometto.

Che ha Ella promesso all' uomo 7
Non gli ho promesso nulla.

To lose -^ lost.
How much has your brother lost 1

He has lost about a crown.

About
I have lost more than ha

Perdere^ — perduto.

Quanto danaio ha perduto il di Let

fratellol
Ha.perduto circa uno scuida
Circa, incirca.
Ho perduto plh dl lui.

Have you ever learnt Italian 1
I have learnt it formerly.

To weoTi to use.

To wear out.

This coa,t is worn out.
The worn-out coat.

To refuse
To spell.

Ha EUa imparato mai 1' italiano f
L' ho imparato altre volte.

Usare.

Logorare 1.

Questo abito d logoiato.
L' abito logoro.

Rifiutare (ricusare).
ConpUare.

THIRTY-FIFTS LB8801I.

m

How?

WeU.
Badly.

I Camef
I Bene,
I MdU.

So, ihtu.

So 90,

In this manner.

How h/m jour brother written hie ex-

erdeel
He hu written it welL

To dry.

Do yon put your coat to dry 1
I do put it to dry.

How old are you 7
I im twelre yeare old.
How old ie your brother 1
He ii thirteen years old.

Almost.
Ho is ahnost fourteen years old.

About.
I am about fifteen years old.

Nearly.

Ho is nearly fifteen years old.

To draw near.
Hardly,
^wk are liardly Be?enteen years old.

NotquUe.

1 am not quite sixteen years oM.
Toampkte.

Coeij mqueeto

Coeieoei.

In questa

Come ha seritto U

frateUol
L' ha seritto bene

UdlLei

I

Asciugare (seccare).

Mette EUa ud. asciugare U sue abito.1
Lo metto ad asciugare.

jtCheet&haEUal
1 1 QuanU amii ha EU&>7

t Ho dodici anni.

[ t auantianni ha U di Lei fratellol
1 1 Che eta ha n di Lei fratellol

t Egli ha tredici anni.

Quasi, meirca {alP ineirea).
t E£(li ha incirca quattordici anni.

Circa, incirca {alT indrea).
t Ho circa quindicl anni.

Press^ a poeo, quasi, indrea.

( t Ha quasi quindlci anni.
c t Si ayvlcina ai quindlci anni.

Awwuuire, avvtcinarsi.

Appena.

t EUa ha appena didasette amil.

( Non intieramente.
iNon deltutto.
i Non naC affatto.

f t Non ho tutf diatto sedici anni.
/ t Non ho ancbr compito 11 sedicesl-
{ mo anno.

Compirc 8.

160

Art thou older than thy brother t
I am younger than he.

Old (in yean).

A<ed.

Youog.

THIRTT riFTH LB8S01C

I t Set tu magglore di fno ftitaBot
', i Sono pih gioTanedi hit

( SoDO minoro di lui.
; Vecchio.

^ Attempato.

( Avansato in etA.
Giorane.

There is.
There are.

C iy m i {vi Aa, avni).
a smw or m sano.

Hoir many ftancs are there In a

Three.
Iliere are twenty aous, or a hnndied

oentimee, in one franc.
There are five oentlmea in a aou.

A or one hundred.

The centime.

The gold aequin.
The livre (a coin).
The crown.
The sou.
A eeqaln has four erowna.

There are aeren liyrea (or franca) In a

ciDwn*
There are twenty aous in a line.

To underatand — underatood.
1 underatand, thou underatandesti he

nnderatanda.
We» yon, they understand.

The nolae.

The wind.
The n<rfee (roarihg) of* the wind.
Do yon hear the roaring of the wind 1
I do hear it.

To lark.

The barking. j

Haye you heard the barking of the i
dogal I

I have heard it

f Anaatl franchi ci TOgUpno per tut

Tre.
t Ventl mMkf o cento cenlealmi fan-

nounfrtnc*.
t Cinque caateiUM fiuino un aoldo.

Cento.

11 centeaimo.

Lo lecchino d* 0P».

La lira {afemmihu f*4P«y.

Lo acttdo.

II aoldo.

Quattro acudi Ikuio «^

d'oro.
Sette lire lanno uno acudA.

Vend aoldi fiumo una lira.

Oapire • — caplto^
OBLpi8co,.capLMi, capiaee.

Capiamo, capita, capiacono.

Lo'atrepito, 11 mmoie.

II yento.

Lo strepito diel yento.

Intende Ella lo atrepito del yento 1

L' intendo.

LatrarCf ahhaiare I.

D latrato.

Ha EUa inteao 11 latrato del oanll

L* ho inteao.

TBXETT-FIFTB LfiSaON.

161

To waHfar 8ome one or some-
thing.

To expect some one or some-
thing.

Are you waiting for my brother 7
I am waiting for him.
Do you expect aome fiiendal
I do expect aome.

The nobleman.
Noblemen.

Gentle, pretty.
Where has the nobleman remained 1
He has remained at home.
Have yon remained with tiim 1
With.
With him.

Aspettare gudlcuno o qukhhs
cosa.

Aapetta Ella mio firatellol
Lo aapetto.

Aapetta Ella degli amid!
Ne aapetto alcuni.

II gentiluomo (U nobUe).

J gentiloomini (1 nobili).

Gtentile, grazioao.

Ore d rimaato U gentUiiomo>

Is rimaato in caaa.

£ Ella rimaata oon lui (aeco) 1

Con.

Seco, oon luL

EXERCISES.

111.

Do you promiae me to come to the ball?— I promise you.— ^
Have I promised you any thing 1 — Tou have promised me nothing.
»— What has my brother promised you ?— ^He has promised me a
fine book. — ^Have you received it ?— Not yet. — ^Do you give me
what you have promised me ?— I give it you. — Has your friend
received much money ? — ^He has received but little. — How much
has he received I — ^He has received but one crown. — ^How much
money have you given to my son ? — ^I have given him thirty
francs. — ^Did you not promise him more ? — I have given him .
what I promised him. — ^Have you Italian money ? — ^I have
some. — ^What money have you ? — ^I have some sequins, crowns,
livres, and sous. — How many crowns are there in a gold sequin ?
— There are four crowns in a gold sequin. — Have you any French
money ? — ^I have some ; I have French and Italian money. — What
kind of (ehe) French money have you ? — ^I have some francs,
sous, and centimes.: — ^How many sous are there in a franc ?»—
There are twenty sous m a franc -XHave you any centimes ?—
I have several.r— How many centimes are there in a sou ? — ^There

162 IBIBTy-FIFTH LB8SOR.

are &ve. —And haw many centimes are there in a franc ? — One
hundred {cerUo). — ^Will you lend me your coat ?-— I will lend it
you, but it is worn out. — ^Are your boots worn out ? — They are
not worn out. — Will you lend them to my brother t — ^I will lend
them to him. — ^To whom have you lent your hat ? — ^I have not
lent it ; I have given it to somebody. — To whom have you given
it ? — ^I have given it to a pauper (a unpavero).

112.

Does, your little brother already know how to spell? — ^He does
know. — ^Does he spell well ? — ^He spells well. — How has your
little brother spelt ? — ^He has spelt so so. — How have your chil-
dren written their exercises ? — They have written XhetQ badly. —
Has my neighbour lent you his gloves ? — ^He has refused to lend
them to me. — ^Do you know Spanish? — ^I know it. — ^Does your
son speak Italian ? — He speaks it well. — ^How do your friends
speak ? — ^They do not speak badly. — ^Do they listen to what you
tell them ? — They listen to it. — How hast thou learnt English ?
— ^I have learnt it in this manner; — ^Did you call me f — ^I have
not called you, but I have called your brother. — ^Is he come ? —
Not yet.«^Where did you wet your clothes ?— -^I wetted them in
the garden. — ^Will you put them to dry ? — ^I have already put
them to dry. — Does the nobleman wish to give me any thing to
do ? — ^He wishes to give you somethuig to do. — ^How old are you ?
—I am hardly eighteen years old.— How old is your brother ?—
He is twenty years old.— 'Are you as old as he ? — ^I am not so
old.-i— How old art thou ? — ^I am about twelve years old. — ^Am I
younger than you ?— I do not know.— How old is our neighbonr?
He is not quite thirty years old. — Are our friends as young as
we ? — They are older than we. — ^How old are they 1 — ^The one
is nineteen, and the other t^nty years old. — ^Is your father as
old as mine ? — ^He is older than yours.

113.
Have you read my book ? — I have not quite read it yet. — Has
your fnend finished his books ? — ^He has almost finished them. —
Do you understand me ? — ^I understand you. — ^Does the French-
man understand us ? — ^He understands us.-^Do you understano

THIBTY-SUrrH LB880N. ' 163

what we are telling you ?-^We understand it.<— Dost thou under-
stand Italian 1 — I do not understand it yet, but I am learning it.—
Do we understand the English? — We do not understand them. —
Do the English understand us ? — ^They understand us. — ^Do we
understand them ? — ^We hardly understand them.-^Do you hear
any noise ? — I hear nothing. — Have you heard the roaring of the
wind ? — ^I have heard it. — What do you hear ? — ^I hear the bark-
ing of the dogs. — Whose dog ia this ? — ^It is the dog of the
Scotchman. — Have you lost your stick ? — ^I liave not lost it. — Has
your servant lost my notes'? — ^He has lost them. — ^Did you go to
the ball ? — I did not go. — ^Where did you remain? — I remained
at home. — Where did the noblemen remain ? — They remained
in the garden. — Has your fathei* lost as much money as I ? — He
has lost more than you. — ^How much have I lost ?-<-You have
hardly lost one crown.*-Did your friends remain at the ball ? —
They renaained there.-4>Do yon kbow as much as the English
physician ?— I do not know as much as he. — How many books
have you read ? — I have read hardly two. — Do you wait for 'any
one ?•— I wait for no one. — ^Do you wait for the man whom 1 sav»
this morning? — ^I Wait for him. — Art thou wailing for thy book ?
— ^I am waiting for it.— Do you expect your father this evening ?
— ^I do expect him.-— Do you expect some friends ?-*-! do expect
some. — Where is your little brother ?i— He is gone with the no-
bleman (col 9^gnore),—la he gone to the play with him ? — ^He is
gone there with him.

THIRTY- SIXTH LESSON,
Lezione trentesima sestet.

To hUe^-^nUen.
To heat.
Why do you beat the dog ?

Mordere* — morso.

Battere 2.

Pei€hd batte Ella 11 eanef

164

THntTY-SUTH LB880N.

Why?
Because.
I beat it because it has Mtten ma

PereUf
Poich^, perehi.
Lo batto perdid ml ba

To owe — owed.
How much do you owe me 1
I owe you fifty crowns.
How mucb does the man owe you?
He owes me sixty firanca.
Do our neighbours owe as much as we 1
We owe more than tl^ey.
How much dost thou owel

Two hundred crowns.
• Eighty francs.

Two hundred and fifty sequins.

Doverel* — doftuio.

Quants mi deve EUat

Le devo cinquanta scudL

Quanto Le deve 1* uomo?

Mi deve sessanta franohL

Debbono i nostri yidoi quanto nill

Dobbiamo pih di loro.

Quanto devi 1

Due cento scudi.

Ottanto franchl.

Due cento cinquanta xecciiini.

Are you to .... 1

lam to

When an yon to go to this morning 1

I am to go to the wareliouse.

Is your brother to come hither to-day ?

Soon^ shortly.
fis Is to oome hither soon.

t Deve Ella.. 1

t Devo

t Ore dere EUa andare stamanel
t Devo (debbo) andare al magaiaino.
t II di Lei CrateUo dare Tenin qui
oggil

f Quanio pfwuif fr^ pocOf
} iasta.
( Presto^ evhUo.
t Dere Tenlre qid quanto prima.

To return {to come haek)>

At what o*doek do yon return from the
market 1

1 return from it at twelve o'clock.

From Uffrom iherey thence.

Does the servant return early from the
vrarehouse 1

Re returns from it at ten o'clock In the
morning.

At nine o'clock in the morning.
At five o'clock ih the evening.
At eleven o'clock at night.

Riiomare I.

A che ora litoma Ella dal meicatol

Ne rltomo

1:

alle dodld.
amezzodi.
mezzo giomOa

JVe,

II servitore ritoma per tempo oal
magazzinol
r Ne ritoma alle died antimeridlane
< Ne ritoma alle died dd mattlno.
t Ne ritoma alle died della mattina.
t Alle nove antimeridlane.
1 1 Alle cinque della sera (pomeridiane)
' t Alle undid della sera (o della notte)

THIRTir-SIXTn LESSON.

IM

Haw hng?
During, far.
How long has he remained there 1

Aminule.
An hour.
A day.
A month.
A year.

The

The winter.
During the snmmer.

To dweUf to tivcy to reside, to re-
main.
To lodge.
Where do yottUyel

I live in WUUam-itreet, namber twen-
ty-five.

Where did your brother liye 1
He lived in RiyoU-street, namber forty-
nine.
Dost thoa live at thy brother's housel
I do not live at lii9| bat at my father's

hooee.
Does your fHend still live where I

Uyed?
He Uvea no longer where you lived.

No longer.

The number.
How long were you speaking to the

I spoke to him for two hours.

Did you remain long with my iather 7

I remained with him an boar.
Long.

Qltanto tempo ?
Durante, per lo gpaaao di. *

Q,uanto tempo vi i egd restate (ri

masto)1
Durante un minuto.
Per lo spaiio di un' ora.
Durantd un giomo.
Per lo ^Mzio di on mese.
Durante un anno.

I L^ estate (Jem.)
! La state (/em.)

L' invemo.

Durante la state.

Stare • di easa ; dimorare.

Stated
ABoggiarey ahUare.

Dove sta EUa di casa 1 (Ove, al.

loggia 1)
Alloggio nella contrada Gugllelmo

(or via Guglielmo) numero venti

cinque.
Dove ha alloggiato il di Lei finatello 1
Ha alloggiato nella contrada (or via)

di RivoU, numero quaranto nove.
StaidatuofirateUol
Non isto da lui, ma in casa di mio

padre.
11 di Lei amico sta (alloggla) ancora

ove ho alloggiato (sono state) iol
Non ista plii dove EUa ha alloggiato.

Nonpiu.

II numero.

Q,uanto tempo ha Ella parlato all

uomol
Gli ho parlato per il corso dl due ore.
E Ella restata molto teknpo con mio
. padre (col padre mio) 1
Vi son restate un' ora.
Molto tempo.

1 Durante^ or per lo epazio diy when it signifies^^, may be left out in Italian
as in Bn^iah, but it is tlien understood.

166 THISTY-SECTH LMSON.

EXERCISES.

114.

Why do yoa not drink ?*— I do not drink, because I am not
thirsty. — ^Why do you pick up this ribbon ?— I pick it up, because
I want it. — ^Why do you lend money to this man t— I lend him
some, because he wants some. — ^Why does your brother study f
— He studies, because he wishes to learn French. — Has your
cousin drunk already ? — ^He has xiot drunk yet, because he has
not yet been thirsty. — ^Does the servant show you the floor which
he sweeps ? — ^He does not show me that which he sweeps now,
but that which he swept yesterday. — ^Why do you love that man?
—I love him because he is good. — Why does your neighbour
beat his dog ? — Because it has bitten his boy. — ^Why do our
friends love us ? — ^They love us because we are good. — Why do
you bring me wine ? — ^I bring you some, because you are thirsty.
— ^Why does the sailor drink ? — He drinks, because he is thirsty.
•^Do you see the sailor who is in the {sul, upon the) ship ? — ^I do
not see the one who is in the ship, but the one who is in the (al)
market. — ^Do you read the books which my father has given
you ? — ^I read them. — ^Do you understand them ? — ^I understand
them so so.^Do you know the Italians whom we know ? — We do
not know those whom you know, but we know others.-^Does the
shoemaker mend the boots which you have sent him f — ^He does
not mend them, because they are worn out {non sono piu hwmi),

115.
Is your servant returned from the market ? — ^He has not re-
turned yet from it. — ^At what o'clock did your brother return
from the ball ?*-He returned from it at one o'clock in the morn,
ing (al tocco dopo mexxa itotte}.*-At what o'clock didst thou come
back from thy fnend ? — ^I came back at eleven o'clock in the
morning. — ^Didst thou remain long with him ?— I remained with
him about an hour. — ^How long do you intend to remain at the
ball ? — ^I intend to remain there a few minutes. — How long did
the Frenchman remain with you ? — He remained with me for
two hours. — ^How long did your brothers remain in town {neUa
eiitd) ? — ^They remained there during the winter. — Do you in.

THIRHr-SlXTH LESSON. Id*?

tend to remain long with us ? — ^I intend to remain with you du-
ring the summer. — ^How much do I owe you ?— You do not owe
me much. — ^How much do you owe your tailor ? — ^I owe him
eighty sequins.^-How much dost thou owe thy shoemaker ? — ^I
owe him already eighty-five sequins.-^Do I owe you any thing 1
—You do not owe me any thing.— ^How much does the English,
man owe you ? — ^He owes me more than you. — ^Do the English
owe as much as the Spaniards ? — ^Not quite so much.*-Do I owe
you as much as my brother 1 — ^You owe me more than he.— Do
our friends owe you as much as we ?— «-They owe me less than yoo.
—How much do they owe you ? — They owe me two hundred and
fifty sequins.-^How much do we owe you ? — ^You owe me three
hundred Sequins.

116.
Why do you give money to the merchant ? — ^I give him some,
because he has sold me something. — ^Whither are yon to go,?—
I am to go to the market. — ^Is your friend to come hither to-day ?
— ^He is to come hither. — When is he to come hither ? — He is to
oome hither soon. — ^When are our sons to go to the play 1 — ^They
are to go thither to-night (stassera,) — When are they to return
from it ? — ^They are to return from it ^t half-past ten. — When are
you to go to the physician ?— rl am to go to him at ten o'clock at
night. — When is your son to return from the painter's ? — He is
to return from him at five o'clock in the evening. — Where do you
live ? — I live in Rivoli-street, number forty-seven. — Where does
your father live ? — ^He lives in his friend's house. — ^Where do
your brothers live ? — ^They live in William-street, number one
hundred and twenty. — ^Dost thou live at thy brother's ? — ^I live in
his house. — ^Do you still live where you lived {dove 8 vtata dap-
prima)! — I still live there. — ^Does your friend still live where he
did (dove i ttato aUre voUe) 1 — ^He no longer lives where he did.
-^Where does he live at present ? — ^He lives in his father's house.

m

THIRTYSEVENTH LESSON.
Leziane treniesima settima.

Haw long?

Till, unHl.
Till twelve o'clock (till noon).
Till to-morrow.
TiU the day aAer to-morrow.

Tin Sunday.
Till Monday.
Till thia evening.

Till evening.

Until morning.

Until the next day.
Until that day.
Until that moment
Tin now—hitherto.
Until then.
' Then.

Tuesday, Wednesday.
Thursday, Friday.
Saturday.

( Fino a quando ? Fin quando f
\ Insino a quando f

Fino, insino,
S Fino a mezzo giomo.
C Fino a meziodt

Fino a domani.

Fino a S domani raltro.
I posdomani.

Fino a domenica.

Fino a lunedi.

Fino a stassera.
( Fino alia sera.
I Pino a sera.
(Finoxlmattino.
( Fino alia mattina.

Fino alF indomani.

Fino a questo giomo.

Fino a questo momento.

Fino adesso— fin qui.

Fino allora.

Allora.

Marted!, merooledL
Oiovedi, veoerdi.
Sabato.

ObB. A. The names of the days and months are masculine, except ta di»-
MMtiioo, Sunday, which to feminine. Of the seasons, la Prxmatera, Spring, and
f EwtuU, Summer, are feminine % P iitiAcmu), Autumn, and P Ewntm, Winter,
are masculine.

Till I return (till my return).
Till my brother retains (till my bro
ther's return).

Till four o*dock in the morning.

Till midnight (till twelve o'clock at
Bight).
The return or coming back.

How long did you remain at ray fa-
ther's house 1

I remained at his ^ouse till eleven
o'ckxjk at night '' -

Fino al mio ritomo.

Fino al ritomo di mlo fratello.

( Fino alle qnattro del mattino.
I Fino alle quattro mattntine.
Fino a mezza notte (fino alle dodlri

di notte.)
II ritomo.
Fino a quando d EUa restata da mio

padre?
Ci sono restato fino all* undid di
notte.

THIKTT*SST8IITB tESSON

169

They, the peopky any one^ or one.

Itl8Jaid,thatii^p«!fiItji^. .

Tbef are known, that la, jwfpU or they

I am told, that ia^ they tell me.

It ia not aaldr-people do not aqf. *
I am not told— they do not tell ma
They do not apeak of it.
A great many people are seen there

(that ia, MM aeea there a great many

people).

06*. B, 7Vy, ihepeapU, anjf om, or
compouid tenaea, or even in eimple
aonal pronoun. Ez.
I am expected (thatia, they expect

Si.

Si dice, dioono.
8i eonoBcono.

' Mi fi dice (mi Tien detto, ml di«
oono).

Non H dice. Non dioono.
' Non mi ti dice (non mi Tien detto).

Non M 1 ne paria.

Vi ei Tede molta gente.

are genenUly not expreaaed In tlie
when they are ibllowed by a per>

e).
Here are the booka which he waa

aaked for (thatia, which lft€y aaked

him for).
It haa been aaid (that ia, peopU aaid).
It haa been written (that ia^ people

wrote).
I waa told (that Is, they iM, me).
TYuy wrote to me.

HaTe ihejf brovght my bootal

They haTO brought them.

They haTe not brought them yet
What haTe<^ aaid 1

Tkey haTe aaid nothing.
What haTe they done 1

They haTe done nothing.

Sono aapettato (Mi aapettano).

Ecco' i libri che gU aono atatl do-
mandati.

B atato detto (Hanno detto).
jb atato acritto (Hanno acritto), or
Si BcriTe.
t Mi d atato detto (Bfi hanno detto).
t Mi d atato acritto (Mi
acritto).

1 1 Sono ateti portati i mid atlTaU?
1 1 Hano portato 1 midatlTali 1
1 1 Sono atatl portatL
1 1 Li hanno portati.
( t Non aono ancon atatl portati.
I Non li hanno per anoo portati.
t Che d Btato detto 1 (Che hanno

detto?)
C t Non d Btato detto nlaitfe.
c t Non hanno detto nlente.
t Che d atato fitttol (Che hanno

lattol)
( t Non d atato &tto nlente.
( t Non hanno fatto nlente.

To he wiOing {wish) — been

willing {toished).
HaTe they been willing to mend my

coat?

t Hanno eaal Tolato raccomodare 11
mlo abito?

* St la here changed into ae, becanae It la
XXXni. 06*. A.)

fo^^

by 1M. (See

170

THIBTY-S£\«.'NTII LESSON.

7Vyl»V9>^o^ ^^^^ wSIling to mend

it.
Have fiuy been willing to mend my

coatffi
Thejf have not been willing to mend

To be able (can) — been able

(oould).
Have they been able to find the books 1

They ooold not find them.

Can they find them now7
They cannot find them.

What do 1^ flay 7
What do (% flay ne#7

7%$jf flay nothing new.

SomethlDg er any thing new.
Nothing er not any tiling new.

Nair.
My new coat.
My a«w horse.
My fine bone.
My new Mend.
My handflome coat.

Tf> brush.

This fine man. '
Theae fine men.
This fine trea.
My new Mends.
' These fine treea.

t Non hanno Toluto ratoonodarloi

t Hanno toluto raccomodara ! mlel

abiUI
t Non hanno yolutoiaocomodarlL

Potere— ^ido.

t Hanno eg^ino potato trofim I

libril
[ t Non 11 hanno potato irorsxe.
[ t Non si son potutl troTava.

t Si possono troyare adeasol

t Non si possono trovare.

Can <&^ do what they wish 1 i

They do what they can, bat they do '
not what they wish

t Possone egUno fiue cid -che v

glionol
t Si la cid che si pad^ ma non al

dd che si vuole.

jt Che M dice?

! t Cho dlcono 1

[ t Che n dice di nuorol

1 1 Che dlcono di nuoTol

1 1 Non &i dice niente di nuovo.

[ t Non dlcono niente di noovo.

dualoosa di nnoyo.

Niente di naoTO.

Nnoyo.

U mio abito nnoyo.
n mio nnoyo cayallo.
n mio bd cay^Ilo.
II mio nuoyo amico.
U mio bell* abito.

Spaxxare, spaxxolare 1.

Q,nesto bell' nomo.
Ctoesti begli aominl.
Qoesto bell' albero.
I mlel paqyi amici,
Qael, or qaesti begli alfwri.

THISTT-SByBNTB LESSON. 171

Do they believe that 1

They do not beUeve it.
Do they speak of that 1

Itiey do speak of it.
They do not speak of It.

^Sioedecid?

( CredoQO dd 7

( Nod li crede.

I Non lo credono.

|Sipariadicid?

I Parlano dicid?

^Se fu paria (see Lesson XXXIII

< ObB. A.y

^ Ne parlano.

( Non M nt parla.

( Non ne parlano

EXERCISES.

117.
How long have you been writing ?— I have been writing until
midnight. — ^How long did I work ? — ^You worked till four o'clock
in the morning. — ^How long did my brother remain with you ?^>
He remained with me until evening. — How long hast thou been
working ? — ^I have been working till now.— Hast thou still long
to write ?— I have to write till the day after to-morrow. — ^Has the
physician still long to work ? — ^He has to work till to-morrow.—
Am I to remain here long ? — ^You are to remain here till Sun-
day.— ^Is my brother to remain long with you ? — ^He is to remain
with us till Monday. — ^How long are we to work ?-<-'$'ou are to
work till the day after to-morrow. — ^Have you still long to speak ?
I have still an hour to speak. — ^Did you speak long ? — ^I spoke till
the next day. — ^Did you remain long in my counting-house ? — ^I
remained in it till this moment. — ^Have you still long to live at
the Frenchman's house ? — ^I have still long to live at his house-
How long have you to remain at his house ?-^Till Tuesday. —
H9S the servant brushed my clothes ?-^He has brushed them.«-
Has he swept the floor ? — ^He has swept it. — ^How long did he re-
main here ? — ^Till noon (meaKOgtomo).— Does your friend still live
with you ? — ^He lives with me no longer. — ^How long did he live
with you ? — He lived with me only a year.— How long did you
remain at the ball ? — ^I remained there till midnight. — ^How long
did you remain in the ship ? — I remained an hour in* iU— Have
you remained in the garden till now ?— I hare remained there till
now ( j&to ad ora).

172 THiaTT-SBVSllTR LB880H.

118.

What do you do in the morning ? — ^I read.— And what do you
do then ? — ^I breakfast and study. — Do you breakfast before you
read ? — ^No, Sir, I read before I breakfasts — ^Dost thou play in*
stead of studying I — I study instead of playing. — ^Does thy
brother go to the pUy instead of going into the garden ?-r-He goes
neither to the play nor into the garden. — What do you do in the
evening ? — ^I study. — What hast thou done this evening ?— *I have
brushed your clothes, and have gone to the theatre. — ^Didst thou
remain long at (he theatre ? — ^I remained there but a few minutes.
— ^Are you willing tp wait here ? — ^How long am I to wait ? — ^You
are to wait till my father returns. — ^Has any body come ? — Some-
body has come. — What did they want ? — ^They wanted to speak
to you. — ^Would they not wait ? — They would not wait. — ^Have
you waited for me long T— I have waited for you two hours.—
Have you been dble to read my note ?— I have been able to read
it. — Have you understood it ? — ^I have understood it.-AHave you
shown it to any body ? — ^I have shown it to nobody. — Have they
farooght my fine clothes ? — ^They have not brought them yet.^.
Have they swept my floor and brushed my clothes ?*-They have
done both. — What have they said ? — They have said nothing.r-««
What have they done? — ^They have done nothing.— Has your
little brother been spelling ? — ^He has not been willing to spell.^->
Has the merchant's boy been willing to work ?— He has not been
willing. — ^What has he been willing to do ? — ^He has not been
willing to do any thing.

119.
Has the shoemaker been able to mend my boots ? — ^He has not
been able to mend them. — Why has he not been able to mend
them ?-~Beipause he has had no time. — ^Have they been able to
find my gold buttons t— They have not been able to find them.—
Why has the tailor not mended my coat ?*^^Because he has no
good tliread. — ^Why have you beaten the dog ? — ^Because it has
bitten me. — ^Why do you drink ? — Because I am thirsty. — What
have they wished to say ?— They have not wished to say any
thing.*-Have they said any thing new ? — ^They have not said any
thing new. — ^What do they say new in the market ? — They say

THUTT-KIGHTH LBSSON.

178

nothing new (there).— Did they wish to kill a maa? — ^They
wished to kill one. — Do they believe that ? — They do not believe
it. — ^Do they speak of that ? — They speak of it.— tDo they spetk
of the man that has been killed ? — They do not speak of him.^-
Can they do what they wish ?-VThey do what they can, but they
do not do what they wish. — What have they brought ? — They
have brought your new coat. — Has my servant brushed my fine
ca/pets ? — He has not brushed them yet. — ^Have you bought a
new horse? — I have bought two new. horses. — How many fine
trees have you seen ? — ^I have seen but one fine tree. — ^Have you
seen a fiii e man ? — I have seen several fine men. — Have you a
new frienil ? — ^I have several. — ^Do you like your new friends ? —
I like them.

THIRTY-EIGHTH LESSON.
Lezume trentesima ottava.

How far?

Up to, as far as.

As far as my brothel's.

As far as here^ hither.
As &r as there, thither.
As &r as London.
As far as Paris.

To, at, or in Paris.
To» « " Berlin.
To, " " London.
To, " " Rome.

To, at, or in France.
To," "Iftdy.

S Fin dove?
Findonde?
Fino, sino,
% Fin da mio fratello.
c Fino a casa di mio frateUa
Fin qui {or qui).
Fin a

Fino a (or in) Londra.
Fino a Parigi.

A Parigi, in ParigL
A Berlino, — Berlino,
A Londra^ — L^ndrsi
A Roma, — Rouml

In Francia.

In Italia.

In Inghiltemu.

174

THIRTY-SI6HTH LESSON.

As fiir ■• Eogtand.
i« Jar «a Italy.
A« far as Qermany.
Aa iar as France.
As ftir as Spain.

As Ikr as my house.

As fiir as the warehouse.

As fiir as the comer.

As far as the end of the road.

As ftir as the middle of the road.

Above or up stairs.

Below — dawn stairs.

As lar as aboTs.
As fiu- as below.
As lar as the other side of the road.

This side.

That side.

On this side of the road.

Ob that side of the road.

FIno in Ingfailterra.

Fino in Italia.

Fino in Oermania (Alemsgoa)

Fino In Francia.

Fino hi Ispagna.

imia).

c Fino a casa mla (or in <

{ Fino da me.

Fino al magaszino.

Fino al canto (all' angolo).

Fino in Ibndo alia strada (a capi
della strada).
c Fino aOa jmstk della yia.
I Fino in mezzo delU via.

Sopra, in aUo^ dissapra,

GiUj ahhasso.

Fino dissopra, fino in alto.

Fin giil, fin* abbasao.

Fino air altra parte della Yta.

) Da questo lato.

^ Da questa parte (da questo canto)
Da quelle (cotesta) parte.
\ Di qua della via.
[ Al di qua della Tia.
[Aldil&deUaTia.
iDil& della tU.

Germany.

L' Alemagna, la Oermania.

America.

L* America.

Holland.

V OUnda.

Italy.

L' Italia.

En^and.

L' Inghilterra.

France.

La Francia.

Spain.

La Spagna.

The middle.

11 mezzo (la meti, a lem. no

Thswell.

IIpozzo.

Thecaik.

La botte (a fern. noun).

The river.

11 fiume.

The lake.

lllago.

The castle.

11 casteDo.

The comer.

11 canto, r angolo.

THlRTT-BtGHTH LESSON.

176

To travel.

Do yott go to Parisl
Do yon traToI to Paria 1
Do yoQ go to FloraaMi
Do you go to Roma ?
I do travel (or go) thither.
Is he gone to fin^andl
He is gone tliither.
How far i» be gone?
How far lias he travdled 1
He is gone as far as Americft.
He is gone as far as Italy.

To steal.
To steal something from some one,

HaTe they stolen your hat from you ?

They have stolen it from me.

Has the roan stolen the books from

thee?
He has stolen them from me.
What have they stolen from you 1
What have they stolen from your

friend 1
niey have stolen all his good wine

from him.

AU.

An the wine.

All the good wine.

All his good wine.

All the books.

All his good books.

AU the men.

How do you spell this wordi
How is this word written?

It is written thus.

Viaggiare 1.

VaEUaaParigll

YaEUaaFirenzel

V«EllaaRoma1 .

Oivado.

% egU andato In Inghllterra I

Ci i andato.

Fin dove d «irli andato?

Pine dove ha egti viaggiatol

EgU i andato fino in America.

EgU d andato fino in ItaUa.

Rubare 1.

SRubare quakosa ad uno.
Portar via quakosa ad uno.
^ Le d stato rubato U cappeUo?
c Le hanno portato via U cappello 1
^ 111 d stato rubato.
< He 1' hanno portato via.
j T ha rubato i tuoi Ubri 1* nomo?
\ Ha portato via 1 tuoi Ubri 1' uomo 1

Me U ha portati via.

Che Le h sUto rubato 1

Che d stato rubato al di Lei amtoo 7

GU d stato rubato tutto fl suo boon
vino.

TvtUo.

Tutto U vino.

Tutto il boon vino.

Tutto 11 suo bnon vino.

Tutti i Ubri.

Tuttl i suol buonl Ubri.
( Tutti gU nomini.
c Ogni uomo.

( Come si scrive questo

< (qneataparola)?

C Come scrivesi questa parola 1
C Si 8criv« in questo mcJo

< cosi).

( Si scrive in questa maniera.

Tocabolo

(o,

176

TRIRTf-BIGBTS tBSSOK.

To dye (to c$i(mr)^-^yed,

I dye, thoa dyeit, be dyes.
Wt dye, you dye, tliBy dje^

To dye black.

To dye red.

To dye gretn.

To dye blue.

To dye yellow.

Tignere * or tinger^ — tinio^

Tingo, tingl, ijgne ortinft

Tigniamo, Ugnete, tingono.

Tignere nero.

Tignere roeso.

Tignere verde.

Tignere azznrro (turchinoV

Ti^ere giallo.

My blue coat

n mio abito turchino.

This white hat.

Queato cappeUo bianco.

His round hat

11 suo oappello tondo.

His yellow waistcoat

I auo giubbettlno giaUo.

I ha^e a three-cornered hat..

Ho un ca|>peUo a ire comi (a tn

punte).

00 yon dye your coat blue 1

1 dye it green.

What colour will you dye your cloth 1
I win dye it red.

The dyer.

Tigne il di Lei abito turchino 7

Lo tingo Terde.

Come Tuole tingere ii di Lai pannot

Voglio tingerio rosso.

Dtintoce.

To get dyedr'-got dyed.

What colour do you get your coat

dyedl
I get it dyed green.
What colour have you liad your hat

dyed?
I have had it dyed black.

Red.

Brown.

Grey.
I have had my waistcoat dyed yellow.

Far ttngere-^aUo iwgere.

Come & Ella tingere il di Lei Tee -

tito?
Lo &ccio tingere verde.
Come ha (atto tingere il di Lei cap*

pellol
L' ho &tto tingere i

Bruno.

Origio(bigio).

Ho &tto tingere giallo il mio glob-
bettino.

BXERCISES.

120.
How far have you travelled ? — ^I have travelled as jar as Ger-
•nany. — Has he travelled as far as Italy ? — ^He has travelled as
far as America. — How far have the Spaniards gone ? — ^They have
gone as far as London. — How far has that poor man come ? — H^
has come as far as here. — Has iie come as far as your house 'I -

He has oome as &r as my father's^^^Have they atolen any thing
fioDm you ? — They have stolen all the good wine fronf me. — ^Have
they stolen any thing from your father 1 — They have stolen all
his good hooks. — ^Dost 4bou steal any* thing ? — ^I steal nothing^r—
Hast thou ever stolen any thing 1 — ^I have nev«r stolen any thing. .
—Have they stolen your food clolbes from you ? — ^Thcy have
stolen them from me.— What have they stolen from me ? — ^They
have stolen all the good hooks frosil you.'^-When did they steal
the money from you ? — They stole it from me the day before yes-
terday.—Have they evar stolen any thing from us ? — ^They have
never stolen any thing from us. — How &r did you wish to go ?^"
I wished to go as far as the wood. — Have you gone as far as
there ? — I have not gone as far as there.-*-How far does your
brother wish to go ? — He wishes to go as far as the end of that
road.— How far does the wtoe go (arriva) ? — ^It goes (arriva) as
far as the bottom of the cask {deUa hoUe). — ^Whither art thou
going ?-^I am going to the market. — ^How far are we going? —
We are going as far as the theatre. — Art thou going as far as the
well? — ^I am going as far as the castle. — Has the carpenter
drunk all the wine ? — ^He has drunk it all. — ^H^ his little boy
torn all his hooks ?-^He has torn them all.-^Why has he torn
them ?— Because he dbes not wish to study.

121,
How much have yon lost t — ^I have lost all my money. — ^Do
you know where my father is l*-I do not know.-^Have you not
seen my book? — ^I have not seen it. — ^Do you know how this word
is written ? — It is written thus. — ^Do you dye any thing ?-^I dye
my hat.— Whftt oolour do you dye it ?«»— I dye it black.— What
colour do you dye your olothes ?-— I dye them yellow. — ^Do you
get your trunk dyed ? — I get it dyed.-^What oolour do- you get
it dyed ? — I get it dyed green.— What oolour dost thou get thy
gloves dyed ? — ^I get them dyed blue.— 'Does your boy get his rib-
bon dyed ?— He gets it dyed. — ^Does he get it dyed red ? — ^He
gets it dyed grey.— What colour have your friends got their
clothes dyed ?— They have got them dyed green. — ^What colour
have the Italians had their hats dyed ?*— They h&ve had them
d^ed brown^— Have you a white hat? — I have a black one. —

8*

ITS THISTY-Biasra lbssoii.

What hat has the nobleman ?-^He has two hats ; a white one and
a black one.-»What hat haa the American t — ^He tiu a round
hat. — ^HaVe I a white hat ?— You have several white and black
hats.^Has your dyer already dyed your cloth ?— He has dyed
it,..What colour has he dyed it ?— He has dyed it green.»-Do
you travel sometimes ?— I travel often. — ^Where do you intend to
go this summer {ftiesi^ etiate) ? — ^I intend to ge toParis.^4)o you
lot go to Italy ? — ^I do go thUier.-— Hast thou sometimes trav.
elled ? — ^I have never travelled. — ^Have your friends a mind to go
to Holland ? — They have a mind to go thither. — ^When do they
intend to depart ? — ^They mtend to depart the day after to-morrow.

122.

Has your brother already gone to Spain ? — ^He has not yet gone
thither. — ^Have you travelled in Spain ? — I have travelled there.—
When do you depart ? — ^I depart to-morrow. — ^Al what o'clock ?—
At five o'clock in the moming.-^Have you worn out all your
boots ? — ^I have worn them all out. — ^What have the Spaniards
done ?-»They have burnt all our good ships. — Have you finished
all your exercises ? — 1 have finished then all.— -How far is the
Frenchman come ? — ^He has come as far as the middle of the road.
—Where does your friend live ? — ^He lives on this side of the
road.— Where is your warehouse t — ^It is on that side of the road.
-^Where b the counting-house of our friend ? — ^It is jon that side
of the theatre. — ^Is your friend's garden on this or that side of the
wood ? — ^It is on that side.— Is not our warehouse on this side of
the road ?— It is on this side.-^Where have you been this mom-
ing !«— I have been at the castle.<^-How long did you remain at
the castle ? — ^I remained there an hour. — ^Is your brother above
or below ?«— He is above.-f-How far has your servant carried my
trunk ?-»He has carried it as far as my warehouse.— Has he
come as far as my house I— He has come as far as there, — ^How
far does the green carpet go ?— It goes as ftir as the comer of the
counting-house. — Have you been in Prance ?— I have been there
several times. — ^Have your children already been in Germany ?
—They have not yet been there, but I intend to send them thither
in the spring. — Will you go on this or that side of the road ?-~I

THIBTY-lflirTH LESSON.

179

will go neitber on this nor on that side; I will go in the middle of
the nNUL — How far does this road lead l — ^It leads as far as London.

THIRTY-NINTH LESSON.
Lezione tr&ntesima nmM.

To he necessary (must) — been \ „. ^ ,, ^ ^

' ^ ' I Btsognare — hsognato.

necessary. s ait- i».

' ( Ablnsognare — ahbisognaio.

Ib it necessary 1 j _, « „ ,. „

Must I, he, we, yon, they, or shel ( Bisogiial Ed'uopol
It is necessAvy. £l d' iMVpo. Bisogna.

OU. A, AH yerb* eBcpreasliig necessity, obligation, or want, as, to &« obi^ed;
to woni, tohe neuttary, muatf are generally rendered in Italian by ecMr • dP uapo
orMM^nortf;

Is it necessary to go to the market ?

It is not necessary to go thither.
What must one do to learn Italian 7

It is necessary to study a great deal.

( Bisogna andare al mercato 1
< J£ d' uopo andare al mercato 1
{ Non bisogna andarcL
c Non d d' uopo andarci.

Ch' d d' uopo (che bisogna) (are per
imparare 1' italiuio ?

£ d? nopo (bisogna) studiar molto.

„^ ^ J ^ C Che m* d (mt d) d* uopo fare 1

Whatmust/dol J Chedebbofare?

Ofr». B. The English nominatlTe, or subjeet of the verb mtut, is rendered
in Italian by the indirect cases in the dative ; mi, 0, gli, l^ ei, vi^ loro (see the
Personal Pronouns, Lesson XX.), according to number afidperson^

You must stay still.
Whither must fugol '
He must go for his book.

Wftat mviB/tihey buy 7
TheymaaX Imj some beef.

What must ire read 1

Le d d' uopo restar quieta. '
( Kymgli d d* uopo andare?
C Ove gH bisogna andare 7

Gli i d' uopo andare in cerca del suo
libra.

Che i loro d* uopo comprare 7

k loro d* uopo comprar del i

Che ei d d' uopo leggere 7

Che et bisogna leggere 7
Che d convien leggeial

rCh
5ch

etc

190

THIKTY-NINTU LKS^O«N.

What must you have 7

/ must have some money.

Must you haye a sou 1

Most you have a great deal 7

/ must have a great deal.

/ only want one sou.

l» that all you want 7

That is all I want.

How much must thou have 7 j

How much dost thou want 7 i

I only want a livre.

How much must your brother have 7

He only wants two livies.

, rCheJU^d' uopo7
' } Che m d d* uopo 7
I CCheL«bi8ogna7

Mi id* uopo danaio.

Le i d' uopo un soldo 7

OUene d d' uopo motto 7

Me n* i d* uopo molto.

Af» d d' Qopo Bolamente un sokfto.

Non Le bisogna che questo 7

N<m mi bisogna che qucstb.

duanto ti i d* uopo 7

r Non im d d' uopo che una lira.

< Non mi bisogna che una lira.

( Mii^ uopo Bolameatd una Urm.

Ctuanto bisogna al dl Lat frateUo 1
r Non gU bisagnaBo che due lire.

< Non gH i d* uopo che due lire.

( Oliid* uopo solamente dot ttre.

Have you what you want 7

I have what I want.
He has what he wants..
They have what they want

More.
NtH-^nufre.

Do you not want more 7
/do not want more.
Be does not want more.

Have you been obliged to work much

to learn Italian 7
I have been obliged to work much.

HaEnaddJ^^^*****"*'
c che Leid* uopo 9

Ho eid che m* d d' uopo.

Ha dd che gH i d* uopo.

Hanao dd ^e laro i d* nopo.

NtMr-'-dipnl (fUMi^-^tf).

Non Le abblsogna di piii 7
Non mi abblsogna di plii.
Non gli abblsogna di piii.

Za i stato d' uopo studiar molto pai

imparare V italiano 7
Mi i stato d' uopo atudiar molto.

What am Itodo7
Tou must work.
Am I to go thither?
You may go thither.

To he worth — been worth.
How much may that horse be worth 7
It may be worth a hundred sequins.
Are you worth?

Chedebbofiure7

Deve lavoraie, or Dovete lavorara.

Devoandarvi7

Pudandarvi.

Vakre* — valuto (yaho),
Ctnanto pud vakre queato cavallo 7
Pud valere cento xecchini.
Vale Rlla (valete)7 (not much used.)

THIETT-NINTR LESSON.

181

I un worth.
Thou art worth.
He is worth.
' W« are worth— they are worth.

How much is that gun worth 7
It ie worth but one eequin.
How much ifl that worth 7

That is not worth much.
That is not worth any thing.

VaJgo.

Vali.

Yale.

Vagliamo^-TagUono or Talgono.

duanto vale queato fudlel

Vale aolamente uno seccliino.

Cluantovalcid?
\ CiO non yal molto.
- CM non yal gran oosa.

Cii> non Yal niente.

This is worth mora than that. .

The one is not worth so much as tiie
other. I

duesto Yal piA di quello.

L' uno non Yale quanto P tltro.

To be better.

Am I not as good as my brothsrl
Toa are better than he.
I am not so good as you.^

To give hacky to restore. )

Criten hackf restored. ')

Does he restore yon your book 7
He restores it to me.
Has he given yon back your gtoves?
He hss given them me back.

Has your brother already commenced
his exercises 7

Not yet. .

He has not yet commenced
The present.
Have you received a present 7
I have reeeived several.
Have yon received the books 7
I have received them.

From whom ?
Krom whom have you reodved pre-

From my fHends.

< Valer* plh.
I Costar pli^.

Non valgo quanto mlo firaleltol

Ellavalpiiidllui.

Non valgo quanto Ella.

Render^^-^reso.

LerendeUdiLeiUbrol

Melorende.

Le ha reso i di Lei guanti 1

MeUharesi.

n di Lei fratello hagi& comindalol
suoi temi 7

2Vbii — ancora ; nofip— per aneo*

Non 11 ha ancora inoomindatl.
II regalo.

Ha ricevuto un regalo?
Ne ho ricevnti pareoehl.
Ha Ella ricevuto ilibril
LI ho ricevuti.

BacM?

Da chi ha itoevato del mgslll

Dai mid amid.

182 THIRTY-NnrTH LESSON..

Whence? Where from?

Where do you oome from 1
I oome from the gsrden.
When 1b he come from 1
He is oome from the theatre.
Where did they come from 1
Tliey an come from liome.

{Dadoffef

(D'onde?

D' onde (da do^e) Tftansl
Vengo dai giardioo.
Dadove^Tenatol
te yennto dai teatro.
Da doYe son Tenatil
Son Tenatl da caaa loro.

EXERCISES.

123.
Is it necessary to go to the market ? — ^It is not necessary to go
thither. — What must you buy ? — ^I must buy some beef. — ^Must I
go for some wine 1 — ^You must go for some. — ^Am I to go to the
ball ? — ^You must go there. — When must I go there ? — ^You must
go there this evening. — Must I go for the carpenter ? — ^Tou must
go for him. — ^What must be done to learn Russian ? — ^It is neces-
sary to study a great deal. — ^Is it necessary to study a great deal to
learn German ? — ^It is necessary to study a great deal. — What
must I do ? — ^You must buy a good book. — What is he to do ? —
He must sit still. — ^What are we fo do ? — ^You must work. — ^Must
you work much in order to learn the Arabic? — ^I must work much
to learn it. — ^Why must I go. to the market ? — ^You must go thither
to buy some beef and wine. — Must I go any where ?— •Thou must
go into the garden. — Must I send for any thing t — Thou must
send for some wine. — What must I do ? — ^You must write an ex-
ercise.— ^To whom must I write a note ? — ^You must write one to
your friend. — ^What do you want, Sir 1 — ^I want some cloth. —
How much is that hat worth ? — It is worth four crowns. — ^Do you
want any boots? — I want some.^How much are these boots
worth ? — ^They are worth twenty livres. — Is that all you want ?
-^That is all I want.-— Do you not want any gloves ?— I do not
want any. — ^Dost thou want much money ? — I want much. — How
much must thou have ? — ^I must have five sequins. — How much
does your brother want ? — ^He wants but six francs. — ^Does he not
want more ? — He does not want more. — ^Does your friend want
more ?— He does not want so much as I. — What do you want ?—

TKIRIT-NINTH LB8S0N. 18S

I want money and clothes. — ^Have you now what jrou want? — ^I
have what I want. — Hbs your father what he wants I— He has
what he wants.

124.
Have the neighbour's children given you back your books ?^-
They have given them me back.— -When! did they give them you
back ? — ^They gave them me back yesterday .—Has your little boy
received a present t — ^He has received several.^-From whom has
he received any ? — ^He has received some from my father and from
yours. — ^Have you received any presents I— I have received some.
—What presents have you received 1 — I have-received fine pros-
entB. — ^Do you eome from the garden ? — ^I do not come from the
garden, but from the warehouse. — Where are you' going to ? — I
am going to the garden. — Whence does the Irishman come ? — He
comes from the garden. — ^Does he come from the garden from
which {dal quale) you come ?— He does not come from the same
(dai medenmo), — From which (da gual) garden does he come? —
^e comes from that of ourdd friend. — ^Whence comes our boy ?
— He comes from the play. — How much may that horse be worUi ?
-—It may be worth five hundred crowns. — ^Is this book worth as
much as that?-^t is worth more. — ^Howjnuch is my gun worth?
—It is worth as much as that of your friend. — ^Are your horses
worth as much as those of the English ? — ^They are not worth so
much. — ^How much is that knife worth ? — ^It is worth nothing.

126.

Is your servant as good as mine ?— He is. better than yours.—-
Are you as good as your brother ? — ^He is better than I. — ^Art thou
as good as thy friend ? — I am as good as he.— Are we as good as
our neighbours ? — ^We are better than they. — ^Is.your umbrella
worth as much as mine ? — ^It is not worth so much.*— Why is it
not worth so much aa mine ?— Because it is not so fine as yours.
—How much is that gun worth ?^-It is not worth much. — Do you
wish to sell your^horse?— I wish to sell it. — How muph is it
worth ? — ^It is worth two hundred crowns. — ^Do you wish to buy
it ? — ^I have bought one already. — Does your father intend to buy
a horse ? — He intends to buy one, but not (ma wm) yours (ildi

184

FORTIETH hSaSOW.

LA').«-4Iave your brothers commenced (itteomincuUo) their ex«
erciaes? — ^They have commenced them.-^Have you received
your notps ? — We have not yet received them. — ^Have we whal
we want ? — We have not what we want. — ^What do we want ?—
We want fine horses, several servants, and much money .4-Is that
all we want ? — ^That is all we want. — ^What must I del ?— You
must write. — :To whom must I write ?^-You must write to your
friend. — Where is he? — He is in America. — ^Whither am J to
{debho) go ? — ^You may go to France. — ^How far must I {m d d*
uopo) go ?-^You may go as &r as Paris. — ^Which (a qum) notes
has your brother answered ?-**He has answered those of biv
firiends.— 'Which (quai) dogs have your servants beaten ?-*-They
have beaten those that have made much noise.

FORTIETH LESSON.
Lezume quaratUesima.

To eai~^aten.

To dine {etU dinner).

The dinner.
Hie bieakfasL
To eal supper (to sup).
The supper.

Jnctngiare 1 — uusngiato*
( Desinare 1 — desinato,
I Pranxare 1 — pramato*

II pranzo.

La oolazione (a fern. noun).

Cenare 1 — oenato.

La cena (a fem. noun).

After.

Afterme.

Alter him.

After you.

After my brother.

€)b9. The preposition dopo requires the genitiTe before a

noun, otherwise it governs the accusative.

Dopo,
Dopo di me.
Dopo di lui.
Dopo dt Lei (divoi).
Dopo mio firateUo.

personal pio-

AfterAovKR^ spoken. | t Dopo aver parlato.

Hr When the present participle is used in English after a preposition, it Is
rendered In Italian by the infinitive.

rORTISTH LKS80M.

186

After IkwSag sold hif horse.
After hoping been there.
I broke your knife after cutting the
beef:

t Dopo aver Tenduto U buo caTiIlo.
t Dopo esserci stato.
t Ho rotto U di Lei coltello dopo
aver tagUato il manio.

I haye dined earlier than jroo.
Ton have supped late.

Ho desinato pift per tempo di 1
£Ua ha cenato tardi.

To pay for.

To pay a man^ a hone.

To pay the tailor/or the coat

Do yon pay the shoemaker /of the

bootal . V

I pay him/or them.
Does he pay yon^ the knife 1
He does pay me^ it.
I pay what I owe.

To ask for.

Fagare 1 — pagato.

t Pagare im cavallo ad un nomo.

t Pagare V abito al sarto.

t Paga Ella gU sUyali al calzolaio t

t Glieli pago.

Le paga egli il coltello 7
t Me io paga.

Pago cid che debbo.

Domandare 1 — domandaio
(Chieder^ — chietto),
f^ The English verbs to pay and to atk require the preposition for ; but in
Italian, as in French, they require the person in the dative and the object in the
accusative. When the verb pagare, however, has no object in the accusative,
It requires the person in that case.

I have paid the tailor.

I have paid him.
Have you paid the shoemaker 1
I have paid him.
To ask a man/or some money.

I ask my &ther^ some money.
Do you ask me far your hati

I ask yoJL far it.

To aakfoT^'^atkedfor. .

laakfiir, thou askestfor, he asks
for.

We ask for, you ask for, they ask
for.

ToBskhlm/or'it

To ask him for them.

What do you ask me fori
I atk you for nothing. .

Ho pagato il sarto.

L' ho pagato.

Ha Ena pagato it calxolaiol

L* ho pagato.
t Domandare del daaaio ad un

uomol
t Domando'danaro a mio padrs.
t Mi domanda Ella il di Lei cap-

peUo7
t Gliclo domando (chiedo).

Chiedere^ — ehiesto.
Chiedo, chiedi, chlede.

Chiediamot chtodeta, chiedono

( t Chiederglielo.
C t Domandarglielo.
{ t ChiederglieU.
C t Domandarglieli.

t ChemichiedeEIlal

t Non Le chiedo niente.

186

FORTIBTH LHSSOn.

7b try.

WUlyoutnrtodothatl
I haye tried to do It
Ton miwt try to do better.

To hold^-^-held.

i hold, thoa boldest, he holds.
Do 7011 hold my stick?
I hold it.

We hold.

You hold.

They hold.

Are yon looking/or any one 7

Whom are you looking/or 7

I am looking /or a brother of mine.

My unde.
Hy cousin.
Hy relation.
The parents (father and mother).

A brother of mine.

A cousin of yours.

A relation of his (or here).

A friend of ours.

A neighbour of theirB.

He tries to see you.

Does he try to see me 1

He tries to see an undo of his.

To inquire t^ier some one.

Alter whom do you inquire 1
I inquire after a friend of mine.

Th^ inquire after you.
Dc they inquire alter me?

Frovare {provarm) 1 — pro

valo.

Vuol EUa proyare a fiur cidi
Ho prorato a &rlo.
BisognaproTare a frr m^o.

Tencr«*— leniito.

Tengo, tieni, tiene.

Tiene Ella il mio basfonel

Lo tengo.

Teniamo.

Tenete.

Tengono.

t Gerea Ella qualenaol

t ChicercaEUal

t Cerco un mio frateOo.

Hiosio.

Miocugino.

n mio parente ; pL i miel parsntk

I genilori (padre e madre).

t Uamiofratello.
t Undi Lei cugino.
t Un suo parsBte.
t Un nostro amico.
t Un loro Ticino.

Cerca Tederla.

CereaTedermil

Cerca Tedere un suo ilo.

( Domandare di putkuno

I Chiedere di qualcuno.

Di chi domanda Ella 7
Domando di un mio amico,

( Domandano di Lei.

C t Si domanda di LeL

\ Domandano di me 1

( t Si domanda di me?

FORTIBTH I.B880M.

167

Properly,

Ton write properhr.

Theae men do their duty properly.

The duty.

ThetsBk.
Have yoa done your taskl
I have done it
Have ye done your taekl
We hftTe done it.

A glues of wine.
A piece of bread.

A'perfesaone,

Ella BcriTe beniasimo (a peiMone).
Queeti uomini ftnno U dover loro a
maravigUa.

II doveie.

n dovere (il laToro).

Ha Ella fatto il di Lei dOTere 1

L' ho fatto.

Hanno fatto il loro doverel

L' abbiamo fatto.

Un bicchier di vino.
CUnpeno)^
(Untozxo )

[pane.

EXERCISES.

126.
Have you paid for die gun ?^-I have paid for it. — ^Has your
uncle paid for the books 7— He. has paid for them. — ^Have I paid the
tailor fer the clothes I — ^You have paid him for them.— Hast thou
paid the merchant for the horse ?— I have not yet paid him for it.
—Have we paid £>r our gloves ?— We have paid for them.— Has
your cousin already paid for his boots ? — He has not yet paid
fi>r them. — ^Does my brother pay you what he owes you 7— He
pays it me.^Do you pay what you owe ?— I pay what I owe.—
Have you paid the baker ?— -I have paid him. — ^Has your uncle
paid the butcher for the beef? — ^He has paid him for it.— Who
has broken my knife I — I have broken it after cutting the bread
—Has your son broken my glasses I— He has broken them after
drinking the wine.— When has your cousin broken my penknife?
— ^He has broken it after writing his notes. — Have you paid the
merchant for the wine after drinking it ? — I have paid for it after
drinking it.— What did yoii do after finishing your exercises ? —
I went to my cousin, in order to conduct him to the play. — How
do I speak? — You speak properly (&entf«Mno).-»How has my
cousin written his exercises ?— 'He h^s written them properly (a
p^exiane). — ^How have my children done their XbA ?-hThey

186 FOBTUTR LBSaOH.

have done it well.-^Does this man do his duty ? — He alwa^*
does it.-»Do these men do their duty 1 — ^They always do it. — ^Do
you do your duty 1 — ^I do what I can.— What do you ask thiti
man for ? — I ask him for some money. — ^What does this hoy ask
me for 1 — ^He asks you &r some money. — ^Do you ask me for any
thing ? — ^I ask you for a crown. — ^Do you ask me for the bread ?
I ask you for it. — Which man do you ask &r money ? — ^I ask
hjca whom you ask fer some. — ^Which merchants do you ask fi>r
gloves ? — ^I ask those for some who live in William-street. — ^What
do you ask the baker fer ? — I ask him for some bread.'

127.
Do you ask the butchers lor some meat ? — ^I ask them for some.
—Dost thou ask me for the stick ? — ^I ask thee for it. — Does he
ask thee fer the book ? — ^He asks me for it. — What have you
asked the Englishman fer ?— I have asked him for my leather
trunk.— -Has he given it you ? — He has given it me. — Whom
have you asked for some sugar t — ^I have asked the merchant for
some.— Whom does your brother pay for his boots ?— He pays
the shoenuJcer fer them.-«-Whom have we paid fer the bread ^
We have paid our bakexs for it. — ^How old art thou %-^I am not
quite ten years old.*-Dost thou already learn French ? — ^I do al-
ready learn it. — ^Does thy brother know German ?— He does not
know it. — ^Why does he not know it 7 — ^Because he has not had
time to learn it. — ^Is your fether at home ? — No, Sir, he is gone
{fturtHo)^ but my brother is at home.*— Where is your father gone
to 7-— He is gone to England.— Have you sometimes been there t
-—I have never been there.— Do you intend going to Prance this
smnmer }— 1 do intend going thither. — ^Do you intend to stay there
long ?— I intend to stay there during the summer. — ^How long does
your brother remain at home? — ^Till twelve o'clock. — ^Have you
had your gloves dyed ? — ^I have had them dyed.-4rWbat have you
had them dyed ? — ^I have had them dyed yellow. — ^Have you already
dined ? — Not yet. — ^At what o'clock do you dine ? — I dine at six
o'clock. — ^At whose house (da ehi, or in easa di cM) do you dine ?
— I dine at the house of a friend of mine.— With whom did you
dine yesterday ?— I dined with a relation of mine. — ^What did you
eat ?— We eat good bread, good beef, and pelty-patties.— What

FORTISTH ^SSON. 189

lid you drink ? — ^We drank good wine and excellent cider. —
Where does your uncle dine to-day ? — ^He dines with us. — ^At
what o'clock does your father sup ? — He sups at nine o'clock ?—
Do you sup earlier than he ? — ^I sup later than he.

128.
Where are you going to ? — I am going to a relation of mine, in
order to dine with him. — Art thou willing to hold my gloves ? — I
am willingto hold them. — ^Who holds my hat ? — ^Your son holds it.
— ^Dost thou hold my stick ? — I do hold it. — ^Do you hold any
thing ? — ^I hold your giin. — Who has held my book ? — Your ser-
vant has held it. — Will you try to speak ? — ^I will try. — Has your
little brother ever tried to do exercises ? — ^He has tried. — ^Have
you ever tried to make a hat ? — ^I have never tried to make one. •
—Whom are you looking' ibrl— I am looking for the man who
has sold a horse to me. — Is your relati<xi looking for any bod^ ?
— ^He b looking for a friend of his. — Are we looking for any
body ? — ^We are looking for a neighbour of ours.-:— Whom dost
thou look for? — ^I look for a friend of ours. — Are you looking for
a servant of mine ?— No, I am looking for. one of mine. — Have
you tried to speak to your uncle ? — ^I have tried to speak to him.
— ^Have you tried to see my father ? — I have tried.to see him. —
Has he received yott ? — ^He has not received me. — ^Has he re-
ceived your brothers 1 — He has received them.-^Have you been
able to see your relation ? — I have not been able to see him. —
What did you do after writing your exercises ?— I wrote my note
after writing my exercises.-^After whom (di ehi) do you inquire
(domandare) ? — ^I inquire after the tailor. — Does this man inquire
after any one ?-^He inquires after you {di Lei). — ^Do they in-
quire {H domanda) after you ? — They inquire after me. — Do they
inquire after me ? — ^They do not inquire after you, but after a
friend of yours (di un di LeLamico). — ^Do you inquire after the
physician ? — ^I inquire after him. — What does your little brother
ask for?— He asks for a small piece of bread. — Has he not yet
breakfasted ? — He has breakfasted, but he is still hungry. — ^What
does your uncle ask for ? — ^He asks for a glass of wine. — Has he
not already drunk ? — He has already drunk, but he is still
hungry.

FORTY-FIRST LESSON.

Lezione qtiarantesima prima.

To perceive {to disconer)*
Wm who.

Those who.

Ob§» Cohd and coloro relate only to
things.
Do yon perceive the ma& who la

coming 1
I peroelTO him who ia coming. *
Do yon- perceive the men who are

going into the warehonae 1
I perceive thoae who are going into it.

I Scorgere* — scorto.

SQuello, il quale {or ehe)
Cohdf il quale (or che),
( QueUiy i quaU (or che).
( Coloro, i fuaU (or che)»
perwna, qudb and quelU to peraona and

Scorge EUa V nomo che viene 7

Scoigo qnello che viene.

Scorge EUa gli nomini che vanno al

magazzinol
Scorgo coloro (qnelli) dh» vi i

How ia the weatherl
What kind of weather ia it 1
It ia fina weather at preae^
How waa the weather yesterday 1
What kind of weather was it ywter-

dayl
Waa it fine weather yesterday 7
It was bad weather yesterday.
It is fine weather this morning.

t Che tempo la7

t Adesso fa bel tempo.

t Che tempo ha fatto ieri7

t Halatto bel tempo ieri 7
t Ieri ha fiitto cattivo
t Stamane & bd tempo.

Is it warm 7
It is warm.

Very.

It is very warm.
It is cold.
It is very cold.
It is neither warm nor cold.

tFacaldo7
t Facaldo.

Molio.

t Fa molto caldo {or fii caldisstoEio).
t Fa fireddo.

t Fa fineddissimo (or fa molto fnddo),
t Non la caldo ni freddo.

FDkTY-FIRST LESSON.

l&l

Dark.

Nuvoloso, oscuro.

Obscure.

Oscuro, fbsco

DubI^, gloomy.

Buio, opaco.

Clear, Ught.

Chiaro.

It is dark in your warehouse.

t Fa oscuro nel di Lei magazzino.

Is it dark in his granary 1

t Fa oscuro nel suo granaiol

It is dark there.

t Vi fa oscuro.

Wet, damp.

Umido.

Dry.

Asciutto.

Is the weather dampi

E umido il tCQipol

It is'not damp.

Non d umido.

It is dry weather.

£ asciutto.

The weather is too dry.

)S troppo asciutto.

The moonlight, moonshine.

11 chiaro di luna.

The sun.

. 11 sole.

It Is moonlight.

We have too much sun.

t Fa troppo sole.

To taste.

k Gustare 1.
( Assaggiart I.

Bare you tasted that winel

Ha EUa assaggiato qnesto vinol

I have tasted iu

L' ho assaggiato.

Boir<loyolilikeit7

<| Come Le place 1

CCome Leparel

r Lo trovo buono.

I Uke it weU.

) Ml place.

C Mi par buono.

^ Non mi far buono.

I do not like it

J Non mi piace.^

C Non lo troYO buono.

To appear — apptared.

I appear, thoa appeaiest, he appears.
We, yon, they appear.

Parere*~^-paruio (or parso)

(an impersoDal verb gov-

erni^g the dative).

Palo, pari, pare.

Pariamo, parete, paiono.

To Wce—iiked.

I like, thon Ukest, he likes.
We, you, they like.

Piacere* — piacciuto (an impel -
sonal verb governing the
dative).

Ml, ti, gli, place.

Ci, Ti place, place loro.>^

^ Fiactrty in the signification of topUaae^ Is conjugated thus : PtcMcto, piaei,
pioee; piaeciamo, jriaeeitf piaceiono.

IM

PORTV.fi RST LBS80N.

I Uke fish.
He Ukes fowl.
Do you like cider 7
No, I Uke wine.
The fish.

Do you like to see my brother?
i like to see him.
I like to do it.
He likes to study.

t Ml piaoa n feice
t Gli plan tt polUstro.
t Le place 11 cidro 1
t No, mi place U vino,
t n peace ; pi. i pesci.

Le place vedere mlo frateUo f

Hi place Tederlo.
t Hi place farlo.
t Oil place Btudiare.

To learn by heart

The scholar.

The pupil.

The master (teacher).

The proieasor.
Do your scholars Uke to learn

hearti
They do not Uke learning by heart.
Have you learnt your exercises

heart?
We have learnt them.

Imparare a memoria.

Lo scoliro.

L' aUleTo.

II maestro.

n professore.

I dl Lei scolari imparano TOlontierJ

a memorial
Non Imparano Tolontlerl a memoria.
Hanno imparato i loro temi a i

rial
Li abbiamo imparatl.

Once a day.
nirlce, or three times a month.
So much a year.
So much a head.
So much a soldier.

. Six times a year.

Early in the morning.

We go out early In the monsfng.
When did your father go out 7

To speak of some one or some-
thing.

Of whom do you speak 1

We apeak of the man whom you

know.
Of what are they speaking?
They are speaking of the weather.

t Una volta al giomo.

t Tre Yolte al mese.

t Ttoto aU* anno.

t Tanto a testa.

t Tanto per soldato.
[ t Sel volte air anno.
[ t Sei volte r anno.

f Di hum mattino or di btum' ora

Usciamo dl buon mattino.
Ctuando d uscito il di Lei padre?

Parlare di uno o di qnalcosd.

Di chi parla Ella ?

Parliaroo dell* uomo chc Ella co-

noece.
Di che parlano (di che si parla) 7
Parlano del tempo (si parla dc'

tempo).

POBTT-HBST LBSSON.

103

The weather^
Tlie aoldier.
Also.

To he xAMUhi (satisfied) with

same one or inmeihing.
Are yoQ aetiflfied with thie map 1

I am aati^ed with him.

/Lre yon content with yonr new coat 1

I am contented with it

With wliat are you contented 1

Discontented.
I am diaoontented wUh him or ii.

Xi tempo.
Usoldato,
Anche (ancoia).

Essere conUnio (soddufaUo)
. di uno 0 di qwUcosa,

K Ella oontenta (aoddiaiatta) di coa-

tuil
Ne son contento (eoddiefatt^.
b Ella Boddiafotta d^ di Lei naovo

abitol
Ne son soddia&tto. , .

Di che cosa d Ella oontenta (soddia-

fatta)?
Scontento, malcontento.
Ne Bono acontento.

They apeak of your friend.
They apeak of liinu
They are apeaking of your book.
Tliey are speaking of it.

//.

I intend paying you, if I receive my

money.
Do you intend to buy coalal
I intend to buy some, if tliey pay me
wliat they owe me.

( Si parla del* di Lei amico.
( Parlano del di Lei andco.
^ Se ne pada
( Ne parlano.
(Si parla del di Lei Ubrd.
(Parlano del di Lei Ubra
{ Se ne parla.
( Ne parlano.

Se.

Intendo pagarla, ^ao rioevo il mio

danaro.
Intende joomprar del carbone 7
Intendo comprame, ae mi pagano

cid che mi debbono.

How was the weather yesterday 1
Was it fine weather yesterday 7
It was bad weather.
I intend to take a walk^ if the weather

is lair.
If the weatlier is fine, I intend to go to

the country.

To take a waUc (go a walking).

t Che tempo ha fatto ieri 1
t Ha &tto bel tempo ieril
t Ha &tto cattiTO tempo,
t Penso passeggiare se fik bel tempo.

t Se ia bel tempo intendo andare alia
campagna.

Pass^giare 1,

IM POBTY-FIBST LBSSON.

EXERCISES.

129.
Do you perceive the man who is coming ? — ^1 do not perceive
him. — ^Do you perceive the soldier's children ? — ^I perceive them.
— ^Do you perceive the men who are going into the garden ? — ^1
do not perceive those who are going into the garden, biit those
who are going to the market. — ^Does your brother perceive the
man who has lent him money ? — ^He does not perceive the one
who has lent bim, but the one to whom he has lent some. — Dost
thou see the children who arc studying ? — ^I do not see those who
are studying, but those who are playing. — ^Dost thou perceive
any thing ? — I perceive nothing. — Have you perceived my pa.
rents' warehouses ? — I have perceived them. — Where have you
perceived them ? — ^I have perceived them on that side of the road.
— Do you like a large hat ? — ^I do not like a large hat, but a
large umbrella: — ^What do you like to do ? — ^I like to write. — ^Do
you like to see these litttle boys ? — I like to see them. — ^Do you
like wine ? — ^I like it. — ^Does your brother like cider ? — He does
aot like it. — ^What do the soldiers like ? — ^They like wine. — Dost
thou like tea or coffee ? — ^I like both. — ^Do these children like to
study ? — ^They like to study and to play.-V-Do you like to read
and to write ? — ^I like to read and to write. — ^How many times o
day do you eat ? — Four times. — How often do your children
drink a day t — ^They drink several times a day ? — ^Do you drink
as often as they ? — I drink oftener. — ^Do you often go to the the-
atre ? — ^! go thither sometimes.^How often in a month do you
go thither ? — ^I go thither but once a month. — ^How many times a
year does your cousin go to the ball ? — He goes thither twice a
year.— Do you go thither as often as he ? — I never go thither.— »
Does your oook often go to the market ? — He goes thither every
mommg {ognimattfna).

130.

Do you often go to my uncle ?— ^I go to him six times a year. —
Do you like fowl ?— I like fowl, but I do not like fish. — What do
you like ? — ^I like a piece of bread and a glass of wine. — Do you
learn by heart ? — ^I do not like learning by heart. — ^Do your pu

rO£TT-FIRST LB8S09- -95

pils like learning by heart ? — They like to study, but they do
not like learning by heart. — How many exercises do they do a
day ?-^They only do two, but they do them properly. — Were
you able to read the note which I wrote to you ? — ^I was able to
read it. — ^Did you understand it ? — I did understand it. — ^Do you
understand the man who is speaking to you ? — ^I do not under-
stand him. — ^Why do you not understand him? — ^Because he
speaks too badly. — ^Does this man know French ? — ^He knows it,
but I do not know it. — Why do you not learn it 1 — ^I have no
time to learn it.-^^o you intend going to the theatre this eve-
ning ? — ^t intend going thither, if you go^— Does your father intend
to buy that horse ? — He intends buying it, if he receives his
money. — Does your friend intend to go to England ? — He Hitends
going thither, if they pay him What they owe him. — ^Do you in-
tend going to the concert ? — ^I intend going thither, if my friend
goes. — Does you brother intend to study Italian ? — He intends
studying it, if be finds a good master.

131.

How b the weather to-day ?— It is very fine weather. — Was
it fine weather yesterday ? — ^It was bad weather yesterday.—
How was the weather this morning ? — ^It was bad weather, but
now it is fine weather.— Is it warm ? — ^It is very warm.-*Is it
not cold ? — ^It is not cold. — ^Is it warm or cold ? — It is neither
warm nor cold. — ^Did you go to the garden the day before yes-
terday ? — ^I did not go thither .-^Why did you not go thither ? — ^I
did not go thither, because it was bad weather.— Do you intend
going thither to-morrow ?^-*-I intend going thither, if the weather
is fine.-^-Is it light in your counting-house ? — It is not light in it.
— ^Do you wish to study in mine 1 — ^I wish to study in it. — ^Is it
light there 1 — ^It is very light there.— Why cannot your brother
work in his warehouse ? — ^He cannot work there, because it is
too dark (perehi ci fa irappo huio). — Where is it too dark ?— In
his warehouse. — Is it light in that hole ?-^It is dark there. — ^Is
the weather dry ? — ^It is very dry.-^Is it damp ? — ^It is not damp.
\ It is too diy. — ^Is it moonlight ? — It is not moonlight; it is very
damp. — Of what does your uncle speak ? — ^He speaks of the
fine weather. — Of what do those men speak ?-— They speak

106 FOBTT^FIBST LBSSOlf.

of fair and bad weather. — ^Do they not speak of the wind t—
They also speak of it. — Dost thou speak of my uncle ? — I do
not speak of hfm. — Of whom dost thou speak ? — ^I speak of
thee and thy parents. — ^Do you inquire after any one? — I in-
quire after your cousin ; is he at home ? — No; he is at his best
friend*s.

132.
Have you tasted that wine ? — ^I have tasted it.-*-How do you
like it ? — ^I like it well. — ^How does your cousin like that cider ?
— He does not like it. — Which wine do you wish to taste ? — ^I
wish to taste that which you have tasted^— Will you taste {sentire)
this tobacco ?— I have tasted {seniito) it already. — How do you
like it {come Le pare) 1 — ^I like it {mi pare) well. — Why do you
not taste that cider ? — Because I am not thirsty. — Why does your
friend not taste this beef? — ^Because he is not hungry. — Of whom
have they spoken {si i parkUo) ? — ^They have spoken of your
friend. — ^Have they not spoken of the physicians ? — ^They have
not spoken of them.^Do they not speak of the man of whom we
have spoken ? — ^They epeak of him.-*Have they spoken of the
noblemen ? — They have spoken of them.— Have they spoken of
those of whom we speak ? — ^They have not spoken of those of
whom we speak, but they have spoken of others.— Have they
spoken of our children or of those of our neighbours ?— They
have neither spoken of ours, nor of those of our neighbours.
Which children have been spoken of? — ^Those of our master
have been spoken of. — ^Do they speak of my book ? — They speak
of it.— lAre you satisfied with your pupils ? — I am satisfied with
them.4-How does my brother study ?— He studies well. — ^How
many Mcercises have you studied ? — ^I have already studied forty-
one. — Ib your master satisfied with his scholar ? — He is satisfied
with him. — ^Is your master satisfied with the presents which he
has received ? — ^He is satisfied with them. — Have you received a
note? — ^I have received one. — ^Will you answer it? — ^I am going
to answer it (ora ci ritpondo). — When did you receive it?— 1 re-
ceived it early this m6rning.-^Are you satisfied with it ? — I am
not satisfied with it. — ^Does your iriend ask you for money ?—
He asks me for some.

FQBTT-6BC0MD LESSOlf •

Wl

FORTY-SECOND LESSON.
LezUnie quarantesima secanda.

OF PASSIVE VERBS.

PasfliTe verbs represent the subject as receiving or sufiering from others the
action expressed by the verb. They are conjugated by means of the auxiliary
verb tnercj to be, joined to the past participle of the active verb, in Italian as
weU as in French and English.^ Thus any active verb may be changed into
the passive voice.

AcHve voice.

Ptuthetoke.

I love. I am loved.

Amo.

Sono amato.

Thou praisest. Thou art praised.

Lodi.

Sei lodalo.

He believes. He is believed.

Crede.

& crednto.

We beat. We are beaten.

Battiamo.

Siamo battntL

You punish: Yoii are punished.

Punite.

Siete puniti.

They serve. They are served.

Servono.

Sono servitL

To praise.

Lodarel.

To blame.

Biasimarel

To punish.

Punire 3.

To serve.

ServireS.

By.

Da.

By me, — by uj.

Dame,

— da DoL

By thee, — by you.

Date,

-da vol.
rloto.

By him, — by them.

Dalui,

-^ da< c(M0fO«

I am loved by him.

Sono amato da loi.

Who is punished 1

Chidpunitol

The naughty boy is punished.

11 cattivo fanduUo d punitu.

By whom is he punished?

Dachideglipunito? ,

He is punished by his &ther.

]S punito dasuo padre.

Which man is praised, and which is

Qual uomo

d lodato e quale ^ biasi*

blamed 7

matol

1 With this difierence only, that in English and French we say t I have been
esteemed, J aJiiU cMtimS; and in Italian : Sono ttaio aiimaio (I am been es-
teemed, Je 9uU itSesHmi^t for the compound tenses offeooert are formed by .
means of t^ sum ^rb

196

FORTY-SECOND LESSON.

Naughty.
SklUiil, diligent, clever.
Awkward.
ABaidnous, induatrioua, atudious.
Idle.
Ignorant.

The idler, the lazy fellow.

To'reward.
To esteem.
To despise.
To hale.

A DiMuorriva
. A »

qf Undemut^ ((feoniempi,
CattiTo, cattiveUo, cattlTaccio.
Abile, deatro.
Inabile, incapace.
Asslduo, diligente, studioao.
Pigro, poltrone.
Ignoninte.

I 11 plgro, il poltrone.

Ricompensare I. .
SUmare 1.

DispreTszare 1. Sprexxare 1*
Odiare 1.

Good (wise). •

Theae children are loved, becauae they i
•re Btndioua and good. '

To travel to a place.

Where haa he travelled to 7
He haa travelled to Vienna.

la it good travelling?
It ia good travelling.
It la bad travelling.

In the winter.
In the Bummer.
In the apring.
In the autumn.
Itia bad travelling la the winter.

To drive, to ride In a carriage.

To ride (on horsebac'k)^

To go on foot.
Do you like to rido 1
I like to drive.

Buono [savio).

Questi fanciulU aono amatl, perchc
aono diligent! e buoni.

"f Andare"* 1.

t Dove d andato 1
t E andato a Vienna.

t Siviaggia benel
t Si viaggla bene,
t Si viaggla male

Neir invemo.
Nella atate.

Nella {or in) primavera.
Nell' autunno.
t Si viaggia male in invemo.

Andare in carrozza (in veltum,
legno).
[ Andare a cavallo, or cavalcnTt.
! Moutare a cavallo

Andare a piedL

Le piace andare a cavallo 7

Mi piace andare in legno.

FORTY-SECOND LSSSON.

106

To Uve — lived.
U it good living in Paris')
Is the living good in Paris?
It is good living there.
The living is good there.

Dear.

Is the living dear In London 1
Is it dear living in London 7

The living is dear there.

Vivere * — vissuto.
t Si vive hene a Parigil

t Ci ai vive hene. .

Caro.

Si v|ve a caro prezao in Londnil
]S caro il vivere in Londral

[ Ci si vive a caro prezzo.

! II vivere vi d caro.

Thunder.

The storm.

The fog.
Is it windy 1 Does the wind blow 7
It is windy. The wind blows.
It is not windy.
It is very windy.
Does it thunder 7

To thunder.

Is It foggy 7
It is stormy.
It is not stormy.
Does the sun shine 7
It thunders very much.

11 tuono, il fulmine.

It temporale, la tempcsta (/sm.)

La nebbia (/em.)
t Pa vento 7 Tira vento 7
t Fa vento. Tira vento.
t Non fa vento.
t Fa molto vento.

Tuona7

Tuonare 1, FulnUnare 1.
t Fa nebbia 7

t Fa l>urra8ca. Fa temporale.
t Non ia burrasca (temporale).

C'djM>le7

Tnona' molto.

Afterwards.

As soon as.

As soon as I have eaten, I drink.

As soon as I have taken off my boots,

I take off my coat.
What do yoH do in the evening?

To sleep.

Does your father still sleep
He still sleeps.

Poif dipoi.

Suhio che, appena.

Snblto che ho manglato, bevo.
Subito che ho levato i miei stivali

mi levo r abito.
Che fiEi Ella la sera 7

Dormire 3.

Donne anoora il di Lei p«dr»1
Donne ancora.

Without.

I Senza.

Without money. Senza danaro.

Without speaking. | Senza parlare.

0&«. Without requires in English the present participle ; in Italian
followed by the infinitive.

Wlt1»ut saying any thing. | Senza dirnier.te.

900

V0BTT-8EC0ND LESSON.

Ai last.

HatheAirive4atlast7
He haa not arrived yet
la he coming at last 7
He ia coming.

And ihen.
And then he sleeps.
As soon as he has supped he reads, and

then he sleeps.
He comes in at ten o'clock, sups, reads
a little, takes tea, and then he goes to
bed.

Toenier.

Togo to hed^^one to bed.

Ayine, findtmenU.
Arrware 1. RUamare *

te arrivato alfinel
Non d ancor anivato. .
Viene finalmente 1
Viene.

Pot, di poi, indi.

Poi dorme.

Subito che ha cenato, legge po

dorme.
Entra alle died, cena, legge un poco»

prende il ti ; indi si corica.

Enirarel,
Coricdrn — corieatatL

EXERCISES.

138.

Are you, loved ? — ^I am loved. — ^By whom are you loved f — ^I
am loved by my uncle. — Bj whom am I loved I — ^Thou art loved
by thy parents. — ^By whom are we loved ? — ^You are loved by
your friend8.-^By whom are those children loved I — ^They are
loved by their friends. — By whom is this man conducted ? — ^He is
conducted by me. — ^Where do you conduct him to ? — I conduct
him home. — ^By whom are we blamed ? — We are blamed by our
enemies. — Why are we blamed by them ? — Because they do not
love us. — ^Are you punished by your master ? — ^I am not punished
by him, because I am good and studious. — Are we heard ? We
are. — By whom are we heard 1 — We are heard 4)y our neigh-
bours*— ^Is thy master heard by his pupils? — He is heard by
them. — Which children are praised? — Those that are good. —
Which are punished ? — Those that are idle and naughty .^Are
we praised or blamed ? — We are neither praised nor blamed. —
Is our friend loved by his masters ?— He is loved and praised by

FORTY^SECOND LSSSON. 201

Lfiem, because he is studious and good ; but his brother ia de •
spised by his, because he is naughty and idle. — Is he sometimes
punished ? — ^He is {V e) every morning and every evening.—
Are you sometimes punished ? — ^I never nm {non lo sono mai) ; I
am loved and rewarded by my good masters.^— Are these children
never punished ? — ^They never are (nan lo sono tnai)y because
they are industrious and good ; but those are so {h sono) very
oflen, because they are idle and naughty. — ^Who is praised and
rewarded t — Skilful children {ifanduM ahUi) are praised, e&i
teemed, and rewarded ; but the ignorant are blamed, despised,
and punished. — ^Who is loved, and who is hated ? — He who is
studious and good i»loVed, and he who is idle and naughty is
hated. — ^Must one be (e mestieri esser) good ip order to be loved ?
— One must be so (e (Ttwpo esserlo), — ^What must one do {chc
hisognafare) in order to be loved ?— ^ne must be good and indus-
trious*— What must one do in order to be rewarded ?-*One mu9t
be (^uqgYia etser) skilful, and study much.

134.
Why are those chHdren loved ? — They are loved because they
are good.— Are they better than we ?— They are not better, but
more studious than you. — ^Is your brother as assiduous as 4nlne ?
— ^He is as assiduous as he, but your brother is better than mine.
^Do you like to drive % — I like to ride.^-Has your brother ever
been on horseback? — ^He has never been on horseback. — ^Does
your brother ride on horseback as often as you 1— He rides on
horseback oftener than I. — Did you go on horseback the day be-
fore yesterday % — ^I went on horseback to-day. — Dj you like
travelling I — I like travelling. — ^Do you like travelling in the
winter ? — ^I do no. like travelling in the winter; I like travelling
in the spring and in autumn. — Is it good travelling i^ the spring ?
— It is good travelling in spring and in autumn, but it in bad
travelling in the summer and in the winter. — Havd- you :jome-
times travelled in the winter ?— I have often travailed in tlif win.
ter and in the summer. — Does your brother often trovel ^ —Ho
travels no longer; he formerly travelled much. — V'hen if* you
like to ride ? — ^I like to ride in the morning; — Have you biftn ir
London?— >! have been there.— Is the living good thee ?- -Th*

9*

202 FORTY»S£COND LE8SOX.

living is good there, but dear. — ^Is it dear living in Paris t— It is
good living there, and not dear«— Do you like travelling in
Franoe ?— I like travelling there, because one finds {d si iraoa)
good people there. — ^Dbes your friend like travelling in Holland ?
—He does not like travelling there, because the living is bad
there. — ^Do you like travelling in Italy I — ^I like travelling there,
because the living is good, and one finds {e vi n trava) good
people ; but the roads are not very good there.-^Do the English
like to travel in Spain {in Ispagna) ? — They like to travel there ;
but they find the roads too bad. — How is the weather ? — The
weather is very bad. — Is it windy ? — It is very windy. — ^Was it
stormy yesterday % — ^It was very stormy.

135.
Do you go to the market this morning 1 — ^I do go thither, if it
is not stormy .-^Do you intend going to. Franoe this year 1 — ^I
intend going thither, if the weather is not too bad.— Do you like to
go on foot ? — ^I do not like to go on ibot, but I like going in a car-
riage when I am travelling. — ^Will you go on foot ? — I cannot go
on foot, because I am tired. — What sort of weather b it % — ^It
thunders. — ^Does the sun shine ? — The sun does not shine ; it is
foggy. — Do you heat the thunder? — ^I hear it. — ^Is it fine
weather ?— The wind blows hard, and it thunders much. — Of
whom have you spoken ?-— We have spoken of you. — Have you
praised me ?— We liave not praised' you ; we have blamed you.
— >Why have you blamed me ? — ^Because you don't study {non
itiudia) well.-»-Of what has your brother spoken ? — ^He has
spoken of his books, his horses, and his dogs. — ^What do you do
in the evening ?— ^I work as soon as I have supped. — And what
do ^ou do afterwards? — ^Afterwards I sleep. — ^When do you
drink ? — ^I drink asjMon as I have eaten. — When do you sleep?
I sleep as soon as I have supped. — Have you spoken to the mer*
chant ?-*-I have spoken to him, — ^What has- he said? — ^He has
left (d fartUa) without saying any thing.^^^an you work without
speaking t— I can worK, but not study French without speaking.
—Wilt thou go for some wine ? — ^I cannot go for wine without
money. — Have you bought any horses ? — I do not buy without
OToney. — Has your father arrived at last ? — He has arrived. —

rORTV-THIRD LESSON.

203

When did he arrive ?— This morning at four o'elock.-^ilas youi
cousin set out at last ? — He has not set out yet. — ^Have you at
last found a good master ? — I have at last found one.— -Are you
at last learning Italian ?— I am at last learning it* — ^Why have
you not already learnt it ? — Because I have not been able to find
a good master.

FORTY-THIRD LESSON.
Lezione quarantesima terza.

OF REFLECTIVE TfiRBS.

When tha action fiUhkupon the agent, add the objective case reftra to fho
Mme person as the nominative, the verb is called reflectlTe. In reflaotlTe
verba^ thexefore^ the pronoun of the object is of the tame peraon as that of tlie
■abject

In inch Terbe each peraon la coqjugated with a double pronoun, thus :

!•

myaelt

I0|

mL

ThoU|

thyaeU:

Tu,

ti.

He,

himaelf.

EgU»

8he^

heieeIC

Ella,

al.

It,

ttaelf.

Esso,
rUno,

^Bk

One,

one's self.

J Taluno,
C Alcuno,

They,

I themaeWee.

JAitri,
I Alcuni,

■1.

The people,

We,

ourseWes.

Noi,

cL

Yon,
Ye,

yourselC
yourseWes.

1

Vol,
i C Bglino,

They,

themselves. •

JEsai,Esae,

C EUeno,

Ob9. A. It will be remarked that the

third person is alv

raya H, whataverBaay

be its number or icender.

304

FORTT-THIED LESSON.

Toeutyoanelt

TagUanrL

To cut myielf.

TaiiiannL

To cut ourselvea.

Ta^iard.

r himself. ^

J hdifelf. I

TtagUaral.

I one's self. J

Do you bum yourself 7 | SI brada Ella (vi bnMlato) 1

Ob». B, In Italian, however, the first pronoun is often not expressed, 1
understood.

I do not bum myself.
You do not bum yourself.
I see myself.
Do I see myself 7
He sees himselt
We see ourselTea.
They see themseWes.

Do yop wish to warm yourself 1

I do wish to warm myself.
Does he wish to warm himself 7
He does wish to warm himselC.

They wish to warm themselires.

Non mi brado.

Noh si bmda (non vi bmciate).

Mi Tedo.

MiTedoio?

SiTede.

Ci vediamo (or veggiamo).

Eglino si vedono (er Teggono).

Si Yuol Ella scaldare (volete seal-

darTi)7
Yoglio scaldarmi.
^ Si Tuol egli scaldare 7
{VnolegUscaldarsi7
Egli Tuol seakiarsi (or Egli si mol

scaldare).
Si vogliono scaldare (or VogUono
scaldarsl).

To ef^i io divert^ to amuse one^s

•elf.
In what do you amuse yourself 7
I amuse myself in r^a^ng.
He diverts himself in fUtinng.

( Divertirn — divertUosi.

I DUettarsi — dfleUtUosi.

t A Che si diletta (si diverte) Ellal
t Mi diletto a Uggert.
t Si diverte agiuoeart.

Each.

Each one.

Each num.

iCaeh man amuses himself as he likes.
Each one amuses himself in the bert
way he can.

The taste.
Bach man has his taste.

Each of you.

The world, the people'.

Every one, every body.

Quahinque^ ogni.
CtaseunOf ognuno.
Qualunque uomo.

Ciascuno si diverte come gli place.

< Ciascuno si diverte aUa megllo.

< Ciascuno si diverte a mode fluo.
II piaoere, 0 gusto.

Ognuno ha il suo gusto.
Ciascuno di vol (di Loro).
La gente.
Tutta la gente, tutti.

FORTY-THIBJ) LESSON.

805

Ererf bodyipeaks of it.
Every one it lUiblo to error.

( Tutti ne paikno.
( Ciascuno ne purla.
Ognuno d Boggetto ad iAgannanL

& tmslake, to be mistaken.
Tou «iB mifltaken.
Be U mistaken.

Ifigannarsi.

EUa 8* inganna (y' ingannate).
S' inganna.

To deceive, to cheat.
He has cheated me.
He has cheated me of a hundred
sequins.

Ingannare 1.
M' lia IngannaSo.
Mi ha ingannato di cento lecchini.

You cut your finger.

EUa si taglia il dito (yi tagliateil
I dito).

Obt. C. When an agent performs an act upon one part of himself, the verb
Is made reflective.

Mi tagUo le unghie (a fem. noun, ths
sing, of which is P unghia).

I cut my nails.
A hair.

TopuUout.

He pulls out his hair.
He cuts his hair.

The piece.
A piece of bread.

Togoaufay.

Are yon going away 1
I am going away.
Is he going away 7
He is going away.
Are we going away 1
We fre going away.
Are these men going away 7
They are not going away.

To feel sleepy.

Do you leel sleepy 7
I feel sleepy.

Tosoa.

To fear, to dread.

Un capello.

Strappare 1.
Egli si strappa 1 capelU.
EgU si taglia icapelU.
Upezzo.
Un pezzo di pane.

Andarsene ♦.

^e ne va (ve ne andate) 7

Me ne vado.

Sene vaegU7

EgU se ne va.

fCe ne andiamo noi7

Ce ne andiamo.

Se ne vanno questi uomini 7

Non se ne vanno.

Aver vogUa di domdre.

Ha Ella voglia di donnire 7
Ho vogUa di dormlre.

( Tnsudiciare I.
( Sporcare 1.
Aver paura, temere, 2.

206

FORTY -THIRD LESSON.

He fears to soil his fingeis
Do you dread to go out ?
I dread to go out.
He is afraid to go thither.

To fear same one.

I do not fear him.
Do you fear that man 7

Whaldo]roufear7

Whom do you fear 1

I fear nobody.
I fear nothing.

Ha paura d* insudidarsi le dlla.
Ha EUia paura d' uscirel
Ho paura d' usdre.
Ha paura d' andard.

{ Temere itnp.

I Aver paura <£' imo.

Non lo temo.

Teme costul (temeto questQI
^ Che temeEllal
( Di che cosa ha Ella paura?
^ Chi teme Ella 7
i Di chi ha Ella paura 7

Non temo nessuno

Non temo niente.

EXERCISES.
136.
Do you see yourself? — I see myself. — Do you see yourself in
that small lookmg-glass (nello speccMeUo)1 — ^I see myself in it.—
Can your friends see themselves in that large looking-glass (nello
speechione)! — ^They can see themselves therein (vedervin). —
Why does your brother not light the fire ?r— He does not light it,
because he is afraid of burning himself. — ^Why do you not cut
your bread ? — I do not cut it, because I fear to cut my finger. —
Have you a sore finger^ (Le duole il dito) ? — ^I have a sore finger
and a sore foot (e anche Upiede). — ^Do you wish to warm your-
self? — ^I wish to warm myself, because I am very cold. — ^Why
does that man not warm himself? — Because he is not cold. — ^Do
your neighbours warm themselves? — ^They warm themselves,
because they are cold. — ^Do you cut your hair ? — ^I cut my hair.
•V-Does your friend cut his nails ? — He cuts his nails and his
hair. — ^What does that man do {costm) ? — He pulls out his hair.
■ — In what {ache cosa) do you amuse yourself? — ^I amuse myself
in the best way I can {aJln tnegUo), — In what do your children
amuse themselves ? — They amuse themselves in studying,
writing, and playing. — ^In what does your cousin amuse himself?
—He amuses himself in reading good books, and in writing to
his friends. — In what do you amuse yourself when you have

FORTY-TmRD LBSSOIV. * 207

oothing to do at home ? — ^I go to the play, and to the ooncert. I
often say: Every one (ciascuno) amuses himself as he likes.
Every mdjr^ciascuno) has his taste ; which is yours ? — Mine is
to study (b studiare), to read a good book (t7 hggere^ dec), to go
to the theatre, the concert {indi al concerto), and the ball, and to
ride.

137.
Why does your cousin not brush his coat? — He does not brush
it, because he is afraid of soiling his fingers {le dila). — What does
my neighbour tell you ? — He tells me that you wish to buy his
horse ; but I know that he is mistaken, because you have no money
to buy it. — ^What do they say {che H diccj or che dieono) aX the
market ? — ^They say that the enemy is beaten. — ^Do you believe
that (2o) ? — ^I believe it, because every one says so.— Why have
you bought that book ? — ^I have bought it, because I want it
{jfcrch^ ne ho hist^no) to learn Italian, and because every one
speaks of it. — Are your friends going away ? — ^They are going
away. — ^When are they going away ? — ^They are going away to*
morrow.— When are you going away {se ne vanno Loro) ? — We
are going away to-day. — Am I going away ? — ^You are going
away, if you like. — ^What do our neighbours say ? — They are
going away without saying any thing. — ^How do you like this
wine ? — ^I do not like it.-^What is the matter with you ? — I feel
sleepy. — Does your friend feel sleepy ? — He does not feel sleepy,
but he is cold. — ^Why does he not warm himself? — ^He has no
coals to make a fire.— Why does he not buy some coals 1 — ^He
has no money to buy any .—Will you lend him some ? — ^If he has
none I will lend him some. — ^Are you thirsty ? — I am not thirsty,
but very hungry. — Is your servant sleepy ? — He is sleepy. — ^Is
he hungry ? — He is hungry.— Why does he not eat ? — ^Because
he has nothing to eat. — Are your children hungry ? — They are
hungry, but they have nothing to eat. — ^Have they any thing to
drink ? — They have nothing to drink. — ^Why do you not eat J— •
I do not eat when I am not hungry. — ^Why does the Russian not
drink ? — He does not drink when he is not thirsty. — ^Did your
brother eat any thing yesterday evening ? — He ate a piece of
beef, a small bit (unpexzetio) of fowl, and a piece of bread .^Did
he not drink ?-— He also (anche) drank. — What did he drink ?— «
He drank a glass of wine. (Seo end of Lesson XXIV).

FORTY-FOURTH LESSOM-
Lezitme quanmiesima quaria.

PERFRCT OP REFLECTIVE VERBS.

In Italiftii, all reflective Terbt, without exceptfon, take in tlielr oompointf
the auxiliary msert *, whilst in English they take io kav

SidEUatagUatal

Hi son tagliato 7

MisontagUatot

Si d tagiiata.

Ella non a* d tagiiata.

Tisei tagliato 1

Non my son tagliato.

U di Lei frateUo •* a tagliato 1

Egli s* d tagliato.

Ci alamo tagliatil

Noi non ci slamo tagUatl.

Si aono tagliati questi i

Eaal non d aono tagliatL

HoYe you cut yourself 7

I have ent myself.

Have I cut myself t

Ton have cut yourselC

You have not cut yourselC

Hast thou cut thyself 1

I have not out mysel£

Has your brother cut himself 1

He haa cut himself.

Have we cut ourselves 1

We have not cut ourselTes.

Have tliese men cut themselves 1

They have not cut themsehes.

To take a walk.
To go a walking.

To take an airing in a carriage.

To take a ride,
l^e coach.

Do you take a walk '^
4 take a walk.
He takes a walk.
We take a walk.

Thou wishest to take an ai*ing.
llier wish to takoA ride.

Passeggfatre 1.

Andare • a jMssoggian.
I jcanoiia.

^ Andare •in i legno.
I [rettuxm.

I Fare una trottata.

Andare • a cavallo.
( La carrozsa, la vettura (^m.
I II legno.

PasseggiaElia?

Passeggio.

Passeggia.

Paeeeggiamo.
C Vuoi fiire una trottata.
i Vuoi andare in oarrona.

Vogllono andar a eavaDo.

FOBTy-FOlTBTH LBS8()N.

209

To take a chUdaioalking.

Do you take your children a walking?
1 take tliam a walking erery morning.

To go to hedf to Ue down.

To go to bed.

To put (to place, to fix).

I put, thou pnttest, he puts.
We pnt, you put.
They put.

To get up, to rise.

Do you rise early?
I rise at sunrise.

I go to bed at sunset

The sunrise.

The sunset.
At what time did you go to bed ?
At three o'clock in the morning.
At what o'clock did he go to bed

yesterday?
He went to b^ late.

To rejoice at something.

I ngoioe at your happiness.

At what does your uncle rejoice ?

I haT6 rejoiced.
They have rejoiced.
Ton have mistaken.
We have mistaken.

Condurre.a spasso tin fan-
ciullo.

Conduce Ella a spasso i di Lei ian

ciulli?
Li conduco a spasso ogni mattlna.

Coricarsi — coricato.
( Porsi * in letto.
I Andare * a letto.

Porre^ (anciently jHmcre)—
posto.

Pongo, poni, pone.

Poniamo or ponghiamo, ponete,

Pongono.

Levarsi, aharsi.

Si aiza presto (di buon mattino) ?
Mi alzo (mi lero) alio spuntar do.

sole.
Mi corico al tramontar del sole.
Lo spuntar del sole.
II tramontar del sole.
A che ora s' ^ EUa coricatal
Alle tre del mattino.
A che ora s* d coricato ieri?

S' d coricato tardi.

Sf RaUegrarsi per qualeosa.
t RaUegrarsi di qualche cosa>
m raUegroperladi Lei felidtA (o

della vostra).
Per che cosa (perchd) si rallegra il dl

Leizio?

Mi son rallegrato.

Si sono rallegratL

t Ella s' d ingannata.

t CI siamo ingannati.

At what did your uncle rejoice ? ^
What was your nnde delighted
with? J

For the.

Per che cosa s* d rallegrato il di Lei
zio?

j SiMo. Pd (contraction of per if),
c Px.va. Pei (contraction o^per t*).

210

FOftTY'FOUETH LESSON.

t S' d rallegnilo pd cataOo che EDa

gli ha mandato.
t Per che coaa ai aono raUagratl I dl

Lei fandnlU 1

t Si aon ralleffrati pel bel veatiti che
ho&tti&rloro.

He rcjoieed at (waadelightad with) the

horae which you have aent him.
At what did your children rejoice?

(What were your children delighted

with?)
They rejoiced at (they were delighted

with) the fine dothea which I had

made for them.

The rapidity of prononncing haa led to a contraction of the definite artick
with certain prepoeiUona which precede it ; thua prf ia uaed inatead of |Mr tl, ^
inateadofpert,&c.

According to thia contraction we eay and write :

Singular. Plural,

Del, ot the, for diU.

Dei or d4\

for-

diu

AAtothe, — aiL

Ai or a\

—

ai.

DoZ, from the, — daiL

Dei or da\

—

dau

iVe/,inthe, - mO.

Ndorn^,

—

int.

Coi, with the, — eoniL

Coi or «•,

—

emi.

Pe/, for the, — per«.

P«orp«*,

—

peri.

5W, upon the, — «u 0.

Sui or nc*,

—

9UL

Singular,

Plural,

Ddto^otthe, for dilo.

DegU, for

digU,

Alio, to the, ^ alo.

Agli, -

agU,

Ail/o, from the, ~ dalo.

Dagti,--

daglL

A»,hithe, — inlo.

NegH,--

ingU.

Odb, with the, — eonio.

CogU,"

canglL

P«ao,forthe, — jierto.

Pegli,-

JHtgH,

SuOo, upon the, — 9uh,

SugU,^

^gU,

To hurt somebody.
The evily the pain^ the harm.

Have you hurt that man ?

I have hurt that man.
Why did you hurt that man?

t have not Hurt him.
Doea that hurt you ?
Tliat.hurta me.

SApportar male ad una.
Far del male ad uno.

n male J il danno.
r Ha Ella apportato danno acoetni?
)Ha Ellafatto male a qnaati? o a
( queat' uomo ?
( Ho apportato danno a coatoL
( Ho fatto male a ooatni.

Perchd ha apportato danno a queat*
uomo?
rNon gli ho apportato danno at
} cuno.

C Non gli ho fiitto alcun male.
(CidLefamale?
( Cid Le apporta danno ?
i Cid m* apporta danno.
{ Cid mi fa mala.

2b da good to any body,
HaTo I erer done you any harm t

On the contrary,

So, on the contrary, you have done me

good.
I have neyer done harm to any one.

FORTT-FOUBTH LBSflON. 211

Far bene ad uno.
he bo giammai apportato dannol

AI contrario.

No, al contrario, Ella mi ha fiaitto del

bene,
Non bo giammai apporrato donno a

nessuno.

Havel hurt you 1
Ton have not hurt me.

That does me good.

Le ho fatco male ? o Vi ho io &tto

male?
Ella non mi ha fatto male.

I Gidmifabene.

To do loith, to dispose of.

What does the tailor make with the

cloth?
He makes coats with It.
What does the painter do with his

bmsbl
He makes a picture with it.
What does he wish to make of this

woodi
He does not wish to make any thing of

it.

Far di.
Che fa il sarto del paimo 1

Ne fa degU abiti.

Che & 11 pittore col suo pennell«

Fa un quadro.
Chevuolfardi questo legoo 'I

Nou Yuol fame niente.

He is flattered, but he is not beloved.

That (conjunction).
I am told that he is arrived.

A knifis was given to him to cut his
biead^ and he cut his finger.

To flatter some one.
ToflatUr one's self.

He flatters himself that he knows
French

Nothing hut.
He bsji nothing but enemies.

( t Lo adulano, ma non 1' amano.
I i adulate, ma non d amato.

Che.

Hi si dice (mi dicono) ch| d arrl-

vato.
Gli hanno dato (gU d state date) un

coltello per tagliare il suo pane e

sidtagliatoildito.

Adulare qwdcuno.
Adukarsi, lusingarsi di.
t Si luainga di sapere il franceae.

JVbfi — che,
Non ha che neinid.

ttl3

FOnr-FOUETtt LSS80N.

To become.

He hts turaed a soldier.
Have you turned a merchant 1
I hare turned (beeome) a lawyer.

What haa become of your brother 1

What haa become of him 1

I do not know what haa become of

To en&stf to enrol.
He haa enUated.

For (meaning because).
I cannot pay yon, for I have no money.

He cannot glye you any bread, for he
haa none.

To beUeve some one.

Do you beliere that man 1

I do not beUere him.

I beUera what that man aaye.

To beUeve in God.
I beliere in God.

To utter a falsehood, to Ke.

Hie atory-teUer, the liar.
I do not beliere that man, for I know
him to be a atory-teUer.

( Diventare — diventato.

I Divenire * — dhenuto.

t 8* d fatto aoldato.

^ E divenUta mercantel

t Son dlTentato avrocato.

{t Che n' d atato del di bet fr»
tellot
t Che coea i atato del di Lei fra-
tellol
t Chene^atatol

t Non 80 che sia dlvenmo («ii^
Junctae, of which hereafter).

SIngaggiarsi.
Farsi soldaio, arruolarsL

< Si d &tto aoldato.

ls*J ingaggiato (si i armolato).

Perchiy poichi.

Non poaeo pagaria perclid non ho

danaro.
Non pud darle pane poichd non Da

i Credere quakuno.
t Credere a qualeuno.
t Credeacoatull
t Non g^ credo,
t Credo a quest'. uomo dd che

Credere in Dio.
Credo in Dio.

MenHre * — mentito.

n bugiardo, il mentitore.
Non credo a queati perchd ao cha ^
un bugiardo.

EXERCISES.
188.

Why has that child been praised t — ^It has been prabed because
k has studied well. — ^Hast thou ever been praised ? — ^I have often

FORTT'POtmTH LBSfiON. 318

been praised. — Why ha3 that other child been punished ?— It has
been punished because it has been naughty and idle.— Has this
child been rewarded*^ — ^It has been rewarded because it has
studied well. — ^What'lnust one do (che i hisogno fare) in order not
to be despised ? — One must be studious and good. — What has
become of your friend 1 — ^He has become a lawyer. — ^What has
become of your cousin ?-rHe has enlisted.-^Has your neighbour
enlisted ?— He has not enlisted.— What has become of him ?— He
ha9 turned a merchant. — ^What has become of his children ? — ^His
children have become men.— -What has become of your son?—
He has become a great man. — Has he become learned?— He has
become leamed.-^What has become of my book ? — I do not know
what has become of it. — Have you torn it 1 — ^I have not torn it.
— What has become of our friend's son ? — I do not know what
has (che sia, subj.) become of him. — ^What have you done with
your money? — ^I have bought a book with it (can queUo). — ^What
has the joiner done with Jiis wood ? — ^He has made a bench of it.
-w-What has the tailor done with the cloth which you gave him ?
— ^He has made clothes of it for your children and mine. — ^Has
that man hurt you ? — ^No, Sir, he has not hurt me.— What must
one do (ch' 8 d* uopofare) in order to (per ) be loved ? — One must
do good to those that have done us harm. — ^Have we ever done
you harm ? — ^No ; you have, on the contrary, done us good. — ^Do
you do liarm to any one ? — ^I do no one any harm. — ^Why have
you hurt these children ? — ^I have not hurt them. — Have Ihurt
you ? — You have not hurt me, but your children have (me ne
hannofatto). — ^What have they done to you ? — ^They have beaten
me.— Is it (e) your brother who has hurt my son ?— No, Sir, it is*
not (non i) my brother, for he has never hurt any one.

139.
Have you drunk that wine ? — ^I have drunk it.— How did you
like it ?— I liked it very well. — ^Has it done you good ?— It has
done me good. — Have you hurt yourself? — ^I have not hurt my-
self.—Who has hurt Himself? — My brother has hurt himself, for
he has cut his finger. — ^Is he still ill (snalato) ?— He is better (star
megUo), — ^I rejoice to hear (me raUegra V vniendere) that he is no
longer ill, for I love him. — Why does your cousin pull out his

214 FOETT'FOUETH LB880N.

hair ? — ^Because he cannot pay what he owes.— Have you cut
your hair? — ^I have not cut it (myself), hut I have had it cut
{me U son fatU tagUare), — What has this child done ? — ^He has
cut his foot. — ^Why was a knife given to him ? — ^A knife was
given him to {fer) cut his nails, and he has cut his finger and his
foot. — Do you go to bed early ? — ^I go to bed late, for I cannot
sleep when I go to bed early. — ^At what o'clock did you go to bed
yesterday ? — ^Yesterday I went to bed at a quarter past eleven.
V— At what o'clock do your children go to bed ? — ^They go to bed
at sunset. — Do they rise early ? — ^They rise at sunrise. — ^At what
o'clock did you rise to-day I — ^To-day I rose late, because I went
to bed late yesterday evening (ten sera), — Does your son rise
late ? — He rises early, for he never goes to bed late. — ^What does
he do when he gets up ? — ^He studies, and then he breakfasts.—
Does he go out before he breakfasts ? — ^No, Sir, he studies and
breakfasts before he goes out. — ^What does he do after breakfast,
ing ? — ^As soon as he has breakfasted he comes to me, and we
take a ride. — ^Didst thou rise this morning as early as 1 1 — ^I rose
earlier than you, for I rose before sunrise.

140.
Do you often go a walking ? — ^I go a walking when I have
nothing to do at home. — ^Do you wish to take a walk ? — ^I can-
not take a walk, for I have too much to do. — Has your brother
taken a ride ? — He has taken an airing in a carriage.-— Do your
children often go a walking ? — ^They go a walking every mom*
ing after breakfast {dopo la colaxioney — Do you take a walk after
dinner (dopo U pranzo) 1 — ^After dinner X drink tea, and then I
take a walk. — ^Do you often take your children a walking ? — ^I
take them a walking every morning and every evening. — Can
you go (venire) with me? — ^I cannot go (venire) with you, for I
am to take my little brother a walking. — Where do you walk ? —
We walk in our uncle's garden. — ^Did your father rejoice to see
you ? — He did rejoice to see me. — ^What did you rejoice at ? — ^I
rejoiced at seeing my good friends. — What was your uncle
delighted with? — He was delighted with the horse which you
have sent him. — ^What were your children delighted with ? —
They were delighted with the fine clothes which I had made for

FORTY-FIFTH I«SSSON. 315

them {che lor hofaUifare). — Why does this man^oice so much
{tanio) 1 — ^Because he flatters himself he has good friends. — ^Is he
not right in rejoicing {di raUegrarsi) ? — He is wrong, for he has
nothing but enemies. — ^Is he not loved ? — He is flattered, but he
is not loved. — ^Do you flatter yourself that you know Italian ? — ^I
flatter myself that I know it, for I can speak, read, and write it.
— Has the physician done any harm to your son ? — He has cut
his finger (gU ha tagUato U dilo), but he has not done him any
harm ; so (e) you are mistaken, if you believe that he has {che
gU abbia) done him any harm. — Why do you listen to that man ?
— I listen to him, but I do not believe him ; for I know that he is
a story-teller (un hugiardo). — ^How do you know that he is {che
sia, subj.) a story-teller? — He does not believe in God ; and all
those {e tuiU queUi) who do not believe in God are story-tellers.
— ^Are we story-tellers ? — You are no story-tellers, for you believe
in God (m Dio) our Lord {nosiro Signore).

PORTYPIFTH LESSON.
Lezione quaraniesima quinta.

OF IMPERSONAL VERBS.

We have already seen (Lessons XLL and XLIL) some expressions belonglBg
to the impersonal verbs. These verbs, having no determinate sabject, are only
eom'ngated in the third person singular.

To rain,— r; nins.

It has rained.
To snow,— it snows.

It has snowed.
To hail,-it hails.

It has haUed.

Piovere ♦ 2,— piove.

te piovnto {or ha piovuto).

Nevicare 1, — ^nevica.

i nevicato {or ha nevicato).

Grandinare 1 (tempestare), — gran-
dina (tempests).

fe gnndinato (tempestato), or ha
tempestato^

> From these examples it may be seen, that in Italian impersonal tprbs
ulatinic to the weather may take either esMere or avert In their compound tenses

216

PORTY-FIFTH LESSOR.

Th« thne sabatantWes belonging to these verbs tie feminine, and win be
teen when we come to such nouns ; but as in Italian any infinitive may be
used as a masculine noun, we may aay also : U picvere^ the rain i U nevieare,
the anow ; U grandinarc^ the hail.

To lighten.
Does it lighten ?
It lightens.

The lightning.

The parasol.
It rains very hard.
It lightens much.
Does it snow 7
It snows much.
It hails much.
The sun does not shine.
The sun is in my eyes.
To thunder,— it thunders.
It has thundered.

To shine, to glitter,— shona.

Toshta.

Shut the door.
Have you done 1

Lampeggiare 1.

Lampeggia?

Lampeggla.

U lampo, il baleno.

II parasole, V ombrelUno.

Piove dirottamente dlluvia.

Lampeggia molto.

Nevica?

Nevica molto.

Grandlno molto.
t Non c* d sole,
t II sole mi da agU occhi.

Tuonare 1,— tuona.

b tuonato or ha tuonato.
c Riverberare I,— riverberato.
< Risplendere Z, risplenduto.

Chiudere *, past part, ehiuso.
Chittdete la porta.

I t Ha EUa finito 1 avete foi finitol

Is the walking good t
In that country.
The country.
He has made many friends in that
country.

To walk, to travel.

t Si cammina bene 1
In questo paese.
Ilpaese.
Si d fatto molti amici in questo

paese.
Camminare 1, passeggiare 1.

Of which, ofwhoniy whose.

I see the man of whom you speak.

I have bought the horse of which you

spoke to me.
I see the man whose brother has killed
- my dog.

I see the man whose dog you have

killed.
Do you see the child whose father set

out yesterday?
I see It.

iDi cui (onde).
Del quale (plur. dei quaU),
Vedo 1* uomo di cui (del quale) EUa

parla.
Ho comprato il cavalio di cui (del

quale) Ella mi ha parlato.
Veggo (vedo) 1' uomo U di cui
fratello ha ammazzato U mio
cane.
Veggt) V uomo di cui Ella ha am-
mazzato U cane.
\ Vede Ella il fancluUo U di cui padre
i partito ieri 9
Lo vedo.

PORTT-FIFTH LESSON.

217

Whom have you seen 7

I have seen the merchant «hose ware-
house you have taken.

I have spoken to the man whose ware-
house has been burnt.

GhihaElIavistol

Ho yisto il mercante di cui Ella ha

preso U magazzino.
t Ho parlato all' uomo iZ dl cul map

gazzino d state brucciato.

Thai of which.

Thai, or the one of tohich.
Those, or the ones of which.

I have that of which I have need.
I have what I want.
He has what he wants.

SCid di che, quanto.
Quello di che.
QueUo di cui.
Quelli di cui.

{ Ho quanto ml abblsogna.
I Ho eiddi che ho bisogno.
Ho cid che mi d d* uopo.
5 Egli hiciddieht ha bisogno.
( Egli ha cid che gU d d* uopo.

Have you the book of which you are in

needl
I have OuU of uhieh I am in need.

Ha Ella U libro di eui ha bisogno 1
Ho qudlo di ad ho bisogno.

Has the man the nails qf wMdi he is I L* uomo ha 1 chiodi dt cui egli ha

in need 1 bisogno?

He has thoae of uhieh he is in need. | Ha quelH di eui ha bisogno.

To need, to want. )

To have need qf. )

To he in want qf something.

I am in want qf thit book.
Did you find the book which you
want?

Aver bisogno di.

Aver bisogno di qwUche eosa.

Ho bisogno di questo libro.
Ha Ella trovato 11 libro di eui hm
bisogno 9

Which men do you see 1

I see those qfuhom you have spoken

to me.
Do you see the pupils of viham I have

spoken to you 7
I see them.

Quail uomini vede Ella 7 or vedete
vol 7

Vedo quelll di eui Ella mi ha par-
lato.

Vede Ella gli scoboi di ait Le ho
parlato?

Li vedo.

10

819

FO&TY-FirrR LESSON.

To whom,
I we the children to uham jou have

given aome petty-patties.
Tb ^Bhith men do yon speak?
I apeak to those -to whom yon haye

applied.

To apply to.

To mui toith tome one,

I have met with the men to whom you
have applied.

Of which men do you speak 1
I fl|>eak of those whose children have
been studioos and obedient.

Obedient, disobedient

So thai,

I have lost my money, so that I cannot
pay yon.

m.

I am Ul, so that I cannot fo ouu

Mate, and Ftim,

Sing, and Phtr, Mam, Ptur,

A chi. Ai quali,

Veggo i fimdulli » quOli EUa ha dato

del pasticcini.
A quaH uomini parla EUal
Parlo a queUi ai quali si d indixixcata

Lei.

ilndirixzarsi a — indirixxato a.
Dirigersi * a — diretio a.
ilncontrare tmo.
RineorUrare tmo.
Ho incontratc gli uomini ai ^uak
Ella si d diretta (vi siete diretto).

Dl quail uomini parla Ella?

Parlo di queUi i di cui fiuiciuUi
stati studiosi ed obbedienti.
( Obbediente, disobbediente.
i Ubbidiente, disubbidiente.

( In guUa cke-H^osicche.
} Di modo che^ per cui.
( Di maniera che.
Ho perduto il mio danaro, in gnlsa
che non posso pagarla.

Malato,ammalato.
Sono malato^ ingttlaa che non poaio
usdre.

EXERCISES.

141.

Have you at last learnt Italian ?•:— I was ill, so that I could not
learn ft. — ^Has your brother learnt it ? — He has not learnt it, be-
cause he has Bot yet been able to find a good master. — ^Do you go
to the ball this evening ? — ^I have sore feet, so that I cannot go to
it. — Did you understand that German ? — ^I do not know German,
80 that {per cui) I could not understand him. — Have you bought

rOBTT. FIFTH LESSON. Ulh

the AoTse of which you spoke to mc ? — I have no money, so that
(it modo che) I could not buy it. — Have you seen the man from
whom I received a present ? — ^I have not seen him. — Have you
seen the fine gun of which I spoke to you ? — ^I have seen it. — ^Haa
your uncle seen the books of which you spoke to him 1 — He has
seen them. — ^Hast thou seen the man whose children have been
punished ? — ^I have not seen him. — ^To whom have you been
speaking at the theatre ? — I have been speaking to the man whose
brother {il di cvifrateHo) has killed my fine dog. — Have you seen
the little boy whose father has become a lawyer ? — ^I have seen
him. — ^Whom have you seen at the ball % — ^I have 9b&a there the
men whose horses, and those whose coach you have bought {e
queOi dei qmU hi compraio la carro2»a).-t-Whom do you see
now ? — ^I see the man whose servant has broken my looking-
glass. — ^Have you heard the man whose friend has lent me
money % — ^I have not heard him.— Whom have you heard ?— I
have heard the French captain, whose son is my friend. — HasI
thou brushed Ihe coat of which I spake to thee ? — ^I have not }ret
brushed it. — Have you received the money which you were
wanting % — I have received it. — ^Have I the sugar of which I have
need ? — ^You have it. — Has your brother the books which he is
wanting I — ^He has them. — ^Have you spoken to the merchants
whose warehouse we have taken ?-/-We have spoken to them.—
Have you spoken to the physician whose son has studied Grer-
maa? — I have spoken to him. — ^Hast thou seen the poor men
whose warehouses have been burnt ? — ^I have seea them.— ^Have
you read the books which we have lent you ? — ^We have read
them.-— What do you say of them (ne) ? — ^We say that they are
very fine.— Have your children what they want {che hro (Mi*
90gna) ? — ^They have what they want.

142. •

Of which man do you speak ? — ^I speak of the one {digneOo)
whose brother has turned soldier. — Of which children have you
spoken ? — I have spoken of those whose parents are learned. —
Which book have you read ? — ^I have read that of which I spoke
to you yesterday. — ^Which book has your cousin ? — ^He has that

*JM POETY-SIXTH LBSSOll.

of which Jie is in need. — Which fishes has he eaten? — ^He has
eaten those which you do not like. — Of which books are you in
want ? — ^I am in want of those of which you have spoken to me.
— Aro you not in want of those which I am reading ? — ^I am
not in want of them. — Do you see the children to whom I
have given petty-patties ? — ^I do not see those to whom you
have given petty-patties, but those whom you have punished.
—To whom have you given some money ? — ^I have given some
to those who have been skilful .-ATo which children must one
give (d mestieri dare) books ? — One must give some to those who
are good and obedient. — To whom do you give to eat and to
drink ? — ^To those that are hungry and thirsty. — ^Do you give any
thing to the children who are idle ? — ^I give them nothing. — Did
it snow yesterday ? — ^It did snow, hail, and lighten.^ — ^Did it rain ?
— It did rain. — ^Did you go out ? — ^I never go out, when it is bad
weather. — Have the captains at last listened to the man ? — ^They
have refused to listen to him ; all thoso to whom he applied («t e
mdirizxaio) have refused to hear him. — ^With whom have you met
this morning {quuta mane) 1 — I have met with the man by whom
I am esteemed. — ^Have you given petty-patties to your pupils I—
They have not studied weU, so that I have given them nothing.

FORTY-SIXTH LESSON.
Lezione quarantesima sesta^

OF THE FUTURE.
Rvu.— The first or simple future is formed, in all Italian ver1i% fiNNa tlM
vifinltive^ by ohaoaing for the second and third conjugations f into ^-

SurovLAB. Plural.

1 ''2 3 .1 2 3

ro^ roij ro, remo, rete, ranno.
And for the first are into ;—

erd, eraif era. eremOf jereU^ eranno.

•ORTV-aUTH tBSSIMI.

'231

Inf. Amare 1.
Fuhirt, \ Amcri, amcra^ ain<ra.

( Anieremo, wmtrtU^ omeronm).'

ParUre 1.
jParleris p<ri<rai; parl«r4^

Ricevere 2.

r Riceverd, riceveros, riceverd,

' n < Ricevere- ricevere^ riceveron-

^ mo, no. .

Credere 2.

j Credcrd, crederas creder^

c Crederemo, credere^ crederonno*

Punire 3.

jPunir^, punirat, piinfrd.

C Pimlr«iw>, punire/*. poniniMitf.

Servlre 3.

k Scrviri, senrirot, aerrird.

" C Servircmo, servire/e^ wninmna:

06f. ^. It will be remarlced, ttiat in all Italian yerba the first and tlUrd
peraons singular of the futore have the grave accent (').

To Jove,
feliall or will love, de.

ToBp«ftk.
I shall or will speak, Ac.

To receive.
1 shall or will receive, Ac.

To believe.
I shall orwii) believe, <frc.

To punish.
I shall or wlU punish, <&c.

To serve.
I shall or will serve.

SXOXPTIOIIS.

To have. I shall or will have, dc.
To be. I shall or will be, Ac.

iTifinitwe, JPhtture, ,

Avere* j ^^'^» *^^» •^>*-

c Avremo, avrete, avranna

Essere* { ^"^ *"^ "^'^

i Saiemo^ sarste, saranno.

Oba, B. The following eighteen verbs, besides the auxiliaries aurt * and
cMere *, form all the exceptions to our rule on the formation of the future^ We
need not give all the persons, as the first person singular of the ezcepti(nis
being once known, all the others are, being, as may be seen from the tbove,
the sanle in all verbs of tlie Italian language.

Togo.
To fall.
To gather.
To give.
To complain.

"foowe.

I shall or will go.
I shal^ or will fall.
I shall or will gather.
I shall or will give.
I shall or will com-

. plain.
1 shall or will owe.

Jnfniiioe.
Andare* 1.
Cadcro • 2.
CogUere • 2.
Dare* 1.
Dolere * 2.

Andrd {$lto rtg%dar)»

Cadrd.

Corrd.

DarO.

Dorrd.

Dovere ♦ 2. Dovn).

222

H>RTr-SIXTH LESSON.

To do.

I shall or will do.

Fare* I.

ParA.

To die.

I ahaU or will die.

Morire* 3.

Morrd or moiiid.

To appoftr.

I shall or will ^>pear {

Parena • 2.

Porrd.

To put.

lAhaUorwiUput. >

Porre • 2.

Porrb (regular)

I'o be able.

lahaUorwiUbeaUe.

Potere* 2.

Potrd.

To reft

I shaU or will reat.

Rimanere •

2. Rimarrd.

To know.

Iah«Uorwillknow.

Sapera* 2.

Saprd.

To hold.

1 shall or wiU hold.

Tencrc* 2.

Terrd.

To be worth.

I shtn or will be
worth.

Valere • 2.

Varrd.

Tofl0i.

I ahall or will see. ,

Vodere • 2.

Vedrd.

To come.

I shall or will come.

Venire • 3.

Verrd.

To be wllUng.

I ahall or wiU be
willing.

Volere • 2.

Vorrd.

Shall or will he have money 7

He will have some.

He will not have any.

Shall 70U soon have done writing 1

I ahall soon have done.

He will soon have done hla exercise.

Avr& egli danaro 1

Ne avra.

Non ne avra.
t Quanto prima avr& (avrete) finito d

acrivere 1
t duanto prima avrO finito.

Quanto prtma avri finito 11 auo tema.

iSoofi {ere long).

When ahall you do your ezerciaea 7
I will do them soon (ere long).
My brother will do his exerciaea to-
morrow.

Qtianto prima, fra poco,

Quando fari Ella 1 di Lei temi7

duanto prima U lard.

Mio fratello Cuk 1 suoi temidomanL

Next Monday.
Last Monday.
Next ftionth.
Thia month.
This country.

Lunedi venturo.
Lunedi paaaato.
'*' II mese venturo.
Questo mese.
Questo paese.

When will your oouain go to the

concert 7
He will go next Tuesday.

Shall you go any where 7

We shall go no where.

duando andnl al concerto 11 dl Le3

cugino7
Egli vi andra maftedi venturo.

Non andremo in verun luogo.

V /iU h.- s.rKl me the book7 I Mi mandera egli il llbro7

li. A-il snd il you, if ho haa done ( Glielo manderi, ae T ha finito:
^*' •» »' \iSc V ha finito gllelo mandera.

F0BTY-8IXTH LESSOK

Shall you be at home this evening 7

I shall be there.

Will your father be at home 1

He will be there.

Will your cousins be there 1

They will be there.

V\ ill be send me the books 1
He will send them you.
Will he send some ink to my counting-
house?
He will send some thither.

( Sari Ella in casa quests serai
( duesta sera sari KUa in casal

Vi sard.

Sark in casa U di 1:^^ padre?

Visara.

1 di Lei cugini vl sacanno 1

Vi saranno.

Mi mandeta egii i Ubri 1

Glieli mandera.

Blander^ dell' Inchiostro all mic

banco (studio) 1
Ce ne manderk.

Shall you be able to pay your shoe-
maker 1

I have lost my money, so that I shall
not be able to pay him.

My friend has lost his pocket-book, so
that he will not be able to pay for
his boots.

Potra pagare il di Lei calzolaii T (o

potrete voi pagare il vostro).
Ho perduto il danaro, di modo che

non potrd pagarlo.
II mio amico ha perduto il pqrta-

foglio, in guisa che non potrk

pagare i suoi stivalL

Will yon hold any thing ?

I shall hold your umbrella.

Will your friend come to my concert 7

He will come.

Shall you come 7

T shall come.

Will it be necessary to go to the
market 7

It will be necessary to go thither to-
morrow morning.

It will not be necessary to go' thither.
Shall you see my fiither to-day 7

We shall see him.

Toforesee^-^oreseen.
To restore — restored.

Terra Ella una cosa7 (o qualche

cosa)7
Terrd il di Lei ombrello.
II di Lei amko retr\ al mio con->

certo?
VerrA.

Verri PUa 7 Verrcte voi 7
Verrd.
^ Sarli d' uopo andar al mercato 7
I Bisognerk andare al mercato 7
SarAd* uopo andard domanl nella

mattina (domani mattlna) do-

mattina.
Non sari d* uopo andard,
Vedranno oggi le vostre slgnorie mi«

padre 7
Vedrete vol mio padre oggi.

Prevedere*2 \Pr«>«^'
( previslo*

Rendere * — reso.

834 rORTr-SIXTU LB8S0N.

EXERCISES.

143.

Shall you have any books ? — ^I shall have 8oroe.«— Who will
give you any 1 — My uncle will give me some. — ^When will youi
cousin have money ? — He will have some next month. — How
much money shall you have? — ^I shall have thirty-five sequins.
— Who will have good friends ? — ^The English will have some.
— Will your father be at home this-evening ? — He -vill be at
home (ci sard), — Will you be there ? — I shall also be there {anch'
io). — Will your uncle go out to-day ? — ^He will go out, if it is
fine weather. — Shall you go out ? — I shall go out, if it does not
rain. — Will you love!* my son ? — I shall love him, if he is good. —
Will you pay your shoemaker?— I shall pay him, if I receive
my money .-^Will you love my children? — If they are good and
assiduous, I shall love them ; but if they are idle and naughty, I
shall despise and punish them. — ^Am I right in speaking (di par-
lare) thus ? — ^You are not wrong. — Is your friend still writing ?
-^He is still writing. — Have you not done speaking ? — I shall
soon have done. — Have your friends done reading ? — ^They will
soon have done.— -Has the tailor made my coat ? — He has not
made it yet ; but he will soon make it. — When will he make it ?
— When he shall have time. — ^When will you do your exercises ?
— I shall do them when I shall have time. — ^When will your
brother do his ? — He will do them next Saturday. — Wilt thou
come to me ?— ^I shall come. — When wilt thou come ? — I shall
come next Friday. — ^When have you seen my uncle ? — I saw
him last Sunday. — Will , your cousins go to the ball next Tues-
day ? — They will go. — ^Will you come to my concert i — ^I shall
come, if I am not ill.

144.
When will you send me the money which you owe me ? — ^I
shall send it you soon. — ^Will your brothers send me the books
which I have lent them ? — ^They will send them you. — When
will they send them to me ? — They will send them to you next
month. — ^Wfll you- be able to pay me what you owe me ? — I shall
not be able to pay it you, for I have lost all my money. — Will

FCJRTY-SKVBNTH LESSON.

226

.he American be able to pay for his boots ? — He has lust his
pocket-book, so th%t he will not be able to pay for them. — Will it
be necessary (bist^erd) to send for the physician ? — Nobody is
ill, so that {per cut) it will not be necessary to send for him.—
J\Vill it be necessary to go to the market tg-morrow ? — ^It will be
necessary to go thither, for we want (c' ^ d* uopo) some beef,
some bread, and some wine. — Shall yon sed your father to-day ?
— ^I shall see him. — Where will he be ? — He will be at his
counting-house. — Will you go to the ball to-night (questa sera)!
— ^I shall not go, for I am too ill to go to it. — Will your friend go ?
— He will go, if you go. — Where will your neighbours go ?—
They will go no where ; they will remain at home, for they have
a good deal to do.

PORTY-SEVENTH LESSON.
Leziane quarantesima aettima.

To belong.

Do you belong 1
I do belong.'
Does that hone belong to your

brother 1
It belongs to him.

To whom do theae gloyea belong 1

They belong to the captiins.

Do theee horses belong to the cap-

tains 1
Tbey belong to them.

Appartenere^ (is conjugated
like its primitive ienere *,
Lesson XL.)

Appartiene Ellal

Appartengo.

Questo cavallo appartiene al di Let
fratellol (oalvostro.)

Gil appartiene.
( A chi appartengono queati guanti 1
( Di chi son questi guanti 1
{ Appartengono ai capitani. »
c Sono dei capitani.

QuesU cavalU appartepgono ai c*
pitani 1

AppartengMio lor^

10*

396

FOETT-SBYBNTH LESSON.

TosuU.

DoM that cloth foit your brother 1
It taits him.

Do tbflae boots foit your brothMni 1
Thay siiit them.

Piacere * {esser * di guHo).

JKaee questo panno al di Lei frt-
I teUol

1 duesto panno i di guato del di Lei
frateUol

GU place (d di auo guato).
f Placdono queaU ativali ai di Lei
j frateUi?

^ Queati ativali aono di gaato del di
[ LeifraieUil

Piacdon loro (aono di lor gnato).

To nut.

Doea it aoit you to do that 1

It aoita Die to do it.

Doea it auit your covaiii to come with

nal
It doeaDot auit him to go ouL
It doea not auit me to go to him, for I

cannot pay him what I owe him.

To succeed.

Do youmicceed in leaning Italian 7

I anoceed in it.

I do aucceed in learning it

To succeed*
i aaeeeed, thou aucceedeat, he auc-

iVe, yon, they aucceed.

Do theae men aucceed in •dHng their

horaeal
Tney do incceed therein.
Do you aucceed in doing that 1
I anccaed In it.

Convetdre^ addirn*^ euer ,

convenewh or dicefx>U.
Le place di fardel
Mi place di&rlo.
Place al di Lei cuglno di Tenire coo

noil
Non gtt place d' uadre.
Non mi d conveneToIe d' andare da

lui, polchd non poaao pagargU dd

che gli debbo.

Riuscire*, riuedio (conju-
gated like uedre ♦).

Pervenire*, pervemOo (oon^
jugated like its primitiTe
venire ♦).

Rieace EUa ad Imparar 1' ItaUano?

Vlrieaco.

Penrengo ad lny)ararlo.

Riusdre ♦ — ruuciio.
Rieaoo, lieaei, lieaoe.

Riuadamo, nuadta, rieaoono.
Rleacono eoteati uomini a wmdiftj

lorocaTaDll
VI rleacono.

Rieace EUa a for ddl oqaeMo?
Vi rieaoo.

FOKTT-SEVBNTH LBSSOK.

221

Tofarget.

1 forgot to do it.

To clean.

The inkatand.

^ Immediately, directly.

This instant, instantly.

Presently.
I am going to do it.
I will do it immediately.
I am going to work.

Is there?
Are there?

There is not.

There are not.

Will there bel

There will be.
Was there or has there been 1
Were there or have there been 1

There has been.

There have been.

Is there any wine?

There is some.

There is not any.

Are there any men?

There are some.

There are not any.

rhere are men who will not study.

Is there any one 1

There is no one.

Are there to bo many people at tlie

belli
Tliere are to be a great many people

tliere.

DimerUicare 1 (takes di be.

fore the infinitive).

Ho dimenticato di farlo (or ho di-
menticato faxlo).

( PuUre 9—puliio.
\ RipuUre 3 — ripuHio.
( Nettare l^nettaio.
Ilcalamaio.

Subito.

Immantinentej all' istante.

A moment!, fra poco.

Lo iaccio subito. Sto per &ilo.

Lo Iaccio immantinente subito.

Lavorerd fra poco.

C e? T e? Hawi?

Ci sonol Visono? Sonoi i

Non c* d or non v* d.

Non ci sono or vi sono.

Vi sar& or ci sail

Ci sari or vi sahll

C d stato oryr'i stato 1

Ci sono vtati or vi sono stati 1

C d stato or i* ^. stato.

Ci sono stati or vi sono statL

C'd del vino 1

Ce n' d.

Non ce n' d.

Sonvi degli nominil

Ye pe sono.

Non ve ne sono.

Vi sono degli uomini che non hanno
voglia di studiare {or che non vo^
liono studiare).

V d qualcuno 1

Non v* d nessuno,

Ci deve essere mrlta^
festa da hallo 1

Ce ne deve essere molta.

MoUa here agrels with gtnis, people, which is feminine

238

FORTY-SeVEKTH LRSSOK.

On credit.

To lell on credit.
The credit.
Ready money.

To buy for cash.

To lell for cash

To pay down.

Will you buy for cash?
Does it. suit you to sell to me on
credit?

ToJU.

Does that coat fir mel

It fits you.

That hat does not fit. you brother.

ft does not fit hlra.
Do these boou fit yon?
They fit me.
That fits yon Y6ry weU*

A credenxa^ a crediio,

Vendere a aredenia (a credito).

Ilcredito.

Danaro In contante (danaro con*
tante).

Comprare per contanti (comprai
contante).

Vendere per contanti (vender con
tante).

Pagare in contanti (pagar con-
tante).

Vuole EUa oompiare per contanti?

Le convieno vendermi a credenza?

Star * bene.

Mi sta bene questo abito ?

Le sta bene.

Cotesto cappello non isti bene al dl

Lei fratello.
Non gli sta bene.
Le stanno bene cotesti stlTtli?
Mi stannQ bene.
Cid (quests cosa) Le sta beniadm*

(a marayiglia).

To keep.

Yon had better.
I had better.
He had better.
Instead of keeping your horse you had

better sell it.
Instead of seUlng his hat he had better
keep it

Tenere ♦, ritenere ♦, — Unnio.

t Ella iari megUo (di).

t Fard megUo (di).

t EgU fari megUo (di).

t In yece di tenere il di Lei caTtOo

fari meglio di venderlo.
t In yece di vendere il suo ^

fari meglio di teneriOr

Will you keep the horse ?

X shall keep it.

Yon mnst not keep my money.

TerriElUileaYaHo?
Lo terrO.

Non d d' uopo ritenere il mio danaro
I Non dovete tenerri il mlo danaro

To please^ to e pleased.
To please some one.

Does that book please you ?

It pleases me much.

I will do what you please.

Piacere * (Lesson XLI.).
Piacere * a qualcuno,

Le place questo Ubro ?
Mi place molto.
t FaWt cid che yorri, o che vorrete.

FOKTY-SEVENTH LESSON.

229

You artf pleased to eay so.

What Is your pleasure?
What do you want 1
What do yoa say 7

t Ci5 Le place di dire (a familiar ex-
pression).

Che desidera, Signore?
Che vnol^ Signorel
Che dice?

To please one's se^.

How do you please yourself herel
I please myself yery well here.

( Piacersi * — fiadiUoai,

I Trovarsi* — irovaiasi.

Come Ti godete qui
Mi ci godo benissimo.

Whose book is this 7

It is his.

Whose boots are these 7

They are ours.

It is they who have seen him.

It is your friends who are *n the

right.
It is we who have done it.
It is you who say so.

It is of yott that I spealL

DictiidqucstoUbrol

E il BUO.

Di chi sono quest! stivalil
Sono i nostri.

Sono essi che I' hanno veduto.
Sono i di Lei amid che hanno

raglone.
Siamo noi che V abbiamo fiitto.
£ Lei che lo dice. Siete voi che to
^ dite. .
E di Lei che parlo. Si d di vol ch«

parlo.

EXERCISES.

145.
To whom does that horse belong ? — ^It belongs to the English
captain whose son has written a note to you. — ^Does this money
belong to you ? — ^It belongs to me. — ^From whom have you re-
ceived it ? — I have received it from the men whose children you
have seen. — Whose horses are those? — Tljey are ours. — ^Have,
you told your brother that I am waiting for him here ? — ^I have
forgotten to tell him so (dir^lielo). — Is it your father or mine who
is gone to Berlin ? — It is mine. — ^Is it your baker, or that of our
friend, who has sold you bread on credit ? — ^It is ours. — ^Is that
your son? — He is not mine; he is my friend's. — Where is
yours ? — He is at Paris. — Have you brought me the book which
you promised me ?r— I have forgotten it. — Has your uncle brought
you the pocket-books which he promised you ?— 4Ie has forgotten
to bring them to me. — ^Have you already written to your friend 7

280 F0RTY*8BVB:fTH LBS80H.

^-1 have not yet {per aneo) had time to write to him. — ^Have you
forgotten to write to your relative? — ^I have not forgotten to
write to him. — Does this cloth suit you? — It does not suit me;
have you no other ? — ^I have some other ; but it is dearer than
this. — Will you show it me? — ^I will show it you. — ^Do these
boots suit your uncle ? — ^They do not suit him, because they are
too dear. — ^Are these the boots of which you have spoken to us 1
— ^They are the same.(i medenmi, or gU ste^d). — Whose books
are these ? — ^They belong to the gentleman whom you have seen
this morning in my warehouse. — ^Does it suit you to come with
us ?— It does not suit me. — Does it suit you to go to the market I
— ^It does not suit me to go thither. — Did you go on foot to Ger-
many ? — ^It does not suit me to go on foot, so that {per evi) I went
thither in a coach.

146.
What is your pleasure {ehe desidera). Sir ? — ^I am inquiring
after your father. — Is he at home ? — No, Sir, he is gone out. —
What do you say ? — ^I tell you .that he is gone out. — Will you
wait till he comes back ? — I have no time to wait. — ^Does that
merchant sell on credit ? — He does not sell on credit. — ^Does it
suit you to buy for cash ? — ^It does not suit me. — Where did you
buy these pretty knives {coUeliini) 1 — ^I bought them at the mer-
chant's {dal mercanie), whose warehouse you saw yesterday. —
Has he sold them you on credit ? — He has sold them to me for
cash. — ^Do you often buy for cash ? — Not so often as you. — Have
you forgotten any thing here ? — I have forgotten pothing. — ^Does
it suit you to learn this {eid) by heart ? — ^I have not much time
to study, so that {di mode cheyw does not suit me to learn it by
heart. — Has that man tried to speak to your father? — He has
tried to speak to him, but he has not succeeded in it.— 'Have you
succeeded in writing an exercise ? — I have succeeded in it. —
Have those merchants Succeeded in selling their horses ? — ^They
have not succeeded therein. — ^Have you tried to clean my ink-
stand ? — ^I have tried, but I have not succeeded in it. — Do your
children succeed in learning English ? — They do succeed in it.
— ^Is there any 'wine in this cask {in quesio harile) ? — There is
some in it. — ^Is there any vinegar in this glass ? — There is none

FORTT-SEVENTH LESSON. 381

in it.-^s there wine or cider in it ? — There is neither wine nor
cider in it. — ^What is there in it ? — ^There is some vinegar in it,

147.

Are there any men in your warehouse? — ^There are some
there.— Is there any one in the warehouse t — There is no one
there. — Were there many people in the theatre ? — There were
many there. — ^Will there be many people at your ball (aBa di
Lei festa da IntUo)} — There will be many there. — Are there
many children that will not play ? — ^There are many that will not
study, but all will play. — Hast thou cleaned my trunk ? — I have
tried to do it, but I have not succeeded. — ^Do you intend buying
an umbrella ? — ^I intend buying one, if ihq merchant sells it me
on credit. — ^Do you intend to keep mine ? — ^I intend to give it you
back (o restiiuir gUelo), if I buy one. — ^Hsve you returned the
books to my brother ? — ^I have jiot returned them to him yet. —
How long do you intend to keep them ? — I intend to keep them
till next Saturday. — ^How.long do you intend keeping my horse ?
— I intend keeping it till my father returns. — Have you cleaned
my knife ? — I have not had time yet, but I will do it this instant.
— ^Have you made a fire ? — ^Not yet, but I will make one
presently. — Why have you not worked I — ^I have not yet been
able. — ^What had you to do ?— I had to clean your carpet, and to
mend your linen handkerchief. — ^Do you intend to sell your
coat ? — ^I intend keeping it, for I want it.— Instead of keeping it
you had better sell it — ^Do you sell your horses ? — ^I do not sell
them. — ^Instead of keeping them you had better sell them. — ^Does
your friend keep his parasol ?— He keeps it ; but instead of keep- *
ing it he had better sell it, for it is worn out. — ^Does your son
tear his book ? — ^He tears it ; but he is wrong in doing so :
instead of tearing it he had better read it.

•«83

poarr-EiGHTH lbssoh.

FORTY-EIGHTH LESSON,
Lezione quarantesima oitava.

To go avfay.
When Mil yon go away 7

I will go toon.

By and by.
He will go away soon (by and by).
We will go away to-morrow.
Tliey will go away to-morrow.
Thoa wilt go away immediately.

Andarsene * (Less. XLIIL).

Quando se ne andr& EUa 1 (o ve n«

andrete vol 7)
Me ne andid quanto prima.
Frapoco.

Se ne andra fra poco.
Ce ne andremo domanl.
8e ne andranno domanl.
Te ne »ndrai immantinente.

When.

Quando {alwrchiy dUorqiuau
do).

To become.

What will beoome of you if yon lose

yoormoney?
I do not know what will become of

me.
What will become of him 7
What will become of ua7'
What will become of them 7
I do not know what will become of
th«m.

f Esser * mat {dieenUuref di»

venire *, Lesson XLIV.).

t Che sai^ mai di vol ae petdatafl

Toatro7 .
t Non so* che nxk dl me.

t Che8ari^mal(Hlui7
t Cheaar^maidinoi?
t Che oari mai di loro7
t Non 80 coaa ear & dl loro.

T%etum.

My turn.
In my turn.

In hia turn.

In my brotheHa tarn.

Each in his turn.

La voUa.

t LamiaTolta.

t Alia mia yolta (tocca a me or qwttt

a m9).
t Alia sva volta (spetta a lui or tocca a

lui).
• t Alia volta di mio fratello (tocca

(spetta) a mio fratello).
^ CiascuDO alia sua volla.

FORTT-BIGHTH LESSON.

2S3

Wtaen it oomes to your turn.
Our turn will come.

A turn, a tour, a walk.

To take a turn.
To take a walk.

He Is gone to take a walk.
To walk round the garden.

To run — run (past part.).
Do you run 7
I do run.
Shall or will you run 1
I shall or will run.

Behind,

Behind him.
.Behind the castle.'

A blow, a stroke, a clap.

Haye you given that man a Mow 7 .
I haye given him one.
A blow with a stick.

A kick (with the foot).
A blow with the fist.
A stab of a knife.

A shot (or the report of a gun).
A shot of a pistol.

A glance of the eye.
A clap of thunder.

To give a cut with a knife.
To give a man a blow with a stick.
To give a man. a kick-
To give a man a blow with the fist.

Quando verr& la dl Lei volta (quando
tocclfierk a Lei or quando spettera
a Lei) o a voi.

Avremo la nostra volta (spettera a
noi or toccheri a noi).

Un'giro.

Far un giro.

Far una passeggiata.
I ^ andato a fare- un giro.
! £: andato a fare una passeggiata.

Far un giro intemo del giardino.

Corrert ♦ — corso,

Corre Ella 7 Correte voi 7

Corro.

Correro. Ella 7 Correrete voi 7

Correrd.

J)ietr6 (or di dietro).

Dietro a lui.
Dietro al castello.

Un colpo, una hoita (a fern,
noun).

Ra Ella dato un colpo a cestui 7
GlieP ho dato. . .

Una bastonata, un colpo di 'baa-
tone.
Un caicio, una pedata.
Un pugno.

Una coltellata, un colpo di col>
tello.
I Una schioppettata (una fucilata).
\ Un colpo di fucile.
Una pistolettata, un colpo di pi»

tola.
Un' occhiata, un colpo d' occhio.
Un colpo di fulmine.

Dare una colteQata.
Dare una bastonata ad un uoma
Dare un caicio ad un uomo.
Dare un pugno ad un uomo.

284

FOBTY-UOHTH LBS80M.

To fM, to dram.
To shoot, to fre..

Tofir^agun.

To fire a pistol.

To fire at some one. I

I have fired at that 'bird.

I have fired twice.

liiave fired three times.

I have fired several times.
How many times have you fired 1
[ have fired six times.
How many times liave you fired at

that bird 1
I liave fired at it teveral times.

I have heard a shot.

*He has heard the report of a pistoL '

We have heard a olap of thunder.

The fist

Tirare 1. Sparare 1. Jfar

fuoco.

{ Sparare un fucile.
c Tirare una fucilata.
Tirare nn colpo di pistols.
Tiran un colpo di fodM a qual-

cuno.
Ho tirato una schioppettaU a quelT

uccelio*
Hq latto fuoco due volte.
Ho sparato tre oolpi.
Ho sparato varie volte.
auanU colpi di fucile ha tirati 7
Nehotiratisei.
Quante volte ha tirato a queU' uc

celiol
Ho tirato pareechie volte sopra di

lui.
Ro inteso un colpo di fucile.
Ha inteso una pistolettata.
Abbiamo inteso un oolpo di Atlmiae

(o scoppio di fttlmine]^. ^

Ilpugno.

To cast an eye i^nmi same one or

something.

Have you east an eye upon that

bookl
I have cast an eye upon it

Gettare un* occhiata sopra tmo,
0 qualcosa.

Ho EUa gettato un' occhiata su
questo libro 1 (o dato nn* oceliiata).
Vi ho gettato un* occhiata.

Has that man gone away?

He has gone away.

Have your brothers gone away 7

They have gone away.

They have not gone away.

Have they gpne away 7

They were not willing to go away.

Se n' d andato dMtui7

Egli se n' d andato.

I di Lei frafcelli se ne sonq andati f

Se ne sono andati.

Non se ne sono andatL

Se ne sono e^no andati 7

Non hanno voluto andaraene.

To ask some one^ that is, to.
fuestum, to interrogate him. !

Intem^are quUleuno,

FOBTT-EIOHTH LUSON. 286

EXERCISES.

" , 148.

Are you going away already ? — ^I am not going yet.-^When
will that jnan go away? — ^He will go away presently. — Will you
go away soon ? — I shall go away next Thursday.— When will
your friends go away ? — They will go away next month.— : When
wilt thou go away? — I will go away instantly. — Why has your
father gone away so soon {eosi tosto) ? — He has promised his
friend to be at his house at a quarter to nine, so that (di modo
ehe) he went away early in order to keep (per marUenere) what
he has promised. — ^When shall we go away ? — We shall go away
to-morrow. — Shall we start early ? — We shall * start at five
o'clock in the morning. — When will you go away ? — I shall go
away as soon as I have done writing. — When will your children
go away ? — ^They will go as soon as they have done their exer-
cises.— Will you go when I go ? — ^I shall go away when you go-
— ^Will our neighbours soon go away? — They will go away
when the^ have done speaking. — What will become of your sop
if he does' not study ? — ^If he does not study he will learn nothing.
—What will become of you if you lose your money ? — I do not
know what will become of me.— What will become of your
friend if he loses his pocket-book ? — ^If he loses it I do not know
what will become of him. — ^What has become of your son ? — I do
not know what has become of him. — Has he enlisted ? — He has
not enlisted. — ^What will become of us if our friends go away ?
— ^If Ihey go away I do not know what will becon^ of us. — What
has become of your relations r — ^They have gone away.

140.

Do you intend buying a horse ? — ^I cannot buy one, for I have
not yet received my money. — Must I go {Mi e duopo andare
Devo 10 andare al teatso*) to the theatre ? — ^You must not gc
thither, for it is very bad weather.— Why do you not go to my
brother? — ^It does not suit me to go to him, for I cannot yet pay
him what I owe him. — Why does your servant give that man a

2d6 FORTT-EIGHTH LESSOIT.

out with his knife ? — He gives him a cut, because the man has
given hini a blow lyith his fist. — Which of these two pupils
begins to speak ? — ^The one who is studious begms to speak. —
What does the other who is not so 1 — He also (anch* egK) begins
to speak, but he knows neither how to write nor to read. — ^Does
he listen to what you tell him ? — ^He does not listen to it, if I do
not give him a beating (se turn Jo haUo dei colpi). — ^Why do those
children pot study.?— Their master has given them blows, so
that (di maniera che) they will not study. Why has he given
them blows with his fist ? — ^Because they have been disobedient.
—Have you £red a gun ? — ^I have, fired three times. — At what
did you fire ? — ^I fired at a bird. — Have you fired a gun tt that
man ? — I have fired a pistol at him. — Why have you fired a
pbtol at him ? — ^Because he has given me a stab with his knife.
—How many times have you fired at that bird ? — I have fired at
it twice. — Have you killed it ? — ^I have killed it at the second
shot (a/ secondo colpo). — ^Have you killed that bird at the first
shot? — ^I have killed it at the fourth (oZ quarto colpo), — ^Do you
fire at the birds which you see upon the trees, or at those which
you see in the gardens ? — I fire neither at those which I see upon
the trees nor at those which I see in the gardens, but at those
which I perceive on the castle behind the wood.

150,
How many times have the enemies fired at us {su di not) ? —
rhey have fired at us several times. — ^Have they killed any
body ? — ^They have killed nobody. — ^Have you a wish to fire at
tliat bird ? — ^I have a wish to fire at it.— Why do you not fire at
those birds ? — I cannot, for I have a sore finger. — ^When did the
captain fire? — ^He fired when his soldiers fired. — ^How many
birds have you shot at ?— I have shot at all that I have perceived,
but I have killed none, because my gun is good for nothing. —
Have you cast an eye upon that man ? — I have cast an eye upon
him. — ^Has he seen you ? — He has not seen me, for he has sore
eyes. — Have you drunk of that wine ? — ^I have drunk of it, and
it has done me good.-^What have you done with my book ? — I
have put it upon your trunks — ^Am I (dehbo) to answer you ?—
You will answer me when it comes to your turn (quando vara

PORTY-NINTH LB6SOM.

287

la di Lei voUa). — Is it my brother's turn {tocca a mio frateUo) ?—
When it conies, to his turn I shall ask hxm {Jo inierrogherd), for
each in his turn. — Have you taken a walk this morniiig ? — ^I have
taken a walk round the garden. — Where is your uncle gone to?
— ^He is gone to take a walk. — ^W'hy do you run ? — ^I run because
I see my best friend. — Who runs behind us {dietro a noi) ? — Our
dog runs behind us. — ^Do you perceive that bird ? — I perceive it
behind the tree. — ^Why have your brothers gone away ? — They
have gone away, because they did not wish to be seen by the
man whose dog they have killed. (See end of XXIVth Lesson.)

PORTYNINTH LESSON.

Leziane quarantesima nona.

To hear — heard.

I hear, thou hearest, he hears.
We hear, you hear, they hear.

To hear of.

Have yoD heard of your brother 1

I have heard of him.

Is St long Bince you breakfasted 1

How long is it since you breakfutedl
It is not long since I breakfasted.

It is a great while since.
It is a short time since.
How long is it since you heard of your
brother *»

Udire* 3— «4ito.
Odo, odi,

Udiamoj udite,

ode.

OdOBO.

Sf Udire * parlare.
t SerUir parlare.

Ha EUa udito parlare del di Lei
fratellol

Ne ho udito parlare.

E molto tempo ehe Ella ha fatto
oolazione 1

Quanto d che EUa lu fatto colazione 1

Non d xaoUo tempo che ho &tto
colazione.

E moltissimo tempo che.

E poco tempo che.

^uanto tempo d che ha udito par-
lare del di Lei fratello?

:hi8

FORTT-NIlfTH LBSSON.

Il !■ a yatr tlnoe I faatrd of him.

[Is nn anno chA ho adito pailar dl

I B on ann* cho im ho udito par*
L lata.

It la only a year ainee. | fc aolamente nn anno dia.

Itiamorethanayaarainoe. | E piild' nn anno che.

Oi». A, That, whan before a number, ia rendered by dL

More than nine.

More than twenty timea.
It ia hardly aiz montha aince.

A few honra ago.

^alf an hour ago.

Twa yeare ago.

Ob». B. The word/i, third peraon alngular of the Terb/ore, ia need in
Italian wheneTer there la in Engliah ago^ reUtingto the aingukur.

Vih di nove.

Piik di Tcnti volte.

Sono appena aei meal chOb

E qualche ora (aono aleuna ore).

& una men* on (mezz* ora la).

Sono due anni.

I have aeen Urn a month ago.
Two houra and a lialf ago.
Three centuriea ago.
A fottnight ago.
Ten yeara ago,
A fortnight.

L' ho Teduto un meae fA.
Sono due ore e meno.
Tre aecoU aono.
t Sono quindici giomi.
Died anni aono.
Quindici giomL'

Hiave you long been in Franael ItE molto tempo Mi' Ella i in

I Francial
06*. C. In Engliah the Btate of exiatence or of action, whan l«*ta duration,
ia alwaya expreaaed in the preteiperfect tenae ; wliUat in Italian %» w41 aa in
French, it ia ezpz^aaad by the preaent tenae.

He haa been in Paria theae three t Son tre anni ch* d in ParSgi
yeara.

I have been living here theae two

yeara.
How long have you had that horae 1

I have had it theae five years.

Son due anni che ato qui.

Quanto tempo i ch' EQa ht

cavallol
Sono cinque anni che 1' ho.

How long (since when) f
How long haa he been here 7
Since.

( Da quando in qua f
l Da quanio tempo?
Da quanto tempo d qoil

{ Dacche (che).
(Da.

> In Italian, aa weU aa in French, we say fifteen daya for a firhdghi.

PORTY-NINTH LESSON.

e.3d

These three dajrs. '
This month.
1 have Men him more than twenty
times.

Da tre giorni.

Da un mese.

L' ho veduto plii di venti volte.

ho pai^

It is sLx months since I spoke to him. I Sono sei mesi che non

I lato.

Ob». D. The negative non in this and similar expressions is necessary in
Italian, though the English use no negative in such instances.

It is more than a year since I heard of

him.
Since I saw you It has rained very

often.

Epiii d* un anno che non ne ho
udito parlare. •

Da che V ho veduta ha piovuto
spessisslmo.

Just.

1 have just seen yourbrothex.
He has just done writing.
The men have just arrived.
Has that man been waiting long 7
He has but just come.
I have just seen him.
I have just received it. •
I have-just written to him.

r Pocofa, poc' anxij tesU,
< Ora^ or ara, in queHopunio,
( Appunto,

Ho visto il di Lei fratello poco fa.
Ha finito di scrivere po^ anzL
Gli uominl sono appunto arrivati.
£ molto tempo che questlaspettal
E arrivato m qutsto punto.
L* ho veduto testl.
L* ho ricevutd or ora.
Gli ho scritto pot^ anzi.

To do one's best.

I will do my best.
He wiU do his best

f Fare il posnihik.

t Fard il possibile (cid che potrd).
t Pari 11 possibile (cid che potri).

To spend money — spent.

How much have you spent to-day 7
He has fifty sequins a month to \i\e
upon.

Speridere ♦2. — speso,

Quanto ha Ella speso oggi7
^li ha cinquanta zecchini al mese
da spendere.

Have the horses been found 7 | Sono stati trovati I cavalU 7

i:3r The passive participle agrees with the nominative In number t that is,
when the nominative is plural, the participle must also be in the plural.

Tliey have been found.

Where 7 When 7
The men have been seen.
Our children have been praised and

rewarded, because they have beenj

good and studious.

Sono stati- trovati.

Ove or Dove 7 Quando 7

Gli uominl sono stati vedutt

I nostri fanciullt sono stati lodati «

ricompensati, poichd sono stat.'

sav! e studfosi.

a«o

POBTY-NINXa LESSON.

By whom haTe they been rewarded 1
By whom haTe we been blamed 1

Dachi aono etati licompenaatil^
Da chi alamo atati blaaimati'?

To pass.
Before.

Passare 1.
{ BavawU.
i Innanzi.

Ob», E. Before is expreaaed in Italian by prtmo, when It denotea priority
(Leaeon XXVIir); and by cfaron/j, «iifiafi;ri| when It 8i|{nifiea in presence
of. Ex. ' *

To paaa before some one.
To paaa before a place.

A place.
I have paaaed before the theatre.
He paaaed before ma.

Paaaar davanti a qualcuio.
Paaaar davanti im luogo.
Un luogo.

Son paaaato davanti al teatio.
1& paaaato innanxi a me {pr davant!
me).

I teeaklaated before yon.

I Ho latto oolazione prima di Let

To spend time m something.

What do ypu spend your time in?
I spend my time in studying.
What haa he spent his time Inl
What shall we spend our time in 1

Passare il tempo a fualche

cosa.

t Come paaaa 11 tempo 1 .
t Pasao U tempo a studiare.
t Come ha egli paasato ii tempo 1
t Come paaseremo U tempo 1

To miss, to fail.

The merchant haa failed to bring the

money.
Ton have missed your turn.
Tou have failed to come to rne this

morning.

Mancare 1.
n mercante ha mancato di portare 0

danaro.
Ella ha mancato alia di Lei volta.
Ella ha mancato di Tenire da me

questa mane (o queata mattlna).

To he good for something.

Of what use ia that 1
It ia.good for nothing.

The good-for-notliing fisllow.

Ia the gun which you have bought a

good one?
No, it is worth nothing.

Esser * buono a qualcosa.

t A che serve dd 1

t Cid non aerve a niente (Non val

niente).

II diacolo. lo sfiBiccendato.

II fucile ch' Ella lia compmto d
buono?

No, Signore, non d ouono a niente.

FOKTy-NINTH LESSOR.

Ml

To throw away.
Have yott thrown away any thing 1
I have not thrown away any thing.
Have yon uaed the books which you

have bought 7
I have not used them; I have ex-
amined them, and found them very
badp 80 that I have thrown them
away.

To examine.

Gettar via.

Ha EUa gettato tIb qualche <

Non ho gettatQ via niente.

Si a Ella servita del Ubri che ha
comprati 1

Non me ne son eervito; U ho eaa-
minati e U ho trovati cattivisaimi,
di maniera che U tio gettati Wa.

Esaminare.

EXERCISES.

151.

Have you heard of any one ?-— I have not heard of any one, for
I have not gone out this morning. — Have you not heard of the
man who has killed a soldier ? — I have not heard of him. — Have
you heard of my brothers ? — I have not heard of them. — Of
whom has your cousin heard ? — ^He has heard of his friend who
is gone to America. — ^Is it long since he heard of him ? — It is not
long since he heard of him. — 'How long is it ? — It is only a
month. — ^Have you been long in Paris ? — These three years. —
Has your brother been long in London ? — He has been there
these ten years. — How long is it since you dined ?— It is long
since I dined, but it is not long since I supped. — How long is it
since you supped ? — ^It is half an hour* — How long have you had
these books ? — ^I have had them these three months. — How long
is it since your cousin set out ? — It is more than a year since he
set out. — ^What has become of the man who has lent you money ?
— ^I do not know what has become of him, for it is a great while
since I saw him. — ^Is it long since you heard of the soldier who
gave your friend a cut with the knife ? — ^It is more than a year
since I heard of him. — How long have you been learning
French 1 — ^I have been learning it only these two months. — Do
you know already how to speak it ? — ^You see (EUa sente) that I
am beginning to speak it. — Have the children of the English

11

243 rORTY-NINTH LSSSON.

noblemen been learning it long ? — ^They have been learning it
these three years, and they do not yet begin to speak. — Why do
they not know how to speak it ? — ^They do not know how to speak
it, because they are learning it badly. — Why do they not learn it
well ? — ^They have not a good roaster, so that they do not learn it
well.

162.

Is it long since you saw the young man who learnt German
with the {dal) master with whom {presso U quale) we learnt it ?
— ^I have not seen him for nearly a year. — How long is it since
the child ate ? — ^It ate a few minutes ago. — How long is it since
those children drank? — They drank a quarter of an hour ago. —
How long has your friend been in Spain ? — He has been there
this month. — How often have you seen the king ? — ^I saw him
more than ten times when I was in Paris. — When did you meet
my brother ? — I met him a fortnight ago. — ^Where did you meet
him ? — ^I met him before the theatre. — Did he do you any harm ?
— ^He did me no harm, for he is a good boy. — Where are my
gloves? — ^They have thrown them away. — Have the horses been
(bund ? — ^They have been found. — Where have they been found ?
They have been found behind the wood, on this side of the road.
— ^Have you been seen by any one ? — ^I have been seen by no
one. — Do you expect any one ? — ^I expect my cousin the captain.
— Have you not seen him ? — I have seen him this morning ; he
has passed before my warehouse. — What does this young man wait
for ? — ^He waits for money. — Art thou waiting for any thing ? —
I am waiting for my book. — Is this young man waiting for his
money ? — He is waiting for it. — ^Has the king passed here ? — He
has not passed here, but before the theatre. — Has he not passed
before the castle ? — He has passed there, but I have not seen him.

• 158.

What do you spend your time in ? — ^I spend my time in study-
ing.— What does your brother spend his time ia ? — He spends
his time in reading and playing. — ^Does this man spend his time
in working ? — He is a good-for-nothing fellow ; he spends his
time in drinking and playing. — ^What do your children spend

FORTT-NIHTfi LBSSDN. 248

their time in ?— They spend their time in learning. — Can you pay
me what you owe me 1 — I cannot pay it you, for the merchant
has failed to bring me my money. — ^Why have you breakfasted
without me ?— rYou failed to come at nine o'clock, so that we
have breakfasted without you. — Has the merchant brought you
the gloVes which you bought at his house (da lui) ? — He has
&iled to bring them to -me. — Has he sold them you on credit ? —
He has sold them me, on the contrary, for cash. — ^Do you know
those men ? — ^I do not know them ; but I believe that they are
(ehe sianOf subjunctive) good-for-nothing fellows, for they spend
Uieir time in playing. — ^Why did you fail to come to my father
this morning ? — ^The tailor did not bring me the coat which he
promised me, so that I could not go to him. — ^Who is the man
who has just spoken to you ? — ^He is a merchant. — ^What has the
shoemaker just brought ? — ^He has brought the boots which he
has made us. — ^Who are the men who have just arrived ? — They
are Russians. — Where did your uncle dine yesterday ? — He dined
at home. — How much did he spend ? — He spent five francs. —
How much has he a month to live upon ? — He has a hundred se-
quins a month to live upon. — ^Do you throw your hat away ? — ^I
do not throw it away, for it fits me very well. — ^How much have
you spent to-day ? — ^I have not spent much : I have only spent
one sequin. — ^Do you spend every day as much ? — I sometimes
spend more than that. — Has that* man been waiting long ? — ^He
has but just come. — What does he wish ? — ^He wishes to speak to
you. — ^Are you willing to do that ? — ^I am willing to doit. — Shall
you be able to do it well ?— I will do my best. — ^Will this man be
able to do that ? — ^He will be able to do it, fi>r he will do his

FIFTIETH LESSON.
Lezione cinquantesima.

Far.
Haw far (meaning What dis-
iance)f

How fitr Is it from here to Paris?

fs it far from here to Paris 7

It is far.

It is not far.

AmUe.
How many miles is it 1
It is twenty miles.
It is almost two hundred miles from

here to Paris.
It is nearly five hundred miles from
Paris to Vienna.

Lontano, hingi,

{ Qualdistansa?

I Quanta c lantana t

C Qual distania v* d da qui a Parigf ?
c Qua! dlstanza corre da qui a Parlgi 1

C d molto da qui a Par^ 1

C d molto. Il lontano.

Non c* ^ molto. Non ^ lontano.

Un migUo.i

Q,uante miglia vl sono 7

Vi sono yenti mlgUa.

Yi son circa due cento migUa da qui
aParigi.

Vi son circa cinque cento miglia da
Parigi a Vienna.

From.

From Venice.

From London.

From Rome.

From Florence.
ffbax oonntryman are youl
Are y^n from France 1

lam.

The Parisian.
He is a Parisian (from Paris).

The king.

The philosopher.

Thefmccptor, the tutor.

The actor.

The professor.

Tlie landlord, the innkeeper.

Da.

Da Venezia.

DaLondra.

Da Roma.

Da Firense.
t Di qua] paese d Ella7 o slete vol t
t &Ella di Francial Siete Toi ftan*
cesel

Lo sono.

II Parigino.

EParigino.

lire.

n filosofb.s

11 preoettore,* V aio.

V attore.«

n professore.

L' oste, il locandiere, 1' albergatore.

^ JkRgUo is one of the nouns in o, wliich, though masculine in the singulsr,
Cake in the plural the form of the feminine singular, as U miglia, miles. We
shall see hereafter a list of such nouns.

s Whenever ph occurs in English, it is in Italian changed into/.

« I In Italian c or p is never put befbre f, hut they are changed lato i.

FIFTIBTH LESSON.

245

An yoa an KngUshmanl
4re yon an Italian 1

Whence?
Whence do yoa come 1

I comefiom Rome.
I oome from Paria.

Tojly, to run away.

To rxm away,

I run away, thou runneat away, he

runa away.
W» run away, you run away, they run
away.
Why do you fly 7
I fly, becauae I am afraid.

llEIIalnglesel
feEUaltaliano?

Siete voL

To assure n
I BMure you that he ia arrived.

To arrive.

To hear — heard,
HaTe you heard nothing new 7

1 have heard nothing new.
What do they aay of our prince 7

They aay he ia wiae and generoua.

Da dove?

Da dove vienet

o venite 7
Vengo da Roma.
Vengo da Parigi.

D' onde?

D* onde Ttene'

\ Fuggire 8.
( Fuggirsene^

Scappare 1.

Fuggo, fuggi, fugge.

Fuggiamo, fuggite, fuggono.

Perchd fugge 7 ftiggitel
Fuggo, perchd ho pannu

Assicurare 1.
I L' aaaicuro ch* ^ arrivato.

Arrivare 1.

Iniendere ♦ — nOeso.

Non ha EUa ihteso nlente di mo-

▼•7
Non ho inteao niente di nuovo.
Che ai dice (che dicono) del noatro

principe 7
t Lo dicono aaggio i magnanimo.

(better, Si dice ohe i aaggio.)

To happen"'^ he^ppened.

The happineaa, fortune.

The unhappineaa, miafortune.
A great miafortune haa happened.
He haa met with a great miafortune.

^ Aceadere • — accaduto.
Sopraggiungere^ — sopraggt-

unto,
Succedere *, — iuceesso,
Arrivare 1.

La felicita {a fern, noun),
LadisgTazia(a/em. noun),
& Bopraggiunta una gran diagrazla.
Gli d aopraggiunta una gran dla-
grazia. o aventun.

346

FIFTIETH LESSQN.

What luui happened to you 1
Nothing haa happened to me.
I have met with your brother.

Che Le i eopraggiontoT
Non mi d eopraggiunto nicbte.
Ho incontrato il di Lei fratello

The poor man.
I have cut tiia finger.
You have broken the man's neck.
He broke hia leg.

The leg.

II povero.
t Gli ho tagliato il dito.
t RUa ha rotto il collo all* uomo.
t Si d rotta la gamba.

La gamba {a fern, noun).

To pUjf — pitied.

I plcy, thou pitieat, he pitiea.
We, you, they pity.

Campiangere * — compianto,
Compatire (a) — compatito.
Aver campassione (di) — avuio
eompassfone.

Compatisco, compatieci. compa-

tlsce.
Compatiamo,

tiacono.

compatite, compa-

Oi^9. Moat verba of the third conjugation terminate in the three first per-
sona of the present indicative in : tteo, itn, itce, and in the third person plunu
in iseoRfl^ juat aa eompoHrt, As there are a great many of them (some gram*
marians make their number amount to nearly four hundred), we shall content
ourselves wlQi marking them thus : {itco^) aa they will occur in the course of
the Method.

Do you pity that man 1
I pity him with all my heart.
With all my hearL

To campkun.

Do you complain 1

I do not complain.
Do you complain of my friend 1
I complain of him.
I do not complain of him.

Compiange Ella cestui 1
Lo complango dl tutto ctiore.
Di tutto cuore.

f Lamentarsiy lagnarsi.

t Silamenta?

t Non mi laraento.

t Si lagna del mio amicot

t Me ne lagno.

f Non me ne lagno.

To dare — dared or durst

I dare, thou darest, he dares.
We, you, they dare.

SOsare — osato,
Ardire. — ardito,

Ardisco, ardisci, ardisce.
Osiamo,' ardite, ardiscono.

■ The first person plural of otare is substituted for the first perscn plural of
ardirtt not to confound this with the first person plural otardere, to bum.

FIFTIETH LESSON.

247

To spoil,
Tou have spoiled my kn\(e.

To servcj to toait vpon.

To serve some one, to toait upon
some one.

Ehs he been in your aenricel
Has he senred you 7

How long has he been in your service 1

The service.

To offer.

Do you offer 7
loSsr.

Thou offeresL
He offers.

Guastare 1.

Ha guastato il mio collello. (Aveta
guastato).

Servire 3.
r Servire qualcuno.
) Essere ♦ al servizio di quai-
ls ctmo.
E egli stato al di Lei servizio 1
L* ha servital Vi ha egll servito 1
' t Q,uanto tempo d che La serve 7 (o

serve Lei.)
t Q,uanto tempo d che trovasi al di
Lei servizio 7 (al servizio di Lei.)
t Da quanto tempo d al di Lei ser-
vizio 7 (o al servigio di vol.)
II servizio.

To confide, to trust vriih, to
hUrust.

Do you trust me with your money 7
I trust you with it

I have intrusted that man with a
secret.

The secret.

To keep any thing secret

[ have kept it secret.

To take care of something.
Do you take care of your clothes 7
[ take care of them.
Will you take care of my horse 7

f will take care of it

Offrire* — offerto.
Ofire Ella 7 Offritevol7
Offro.
Onrl.
Ofire.

SDare * in eustodia.
Confidare 1.

Mi confida Ella il di Lei danaro7
Glielo confido.
Ho confidato un segreto a costni.

Ilsegreto.
r Tenere qualche cosa segreta.
)osservare 11 segreto sn qualche

L' ho tenuto segreto.

Aver cura di qualcosa.

Ha Ella cura del di Lei abiti7

Ne ho cura.

Vuole aver cura del mio cavallo'J
c Yoglio aveme cura, or
( Ne voglio aver cura.

^18

FIFTIETH LESSON.

To leave— lefi.

To squander, to dissipate.

He has squandered all his wealth.
He has left nothing to his children.

Lasciare 1 — lasciaio.
Dissipare I — dissipaio.
Ha dissipato ogni sno avere.
Non ha lasdato niente ai suoi Ian
ciaUi.

To hindery to keep from.
I hinder, thou liinderest, he hinders.
We, you, they hinder.
Vou hinder me from sleeping.
He has hindered pie from writing.

Impedire * — impediio,

Impedlsco, impedisci, impedisoe.
Impediamo, impeditei impediscono.
Ella mi iffipediace di dormire.
Hi ha impedito di scriTere.

'Far spesa, far compera {la

To purchase, to spend.

spesa, la ampera, the ear
pense, fern, nouns).

Far delle spese.

^FardeUe compere.

I have purchased two handkerchief.
Have you purchased any thing to-day 1

IhaTS.

Cosa ha eomprato oggil

Ho eomprato due fanolettL

Ha latto delle spese (delle compere)

oggil
Ne ho fotto.

Most lovely, charming.

Admirahly.
That hat fits you admirably.
That coat fits him very well.

f is charming.

OraiioBO, Icggiadro, YagD.

A merayigUa.

duesto cappello La sU a meravigUa.

Quest* abito ^ sta benlasimo.

ISgrazioso.

EXERCISES.

t

154.

How far is it from Paris to London 1 — ^It is nearly three hundred
miles from Paris to London. — Is it far from here to Berlin ? — It is
far. — ^Is it far from here to Vienna? — It is nearly five hundred
miles from here to Vienna. — Is it further from Paris to Blois than
from Orleans to Paris ? — It is further from Orleans to Paris than
from Paris to Blois. — How far is it from Paris to Berlin ? — It is
almost five hundred and thirty miles from Paris to Berlin. — Do

FIFTIBTH LESSON. 240

you inteud to go to Paris soon ? — I intend to go thither soon. —
Why do you nvish to go this time {questa voUa) ?~-Iu order to buy
good books and good gloves, and to see my good friends. — ^Is it
long since you were there ? — It is nearly a year since I was
there. — ^Do you not go to Italy this year (quest* armo) ? — I do not
go thither, for it is too far from here to Italy. — Who are the men
that have just arrived ? — They are philosophers. — Of what
country are they 1 — ^They are from Loudon. — Who is the man
who has just left? — He is an Englishman who has squandered
away (dissipato) all his fortune (ogni suo avere) in France. —
What countryman are you ? — ^I am a Spaniard/ and my friend is
an Italian. — Are you from Tours ? — No, I am a Parisian. — How
much money have your children spent to-day ? — They have spent
but little ; they have spent but one crown. — Where did you dine
yesterday ? — I dined at the inn-keeper's. — ^Did you spend a great
deal ? — I spent a crown and a half. — ^Has the king passed here
(di qui) 1 — He has not passed here (di qui), but before the theatre.
— ^Have you seen him ? — ^I have seen him. — Is it the first time
(e ia prima voUa) you have seen him ? — ^It is not the first time,
for I have seen him more than twenty times.

155.

Why does that man run away ?— -He runs away because he is
afraid.-— Why do you run away? — ^I run away because I am
afraid. — Of whom are you afraid ?— I am afraid of the man who
does not love me.— Is he your enemy ?— I do not know whether
he is (s* i) my enemy ; but I fear all those who do not love me,
for if they do me no harm they will do me no good. — ^Do you fear
my cousin? — ^I do not fear him, for he has never done any body
harm. — ^You are wrong to run away before that man, for I assure
you that he is (P assicuro esser egU) a very good man (tm hravo
uomo), who has never done harm to any one. — Of whom has your
brother heard ? — He has heard of a man to whom (a/ quale) a
misfortune has happened (e aceaduia una disgraxia). — ^Why have
your scholars not done their exercises ? — I assure you that they
have done them, and you are mistaken if you believe that they
have {abUanOf subj.) not done them. — What have you done with

11*

260 FirriBTH Ltssoii.

my book ? — ^I assure you that I have not seen it. — Has your son
had my knives ? — ^He assures me that he has not had them. — ^Is
your uncle arrived already ?— He is not arrived yet (per anco).
— Will you wait till he returns ? — ^I cannot wait, for I have a
good deal (moUo) to do. — Have you not heard any thing new ? —
I have heard nothing new. — Is the king arrived ?-^They say he
is {che 8ia) arrived. — What has happened to you? — A great mis-
fortune {una gran disgrazia) has happened to me. — ^What {ijuale) t
— I have met with my greatest enemy, who has given me a blow
with a stick. — ^Then I pity you with all my heart (di tuUo cuore).
— Why do you pity that man (a costui) ? — ^I pity him because
you have broken his neck. — Why do you complain of my friend ?
I complain of him because he has cut my finger. — ^Does that man
{cosHa) serve you well ? — ^He serves me well, but he spends too
much. — Are you willing to take this servant ? — ^I am willing to
take him, if he will serve me. — Can I take that servant ? — ^You
can take him, for he has served me very well. — How long is it
since he has left your service {ehe ha lasciato U di Let servizio) ?
— ^It is but two months since. — ^Has he served you long ? — ^He
has served me for (durante) six years.

156.

Do you offer me any thing ?— I have nothing to offer you.«^
What does my friend offer you ? — He offers me a book. — Have
the Parisians offered you any thing ? — They have offered me
wine, bread, and good beef. — Why do you pity our neighbour ?
I pity him, because he has trusted (ferM ha dato m custodia) a
merchant of Paris with his money, and the man (e questt) will
not return it to him. — ^Do you trust this man with any thing ? — ^I
do not trust him with any thing. — ^Has he already kept any thing
from you ?— I have never trusted him with any thing, so that he
has never kept any thing from me.^-Will you trust my father
wllh your money ? — ^I will trust him with it. — With what secret
has my son intrusted you? — ^I cannot intrust you with that with
Hhich lie has intrusted me, for he has desired me (m' ha pregaio)
to keep it 8ecx^.*^Whom do you intrust with your secrets ? — I
ill^ust nobody with them, so that nobody knows them.— Has

FIFTIETH LESSON. 251

your brother been rewarded ? — He has, on the contrary, been
punished ; but I beg of you to keep it secret, for nobody knows
it. — What has happened to him? — I will tell you what has
happened to him, if you promise me to keep it secret {di
asservame il segreto), — ^Do you promise me to keep it secret ?
— I promise you, for I pity him with all my heart. — ^Will
you take care of my clothes ? — ^I will take care of them.— ^Are
you taking care of the book which I lent you ? — ^I am taking care
of it. — ^Who will take care of my servant ? — The landlord will
take care of him. — Do you throw away your hat ? — I do not
throw it away, for it fits me admirably (a meravigUa), — ^Does
your friend sell his coat ? — fie does not sell it, for it fits him most
beautifully. — Who has spoiled my book ? — No one has spoiled
it, because no one has dared to touch it. — ^Do you hinder any one
from studying ? — ^I hinder no one from studying, but I hinder you
from lomg harm to this boy.

THIRD MONTH.

Terzo mese,

PIFTYFIRST LESSON.
Leziane cinquaniesima prima.

The people. -
WQi the people come mod 1
IWy will come eoon.

oooft| very so9n»

AvioUn.
The flute.
The horn.
To play upon the TioUn.
- To play the vioUn.
Jb», The Terb to play ia rendered by mumart with the accusative^ when m
tnuBical inatniment ia apoken o^ and by giuoeare with the datlTC, when a game
ia spoken o£ Ex. To play at cards, giuoeare oUe carte g to play at cheesy
giuoeare agU eoae^U,

La gente (afmn. nrnm),
VerrA la gente qnanto
Yerri quanto prima.

ToHo^periempOg quaiUoprmuu

Un Tiollno.
U flauto.
II oomo.

Snonare il violino.

The harpsichord.

The piano-forte.
To play Uie harpsichord.
To play upon the harpsichord.
To play the, or upon the, flute.
What inatniment do you playl

II cembalo.
II pianoforte.

Suonare il cembalo.

Suonare il flauto.

Che atrumento suona Ella? o •«•
nate Tol 1

I play i^on tb« piano.

Near.

Near me. *

N^r thSm.

IToccare 1.
t Toeco il pianoforte, (o

It)

Vlcijio a, presw a,

Vicino a me.
Ticino a loro.

FIFTT-FIRST LESSON.

253

Netr the fire.

Near the trees.

Near going.
Where do you live 1
I live near the castle.
What are you doing near the fire 7

To dance.

To/all.

To drop {to let fall).

Has he dropt any thing?
He has not dropt any thing.
I dropt my glores.

To retain, to hold back.

Th approach, to draw near.

Do yoo approach the fire 7
I do approach it.

Th approach, to have access to.

tf a is a nan difficult of

Vicino al faoco, \iTeaao al fuoca

yic!no agU alberi.

Vicino ad andare. Star per andare.

Ove BtaElla7

Sto yicino al castello.

Che ia Ella ridno al fuooo 7

Ballare X.

Cadere * — eaduio.

Lasdar cadere.

t Gli d caduto qualche coaal
t Non gli d caduto niente.
i Mi son caduti i guanti.

RUenere * (is conjugated like
its primitive ienere ♦, Lea-
son XL.).

Acncinarsi (gov. the dative^,
acctarossi.

S' ayyicina ella al fuooo 7 (vi avri*

cinate vol al.)
Me ne awicino {ormerdy m' av

▼icino).

( Accostarsi ad uno.

l Awicinare uno.

f & un uomo che non si pud ayvici-
nare.
£ un uomo che nessuno pud ae
oostare.

i

I go away (withdraw) from the fire.

To withdraw from. )
To go away from. )

Why does that manigo away from the

fire7
He goes away from it, because hsii

not cold.
I go away from it.

M* allontano dal fuoco.

AUontanarsi da (gov. the ah.

lative).
Perclid s' allontaoa oottoldal fuoco 7

Se 'ne iUontaaa perchd nen lia

freMo. •
Me ne^ontano^

264

PIFTT-PIBST LBaSON.

To recollect.

Do you recollect thatl

I recollect It.

Does your brother recollect that 7

He recollects It.

Do you recollect the devices 1

I recollect them.

Have you recollected the devices 1

I have recollected them.

I have not recollected them.

Have you recollected them 1

You have recollected them.

Has he recollected them 1

He has recollected them.

We have recollected them.

They have recollected them.

To rememher^ to recollect.

Do yon remember that man 1

I remember him.

Do you remember thatl

I remember it.

What do yon remember?

I remember nothing.

C Ricordarsi 1 (goy. the geni-

\ tive).

^ Rammeniarsi.^

Sirammentadicidl

Me ne rammento.

Si rammenta di dd il di Lei fr»

teUol
Se ne rammenta.
Si rammenta dei motti 7
Me ne rammento. Me ne rioordo.
Si d Elb rammentata dei mottll
Me ne son rammentato.
Non roe ne son rammentato.
Si d Ella rammentata di quelll7
Ella se n' d ricordata.
Se n* d egU rammentato 1
Se n' i rammentato.
Ce ne siamo rammentati.
Se ne eono rammentatL

TosU down.

I rit down, thou sittest down, he sits

down.
We, you, they sit down.
Do you sit down?

I do sli down.
Thon art sitting down.
He Is sitting down.
I shall or will sit down«
He sits near the fli*

Ricordarsi 1 (gov. the geni-

tive).

Si ricorda elia di costui 1 (o vi rioor*

date vol dL)
Me ne ricordo, or lo rioordo.
Si ricorda didd 7
Me ne ricordo.
Di che si ricorda EIla7
Non mi ricordo di niente.

C Sedere * — seduto.
< Mettersi a sedere.
V Porsi a sedere.
Seggo, sledi, dede.

Sediamo, sedete, seggono.

Siede Ella (Si mette Ella a sedtte) 1

(Vi mettere vol a.)
Seggo (mi metto a sedere).
Sledi (ti metti a sedere).
Slede (d mette a sedere).
' Sederd (mi metterd a sedere).
^ seduto vidno d fnoco.

^ Riarrdare, ronuMiilare, when they are not reflective, govern the aocuaasive.

FIFTT-FIEST LB8SON.

255

B» Mt down hmt the fin.

To Uke better i to prefer.

Do you like to stay here better than

going out 1
I Uke staying here better than going

out
He likea to play better than to atudy.
Do you like to write better than to

qieaki

I Uke to apeak better than to write.

Belter than,

I Uke beef better than mutton.

Do yon like bread better than cheese 7
He likes to do both.
I like neither the one nor the other.
I Uke tea as much as coffee.

Just as much.
Some TeaL
Acal^<

iiuUkf fart.
Slaw, slowly.
Aloud.

Does your master speak aloud 7
He speaks aloud.

In order to learn* Italian one must
speak aloud.

Qtttdter, faster.

Not so quickf less qmck.

As fast as you.
Ha eats quicker than I.

S' d messo a sedeie Tridno al fiiooo.
S' d posto a sedere vicino al fuoco.

f Placer megtio (ptd), preferire

(isco).

Aver pi^ caro.

Amar megUo {jpiu).

Le place megUo restar qui che

uscire7
Mi place megUo restar qui che

uscire.
Ama megUo giuocare che studiare.
Le place piii scrlvere che pariare 7

■ Preferisco pariare a scrlvere.
U parlar mi place piik ehe lo scri-

( MegUo che.
\ Fin che.

Mi place pA U manzo che U mon-

tone.
Le place piii 11 pane che 11 cacio 7
GU place fare 1' uno e 1' altro.
Non mi place nd P uno nd F altro.
Mi place altrettanto U td quanto U

cafid.
Altrettanto.
Del vitello.
Un Titello, del TlteDi.

Presto.

Lentamente, adagio.
Forte, ad aUa voce.

II di Lei maestro parla forte 7
Parla forte.

Per imparar V Itallano blsogna par*
lar forte.

PiU presto.

Non cosi presto, meno pretto^

pa adagio.
Cosi presto come Lei.
Mangia pii presto di me.

U50

FIFTt-FIRST LBSSON.

Do you leani na fast as II

I laiiD faster than you.
1 do not understand you, because you
speak too iast

To scU cheap.

To sell dear.

Does he sell cheap 1
He does not sell dear.
He has sold ma vary dear.

So.

This man sells every thing so dear that
one cannot buy any thing of him.

Tott speak so &8t that I cannot un-
derstand you.

To luy something from some

I have bought It of him.

I have bought that horse uf your

brother*
I have bought a cake lor my child.

I have bought it for him.

So much ; plur. so many.

I have written so many notea that I
cannot write any more.

Do you foar to go out?
Ifoar togoout.

To run away, tofy.

Did you run away 1
I did not run away.
Why did tliat man run away 1

He ran away because he was afraid.
Who has run away 1

He has run away.

Impaia presto come lo (al paii dl

me) 7
Imparo pih presto di Let
Non La capisco, perchd paria tioppo

presto.

Vendere a hum mercaio.

Vender earo.

Vende a buon mereatol

Non vende caro.

If ha venduto carissinio.

Cosi.

Quest! vende tutto oosi caro che non
si pud comprar niente da luL

Ella parla cori presto che non poaao
comprenderla.

C&mprar qualche com da

fualcuno.

V ho compmto da lot

Ho comprmto questo cavallo daldl

Lei fratello.
Ho oomprato un paaticclno a mio

figUo.
Olielo ho oompiBto.

Tanto ; plur. tanti.

Ho seritto tantl UgUatti (
posso seriver piil.

Teme Ella d' uacirel
Temo d* uscire.

Salvarsi 1. Scappare h

ft Ellascappatal
Non sono scappato,
Perch^dscappato cestui 7 {pi
I ofaggitovia.)

I k scappato, perchd ha avuto pann.
(Chi^sc^patol
< Chi s* d Bahrato 7
c Egli i scappato.
(EgUdfuggito.

PIFTT-PIBST LESSON. 267

EXERCISES.

157.

Do you play the violin ? — I do not play the violin, but the harp,
■ichord. — Shall we have a ball to-night 1 — We shall have one. —
At what o'clock ? — At a quarter to eleven. — ^What o'clock is it
now ? — It is almost eleven, and the people will soon come. — What
instrument will you play ?— I shall play the violin. — ^If you play
the violin, I shall play the harpsichord. — Are there to be a great
many people at our ball? — There are to be a great many. — Will
you dance ? — ^I shall dance. — ^Will your children dance ? — They
will dance if they please {se place lord). — ^In what do you spend
your time in this country ? — ^I spend my time in playing on the
harpsichord, and in reading. — ^In what does your cousin divert
himself? — ^He diverts himself in playing upon the violin. — Does
any one dance when you play ? — A great many people dance
when I play. — Who ? — At first (m primo luogo) our children,
then our cousins, at last {injine) our neighbours. — Do you amuse
yourself? — ^I assure you that we amuse ourselves very much. —
Whom do you pity ? — ^I pity your friend. — Why do you pity
him ? — ^I pity* him because he is ill. — Has any one pitied you ?
— ^Nobody has pitied ope, because I have not been ill. — ^Do you
offer me any thing ? — ^I ofier you a fine gun. — What has my
father offered you ? — He has oflfered me a fine book. — To whom
have you offered your fine horses ? — I have offered them to the
English captain. — ^Dost thou offer thy pretty little dog to these
children ? — I offer it to them, for I love them with all my heart.
— Why have you given that boy a blow with your fist ?«— Because
he has hindered me from sleeping. — ^Has any body hindered you
from writmg ? — ^Nobody has hindered me from writing, but I
have hindered somebody from hurting your cousin.

158.

Have you dropt any thing ? — ^I have dropt nothing, but my
cousin dropt some money. — Who has picked it up t — Some men
have picked it up.— Was it returned to him (GU i siato reso) ? —
It was returned to him, for those who picked il up did not wish

268 FIFTT-FIR8T LESSEN.

to keep iU— la it cold to day ?^-It b vary cold. — ^Will you draw
near the fire f— -I caimoi draw nait it, for I am afraid of burning
myself. — Why does your faead go awiy from the fire ? — He
goes away from it, because he is afraid of burning himself. — Art
thou coming near the fire ? — I am coming near it, because I am
very cold. — ^Do you go away from the fire ? — ^I go away from it.
— Why do you go away from it ? — Because I am not cold. — ^Are
you cold or warm ? — I am neither cold nor warm. — Why do your
children approach the fire ? — They approach it because they are
cold. — Is any body cold ? — Somebody is cold. — Who is cold ? —
The little boy, whose father has lent you a horse, is cold. — ^Why
does he not warm himself ?-*Because his father has no money to
buy coals. — Will you tell him to come to me to warm himself?
— ^I will tell him so {dirgUeh). — ^Do you remember any thing ? —
I remember nothing. — What does your uncle recollect? — He
recollects what you have promised him.— What have I promised
him ? — ^You have promised him to go to Italy with him next
winter. — ^I intend to do so, if it is not too cold. — ^Why do you
withdraw from the fire ? — ^I have been sitting near the fire thia
hour and a half, so that I am no longer cold. — ^Does not your
friend like to sit near the fire % — ^He likes, on the contrary, much
{moUo) to sit near the fire, but only when he is cold. — ^May one
(c» pud) approach your uncle ? — One may approach him, fer he
receives every body (totti).— Will you sk down? — I will sit
down. — ^Where does your father sit down ? — ^He sits down near
me. — Where shall I sit down ?— You may {pud) sit near me. —
So you sit down near the fire ? — ^I do not sit down near the fire,
for I am afraid of being too warm.— Do you recollect my brother ?
— ^I. recollect him.

159.
Do your parents recollect their old friends ? — ^They recollect
them. — ^Do you recollect these devices ? — I do not recollect them.
— ^Have you recollected that ? — I have recollected it. — Has your
uncle recollected those devices ? — He has recollected them. —
Have I recollected my exercise ? — ^You have recollected it. —
Have you recollected your exercises ?— I have recollected them,
for I have learnt them by heart i and my brothers have recoh

flFTT-FIEST LESSON. 259

lected theirsy because thegr hare learnt dtasm by heart.-^s,i| long
since you saw your fic^d froa Paris 1*^1 saw bim a fcrtnight
ago. — ^Do your scholara like to team by beart) — They do not
like to learn by heart ; th^ like reading and writing better than
learning by heart. — Do you like cider better than wine ? — I like
wine better than cider. — Does your brother like to play ? — He
likes to study better than to play. — Do you like veal better than
mutton ? — I like the latter better than the former. — ^Do you like
to drink better than to eat ? — ^I like to eat better than to drink ;
but my uncle likes to drink better than to eat. — Does the French,
man like fowl better than fish ? — He likes fish better than fowl.
— ^Do you like to speak better than to write ? — I like to do both.
— ^Do you like honey better than sugar ? — I like neither. — ^Does
your father like coffee better than tea ? — He likes neither. — Can
you understand me ? — ^No, Sir, for you speak too fast. — Will
you be kind enough {aver la honid) not to speak so fast ? — ^I will
not speak so fast, if you will listen to me.

160.
Can you understand what my brother tells you ? — He speaks
so fast that I cannot understand him. — Can your pupils under-
stand you ? — ^They understand me when I speak slowly ; for, in
order to be understood, one must speak slowly. — Is it necessary
to speak aloud {forte or ad alia voce) to learn Italian ? — ^It is
necessary to speak aloud. — Does your master speak aloud 1 — He
speaks aloud and slow, — Why do you not buy any thing of that
merchant ? — ^He sells so dear that I cannot buy any thing of him.
— ^Will you take me to adother? — I will take you to the son of
the one whom you bought of last year. — ^Does he sell as dear as
this ? — ^He sells cheaper (a migUor mereato), — ^Do your children
like to learn Italian better than Spanish ? — ^They do not like to
learn either; they only like to learn German. — ^Do you like
mutton? — I like beef better than mutton. — ^Do your children like
cake better than bread ? — ^They like both. — ^Has he read all the
books which he bought ? — He bought so many {tanU) that he
cannot read them all. — Do you wish to write some exercises ?—
I have written so many that I cannot write any more. — Why
does that man run away ? — ^He runs away because he is afraid.

260

FIFTY-SBCOIfD LESSON.

— Will any one do him harm ? — ^No one will do him hann ; but
he dares not stay, because he has not done his task, and is afraid
of being punished. — Will any one touch him ? — ^No one will
touch him, but he will be punished by his master for not having
( per non aver) done his task. (See end of Lesson XXIV.)

FIFTY-SECOND LESSON.
LezUme einjuaniesima secanda.

By the side of.

To pass bj the tide of loiiia one.
I hare paned by the side of yov.
Hare yon passed by the aide of my
. biotherl
I have passed by the side of him.

if Accanto a,
\Anaioa.
t Passare accanto ad uno.
t Son passato accaato a LeL
t B Ella paasata accanto a

tello?
t Son passato accanto a lid.

mio fra*

To foss hy a place.

I have passed by the theatre.
He has passed by the castle.
Too have passed before my ware-
house.

( f Passare euxanto ad un Imogo.

I \Fassare vidno ad un hiogo.
t Son passato vlcino al teatro.
t & passato Ticino al castello.
t Ella d passato davantl al mlo ma
ganino.

To dare.

I dare not go thither.

Be dares not do it.

I did not dare to teU him so.

Ardire (see Lesson L).

Non ardisco andard.
Non ardisce farlo.
Non ho ardito dli«llelo.

FIFTV-SKCOND LESSON.

261

To make use of^ to use.

00 you ute my hone 7

1 use it.

Does your lather use it 7

He uses it.

Have yon used my gan. 1

I have uaed it.

They have uaed your hooka.

They have uaed them.

Servirsi di, adoperarc 1.
t Si serve Ella del 4nio cavaUo? (Vi

servite voi^)
t Me DC servo,
t Se no serve 11 di Lei padro 7
t Se ne serve.

t S' d Ella servita del mlo 8ehioppo7
t Me ne son tervito.
t Hanno adoperato i dl Lei Ubri.
t Li hanno adoperatL

Toinstruet.

I inatmet, thoa instmcteat, he in-

structa.
We, you, they inatmct

r Ammaestrare'-^iimmaestraio,
< Instruire, or istruire (isco) —
( instruito, or istrvito.
Istruiaco, iatruisd, iatruiace.

Istruiamo, iatrulte, istruiscono.

To teach.
To teach some one something.
He teaches me arithmetic.

I teach you Italian.

I have taught him Italian.

To teach some one to do some-
Mng.

Ha teaches me to read.
I teach liim to write.

Tlie French maater (meaning the
maater of the Fr^ch language).

The French maater (meaning that the
maater is a Frenchman, whatever
he teaches).

To shave.
To get shaved.

Insegnare 1.

Insegnare qualcosa a qualeuno.

W inaegna 1' aritmetica (a fem.

noun).
Le insegno 1' italiano. O vi inaegno.
GU ho insegnato 1' italiano.

Insegnar a qudlcuno a far

quaiche cosa.

M' inaegna a leggere.
Gl' inaegno a scrivere.

II maestro di firancesa.
n maestro franoeae.

I f Sbarharsi.
\ t Farsi la harba.
j t Farsi far la harha.
\ f Farsi sharbare.

963

nmr-sBcoND lbssoh.

To dress.

To undress.

To dress one^s self.

To undress one*s self.

Hare you dressed youraelf 1
I have not yet dressed myseIC
Have you dressed the chUd 1
I have dressed it

To undo.

To get rid of.
Are yon getting rid of your damaged

sugarl
I am getting rid of it
Did you get rid of your old ship 1

I did get rid of it.

To fart with.
The dedgn, the intention.

Toiniendyor to hoot (he vsten-

I intend to go thither.

We have the intention to do it.

Do yon intend to part with your

horses 1
I have already parted with them.
He has parted with his gon.

To discharge.
Have you discharged your servant 1
I have discharged him.

To get rid of some one.

I did get rid of him.

Did your &ther get rid of that man 1

He did get rid of him.

Vestire — vesHio.

SpqgUare — spogUaio,

Vestirsi.

Spogliarsi.

S' i Ella vestital Vi slete^-esdtol
Non mi sono ancor vestito.
Avete vestito il bambino?
L' ho vestito.

Disfare.
Disfarsi di.

Si disa Ella del dl Lei sneefam

avariatol
Me ne dislaccio.
S' d Elladis&tta del di Lei veochio

bastimento 1
Me ne son dia&tto.

Disfarsi.

L' intenzione (a fmn. noun), fl di-
B6gno.

Designare, o aver intetuione
di.

Ho intenzione di andard.

Abbiamo intenzione di fario.

Ha EUa intenzione di dis&urai dd dl

Leicavalli?
Me ne sono gid dis&tto.
S' d dis&tto del Buo schioppo.

SLieensaare 1.
Mandar via.

Ha Ella iioeozialo

vltore 1
L* ho licenziato*

U di Lei ser-

( f Sharazzarsi di quakuno.

( f Sbrogliarsi di putlcuno.

Mi sono sbrogUalo di iui.

II di Lei padre s* d sbrogUato di

coatui7
Se n' h sbrogUato.

FIFTY- SECOND LESSON.

M^

To wake.

To awake,

i generally awake at six o'clock in the

morning.
My servant generally wakes me at six
o*clock in the morning.

The least noise wakes me.
A dream has waked me.
I do not make a noise in order not to
wake liim.

A dream. •
Generally.

To come down.

To alight from one's horse, to '
dismount, I

To conduct one^s self.

To behave,

I conduct myself well.

How does he conduct himself 7

Towards,

He behsTes ill towards that man.
He has behaved ill towards me.

To he worth while.

Is it worthwhile?

It IS worth while.

It is not worth white.

Is it worth while to do that 1

la It worth while to write to him 7

It is worth nothing.

Svegliare 1. Risvegliare 1.
Svegliarsi 1. Risvegliarsi \,

Ordlnariamente mi sveglio alls sei

del mattino.
11 mio servitore ordlnariamente (di

solito) mi sveglia alle sei del

mattino.
II minimo stropito mi risveglia.
Un sogno m* ha risvegliato.
Non faccio strepito per noo ris-

vegliarlo.

Un sogno.

Di solito, ordlnariamente.

Scendere * 2 ; past pa rt. sceso,

Discendere calare,
Smontare da cavallo.

Condursi*. (Less. XXXIV.)

Comportarsi 1.

Mi conduco bene.
Come si conduce 7

VersOf or inverso di.

Si comports male verso costui. '
S' d comportato male verso di mo.

{ Valer la pena.

( Meritare il conto,

Val la pena 7
Cid val la pena.
Cid non val la pena
Val la pena di farlo 7
Val la pena di scrivcrgll 7

t Ciu non vol niente.

{ Non val niente.

Is it better 7
It is better.
Win it be better?

fe meglio 7
E meglio.
Sara megUo 7

264 FIFTY 'SBCONJI LBSSON.

It will not be better.
It if better to do this than that.
It is better to stay here than go a

walking.
It is better to read a good book than

go to the theatre.

Non eark megliow

E meglio lar questo ehe qnello.

E meglio restar qui che paaseg-

giare.
k me^o logger nn buon Ubro che

andare al teafm

EXERCISES.
161.

Have your books been found? — ^They have been found.—
Where ? — Under the bed. — Is my coat on the bed ? — ^It is under
it. — ^Are your brother's clothes tmder the bed ?^-They are upon
it. — ^Have I been seen by any body. — ^You have been seen by
nobody.— Have you passed by any body ?— I passed by the side
of you, and you did not see me. — ^Has any body passed by the
side of you ? — ^Nobody has passed by the side of me. — Where
has your son passed ? — ^He has passed by the theatre. — Shall you
pass by the castle ? — ^I shall pass there. — Why have you not
^ cleaned my trunk ? — I was afraid to soil my fingers. — Has my
brother's servant cleaned his master's (iZjNidron^) guns? — He
has cleaned them. — Has he not been afraid to soil his fingers ? —
He has not been afraid to soil them, because his fingers are never
clean (puUie), — Do you use the books which I have lent you?
— I use them. — May I (passo) use your knife ?-7-Thou mayest
use it, but thou must not (non devi) cut thyself. — May my brothers
use your books ? — Tliey may use them. — May we use your gun ?
—You may use it, but you must not «poil it {non dopete guas-
iarJo), — What have you done with my coals ? — I have used them
to warm myself. — Has your brother used my horse ? — He has
used it. — Have our neighbours used our clothes ? — They have
not used them, because they did not want them. — Who has used
my hat ? — ^Nobody has used it. — Have you told your brother to
come down ? — ^I did not dare to tell him. — Why have you not
dared to tell him ? — Because I did not wish to wake him. — Has

FIFTY-SECOND LBSSON. 265

he told you not to wake him 1 — ^He has told me not to wake him
when he sleeps.

162.

Have you shaved to-day ? — I have shaved. — Has your brother
shaved ?-— He has not shaved himself, but he got shaved. — Do you
shave often ? — ^I shave every morning, and sometimes also in the
evening. — ^When.do you shave in the evening 1 — When I do not
dine at home. — How many times a day does your father shave ?
— He shaves 6nly once a day, but my uncle shaves twice a day.
— Does your jousin shave often 1 — He shaves only every other
day (ogrU due giorm), — At what o'clock do you dress in the
morning ? — I dress as soon as I have breakfasted, and I breakfast
every day at eight o'clock, or a quarter past eight. — Does your
neighbour dress before he breakfasts ? — He breakfasts before he
dresses. — At what o'clock in the evening dost thou undress ? —
I undress as soon as I return from the theatre. — Dost thou go
every evening to the theatre ? — I do not go every evening, for it
is better to study than to go to the theatre. — ^At what o'clock dost
thou undress when thou dost not go to the theatre ? — Then I
undress as soon as I have supped, and go to bed at ten o'clock. —
Have you already dressed the child (t7 harnbino) ? — ^I have not
dressed it yet, for it is still asleep {dorme ancara). — ^At what
o'clock does it get up ? — ^It gets up as soon as it is waked. — Do
you rise as early as I ? — I do not know at what o'clock you rise
(si levi, subj.), but I rise as soon as I awake. — Will you tell my
servant to wake me to-morrow at four o'clock 1 — I will tell him.
—Why have you risen so early ? — My children have made such
a noise {tarUo strepiio) that they awakened me. — ^Have you slept
well ? — I have not slept well, for you made too much noise. — At
what o'clock did the good captain awake? — He awoke at a
quarter past five in the morning.

163.

How did my child behave ? — He behaved very well. — How
did my brotlier behave towards yon ? — He behaved very well
towards me, for he behaves well towards every body. — Is it worth
while to write to that man ? — It is not worth while to write tc

12

966 FIFTY-8£C0ND LESSOM.

him. — ^Is it worth while to dismount from my hone in «4dc;r to
buy a cake ? — It is not worth while, for it is not long siuce you
ate. — ^Is it worth while to dismount from my horse in order to
give something to that poor man (a questo povero) 1 — ^Yes, for he
seems ( pare) to want it ; but you can give him something with-
out dismounting from your horse.— Is it better to go to the theatre
than to study ? — ^It is better to do the latter than the former. — ^Is
it better to learn to read French than to speak it ? — ^It is not worth
while to learn to read it without learning to speak it. — ^Is it better
to go to bed than to go a walking ?-— It is better to do the latter
than the former. — ^Is it better to go to France than to Germany ?
— It is not worth while to go to France or to Germany when one
has no wish to travel. — Did you at last get rid of that man ? — ^I
did get rid of him« — Why has your father parted with his horses ?
— ^Because he did not want them any more. — Has your mer-
chant succeeded at last to get rid of his damaged sugar ?^-
He has succeeded in getting rid of it. — ^Has he sold it on
credit ? — ^He was able to sell it for cash, so that he did not
sell it on credit. — ^Who has taught you to read % — ^I have learnt
it with (da) a French master. — ^Has he taught you to write?
— He has taught ma to read and to write. — ^Who has taught
your brother arithmetic {V aritmedca) ? — ^A French master has
taught it him {vMegnaia). — ^Do you call me % — ^I call you.-»
What do you wish {desiderate) ? — Why do you not rise ? do you
not know that it is already late ? — ^Whal do you want me for
{che vuol Ella) ?— I have lost all my money, and I came to
beg you to lend me some. — ^What o'clock is it I — ^It is already
a quarter past six, and you have slept long enough (dormitG
mbboHanxay^^ls it long since you rose ? — It is an hour and a
half since I rose. — Do you wish to take a walk with me ?^»
I cannot go a walking, for I am waiting for my Italian master.

PIPTY-THIRD LESSON.
Leziane cinquanteaima terza.

To change.
To change one thing for another.

I change my hat for hie.

The change (exchange).

To change (meaning to put
other things).

Do yon change your hat t
I do change it.
He changea hia boota.
They change their clothea.

on

CanMareffar canMo di.

{Cambiare qnalche coa^ con qnaleht
coaa.
Far cambio di qualche coaa con
qnalche coaa.
e Faccio cambio del mio cappeDo col
< ano.

V Cambio il mio cappeUo col ano.
II cambio (ooncamblo).

Muiare 1.

HntaEUaiicappellol
Lo muto.

EgiimntagUetiTali.
Eglino mutano i veatiti

To mix.
I mix among.the men.
He mlzea among the eoldiera.

Among.

t Mischiarsi 1.
t Mi miachio fra gli oomlnL
t Simiachiafraleoldati.
FrBftnu

3b recogmzej or to acknowledge. Riconoecere * (is conjugated

like its primitive conoeeere *,
Lessons XXVIII. and
XXXIIL).

Rioonoace Ella qneat^ oomol
b A lungo tempo che non V ho vlato
che non lo liconoeoo piii.
Ofc». A. When there ia a compadaon between two aentencei^ than k
rendered by ifffucttodU^ followed by non. Ex.

Do yon recognise that manl
It ia ao long aince I aaw him that I do
not recollect him.

268

PIFTY-THIRD LBSSON.

Ihaw moro bread than I ahall eat.

That man haa Bsora money than he

will apend.
There la more wtne than will be

neceeeaiy.
You haye more money than yon wUl

want.
We have more clothea than we want.

That man haa fewer frienda than he

To fancy.
To ihink.

To hopfif to expect.

Do yon expect to find him there 1
I do expect it.

To earn, to gain^ to get.
How much haye yoa gained 1

Haa your lather already atarted

(departed) 1
He ia rea^y to depart

Ready.

To make ready.

To make one's se^ ready*

To keep one's se^f ready.

I mnady to Bit out

TorendytospUt.

To hreak some one's heart.
Ton break that man'a heart.
Whoae heart do I break 1

t Ho pih pane di qnello che non

mangerd.
t Qneat' nemo ha pKl danaro di quello

che non lapenderi.
t Yi d piii Tino di quello che non fara

d* uopo {or non aara biaogno).
t Blla ha plh danaro di quello che non

le abbiaognerk.
t Abbiamo pik yestiti di quello che non

oe ne abbiaogneri.
t Q,neat' uomo ha meno amid dl

quello che eg|l non penal (aubjnno-

tive, of which hereafter).

ilmaginare or immaginare.
Imaginarsiy credersi.
Pensare I,

Sperare 1. AspettarsL

Spera EUa troyaroelol
Loapero.

Chtadagnare 1.
Quanto ba fiUa giiad^gaa1»1

fe gik partltoU di Lei padrel

fe pronto a parti ra.

Pronto (takes a' before the

Infinitive).

Preparare, aUesUre {Ueo).

Prepararsi, aUesti^si a.

Tenersi pronto a.

: m tengo pronto a partire.
[ Son pronto a partire.

S^piardate 1*

Squarciare U euore ad uno.
Ella aquarcia il cuore a queaf uono 1
A chi aquarcio io fl cuore?

FIFTY- rHlRD. LBSSON.

269

To tpiU Ink upon the book.

To spreadf extend,
7b expatiate, to lay stress ffpon.

That man is always expatiating vpon
that subject.
The subject.
Always.

To stretch one^s self.

To stretch one's self along the floor.

The S0&, the bed.
He Stretches himself upon the sofa.

Spargere * ; past part, sparso,

Spargere dell* inchlostro sul libra
Spandere versare.

Stendere * ; past part, steso.

Estenuersi * jsofpra.

Quest' uomo si estende sempre su .

questo soggetto. (0 si difibnde.)
II soggetto.
6empre.

K Sdraiarsi,

( Stendersi.

Sdraiarsi (stendersi) sul pavimento.

U soO, il <!anapd, 11 letto.

SI stende (si sdraia) sul canapd.

To hang on or upon.

The wall.
I hang my coat on the wall.
He hangs his hat upon the tree.

We hang our clothes upon the nails.

Th0 thief has been hanged.
The thief!
The robber, the highwayman.

i r Appendere * a; past part.
j < appeso,
( Appiccare 1.

Ilmuro.

Appendo U mio abito al mnro.

SgU appendell suo cappaUo all' «l-

bero.
Appendiamo i nostri Teitltl al

chiodL
II ladro d stato applceato.
II ladro.
II ladro da strada, il maanadiero.

Tou hare always been stadioufl, and
¥/ill always be so.

Tour brother is, and will always be

good.
A well-educated son neyer giyee his

father any grief; he loves, honoiVSi

and respects him.

Ella d sempre stata stndiosa e to
■ari sempre. (Vol sSete stato sem-
pre studloso e lo sarete sempre).

II di Lei fratello d sempre savio e lo
aar& sempre.

Un -figlio ben edncato non.dA mat
dolore a suo padre ; P ama, I' onora
e lo rispetta.

If I can, I will receive him willingly. 1 1 Se potrd, lo riceverd volontterl.

06«* B. The conditional eonjuoetion m, if; may in Italian be followed b$
ihe future.

270 Pimr-TUIRD LESSON.

If you go there, we shaU eee each Se andrft, d vedremo. O «e voi v)

other. I andrete.

IfoiirafiainpeniiitQa,we8haUtakea; Se i noatri afiail oa io permetta-
ahort journey.

WUHDily.
The affidr, the oecupatioii.
To allow, to permit.

Tha Toyaga, the journey.

ranno, andremo a Cira urn piccolo

Yiaggio.
Volontleri or Tolentierl.
L^affiuna.
Parmettere • (la coiyiigated like Its

primitive metUre *, Leaaons

XXIV. and XXXIII.)
llviaggio.

EXERCISES.

164.

Do you hope to receive a note to-day ? — ^I hope to receive one.
—From whom V-Froa a friend of mine* — What dost thou hope ?
i— I hope to see my parents to-day, for my tutor has promised me
to take ine to them.^-Does your friend hope to receive any thing ?
— ^He hopes to receive something, for he has studied well. — ^Do
you hope to arrive early in Paris ? — We hope to arrive there at a
quarter past eight, for our father is waiting for us this evening.
—Do you expect to find him at home ? — ^We expect it. — For what
have you changed .your coach, of which you have spoken to me?
—I have changed it for a fine Arabian horse. — Do you wish to
exchange your book fi>r mine ? — I cannot, for I want it to study
Italian.— Why do you take your hat ofi*? — I take it ofi* because I
see my old master coming {vedo venire). — ^Do you put on another
(muiare) hat to go to the market ? — ^I do not put on another to go
to the market, but to go to the concert.-^When will the concert
take place ? — ^It will take place the day after to-morrow. — ^Why
do you go away ? — ^Do you not amuse yourself here ? — ^You are
mistaken, Sir, when you say that I do not amuse myself here ;
for I assure you that I find a great deal of pleasure in conversing
(a conversare) with you ; but I am going, because I am expected
at my relation's ball. — Have you promised to go? — ^I have
promised. — Have you changed your hat in order to go to the
English captain's ? — ^I have changed my hat, but I have not

FIFTY-THIRD LSSSON. 271

changed my 'coat or my boots. — How many times a day dost thou
change thy ddthes ? — I change them to dine and to go to the
theatre.

165.

Why do you mix among these men ?— I mix among them in
order to know what they say of me. — What will become of you
if you always mix among the soldiers ? — ^I do not know what will
become of me, but I assure you that they will do me no harm, for
they do not hurt any body. — ^Have you recognized your father ?
— It was so long since I saw him, that I did not recognize him. —
Did he recognize you ? — ^He recognized me instantly. — How long
have you had this coat ? — It is a long time since I have had it. —
How long has your brother had that gun ? — ^He has had it a great
while. — ^Do you still speak French ? — ^It is so long since I spoke
it, that I have nearly foigotten it all. — How long is it since your
cousin has been learning French ? — It is only three months since.
— Does he know as much as you ?-^He knows more than I, for
he has been learning it longer. — Do you know why that man does
not eat ? — ^I believe he is not {che turn ahbia^ subj.) hungry, for
he has more bread than ho can {fossa^ subj.) eat. — ^Have you
given your son any money ? — I have given him more than he will
spend {eke non ispenderd), — Will you give me a glass of cider?
— ^You need not drink cider, for there is more wine than will be
necessary. — Am I to {dehho to) sell my gun in order to buy a new
hat I— -You need not sell it, for you have more money than you
will want. — ^Do you wish to speak to the shoemaker ? — I do not
wish to speak to him, for we have more boots than we shall want.
— Why do the French rejoice? — They rejoice because they
flatter themselves they have many good friends. — ^Are they not
right in rejoicing (di rdUegrard) ? — They are wrong, for they
have fewer friends than they imagine (cAe jiefmho, subj.).

166.

Are you ready to depart with me ? — ^I am so. — ^Does your uncle

depart with us ? — ^He departs with us, if he pleases {se Pttofc).—

Will you tell him to be ready {di ienersi pronto) to start to-

morrow at six o'clock in the evening ?— I will tell him so. — Is

d79 FIFTY-FOURTH USSaOM.

this young man ready to go oat ? — ^Not yet, but he will soon be
ready .»-W by have they banged that man ? — They have hanged
him, because he has killed somebody. — Have they banged the
man who stole the horse from your brother? — They have
punished htm, but they have not hanged him ; they pnly hang
highwaymen in our country (nel nostra paese). — ^What have you
lone with my coat ? — ^I have hanged (appeso) it on the wall. —
Will you hang my hat upon the tree ? — ^I will hang it thereou
{appenderveh), — Have you not seen my gloves ? — I found them
under your bed, and have hanged them upon the rails. — Has the
thief who stole your gun been hanged ? — He has been punished,
but he has not been hanged. — Why do you expatiate so much
upon that subject ? — ^Because it is necessary to speak on all sub*
jects. — If it is necessary to listen to you, and to answer you when
you expatiate upon that subject, I will hang my hat upon the
nail, stretch myself along the floor, listen to you, and answer you
as well as I can {alia meglio). — ^You will do well. — Shall you go
to Italy this year ? — If I prosper (se faro buoni affari) I shall go
there. — Shall you go to the captain ? — ^I will go if you go. — Will
you lend me a book ? — ^If I Dan {se potrd) I will lend you one. —
Will your son receive a present ? — ^If he is {se sara) good and in-
dustrious, he will receive one ; but if he is idle, he will receive
nothing. — Shall you go out ? — ^If it is {sard) fine weather, I shall
go out ; but if it rains I shall remain at home.

FIFTY-FOURTH LESSON.
Leziane einquafUesima quarto.

To he well. Star bene.

How do 70U do ? Come sta 1

I am well. Sio bene (or simply heiu).

FIFTY-FOURTH LBSSOM.

274

Olts. A. The verbs to be, and to do, are both exprened in Italian by the Terb
Miare \ when they are aaed in Engliah to inquire after, or to spealK of a person's
health.

r Per ubbidirla.

I Per servirla (an expression com-
I monly nsed in Italian, in answer to
[ an inquiry after one's health).
Come sta il di Lei signor padre 1

To serve you.

How is yonr father?

(Xm. B, The qualifications of Stgnore^ Mr., Signora^ Mrs., Sigrwrmot
Miss, usually follow the possessive pronouns In Italian, when we speak to a
person respecting his parents, relations, or friends, and we mean to pay them
some respect.

HeisiU.
Tour father.
Tour brother.
Your cousin.
Tour cousins.
Tour uncles.

To douhi a thing, \

To question any thing. \

Do you doubt that 1

I doubt it

I do not doubt it.

I make no question, have ao doubt

of it
What do you doubt 1
I doubt what tliat man has toM me.

The doubt.
Without doubt, no doubt
There is no doubt about it.

Sta male,
t 11 di Lei signor padre,
t II df Lei signor fratello.
t II di Lei signor cugino.
1 1 di Lei signorl cuglni.
1 1 di Lei signorl zU.

Duhilare di quakhe cosa.

Dubita Ella pi cid 7
Ne dubito.

Non ne dubito.

Di che dubita Ellal

Dubito di dd che m* ha detto

uomo.
II dubbio.
Senza dubbio.
Non V ha dubbio.

To agree to a thing.

Do you agree to that?
I agree to It.

Convenir^ di quakhe eoea
(conjugated like its primitive
venire .** Lessons XXIV.,
XXXIV., and XLVL).
Conviene Ella di cid 1
Ne convengo.

How much have you paid ftr thati t Qnanto ha Ella pilgato quetto

hati I cappellol

I hnTO paid three crowns for ii. • t L' ho pagato tie scudL

12*

i74

rimr-FouRTH lxssoh.

I hftTa bought thit hone .^ five
hundred firanct.

The price.
Haye you agreed about the price 1

We have agreed about it
About what haye you agreed T
About the price.

Ho compnto questo caTiOo jnt

dnqne cento finuichL
Upreno.
Sono EUeno conyenute del presiol

(O rfete yoi conyennto.)
Ne aiamo eonyenutt.
Dl che aono EUeno conyenaie?
DelpreaEso,

To agree, to compote a differ^
ence.

To feel (to perceive).

To consetU.

I consent to go thither.
He coneenft to pay It me.

Accordarn.

SenUre 8.

iConsetUire (di before Infin.).
Accottsentire (di before Inf.).

Acooneento d' andanrl.
Acoonaente di pagannelo.
Pure,peiOb

To wear (meaning to wear

garmenU).

What garments does he wear 1
He wears beautiful garments.

Tile garment.

Against my custom.
As customary.
My partner.

To observe eomething.
To take notice ofeomethuig,
Do you talce notice of that 1

I do take notice of it

Did you obeerye thati

Did you notice what he did 7

I did notice it.

J

Portare 1.

Che yestimenU porta egli 1

Poru bei yestimentL
( U yestimento.
{ Pbir, I yestimenU * le yestimoBti.

Contro il mio solito (costume).
Come al solito.
II mio socio.

Aceorgersi * 2 ; di quakhe
eosa. Past part, accorton.

Si aocoige EUodi questo? VI acoor-

gets yoi dL
Me ne acooigo.
Si a Ella aocorta diqvesto ?
Si A Ella aocorta dl eld cue ha

iattol
Me ne son acoorto.

FIFTY-FOURTH LESSON.

276

To e^epect (to hope).

Do you expect to receive a note from

yoorundel
I expect It.
He expects It.
We expect ft
Have we expected it 7
We haye expected it.

To get (meaning to procure).
I cannot procure any money.
He cannot procure any thing to eat.

To make fun of some one^ to

laugh at some one.
To laugh at something.

He laughs at every body. >

He criticises every body. )

Do you laugh at that man 7
I do not laugh at him.

To stopf to stay.

Have you stayed long at Berlin?
I stayed there only three days.

f Attenderst * 2 ; past part.

atiesosi* {Aspetiare o aspeU

tarsi.)

S' attende EUa a ricevere un Ugilet*

todaldiLeizio7
Mi vi attendo. Lo aspetto.
Vi si attende. Vi s* attende.
Vi ci attendiamo. Ce lo aspettiamo.
Vicisiamoatte8i7
Vi ci siamo attesi. L' abbiamo atteso.

f Procurarsi.

( Non posso pBoemimi danaro.
c Non posso procnrarmi del danaro.
NoQ pud pmcipirarfll dl che man-
gier^.

f BfffuTsi (1) di qualcuno.
Buriard di.

Ridtrn * (2) di quaUhe cosa,
p. past* risosi.

Ei si beffa di tutti.

Si befia Ella di quest* uomol
Non me ne befib.

Fermarsi 1.

f La si d fermata molto tempo a Ber-
I lino 7 (Si d ella fermata.)
I )& rlmasta Ella lungo tempo a
[ Berlino7 (Siete voi rimasto.)
Non mi vi son fermato che tre
giomi.

To sojourn, to stay.

Where does your brother stay at
present 7

At present, actually.

He stf ys at IHorence.

The residence, stay, abode.
Paris is a fine place to live in.

Soggiomare 1. Stare*.

Ore soggioma attualmente U di Lei
signorfratello7

Attualmente.

Soggioma a Firenxa.
II soggiomo.
t Parigi d un bel soggiomo.

270

riFTY-FOURTH LBSSO>.

Alter reading.
After cutting myself.

06t. C. Sec i::^ Lesson XL.

After dressing yourself.

After dressing himself
After shaving ourselves.
After warming themsehres.
I relumed the boolc after reading it.

I threw the knife away after cutting
myself.

You went to the concert after dressing
yourself.

He went to the theatre after dressing
himselC

We breaicfasted after shaving oar-
selves.

They went out after warmiqg them-
selves.

To return {to restore).

The sick persop (the patient).
Tolerably well.
It is rather late.
It is rather far.

t Dopo aver letto.
1 1 Dopo eseermi tagliato

t Dopo essersi vestita. (O esserrl

Test! to.)
t Dopo essersi vestlto.
t Dopo esserci sbarbati.
t Dopo essersi scaldati (rlscaldati).
t Ho resdtnito ii libro dopo averlo

- letto.
t Ho gettato il coltella dopo esserml

tagliato.
t Ella d andata al concerto dopo e»-

sersi vestita.
t Egli d andato a teatro > dopo essersi

vestito.
t Abbiamo fistto colaxione dopo c

sbarbati.
t Sono usciti dopo essersi scaldatL

Restitttire 8.

II malato. L* infenno.
Mediocremente (abbastania bene).
E molto tardi«
fe molto lontano.

EXERCISES.
167.
How is your father {il di Lei signor padre) 1 — He is (only) so-
so {cosi cosi). — How is your patient ?-^He is a little better to-day
than yesterday (d' ten). — ^Is it long since you saw your brothers
(i di Lei signori fratelU) ? — I saw them two days ago. — How
art thou ? — ^I am tolerably well {ahhastanza bene). — How long
has your cousin been learning French ? — He has been learning

' There is a difference between andare-al teatro^ and andan a teatro, Hm
former determines the theatre we are going to, whilst the latter implies to go te
the ploy merely. Ex. Vaelo al teatro reaie^ lam going lo the royal theatre.

FIFTY-FOURTH L£SSON. 271

It only these three months. — ^Does h^ already speak it? — He
already speaks, reads, and wrhes it better than your brother, who
has been learning it these two years. — Is it long since you heard
of my uncle ? — ^It is hardly a fortnight {quineUci giomi) since I
heard of him. — Where is he staying now ? — ^He is staying a;
Berlin, but my father is in London. — ^Did you stay long at
Vienna ? — I stayed there a fortnight. — How long did your cousin
stay at Paris ? — He stayed there only a month. — ^Do you like to
speak to my uncle ? — I like much to speak to him, but I do not
like him to laugh (che si hefi^ subj.) at me. — Why does he laugh
at you ? — He laughs at me, because I speak badly. — Why has
your brother no friends ? — ^He has none, because he criticises
every body. — Why are you laughing at that 0ian ? — ^I do not
intend {non ho intenzume) to laugh at him.-* I beg ( pregare) you
not to do it, for you will break his heart If you laugh at him. —
Do you doubt what I am telling you ? — I do not doubt it.— Do
you doubt what that man has told ycNi 1 — ^I doubt it, for he has
often told stories (tnentire). — Have you at last bought the horse
which you wished {che voleva) to buy last month ?-*I have not
bought it, for I have not been able to procure money*

168.
Has your uncle at last bought the garden ?— He has not bought
it, for he could not agree about the price (nelpretxo). — Have you
at last agreed about the price of that picture ? — ^We have agreed
about it. — ^How much have you paid for it ? — ^I have paid fifteen
hundred (mine cinque cento) francs for it. — ^What hast thou bought
to-day ? — ^I have bought two fine horses, three beautiful pictures,
and a fine gun. — ^For how much hast thou bought the pictures 1
— ^I have bought them for seven hundred francs. — ^Do you find
them dear ? — ^I do not find them dear. — Have you agreed with
your partner ? — ^I have agreed with him {con hd), — ^Does he con-
sent to pay you the price of the ship? — He consents to pay it me.
— ^Do you consent to go to France ? — I consent to go there. — Have
you seen your old friend again {rivedere *) ? — ^I have seen him
again. — Did you recognize him ? — I could hardly {non V ho qiuui
pm) recognize him, for, contrary to his custom, he wears a large
hat.— How is he ? — ^Ile is very well. — What garments does he

278 FIFTY-FOURTH LSSSON.

wear? — ^He wears beautiful new garments. — Have you taken
notice of what your boy has done ? — ^I have taken notice of it. —
Have you punished him for it ? — ^I have punished him for it. — Has
your father already written to you ? — ^Not yet ; but I expect to
receive (mi attendo) a note from him to-day. — Of what do you
complain ? — I complain of not being able to procure some money.
— Why do these poor men complain ? — ^They complain because
they cannot procure any thing to eat. — How are your parents ?
— They are as usual (came alsoBto) very well. — ^Is your uncle
well ? — ^He is better than he usually is (del soUio). — Have you
already heard of your friend who is in Grermany ? — I have already
written to him several times (partcchie voUe) ; however (ma)^ he
has not answered me yet.

169.

What hftve you done with the books which the English captain
has lent jrmi f— 1 have returned them to him, after reading diem.
—Have you thrown away your knife ? — I have tlirown it away
after cutting myself. — When did I go to the concert ? — ^You went
thither after dressing yourself. — When did your brother go to the
ball ? — ^He went thither after dressing himself. — When did you
breakfast ? — We breakfasted after shaving ourselves. — ^When did
our neighbours go out ? — ^They went out after warming them-
selves.— Why have you punished your boy ? — ^I have punished
him because he has broken my finest glass. — ^I gave him some
wine, and Instead of drinking it, he spilt it on the new carpet, and
broke (e ha rotto) the glass. — What did you do this morning ? —
I shaved after rising, and went out after breakfasting. — ^What did
your father do last night (ieri sera) ? — He supped after going to
the play, and went to bed after supping. — ^Did he rise early ? —
He rose at sunrise. (See end of Lesson XXIY.)

PIPTYPIPTH LESSON.
Lezione cinquantes'ima quinta.

FEKININE SUBSTANTIYBS AND ADJECTIVES.

OSCUKSlOHOr THS ABTICU lUmUIB.

Norn. Gen. Dai.
La, deUa, alia,

Le, delle, alle,

Ace. AbL
la, dalla.
le, dalle.

Sing. JPhtr.

The house „ thehonaea. iVbm. Lacaat „ Lecaae.

Ofthehonae „ of thehonaea. Om. Delia eaaa „ Deile

Tothehouae „ to the honaea. Dot. Alia eaaa „ Alle

Thahonae „ thehonaea. Aee. La eaaa „ Le

From the houae,, firom the honaea. JhL Dalla eaaa „ Dalle

The contraction of the feminine article with certain prepoaltiona ia aa followa :
(See Leaaon XLIY.)

Singidar,

I>«Ba,ofthe, lor dila.

AUa, to the, — a la.

DattOf from the, •«• da la.

Ndla, in the, — in la.

Cotto, with the, — eon la.

JPeOa, for the, — par fa.

SullOf npon tbe^ — mla.

PhtraL

DOU, for diU.

AOe, ^ aU.

DaUe, — dale.

Cotte, — conU.

PtUe^ — jwrla,

8uXUi — aui*.

Obt. A. When the definite article atanda hefore a vowel, it ia in the aingnlar
alike for both gendersi and in the plnral the feminine article doea not varj^ aa ;

•^ISS''

Nam, Om. Ihd.
. L', den*, an*,

. Le, delle, alle.

Aa. AJbL
I*, dair.

le, dalle.

Obf . B. The plnral of the article la ia nerer abridged, except, however, when
the noun begiba with an «^ aa :

MO

KIFTY. FIFTH LBSSON.

The eloquence.
TUe eminence.
The execution.
Of the eminence!, of the eiecutions.

Sing.
V eloqutnia,
L' eminenza,
L' eMCuioiia^
Dell' eminenze,

Phir,
V eloqaenzfl.
P eminenze.
r eeecuzloni.
dell' eeecoaionL

Obt. C. HVhen, however, the noun beginning with < hee in the plunl the
eame termination as In the eingular, the article cannot be abridged. Ex.

The image.
The emphaaia.
Ecstasy.
The age.
The extremity.

Sing,
L'effigie,
L' enfaii,
L'eetaai,
L'eta,
L'eetraBit),

Pfvr.

Leeffigie.

Leen&at

LeestasL

Ueta.

Le eetramiti.

RvL» L^Nouna and a4jectivee ending in a are feminine ^ and form their
plural In changing a into e. Ex.

The woman—women.

The table.

The shoe.

The stocking.

The pencil.

The stone.

The brush.

The broom.

The pistol.

The daughter.

The sister.

Tlie candle.

The bottle.

La donna,
La tavola.
La Scarpa.
Laealia,
Lamadta,
Lapieti%
Laapanola,
Laacopa,
La piatola,
LafigUa,
La aorella,
La candela,
Labottigiia,

PfKT.

ledoime.

le taYole.

leacarpe.

lecalse.

lematite.

lepieCie.

leapaiioifl.

leaeope.

le pistole.

lefiglie.

le aorelle.

le candele.

lebottigUe.

1 From tldi rule must be excepted some nouna of dignity and of
belonging to men, and aome novna derived from the Gkeek, auch as

Sing.
II papa,
n clima,
II dladema,
II diploma,

II dogma (or domma),
II dnmima,

L' enigma {or enimma),
L' idioma,
11 poema,
II tema.

the pope,
the climate,
the diadem,
the diploma,
the doctrine*
the drama,
the enigma,
the idiom,
the poem,
the exercise,

Plar.
ipapl.
icUmi.
i diademi.
i dlplomi.

' i dogmi {or donimi).
idrammi.

gl' enigmi (or enimml)
gr idiomL
ipoemi.
I temi, Ac

riFTY-FIFTH LESSQll.

n$i

The shirt.

The amiable woman.

The straight stocking.
The barbarous law.
The soul.
The island.
The shade.

La camicia,
La donna ama-

bile,
La scaipa stretta,
La legge barbara,
L'anima,
L'isola,
L' ombra,

Pbtr.
le camicie.
le donne amahUi.

le scaxpe strette.
le leggi barbare.
le anlme.
le isole.
le ombre.

RvLx 2.— All nouns and adjectlTes, masculine and feminine, terminated In <
form their ploral in i, Ex.

The mother.
The key.
The invention.
The nut.

Sing.

Plur.

Lamadre,

le madri.

La chiaTO,

le chiavi.

L' invenzionei

le inyenzioni.

Lanoce,

le nod.

RviB 3.— Nouns ending in i, is, an accented yowel, and monosyllables, have
In the plural the same terminaUon as in the singular. Ex.

The metropolis.
The crisis.
The foot— feet.
The king.
The crane (a bird).
The town.
Vhtue.
Order— series.
Sort—species.

Sing.

PhLT. •

La metropoli,

le metropoli.

Lacrisi,

lecrisL

lipid (or piede).

ipid(orpledi)

lire.

ire.

Lagru,

legm.

Ladtti,

ledttt

Lavirth,

levirtJi.

La serie,

leserie.

La specie,

lespede.

Ob§. D. LamogHs, the wife, is in the plural U vu^Ut wives.

Rule 4. Nouns and a^jectiTes, masculine and ftnninine, terminated in ea^
go, CO or go, generally take an & in the plural to keep the hard sound. Ex.

Sing.

Phir.

The sleeve.

' La manica,

le maniche.

The witch.

La Strega,

le Btreghe.

The monarch.

Ilmonarca,

i monarchi.

The wood or forest.

nbosco,

iboschi.

The lake. •

Illago,

i laghi.

The inn.

L' albergo,

gli alberghi.

The rofireshment.

U rinfresco,

irinfreschL

Rich.

Ricco,

riccU.

38S

piFTY-FinR iBsaon.

Andent

AntiKik

tnUchL

The pvUh-priMt

nptrroco^

IparrochL

The oMigation.

L' obbUgo,

ffUobbUgfaL

Uetstigo,

icaatighi.

11 medico,

imedid.

L'amico,

gUamid.

11 monaoc,

i monad.

Ilporoo,

1 porci.

U Greco,

iOrecL

! L'aeparago,

gUasparagL

Ob§. E, All feminine nouni terminated in ea and ga take, without ez«
oeption, an ft in the plural. Ex.

I Sing. Plur,

V arnica, le amlche.

La lega, le leghe, Ac

The following maaealine noonj are a ISbw of the ezceptiona to the above
rule ;—

The phyaidan.
The friend.
The monk.
The hog.
The Greek. •
AeparaguB.

RvLB 6.— Some maculine nouns form their plural in a, and become feminine ;
others have a masculine plural in t, and a femininw plural in a, of which the
tatter is most in use.
a) The foUowing masculine nouns always form their plural in a :—

Plvr.
A thousand.
A hundred.
An egg.
A mile.
A pair.
A bushel
A sort of measure.

ufsd in preference ^—

The ring.
The arm.
The gut
TheheeL
The castle.
The eye-brow.
The horn.
The finger.
The thread.
The basis.
The fruit'.

Un migliaio,

lemigliaia.

Un oentinaio,

lecentinaia.

Un uoTO^

leuova.

UnmigUo,

lemiglia.

Unpaid,

lepaia.

Uno staio.

lestaia.

Unmoggio, .

lemoggia.

d a feminine plural, but the latter

Sing.

Pbar.

L*aneUo,

teanella.

11 Dracdo,

lebracda.

D budello,

lebudella.

Ilcalcagno,

leoalcagna.

Ueastdlo,

lecastella.

UdgUo,

ledglia.

11 como.

lecoma.

Ildito,

ledlta.

Dfilo,

lefila.

nfrutto,

lefrutta.

• n Jhttto is employed for fruit in general, but la fmUa and U JruUa for
fruit only.

Tlieiplndle.
The action *.
The knee.
The elbow 4.
The cry.
The Up.
The woods.
The sheet.
The limb «.
The wain.
The bone.
The apple.
The arrow.
The laughter.
Theiack.
The shriek.

Fimr-FIFTH LB8S0N.
Sing.

Ugeato,
U ginocchio,
II gomito,
II grido,
II labbro,
II legnO|
II lenzuolo,
II membro,
II muro,
L'oflflo,
II pomo,
II quadrello,
Ilriao,
II aacco,
Loatrido^

28S

Plur.

lefoaa.

legesta.

leginocohia.

lefomita.

le grida.

le iabbxa.

lelegna.

le lenxuola.

le membra.

lemora.

leoasa.

lepoma.

lequadrella.

leriaa.

leaacca.

leetrida.

CONTINUATION OF THE FIFTY-FIFTH LESSON.
Conibiuaxione delta Letione cinquaniesima quinia.

She — they.

Sing. Phir.

Eua — eiw.

De$»a — (2e»M (See Table of the
Peraonal Pronouns^
LeaaonXX.).
Obt. A. Tn the plural, tiUno^ c§n, and dette^ are more freqnently used than

Haaahel
Shehaa.
She has not.

Hadeaaat

Eaaaha.

Eaaanonha.

* Bgetto meana alao geatnre, and then ita plural iBgutu

4 Jl gmnito la alao ameasure, and ita plural la theaigomUL
> Jl Ugno meana wood for timber, or any thing else : but wood lor fltel ii
!a Ugna and U Ugno,

* Membro, a member of an assembly, la In the plural t fMmJbru
f MurOf a rampart, la in the plural i muri.

384

FIFTY-FIFTH LBSSON.

Ibfetbey(/eiiiiii»u)1
They have. "
They hare not. "

Hannodeaae?
Eaaehaano.
1 Eaaenonhanno.

Hy, mine. Fern. Sing.
Thy, thine. "
Her, hen. "
My, mine. JF^em, Phut,

Mm. Got. Dai.
La mla, della mia, alia mia,
La tna, della toa, allatoa,
Lama, deUa ana, aliaeua,
Lemie, delta mie, aile mie,

Aec. AJbL

la mia, dalla mia

la tna, dalla toa.

la ana, dalla ana.

le mie, dalle mie.

Jl padre e nio figUo, o ma figUa.
La madre a auo fi(lio, o tua figlia.
n &ncial]o e wo iiateUo, o mia m

The lather and Aif son, or kU

daughter.
The mother and her eon, or Ker

daughter.
The child and tte brother, or Us

alater.

Ob9. B. See Rule, Lesaon IT., about the poaaeaaiTe proiipun taking no aiti-
ele in tlie aingular, when it ia immediately foUowad by a name of quality or
kindred.

Ruu 1 .—The EngUah poaaeaaiTe aiQectlTea or pronouna are in the gender of
the poaaeaaor ; in Italian and French they rauat be in the gender of the thing
poaaeaaed. My, thy, hia, her, ita, muat be ezpreaaed by U «i»d, tl luo, U mtot
when the thing poaaeaaed ia maaculine^ and by la mia, ia tua, latuOi when it la
feminine, without oon^derlng in the least the gender of the poaaeaaor, as may
be aeen from the above examplea.

Pbgr.
lemiepenne.
le tue iettere.
leaueforchetie.
le noatre nod.
le voatre booehe.
le loro porte.
1 loro uaci.
le loro 1

My pen,
Thy letter,
Hia or her fork,
Our But,
Yoor month,

Thslrdoor,
rhand,

my pens,
thy letters.
hiaorherfoAa.
our nuta.
yourmoutha.

thair doors,
their han^ff.

Sing.
Lamiapenna,
La tua lettera, .
La auaforchetta,'
La noatra nooe,
LaTOstrabocca,

( La loro porta,

c n loro uado^
La bromono^

Ruia 2.— All nouns terminated In o are maaculine, except la mono, the
hand. Aa for the poetical worda imago and Cartago, tiiey are abridged from
imagine, image, Cartagine, Carthage, and are of courae feminine.

Sing.

Plw.

The pretty woman,

the pretty wo-

La vezzoaa donna.

lOTexzoae

men.

donne.

The email candle.

the small can-
dlea.

r La piccola eandela.

le pieeole
candele.

C La eandeletta.

lecandelette

The large bottle,

the large hot-

La gran bottin^

le grand! hot-

tlea.

tigHe.

FIPTY-FIFTH LESSON.

286

!

Sbig. Fiur.

imicli woman 1 whici) wemen 7

Che donna 1 che donne ?

Which daughter 1 which daughters 1

Ghefigllal chefigUel

1

or
Quale, Sing, QuaU, Phtr

This or that woman, these or those

Questa donna, quests donne

women.

This young lady,

these young

Qaesta signoiina, quests signo

ladles.

rine.

That young lady,

those yonng

Quella signorina, quelle signo-

ladies.

rine.

The right hand.

The left hand.

La mano manca (mancina).

I hare a sore hand.

My hand aches.

Mi fe male la mano.

The tooth, the teeth.

n dente, 1 denti.

Have yon the toothadia 1

t he lanno male i denti 1
)Le dolgonoi dentil

rt Ho male al capo. Ml duole la

IhETofhohMMladie.

-

testa,
"^t Mifa male U capo. Mifemalela
[ testa.

I feel a pain in my side.

Ho male a un lato.

His feet are sore.

. EgUhamaleaipiedi.

His feet ache.

' HaipiedichegUfenmale.

Thefiioe.

Lafaccia,ilTlso, la feoee^ i visi,
11 YOltO, 1 volti.

The cheek.

La guancia, le guance >.

The tongoe, the language.

La lingua, le lingae.

TUB window.

La finestra, le flnestre.

The street.

Lacontrada, leeontrade. ,

The town. '

Lacitta, ledtti.

The linen.

La teh^ le tele.
r La vecchia donna, le vecchie donne.

The old woman, the lltde old woman.

) Layecchietta le veochiette

C (vecchierella). (Tecchicrelle).

Ob9. C. From what precedes, it m

ay be seen that Italian adjectiyes ter-

minate either in o or e.

The a^jectivea

in 0^ whichibrm their masculine plural

' Feminine words, ending in eia, gia^ «cm, reject In the plural the letter i, as :
tagtiandOf plur. le guance ; la epiaggia^ the coast ; plur. le epiagge ; la ooaeia,
the thigh ; plur. le coeu : except, however, where t* has the accent. Ex. la
fricgfo, the lie ; plur. le bugie.

'2<»6

In {, in nwda feminine by changing their tennlnndon Into afiir the i

and into « for the plural. Thoae terminated in* are of both gendera»«ndfoRn

their plural in changing * into i Ex.

induatrioua boya.
induatrioua yomig

An induatrioua

boy.
An induatrioua

young woman,
An amiable man,

An amiable wo- amiable women.

Uoragaxioat*

tiTO,

Unraganaat^

tiva,
Unnomoama-

bile,
Una donna ama-

bOe.

dei lagaxxi attlvl.
delle mgane at-

tlTC.

degUnominiama-

biU.
delle donne ama-

bilL

The room.
The front room.
The back room.
The upper room.

La atania, la camera,
t La camera rerao atrada.
t La camera verao corte.
t La camera In alto (la camera al piano
auperiore).
OU, D. A^jeotiveeterminated Inert, which aaaflBneiallyalaoBubetantiTei^
change for the feminine art into triu. Ex.

Fan,

Traltorona.
Fnrha"H"g-
DeoeitfiiL
Avenging.

Ikaditore,
iDGi&taton^

Ingannalore^
Vendloaloie»

tmditrice.
Incantatrice.
ingannatrice^
vendicatrloe.

PARTmys

ARTICLE FBUININS.

'

fifty.

Phtr.

SoflH.

Ncm. Delia, deU>.

Delle.

OffOOM.

Oen. DL.

DL

IteaoiBe.

D<U. AdeIla,adeU'.

Adeile.

Soma.

Aen. Delia, deU>.

Delle.

Some Bilk.
Some meat
Some good aonp.

Bring lighta.
Strike a UghL

DeUaaeta,

Delia came,

Delia buona

mppa.

Fbtr.
delle aete.
delle cami.
delle bnone xappe.

Portate del lumL
nttemilume.

ncDBPnnrs articlb femininb.

^•«- I 5^ 1^-

Dot, Ad una.

Gm. D'
AhL Da

PIFTY-FIPTH LESSON.

387

A vlrtuoiu woman.

An active young woman.

A happy young lady.

A new gown.

An ingeniouB proposal.

A dumb woman.

A good truth.

A cruel certainty.

Such a promise.

An old acquaintance.

Have you my pen ?
No, Madam, I have it not.
Which bottles have you broken 7
Which door have you opened 1
Which water have you drunk 7

Una donna vlrtaosa.
Una ragazza attiva.
Una slgnorina felice.
Una gonna (veste) nnova.
Una proposizione spontanea
Una donna muta.
Una buona veriti.
Una crudele certezza.
Una simile promessa.
,Vna antica conoscenza.

Ha Ella la mia peima7
No, Signora, non 1' ho.
Che (quali) bottigUe ha Ella rotte?
Che (qual) porta ha Ella aperia.
Che (quale) acqua ha Ella bevuit
or bevuta 7
Obs. E. With the auxiliary av«r« the past participle may or may not agree
with the noun in gender and number, but it must always with the auxiliary
tsfere.

Which letters have you written 1

Which windows have you opened 7
Which young ladies kKve you con-
ducted to the ball 7

These.
Those.

Have yon this pen or that 7
I have neither this nor that.

Che {or quail) lettere ha Ella scritte

(or scritto) 7
Che (quali) finestre ha Ella aperte7
Che (quali) aignorine ha Ella ooa*

dotte al ballo 7

dueste or queste qui.
Quelle or quelle 14.

Ha Ella quests penna, o qusQa 9
Non ho nd quests nd ^jnella.

It or Jier — them.

Do you see that woman 7

I see her.

Have yon seen my sisters 7

No, my lady, I have not seen them.

Toher—tqthem.

Do you speak to my ststera 7
I speak to them.

Some coarse linen.

Some good water.

A napkin, a towel.

La — le.

Vede Ella qaesta donna 7
La vedo.

Ha Ella vednte le mie sorellel
No, slgnorina, non le ho Tednln

Le — hro.

Parla Ella alle mie sorelle 7

Parlo loro.

Delia grossa tela.

Delia btton' acqua.

Ufta salvietta (un tovaglioto).

488

PIFTY-PIFTH LBSSON.

Some baaotifal Wntn shirts.
SoiiM fine ailk sUMkinfi.

The Christian.

The Jew.

He negro.

A companion.

A friend.
To celebrate, to least.
Do you wish to go to Spain 1
Have you paper to write a letter 1

DeUe belle caiftide* di tela.

Delle belle calze d! seta.

II Cristiano. Pern, la Crlstiana.

L* Ebreo, " V Ebrea.

II nero, 11 negro, " la nera, la

negra.
Unoompagno, " una com-

pagna.
Un amico, ** un* amiea.

Gelebraze 1. Festegglare 1. •
Vttol EUa andar in Ispagnal
Ha EUa della carta per IscriTere nna
lettera?

Ob», P. Of two words, the first of which ends In n or r, and the second
begins with «, followed by a consonant, the letter i is prefixed to the second.

I have some to write one.
Who does not study does not learn.
What have yotr found in the street 7
A book to study Italian.

Ne ho per iscriveme una.
Chi Aon istudia non impara.
Che ha Ella trovato per istnda?
Un Ubro per istudiare 1' itaUano.

EXERCISES.

170.

How are your brothers ? — ^They have been very well for these
few days. — ^Where do they reside? — ^They reside in Paris. —
Which day of the week do the Turks celebrate ? — They celebrate
Friday {il venerdX)^ but the Christians celebrate Sunday (la do-
menica), the Jews Saturday, and the negroes their birthday (t/
giomo deUa Joro nascita), — " Amongst you country people (Fra
voi aUre fe^fi deUa campagna) there are many fools, are there not
(turn e vera) V asked (domandd) a philosopher lately {V altro gi-
omo) of a peasant {ad un coniadino), — ^The latter answered (m-
pose) : " Sir, they are to be found {se ne irooano) in all stations
{gU BtaU)" — " Fools sometimes tell the truth {la veritd)" said
(disse) the philosopher. — Has your sister my gold ribbon ? — She
has it not. — What l\sa she ? — She has nothing. — Hasyour mother
any thing ^ — She has a fine gold fork. — Who has my large bot-

* In eonucia the letter i is not sui^pressed in the plural, to prevent mistaking
It for cornice, a priest's garment. (See note », p. 286.)

FIFTY- FIFTH LESSON. \IS9

tie? — ^Your sister has it. — ^Do you see sometimes my mother 1 —
I see her oflen. — When did you see your sister ? — ^I saw her a
fortnight ago. — ^Who has my fine nuts? — ^Your good sister has
them. — Has she also my silver forks ? — She has them not. — Who
has them ? — ^Your mother has them. — What fork have you ? — I
have my iron fork. — Have your sisters had my pens ? — They
have not had them, but I believe that their children have (abbiano,
subj.) had the m.^ Why does your brother complain ? — He com-
plains because his right hand aches. — ^Why do you complain 1—
I complain because my left hand aches.

171.

Is your sister as old (cojrl aUempata) as my motliA^r ? — She is
not so old, but she is taller. — Has your brother purchased any
thing {fare delle contpre) ? — He has purchased something {ne ha
fatto), — ^What has he bought ? — He has bought fine linen and
good pens. — Has he not bought some silk stockings ? — He has
bought some.^'— Is your sister writing ? — No, Madam, she is not
writing (non Ucrive), — Why does she not write ? — Because 9he
has a sore hand. — Why doss not the daughter of your neighbour
go out ? — She does not go out because she has sore feet. — Why
does not my sbter speak ? — Because she has a sore mouth. — Hast
thou not seen my silver pen 1 — I have not seen it.— Hast thou a
front room ? — I have one behind, but my brothper has one in the
front. — Is it an upper room ? — It is one (n* e ugui). — Does the
wife of our shoemaker go out already ? — No, my la^y (signmraf
no)^ she does not go out yet, for she is still very ill {essendo essa
ancarmoUo ammalaia). — Which bottle has your little sislertroken ?
— She broke the one (queUa) which my mother bought yesterday.
— ^Have you eaten of my soup or of my mother's ? — ^I have eaten
neither of yours nor your mother's (n^ di queUa di sua tnadre),
but of that of my good sister. — ^Have you seen the woman who
was with roe this morning? — I have not seen her. — Has your
mother hurt herself ?— She has not hurt herself. — Have you pa-
per to write a letter ? — ^I have some, but to whom must I write ?
— ^You must write to your mother's friend. — ^What has your sis-
ter to do ? — She has to write to her friend.— Why does she not

13 *

300 FIFTY-FIFTH LESSON.

write to her ) — ^Becavse she has no pen to write to her.^-Can she
not write with iier pencil ? — She can write with it {con quelIo)t
but does not wish to do so {non vaole).

172.

Have you a sore nose ? — I have not a sore nose, but I have the
tooth-aehe. — Have you cut your finger 1 — ^No, ray lady, I have
cut my hand. — Will you give me a pen f— I will give you one.
—Will you have this or that ?— I will have neither. — ^Which
{quale) do you wish to have ? — I wish to have that which your
sister has. — ^Do you wish to have my mother's good black silk {h
bwma seta nera), or my sister's ? — ^I wish to have neither your
mother's nor your sister's, but that which you have. — Can you
write with this pen ? — I can write wifh it. — Each woman {ogm
donna) thinks herself amiable, and each {eiaseuna) is conceited
{ha delP amor proprio)» — The same as {del pari che) men, my
dear friend. Many a one {tal) thinks himself {si crede) learned
who is not so {non V i), and many men surpass women in vanity.
—What is the matter with you ?— Nothing is the matter with me.
— Why does your sister complain ? — Because she has a pain in
her cheek. — Has your brother a sore hand ? — No, but he feels a
pain in his side. — Do you open the window ? — ^I open it, because
it is too warm. — Which windows has your sister opened ? — She
has opened those of the front room. — Have you been at the ball
of my old acquaintance ? — I have been there. — Which young la-
dies did you take to the ball ? — I took my sister's friends there.—
Did they dance ? — They danced a good deal. — Did they amuse
themselves ? — ^They amused themselves. — Did they remain long
at the ball f — ^They remained there two hours. — Is this youug
lady a Turk ?— No, she is a Greek. — ^Does she speak French ? —
She speaks it. — Does she not speak English ? — She speaks it, but
she speaks French better. — Has your sister a companion ? — She
has one. — ^Does she like her ^— She likes her very much, for she
is very amiable.

FIFTY. SIXTH LESSON.
Lezi&ne cinquantesima sesta.

To go to tiM oonntrf.
To be in the oouQtry.
To go to church.
To be at church.
Togo tojBchooI.
To be at school.
To go to the ItaUaa eehool.
To be at the ItaUan school.
To go to the dancing achooL
To be at the dancing school.
Tooratthebank.
To Of at the ezchaage.
To or in the kitchen.
To or in the cellar.

The phiy (the comedy).

The opera.

The river.

The hunt.

Hie fishing.
To go a hunting.
To be a hunting.
To go a fishing.
To be a fishing.

To hunt

To fish.

The whole day, all the day.

The whole morning.

The whole evening.

The whole night, all the nigh{.

The whole year.

The whole week.

The whole society*

All at once.
Suddenly, all of a sudden.

Andare in or alia campagna.

Essere in — alia campagna.

Andare in — alia chieinu

Essere in chieaa.

Andare In iscuola or alia seuola.

Essere in iscuola.

Andare alia seuola d' italiano.

Essere nella or alia scuolad' italiano

Andare alia scuoU di hallo.

Essere nella seuola dl hallo.

Allabanca.

Allaborsa.

In cncina.

In eantina.

Lacomedia.

L* opera.

n fiume.

La caccia.

Lapesca.

Andar a (or alia) caocia. *

Esser a {or alia) cacda.

Andar a (or alia) pesca.

Esser a (or alia) pesca.

Cacciare 1.

Pescarel.

Tutto 11 giomo (tutta la glomata).

Tutto il mattino (tutta la mattlna)b

Tutta la sera.

Tutta hi notte (tutta notte).

Tutto r anno.

Tutta la settimana.

Tutta hi sodeti.
( Tutto ad un tratto.
C Tutto in una volta.

ftepentinamente (repente).

> When the hunting is determined the article must be made use o( Ex.
Andar o eooer alia oaeda dd cervo, to go or be a stag-hunting; andar o cSMn
oOa pesea dcOtptrU, del eoraUOf to go or be a pearl or coral-fishing.

392

FIFTY -SIXTfi LlCSSOa.

Thle week,
lliisyear.

Next week.
Every womaD.
Every tlma
Every week.

Your mother.
Yottr siBter.
Your sUters,
A person.
A word.

The ear-ache.
The nausea.
The belly-ache.
The stomach-ache.

She has the stomach-ache.

His sister has a violent head-acbs.

I have the stomach-ache.

Qnesta settlmana.

Quest' anno.

La settknana scorsa (passata).

La settlmana ventura (prossima).

Tutte le donne, egni donna.

Tutte le volte, ogni volta.

Tutte le settimane, ognl settiiiiana.

La di Lei signora madra.
La di Lei signora sorella.
Le di Lei signore soreUe.
Una persona.
Unaparohu

11 male agl^oreccld.
La nausea.
II mal di ventre.
U mal di stomaco.

t EUa ha un dolors alio stomaeo.
t Sua sorella ha un mal dl

lento,
t Ho male dl stomaco.

vio-

Our or ours, your or yours, >
their or theirs, >

Thy or thine, his, her, or >
hers, its, )

Our or ours, your or yours,
their 0r theirs,

(/m. ting.)
(/Mil. plHr.)

Have you my pen or hers 1

I have hers.

What do you wish to send to your

aunt?
I wish to send her a tart.
Will you send her some fruit also ?
I will send her some.
Have you sent the books to my

sisters 7
I have sent them to them.

The

The
The

( La nostra, la vostn, la loro.

( Le tue^ le sue.

( Le nostre, le vostrs, le loro.

Ha Ella la mia penna, o la tual

Ho la sua.

Chevuol EUa mandare alia di Lei

da 7
Voglio mandarle una torta.
Vuol mandarle anche delle fruttal
Voglio mandargliene (invlargUene).
Ha Ella inviato i libri aUe mis

ioreUe?
Li ho inviati loro.

II dolore.
La torta.
Lapesca.

FIFTY-SIXTH LESSON.

298

The strawberry.

Lafragola.

The cherry.

La cUiegia.

The newflpaper.

II giomale.

The gazette.

La gazzetta.

The merchandise. \
The gooda.^ J

La mereanzia.

La cameriera.

Oba. A. Some aubstanUTea have the same tennlnatioQ for both renders

And are only diatingidabed by the article, such aa :

The husband.

n consorte, or^ J

11 marito.

The wife.

La consorte, or

la moglie.

The heir.

L'erede.

The heiress.

L' erede.

The nephew.

11 nipote.

The niece.

Lanipote.

The relation.

II parente.

The female relation.

La parente, Ac

Oba, B. Others change their maacu

line ending o into

a, "such as :

MateuUm.

.PemmtiM.

The uncle, the aunt,

Lo zio,

lazia.

ThecousiD,

11 cugino.

la caglna.

The brotber-in- the aister-in-law.
law

11 cognato,

' la cognate.

■aw,

The cook, the female-cook.

11 cuoco,

la cuoca.

U viclno.

la yicina.

hour.

The lad, the lass.

11 giovinetto,

la gioYinetta.

The heathen,

Ilpagano,

la pagana.

A peasant, a country-woman.

c Un contadino,
i Un paeaano,

una contadina

una paesana, Ac

Ob, C. Substantives (the same aa ac

yectives, preceding Lesson) terminated

In Ufr€^ are generally made feminine by

changing tore i^ta

trice. Ex.

MaocuUn^.

FemininM.

The accuser.

V accusatore.

V accusatrice.

The actor.

L* attore.

1» attrice.

L' ambasciatore,

r ambasciatricD.

The benefactor.

11 benefattore,

labenefattrioe.

The hunter.

11 cacciatore,

la cacciatrlce.

The elector.

L' elettore,

r elettrice.

The emperor.

L' impentore.

r imperatrice.

The founder

11 fondatore,

la fondat^ce.

The protector

11 protettore,

la proiettrice.

The painter.

11 pittore.

la pittrioe.

The author.

L' autore,

r autrice.

The Yictor.

11 vincitore.

la Tincitrice.

The conqueror.

n conquistatore,

la conquistatrleti,

,

Ac.

Ac.

304 FIFTY-SIXTH LB^SOlf.

Ob», D, Some have a dUtinct form for imlivldaab of tho fsmolo oez,

Mn^mHnf-

Fcmtmiu.

Tho abbot.

L' abate.

abbadeaaa (la ba-
deasa).

The baron.

Ubarone,

labaroneasa.

Theahaphenl.

Ilpaatore,

lapastoieUa.

The canon.

Ilcanonico,

The ainger.

11 cantante,

la cantatrioe.

Theooont.

II oonte,

laconteasa.

God.

Dtoorlddio.

The god.

ndlo,

ladea.

Thedoke.

Udaca,

laduchesaa.

TheUon.

Illeone,

laleoneaaa.

r llmarcheae,

lamarchesa.

The marqnia.

\ Phtr. I roar-
( cheai,

Phtr.Lemarcheae.

Thepilnoe.

n princIpe,

la principeaaa.

The peacock.

11 pavone,

lapagonesaa.

The prior.

Ilpriore,

lapriora.

The king.

lire,

Uregina,

The poet.

Ilpoeta,

lapoeteaaa.

The phlloeopher.

nfiloaofo,

la filoaofeasa.

Hie merchant

Ilmercante,

Tlie landlord.

L'oete,

Totteaaa.

The cock.

ngaUo,

lagalUna.

mw elephant

L*elefonte,

Tliedot.

Ucane,

lacagna.

The prophet

11 profeta,

la proleteaaa.

The ford mayor.

npodeati,

]apodeate88a(cte).

The doctor.

U dottora,

la dottoresaa.

The manager.

11 frttore,

la fattoreaaa.

Themaater.

n padrone,

la padrone.

Obt. J?. The namM of trees are con

gnate the fruits of the aame trees. Ex.

The eheatnm-tree, the cheatnat

Ucaatagno,

lacaatagna.

The cherry-trefl^ the cherry.

n cUiegio, or

la cUiegia, er

clrlegio,

driegia.

The pear-tree, . the pear.

npero,

lapera.

The phtm-tree, the plam.

U prugno,

laprugna.

The walnut-tree, the walnnt.

U noce.

la noce.

The following, however, are always masculine, and designate the tree as well
as the fruit : Iljleo, the fig-tree, and the fig ; U cedro^ the citron-tree, and citron ;
UdatUrOy the date-tree, and the date; Upomo^ the apple-tree, and the apple.

Oft*. /*. Of the names of animals aeveral become feminine by changing e
Into a, as : «/ eavallo, the horae{ la cavaOa, the mare ; U gaUo, tho cat ; fogatfc^
the she-cat, Ac.

FJFTY-SIXTH LESSON.

296

Others have for each gender particular denominations, as : U bui, the ox ; la
Meca, the cow ; il beeeo, the buck ; la eapm, the goat ; U monioiUf the ram | la
peeara^ the sheep, Ac.

Others again, though they are used for both genders, are always masculine,
as : U tordo, the thrush ; il amOf the raven ; lo aoarafaggio^ the beetle, Ac.
Others again are always feminine, as : la rondme^ the swallow j la poiUero, the
panther ; la vipera, the ?iper ; f anguOlat the eel. Finally, there are some
which it is indifferent to make masculine or feminiqe, such as : tf or /a lepre,
the hair ; il or 2a Hrpe, the serpent, Ac.

{ Frendere in qffiUo (or a pi-
I gione).

V Prendere a nolo,
C AJUtare 1, or dar in affitto (or
\ a pigione).

V Dare a nolo.

To hire.

To let.
Ha^e you already hired a room 1

Ha Ella gi& preso a pigione una
camera 1

To admit or grant a ihi9ig. )

To confess a thing. S

Do you grant that 1

I do grant if.

Do you confess your fiiultl

1 confess it.

I confess it to be a fault.

To oonfiBSS, avow, own, acknowledge.

So much.
ohe has so many candles that she can-
not bum them all.

To catch a cold.

To make sick.

U you eat so much it will make you

sick.
Does it suit you to lend your gun 1

It does not suit me to lend it.
It does not suit me.
Where did yon catch a cold 7
I caught a cold in going from the
opera.

Convenire * di qualche cosa.

Convlene Ella di cid (or in dd) 1

Ne conyengo.

ConYiene EUa del di Lei errors 1

Ne convengo.

Convengo ch* d un errore.

Confessare 1.

Tanto.

Ella ha tante candela che non pud
comumarle tutte.

Raffreddarsi 1. Itfreddarsi 1.
Sendere malato,

Se Ella mangia troppo cid La ren-

der& malata.
Le convlene di prestare U di Lei

schioppo?
Non mi convlene prestarlo.
Non mi convlene.
Ove si d Ella raiTreddaU 1
Ml son raffreddato nel sortire dal

teatro dell' opera.

206 FIFTY-SfXTH LESSON.

To have a cold. Easer raifreddato {or infreddato).

The cold.

The coagh.
I have a cold.
You have a cough.

The brain.

The cheat.

II rafireddore (1* infreddatora)

Latoaae.

Ho un infreddatura di t

EUa ha la toaae.

IlcerveUo.

U petto.

EXERCISES.

173.
Where is your cousin ? — He is in the kitchen. — Has your cook
(fern.) already made the soup ? — She has made it, for it is already
upon the table. — Where is your mother ? — She is at church. — Is
your sister gone to school ? — She is gone thither. — Does your
mother often go to church ? — She goes thither every morning and
every evening. — At what o'clock in the morning does she go to
church ? — She goes thither as soon as she gets up. — ^At what
o'clock does she gel up ? — She gets up at sunrise. — ^Dost thou go
to school to^ay ? — I do go thither. — What dost thou learn at
school ? — I learn to read, write, and speak there. — Where is your
aunt ? — She is gone to the play with my little sister. — Do your
sisters go this evening to the opera ? — No, Madam, they go to the
dancing-school. — Do they go to the French school 1 — They go
thither in the morning, but not in the evening, — Is your father
gone a hunting ? — He has not been able to go a hunting, for he
has a cold. — Do you like to go a hunting ? — ^I like to go a fishing
better than a hunting {che nan a caccia). — Is your father still in
the country? — ^Yes, Madam, he is still there. — What is he doing
there ? — He goes a hunting and a fishing. — ^Did you hunt in the
country ? — I hunted the whole day. — How long did you stay with
my mother ? — ^I stayed with her the whole evefting. — ^Is it long
since you were at the castle ? — I was there last week. — Did you
find many people thefe ? — I found only three persons there ; the
count, the countess, and their daughter.

174.

Are these girls as good (savio) as their brothers ? — They are
better than they. — Can your sisters speak German ? — They can-

FIPTT-SIITH LESSON. 297

noty but they are learning it. — ^Have you brought any thing to
your mother ? — ^I have brought her some fine fruit aijd a fine
tart. — ^What has your niece brought you ? — She has brought us
good cherries, excellent strawberries, and very good peaehes. —
Do you like peaches ? — I like them much. — How many peaches
has your neighbour (fern.) given you ?— She* has given me more
than twenty. — Have you eaten many cherries this year ?**-! have
eaten many. — Did you give any to your little sister? — I gave
her so many that she cannot eat them all. — Why have you not
given any to your good neighbour (fem.) ? — I wished to give her
some, but she would not take any, because she does not Mke
cherries. — ^Were there many pears last year ? — ^There were not
many. — ^Has your cousin (fem.) many strawberries ?^— She has
80 many that she cannot eat them all.

175. ^

Why do your sisters not goto the play ? — ^They cannot go thither
because they have a cold, and that makes them very ill. — ^Where
did they catch a cold ? — ^They caught a cold in going from the
opera {neW uscire dal ieairo deW opera) last night. — ^Does it suit
your sister to eat some peaches ? — It does not suit her to eat any,
for Ae has already eaten a good many, and if she eats so much
it will make her ill.— Did you sleep well last night 1 — I did not
sleep well, for my children made too much noise {il rumare) in
my rocHn.— Where were you last night ?— I was at my brother,
inlaw's— Did you see your sister-in-law ? — I saw her. — How ib
she ?— She is better than usual {megUo del soliio). — ^Did you
play 1^ We did not play, but we read some good books; for my
sister-in-law. likes to read better than to play. — Have you read
the gazette to-day t— I have read it.-^Is there any thing new in
it ? — I have nof read any thing new in it. — ^Where have you been
since I saw you ? — ^I have been at Vienna, Paris, and Berlin. —
Did you speak to my aunt? — I did speak to her. — ^What does she
say ? — She says that she wishes to see you. — ^Where have you
put my pen ? — ^I have put it upon the bench. — ^Do you intend to
see your niece to-day ? — I intend to see her, lor she has promised
f»e to dine with us. — I admire {amndrare) that family (lafantigUa),

13*

.808 pumr-siXTH lbsson.

lor the father is the king and the mother is the queen of it. The
children and the servants are the subjects (U suddiio) of the state
(lo tiaio). The tutors of the children are the ministers (i/ muMt*
tro) who share {dmdere *) with the king and the queen the care
(la tmra) of the goYernment {U gavemo). The good education
(r edueaxione) which is given to children b the crown (la coromi)
of roonarchs (t7 numarcaf plur. t).

176.

Have you already hired a room t— I have already hired cme.—
Where have you hired it ? — ^I have hired it in William*street
(neUa anUrada GngUehno), number one hundred and fifty-two.—
At whose house (da dd) have you hired it ? — ^At the house of the
man whose son has sold you a horse.— For whom has your father
hired a room ? — ^He has hired one for his son, who has just
arrited from France.— Why have you not kept your promise (la
promesta) ? — ^I do not remember what I promised you. — ^Did you
not promise us to take us to the concert lilst Tuesday ? — ^I confess
that I was wrong in promising you ; the concert, however (piire)^
has not taken place. — ^Does your brother confess his fault ? — ^He
confesses it. — ^What does your uncle say to (d£) that note ? — ^He
says that it is written very well, but he admits that he has been
wrong in sending it to the captain.-— Do you confess your fault
now ?— I confess it to be a fault. — ^Where have you fi>und my
coat ?— I have found it in the blue room.— Will you hang my hat
on the tree ?-^I will hang it thereon {e^ppendervelo). — ^How are
you to-day ? — ^I am not (mm iaio) v^ry well.— What is the matter
with you ?— I have a violent headacbB and a cold (una tt^edda-
tura cb*.<es(a).— Where did yoa catch a oold?'S— I caught it last
night in coming (neff usdre) from the play.

FIFTY-SEVENTH LESSON,
Lezione dnquantesima settima.

OF THE PRESENT PARTICIPLE.

TIm present participle is in Italian formed from the infinitlTe by changing
for the fint ooigtigatfon, ort into anda^ and for the two othera trt and tr« intr
tndo,^ Ex.

To apeak, — speaking.
To aeU, — selling.
To serve, — serring.

To hare, — having.
To be^ — being.

1. Parlore, — parlamlo.

2. Vendere, — vendcmfo.

3. Serrire, — senreiMfs

Avere,
Essflre,

Ob: A. This form of the verb is not so often used in Italian as in English,
for whenever it is used in English aftet a preposition it is rendered in Italian
by the infinitive. (See f^ Lessons XL. and XLI V.) Moreover; it is often
substituted by the infinitive with one of the proportions a, oon, in, nd^ as:
tol wnvprartj in buying ; nd vendere, in selling h ^ eervire. In serving. Ex.

in teaddng one learns.

He was drowned inp<unng the river.

In seeing him 1 judged that he was not

satisfied.
Having come too late he found no

more room.
To be drowned. To pass the river.
To infer.

Found.

CotP vuegnare s' impara.

Egli si d annegato nei vaUoare H

fiume.
M vederlo argomentai che non era

contento.
Per eaeer venuto tardi non trovd plh

posto.
Annegarsi. Valicare 11 fiume.
Argomentare {argomentai is its pre*

terite definite).
TrOvai (is the preterite definite ol

travare)*

> There Is another present participle, which is also forme4 from the infinitive,
and terminates for the first coojugation in anU, and for the two others in enU,
as : parkmUf speaking; vendenie, selling ; eervenie, serving. It is not much
used in Italian, and In Its stead the present or imperfect of the Indicative la
often •employed.

800

FIFTY-SEVENTH LESSON.

I trtmble only in thinking of it.
I perceiTed it iu reading the letter.
She gets a livelihood by spinning and

weaving.
In going out of the church.

Treni( solameuta in pennirL
He ne accorai nel legger la lettera.
Ella si guadagna il Titto col filare c

col tessere.
AU'uscirdaUachieMu

Obt, B, Yet the present participle is used when an agent performs tw«
actions at the same time.
The man eats while running. L' uomo mangia coirendo.

1 correct while reading.
I question while speaking.
You speak while answering me.

Correggo leggendo.
Interrogo parlando.
Ella parla rispondendonu.

Obs. C. The personal pronouns, the relative ne, and the local adverbs et and
n, are joined to the present participle io the same manner as to the infinitive.
(Obf. Lesson XVIi.)

I read your exercises while correcting

them.
I question you while speaking to you. i
You ride while fighting.
He fighu while retiring.
You speak while dancing.
I extemporate while eating. l

He walks while reading. |

Leggo i di Lei temi correggendo^

La interrogo parlandok.
Ella cavalca battendon.
Egli ai batte riarandon
Ella parla danzando.
Improwiso mangfando.
Passeggia leggendo.

Obs. Lu When a certain continuation
pressed, the present participle Is made usi
flare, Mmre. Ex.

I am writing.

Thou art reading.

He is telling me.
He is telling me his misfortunes.

I am gathering flowers in my garden.
He was crying all day and all night.

I was thinking of the things that had

just happened.
Her grief is consuming her by degrees.

or succession of time Is to be ex-
B of with the verbs muUare, mandart,

Io ato 9CTwendo»

Tu vox (or j^) Uggendo.

Egli vien raeeontandonii.

Egli <to raeetmtandomi le sue sven-

ture*.
Vo eogiiendo fiori nel mio giardino'*
Ando gridando * tutto il giomo e

tutta la notte.

10 ofidoM penmtndo alle cose acca-
dttte 8.

11 suo dolore la va druggmdo ten-
tamente*.

s Racamlart^ to tell, to relate ; la sven/ufo^ tei jnlsfortime.

* CogUereJIorif to gather flowers ; iljhre, the flower.

* Andb is the third person singular of the preterite definite of the verb otMiai^
to go : gridare\ to cry. '

ft Andava is the first person shigularof 'the Imperfect indicative of the verb
andare ; aeeaduU Is the past participle in the plural feminine of the verb oeoa
deret to happen.

* Strttggendo Is the present participle of Hruggere, to consume, to kill, tc
destroy.

riFTY.SEVENTH LESSON. \^

Tkey were desoending slowly the hill.

801

I am beginning to perceive that I was

mistaken.
What I am doing now, thoa wilt know

when it is time.
They were conversing together for an

hour, when ....

You are thinking.
I was perceiving.
He is saying.
What were you doing^ when I arrived 7

IS dining.

To question.

The cravat.
The carriage.
• The family.
The promise.
The l^g.
The sore throat.
The throat.
I have a sore throat.

The meat.
Salt meat.
Fresh meat-
Fresh beef.
Cool water.
The food (victuals).
The dish (mess)
Salt meats.

HUk-food.

-The traveller.

To march, to w^, to step*
I have walked a good deal tMay.

Venxcano seendendo lentameiite K

colle.7
Vado vedendo che mi sono Ingui"

nato.
duello che ora tto faeamdo^ lo sapral

a suo tempo.
Se la statano diteorrendo insleme da

un' ora, quando .....'

Vol state ptMondo.

lo andava accorgtndomi.

Egli va dictndo.*

Che andaoatt (or ataeatt) facmdo

quando son giunto.*^
lo pranxava (io Hwoa pranxando).

golai or ho mal dl

Interrogare 1.

La crayatta.

Lacarrozza.

La famiglia.

La promessa.

La gamba.

Ilmaldigola.

La gola.

Mi fa mal U
gola.

La came.

Carne salata.

Came fresca.

Manzo fresco.

Acqua fresca.

L* alimento.

La vivanda, 11 cibo.

Vivande salate.
c II latticinio > p^^ D^ji latUcinU.
I Un latticinio S

II viaggiatore ; ftm. la viaggiatriee.

Camminare 1.
Ho camminato molto oggi.

7 VmiowM is the third person plural of the imperfect indicative of venire.

• DiscorrerCf to converse.

9 Dicendo is the present participle of dire, to say.

>o Andavate is the second person plural of the imperfect indicative of ixndare,
and ttavate ts the same of stare. Giunto is the past participle of gtungwc, f*
arrive..

^02

PIFTY^SBVBNTH UU80N.

, Oft*. E. CammUuw mnal not be mistaken for pamiggian. Thefonaer
means to walk, and the latter to walk for pleasure. (Lesson XLIV.)

I haTS been walking in the garden

Ho passsgglato nel glardino con

with my mother.

miamadre.

To walk or travel a mile ^ two miles.

t Far un migllo — dos miglia.

To walk or travel a league — two

t Far una lega — due loghe.

lesgnes.

To walk a step.

t Far un passo.

To take a step.

t Far un passo (presso di).

To go on a journey.

t Far un yiaggio.

To make a speech.

Far un dlscorso.

A piece of business, an affair.

Un affarei plur, i : una faecenda.

To transact business.

Far degU afiarL

To meddle wUh eameUung.

( Misehiarsi di qualehe coea,
I Immischiarsi di qualehe casa.

What an you meddling with 1

DicheslmisefaiaEllal

I am meddling with my own buaineas.

Mi mischio d^ miel piopri afirL

That man always meddles with other

duesf uomo a* immisehia semprc

people's business.

negU a&ri degU altrL

I do not meddle with other people's

Non m' immiachio negli a&ri al-

business.

truL

Others^ other people*

AUnii.

Si occupa di pittwa.

The sn of painting.

La pittura.

Chemistry.

Lachimica.

Thsohemist.

Ilchimico.

The art

L'arte.

Strange.

Strano.

Surprising.

It is strange.

festrano.

To employ one^e seff" in.

i; Occuparsi di qualehe eoea.

Tb concern eome one.

To look ai some one,

I dojiot like to meddle with thinga

that do not ooneem me.
That oonoems nobody.

To concern one^s self about

something.
To irouhle one's head about

Concemere, riguardare qual-

cuno,

Riguardare qualcuno,

Non mi place Immlschlsrmi didd

che non mi eonoene.
Old non rignarda nessano.

Curarsi di qualehe cosa^ or
Prendersi eura di quakhe cota.

PIFTT-8BVSMTH LBSSOH*

ao8

TdaUraci.

I attrmct, thou attnctiBit, he attneu.
We, yon, Uiey attract

Loadstone attiacta iron.
Her ringing Attiacti me.
To charm.
To enchant.
I am charmed with it.
The beauty.
The harmony.
TlieToioe.
The power.

To repeal.

The repetition^
The commencement, be^nning.
Tliewiedom.
Study.
The lord.

A good memory.

A memorandum.

The nightingale.
AH beginninga are dlAenlt.

TocreaU.

Creation.
The Creator.
The benefit, the benefiietor.

The iSnr of the Lord.
Heaven.
The earth.
TheaoUtude.
The lesson.
Thegoodneii.
Flour, meaL
ThemiB.

{Auirare 1, " atHrato.

Attraggo, attrai,

Attraiamo, attraete, attraggono.

La ealamitaattrae (attira) il tero.

n soo canto m' attrae.

Incantare.

Dilettare.

li^e sono felioe, ne aono incanlnto.

LabeUena.

L> armonia.

La voce.

Lapotenai,ilpoteie.

Ripeiere2.

La ripetisione.

II prindpio.

LasaTima.

Ld studio.

Dsignore.

Una buona memoria.

Un memoriale, un promemoria, \

memoria.
11 rosignuolo, 1' wignuolo.
Ttttti i prindpii sono difieUi.

Creare 1.

Lacreaxione.

H Creators.

n benefisio, il benefattorss firn.

trice.
U tiiioie di Dio.
Udelo.
La tens.
Lasolitudine.
La teiione.
LabontA.
Lafitfina.
11 molino.

06.. F. We hare Men (Le«Q. XLIV.) that Jl wflecthre T«b. jw. ta
1.2^^ wen- m French. co,j«gat«l with *• '"^^IniSi
Adreomponndten*^ ""•ew^beddee^me other wtb^wWc^ to 1^
SSuSwta. c«»P<mnded with the wudltary «.«^. to be, thongh U..y «e «»•

804

FIPTY-SEVBNTH LESSON.

reflectiTO, and generally take to have for their auxiliary in EngUab. Tbt prla-
eipal are the following :

Togo. .

Andare*!.

To atop.

Arrestarai 1, fennaral 1.

To arrlTe.

ArriTare 1.

To decay.

Decadere* 2.

To die.

Morire* 3, trapaaaare 1

To come in.

Entrarel.

To be bom.

Na8oere*2.

To aet out.

Partlre 3.

To go oat.

Uacire* 3.

TofidL

Cadere* 2.

To come.

Venire* 3.

j DiTenire* 3.
c DiTentare 1.

To become.

Todlaagree.

Non oonyenire* 3.

To interyene.

Intervenire* 3.

To attain.

Perreniret 3

To come back.

Ritomare 1, rinvenire* 3.

To happen.

Sopraggiugnere* 2.

Uaa your mother come 1 ' | fiTenataladi Leimadxel

]:2r Tile paat participle of theae verba muat agree in gender and nunber witir
the nomlnatiTe of the verb eMar«*| to be.

Slie haa not oome f^u
Have the women already come 1
They have not oome yet.
Haa your aiater arrlTed 1

Non d ancor vennta.
Sono gU arrivate le donne 1
Non aono ancor arrivate.
b arrivata la di Lei aorellal

EXERCISES.

177.

Will you diae with us to-day ?— With much pleasure. — ^What
have you for dinner {ehe ha Ella da pranxo) t — We have good
soup, some fresh and salt meat, and some milk food. — ^Do you
like milk food I — ^I like it better than {Li preferiseo a) all other
food. — Are you ready to dine ? — ^I am ready. — ^Do you intend to
set out soon ?--I intend setting oat next week.— Do you travel
alone (sola) ? — No, Madam, I travel with my uncle. — Do you
travel on fi)ot or in a carriage ? — We travel in a carriage. — ^Did
you maet anyone in your last journey (nel di Lei ultimo viaggio)

FIFTY-SEVEMTH LESSON. 805

10 Berlin ? — We met many travellers. — What do you intend to
spend your time in this summer ? — I intend to take a short (piccolo)
journey. — ^Did you walk much in your last journey ?.— I like
much to walk, but my uncle likes to go in a carriage. — ^Did he
not wish to walk ? — ^He wished to walk at first (da pnncipio)^ but
he wished to get into the coach after having taken a few steps
( poijaid appena aJcuni passi voUe nunUar in legno), so that I did
not walk mttcb. — What have you been doing at school to.^ay ?—
We have been listening to our professor. — What did he say ?-—
He made a long speech on the goodness of God. After saying :
*' Repetition is the mother of studies, and a good memory is a
great benefit of Grod," he said (egU disse), " God is the creator
of heaven and earth ; the fear of the Lord is the beginning of all
wisdom." — What are you doing all day in this garden ? — ^I am
walking in it. — What is there in it that attracts you (che nuU V
atlira cold) ? — ^The singing of the birds attracts me (nd vi atirae),
— ^Are there nightingales in it ? — There are some in it, and the
harmony of their singing enchants me (nd rapisce), — ^Have those
nightingales (forsegU tuignuoU hanno) more power over you
(sopra di Lei) than painting, or the voice of your tender (tenero)
mother, who loves you so much ? — ^I confess the harmonj^ of the
singing of those litUe birds (di-questi augelUni) has more power
over me than the most tender words of my dearest friends.

178.
What does your niece amuse herself with in her solitude ? — She
reads a good deal, and writes letters to her mother. — What does
your uncle amuse himself with in his solitude ? — He employs him-
self in painting and chemistry. — Does he no longer do any busi-
ness ? — He no longer does any, for he is too old to do any. — Why
does he meddle with your business? — He does not generally
(ordinariamente) meddle with other people's business, but he
meddles with mine, because he loves me. — Has your master made
you repeat your lesson tcday ? — ^He has made me repeat it. — ^Did
you know it ? — I knew it pretty well (eiwcre/amente).— Have you
also done some exercises ? — I have done some, but, pray, what is
that to you (ma che Lefa questOy ne La prego) 1 — I do not gener
ally meddle with things that do not concern me, but I love you

dM FIFTY-BIGHTH LKSSOIf.

80 much that I concern myself much ahout {the io m' inUrnse
moUo a) what you are doing.— Does any one trouble his head .
(hawi akuno che si corm) about you ? — No one troubles his head
about me, for I am not worth the trouble (non ne va^ la pena),
— Who corrects your exercises ? — My master corrects them. —
How (came) does he correct them ? — He corrects them in reading
them'; and in reading them he speaks to me. — How many things
(quante cose) does your master at the same time (m una voUa) ? —
He does four things at the same time. — How so (come cid) ? — He
reads and corrects my exercises, speaks to me and questions me
all at once (al tempo siesso), — Does your sister sing (caniare) while
dancing ?— She sings while working, but she cannot sing while
dancing. — Has your mother left ? — She has not left yet. — When
will she set out ? — She will set out to-morrow evening. — At what
o'clock ? — At a quarter to seven. — Have your sisters arrived ? —
They have not arrived yet, but we expect them this evening. —
Will they spend (passare) the evening with us ? — ^They will spend
it with us, for they have promised me to do so. — Where have you
spent the morning ? — I have spent it in the country. — Do you go
every morning to the country ? — I do not go every morning, but
twice a week. — ^Why has your niece not called upon me (venir a
vedere qualcuno) ?— She is very ill, and has spent the whole day
in her room.

FIFTY-EIGHTH LESSON.
Leziane cinquantesitna ottava.

OP THE PAST PUTtTRK.

The past or compound future is formed from the fntore of Che aiiziUaiy, an^
the past participle of the verb yon conjugate. Ex.

I ahan haye loved. i Avrd amato.

Thou wflt have loved | Avral amata

FIPTY-Bl&HTH LESSON.

307

H6wmhaT6loT«d.

Egli avr& amati.

She wlU have k>Te<L

Ella avriL amato.

We shall have loved.

Avremo amato.

You will have loved.

Avrete amato.

They will have loved.

J^«. Eglino) ^^„,^^.
i Fan, Elleno i

I shall have come.

Sard vennto. Fern, venuta.

Thou wilt have come

Sarai venuto. " venuta.

He will have come.

SarK venuto.

She will have come.

Sari venuta.

We ahall have come.

Saremo venuti. Pen. venute.

You will have come.

Sarete venuti. " venute.

They will have come.

( Saranno venuti.
l Saranno venute.

1 ahall have been praised.

Thou wilt have been praised.

He will have been praised.
She will have been praised.
We shall have been praised.

You will have been praised.
They will have been praised.

Sard stato lodato. Pent, stata io-
data.

Sard stato lodato. " stata lo>
data.

SariL stato lodato.

Sard stata lodata.

Saremo stati lodati. Pern, state lo-

Sarate stati lodati.

{ Saranno stati lodati.
< Saranno state lodate

state lo-

To have left.
When I have paid for the horse I shall

have only ten crowns left
How much money have you left 1
I have one crown left.

I have only one crown left.

How much has your brother iefti

He has one crown left.

How much has your sister left?

She has only thre»sous left

How much have your brothers left?

They have one gold sequin left.

When they have paid the tailor, they

will have a hundred Italian livres

Mt

t Rimanere* 2,

Q,uando avrd pagato il cavallo non
mi rimarranno che dieci scudl.

Quanto danaro Le rimanel

Hi rimane uno scudo«
( Non mi rimane che uno scudb.
I Mi rimane solamenteunoscudo.

Q,uanto rimane al dl Lei ^tello t

Oli rimane uno scudo.

Qnanto rimane alia di Lei sorellal

Non le rimangono che tre soldi.

Quanto rimane ai di Lei frateUll

Rimane Loro uno zecchino d' ore.

Qnando avranno pagato il sartors^
resteranno loro cento lire itallaiMt

fl08

F1PTY>E16HTH LESSON.

06#. In English the present, or the compound of the prewnt, is need
after the conjunctions : v^itn^ <u toonoM^ or cJUr, when futurity is to be ex-
pressed i but in Italian, as well as in French, the future mtist in such instances
always be employed. Ex.

When I am at my aunt's, wlU you

come to see mel
After you haye done writing, will you

take a turn with mel

Yon will play when you have finished

your exercise.
What will you do when you have

dinedl
When I have dined, I will take a turn

with my sister in the garden of the

marchioness.
When I have spoken to your hrothen

I shall know what I have to do.

Does it rain 1
It rains.
Does it snow 1
It I

la it muddy 1

It is muddy.

Is it muddy out of doors 1

It is very muddy.

Is it dusty 7

It is very dusty.

Is it smoky 7
It is too smoky.
Out of doors.

To enicTf to go in, to come in.

Will you go into my room 1
IwiUgoin.
Will you go inl
I shall go in.

Quando saiO da mia sia, verra EUs

avedeimil
Quando avii finito di sciivere, veirl

Ella meco a £ur un passeggio7 er

una passeggiata.
Ella giuocher^ quando avr& finito U

di Lei tema (eaercizio).
Clie Uii EUa quando avnl prsnsato 7

Quando avrd pransato, andrd a lat
una passeggiata eon mia sorella
nel giardino deUa marchess.

Quando avrd parlato al di Leifra-
tello, saprd dd che ho da fare.

Piovel

Piove.

Nevical

Nevica.
ct Viddel&ngol
et Vdfango?
^0'^del£ulgo.
t C d del fango in istndal
t k cattivo andare.

Vhadellapolverel

Fa molta polvere. V ha molts
polvere.

Vddelfumol Vdfnmol

V d troppo foma

Fuori. Inl

EfUrare 1, in,

7uoI Ella entrar nella mia camenkt
Voglio entrsrvi.
VientreraEUal
VI entrerd.

To sit down.

To git, to he seated.
He is seated uponthe large chair.
She is seated upon the bench.

I sit down near you.

See

a sedere (Les-

die*, mettersi
son LI.).
Essere seduto ; fern, seduia,

Egli d seduto suUa gran sedia.

Esaa i seduta suUa panca.
i Seggo presso di Lei.
i Hi metto a sedere viclno a Lef

PIFTY-BIGBTH LESSON.

800

ToJUlvnth.

To fill the bottle with wine.

Do yoa fill that bottle with water 1

I fill my purse with money.
He fills his belly with meat.

ThepockeL

i Empire or riempire (Uco) 8.
Empiere or riempiere 2.
Riempire di Tino la bottiglia.
Riempie Ella d' acqua qnesta bot-
tiglia?
Riempio di danaro la mia bom.
S' empie 11 yentre- di carae (a toI

gar expression).
Latasca.

Have yon come quite alone 1

No, I haTO brought all my men along

with me.
He has brought all his men abng with

him.
Haye you brought your brother along

with you 1
I haye brought him along with me.
Haye yon told the groom to bring me

the horse?

The groom.
( haye brought you a fine horse from

Germany.
kn you bringing me my books?
K am bringing them to you.

To takCi ^ carry.
Will yon take that dog to the stable 1

I win take it thither.

Are you carrying this gun to my

iatherl
I carry it to him.

The cane, stick.

The stable.

To come down, to go dovm.

To go down into the well.

To go or come down the hill.

To go down the riyer.

To alight from one's horse, to dts-

mount.
To alight, to get out.

I: EDa yenuta del tutto sola 1

No, ho oondotto meco tutta la mia

gente.
Egliha.condotto seco tutta la sua

gente.
Ha Ella condotto seco 11 di Lei in-

telle 1 (or vostro.)
L' bo condotto meco.
Ayete detto al palafreniere di con-

durmi 11 cayallo 1
II palafreniere.
Le ho condotto d' Alemagna un bel

cayallo.
Hi porta EUaimieiUbril
Glieli porto.

Menare 1.

Volete menare questo

stallal
Voglio menaryelo.
Porta Ella a mio padre questo

schioppol
Olielo porto.
La canna, or 11 bastone.
Lastalla.

C Soendere * 2 — sceso.

I Discendere ♦ 2 ; past part.

\ disceso,

Discendere nel pozzo.

Scendere la monta^a.

Discendere 11 flume.

Smontare da cayallo (Lesson LIL>.

Scendere, or discendere dal legno.

810L

FIFTT-EIOHTR LESSON.

Togo yp^ tonunaU, ioaseend.

To go np Ae mounudii.

Where It your brother gone to 1
9e hu tsoended the hUL

To mount the hone.

Tog^tintotheooech.

To get on board the ship.

To desire, to beg, to pray,
to request.

Win yon deiire your brother to oome

down?
I beg of you to call on me to-dty.
Thebeerd.
The river.
The ■tream, torrent
To go or come up the river.

The stream.
To go or oome down the river.

Afofilore, sqUre *» ascendere *.

^ Satire U monte. Salire il coOe.
f Moatare suUa collina.

Ore ^ andato il di Lei ftateilo 1

te montato eulla collina.

Montare a cavallo.

Montare In legno (in canonay.
c Entrar neUa nave.
} Aacendere U navlglio.

Pregare 1 {di before lof.).

Vnol EHa pregare il dlLelfiatdle

diaoendere?
La prego di Tenirmi a vedere oggl.
Labarba.
II fiume, la riviera.
II torrente.

Andar contro la corrente del flame.
La eorrente.
Diaoendere il flume.

EXERCISES.

179.

Will your parents go to the country to-morrow 1 — ^Thcy wUI
not go, for it is too dusty. — Shall we take a walk to.day ?— We
will not take a walk, for it is too muddy out of doors {perche e' e
troppofango in istraia, or perehl k strode sono troppofangosey-^
Do you see the castle of my relation behind (dietro) yonder
mountain {queUa numtagna) ? — ^I see it. — Shall we go in ?— We
will go in if you like.— Will you go into that room 1—1 shall not
go into it, for it is smoky. — ^I wish you a good morning. Madam.
— ^Will you not come in ? — ^Will you not sit down ? — ^I will sil
down upon that large chair. — ^Will you tell me what has become
of your brother ? — ^I will tell you.— Where is your sister ?— Do
you not see her ? — She is sitting upon the bench. — Is your father
seated upon the bench ?— No, he sits upon the chair.- Hast thou
spent all thy money ?— I have not spent all^^How much hsst

FIFTT-BIOHTB LESSON. 811

thou left ? — ^I have not much left. I have but five Italian livrea
(la lira itaUaria) left. — How much money have thy sisters left ?
— Thpy have but three crowns left. — Have you money enough
left to pay your tailor ? — ^I have enough left to pay him ; but if I
pay him I shall have but little left. — How much money will ycfti
brothers have left ? — ^They will have a hundred sequins left. —
When shall you go to Italy ? — I shall go as soon as (suhiio ehe) I
have learnt Italian. — When will your brothers go to France ? —
They will go thither as soon as they know French ? — When will
they learn it ? — ^They will learn it when they have found a good
master. — How much money shalt we have left when we have
paid for our horses ? — ^When we haVe paid for them we shall have
only a hundred crowns left.

180.

Do you gain (guadagnare) any thing by (m) that business ? —
I do not gain much by it (gran ehe), but my brother gains a good
deal by it. He fills his purse with money. — ^How much money
have you gained ? — I have gained only a littlCi but my cousin
has gained much by it. He has filled his pocket with money.—
Why does not that man work ? — He is a good-for-nothing fellow
(disutiJaceio), for he does nothing but eat all the day long. He
continually fills (si riempie mai sempre) his belly with meat, so
that he will make himself (diverrd) ill, if he continues (c<m'
tmuare) to eat so much. — With what have you filled that bottle 1
— ^I have filled it with wine. — Will this man take care of my
horse ? — He will take care of it. — ^Who will take care of my ser-
vant?— The landlord will take care of him, for he will give him
to eat and to drink ; he will also give him a good bed to sleep in
(per eortcarsi). — ^Does your servant take care of your horses ? —
He takes care of them. — ^Is he taking qare of your clothes ? — ^He
is taking care of them, for he brushes them every morning. —
Have you ever drunk French wine ? — ^I have never drunk any.
— ^Is it long since you ate Italian bread? — ^It is almost three
years since I ate any. — ^Have you hurt my brother-in-law ? — ^1
have^ot hurt him, but he has cut my finger. — What has he cut
your finger with ? — With the knife which you have lent him!

8UI FIFTT-BIOHTH LBS80N.

181.

Is your father arrived at last ? — ^Every body says that he u
arrived, but I have not seen him yet. — Has the physician hurt
your son ? — He has hurt him, for he has eut his finger. — Have
they cut off (iagUttre) that man's leg ? — ^They have cut it off. —
Are you pleased {soddisfajUo) wiA your servant f-^— I am much
pleased with him, for he is fit for any thing (^uoito a HUio), —
What does he know ? — ^He knows every thing (tuUo). — Can he
ride (andar a eavallo) \ — ^He can. — Has your brother returned
at last from England ? — ^He has returned thence, and has brought
you a fine horse. — Has he told his groom to bring it to me {di
eondurmelo ^ud) ? — ^He has told him to bring it you. — What do
you think {che dice EUa) of that horse f — I think (dico) that it is
a fine and good one {ch' 8 beUo e humo), and beg you to lead it
into the stable (m istalla). — In what did you spend your time
yesterday? — ^I went to the concert, and afterwards {e poi) to
the play.-— When did that man go down into the well ? — ^He
went down this morning.^-Has he come up again yet {gid ris-
aJUo)l — ^He came up an hour ago. — Where is your brother?
-r-He is in his room* — ^Will you tell him to come down? — 1
will tell him so, but he is not dressed yet. — Is your* friend
still on the mountain ? — He has already come down. — ^Did you
go up or down the river ? — ^We went down it. — ^Did my cousin
speak to you before he started? — He spoke to me before he
got into the coach. — Have you seen my brother? — ^I saw him
before I went on board the ship. — Is it better to get into a
coach than to go on board the ship (o saUr la tuxoe)! — ^It is
not worth while to get into a coach, or to go on board tlie
ihipf when one has no wish to travel.

FIFTY. NINTH LESSON.
Leziane cinquantesitna nona>

OF THE IMPERFECT.

(Imperfetto.)

The imperfect of the indicative ie formed in all Italian verba by changing the
termination re of the infinitive into vaA Ex.

JnfinUvMB,

To apeak— I apoke, Ac.

To believe

-I believed,
Ac.

To hear— I heard, Ac.
To hhve— I had, Ac.

1. Parlare.

2. Credere.

3. Sentire.
2. Avere.

ImperfeeU.

{ Parlapo, parlavi, parlava.

c ParlaiKtmo, parlavate, parlavafu)>

{ Credevo, credevi, credeva.

c Credeoomo, crede«af«, credevano.

< SentiM, aentivi, sentiva.

c Sentivamo, aentivo/e, aentirono.'

( Aveva, avevi, avevo.

I Avevomo, avevo^e, averano.

Ob9. A. There la but one exception to thia rule ; it ia the verb Mtere, to be .

I < Eravamo, eravate,

To be— I waa, Ac,

era.
erano.

Ob9. B. The imperlect is a paat tenae, which waa atill present at the time
spoken of, and may always be recognized by uaing the two terma, " wAa

DOING," or " USED TO DO." Ez.

When I waa at Berlin, I often went

to aee my friends.
When you were in Paris, you often

went to the Champs-Elys^es.

Rome was at firat governed by

kings.
Cesar waa a great man.
Cicero waa a great orator.
Our anceatora went a hunting every

day.

Quando io era a Berllno, andava

spesso a vedere i mlei amici.
Quando Ella era (vol eravate) in

Parigl, Ella andava (vol andavate)

apesso ai Campi Elisi.
Roma era da principio goveniata dal

re.
Cesare era un grand' uomo.
Cicerone era uo grand oratore.
I noatri antenati andavano fjttl 1

gioml a caccia.

> The termination of th<r firat peraon of the imperfect indicative in o haa
grown obsolete. Beaidea, the beat authora, and the Academy della Cnisca,
have rejected it, as being contrary to ita Latin origin : eraTn, amabamf legtbam^
amdUbamt Aq, -

14

814

FIFTY-NINTH LESSON.

Tkie Romana cultivated the arte and
adeneea, and rewarded merit.

Were you walking 7

I waa not walking.

Were you In Paria when the king waa
there 7

I was there when he waa tliere.

Where were you when I waa In Lon-
don 7

At what time did youbreaklaat wlien
you wore in Germany 7

I breakfasted when my father break-
fasted.
Did you work when he waa working 7

I atudied when he waa working.

Some fish.

Some game.

To live.
When i lived at my father'a, I roae
earlier than I do now.

When we lived in that country we went
a fiahing of ten.

When I waa iU, I kept in bed all day.

Laat aummer, when I waa in the
ooimtry, there was a great deal of
fimit. I

1 Romani coltivavano le arti e la

acienze, e ricompensavano 11 me-

rito.
Paaaeggiava EUa (passegglavate

Toi)7
Non paaaeggiava.
Era Ella (eravate vol) a Parigi quaa-

do vierailre7
y* era quando v* era lui.
Ove era (eravate vol) quando io eim

a Londra 7
Quando faceva Ella (&cevate voi)

colazione allorchd Ella era (era-
vate) In A)emagna7
Faceva colazione quando la faoeva

mio padre.
Lavorava Ella (lavoravate vol)

quando lavorava lui 7
Io atudiava quando egli lavorava.
Del peace.
Delia cacciagione.
Dimorare 1.
Quando Io dimorava da mio padre,

mi alzava pi^ presto che nol*

facclo adeaao.
Quando atavamO (dimoravamo) in

quel paeae, andavamo apeaao a

peace.
Quando era malato, atava a lei to

tutto 11 giomo.
L' estate (or nell* oatate) acoraai

essendo io aUa campagna, v' em

gran copia di frutti.

A thing.
The aame thing.
The aame man.

It iafJl one (the aame).

Unac

La medeaima coaa (la ateaaa eoaa).

II medeaimo uomo (Io ateaso uomoX
l^lSloateaao.
i IEi tutt' imo.

Such.

Such a man.
S«eh men.
Such a woman.
Sach thinga.
Such men merit esteem.

Tahf simile.

Un tal uomo.

Tali uominL

Una tal donna.

Talicoae.

Ten uomini merltano delta atliBn.

• JVW la a contraction of nen Io.

FIFTT^N ;CTH LBSSON.

815

Out of.

Out of thA sAtf (the town).

Without, or out doon.
The church stands outside the town.
I shall wait for you before the towif
gate.

The town or dty guta

The bonier, the turnpike.

Seldom (rarely).

Some brandy.

The life, the livelihood.

To get OM^s UoeUhood — by.

I get my liTelihood by working.
He gets his living by writing.

I gain my money by working.

By what does that man get his Uvell-
hoodf

To conUnue, 1o proceed, to go on.

I eontlnue to write.

He eontlnues his speech.

A good appetite.

The narrative, the tale.
The edge, the border, the shore.
The edge of the brook. ^ .

The sea-shore.
On the sea-shore.

The shore, the water-side, the> eoast,
the bank.

People or folks,
niey are good people.
They are wleked pedple.

Fuori di.

Fuori della cittk.

Fuori.

La chiesa d fuoii della citti.

L'aspetterd innanzi alia porta della

cittiL
La porta della dttlL
La barriera, la porta, U dazio.

Raramente, or dl rado.
Dell' acquavite.
Xavita,ilvitto.

Chiodagnarsi U vitto (il pane)

— col.

Mi guadagno il vitto lavorando.
EgU si guadagna il vitto eoUo scri-

vere.
Guadagno U mio danaro col lavo-

rare.
Con che el guadagna quesf vomo

U vitto 1

3,

Continuare 1, proseguire
seguitare 1.

Continuaa scirivere.

EgU continua 11 suo disoono.

Unbuonappetito.

II racconto, la novella.

Lariva.

La rivadel rusceUo.

La spiaggia del mare.

Sulla spiaggia del mare.

La ripa, il lido, la sponda, I* arglne

Lagente.

Sono buona gente.

Sono eattiva gente.

EXERCISES.

182.

Were you loved when you were at Dresden {Dresda) ? — I was
not hated. — ^Was your brother esteemed when he was in London f

816 PIFTT-NINTH LESSOR.

— ^He was loved and esteemed. — ^When were you in Spain {in
Itpagnd) ? — ^I was there when you were there. — ^Who was loved
and who was hated ? — ^Those that were good, assiduous, and obe-
dient, were loved, and those wh(^were nauglity, idle, and disobe-
dient, were punished, hated, and despised.*— Were you in Berlin
when the king was there f — ^I was there when he was there. —
Was your uncle in London when I was there 1 — He was there
when you were there. — ^Where were- you when I was at Dresden ?
— ^I was in Paris.— Where was your father when you were in
Vienna ?-^He was in England. — ^At what o'clock did you break-
fast when you were in England ? — ^I breakfasted when my uncle
breakfasted. — ^Did you work when he was working ? — I studied
when he was working. — ^Did your brother work when you were
working ?— He played when I was working. — On what (&' eke)
lived our ancestors ?— They lived on nothing but fish and game,
for they Went a hunting and a fishing every day. — What sort of
people were the Romans % — ^They were very good people, fiur
they cultivated the arts and sciences, and rewarded merit. — ^Did
you often go to see your friends when you were at Berlin 1 — ^1
went to see them often. — ^Did you sometimes go to the Champs
Elys^es when you were at Paris ? — I often went thither

183.

What did you do when you lived in that country ?— When we
lived there we often went a hunting.-— Did you not go out a walk-
ing {jpa99eggiare) ? — ^I went out a walking sometimes. — ^Do you
rise early ? — ^Not so early as you ; but when I lived at my un-
de's I rose earlier than I do now. — Did you sometimes keep in
bed when you stayed at your uncle's ? — When I was ill I kept in
bed all day. — ^Is there much fruit {Awi gran copia difrutU) this
year ? — I do not know, but last summer {neHa Mcorxa esiaie)^ when
I was in tne country, there was a great deal of fruit. — What do
you get your livelihood by ? — I get my livelihood by working. —
Does your friend get his livelihood by writing ? — ^He gets it by
speaking and writing. — Do these gentlemen get their livelihood
by working ? — ^TJiey g^t it by doing nothing (Jucende niente)^ for
they are too idle to work. — ^By what has your friend gained that

PIFTY-NINTH LESSON. , 317

money ? — He has gained it by working. — ^By what did you get
your livelihood when you were in England ? — I got it by writing.
— Did your cousin get his livelihood by writing ? — He got it by
working. — Have you ever seen such a person ? — I have never
seen such a one (una simile), — Have you already seen our church ?
— ^I have not seen it yet. — Where does it stand (essere) 1 — It
stands outside the town. — If you wish to see it, I will go with you
in order to show it you. — ^Upon what do the people live that in-
habit the sea^shore ? — They live on fish alone. — Why will you
not go a hunting any more ? — I hunted yesterday the whole day,
and I killed nothing but an ugly bird, so that I shall not go a
hunting any more. — Why do you not eat ? — ^Because I have not
a good appetite. — Why does your brother eat so much 1 — Because
he has a good appetite.

184.

Whom are you looking for ? — I am looking for my little bro-
ther.— If you wish to find him you must go (hisogna andar) into
the ^rarden, ibr he is there.; — The garden is large, and I shall not
be able to find him, if you do not tell me in which part (in qucU
parte) of the garden he is (na, subj.) — He is sitting under the
large tree under which we were sitting yesterday. — ^Now I shall
find him. — Why did you not bring me my clothes ?— They were
not made, so that I could not bring them, but I bring them you
now. — ^You have learnt your lesson : why has nqt your sister
learnt hers ? — She has taken a walk with my mother, so thM she
oould not learn it, but she will learn it tp-morrow. — When will
you correct my exercises ?-r*I will correct them whan you bring
me (mi porie r , future) those of your sister. — ^Do you think you
have made faults in them ? — ^I do not know. — ^If you have made
faults you have not studied your lessons weH ; for the lessons
must be learnt well (hisogna imparar bene) to make no faults in
the exercises. — It is all the same : if you do not correct them to-
day, I shall not learn them before to-morrow (non U ig^parcrd se
nan domoni). — ^You must not (Ella non deve) make any faults in
your exercises, for you have all that is necessary to prevent you
from making any.

SIXTIETH LESSON.
Lezione sessaniesimcL

OF THE PRBTBRITB DEFINITB.

(Pastato remoio,)

Thi» pMt tenie U fonned from the InfinitiTe by changing the tennlnatloni
mr§t m^ ire, into ai,H,iL Ex.

PrtUriU Definittti

( Parlmi parlotfs parld.

c Parlommo, parkwfe, parlarpiw.

< Credel, credesti, credd

c Credemmo, credeate, erederono.'

( Sentii, eentiati. aenti.

( Sentimmo, aentiate, aentirono.

To apeak— I apoke, Ac 1. Parlar«.

TV> beUere— I beUeved, 2. Credera.
Ac.

To hear— I heard, Ac 3. Sentlra.

Ob$. A. The third peraon aingnlar of the preterite definite haa in the regul&r
▼eiba ahraya the grare accent (*).

To havo— I had, Ac Avera*.
To be— I waa, Ac Eaaere*.

( Ebbi, aveati, ebbc

\ Ayemmo, aveatCi ebbero.

% Fui, foati, ftt.

C Fummo, foate, ftirono.

06a. B. The irregularity of an Italian Terb almoat alwaya folia on the pre-
teritQ definite Thla ia irregnlar only in the firat and third peraona aingular, and

1 Almoat all the verba of the aecond coi:\jugation have a double form for the
firat and third peraona aingular, and third peraon plural, and Inatead of «, ^,
iTMia^ they end in «ttj, ettd, eUero^ aa: ertdtrt^ to believe
Credei, or credettl,
Credeatl,

Credd or credette {
Credemmo,
Credeate,

Crederono, or credettero.
Practice alone can teach which form ia to be preferred. We have, however,
aacertained that when the verb enda In tert the preference ia to be -given to the
first form, aa :

Potere, to be able (cai^ — potei, I waa able.
Battere, .to beat " — battel, I did beat.
Eaiatere, to eziat " — eaiatci, I exlated, Ac

SIXTIETH LKSbOIS.

319

the third penon plurd, which almost invariably end ihe first person singulai
In 1, the third person singular in e, a;id ihe third person plural in eroi Ex.

To please — pleased (past part.).

I pleased, Ac.

To know — known,
I knew, Ac.

To hold^held.
I held, Ac

To wish — wished,
I wished, Ac.

To read — read.
I read, Ac.

To iake—4ook.
I took, Ac.

Piacere — piaciuto,

PrderiU DefiniUs
( Piacqu!, placesti, piacque.

I Piacemmo, piaceste, piacquero *

Conoscere — conosduto*

r Conobbi, conosceati, conobbe.
< Conoscem- conosce^te conobbe-
V mo, ro

Tenere — tenuto

k Tenni, tenesti,

\ Tenemmo, teneste,

VoUre — voluto,

volesti,
voleste,

i Volli,
! Volemmo,

Leggere — letio.
{ Lessi, leggesti,

C Leggemmo, leggeste,

tenne.
tennero.

voile.
voUero.*

lease,
iessero*

Prendere — preso.
{ Presi, prendesti, prese.

I Prendemmo, prendeste, presero.*

* All verbs having e before the termination ere of the infinitive are .conju-
gated in the same manner, as : nateeref to be bom ; toeere, to be silent ; giaeere,
to lie, to be situate; nuocerCf to hurt; except euaeere^ to cook, bake; and conot- '
fere, to know ; which^have in the pret. def. eoeei and conobbi.

' The principal verbs which, besides the above three, double in the preterite
definite the consonant in the first and third persons Angular and third person
plural are : aterej to have ; Mi^ I had : rompere, to break ; ruppij I broke :
cadere, to fall ; eaddi, 1 fell : aapere, to kiiow ; eeppi, I knew : piovert, to rain ;
piowe, it rained.

* All verbs whose first person singular of the indicative terminates in ggo^ co^
M7, primo, cuoto, have their preterite definite terminated in an, as : Dieoj I say ^
dieeif I said : «erteo, I write ; acriaei, I wrote : eeprimo, I express ; eepresai, 1
expressed : acuoto, I shake ; Koen, I shook : peretwiOf 1 strike ; pereoeei^ I struck.

' All verbs whose first person singular of the indicative ends In do have their
preterite definite either in on, eai, wi, osi^ or 1441, according to the letters that
precede this termination, as : perntado^ T persuade ; perstuuif I persuaded

aso

SIXTIETH LESSON.

To cAoM^— <AMfn.
lehoae, Ae.

I

Scegliere-T^ceUo.

i Sceisi, scegliestl, aoelse.

I Soeglieinino, sceglieste, scdaero.*

Obt. C» The learner has s/n/y to make himself acquainted with the Irre-
gularity of the first person singular of this tense ; this once known, all the
others are. For, in addition to the first person singular, rhe irregular persons
of this tense are the third person singular and third person plural, all the other
persons are always regulsr. The first person singular, therefore, ending in t,
thethlrd person singular changes t Into e, and the third person plural into en,
as may be seen from the above examples. This rule holds good throughout
the Italian language. All the other rules that can be given on the formation ol
this tense in irregular verbs are contained in the above five notes.

ON THE USE OP THE PRETERITE DEFINITE.

This tense is so called, because it always expresses an action completed at a
time specified, either by an adverb or some other circumstance. Ex.

I had done reading when he entered.

Vou had lost your purse, vhen J found
mine, \

Avcva finite dl leggere, quando egU

enirb.
Ella aveva (vol avevate) perduto la

di Lei (la vostra) borsa, quando

/roMs lamia.

Obe.,D. These examples show that the pluperfect Is formed in Italian, as
In English, with the imperfect of the auxiliary, and the past participle of the
verb you coiy'ugate.

We had dined, when he arrived.

The king had named an admiral, when
he heard of you.

After having spoken, you vent away.
After shaving, / tpaehed my face.

After having warmed themselves, they
went into the garden.

Avevamo pranxato, quando egli or-

rich (orgupiM).
II re aveva fatto nn ammiraglio,

quendo gU ei paHb di Lei (or qwrn-

do gU partarino di Lei).
Di^o aTer parUto, Ella se ne andb,'
Dopo essermi sbarbato, mi lavai la

dccia.
Dapo essersi scaldati, tMndartmo In

giardino.

chiedo, 1 ask; diieei, lasked: rwfo, I gnaw; row, I gnawed: ddudOy X shut;
chiusi, I did shot : fondoy I melt ; fush I melted.

« Verbs whose termination o of the first person singular indicative is pre-
ceded by a consonant, which in its turn is preceded by one of the liquids /, n, r.
with which they form the syllables Igo, nco, rdo, have their preterite definite in
Ui, net, or rei, as : rtnco, I vanquish ; rinei, 1 vanquished i mardo, I bite , marm,
I bit, Ac,

SIXTIETH L£S&0.\.

821

Ab toon Q» the bell rang, you aieofte.

Ax twm as they called me, I got up.
A» soon as he was ready, he came to

see me.
As ttofi as we had our money, we

agreed to ihaL •
As soon as he had his horse, fu came to

show it me.
After having tried several times, thsy

succeeded in doing it.
As soon as I saw him, I obtained what

I wanted.
As soon as I spoke to him, he did what

I told him.
The business was soon over.

Tbsto che la campana susnA^ Ella si

risvegliu (voi vi ristegliaste), '
Thsto che mi dUamarano, mi te9ai.
.Tbsto che fu pronto, vemu a ve

dermi.
Tosto du noi oDemmo 11 nostro da

naro, convenimmo dl cid.
TVwto che ebbe l\ suo cavallo, venm

a mostrarmelo.
Dopo aver provato parecchie volte,

pervennero a &rlo.
Tosto che lo vidi, attenni cid di cui

aveva bisogno.
Thsto che gU parlai, fece cid che gli

diss!.
L* affare fu ben tosto fatto.

OP THE PRETERITE ANTERIOR.

(Passato anteriore.)

This tense is compounded of the preterite definitive of the auxiliary, and the
post participle of the v^rb you conjugate. It Is used (from its name anUriors,
anterior,) to express an action past before another whith is likewise past, and
is hardly ever used except after one of the conjunctions :

As soon as.

After.

When.

No sooner.
Scarcely.

< Tosto che.
( Subito che.

Dopo che.
( Allorchd.
C Qoando.

Non toBto.

Appena.

It also expresses au action as quickly done* *

KXAMPUBS.

As soon as I had finished my work, I

carried it to him.
Am soon as I had dressed my«e[f, I went

out.
When they had done ptayingy they be>

gan singing.
When I had dined, it struck twelve.

ijs soanas'the guests were ossenMedt
the rsnast commenoed.

14*

TVsto die Mi Jnito U mio lavoro,

gUelo portal.
7\)sto du mi fui vestUo, uscil.

Quanif OhsTO Jbnto di giuocare, si

ihisero a eantare.
Quando ebbi pranxalo, suond

mezzodi.
Tbsto che i convitati si fUrano ra-

unati^ il banchetto comincid.

322

SIXTIETH LKSSOlf.

I had aooD done eaUng.

After the eoldien had pillaged the

town, they alanghteied without pity

the women and cliildren.

Seareeijf had w arri9tdf when we were
conducted to the king.

He had nn tooner perceioed tt»^ than he

advanced towards na.
When h* had done reading, he ex.

claimed.
When hehadwU undeniood, he left.

EbH ben prealoJbUto di manglare.
Dopo the i eoldaU ebbero aaedug*

giata la dttft, truddarono apia-

tatamente la donne e 1 lanci-

ulU.
Appena fummo ghaUi, ehe ci d

conduaae {or che ci conduaaero)

dalre.
iVbfi toeia egK ci Me ibarfti che d

aranxd verao noi.
Quoiuf ebbe fbdio dl leggera, eada-

md.
Quonif ebbe eapUo bene, parti.

To dU {to lose Ufe).'

I die, thou dieat, he or ahe diea.
We, yon, they die.

I died, Ac

Shall or will you die 7

I ahpOl die.
The man died thla morning, and hia

wife died alao. '
The man is dead.
Tbid woman died this morning.

Morire ; past part, morto.

Hnoio, muori, muore.

Horiamo, morlte, muoionc

PreUriiedeJtttiU,
c Horli, moriati, mor).

\ Horimmo^ moriste, morirow

Morr& Ella (morrete 701)1

Morrd.

L' uomo d roorto queata mattina e
aua moglie pure d morta.

L' nomo d atorto.

La donna d morta queata mane.

To km.

IkUled, Ac

To iellj to relate.
TIm spectacles
Theoptidan.
The acddent

TowrUe.

I wrote, Ac

Uccidere * ; past part, ueciso,

PreUriU depdU.
k Ucdai, ucddeati, uodae.

C Ucddemmo, noddeate, ucciaero.

RaccoiUare 1.

GUocchiali.
L* ottioo.
L' acddente.

Scrwere 2 — scritio,

PrtteriU definite.
t Scriaai, acrlveati, seriase.

\ Scrlvemmo, acrlTeate, acrisaero.

EXERCISES.
185.
What did y m do w^ien you had finished your letter ? — ^I weni
my brother, who took me to the theatre, where I had the plea*

SIXTIETH LESSON. 323

sure to find one of my friends whom I had not seen tor ten years
(da died anni). — What didst thou do after getting up this morn^
ing ? — When I had read the letter of the Polish (polacco) count,
I went to see {uscii per vedere) the theatre of the prince, which I
had not seen before (nonr-^nncora). — What did your father do
when he had breakfasted ? — He shaved and went out. — What did
your friend do after he had been a walking ? — He went to the
baron (il barone). — ^Did the baron cut the meat after he had cut
the bread 1 — ^He cut the bread after he had cut the meat. — When
do you set out ? — ^I do not set out till (nan parto che) to-morrow ;
for before I leave I will once more sea my good friends. — What
did your children do when they had breakfasted ? — They went a
walking with their dear preceptor (precettore). — Where did your
uncle go to after he had warmed himself? — ^He went nowhere.
After he had warmed himself, he undressed and went to bed. —
At what o'clock did he get up 1 — He got up at sunrise. — ^Did you
wake him ? — ^I had no need to wake him, for he had got up befdre
me. — ^What did your cousin do when he heard of (quando apprese)
the death (la morte) of his best friend ? — ^He wa» much afflicted,
and went to bed without saying a word (senxa dtr motto), — Did
you shave before you breakfasted V — I shaved when I had break-
fasted.— ^Did you go to bed when you had eaten supper ? — When
[ had eaten supper I wrote my letters, and when I had written
them I went to bed. — At what (di che) are you distressed (cffiUta) 1
— ^I am distressed at that accident. — Are you afflicted at the
death (delta morte) of your relation ? — ^I am much afljicted at it
(ne).-<— When did your relation die ? — He died last month. — Of
whom do you complain ? — I complain of your boy. — ^Why do you
^mplain of him ? — ^Because he has killed the pretty dog (il tag-
noUno) which t received from one of my friends. — Of what has
your uncle complained ? — He has complained of what you have
done. — Has he complained of the letter which I wrote to him \h»
day before yesterday ? — ^He has complained of it.

186.
Why did you not ^tay longer in Holland ? — When I was there
the living was dear, and I had not money enough to stay ther#

824 SIXTISTH LBS80N.

longer. — ^What sort of weather was it when you were on the way
to Vienna ? — ^It was very bad weather, for it was stormy (teiii-
parale)f and snowed and rained very heavily {diroUamentey —
Where have you been since I saw you ? — ^We sojourned long on
the sea-shore, until a ship arrived {faio alP arrivo d' tm — ) which
brought us to France. — Will you contihue your narrative 1 —
Scarcely had we arrived in France when we were taken (coii-
durre *) to the king, who received us very well, and sent us back
to our country. — A peasant havmg seen that old men {U veeehio)
used (servirsi di) spectacles (ocehiaH) to read, went to an optician
(«n oUico) and asked for a pair {e ne domando). The peasant
then took a book, and having opened it, said the spectacles were
not good. The optician put another pair («» aUro paio) of the
best which he could find in his shop {la hetiega) upon his nose ;
but the peasant being still unable to read, the merchant said to
him : <' My friend, perhaps you cannot read at all ? " ^ " If I could
{se sapessi leggere)^'' said the peasant, << I should not (fum avrei
biscgno di) want your spectacles." — Henry (Enrico) the Fourth,
meeting one day in his palace (il palaxzo) a man whom he did
not know (ehe gU era sconotcitUo)^ asked him to whom he belonged
(appartemessef imp. subj.). <'I belong to myself/' replied the
man. " My friend," said the king, << you have a stupid (stoUdo)
master (padroue),** Tell us (La ei raeamti) what has happened
to you lately (V aliro giome). — ^Very willingly (henvoletUieri) :
but on condition (coUa amdizitme) that you will listen to me with-
out interrupting (interrompere *) me. — We will not interrupt you:
you may be (pud esseme) sure of it. — Being lately at the theatre,
I san the Speaking Picture and the Weeping (piangere*)
Woman performed (vedere * rappresentare). As I did not find
this latter play (quest* ultima commedia) very amusing (troppo
dUegra per me)^ I went to the ooncerti where the music (la musica)
caused me (cagianare) a violent head-ache (tm vkilenio mat di
testa). I then left (loMdare) the concert, cursing it (nuiMicendo\
and went straight (emene andai difihio) to the madhouse (lo ape-
dale deipaxd\ in order to see my cousin. On entering (nUrando)
the hospital of my cousin, I was struck with horror ( fui preso d*
orrore) at seeing (vedendo) several madmen (U pazzo), who came
up to me (awicinarsi ad uno), jumpini^ (saliare) and hovling

SJXTY-FIRST LESSON.

325

{urlare). — What did you do then ? — I did the same {aUrettanto),
wad they set up a laugh (mettersi * a - ridere) as they whhdrew
(riiirarsi).

SIXTY-FIRST LESSON.
Lezione sessantesima primtu

To employ.

When we received some raoney, we
employed U in parchaaing good
books.

When you bought of that merchant,
you did not always pay in cash.

Has your alster succeeded in mending

your crarat 7
She has succeeded in it.
Has the woman returned from the

market 1
She has not yet returned.
Did the women agree to that 1
They agreed to it.
Where is your sister gone?
She is gone to church.

Here is, here are.

There is, there are.

There is m^ book.
Behold my book.
There is my pen.
Behold my pen.
There it is.
There they are.
Here I am.

Impiegare 1.

Quando ricevevamo del danaroi 1'

impiegavamo a comprare del

buoni llbii.
Quando Ella comprava da questo

mercante, non pagava semprs in

contantl. .

Sua sorella ha dessa potuto racoomo-

dare la di Lei cravatta 1
L' ha potuto.
La donna d dessa ritomata dal mer-

catol
Non n* d peranco ritomata.
Sono convenute di old le donnel
Ne son convenute.
Qv* d andata la di Lei soreOal
E andata in chieaa.

Eeeo.

Ecco 11 mio libro.

Ecco la mia panna.

Eccolo. Ftm, eccola.
Eccoli. '< eccole.
Eccomi.

Ofts. A. The pronouns are joined to the word eoeo in the following mannar

326

SIXTY-FIRST LESSON.

tliora 01 Here I am*
« " thou art.

••* •' heia.
« ** Bheta.

lam there.
There ia aomc.

Thero ia the man.

There ia the woman.
Thatia the reason why.
Therefore 1 say ao.

My feet are cold.
Hia feet are cold.
Her lianda are cold.
My body ia cold.
My head hiirta me.

Hia leg hurta faim.

Her leg harta her.
He haa a pain in his aide.
Her tongue hurta her very much.

There or here we are.
" *• you are.

" " they are.

" " they are.

Sing, PiMT,

Eccomi. EoeocL

EccotL EccovL

Eccolo. Eoooli.

Eccola. Eccolc

Eocomici, or eccomiTi.
Eccone.

Ecco 1' uomo.
Ecco la donna.
Ecco p^rchd.
Ecco perchi lo dico

t Ho freddo ai piedi.
t Egli ha freddo ai pledi.
f Esse ha freddo alle manL
t Ho freddo a tutto il coipo.
t Mi duole la teata (mi &

testa),
t Gli fa male la gambal
t Le fa male la gamba.
t Ha male ad un lato.
t Le duole molto la lingoa.

male U

A plate.
A dean plate.
Clean platea.

Un tondo.

Un tondo pnlico.

Dei tondi puliti.

The aon-in-law.
The atep-son.
The daughter-in-law.
The step-daughter.
The iather-in-law.
The atep-iather.
The mother-in-law.
The step-mother.

11 genero.
II figiiaatro.
La nnora.
LafigUaatra.
11 anocero.
11 patrigne.
Laauocera.
La matrigna.

The progress.
To impn>Te.
To improve in learning.

tlie progress of a malady

t Far dei progresai.
t Far dei progress! negli atndii, i
ecienze.
II progreaaa {or i progresai) d'
malattia.

SIXTV-FIRST LESSON.

827

What hu become of your aunt 7

I do not know what has become of

her.
What has become of your sisters 1
I cannot tell you what has become of

them.

Wine seUs well

Wine will sell well next year.

That door shuto easily.

That window does not open easily.

That picture is seen £ur off.
Winter clothes are not worn in sum-
mer.
That is not said.

Tliat cannot be comprehended.
To conceive^ to comprehend.

It is clear.

According to circomatanoes.
The circumstance.
That is according to drcumatances.
It depends.

Glad.
Pleased.
Sorry, displeased.

To scold.

To he angry with somebody.

{ Ch' d avvenuto della di Lei zia9
{Chen'ddelladiLeizial
Non so che ne sia avvenuto {mdj.).

Ch' d avvenuto delle di Lei soreliel
Non posso dirle che sia avvenuto di
loro (»ujbj.).

II vino ha grande smercio.'
Vi ha molta ricerca di vino.
II vino avri grande smercio V anno

venturo.
L* anno venturo U vino si vender^

benissimi
Questa porta si chlude agevol-

ment^.
Questa finestra non s* apre &cil-

mente.
Questo quadro si vede da lontano.
I vestiti del verno non si portano

nella state.
CiO non si dice.
•Questo non si capisce
Questo non si concepisce.

Concepire (concepisco) ; past
part, concepito; preterite
def. coneepiL

£: chiaro.

r

t Secondo le occorrenze.
L* occorrenza {or la drcostania).
Secondo le circostanze.
Dipende (dalle circostanze).

Ck>ntento (dl before in£).
Soddisiatto (di before inf.).
Halcontento, increscloso.

Sgridare I.

'Essere iSi eoHera con q[ualcuno,
Essere indispettito coniro quoL

cuno.
Nutrire mal animo contro pud-

cuno.

» SmsrdOt though in constant use, has not been wnrtlonrfl yi r by la Crutes

828

SIXTY-PIRST LBSSON.

To be angry about something.

What are you angry about?

Are yon aorry for having done it 7
I am aorry for it

Are you rich 1

lam.

Are the women liandaomel

They are; they are rich and

some.
Are you from France 7

lam.

What countrywoman is a)ie7

She ia IhAn Italy.

Essen indispettUo per fuakhe
cosa.

t dnal i V oggetto che La indiapeC

tiace?
t Le rincntoe d* aTerio ftttot
Me ne lincreace.

fiEUaricca7

Loaono.

Sono belle le donne7

Lo aono ; aono rioehe o belle.

t EEllaFranceae7 iBUadl
cia7

Loaono.
t Di qoal paeae d deaaa?

Eaaadd* Italia.

HoneaL

PoUte.

UnciYil.

Impolite.
Happy, lucky;
Unhappy, unlucky.

Easy.

Difficult.

Uaeful.

Useleas.
la it uaeful to write a good deal 7
It la uaefuL
la it well (right) to take the property of

othera7
It la wrong (bad).
It la not ifell (wrong).

Well, light.

Bad, wrong.

Oneato.

CiTfle.

Inciyile.

Scorteee (Unpnlito).

FeUoe.

InMoe.

Facile.

Difficile.

Utile.

Inutile.

fe egli utile di aeriver mohot

KutUe.

t, egli lecito di prendera I' averedagU

altri 7 (o hi loba degl' altri).
Non va-bene (ata male).
Non i lecito.
Bene.
Male.

Ofwhatuaeiathatf
That la of no nae.

What is that 7

I do not know what that la.

Whati8it7

I do not know what It la.

C t A che aerre cid 7

ft Achegiova7

( t Cid non i buono a nienta.

c t Cid non aenre a niente.

Che i questo 7

Non 80 che sia {prueni aubj.),

Cheil
e Non so che sia (mbj.).
( Non so che cosa aia (/Tea. aii^ V

SIXTY-FIRST LBSSOA*.

839

What it your name 1
My name is Ofaarlea.

What do yoa call this in Italian 7
How do you express this in Italian 7
What is that called 1
That flower is called anemone

r Come si ehiama T
2 dual d il di Lei nome 1
( Che nome ha Ella 1
i Mi cbiamb Carlo.
I Ho nome Carlo.

Come si ehiama cid In itallano 1

Come si dice questo in itallano 1

Come si ehiama cid?

Questo fiore ha nome anemone.

George^ Third. I Giorgio terzo. *

Cbt. B, Alter the Christian names of sovereigns the Italians employ tha
ordinal numbers, as in English, but without using the article.

Lewis (he Fourteenth.
Henry the Fourth.
Henry the First.
Henry the Second.
Charles the Fifth spoke seTeral
European languages fluently.
Europe, European.
Fluently.

Luigi decimo quarto.

Enrico quarto.

Enrico primo.

Enrico secondo.

Carlo Quinto parlava speditaments

parecchie lingue europee.
Europa, europeo.
Speditamente.

Rather.

Rather— than.
Rather than squander my money, I

wiUkeepit.
I will rather pay him than go thither.
I will rather bum the coat than wear

it.
He has arrived sooner than I.
A half-worn coat.
To do things imperfisctly (by lialTes).

Piutiosio.

Piuttosto che (di).

Piuttostoche disslpara 11 mlo dai*

naro, lo conserverd.
Lo pagherd piuttosto che andarri.
Abbnicierd 1' abito piuttosto che por>

tarlo.
Egli d arrivato prima di me.
Un abito mezzo logoro.
Far le cose a metA (a mezzo).

EXERCISES.

187.
Did your mother pray for any one when she went to church ?
— She prayed for her children. — ^For whom did we prAy ?— You
prayed for your parents. — ^For whom did our parents pray ?—
They prayed for their children. — ^When you received your money
what did you do with it {che ne facevano) 7 — We employed it in
purchasing (a eamprare) some good hooks. — ^Did you employ
youra also (fntre) in purchasing hooks ? — ^No ; I employed it in
aitfi^ting (a soccorrere) the poor (i paveri). — Did you not pay your

880 8IXTT«FI£ST U»80N.

tailor ?-— We did pay hiin.<"Did you always pay in cash when
you bought of that merchant? — We always paid in cash, for we
never bought on credit. — ^Has your sister succeeded in mending
{ha potuio raceomodare) your stockings ?— She has succeeded in
it {P ha pohtto). — Has your mother returned from church ? — She
has not yet returned. — Whither is your aunt gone T — She is
gone to church. — ^Whither are our cousins (/«».) gone ?— They
are gone to the concert. — Have they not yet returned from it ? —
They have not yet returned. — ^Did you forget any thbg when you
went to school ? — We often forgot our books. — ^Where did you
forget them ? — We forgot them at the school. — ^Did we forget any
thing ? — ^You forgot nothing.

188.
Who is there ^ — It is I (sanio). — ^Who are those men ? — ^They
are foreigners who wish to speak to you. — Of what country are
they ? — They are Americans.— -Where is my book ? — ^There it
is. — And my pen ? — ^Here it is. — ^Where is your sister ? — ^There
she is.— Where are our cousins (Jem.) ? — There they are. —
Where art thou, John {Giovanni) ? — Here I am.— Why do your
children live in France ? — ^They wish to learn Frendi ; that is
the reason why they live in France. — Why do you sit near the
fire ? — My feet and hands are cold ; that is the reason why I sit
near the fire. — Are your sister's hands cold ? — ^No ; but her feet
are cold. — ^What is the matter with your aunt ? — Her leg hurts
her. — Is any thing the matter with you ? — My head hurts me. —
What is the matter with that woman ? — Her tongue hurts her
very much. — Why tlo you not eat ? — I shall not eat before I have
a {prisna d^ aver) good appetite. — Has your sister a good appetite ?
— She has a very good appetite ; that is the reason why she eats
so much.-— If you have read the books which I lent you, why do
you not return them to me ?— I intend reading them once more
{aneor una volia) ; that is the reason why I have not yet returned
them to you ; but I will return them to you as soon as I have read
them a second time (per la seconda volta). — ^Why have you not
brought my shoes ? — They were not made, therefore I did not
bring them ; but I bring them you now : here they are. — Why
has your daughter not learnt her exercises ? — She has taken a

SIXTY-FIRST LESSON. 331

walk with her companion ; that is the reason why she has not
learnt them : but she promises to learn them to-morrow, if you do
not scold (sgridare) her.

189.
A French officer {uffinale) having arrived {essendxi arrivato) at
the court {la corte) of Vienna, the empress Theresa (Teresa)
asked (damandare) him, if he believed that the princess of N.,
whom he had seen the day before (la vigilia), was (fosse, subj.)
really the handsomest woman in the (del) world, as was Said.
" Madam," replied (rispondere *) the officer, " I thought so yes-
terday."— How do you like that meat ? — I like it very well. —
May I ask you for (Oserei domandark) a piece of thatiish? — ^If
you will have the goodness (la hontd) to pass (porgere) me your
plate, I will give you some.- —Would you have the goodness to
pour me out some drink (di zirsamu da here, or di mescemU) ? —
With much pleasure. — Cicero (Cicerone) seeing his son-in-law,
who was very short (piccoUssimo), arrive (venire) with a long
sword (cori una lunga spada) at his side (al laio), said, " Who has
fastened (aUaccare) my son-in-law to this sword V

190.
What has become of your uncle ? — ^I will tell you what has
become of him. Here is the chair (la eedia) upon which he oflen
sat (essere seduto), — Is he dead ? — ^He is dead. — ^When did he
die? — ^He died two years ago, — I am Yery much grieved at it. —
Why do you not sit down ? — ^If you will stay with me, I will sit
down ; but if you go I shall go along with you. — What has
become of your aunt 1 — I do not know what has become of her.
— ^Will you tell me what has become of your sister 1 — I will tell
you what has become of her. — ^Is she dead ? — She is not dead. —
What has become of her 1 — She is gone to Vienna.— »What has
become of your sisters ?— -I cannot tell you what has become of
them, for I have not seer them these two years. — Are your parents
still alive ? — They are dead.— How long is it since your cousin
(Jem.) died ?— -It is six months since she died. — Did the wine
sell well last year ? — ^It did not sell very well ; but it will sell
better next year, for there will be a great deal, and it will not be
dear— Why do you open the door? — ^Do you not see how it

382 SIXTY-FIRST LKSSON.

smokes here ? — ^I ses it ; but you must (hisogna) open the window
instesd of opening the door.-^The window does not open easily ;
that is the reason why I open the .door. — When will you shut it ?
— ^I will shut it as soon as there is no {ehe fion vi tara) more
smoke. — ^Did you often go a fishing when you were in that
country ? — We often went a fishing and a hunting. — ^If you will
go with us into the country you will see my &ther's castle. — ^You
are very polite^ Sir ; but I haye seen that castle already.

191.
When did you see my father's castle 1 — ^I saw it when I was
trsTelling (viaggiando) last year. — ^It is a very fine castle, and is
seen far off.— rHow is that said ?-^That is not said. — Thatcannot
be comprehended (ftort si concepUce) ; cannot every thing be ex-
pressed in your language ?-— Every thing can be expressed, but
not as in yours. — Will you^rise early to-morrow ? — It will depend
upon circumstances- {tecando) ; if I go to bed early I shall rise
early, but if I go to bed late I shall rise late.— Will you love my
children ?— If they are good I shall love them.-— Will you dine
with us to-morrow ?— If you get ready {far preparare) the food
I like I shall dine with you. — ^Have you already reaSi the letter
which you received this morning ? — ^I have not opened it yet. —
When will you read it ?— I shall read it as soon as I have time
{che ne tmrd U tempo). — Of what use is that ? — ^It is of no use. —
Why have you picked it up? — ^I have picked it up in order
to fibow it you.'-^Can you tell me what it is ? — ^I cannot tell
you, for I do not know ; but I will ask {domandare a) my
brother, who will tell you. — ^Where did you find it ? — ^I found
it on the shore of the river, near the wood. — ^Did you perceive
it from a&r? — ^I had no need to perceive it from afar, for I
passed by the side of the river.— Have you ever seen such a
thing % — ^Never.-— Is it useful to speak much ? — ^It is, according
to circumstances : if one wishes to learn a foreign {straidero)
language, it is useful to speak a great deal. — Is it as useful to
write as to speak ? — ^It is more useful to speak than to write ; but,
in order to learn a foreign language, one must {Usi^na) do both
(VvnoeV dUro).—U it useful to write all that one says ?— That
is useless.

SIXTY-SECOND LESSON.
Lezione sessantesima seco?ida.

As to {as for).

As to me.

Km to that I do not know what to Bay.

I do not know what to do.

I do not know where to go.

He doea not know what to answer*

We do not know what to bay.

To die cf a duoase.

She died of the small-poz.
The small-pox.
The fever.
The intermittent lever.

The apoplexy.

He had a cold fit.

He has an agua ,

His fever has returned.

He has been struck with apoplexy.

To strike.
Sure.
To he nwe of a thing.

I am sure of that.

I am sure that she has arrived.
I am sure of it.

To happen.

Something has happened.

In quanio a, or quanto a.
( Clnanto a me.
c In quanto a me.

Quanto a cid, non.so che dira.

Non so che fare.

Non so dove andare.

Non sa che risppndere.

Non sappiamo che comprare.

Morire* d* una malaUia.

Esse d morta del vaiuolo.

II vaiuolo.

La febbre.

La febbre Intermiti^nte.
I L' attacco d' apoplessia.
[ II colpo apppletico, V apoplessia.

Egli aveva nn accesso di febbre.

& preso^dalla febbre.

Gli d ritomata la feblnre.

EgU 6 state colpito d' apoplessia.

CoJpire {colpisco^ &c.)

SiCurOy certo (fem. sicura,

certa).
Esser sicuro (certo) di quakhe

cosa.
[ Ne sono sicuro (certo).
I Sono certo (^curo) di cid.
Sono certo ch* essa i arrivata.
Ne sono certo (sicuro).

'Accadere*; p. ^^ri. accaduto.
(Conjugated like cadere, Less. LI.)
PrtUriU Definite.
Accaddi, accadesti, accadde.
Accademmo, accadeste, accaddero,

[Used only in the 3d pen.]
E accaduto qualche oosa.

834

8IXTT-8BCOND LESSON.

Nothing hu happened.
What hat happened 1
What has happened to herl
She has had an accident

Non i accadoto niente.
Ch' d accadnto 1
Cheledaccadutol
Eaaa ha avuto un acddente

To shed.

To pour out,

A tear.

To shed tears.

To pour out .some drink.
I poor oat some drink for that man.
With tears in his, her, our, or my eyea.

fSpargere* 2 ; p. part, tpano
Prtteriie IkftniU,
Sparai, sptrgesti, spaite.

Sparge'jimo, spargeste, sparMi*

Versare 1.

Unalagrima.
Spargere lagrime.
Versar da here (mesoere).
Verso da here a qaest* uomo.
CoUe hq^rime agli occhL

Sweet, mild.
Soar, add.
Some iwvet wine.
A mUd air.
A mild Mphyr.
A soft Bleep.
Nothing makes life more agreeable
than the society o( and intercoarse
with, onr friends.

Dolce.

Acido, aeida.
Del Tino dolee.
Un' aria dolce.
Un dolce seffiro.
Un dolce sonno.
t Non avri cosa che rmda hi vitaco: i

dolce quanto la societA e il Lom-

mercib del nostri amici.

Obt. A. Tkere i«, in the above signification, may be rendered in seven dlfler
sot manners, viz. avn, erri, vi ka, vil^ t^ ha^ t^ ^ if t

To repair to.

To repair to the army, to one's regi-
ment
An army, a regiment
I repaired to tliat place.
He repaired thither.

Rendersi a (pret. def. re*t,
rendesH, rese^ &c.)

Rendersi all' eserdto, al suo reggl

mento.
Un eserdto, mi reggimento.
Mi sono reso a questo luogo.
Visidreso.

To cry, to scream, to ehridt.
To help,

I hdp him to do it
I hdp yon to write.
I will help you to work.

Gridare 1.

Aiutare 1 (governs the accas
and takes a before the inf.^
L' aiuto a larlo.
L' aiuto a scrivere.
Voc^io aintarla a lavorare

SIXTT-SBCOND LBSSON.

"885

To cry for help.
The help.

( Chiamare aiuto^
c Domandar Boecorso.
L' aluto, il Boccorao.

To irtquire afUr same one.

IVifl you have the goodnese to pass me

that plate 1
Will you pass me that plate, If you

please?

To reachy offer, present.

Informarsi di qualcuno,

Vuol Ella aver la bonti di porgerml
quel piatto 7
t Favoriaca di por^ermi Quel piatto 1

Porgere * 2, past part, porio
(pret. . def. porsi, porgestiy
parse, &c.).
Jh favour. Favorire Z (favorisco),

Jf you pUof is often rendered in Italian by the impentiTe

jtBCOTlMCn.

Please to sit down.
As you please.
At your pleasure.
As you like.

To please.
To knock at the door.

To trust same one.

To distrust one.

Do you trust that man 1

I trust him.

He trusts me.

We iqustnot trust erery body.

To laugh at something.

Do yon laugh at that 1

llAUghatlt.

At what do they laugh 7

To laugh in a person's face.

Favorisca di sedersi.

, Come Le place.
Come Le aggrade.

Aggradire 3 (isco),
i Bussare aUa porta.
\ Picchiare alia porta

f Affidarsi a qwUeuno.

( Non fidarsi di qualcuno.

C'Diffidare dl qualcuno.
Si fida Ella di quest* uomo 7
Megliaffido. MifidodiLuL
Egli s* affida in me (or a me).
Non bisogna fidarsi di tutti.

' Riders * di quahhe cosa (Les»

' sons LIY. and LX.)

Preterite Definite. '
Risi, ridestl, rise.

Ridemmo, rideste, risers.

Ride EUa di ciO.7 Ridete voi di 7

Ne rido.

Dicheridono?

Riders! di qualcuno.

88e

SIXTY-SBCONU LS8SON.

W«lan«li6diiihls£uw.

To langh at, to deride eome one.

I Sngh at (deride) yoa.
Did yoa laugh at ubI
We did not laugh at you.

We neyer laugh at any body.

Noiciaiamoriddilui.
r Riderai p
) Beffarai > di qoalcnna
C Farai beffe 3
{ Mi rido di Toi (di Lei).
: M: befib di Toi (di Lei).

Sll^effavaEHadinoil
{ Non d ridevamo di Lei (di Toi).
i Non ci befiavanio di Lei (di toL)
r Non ci beffiamo mai di neaaonow
< Non ci facciamo mai beffe di n

Full

Pieno.

Abookfulloferrora.

Un llbro pieno d' errori.

To afford.

t ^^^ ^ <^**' -^^^ ^^^ ^

Can you afford to buy that hone 1

Ha Ella di che comprare quel ca

vallo?

I can afford it

Ho di che oomprarlo.

Non ho di che compiarlo.

Who ia there 1

Chi 4 1&1

n\Ml.

Sono io.

ia not rendered in Italian.

it ia not I.

Non Bono io.

laifhel

E deeao?

/<ianothe.

Non d deaao.

Are they your brothera 1

Sono idi Lei firateUi (ori anol, m-

i Yoatri frateUi) 1

JSiathey.

Sono easi.

. /<U pot they.

Non Bono essf.

laitahel

k deeaal

itiaahe.

fedeaaa.

itisnotahe.

Non d deaaa.

Are they your aiateral

Sono le di Lei aorelle (or le sue, or la

voatre aorelle) 7

/Ms they.

Sono esae.

it ia not they.

Non Bono eaae.

i> ia I who apeak.

Son io che parlo.

latt they who Uughl

Son essi (/em. esse) che ridono 7

It is you who laugh.

^ Lei che ride (aiete voi che ridete).

Ia U thou who haat done it 7

Sei tu che V hai latto 1

.

/ Siete yoi, aignori, che arete dett«

Aia you, genUemen, who have aaid

N cid.

that.

) Sono loro signori che fianno dottc

^ cid.

SIXTY -SECOND LESSON.

»3V

We learn Italian, my brother and I.

You and I will go into the country.

You and ho will stay at home.

You will go to the country, and I will

return to tOwn.
A lady. A lady of the court
What were yon doing when your tutor

was here .1
I waa doing nothing.
What did you say 7
I aaid nothing.

MIo fratelloed io impariamoT ita

llano.
Ella (vol) ed io andremo In cam-

pagna.
EUa (vol) ed esao resteranno a casa.
Voi andrete (Ella andra) in cam-

pagna ed io ri{ornerd in citta.
Una signora. Una dama di eorte.
Che faceva (iacevate) quando ii di

Lei (i^ vostro) precettore era qui 1
Io non faceva niente (nulla).
ChedicevaEllal
Io non diceva niente

EXERCISES.

192.

Where did you take this book from 1 — I took U out of the room
(neUa camera) .of your friend (fern.), — Is it right (jpermesso) to
take the books of other people ? — ^It is not right, I know ; but I
wanted it, and I hope that your friend will not be displeased {non
ne sard incresciosa), for I will return it to her as soon as I have
read it. — ^What is your name ? — My name is William {Crugli-
ehno), — ^What is your sister's name?-— Her nante is Eleanor
{Eleonora), — Why does Charles complain of his sister ?^-Bccause
she has taken his pens. — Of whom are these children oomplain-
icg ? — Francis {Francesco) complains of Eleanor, and Eleanor
of Francis. — ^Who is right ? — They are both {tuUi e due) wrong ;
for Eleanor wishes to take Francis's books, and Francis Elea-
nor's, — To whom have you lent Dante's works {h opere di Danie) ?
— I have lent the first volume to William and the second to Louisa
{Luigia). — How is that said in Italian ? — It is said thus. — How
is that said in French ? — That is not said in French. — Has the
tailor brought you your new coat ? — He has brought it me, but
it does not Hi me. — Will he make you another ? — He will makp
me another; for, rather than wear it, I will give it away {dar
via). — ^Will you use that horse ? — I shall not use. it. — Why will
you not use it ? — ^Because it does not suit me. — Will you pay for
it ? — ^I will rather pay for it than use it. — To whom do those fine
books belong {appartengono) ? — They belong to William. — Who

15

•88 SIXTY.SBC05D LESSON.

has giYen them to hhn ?— ^His father. — Will he read them f — ^lle
will tear them rather than read them. — Who has told you that ?
•—He has tqld me so himself (egU stesso).

193.

What country womaa is that lady {la signora) ? — She is from
France. — ^Are you from France ?— No, I am from Germany. —
Why do you not give your clothes to mend ? — It is not worth
while, for I must have (mi ahUsognano) new clothe s.*4s the coat
which you wear not a good one 1 — It is a half-worn coat, and is
good for nothing. — Are you angry with any one {essere in coUera
con qualeuno) ? — I am angry with Louisa, who went to the Opera
without telling me a word of it. — Where were you when she went
out ? — ^I was in my room. — I assure you that she did not know
it. — Charles the Fifth, who spoke fluently (spcditamenU) several
European languages, used to say {aveva costume di dire\ that we
should speak (che hisognava partare) Spanish with the gods,
Italian with our friend {fern.), French with our friend {mas,),
German with soldiers, English with geese {coUe oehe), Hungarian
{ungherese) with horses, and Bohemian {boemo) with the devil.

194.
Of what illness did your sister die ? — She died of fever. — How
is your brother ? — My brother is no longer alive. — He died three
months ago. — I am surprised {maravigUato) at it, for he was very
well last summer when I was in the couotry. — Of what did he
die 1 — ^He died of apoplexy. — How is the mother of your friend ?
—She is not {ntnk ista) well ; she had an attack of ague the day
before yesterday, and this morning the fever has returned {le e
ntorfiato).f— Has she the intermittent fever 1 — I do not know, but
she has.often cold fits. — What is become of the woman whom I
saw at your mother's? — She died this morning of apoplexy . — ^Do
your scholars learn their exercises by heart ?— They will teai
them rather than learn them by heart. — What does this man ask
me for ?— He asks you for the money which you owe him. — If
he will repair to-morrow morning {domani maUina) to my house,
I will pay him what- 1 owe him. — ^He will rather lose his money
than repair thither (rendervisi). — Why does the mother of our

SIXTY-SECOND LESSON. 33&

old servant shed tears ?— What has happened to he;* ? — She. sheds
tears because the old clergyman (il vecchio ecclesiasiico), her
friend, who was so very good to her (cJie lefaceva ianlo lmie)y died
a few days ago. — Of what illness did he die? — ^He has. been
struck with apoplexy. — ^Have you helped your father to write his
letters ? — I have helped him. — Will you help me to work when
we go {quando noi andremo)U> town t — I will help you to work,
if you help me to get a livelihood.

195.
Have you inquired after the merchant who sells so cheap ? — I
have inquired after him, but nobody could tell me what has be-
come of him. — Where did he live when you were here three
years ago ? — He lived then {aUora) in Charles-street (neOa con-
trada CarlOj or via Carlo), number fifty-seven. — How do you like
this wine ? — I like it very well, but h is a little sour. — How does
your sister like those apples (Ja mela) 1 — She likes them very
well, but she says that they are a little too sweet. — Will you
have the goodness to pass me that plate 1 — With much pleasure.
— Shall I {devo) pass you these fishes ? — ^I will thank you to
(prego di) pass th^ to me. — Shall I (devo) pass the bread to
your sister 1 — ^You will oblige her (Le fara piacere) by passing
it to her {nel porgergUek). — How does your mother like our food ?
—She likes it very well, but she says that she ha§ eaten enough.
— ^What dost thou ask me for^? — Will you be kind enough to {La
prego di) give me a little bit (un pezzeito) of that mutton ? — Will
you pass me the bottle, if you please (favorisca) ?-i-Have you not
drutik enough ?-*-Not yet, for I am still thirsty. — Shall I {devo
io) give you {versarle) some wine ? — No ; I like cider better.^—*
Why do you not eat ? — ^I do not know what to eat. — ^Who knocks
at the door ? — ^It is a foreigner. — ^Why does he cry ?— He cries
because a great misfortune has happened to him. — What has hap-
pened to you ?— Nothing has happened to me. — Where will you
go this evening ? — I do not know where to go.-^Where will your
brothers go? — I do not know where they will go; as for me, I
shall go to the theatre. — Why do you go to town ? — ^I go thither
in order to purchase some books. — Will you go thither with me ?
—I will go with you, but I do not know what to do there.

SIXTY-THIRD LESSON.
Lezione sessantesima terza.

To get into a scrape.

To get out of a Mcrape,

I got oat of the flcnpe.
That man always geu Into scraps
but he alwaya get* out of them

f Auirarsi cattivi affaxi.
f Cavarsi d^ impiccio.

Mi eon cavato d' impiccio.

dueat* nomo a' attira mai aempn

cattivi afiarl, ma n' esce aempra

&ciimente.

Anumgtt or omidH.

To make some one's acquahU-'

anee.
To become acquainted with

somebody,

I have made his or her acquaintance. \
I have become aoquainted with him (

or her. 3

Are yon acquainted with him (her) 7 )
Do yon Icnow him (her) ? >

I am acquainted with fcdm Qhk). )
I know him (her). >

He or she ia an acquaintance of mine. >
She or he is my acquaintance. >

He is not a friend, he is but an ao-

qnaintance.

To enjoy.
Do you enjoy .good health 1

To be well
She is well.
7b imagine.

Fra or Ira.

Far canoscenxa con fualeumo.

Ho fittto k turn 001
Lo(la)ooooace^Ua9

Lo (U) conosco.

fe di mia conoseenxa, or
^ una mia conoscenza.
Non ^ an amico, d solamento \

Godere 2, di.
{ Gode Ella baona salute 1
( Gode Ella d' ana buona salute 1

C Star bene.

(Essere in tnuma salute,

( Sta bene.

( fe in buona sslate.

f t Immaginarsi.

SIZTT-THIRD LESSON.

Ml

Our Mow-creatnres.
He has not Ub equal, or hla match.

I noatri aimili.

EgU non ha V ugiiale.

To resemble some one, to look

like some one.
That man resembles my brother.

That beer looks like waten
Each other.
We resemble each other.
They do not resemble each other.

The brother and the sister love each
other, but do not resemble each
other.

Are you pleased with each other?

We are.

So, ihns.

AS| or as well as.

The appearance, the eounle-
nance.

To show a disposition to.

That man whom you see shows a
desire to approach us.

To look pleased with some one.
To look cross at some one.

lAThen I go to see that man, instead of
receiving me with pleasure, he looks
displeased.

A good-looking man.
A bad-looking man.
Bad-looking people, or folks.
To go to see some one.

Rassomigliare a qualcmto,

Quest' uomo rassomiglia a mio tm»

tello.
Quests birra d come acqua.
V un V altro.
Not ci rassoroigliamo.
Kglino {fern, elleno) non si rasso-

mlgilano.
II fratello e la sorelk s* amano, ma

non si rassomigliano.

Siete (sono) contenti 1' un deli' al«
tro?

Lo slamo.

Cori.
r Siccome, come.
^ Egualmente che.
C In quel modo che.

La ciera (i' aspetio^ la
sembianxa, la visla, la
mostra).

Far vista, far mostra di,

duell' uomo che Tede ft vista d*

aTvidnarsi a noi.
( Far huona cera a qualcuno,
I Accoglier bene qualcuno.

iFar caitiva cera a qualcuno,
AccogUer male qualcuno,

dnando yado da quelP uomo, in
Tece difiirmi (mostrarmi) buona
cera, egli mi fa (mi mostra) cattiva
cera.

duando vado da quell' uomo, in vece
d' accogliermi bene, egli m' ac
coglie male.

Un uomo dl buon aspetto.

Un uomo di cattivo aspetto.

Delia gente di cattivo aspetto.

Visitare qualcuno,' or far visita a
qualcuno.

342

srxrr -THIRD lessok.

To pay tome one a Tiait.

To frequent a place.

To frequent aocietiea.

To aaeocimte toUh mnae one.

Reaiituire la visita a qua^cnno, m
render laviaita a qualcono.

Prequentare an luogo, or an<Ur ipea
ao in un luogo.

Frequentare delle sodeU.

Prequentare qualcuno.

To look Kkej to appear.

How doea be look 1
He looks gay (aad, contented).
You appear very well
You look like a doctor;
She looka angry, appears to be angry.
Tbey look contented, appear to be con-
tented.
To look good, to appear to be good.

Aver V aspetio (aver V aria).

Che cera ha 7

Ha la cera Ueta (trista, contenta).
Ella ha V aspetto di star bene.
Ella ha I* aspetto.d' un medico.
Essa ha 11 sembiante Indlspettlto.
-Kglino hanno V aspetto co.Wento.

Aver r aspetto buona

To drink someone's health.
I drink your health.

It is all over with me.
ItisalloTer.

t Bere alia salute dl qualcuno.

t Bevo alia di Lei aalute.
( t Sono perduto {Jtm, perdnta).
1 1 Sono ito (/«m. Ita).
is finita.

To hurt some one's Mings.
Von have hurt that man's fselings.

Far dispiacere a qualcuno.

Ha fatto dispiacere a quell' uomo.

A place.
I know a good place to swim In.

IUn luogo.
t Conosco un boon luogo per nuo
tare.

To experience^ to undergo.

I have experienced a great many mle-
Ibrtnnes.

Sperimentare 1.

Ho sperimenuto molte disgrazie.
Son passato per molte disgrazie.

To suffer.

To open.

To offer.

To cover.

To cover again.

To discover.
To feel a pain in one's head or foot
r felt a pain in my eye.

Soffrire * 3 ; p. part, sofferto
ApTire»3; "

Offrire»3; "

Coprlre*3; »

Ricoprire • 3 ;
Scoprire • 3 ;

aperto.

olTerto.

coperto.

ricoperto

SGoperto.

Soffrir dolori al capo, al piede.
Ho sofferto all' occhio.

SIXTY-THIRD LESSON.

843

To negkci.

Ho has neglected his daty.
He neglects to call upon me.

To yield.

We must yield to necessity.

To spring fonoard.

The cat springs upon the rat.
To leap on horseback.

An increase, an augmentation.

For more bad luck.
For more good luck.
The fullness.
For more bad luck ^o complete my
bad luck) I have lost my purse.

To lose orU's xcits.

That man has lost his wits, and he
does not know what to do.

Obstinately, by all means.

That man wishes by all means to lend
me his money.

TofoUow.
I follow, thou foUowest, he foUowsi

To pursue.

To preserve, to save.

f Trascurare 1, negUgere * 2,
non badare 1 ; past part.
negleiio.

Preterite Dtfinito-
Neglessi, negUgtoeti, neglesse.
Neg^igem- negllgeste, neglessero.
L mo,
Ha trascurato il suo dovere.
Egli bada poco a visitarmi.

Cedere 2 ; pret. deL regular,

or ccssi, or cedetli.
Bisogna cedere alia necessita.

Lanciarsi 1, or slanciarsi 1.

II gatto si slancia sul sorcio.
Lanciarsi a cavallo.

Un aumento (un' agginnta, un ac-

crescimento).
Per colmo di sventura (d* infelicitk).
Per colmo di felicitiL
II orimo.
Per colmo di sventura ho perduto la

ixiia borsa.

Perdere la testa.

Quell' uomo ha perduto la testa e
non sa che fare.

Ad ogni paito.

Quest' uomo vuole ad ogni patto
prestarmi il suo danaro.

Seguitare 1, seguire * 3.
Seguo or sieguo, segui or siegui,
segue or siegue, Ac.

Perseguitare 1, insegmre ♦ 3

(b conj. like seguire *).
Conservare 1.

' EXERCISES.
196.
Must 1 sell to tha; man on credit ? — You may sell to him, but
not on credit; you must not trust him, for he will not pay yoii.

344 SIXTY-THIBD LESSON.

— Has he already deceived (ingannare) any body? — ^He has
already deceived several merchants who have trusted him. — Must
I trust those ladies ? — ^You may trust them * but as to me I shall
not trust them, for I have often been deceived by {daUe) women,
and that is the reason why I say : We must not Irust every body.
— Do those merchants trust you ? — They trust me, and I trust
them. — Whom do those genUemen laugh at ? — They laugh at
those ladies who wear red gowns {la veste) with yellow ribbons.
— Why do these people laugh at us ? — They laugh at us because
we speak badly. — Ought we (dohbiamo) to laugh at persons who
speak badly ? — We ought not to laugh at them ; we ought, on the
contrary (devest al contrario), to listen to them, and if they make
blunders (errori)^ we ought to correct them. — What are you laugh-
ing at ? — I am laughing at your hat ; how long {da quando in
qua) have you worn it so large ? — Since (da che) I returned from
Germany. — Can you afford tp {ha Ella di che) buy a horse and
a carriage I — I can afibrd it.~-Can your brother afibrd to buy
that large house ? — He cannot afibrd it. — ^Will your cousin bu>
that horse ? — He will buy it, if it pleases {eonvenire ♦) him. — Have
you received my letter ?— I have received it with much pleasure.
I have shown it to my Italian master, who was surprised {che i
rmasto maravigUaio)^ for there was not a single fault in it.-^Have
you already received Petraroa's and Boccaccio's works {le opere
del Petrarca e del Boccaccio) ? — ^I have received thos© of Boc-
caccio ; as to those of Petrarca, I hope to receive them next
week.

197.

Is it thou, Charles, who hast soiled my book ? — It is not I ; it
is your little sister who has soiled it. — Who has broken my fine
inkstand ?— It is I who have broken it. — Is it you who have
spoken of me ? — ^It is we who have spoken of you, but we have
said of you nothing but good {se non dd bene), — Who knocks at
the door ?— It is I ; will you open ? — What do you want {desid-
srare) 1 — ^I come to ask you for the money which you owe me,
and the books which I lent you. — ^If you will have the goodness
to come to-morrow I will return both to you. — Is it your sister
who is playing on the harpsichord ? — It is not she. — ^Who is it ?

MXTY-TIllKO LBSSDN. 345

— (t la my cousin (fern.), — Are they your sisters who art
coming? — It is they. — Are they your neighbours {fern.) who
were laughing at you? — They are not our neighbours. — Who
are they ? — They are the daughters of the countess whose brother
has bought your house. — Are they the ladies of whom you have
spoken to me? — ^They are. — Shall you learn German? — My
brother and I will learn it. — Shall we go to the country to-
morrow ? — I shall go to the country, and you will remain in
town. — Shall I and my sister go to the opera ? — ^You and she will
remain at home, and your brother will go to the opera. — What
did you say when your tutor was scolding you (La riprendeva) ?
— ^I said nothing, because I had nothing to say, for I had not (non
avendo to) done my task, and be was in the right to scold mc (di
rampognamu). — What were you doing whilst {quat^do) he was
out (ftiori) ? — I was playing on the violin, instead of doing what
he had given me to do. — What has my brother told you ? — He
has told me that he will be the. happiest man when he knows how
(quando saprd) to speak Italian well.

198.

Why do you associate with those people? — I associate with
them {lafrequenio) because they are useful to me. — If you oon<
tinue to associate with them you will get into bad scrapes, for
they have many enemies. — ^How does your cousin conduct him-
self?— ^He does not conduct himself very well, for he is always
getting into some scrape (or other). — ^Do you not sometimes get
into scrapes ? — It is true (yero) that I sometimes get into them,
but I always get out of them again {ma tC esco semprefelicemenie).
^-Do you see those men who seem desirous (chefanno vista) of
approaching us ? — I see them, but I do not fear them ; for they
hurt nobody. — ^We must go away (hist^na aUontanarci), for I do
not like to mix with peo^e whom I do not know. — I beg of you
not to be afraid of them (aveme paura), for I perceive my uncle
among them.^— Do you know a good place to swim in ? — I know
one.— >Where is it ? — On that side of the river, behind the wood,
near the high road (vicino alia via maestro). — When shall we go
to swim ? — ^This evening, if you like. — Will' you wait for me
before the city gate ? — I shall wait for you there ; but I beg pf

16*

846

SIXTY-FOURTU LESSO&

you not to forget it.— You know that I never foi^et my promiaes.
^Where did you become acquainted with that lady ?— I became
acquainted with her at the house of one of my relations. — Why
does your cousin ask me forYnoney and books ? — He is a fool (tm
paxxo) ; for of me {n me), who am his nearest relation (il sua pin
proisimoparenU) and his best friend, he asks nothing. — ^Why did
you not come to dinner (venir a pranxare)! — I have been
hindered, but you have been able to dine without me {senxa di
me). — Do you think {credere) that we shall not dine, if you can.
not come I— How long {smo a quando) did you wait for me ?-*
We waited for you till a quarter past seven, and as you did not
come, we dined without you. — ^Have you drunk my health V^
We have drunk your health, and that of your parents.

SIXTY-FOURTH LESSON.
Lezione sessantesima qtiaria.

How good yott are!

How foolish he is!

How foolish she is!

How rich that man is 1

How handsome that woman is I

How much kindness you have for

me!
How many obUgaUons I am under to

you!

To he Wider obligations to some

one,

1 9xA under many obligations to him.
How many- people I
How happy yon an !
How much wealth that man has !
How much money that man has spent '
In his life!

r Q^uanto Ella d buona ! or
< Q^uanto ^ buono !
( (Quanta bont& 1 -

Quanto d ibiocoo 1

Q^uanto d sciocca !

Quanto d ricco quell' uomo !

Quanto d bella qoeUa donna !

Q^uanta bonti Ella ha per me 1

c Q^uante obbligasioni Le debbo !
I duanto vi son debitore !

Aver (dovere) delle oWiga^
noni verso qualeuno.

Gli debbo molte obbligazioni.
Quanta gente!
duanto Ella d fellce !
Qtiante ricchezze ha quell' uomo !
Quanto danaro ha speso quell' nomo
neHa sna vita !

SIXTY-FOURTH LESSON.

347

To be obliged to some one for some-
thing.

To be indebted to some one for some-
thing.

I am indebted to him (to her) for it.

E^ser obbligato verso qualcuno pei

qualche cosa.
Esser debitore verso {vr a) qnalcano'

di qualche cosa.
GUene sono debitore.

To thank.

To thank some one for some-
thing.

I thank you for the trouble you have
taken for mew

Yoa have no reason for it.

Is theie any thing more great 1
Is there any thing more cruel 1
Is there any thing more wicked ?
Can any thing be more handsome?

Hovir large 7
How high?
How deep ?

Of what size?
Of what height?
Of what depth?

Of what height is his or her house?
It is nearly fifty Teet high.
Our house is thirty feet broad.
That table is six feet long.
That river is twenty feet deep.

The size.
Of what size is that man ?

How was that child dressed ?
It was dressed in green.
The man with the blue coat.
The woman with the red gown.

Ringraziare (governs the ac-
cusative of the person, and
the preposition per of the
object, as in English).

Ringraziare qwdcuno per

qualche cosa.

La ringrazio per la pena ch' Ella si
d data per me. (or, Vi ringrazio
per V incomodp d).

r Nonne vale il prezzo.

I Non ne vale la pena.

Che v' d di pVx grande ?
Che v' d di piii crudele ?
Che v' d di piii cattivo 1
V d qualche cosadi piDi bello?

Di chegrandezza?

Ctuanto d alto (alta) ?

duanto i profondo (profonda) V

Quanto d alta la sua casa ?
E alta cinquanta p^di incirca.
La nostra casa d larga trenta piedi.
duella lavola d lunga sei piedl.
duesto fiume d profondo venti
piedl.

La statura, grandezza, forma.
Di quale statura d queH' nomol

Come ^ra vestito quel fanciuUol
t Egli era vestito di verde.
t L' uomo dall' abitq turchlAo.
t La donna dalla veate rossa.

348

SIXTY-FOURTH LESSOH.

True.
Ib it trna that hli home Is burnt 1

It iB true.
Is it not 1
Ib it not tnie7

Vero,

EYero che la BU

datal
fivero.
Non d verol
Non^egliTOTol

d abbnio-

Perhaps.
1 Bhall perhapB go thither.

Toaharef to divide
Whose?

Parse.

V andxO forae.

Dividere * 2 ; p. part, dimso ;
pret. def. divisi.

Di chi f (See Lessons XXI.
and XXIX.)

Ofr«. The abaolute pbaaeasiTe pronoun, mtiu^ tiUne, Ac, whan it is preceded
hj the Terb to ^ e««ere, ia in ItfJian rendered merely by the poBaeaaiTe pr«^
noun. Ex.

WhoaehoraeiBthiBl

It Ib mine.

Whoae horaes are these 1

Tliey are mine.

Whose house is thisi

It is mine.

Whose houaea are theae7

They are mine.

Di chi d queato cavallol

l^mio.

Di chi son quest! caTallil

Bono miei.

Di chi d queata caaal

kmia.

Di chi aon queata caaal'

Sono Bfie.

To run up.

Many men had run up; butinatead of
extingulahing the fire, they aet to
plundering.

To run to tlie aaaiatance of aome one.

To extingtiish.
Thamiaeraant

Accorrere * 2 ; past part, ac-

corso; pret. def. aceorsi.
Mold uomini erano aeoorai, ma in

▼ece d' estinguere il fuoco, a* erano

measi a predars.
Accorrere al aoccorao di qualcnno.

Estinguere * ; p. part, e^tmio ;

pret. def. estinsi.
Lo acelierato.

To save, to deliver.

To save any body's life.

To plunder (to rQb).

To set about something.
Have they succeeded in extinguishing

thefirel
They have succeeded in it.

Salvare 1. Liherare 1.

Saivare la vita a qualcuno.
Predarel.
t Mettersi a qualche oosa.
Sono perrenuti ad eatiagiien

fuoco 7
Vi sono penrenuti.

SIXTY-FOURTH LESSON.

849

The watch.
Hie watch indicates the hour:}

To mdieate, to mark.

ToquameL
To qiiarrel with some one.

To dispute {to contend) ahont
something.

Aboat what are theae people dis-

putioffi
They are disputing about who shall go

first.

Thus or so.
To he ignorant of,
I^t to know.

The day before.
The day before that day was Saturday.

The day before Sunday is Saturday.

Li' orinolo.

L' oriuolo indica le ore.

Indicare 1.

Querellarsi 1.
Rimproverare qualeuno. '

Disputare sopra qualche cosa.

Sopra che cosa dlsputano quegU

uomlnil
Disputano a .hi tocca andare U

prime.

Cos\ in qucsta guisa,
Ignorare I.
Non sapere.

La vigiUa.

Lavigiliadiquel giomo era un M-

bato.
La vlgilia di domenlca d sabato.

EXERCISES.

199.
How docs your uncle look {che cera ha — ) ? — He looks {ha la
cera) very gay {lieOssisna), for he is much pleased with his chil-
dren. — ^Do his friends look as gay {Jumno la cera coti Ueta) as he ?
— ^They, on the contrary, look sad, because they are discontented.
My uncle has no money, and is always co.ntented; and his
friends, who have a good deal of it, are scarcely ever so. — Do
you like your sister ? — I like her much, and as she Is {ed essendo)
very good-natured {compiacentissinia) to me, I am so to her | but
how dp you like your sister ?— We love each other, because we
are pleased with each other.— A certain {eerto) man liked much
wine, but he found in it {gli) two bad qualities {la qualitd), « If
1 put water to it," said ho, *' I spoil it, and if I do not put any^to
it, it spoils me {mi guasta m«)."— Does your cousin resemble

350 SlXTY'FOVKJfl LEaSONf

you ? — He resembles me. — Do your sisters resemble each ^her !
-^They do not resemble each other ; for the elder {la primo-
geniia) is idle and naughty, and the younger {la codetta) assid-
uous and good-natured towards every body. — How is your aunt 1
— She is very well. — Does your mother enjoy good health 1 —
She imagines she enjoys {essa s* immagina di godere) good
health, but I believe she is mistaken (cA' essa s* inganniy subj.),
for she has had a bad cough {la (osse) these six months, of which
{del^fuale) she cannot get rid. — Is that man angry with you ?
— ^1 think he is angry with me because 1 do not go to see him ;
but I do not like to go to his house, for when 1 go to him, instead
of receiving me with pleasure, he looks displea^d.-^You must
not believe that ; he is not angry with yon, f^ir he is not so biid m*
he looks (come nehaV asptUo), — He is the be^t man in the {del)
world ; but one must know him in order \o appreciate him {^cr
palerlo apprexxare). — There is a great diil* rcnce {la diferenza)
between you and him ; you look pleased with all thoifc who come
to see you, and he looks cross with them.

200.
Is it right {sta bene) to laugh thus at every body ? — If I laugh
{quando mi beffo) at your coat, I do not laugh at every body. —
Does your son resemble any one ? — He resembles no one. — Why
do you not drink ? — I do not know what to drink, for I like good
wine, and yours looks like vinegar (e come aceto). — If you wish
to have some other I shall go down (discenderd) into the cellar to
fetch you some.^-You are too polite. Sir ; I shall drink no more
to-day. — Have you known my father long ? — ^I have known him
long, fer I made his acquaintance when I was yet at school. —
We often worked for one another, and wef. loved each other like
brothers. — I believe it, for you resemble each others — When 1
had not done my exercises he did them for me, and when he had
not done his I did them for him. — Why does your father send
for the physician ? — He is ill ; and as the physician does not
come {rum venendo)^ be sends for him. — Ah {Ah)^ it is all over
with me ! — But, bless me (Dio nUo), why do you cry thusi — 1
have been robbed of my gold rings, my best clothes, and all my
money ; that is the reason why I cry.— Do not make {fu^faeda)

SiKTY-FOURVI LESSON. 851

00 much noise, for it is we who have taken them all {tuUo ad),
in.prder to teach you (per dpprenderle) to take better care {a^
averpiu euro) of your things (effetti), and to shut the door of
yojir room when you go out. — Why do you look so sad ? — I have
experienced great misfortunes.— rAlfler having lost all my money,
. was beaten by bad-looking men ; and, to my still greater ill
luck, I hear that my good uncle, whom I love so much, has been
struck with apoplexy. — ^You must not afflict yourself {nffiigersi).
so much, for you know that we must yield to necessity {necemitd
non ha legge).

201.

Can you not get rid of that man ? — I cannot get rid of him, for
he wiH absolutely (ad ^pti potto) follow me. — Has he not lost his
wits ?— It may 1^ (pud darsi). — What does he ask you for ? — He ,
wishes to sell . me a horse which I do not want* — Whose houses
are those ?— ^ey are mine. — ^Do these pens belong to you ? —
No, they belong to my sister. — ^Are those (sano quelle) the pens
^ith which she writes so well? — They are the same (le medenme).
— ^Whose gun is this ? — ^It is my father's. — ^Are these books your
sister's ? — ^They are hers. — ^Whose carriage is this ?— It is mine.
— ^Which is the man of whom you complain ? — It is he (queUo)
who wears (che mdassa) a red coat. — " What is the difiference
{che dffferenza c' i) between a watch and me ?" inquired {do-
numdo) a lady of a young (^cer. " My lady,** reptied he (quesii.
le rispose), " a watch marks the hours, and near you (e presso di
Lei) one forgets them." — A Russian peasant, who had never
seen asses (tin asino), seeing several (vedendane alcutu) in France,
said (disse) : << Lord {Dh mio), what large hares (2ix lepre) there
are in this country ? " — ^How many obligations 1 am under to you,
my dear friend ! you have saved my life ! without you I had been
lost (lo era iio). — Have those miserable men hurt you ?— They
have beaten and robbed me ; and when you ran to my assistance
they were about {erano sid ptmto) to strip (spogliare) and kill
me.— I am happy to have delivered you from the hands of those
robbers (il triccone), — ^How good you are !

SIXTY. FIFTH LESSON.
Leziane sessantesima quinia.

To propose,
I propose, Aa

I piopoae going on ihat journey.

He proposes joining a banting party.

A game at ehess.

A game at billiards.
A game at cards.

To succeed.
I succeed, Ac.

Do you succeed in doing that?
I do succeed in it.

To endeavour,
I endeavour to do it.
I endeaTour to succeed in it.

Endeavour to do better.

' Since, considering.

Since you are happy, why do you
complain}

Proporsi *' (is conjugated like
porre, Lesson XLIV.).

{Mi propongo, ti proponl, si pro-
pone.
Ciproponiamo, vi proponete, si pro
pongono,
P, part, propostosi; rui. propoirt;
Prei. dif, proposi, proponesti, «c
Mi propongo di &r queeto viag

gio.
Si propone d' andaxo ad una partita

dictfccia.
Una partita • agU scacchi {or a

scacchi).
Una partita al bigtiardow
Una partita alls carte.

Riuscire ♦ (a before Inf.).

( Riesco, riescl, riem^

c Riusciamo, liusdte,

Riesce, EUaalar cid?

Vi rieaco.

Sforzarsi {di before Inf.)

Mi sforzo di farlo.

Mi sforao dl riuscinri.
( La si aforzidi far meglio.
i Sforzatevi di far meglio.

Giacche (poiche, dacchct ^
che),

Oiaccha Ella d feUce, percbd La si
lagna? or Poichd siete ftOcs
psrehdvllagnatel

SIXTY-FIFTH LBSSON.

853

To he thoroughly acquainted
with a thing,

7b make one's self thoroughly
acquainted wUh a thing.

That man understands that business

perfectly.
I understand that well.

' t Essere in istaio difar qual^

che cosa,
"f Conoscere qualche cosa a

fondo,
f Irformarsi (istruirsi) di

qualche cosa,

Q,uest' uomo d istmito di quell* af

fare.
Sono istrulto di eld-.

Since or from.
From that time.
From my ohildhood.

Froni morning until evening.

From the beginning to the end.
From here to there.

I have had that book these two years.
I have llTed in Paris these three years.

Da poi (or simply da).

Da quel momento.

Dalla mia giovinezza (infanzia).
{ Dal mattino fitao alia sera.
c Da mane a sera.

Dal principio sino alia fine.

Da qui fino la.
{ Ho questo libro da due anni in poi.
( Ho questo libro da due anni.
( Dirooro a Parigi da tre annL
I Dimoro a Parigi da tre anni in poi.

3b blow, to hhto out.

To allege {to bring).

I allege, Ac.

We allege, Ac.
In the same manner are conjugated :
Th conduct.
Ihinfer,
Ho introduce,
Tb produce.
Tb reconduct.
Th reduce, to avbdue.
To 'produce again,
Theeduce
Th trandate.

I Soffiarel.

Addurre* 2; fomnerly iwWtt-

cere.

Free, Addnco ; P, part, addotto \
, PreL dtf, addussi ; Put. addurrd-
Adduce, adduci, adduce.

Adduciamo, adducete, adducono.

Condurre * 2, formerly conducere,
dddueere,
iniroducere.
producere,
riconducere
riducere.
riproducere.
seducere.
iraducere.

Dedurre * 2,
Introdurre * 2,
Produrre • 2,
Ricondurre * 2,
Ridurre * 2,
Riprodurre ♦ 2,
Sedurre* 2,
Tradurte * 2,

Obe.. A. Verbs ending in u/stre, gliere, rure, acre, have been contracted, so
that they have two infinitives ; the ancient Latin one, as addueere, to allege ;
90glUre, to gather (to catch) $ poncre, to put ; traere, to draw ; and the nev

354

bIZTY-FlFTH LESSON.

eontncted one, m : mUktrrt, eorrgf porre^ trarr^ The tecond contracted one
is ahrifs used In the infiniUTe from which iluftUurt and the preeent of tht
eondiiional (of which hereafter) are formed, aa : addurr^ I ahail allege; eorri,
I shall gather ; p^rr^ I ahall put ; trarrdt I ahall draw, Ac (See Lenon
XLVI) But all the other tenaee are in tuch verhs formed from the ancient
Latin infinitive.

7b puij to place."
Ipnt, Ac.
We put, Ac

To draw,

I draw, Ac
We draw, Ac

In the aame manner are conjugated
Aairarre^ to oMrad,

AUrarre, toaUraei.

Conirarre, to contract.

formerly ponere ■.
poni, pone

Porre*

POBgO,

Ponlamo, ponete, pongono.
Pott part, posto; Put dtf, poii:
f\it. porr<y.

Trarre * 2 ; formerly traere,

Traggo, traggi, tragge or tne.
Traggiamo, traete, traggono.
Pa$t paH. tratto; Pret. def, ttwaA',
Put, trend.

Deti urre,
EHrarref
SoUrarre^

to detract,
to extract,
todrawaway.

7b gather.
I gather, Ac
We gather, Ac

In the aame manner are conjugated ;

T\f€k00$€,

n tadiit to Zoom.
ntaU

Corre * 2, or cogUere ■.

Colgo, cogiii oogUe.

Cogliamo, cogUcte, colgono.
Pa$t part, oolto; PreL dtf.coUii
Put. corrd or cogUerd.

Seerre • or ocegliere 2 {neUo, eeeW,

oeerrb or occglierb).
Sciorre* or eciogkere 2 (aeMte,

odoUii odorrb or oeiogHer^.
TVri • or togUert 2 {toUo^ tM;

torrbortogHcrb).

^ And all ita compounda, iuch aa :

Anteporre, to praliBr. Imporre, to impoae.

Apporre, to add. Opporre, tooppoae.

Comporre, to compound. Poaporre, to postpone

Contrapporre, tooppoae Preporre, CD prefer.

Deporre, to depose Proporre, to propose

Disporre, to dispose Soprapporre, toputoTer.

Esporre, to eipose Sottoporre, to subdue

Prapporre, to interpoae. Supporre, to suppose

s In vertM in gliore the contracted are more generally used in poetry.

SIXTY-FIFTH LESSON.

356

To drink,

Idri2ik,Aa
We drink, Ac.

Bere * or bevere.

Bero, bevi, here,

Beviamo, bove% bevono.
Past part, beato or bevuto; Pr^,
d^. bevvli ^tU.heid.

06f. B. Besides the abore there are a few other verbs terminaled in ire
ong, t. e. with the accent on the last syllable but one, which are not contracted
in the infinitive, but only in the future (and consequently in the conditionali
hereaAer), when they reject the letter e of the last syllable but one (Lesson
XLVI.). Thfeyare:

7h have.

Avire *

Fut

aorb.

TobcobUgediawe),

Dovirt

II

doorb.

7h be abU {em).

PoUre ♦

II

po^l^'

Thknaw,

Saplre*

II

oaprb'

Ta9ee,

Vedire*

II

wdrb.

To appear.

Porire*

II

parrd-

Obo, C, When the verbs in 9re long have / or n before that termination,
those letters are in the contracted form of the fiiture and conditional, for the
i of euphony, changed into r, as :

To remain.

Bmarane.

Fut.

rimarrb.

TohM.

Ttnart

II

terrb.

Thadie.

DoUrt

II

dorro.

Tobevorffi,

VaUre

. II

varrd.

nbewUUng.

VoUre

tu

VOTTO,

To destroy.

To construcL

DUtruggere*.

P. part, distrutto; pra. def. dis-
trussi.

Cosindre * (isco).

P, part costruito and costruttoi
Prei. dtf. costrussi, coBtruisti, Ac

To reduce the price.
To reduce the price to a crown.
To translate into Italian.
To translate from Italian into Eng-
lish. ^
To translate from one language into
another.

. I introduce him to you.

I present him to you.

To present.

Ridurre* ilprezxo.

Ridnrre 11 preno ad nno scudg.

Tradurre in itallano.

Tradnrre dalP itallano in inglese.

Tradurre da una lingua in nn' altia.

L* introduco da Lei
Glielo pretento.
Presentare 1.

356

SIXTY- riPTR LESSON.

Sehes.

ThyielC

HimMlf:

Herwdf.

OnnelTet.

ToQTMWat.

ThenuMlTefl.

One'saelt

dehlmselfhastolditi

Hd has tbld me, myielf (not to anotlier

person).
I also told him the same.
In the same manner.
It is all the same.
One does not like to flatter one's sel£

JSvcti,

ETsnnot.
He has not eren money enough to boy

some bread.
We most loTe e?ery body, ereo our

Stesso or medesimo; fem.
sieua or medesima.

Plur. Stesn or medemad;
fem. 9Us9e or medeatmn

lo stesso, or io medeaimo.

Ta stesso, er ta medeaimo.

EgU steeso, or egli medesinM.

Ella stessa, or Ella medealma

Noi steasi, ernol medesimL

Vol steesi, or vol medeeimL
( Egiino stessl, or «gUno medeslmt
i EUeno stesse, or elleno medeaime.

Se stesso, or se medesimo.

Me V ha detto egli stesso (sgU me

dedmo).
V ha detto a me stesso (a me me-

desimo).
Gil ho detto anch' io lo stesso.
Nello stesso modo.
iB tutto lo stesso (d tutt^ uio).
Non place losingar se stesso (or se

medesimo).

Anche*

Nenm&eno.

Non ha nemmeno abhawtanxa danaio

per oomprar del pane.
Bisogna amar tutd, anehe i nostzi

nemici.

Again (once more).
He speaks again (anew).

Di nuoTO, vn' altra Tolta.
ParladinnoTO.

TofaO. '
The price of the merchandise fiJls.

7b deduct^ to lower.

To averehargef io ask too much.

Not having OTereharged you, I cannot
deduct any thing.

An eO, a yard.
A metre (measue).

( Ahhassare 1.
( Ribassare 1.
t La mercansia ribassa dl prsno.

iDimnuire (isco).
Dedurre^ (formerly dedueere).
f Domandar piu che la cosa non
vale.
Non arendo domandato troppo
(pift che la cosa non valeX non
posso diminuir nlente.
Un braceio; pi. braeda: on' asns
Un

SIXTY. FIFTH LESSON.

857

To produce {to yield, to
profit, to Mng in).

Ilow mach doet that amployment
yield you a year 1

An employment.

To make one's escape.

To run away (iofiee).

To take to one's heels.

To desert.

He deaerted the battle.
Ha deaerted hia coloura.

To run away.
The thief haa run away.

By no meana.

Not at all.

Riportare 1.

Rendere * (p. part, reso; pret*

def. rest).
Dare* (p. part, daio ; pret

def. diedi and dattt).

Q^oanto Le rende queat' implego all

anno7
Un implego (un offizio)

Prender la fuga, fuggirsene*

Disertare, saappare 1.
Egli ha abbahdonato la battagUa.
Egii ha dieertato la bandiera.

Evadersi, Jttggirsene.
II ladro ae n' d fuggito.

Non mica, in noMnn modo.
Niente affatto.

EXERCISES.
202.

Will jou go to Mr. Vimerati to-night ?— I shall perhaps go.—
And will your sisters go ? — They will, perhaps. — Had you any
pleasure (diwertirsi) yesterday at the concert ? — I had no pleasure
there ; for there was such a multitude of people {taniagente) that we
could hardly get in. — I bring you a pretty present with which you
will be much pleased. — What Is it? — ^It is a silk cravat.— Where
is it ? — ^I have it in my pocket {neUa mia tasca). — Does it please
you ? — ^It pleases me much, and I thank you for it with all my
heart. I hope that you will at last (Jinalfnente) accept (accettare)
something of (da) me. — What do you intend to give me ? — I will
not tell you ; for if I tell you, you will have no pleasure when I
give it you (glido daro), — Have you seen any one at the market ?
—I have seen a good many people there. — ^How were they
dressed ? — Some were dressed in blue, some in green, some in

358 BIXTY-FIFTH (SSSON.

yellow, and several (diversi aUri) in red. — Who are those men I
— The one who is dressed in gray is my neighbour, and the roan
with the blafik coat the physician, whose son has given my neigh-
bour a blow with a stick. — Who is the man with the green coat !
— He is one of my relations. — Are there many philosophers in
your country ? — ^There are as many there as in yours. — How
does this hat fit me ? — It fits you very well. — ^How does that coat
fit your brother ? — It fits him adnairably. — ^Is your brother as tall
igrande) as you ? — He is taller than I, but I am older than he.—
Of what size (dt quale statura) is that man ? — He is five feet and
four inches (ilpoUice) high. — How high is the house of our land-
lord ? — It is sixty feet high. — ^Is your well deep ? — ^Yes, Sir, &r
it is fifty feet deep. " There are many learned men (i/ doUo) in
Rome, are there not (n' ^ vero)V* Milton asked a Roman.
** Not so many as when you were there," answered (rupase) the
Roman.

203.

Is it true that your uncle is arrived ? — I assure you that he is
arrived. — ^Is it true that the king has assured you of his assist-
ance (f assistenxa) ? — ^I assure you that it is true.-^Is it true that
the six thousand (rnila, plur.) men whom we were expecting have
arrived ? — I have heard so.t— -Will you dine with us ? — ^I cennot
dine with you, for I have just eaten. — Will your brother drink a
glass of wine ? — He cannot drink, for I assure you that he has
just drunk. — Why are these men quarrelling ? — They are quar
relling because they do not know what to do. — Have they suc-
ceeded in extinguishing the fire ? — ^They have at last succeeded
in it ; but it is said that several houses have been (nano staitt
subj.) burnt. — Hav6 they not been able to save any thing ?— -
They have not been able to save anything ; for, instead of extin-
guishing the fire, the miserable wretches (2b scellerato), who had
come up, set to plundering. — ^What has happened ? — ^A" great
misfortune has happened. — Why did my friends set out without
me ? — They waited for you till twelve o'clock, *nd seeing that
you did not come they set out. — ^What is the <Jay before Monday
called ? — The day before Monday is Sunday. — Why did you not
run to : assistance (in aiuio) of your neighbour whose house

SIXTT»FIFTH LESSON. 859

has been burnt ? — I was quite ignorant (ignorare interaniBrUe) of
(lis house being on fire (che V mcendio fosse neUa di ltd casa)*

204.

Well (Ebhene) ! 4oes your sister make any progress ? — She
makes some, but you make more than she. — ^You flatter me. —
Not at all ; I assure you I am more satisfied with you than with
all my other pupils. — Do you already know what has happened ?
•*-I have not heard any thing. — ^The house of our neighbour has
been burnt down {abbruciaia}. — ^Have they not been able to save
any thing ? — They were very fortunate (feUcissimi) in saving
the persons who were in it ; but out of the things (delle cose) that
were there (trovarsi)^ they could save nothing. — Who told you
that ? — Our neighbour himself (istesso) has told it me. — Why are
you without a light {senxa lunie)1 — The wind blew it out (Vha
spenio) when you came in. — ^What is the price of this cloth ?— I
sell it at three crowns and a Iwilf the ell.^— I think (irovare) it very
dear. Has 'the price of cloth not fallen (ditninuito) 1 — ^It has not
fallen ; the price o£ all goods (la mercanzia) has fallen, except
that of 6loth (eccettuaio quello del panno). — I will give you three
crowns for it, — I cannot let you have (dare*) it for that price (a
^uesto prezzo)y for it cbsts me more {cosia piu a me). — Will you
have the goodness to show me some pieces (la pezxa) of English
cloth ? — With much pleasure. — Does this cloth suit you ? — ^It
does not suit me. — Why does it not suit you ? — Because it is too
dear; if you will lower the price, I shall buy twenty yards of it ^
—Not having asked too much, I cannot take off any thing.

SIXTY-SIXTH LESSON.
Lezione sessantesima sesta.

A kindy 9ort (a species).

What kind of fruit is that 7
A itone (of a frtiii).
A atone of a peach, an apricot, a
plum.
Stone-fruit.
Una muat break the atone before one
eomaa at the kemei.
A kernel.
An almond.
Kerael-frult.

It U a kemel-frait.

To gather.

To gather fruit:

To serve up the soup.

To Iring in the dessert.

The fruit.
An apricot.
A peach.
A plum.
An anecdote.
Roast-meat.
Thekat

Last week.
Last year.

'Ih cease, to leave of.

I leave off reading.
She leaves off apeaidng.

To avoid.
To escape.
To escape a misfortune.

Una sorta.

Che sorta dl frutto i questo 7

Un nocci^.

Un nocciolo di peaca, di alblooceo^

diprugna.
Frutto da nocciolo.
Blsogna rompera 11 nocciolo per avei

la mandohu
Un acino, una mandola.
Una mandola.
Frutti da acino.

"^ un frutto da aclna

Corre* or cogliere.

CogUerefrutU.

Portar in tavola kt mppa.

Portar in tavola lafruUa.

II frutto.

Un albleocco.

Una pesca.

Unaprugna.

Un aneddoto.

Dell* arrosto.

L' ultimo, V ultimo.
( La settimana acoraa.
i La settimana passata.

L* anno scorso (pasaato).

Cessare 1.

Cesso di {or dal) leggere.
Cessa dl {or dal) parlare.

Evitare 1.

Scatdpare 1, seappare 1.

Scampare da una dlsgraaia.

SIXTY-SIXTH LESSON.

361

H« Tan away to avoid death.

To do wUhout a thing.

Can you do without bread 7

I can do without it.
There are many things which we moat
do without.

■I

To execute a commission.
To acqvU one^s self of a com

mission,
I have executed your commission.
Have you executed my commission t
I have executed it.

To do one^s duty.

To discharge, to do, or to fulfil

one's duty.
That man always does his duty.

That man always fulfils his duty.

To rely, to depend upon some-
thing.
He depends upon It.
I rely upon you.

You may rely upon him.

To suffice, to he sufficient.
Is that bread sufficient for you 7
It is sufficient for me.
It is sufficient for me, for thee, Stc,
Will that money be sufficient for that

man?
It will be sufficient for him.
Little wealth suffices for the wise.
Was that man ^tented with that

•am?

- Ha preso la fuga per iscampare dalla

knorte.
. Scappd per fuggir la morta

( Privarsi di quaJche eosa.
( Far a meno di qualche cosa.

( Pud Ma piivarsi di pane 1
I Pud Elia 2ak a meno del pane 1

Posso fame a meno.

Vi sono moltissime cose di cui d ne-
cessario fare a meno.

Far .una commissione.

Ho fatt'o la di Lei commissione.
Ha Ella iatto la mia commissione?
L' ho latta.

Far U sua dovere.
Adempiere U suo dovere.

Ctuest' uomo fa sempre 11 suo do-
vere.

duest' uomo adempie sempre *\ suo
dovere.

{ Contare su qualche cosa.

I Far capitale di qualche cos \

Ci cdnta.
( Fo capitale di Lei.
I Mi fido di Lei.
^ Pud fidand a (or di)luL
< Pud fidarsene.
C Pud fiir capitale di lui.

Bastare.

Le basta questo paub \
Mlbasta. ' •

t MiDasti^Uba8ta,Ao.
Questo danaro* baster& a quelF

uomo 7
Gil baster&.

Poca fortuna basta al savlo.
dtftst* uomo si 4 egll contentato dl
' '(||ucHa8omma7

16

862

SIXTY-SIXTB LESSON.

Hai that sum been sufficient for tint

man?
It haabeen aufficient for him.
He haa been contented with it.
To be contented with something.
It <riU be sufficient for him, if you will

only add a few crowns.
He vrill be contented, If y^^n will mUy

add a few crowns.

To add.

To hold.

To embark^ 0 go on hoard,

A sail.
To set salt
To set sail for.
To sail for America.

TosaU.

Under full sail.
To sail under full sail.

He embarked on the aizteenth of last
month.

He sailed on the third instant.

The inatant, the present month.

The fourth or fiAh instant.
The letter is dated the sixth instant.

TfUU is to say (i. e.).
Et catera (etc.).
My pen (quill) Is better than yours.

I write better than you.

Ctuella somma d bastata

uomol
GU d bastata. 611 bastd.
Se n* d contentato.
Contentarei di qualche cosa.
GU basterk ae vuol aggiugnerri sola-

mente qualche scudo.
Se ne contenteri se vuol aggiugnertl

appena pochi scudi.

Aggiungere * 2 (p. part, ag-

^gmtUo; pret. def. aggiunsi).

Costruire * 2, isco (past. part.

cosirviio or costruito (p. d.

construssi),

Fahhricare 1.

Itnbarcarsi. Entrar mSa

nave.
Una vela.
1 1 Mettere alia vela.
1 1 Spiegare le vele.

t Far Tela per.
j Far vela per V America.
I Andare In America.

Andare a vela,
r A piene vele.
I A gonfie vele.

Splegar tutte le vele.
rS* i Imbarcato U sedict del mess
I scorso.

I I: entrato nella nave il aedid del
[ mese paasato.
Ha fatto vela il tre del corrente.
II corrente.

II quattro, o il cinque del oorrent&
La lettera d del sei corrente.

Cioct vale a dire.

Eccetera, e sindli.
La mia penna d migUors della di

Lei.
Scrivo megUo di Lei. ^

They will warm the soup.
Dinner (or supper) is on the lable (Is
served up).

St iarik scaldare la zuppa.
R in tavola.

SIXTY-SIXTH LBSSON. 368

Do you choose some soup 1
Shall I help you to some soup 7

I will trouble you for a little.
To serve up, to attend.

Desidera Ella delia zuppa7

Desidera Ella che io Le serva delli
zuppa 7
{ t Gliene doraando un poco.
c t He ne favorlaca un poco.

Servire, presentaref offrire.

EXERCISES.
205.

Tou are learning Italian ; does your master let you translate 1
— He lets me read, write, and translate. — Is it useful to translate
in learning a foreign language ? — It is useful to translate when
you nearly know {quando gid si sa) the language you are learn-
ing ; but while (quando) yqu do not yet know any thing (non se ne
sa niente) it is entirely (affaito) useless. — What does your Italian
masHer make you do 1 — He makes me read a lesson ; afterwards
he makes me translate English exercises into Italian on the lesson
which he, has made me read ; and from the beginning to the end
of the lesson he speaks Italian to me, and I have to (deoo) answer
him in the very language {nella lingua stessa) which he is teach-
ing me. — ^Have you already learnt much in that manner ? — ^You
see that I have already learnt something, for I have hardly been
learning it three months, and I already understand you when
you speak to me, and can answer you. — Can you read (it) as well
(del pari)l — I can read and write as well as speak (it). — Does
your master also teach German ? — He teaches it. — Wishing to
make {desiderando fare) his acquaintance, I must beg of you
(La prego) to introduce me to him. — ^It will give me (Mi faro un)
pleasure to introduce you to him. — ^When do you wish to go to
him ? — ^To-morrow in the afternoon {dopo metxo giomo), if you
please (se Le aggrada),

206.

How many exercises do you translate a day ?— If the exercises
are not difficult, I translate from three to four every day (da ire
a quatiro al giomo) ; and when they are so, I translate but one .
[uno «o/o).— How many have you already done to-day ? — ^It is the

864 Birnr-sixTR utssox.

third which am translating (Ho iraducmdo) ; but to-morrow I
hope to be able to do one more {uno di piu), for I shall be alone
(solo). — Have you paid a visit to my aunt ? — ^I went to see hei
two months ago {or fan due mesi), and as she looked displeased
I have not ^ne to her any more since that time (da quel tempo),
— How do you do to-day ! — I am very unwell (moUo male), —
How do you like that soup ? — ^I think (La trovo) it is very bad ;
since I have lost my appetite {P appefito\ I do not like any thing
(noft nd piaee piu nienie). — How much does that employment
bring in (rendere *) to your father ? — ^It brings him in (gU render
or gU da) more than four thousand (mUaj plur. of mUley crowns.
— What news is there {dire •) ? — ^They say nothing new. — ^What
do you intend to do to-morrow ? — I propose joining a hunting
party. — ^Does your brother purpose {divisa egU) playing {far) a
game at billiards ? — He proposes playing a game at chess. — Why
do some people ( perche mai eanvi persone) laugh when I speak ?
— ^Those are unpolite people ; you have only to laugh also {Ella
pure), and they Will no longer laugh at you. — ^If you will do as I
do, you will speak well. — ^You must study a little {Le ahUsagna
etudiare qualche poco) every day, and you will soon be no longer
afraid to speak. — I will endeavour to follow your advice, for I have
resolved {nU son proposto) to rise every morning at six o'clock,
to study till ten o'clock, and to go to bed early. — Why does your
sister complain ? — ^I do not know ; since {quando) she succeeds
in every thing, and dince she is (e eh\ e) happy, even happier
than you and I, why does she complain ?— Perhaps she com-
plains .because she is not thoroughly acquainted (nort i Utrtdta)
with that business (m tale faeenda). — That may be {pud darn).

207.
Have they served up the soup 1 — ^They have served it up some
minutes ago. — Then {aUora) it must be {dep' essere) cold, and I
only like soup hot {la xuppa calda), — ^They will warm it for you.
-^You will oblige me. — Shall I help you to some {desidera
Ella) of this roast meat? — ^I will trouble you for a little.—
Will you eat some of this mutton ? — ^I thank you ; I like fowl
letter. — May I offer you {desidera Ella che Le serva) some
wine ? — ^I will trouble you for a littlo {me ne favorisca un poco).

SlXTy-S£>r£NTH LESSON. 365

—Have they already brought in {portalo in tavola) the dessert ?— «
They have brought it in. — Do you like fruit ? — I like fruit, but 1
have BO more appetite. — Will you eat a little cheese ? — I will
eat a little. — Shall I help you to English or Dutch cheese ? — i
will eat a little Dutch cheese. — What kind of fruit is that ?— ^It
is a stone-fruit. — ^What is it called ? — It is called thus. — Will
you wash your hands ? — ^I will wash them, but I have no towel
in {per) wipe them (with). — ^I will let you have {Lefaro dare) a
towel, some soap, and some water. — I shall be much obliged to
you. — May I ask you for (oso domandarle) a little water? — Here
is some (eccone). — Can you do without soap ? — As for soap I can
do without it, but I must have a towel to wipe my hands (with).
— ^Do you often do without soap ? — There are many things which
we must do without (di cut i necessarioprivarn). — Why has that
man run away ? — ^Because he had no other n^eans of escaping
the punishment {dalla puniziane) which he had deserved {meri-
tare). — Why did your brothers not get {procurarn) a better
horse 1 — When they get rid of {quando avranno aUeruUo) their
old horse, they will get a better. — Has your father arrived
already ? — Not yet ; but we hope that he will arrive this very
day (ojggi 8te8so). — Has your friend set out in time?— I do
ncA know, but I hope he has {cTie sard) set out in time.

SIXTY-SEVENTH LESSON.
Lezione sessaniesima settima.

To be a judge of something.

SIntendersi di quakhe cosa.
Canoscersi di (or in) qualche
cosa.

Are yovL a good jadge of cloth 7 SI conosce Ella di panno 1

( am a ivnAge of it. Mi vi conosco (me-ne intendo).

366

I am not a jadgo oi it.

SIXTY-SEVENTH LESSO.*««

I am a good jadga o! It.
I am not a good jadg.9 of it.

To draw.
To chalk, to trace.

To draw a landscape.
To draw after Ufa,

Tlie drawing.

The d^igner.

Nature.

Non mi vi conoeoo (non me

tendo).
Mi vi conotco beniaaimo.
Non mi yi conoaco molto.

no in-

Disegnare 1.
Calcare 1, ricakare 1.

Diaegnare una riata di paeae.
Diaegnara dal natarale (dal vero).
lidiaegno.
II diaegnatore.
La natun.

2b manage, or to go about a
thing.

How do you manage to make a fire
without tonga 1

I go about it,ao.

You go about it the wrong way.

I go about it the right way.

How doea your brotlier manage to do
thati

SUlfuIly, handily, dezteroualy, cle-
verly.

Awkwardly, unhandily, badly.

t Prendersi,

Come ai prende Ella per fiir del fuoco
aenia moDe 1 or Come ttella a &r.

Mi Ti prendo cori, or Facdo co^

Ella Ti ai prende male.

Mi vi prendo bene.

Come ai prende il di Lei frateUo per
fiurcid.

Deatramente.

Senza giudizio.

Toforhd.
I forbid you to do that.

Tohtoer.

To caat down one'a eyea.
The curtain.
The curtain rises.
The curtain falla.

To rise.

To fall, to descend.

The stocks have fallen.
The day falla.
Night comes on.
It growa towarda night
It grows dark.
It grows late.

To stoop.

Proibire 3 (isco).

Le (vi) proihiaco di far ddi

Ahhassare 1.

Abbassara gli occliL
La tela, il sipario.
Sialzailalpario.
Cala il sipario.

Alzarsi 1.
Calare 1.

n cambio ha baaaato (d calaloX

Declina il glomo.

La notte s* awidna.
t Si fa notte.
t SifaoscuTo.
t SifaUrdL

Ahhassarsi 1.

SIXTY-SEVENTH LESSON.

367

To meU, to feel
He 8mell0 of garlic.
To feel some one*! pulse.

To consent.

I consent to It

Who says nothing consents.

SewUre Z.

< Ha un cattivo odor d' agUo.
i Puzza d' aglid.
Toccar 11 polso a qualcuno.

ConserUire 3.

V acconsento
Chi tace consente.

Aceonsentire 3.

To hide, to conceal.

The mind.

In deed. ^

'In fact.
The truth.
The fact
The effect
True.

A true man.
rhia is the right place for that picture.

Nascondere* 2 (past part, nas-
coso or nascosto ; pret. def.
nascosi).

La mente, lo spirito.
In veriti.
t In latti, t in rero.
La Teritft.
U fatto.
L' effetto.
Vero.

Un uomo Verace.
Ecco il vero luogo per questo quadra.

To think much of one {to esteem
one).

To esteem some one.

I do not think much o^ that matL
I think much of him (I esteem hhn
much).

( f Far conto di qualcuno.

( Aver in isiima qu&leuno.

Stimare qualcuno.

Non fo gran conto di quest' uomo.
Fo gran conto di lui Oo stimo molto)»

The flower, the bloom, the blossom.
That man has his eyes on a level with
his head.

On a level with, even leiih.
To blossom {to flourish).
7*0 grow.

To grow rapidly, (fast).

To grow tall or big.

That child grows so fast that we may
even see it

II fiore.

Quest* uomo ha gli occhi al piano
della testa.

Al piano, a Uvello.

Funire 3 {isco).

Crescere* 2 (past part, ere*

sciuto ; pret. def. crehhf).
Crescere rapidamente.

Ingrandire 3 {isco),

duesto fanciullo ingrandisce a Tista.

SIZTT-SEySHTH LESSON.

That child hat grown very &st In a

ahort Ume.
That rain has made the com grow.

Com.

A cover.
A shelter.
A cottage, a hot.
To shelter one's self from some- >
thing. j

To take shelter from something. !
Let us shelter Ourselves from the

rain, the wind.
Let us enter that cottage, in order
to be sheltered from the storm (the
rain).

Every tohere^ aU aver, ihnnigh-
out.

All over (throughout) the town.
A shade.

Under the shade.

Let us sit down under the shade of
that tree.

To pretend.

That man pretends to sleep.

That young lady pretends to know

Italian.
They pretend to come near us.

Now,
From, since.

From morning.
From morning till night
From the break of day.

Questo ianciuUo ha molto iqgiinditf

in poco tempo.
Questa pioggia ha lattplngiandire U

giano.
Orano.

Unalloggla

Un ricorero, un rifuglo.

Una capanna.

MettersI al ricovero dl qualcbe cosa.

Mettiamoci al ricorero della pioggia

del vento.
Entriamo in quests capanna per es-

sere a coperto ddla tempests, or

per essere a ricovero deUe inginrie

del tempo.

DappertuUo.

Per tutla la dtti.
Un' ombra.

AJP onibra.

Andiamo a sederd all' omhim dl
quest' albero.

Fingere* di (p. part. jStilo;
pret. def. jSfwt).

' Quest' uomo finge di dormire.
(Quest' uomo & semblante di dor-
' mire.
Questa signorina finge di oapere I*

italiano.
Fanno semblante d' aTvidimral r
noi.

Ora, al fnresente, adeeto.
Da, fin da, dah

Dalla mattina.
Da mattina a se^
Dallo spnntar del giomo.

MXTY-SEVENTH LESSON.

36&

From tne cradle. From a child.
From thia time forward.

Fin dalla culla. Fin dall' inlaniia.
Da ora in poi.

As soon aSm

^u soon 88 1 see him, I shall speak to > Tosto ch' io lo vedrd, gU parlei^.
him.

Tosto chcy appena.

For fear of.

To catch a cold,

I win not go out for fiear of catching a
cold.

He does not wish to go to town for
fear of meeting with one of his cred-
itors.

He does not wish to open Ids purse for
fear of losing his money.

( Per iimore (per tema),
I Sul Umore,

Slnfreddarsi.
PigUar un^infreddatufM.

Non vo^o uscire per timore d' in*

freddarmi.
Non viiol andigr in citta su! timore

d' incontrar un suo creditore.

Nob Tuol aprire la borsa per timore
di perdere.il suo danaro.

To copy, to transcribe.
TodecUne.
To transcribe &lrly.
A suhstantiye) an adjective, a pronoun.

A Terb^ a preposition, a gnunmaf, a
dietionary.

Copiare 1.

DecUnare 1.

Uettere in netto.

Un sostantivo, un aggettivo (add!-

ettivo), un pronome.
Un verbo, una preposizione, una

grammatica, un dizionario.

EXERCISES.
208.
Have you executed my commission ? — ^I have executed it.-^
Has your brother executed the' commission which I gave him ? —
He has executed it. — ^Will you execute a commission for me ? —
I am under so many obligations to you that I shall always exe-
cute your commissions when it shall please you to give me any.
— Will you ask the merchant whether (se) he can let me have
{damd) the horse at the price (al prexzo) which I have offered
him ? — I will ask him, but I know that he will be satisfied, if you
will but add a few crowns. — Good morning, children (ragazzi) f
^-Have you done your task ?-^You well know that we always do it
when we are not ill.— What do you give us to do to day ? — ^I

16*

870 SIXTY -SEVElfTH LESSON.

grtve you the sixty -seventh lesson to study and to do the exercises
belonging to it {ehe ne dipendono); that is to say, the two hun-
dred and eighth and two hundred and ninth. — ^Will you endea-
▼our (« ttudieranno) to commit no errors (far errori) ? — ^We
shall endeavour (d studiertmo) to make none. — Is this bread suf-
ficient for you ? — It is sufficient for me, for I am not very hungry.
— ^When did your brother embark for America ? — He sailed on
the thirtieth (i7 trenid) of last month. — ^Will you ask your brother
whether he is satisfied with the {del) money which I have sent
him ? — ^As to my brother, he is satbfied with it, but I am not so ;
for having suffered shipwreck {Jar naufragio), I am in want of
the money which you owe me. — ^Do you promise me to apeak to
your brother ? — I promise you, you may depend upon it. — I rely
upon you.-**WiU you work (studiare) harder {megUo) for the
next lesson than you have done (ehe non ha studiato) for this ? —
I will work harder. — May I rely upon it ? — ^You may.

209.
Are you a judge of cloth ? — ^I am a judge of it. — ^Will you buy
some yards for me? — ^If you will give me the money I will buy
you some. — ^You will oblige me {EUa mi fard piaeere, or GUene
sard tetnUo). — Is that man a judge of cloth ? — He is not a good
judge of it.-^How do you manage to do that ? — ^I manage it so. —
Will you show me how you manage it ? — ^Very willingly (moUo
volenUeri). — What must I do (ehe dehhofare) for my lesson of to-
morrow ?— You will transcribe your exercises fairly (mettere m
neUo)f do three others, and study the next lesson (la lexian^ se-
gu^nie). — How do you manage to get goods (ddle mereanxie)
without money ? — I buy on credit. — ^How does your sister man-
age to learn Italian without a dictionary ? — She manages it thus.
— She manages it very dexterously. But how does your brother
manage it ? — He manages it very awkwardly (saua aleun giudi-
no) : he reads, and looks for the words in the dictionary. — He
may (pud) learn (studiare) in this manner twenty years without
knowing how to make a single sentence (una eola Jraae), — ^Why
does your sister cast down her eyes ? — She casts them down be-
cause she is ashamed of not having done her task. — Shall we
breakikst in the garden to-day ?-T-The weather is 90 fine that we

SIXTY-EIGHTH LESSON.

871

should take advantage of it (cA« hisogna apprqfUt^ime). — How do
you like that cofTee ? — ^I like it very much. — Why do you stoop ?
— I stoop to pick up (per prendere) the handkerohief which 1
have dropped. — ^Why do your sisters hide themselves ? — ^Thcy
hide themselves for fear of being seen. — Of whom are they afraid ?
— ^They are afraid of their governess {la maestra), who scolded
(ramjM^iiare or sgridare) them yesterday because they had not
done their tasks (il lor dovere, in the sing.).

SIXTY-EIGHTH LESSaN.
Lezione sessantesima ottava.

To get beaten (whipped).
To get paid.
To get one's self invited to dine.

t Farai battere.
t Farsi pagare.
t Farsi invitare a pranzo.

At first.
Firstly.
Secondly.
Tlilrdly, dc.

18 your mother at hooie?

She is.

I am going to her hou93.

A cause.

A cause of complaint.
A cause of sadness.
She has reason to be sad.

Orief, sorrow, sadness.
Is thnt woman ready to go out 7

$
She is.

Da principiOi a prima vista.
Primieramente, in primo luoga
Secdndarlamente, in secondo Inogo.
In terzo luogo, ecc

& in casa ladi Lei madr^7
VI ^.
Vado da (

una causa, una

Un molivOy

cagione.
Un ^oggetlo,

Un soggetto di dispiacere.
Un soggetto dl tristena.
Ha un motivo dt tristeua.
II dispiacere, la tristezza.
Questa donnn i desea pronta

uscire 7
I,o^.

■d

i73

8IXTY-BIOHTH LESSOll.

NolwithsUindit^, m sffUe of.

Notwithstanding that
Inq>lteofhim.
lnq)ttaofher.
In spite of them.
In spite of ms.

{ Malgrado,
( A dispeUOf ad otUa.
Malgradoeid.

Malgrado lui or sno malgrado.
Malgxado easa or ano malgrado.
Malgrado loro or loio malgrado.
Hlo malgrada

To manage.

Do yon manage to finish your work

every Saturday night 1
Do you manage to have your work

done every Saturday night?
Try to do that to oblige me.

( f Far in modo di.
I Proewrare di.
t Fa EUa In modo di finire U dl Lei

laToro ogni aabato aeral
t Fa Ella in modo d' aver finlto 11 di

Lei hiToro ogni aabato aeral
Faccla in modo di &r cid per oompia-

cerml.

Ob$, Whenever in ortUr lo can be anbetitnted for the prepoaitlonfo^ the hitter
is rendered in Italian by per, to express the end, the design, or the causey ibr
which a thing la done.

I will do every thing to oblige yon. | Fai\i tuttoper eompiaceilo.

To look upon.

The window looka into the street.
The window looka out upon the river.
That apartment looks upon the street

The back-door kwks into the garden.

Dar su.
Sporgeresu.
Guardare «u.

La finestta di (sporge) auDa stiada.
La finestra sporge (dk) sol finme.
Quest* appartamento dd (sporge)

sulla atrada.
La porta di dletro di sul giardlno.

To drown.

To drown a dog.
To drown one'a sel^ to get drowned. >
To be drowned, to be drowning. )
To leap through the vrindow.
To throw out of the window.
I am drowning.
He jumped out of the window.

TofaHen.
He was fastened to a tree.

Annegare (affbgare).
Annegare tm cane.

Annegand (ajBogand).

Saltare dalla finestra.
Gettare dalla finestra.
Mi annego.
Saltd dalla finestra.

AUaecare.
V attaccarono ad nn albero

SIXTY-EIGHTH LESSON.

87d

The catUc
To keep warm.
To keep cooL
To keep clean.

To keep on one's guard against some
one.

Keep on your guard against that man.

II bestiame.

t Tenersi caldo.

t Tenersi fresco.

t Tenersi p'ulito.

t Star air erta contro qualcuno.

t Mettersi (porsi) in guardia contro

qualcuno.
Stia all* erta contro quest' uomo.

To take care {to beware) of

somebody.
To take care {to beware) of

something.

If yon do not take care of that horse,

it will kick you.
T^e care that you do not fall.
To beware of somebody or something.

Keep on your guard against that man.
Take care!

Cruardarsi di {da) qualcuno,
Badare a qnalche cosa,

Se non bada a quel cavallo, Le darfL

uh calcio.
t Badi a non cadere 1
Ouardarsi di qualcuno o di qualcha

cosa.
La si guardi da quest* uomo
Badi I (La badi!)

A thought.
An idea.
AsaUy.

To be struck with a thought.
A thought strikes me.
A thought has struck me.

That never crossed my mind.

To take into one's head.
He took it into his head lately to rob

me.
What is in your head 7

Un pensiere, un pensiero.

Un' idea.

Un impeto.
Ct Venir in pensiero.
( t Cader nell' animo.
^ Mi viene un pensiero.
i Mi viene in mente.
c M* d Tcnuto un pensiere.
c M' d venuto in mente.

(Questo non m* d mai cadnto nelP
animo.
duesto non m* d mai passato per la

f Immaginare 1.
t Egli immagind 1* altro giomo di

rubanni.
t Che immagina Ellal

In my place.
In your, his, her place.
We must put erery thing in ito place.

A (in) mio luogo. Inmiavece.
A (in) vostro, di Lei, suo, luogo.
Bisogna mettere ogni cosa a
luogo.

<74

8IXTV-B10UTU LK»5UN.

'ilrmnul, round,

AU urowid.
We niled aroand Englapd.

They went abont the town to look at
the citrlo«itie&

To go round the house.

To go about the hoaae.

To cost.

How much doeu that cost yon 1
How mnch does this 0bok cost you 1
It costs me three crowns snd a halt
That table costs him seven crowna

I Iniomo (a preposition).

I Intomo intomo. Tntto Intomo.
I Navigammo Intomo all* Inghit
I terra.

Andarono qui e Ul per la dtt^ p**r
vexdeme le cose notsbili.
^ Andare intomo alia caaa.
I Far il giro deUa casa.
Andar qui e U nella casa.

Cottare 1.

Quanto Le costs 1
Quanto Le coata qocsto libro 1
Mi costs tre scudl e mezio.
Quests tsTola gli costa setts scndi.

Alantf hf wu^t ttlf,

I was alone.

One woman only.

OneOod.
God alone can do that.
The very thought of it is criminal.
A single resding is not suiBcicnt to
satisfy a mind that has a true taste.

Soh ; fern. 9ola,

10 era solo.
Una sola donna.
Un solo Dio.

Dio solo pud fitf qnesto.

11 pensiero solo dl dd d criminoso.
Una soU lettura non basts per con-

tentare un uomo che ha
gusto.

To laUhy shooting.

To blow out some one's brains.

To shoot one's self with s pistol.

He hss blown out his brslns.

He hss blown out his brains with a

pistol.
He hss shot him with a pistol.

Vccidere con arma dajiioco.

fFsr saltare le cenrelia a qualcnno.
Bruciare le cenrelia a qnalcuno.
Mandar a qualcuno le cenrelia all'
aria.
Ucciderai con una pistoieCtata.
Si d &tto saltare le cerrella.
Si d latto saltare le oerreUa con una

pistolettata.
Gli ha mandate all' aria le cenrelU
con una pistolettata.

He served for a long time, acquired '
honours, snd died contented. !

He arrived poor; grew rich in a short
time, snd lost all In a still shorter
time.

Servi gran tempo, giunse sgli onori,

c mori contento.
Arrivd povero, diventd ricoo in poco

tempo, e pexdd tutto in meno tempfr

ancora.

8IXT7-BIGHT9 LBSSON. 875

EXERCISES.

210.

What is the matter with you ? — Why do you look so melancholy
{coA melancoUco) ? — I should not look so melancholy, if I had no
reason to be sad. I have heard just now that one of my friends
has shot himself with a pbtol, and that one of my wife's best
friends has drowned herself. — Where did she drown herself? —
She drowned herself in the river which is behind her house. —
Yesterday, at four o'clock in the morning, she rose {si leva) with-
out saying a word to any one (ad alcuno), leaped out of the win-
dow which looks into the garden, and threw herself into the river,
where she was drowned. — I have a great mind (gran vogUg) to
bathe (bagnarsi) to-day. — ^Where will you bathe ? — In the river.
— Are you not afraid of being drowned ? — Oh, no ! I can swim.
— ^Who taught you ? — ^Last summer I took a few lessons in the
swimming-school (alia scuola del (or di) nuoto).

When had you finished your task ? — I had finished it when
you came in. — Those who had contributed (contrihuire) most (piu)
to his elevation to the throne (alia sua elevazume sul trano) of his
ancestors, were those who laboured (lavorare) with the greatest
eagerness (con piu animosita) to precipitate him from it (per pre-
cipitamelo). As soon as (Dacche) Ceesar (Cesare) had crossed
(passare) the Rubicon (U Rvhicone), he had no longer to deliberate
(deUberare) : he was obliged (doveite) to conquer (vincere) or to
die. — An emperor (un imperatore), who was irritated at (irritato
caniro) an astrologer (un astrologo), asked him : << Wretch (tniS'
erahile) I what death (di che sarta di morte) dost thou believe thou
wilt die?" — '<I shall die of fever," replied the astrologer.
" Thou liest," said the emperor, "thou wilt die this instant of a
violent death (di morte vtbZento)." As he was going to be seized
(stavano per prenderlo)^ he said to the emperor, " Sire (Stre),
:>rder some one (ordinate) to feel (che mi si tocchi, subj.) my
pulse, and it will be found that I have a fever." This sally
(questo detto) sByed his life.

211.
Do you perceive yonder house (queUa casa laggiu) ?-^I per-
ceive it ; what house is it ? — It is an inn (una locanda) ; if you

.ESSON.
nmia*

, .<Maf ciie tu abbia (iibbl).

, I !ibiilamo, che vol abbiaia
{ tlliilio {esse} )

M (essti) >
I ^i.vmo> cUe vai iiat«.

. I lend (esse) ) ^

ui: wMi parJIamOi cbe vol parliate.

C'li' U> creda, cho tu cr^da, ch* egU

Trrda,
Ciu3 ijoi cfedlami^, eh» ifol eradiate

etc lo ftBOio, cbo tu Mtita, eh' egll

Cho nol aeniiamo* cUa vol Benikie,

^tii ihfiftrai cotijtigfttion the thrua per-
lettictt, and in tha two auxllinrlcB, in a

37S

StXTY-MIiyTU LBSSOlf.

The wcond penon dngular of the auxiUariei may also tenninate iu t. Sec-
ondly, that all the three coDJugationa have the firat and aecond peraona plnial
terminated altke, and the third peraon plural terminatea in the aecond and third
conjugationa in ano^ whilst in the firat coi^ugation it enda In bio.

KSMABK8 ON THB USB OF THB BVaJUltCTITB IK ITAUAK.

A. The Bubjunctiye in Italian ia made uae of to express doubt or uncertainty.'
It ia goTemed by one of the following coqjunctlona, which generUly preoedea
the verb which ia put in the subjunctive mood.

Cfu, that
Aecioedii

Benefit
Aiieoreh},

I to the end that.
I although.

Atv^nachl, whereaa, tho1lgfa^
fSnM, tUl.
Sinlantoehi, until.
Quaniunque, though, although.
Purdii, provided, that.

B. The conjunction efu makes all the words to which it is joined become
conjunctions. The following conjunctive expressions, therefore, also require
the Bubjnnctive :

suppose thst.

Bisogna du^ it is necessary that
Diofaeciache, {would to God

Voglia Iddio cAe, ) that.

Dalochtf
Po»todie,
In coMo cAe, in case that.

^i^*^ J before that.

C. Verba expresdng wUl, detire, command^ pcrmtMton, and fear, followed by
the conjunction cfu^ require the subjunctive, as: I will, I desire, I command,
I permit my brother to study, to spMk, to see, to go out, Ac, vogKo, deaiderot
eomandOf pemuUo, die ndo JrtUeUo tiudii, parlif vedo, cseo, Ac. I fear he may
not aing, he may not say, Ac., temo che turn eon/i, che rum dicot Ac.

I wish you may do it aoon.

I fear it will rain to-night

I hope to succeed in it.

I must go there myael£

He says so, to the end that you may
not attribute the fault to me, and that
you may know what ia to be ex-
pected from him.

Though it be difficult to aubdue ov
paaaions, we must, notwithstaniing,
vanquiah ouraelvea.

The count, though much frightened,
had the boldneas.

Wait till I return.

So long as I have not finiahed my
work.

t will come, provided it doea not rain.

Deiidero che lofaedaU presto.
Temoekepiova qneata sera,
t Spero dke la cosa mi rieaoa
Bisogna ch* io stesso ci vodSo.
Lo dice, aecioedii non diaU a me W

colpa, ed t^ffinM MttppiaU, quanto

d po9$a sperar da lui.

BeruM na difficile vlncer le nostre

passloni, bisogna perd vincere se

stessOv
II conte otvegnaM (anporehX) fo9$e

molto spaventato, ebbe 1' ardirc.
Aspettate jCnc^ io tomu
Sinianioehi io non abbia finito il mio

lavoro.
Verrd purefi^ non piova.

> Hence the verb eredert^ to believe, always governs the subjunctive In
Italian. Ex. MtofraUtto erede ch* io parH, My brother thinks I speak.

SIZTT-NINTH LESSON.

979

Soppow that he were.to die.

In case he ahottld not be in hia apart-
ment.

Suppose it to be so.

Would to Ood that all were going well.

However wise the counsel that you
have taken may be.

It is sufficient ibr me to know.

I must do.

Potto ehs egli muoia.

In caso €he non fotte nel suo appar-

tamento.
DtUo ehe sia eo»^.
' Diofaoda du tutto vada bene.
Comunque savio «ta il consiglio cho

avete preso.
Basta di* io $appia,
Bisogna eh* io faeda.

D. The conjunction ehe does not require the subjunctive when it relates to
verbs expressing certainty. Ex.

I know that thou hast not been at my

house.
He assured me that the work was by a

master-hand.
I am sure that he is wrong.
I swear to thee that I have told him

nothing.
I am convinced that he does not betray

me.

E. The indicative is also employed after conjunctions expressing an action
wlitk certainty, such as :

Io BO c^ tn non Mr stato da me.

M' assicurava ehe V opera era di

mano maestra.
Sono persuaso eh* egli ha torto.
Ti giuro ehe non gli ho detto niente.

Sono convinto die non mi tradisce.

AUardi^

when.

FrattasUOt

meanwhile.

Come^

as.

GiaeM,

since.

CoBi,

thus.

InUmtoM,

so that.

Daeeh^

since.

Mentrech^,

whilst

DimodwXt,

80 that

Non pertanto,

notwithstanding.

Dopoehe,

aftet.

Onde,

therefore.

Pereh^

because, why.

Sc,

if, since.

Perdd,

therefore.

Siedii,

80 that

Perd,

( therefore,
c nevertheless.

Siccomet

as.

Stantedi^,

since.

PoiM,

because.

Toetodiit

as soon as.

Huando,

when.

Tuttawh

yet, nevertheless.

Whilst he was at dinner, two horses

were stolen from him.
lYhilst fortune came to his aid, it

happened that the King of France

died.
Whilst I am speaking, time is passing.
It seemed to him he was ill, but he was

nevertheless contented.
I should like to know why you do not

call upon me any more.

Intanto di' egli etasa a pranzo, ^U

furono rubati due cavalli.
Menireehi la fortuna veniva ad

aiutarlo, avvenne ehe il Re dl

Francia mori.
Mentre di* io parlo^ il tempo passa.
Gli pareva di star male, ma nan per

tanio era contento.
Vorrei sapere, perdii non veniU pih

dame.

380

SIXTY. If INTR LESSON.

I cannot oome, bectoM I amlmsy.
He is tn honeat man, therefore I

believe all he tells me.
Every thing loit may be reoovered, but

not lUe : iherefora evoy one ought

to take good care of It.

Though every body aaya It, I never-

thelesa do not believe it.
Now, aa God has granted me eo nnich

grace, I shall die happy.
Thongh I have been advised by many

phyaidans to use certain baths, I

kave nevertheless not been willbig

to do it
If I do not mistake, I saw him the

other night
Though the smell of that juioe offends,

it is not for all that t^juiious to

health.
As soon as I am able, Iwlll come.

Non poBBo venire, perch^ As da frre
Egli d galantnomo^ percid end*

quanto mi dice.
Ognl cosa perdnta ri ptiu ricuperue,

ma non la vita : tpperb ciascono

dcse easer di i^ueUa buon guaidia-

no.
Benchd tntti lo dicano, io ptrh non

loeredo.
Ora, potoU Dio mi ka faUo tanU

gruia, lo morrd contento.
Qnantunque da molt! medid mi sU

atato oonsigllato d' usar certi bag-

nl, furt non 1* ho vobtio fare.

Se non m' inganno, lo vidi V altia

Sebbene V odore di questo sugo ofieo-
da, non perdb ntioec alia salute.

TbttoM io pofrd; verr^

F, The suljunctive is fhrther made nse of after the relative pronoun du,
when it follows a superlative ; and after the relative pronouna d^ i^ quaU, di^
euif when the action which they present is doubtful or uncertain.

Tlie finest pieturs that Is id Rome.
The bravest man that I have ever

known.
Tlie most lidicukms fignre that one can

see.
For tlttt a man of some knowledge Is

required.
You will not find any body wlio would

doit
I liave nobody on whom I oould rely.
Show me any one who has never com-
mitted a foult
I want a horse that must be taller than

thU.
It is assured that peace la made.
They say that there lias been a great

battle near the Rhine.
Whatever may happen.
However handsome she may be, she

does not please me.
Let liim be awake or asleep, I must

speak to him.

n pi& bel quadro eke Ha in Roma,
n piil brav' uomo eh' io obbia mai ce-

nosctuto.
La figunla piik tidioola e^ tA pama

vedere.
A dd si ▼uole un uomo cfte oUui dalle

cognidoni.
Non trov^rete thi lo faeeia.

Non ho nesiuno in eui poefa fidarmL
Mostretemi uno dke non abhia mai

oommesso un folio.
Ho biflogno di un cavallo cft« Jta

pih alto di questo.
Si d& per dcuro che la pace na fotta.
Si dice eke al Reno eia state data una

gran battagUa.
Ne wceeda quel che vuole.
Per bella eke sia non mi piece.

VegH o darma, biaogna ch' io gU
peril.

SIXTY-NINTH LESSON. 881

There Is no one, however learned he

may be, that knows all.
I do not Bee which is his Intention.
I do not know which are your books.

Non v' i uomo, per dotto eke sCo. e^

tappia tut to.
Non vedo qual Ha V intenzione sua.
Non so quali tiano I vostri Ubri.

G. When of two Terbs the first is preceded by non, the second by che^ the
latter requires to be in the subjnnctive. Ex.
I do not believe he studies. I Non cn^o du tiudiU.

I do not think he walks. | Non penso du wmadnL

EXERCISES.

212.

M. de Turenne would never buy {turn compraoa max) any thing
on credit of tradesmen (t7 fnereanJUi)^ for fear, said he, they should
lose a great part of it, if he happened to be killed {se gU accadesse
di restar morto in guerra). All the workmen {gli operai) who '
were employed about his house had orders to bring in the bills
(di preseiUare i loro cimti)^ before he set out for the campaign
^meUersi in eampagna), and they were regularly paid.

You will never be respected (rispettafe) unless you forsake {se
non bueiando) the bad company you keep. — ^You cannot finish
your work to-night unless (a meno eke) I help you. I will explain
{spiegare) every difficulty to you, that you may not be disheart-
ened (scaraggiare) in your undertaking (f impresa), — ^Suppose
you should lose your friends, what would become of you ? — In
case you want my assistance, call me ; I shall help you. — A wise
and prudent man (un uomo savio e prudente) lives with economy
when young, in order that he may enjoy the (per godere del) fruit
of his labour when he is old. — Carry (portaie) this money to Mr.
N., in order that he may be able to pay his debts (i7 delnto), —
Will you lend me that money ? — I will not lend it you unless you
promise to return (rendere*) it to me as soon as you can. — Did
the general arrive ? — ^He arrived yesterday morning at the camp
{U campo), weary and tired (stanco ed ahhaUuto), but very season-
ably (molio a proposito) ; he immediately gave his orders to begin
the action (la hattaglia or il conibattimento), though he had not
(nan avesse) yet all his troops. — Are your sisters happy ? — ^They
are not, though they are rich, because they are not contented.-—
Although they have a good memory, that is not enough to learv

382 SIXTT.NIlfTR LESSON.

any language whatever (qualunque siasi Ungua) ; they mast make
use of their judgment (ilgiudizio)» — ^BehoM (Guardi) how amia-
ble that lady is ; for all that she has no fortune {quatUunque turn
na agiata)^ I do not love her the less (/* amo isiessametUe). — Will
you lend me your violin ? — I will lend il yon, provided you return
it me to-night. — Will your mother call upon me ? — She will, pro-
vided you will promise to take her to the concert. — I shall not
cease to importune (importunare) her till she has forgiven me.—
Give me (mi dia) that penknife (il temperino), — ^I will give it you,
provided you will not make a bad use of it. — Shall you go to
London? — I will go, provided you accompany (aceompagnare)
me I and I will write again (di nuovo) to your brother, in case he
should not have received my letter.

• 213.
Where weie you during the engagement (ilfatto d' amd) ? — I
was in bed to have my wounds {la ftriia) dressed {medicare). —
Would to God {cast fosse piaciuto a Dio che) I had been there {ch*
iovifossistato)\ I would have {avrei voltUo, cond.) conquered
{vincere*) or perished {perire), — We avoided {si evUd) an engage-
meat for fear wo should be {che nonfossimo) taken, their force
being superior {superiore) to ours. — ^Grod forbid {Dio non voglia) I
should blame your conduct ; but your business will never be
done properly {a dovere)^ unless you do it yourself. — Will you
set out soon 1 — I shall not set out till I have dined. — Why did you
tell me that my father was arrived, though you knew {mentre ch*
EUa sapeva) the contrary ? — ^You arc so hasty {iraamdo), that
however little you aro contradicted {ch* uno La contrarii) you fiy
into a passion {meilersi in coUera) in an instant. — ^If your father
does not arrive to-day, and if you want money, I will lend you
some. — I am much obliged {ienutissimo) to you. — Have you done
your task ? — Not quite ; if I had had (^e avessi avtUo) time, and
If I had not been {fossi stato) so uneasy about {per) the arrival of
my father, I should have {F avrei) done it. — If you study and are
(sla) attentive, I assure you that you will learn the Italian lan-
guage in a very short time. He who wishes to teach an art
must know it thoroughly {afotido)^ he must give none but clear
(preciso) and well-digested {digerire) notions (la mmone) ; he

SIXTY-NINTH L£SSON. 383

must iastil {far entrare) them one by one into the minds (nello
spirito) of his pupils ; and above all {sopra tutio)y he must not
overburthen (sopraccaricare) their memory with useless and un-
important (vano) .rules.

My dear friend, lend me (prestatend) a sequin. — Here are (cc-
cone) i»ro instead of one. — How nuich obliged I am to you (quatUo
Le Mono tenuio) \ I am always glad when I see you, and I find
my happiness in yours. — Is this house to be sold ? — Do you wish
to buy it ? — Why not ? — Why does not your sister speak ?— She
would speak (jparlerebbef cond. ) if she were not (se rum fosse) al-
ways so absent {disattenta), — I like pretty anecdotes : they season
(cofuUre) conversation (la conversazione), and amuse every body.
Pray relate me some. — Look, if you please, at page (pagina) one
hundred and forty-eight of the book which I lent you, and you
will find some.

214.

You must have patience, though you have no desire to have it,
for I must also (pure) wait till I receive my money. — Should I
{nel caso cV to) receive it to-day, I will pay you all that I owe
you. — Do not believe that I have forgotten it, for I think of it
every day. Do you believe, perhaps {crede Ella forse) that I
have already received it ? — I do not believe that you have already
received it; but I fear that your other creditors {che gli aUri di
Lei credUori) may already have received it. — You wish yx)u had
{vorrehbe aver, cond.) more time to study, and your brothers wish
they did not need {vorrehhero non aver hisogno) to learn. — Would
to Grod {yolesse- Iddio) you had (avesse) what I wish you, and that
I had (avessi) what I wish. — ^Though we have not had what we
widh (yet) we have almost always been contented ; and Messieurs
B. have almost always been discontented, though they have had
every thing a reasonable man (un uomo ragionevole) can be con-
tented with. — Do not believe. Madam, that I have had your fan
(i7 ventaglio) — ^Who tells you that I believe it ? — My brother-in-
law wishes he had not had {vorrehbe non aver avuto) what he has
had. — Wherefore 1 — He has always had many creditors, &nd no
money. — I wish you would always speak Italian to me ; and you
must obey, if you wish to learn that language, and if you do not

884

SBVENTISTII LESSON*.

wish lo lose your time (inutilmefUe).^^! wish you were (varrei
ehefotte) more industrious and more attentive when I speak to
you. If I were not {rumfMsi) your friend, and if you were not
(wmfaste) mine, I should not speak {jmrlerei) thus to you. — Do
not trust Mr. N. (non vifidate del Signor JY.), for he flatters you.
— Do you believe a flatterer (tm adukUore) can be a friend 1 — ^You
do not know him so well as I, though you see him every day. —
Do not think that I am angry with him, because his father has
offended me. — Oh ! here he is coming {eccolo ehe viene) ; you
may tell him all yourself.

SEVENTIETH LESSON.
Lezione settantesima.

If I hadf if thou hadst, if he had.
If we hid, if you had, Ifthejr had.

THE SUBJUNCTIVE CONTINUED.
lur^^rmcT or rum auajimcTivB.

S' io aveati, ae lu aYeaaf, r egh

Se nol aveaaimo, ae vol aveate, a*
agUno aveaaero.

If I were, Ifthouwert, ifhei

If we were, If you were, if they were.

S* io foadi ae ta fo^ a* egli foaae.
Se noHoaalino, ae voi foate, aP eglino
foaaero.

If I apoke, if thou apokeat^ if lie spoke. S' io parlaaal, ae tu parlaaai, a* egii

pariaese.
If we flpoke, if you apoke, if they apoke. Se noi pariaarimo, ae yoI parlaate, f>'

' eglino parlaaaero.

U I bellrfVed, if thou beiievedat, if he S* io crede8al« ^ tu credeaai, a* egli

believed. ! crcdesse.

If we believed, if you believed, if they ! Se noi credeesimo, ae voi credeale

believed.' 9' eglino ervdeaaero.

SEVBNTIETU LBSSON.

385

If I heard, if thou heardest, if he heaid. . S* io sentissl, se tu Bentissi, flP egll

I seDtisee.

If we heard, if you heard, if they i Se nol sentfeeimo, ae voi aentiste, a*

heard. > egUno sentiasero^

Obt. A. Tt^e imperfect of the aubjunctiTe ia formed from the passcUo remoio
(Leaaon LX.)* hy chan^ng, for the firat coi\jngatioii, at into mm, for the aec-
ond ei into esti^ and for the third u into im. The aecond peraon plural la in all
alike the aecond person plural of the pastcUo remoio. (See Lesaoii LX.)

Obs. B. Aa to the formation of the preterite, or preterperfect and pluperfect
of the aubjunctiTC, it ia exactly' the aame as In the indicative ; the former
being compounded of the present aubjunctive of the auxiliary, and the paat
participle of another verb, the latter of the imperfect subjunctive of the auxil>
iary, and the paat participle of another verb. Ex.

That I may have loved. Ch' Io abbia amato.

That he inay have come. Ch' egli sia venuto.

If I liad loved. S' io aveasi amato.

If I were come. S' io fosai venuto.

RxMABK H.— On thi Uaa op thb Subjiwctitb.

The imperfect of the aubjunctive ia employed after the conditional conjun*
tion M, i^ expreaaed or understood K

If I had money.

If he had time.

If you were rich.

If he were a little more amiable.

If he loved me.

If Iloatmymoney.

If he were to beat hia dog.

If ahe heard me.

Ifthe child slept.

Se io aveaai danaro.

Se avease tempo.

S' EHa foase ricco.

S* egli fosse un po' piu oortefe.

Se mi amasse.

Se io perdesai il mio danaro.

Se batteeae il suo cane.

S^essil ml sonfisae.

Se ft fanciullo.dormiaee.

OF THE CONDITIONAL OR POTENTIAL TENSH8.

CONDITIONAL f aXBSNT.

Thia ia formed from the present future (Leaaon XLVI.) by changing

1

Sing, ad,
into ** axi.

2 3

BAI, VA,
BBBTI, RXBBB,

1 2 3

Plur. axMo, Bsra, »anno.
" asMMO) asaTX, aaaasBa

> Except when futurity la to be expreaaed, for then the future muat be madt
vae of. Ex.

If he cornea, we ahaU^sa him. i Se verro, Io vedremo.

I will go to aee him to-morrow, if 1 1 Andrd a vederl0 domanl,. aa ftful

have time. . *^ tempo.

• 71

SBVBIITIXTH

I Aoald Kare, thou wooldst luMr%.he

would have.
Wo obottld htTo, yon woald here, thef

would have, ■
I aboiild be, thon wonldot be, he w«ild

be.
We ohouM be, yon woitl h^ tha|r

would be.

I should loYe, <hou wouldot love, he

wouM lOVOw
We ihonld lore, you would love, they

would lovok

I should believe, thou wouldst believe,

he would believe.
We AonU believe, you would believe,

they would believe.

t^SSQZf.

Avrel, avrem, fMobte.
Avremmo, avreste, aviebbem
Sarei, eanotl, tanbbe.
Saremmo, ^^reste, aarebbeio

Amerei^ anweiti, amerebbe
Ameremmo, amereate, amaaebbflfa

Crederel, credeiestl, crederabbe.

Crederemmo, credereate, ered»
rebbero.

I ABttld hear, thou wouldat hear, be Sentirei, sentireati, aentirebbe.

would hear.
We should hear, you would hear, they

would hear.

Senliremmo, aentireaie, aentirsb-
bero.

f. Wkenever there is a condition to be ezpreaaed, the imperfect of the sub-
junctive ia used, and the conditional present answers to it. It ia Indifeent to
Ibfin the sentence by the imperfect of the subjunctive or tho oonditional, and
VKSvsrs^

If I had money, I would buy some
booka.

I would buy some books, if I' had

4noney.
If he were a little mora amiable, he

would have manyfrienda.
Ha would have many fHends, if he

were a little more amiable.
Iwooiddoil^iflcQuld.
If I oouM, I would do it.
If I had money, I would have a new

coat.
I would have a new coat, if I had

money
If thou eouldat do thia, thou . wouldst

jo that.

Sd oMtM danaro, oomprern de* Iibr|.
Comprerei de' libri, ae aaesi< danaro.

^ egli ybsMun po' pi& corteae, ov-
rtbbe moltiamiei.

Avrehbe molti amici, a'egUybMs un
po' pih cortese.

hojareiy tjmttati.

S^poUtH, lofareL

St WHsH danaro, tmni nn' aUto
nuovo.^

Avrei un' ablto ntiOTa«Oe oaesti da-
naro.

S* tu 9ap€99i lar queato, vorrwaH lai
qtMlIo.

.>n.

aBVENriETH LESSON.

387

Thoa woiQdtt daiial^lC than couldst

do this.
If he could, he would.
He would, if he conld.
I would go there, if I had time.
If I had timet I would go there.
U he knew what you^have done, he

would acold yoiL
He would scold you, if he knew what

you have done.

Tosoold.
If ther« were any wood, he would

makeafiie.
He would make a fire, If there were

any wood.

Should the men come, it would be
necessary to give them something to
diink.

Should we receive our letters, we
would net read them until to-
morrow.

Vmresti iar qu^o, se tu tapemi fai

questo.
Se poieatCf -vorreNte.
Vorrebbe, se poUtit,
"V' andreii se avesH tempo.
Se cneatitempOf T' mndrsL
Se-^apesse 'ci6 che aveto fatto, vi

VI* rampognerebH ^ sapme cid eh'

SMte fatto.
Rampognare (sgridare).
Se d fome \egnA,JbrMe taoeth

JbreMefuoeo, se d fosse legna.

'Se gli uomini venissero, btsogns'
rebbe dar loro qualche ooia da
here.
Bisognsrtbbe dar loro qdaloke eosa
. da bare, se gli uomini vettissero,
Se rieevessimo le nosqre lettere, Boa
le Uggeremmo prima di domanl.

CONDITIONAL PAST.

It is formed from the present conditional of the auxiliary and the piat pgr-
tldple of t&e verb yon conjugate. .

I should hare had, Ac. Avrel aTuto, dc.

I should hate been, dc. . Sarei state. Fem. stata, Ac.

We should have been, Ac. | Saremmo statL Fern, state, dc.

I should have, thou wonldst
ham^ ho would have,

We should have^ you would
have, they would have,

Avrei, avreati, avrebbe,

Avremmo^
rebbero,

avroste,

Jparlato.
ciedttto.
sentito

I should have, thou wouldst 1
have, he (she) would have, ] set

We should have, you would fom.
have, they would have, J

Sarei, sarestl, sa- 1 partito ; Fsm.

rebbe, I partita.

Saremmo, saresto, j^partiti; f^uk

sarebbero, j partite.

They would bave been more cautious,

if they had been wamad.
Ha would havebesafti0ed,tf h9l0i

raqnssted It.

cauti,te fosser9

Sarebbero siaU

staii avertiti.
Sarebbe siaio dispensato te f

rk/dssto.

898

If I htA neelvtd tty money, I would
hare bonght ntm ihoM.

If ho had had a pen, ho would hate

reeoUeetad ihe word.
If joa bad riaen eariy, yoa would aot

have caofht a eold.
li thejhad got rid of their old horae,

they would havo procured a better

one.
If he had wadied hla handa, he would

have wiped Ihem.
If I knew that, I would behave difieiv

entljr.
If I had known that, I would have

behaved dlfieranUj.
If thou hadat taken notice of that, thou

wouldat not have

ff io iiaaaii lioemto fl mio danoi
ro, oar^i eamprolo delle acarpe
nuovo.

£r oveiM arnto una penna, «t aoreU*

£1^ al/o«i levata (abata) di boon*

' on, DOQ at mrMe sRfraddoia.

fiSi wumtro vendnto 11 lor vecchio

eavallo, aa ae mrMero pneisnio

unomigliorB.
ff €tomm lavato le aue mani, ae la

a8fvUe oflfeMiaulfl*
Se isptui dO, m» ooiubrrvi dlfle-

lentsnente*
Se oaem topule cU^ raS •ard tm-

doUo altrimenti.
file ti Jmn uocerU dl dd, non tl m.

K. The pluperfect of the aubjnnctive and the paat conditional meeting with
each other, may aometimea be aubatituted by the impexiect of the indicative.
Ex.

Se lo aaptao leri, io acmaa aicora-
Had I known It yeaterday, I would
certainly have oome.

I would have given it you, If I had had
It

Inatead of:
Se f OMwi a^ptcto leri, aorei fomde

aicuramento.
Io re lo doao, aa f oaeea.

Inatead of:
Vet'ovrrnddle^Ml'i

L, Aa aoon aa aa la not conditional it requirea the Indfbative mood. Ex.

If at that time I had Italian booka,

they wars not mine,
if he ia not ill, why doea ha aend for

the phyaician 1

Se allora io oaiaa libti itaUvii, non

aroRomltti. *
Se non ^ ammahto, peichd fa venlr

11 medico 1

If. The imperfect of the aubjunctive ia further uaed to ezpreaa a wiah in an
exclamatory form. 'Ex.

O eonld I but know your aentlmenta !

O could Lalao come 1 .
O had I but money 1

Ok poUsti aapere i voairi aantl-

menti!
OkpoieiH venir anch' io I
OftoMMtdanarot

And when there ia another vprb fbUowIng, it la alao put in the tepoKftet of tha
aubjunctive. Ex. « ;

SBVBNTIBTH LBSSON.

Would to God h* never returned any | VoU^se U'jAlo che non rUanuute mei

more I I pih 1

N. Bat when the wish is not exdaniatory, the present of the conditional
must be employed. Ex.

I ehould like to see him.

r ehonld willingly accompany yoa to

Florence.
I could not say bo.
I would lay any thing that it will nut

succeed.

Vbmi vederlo.

L' aeeompagnerti Tolentleii a PI

renze.
NonMpr«idirlo.
Seomvuiterei tutto, che la cosa non

andri bene.>

O. The post conditional alone is made use of to represent as doubtful an

event that is to follow a preceding event. Ex.

He has promised to send me the goods,
as soon as he would have received
them. .

He has promised to write to me, as
soon as he should be arrived in Lon-
don.

Hapromesso dl mandarmi le mer-
canzie subito che le avrebbe rice-
v)ite.

Ha promesso di scrivermi subito chtt
sarebbe arrivato in Londra.

Wonld yon learn Italian, If I learnt Itl ,

I would learn it, if you learnt it.
Would yon have learnt German, if I

badlMTptitl
I would have learnt it, if yon had learnt

it.
Would you go to Italy, if I went

thither with you 1
I would go thither, if you went thither

with fae.
Would you have gone to Germany, if I

had gone thither nith you 1
Would you go out, If I remained ht

home?
Would you have written a letter, if I

had written a note 1

Imparerebbe Ella V italiano^ se to r

imparas8i%
L' imparerei, s* Ella 1' imparasse.
Avrebbe Ella Imparato il tedesoo, se

io V aressi Imparatol
L' avrei imparato, se ellaP avesse

imparato.
Andrebbe Ella in Italia, s* io v* an-

dassi con Lei 1
V andrel s* Ella d venlsse meco.

Sarebbe Ella andata In Alemagna, as

io vi fossi andato eon Lei?
Uscirebbe Ella, se io stessi in casa 1

Arrebbe Ella scritto una lettera, se io
avesai scritto un biglietto 1

> Such expressions are, in fact, elliptical, for they should be : Varrei vederlo^
Be pote99^ 1 would see him, if I could; P OBoampagnerei voieniUri a Jflrenxe, m
ovesn tempOf 1 should willingly accompany you to Florence, if I had time ; non
»aprei dtrlOf se dooesn, I could not say so, if I were obliged. Henee it comes
that when such expressions are followed by another verb, this must sUnd in
the imperfect of the subjunctive. Ex. Vorrei trovare vno the m' oeoompagnant^
I should Uke to find one who would accompany me ; V<ifrTti un eegreiario efu
eerpeue la lingua ikUianOf I should like, to have a secretary who knew t£c
Italian language.

390

UVKNTIBTB USSON.

P, TIm imiM&et of the lulyiuieCtre U often auboticiitod liar Ae Impflrfwl
of tlM IndicatiYe in ■poaking emphatically. Ex.

How much 1 relied on fntr fironite,
you know ; how much I IoyoA fou,
ia not unknown to yoa ; liow little I
deeenred your IbiiKetfulnese, let your
heart tell it you for me.

dnanto io "nd JIdaaai della toetn
promeeea, Yoi lo lapeie i qnenlo io
V oMMtiy non tI ^ ignoto; quante
poco merUaan la Toetra dlmenti-
canza, lo dica il Toetro cuore per

Q. Let It finally be remarked, that the relative ofte requirea the indicatiTe
whon the aubordinate proposition expreaaes any thing certain or poattlYO, and
the subjunctiTe when it relatea to any thing nncertalo or doubtful Ex.

Bring me tlM book that pleaaea me.
Bring me a book ttiat may pleaae me.

I am looking for the road that leada to

Flovenoe.
I am aeeking a road that may lead me

to Plorenoe.

/fid. Recaml il libra che mi jMoee.
Svbj, Recaml un libro die mi

pioeeio.
Ind, Ceroo la via che mma a Fi-

rania.
SuJbj. Ceroo una via che mad a Fl-

renze.

However or howsoever.

STer quanta,
Per-^^ke.

ObB, R. Bomntr or lieieaegaer, followed tff an acUecdve, la rendered by pif
^Monfo iuTariably without o^ or by per with c^ In both caaea the aubjunc
tlTO ia employed. Ex.
However learned yon may be, there Ptr quanta dotto vol tiate (or fMf

are many thlnga which you do not

However happy ahe may be,
alwaya thinka heraelf unhappy.

doiio du vol tiaU), ignorate molte

Per quanta fortunate ella Ha (or ptr
fortunau ek' ella aia), al ereda
aempre infeUce.

WhaUver^ whatsoever. \ Per quanta.

• Oba. 8. Whatever or whataoever, followed by a aubatantive, ia rendered by
per quanta without dba, but It agreea with the aubatantive, and la foObwed by
<he aubjunctive. Ex.

Whatever endeavoura he may make,
he will never attain hlaalm.

Whatever richea they may poeaeaa,
they will never be eontented.

Whoever, whosoever.
of whomsoever you may*apeak, avoid j

Per quanti aforsi eg^faeeia, non ar^

riTer& mai al auo fine.
Per quante ricchezze paeeedana, nor.

aaranno mai colitenii.

SChi che sia (or chichessm).
Chiunque,

Chi che aia la persona di cui parlat^
evitate la maldicensa.

SBVENTIBTB, LESSON.

391

Whosoeyer may come, will be wel-

cqme.
Whoever the etmnger may be that you

will see, receiTe him well.
WhomsoeTer yon may give this book

to, -recommend him to read it atten-

tlrely.

I have seen Aothlng that could be
blamed' in hia oonductk

I know nobody who la ao good aa you
are.

There ia nobody who doea not know it.

Whoever, whosoever* )
Whatever, whatsoever. )

Whoever may be your enemiea, you

hare not to fear them ao long aa you

act according to juatice.
Whatever hia intentlona may be, I

ahall alwaya behaTe towarda him In

the aame manner.

Chiunquo venga aaril ben Tenuto.

CM che ala lo atranlero ch' Ella

▼edra, 1' accolga bene.
A chiunque diate queato libro rac-

comandate di leggerlo attenta-

mente.

Non ho vednto niente che ai poaaa
biaaimare nella aua condotta.

(Non conoaco neaauno che ala coai
bnono come Lei^^orVol.
Non conoaco neaauno che ala tantc
bttono quanto Lei, cr Vol.
Non v' d chi non aappia cid.

Qualunque,

^ualupque aiano i di Lei nemlci non
ha da temerli tanto che al etnduce
aecondo la gluatizia.

Q^ualunque aiano le aue Intenzioni,
mi condurrd aempre nella ateaaa
maniera contro di lui (cr verao di
lui).

EXERCISES.
1215.

Would you have money if your father were here ? — ^I should
have some if he were here. — ^Would you have heen pleased if I
had had some hooks ? — ^I should have heen much pleased if you
had had some. — ^Would you have praised my little brother if he
had been good ? — If he had heen good I should certainly {swiuu-
mente) not only have praised, but also loved, honoured {onorare);
Mid rewarded him.— Should we be praised if we did our ex-
ercises ? — ^If you did them without a fault (senza errore), you
would be praised and rewarded. — Would not my brother have
been punished if he had done his exercises ?-^He would not have
been punished if he had done them. — Would my sister have been
praised if she had not been skilful ?^She would certainly {certa

802 SKVBIITIBTH LBSSOlff.

menie) not hare been praised if she had not been very skilful,
and if she had nol woAsd from momlDg till evening. — Would
you give me somstUng if I were very good ? — ^If you were very
goody and if you wwrked veil, I would give you a fine book.— -
Would you have written (d your sister if I had gone to Paris t —
I would have written to her, and sent her something handsome
^f you had gone thither.— ^Would you speak if I listened to you ?
—I would speak if you listened to me, and if you would answer
me. — Would you have spoken to my mother if you had seen
her ? — I would have spoken to her, and have begged he? (pregare)
to send you a handsome gold watch (un heW oriuoJo (Voro) if I
had seen her.

Would you copy your exercises if I copied mine ? — ^I would
copy them if you copied yours. — Would your sister have trans-
cribed her letter if I had transcribed mine T — She would have
transcribed it if you had transcribed yours. — ^Would she have set
out if I had set out ? — ^I cannot tdl you wkat she would hav*
done if you had set out.

216.

One of the valets de chambre (tmo dm eamerieri) of Louis (dt
Lu^i) the Fourteenth requested that prince, as he was going to
bed (menire quesU andava a letio)^ to recommend {di far racemn-
mandare) to the first president {U presidenie) a law-suit (una Hie)
which he had against (coniro) his father-in-law, and said, in
urging him {sotteciUtndoU) : "Alas {Ah), Sire (Sire), you have
but to say one word." '< Well (£A)," said Louis the Fourteenth,
" it is not that which embarrasses me (mm i quesio ehe mi dia
fatlidio) ; but tell mo (dtfluni), if thou wert in thy fiither-in-law's
place (m hugo <2i-*), and thy father-in-law in thine, wouldst thou
be glad if I said that word ?"

If the men should come it would be necessary to give them
something to drink.— If he could do this he would do that.«-I
have always flattered m^velf, my dear brother, that you loved me
. as much as I love you ; but I now see that I have been mistaken.
I should like to (vomi) know why you went a walking without
me (senxa di me), — I have heard, my dear sister, that you are
angry with me (m coUera coniro di me), because I went a walking

SEVENTIETH LESSON. 803

without you (senza di, voi). — I assuve jou tbat, had I known that
you were not ill, I should have come &r you (vtrure a cercare qual*
euno) ; but I inquired {it^ormarn) fX {dal) your physician's about
your health {suJla vostra iaJuU)^ an4 he ^Id me, that you had
been keeping your bed {che voi stavaie a leUo) the last eight days
\da otto giomt).

217.

What do you think of our king ? — I say he is a great man, but
I add, that though kings be ever so powerful (potente), they die
as well as the meanest {ahbietio) of their subjects. — Have ypu
been pleased with my sisters 1 — I have ; for however plain (hruU
to) they may be, they are still very amiable ; and however learned
(dotto) our neighbour's (Jem.) daughters, they are still sometimes
mistaken. — ^Is not their father rich ? — However rich he may be,
he may lose all in aa instant. — Whoever the enemy may be whose
malice (la di cm maJma) you dread (temere\ you ought to rely
(jiposarsi) upon your innocence ; but the laws (la legge) condemn
(condannare) all criminals (il reo) whatever they may be. — What-
ever your intentions (rintenxiorie) my be, you should have acted
differently (differerUemenie), — ^Whatever tl\e reasons (la ragione)
be which you may allege (aUegare), they will not excuse your
action, blamable in itself. — ^Whatever may happen to you in this
world, never murmur (mormorare) against Divine Providence (la
divvna providenxa) ; for whatever we may suffer we deserve.—
Whatever I may do, you are never satisfied. — ^Whatever you may
say, your sisters shall be punished, if they deserve it, and if they
do not endeavour (studiarst) to mend (emendarsi), — Who has
taken my gold watch ? — ^I do not know. — ^Do not believe that I
have had it, or that Miss C. has had your silver snuff-box (la
tabacehiera), ibr I saw both in the hands of your sister when we
.Were playing at forfeits (a' p^gm).— To-morrow I shall set put
for Dover ; but in a fortnight I shall Iip»back again (iomare)^ and
then I sball come to see you and your fami^.-^Where is your
sister at present ? — She is at Paris, and my brother is at Berlin.—*
That little woman is said to be going to marry General (ilgeti-
erale) K., your friend ; is it true 1 — ^I have not heard of it. — What
news is there of our great army ?— It is saii to be lying (stare*)

17*

SBVSNTT-FIR8T LB880K.

between the Weaer (itVsser) and the Rhine {U JZeiio).— All that
the courier (U corriere) told me aeeaing (parere^) very probable
{verismile)f I went home immediately, wrote some lettera, and
dr^rted for Jjondon.

SEVENTYFIRST LESSON.
Lezume setiantesima prima.

OF THE IMPERATIVE.

Thli mood !■ formed from the proMirt of the sutgunctiTeby chtogliig, for tlit
first coqjvgatioii, the terminatioB i of the aeoond peroon alngnhr into a, mod
for the two other coqjngKtioiis a into <. All other persone of the imper^tiTe
•re like the preeent of the subjunctive, except tlie eeoond penon plnrali which
\m formed, eten in moft of the Irregular terbs, from the second person phiral
oftheindicailTe.

fihitf. /mperottsc

That Ihou mayest speak, 1«C

•peak thon.
That thon mayest belieye, Tnd.

belieYethou.
That thou mayest heer, 3rdL

hear thon.

2rjd pert, ting, 2nd pen. mng,
ParU. l>arla.

Credit CredL

Sentft. Seatt.

Taa oraaa Pbbmws of thb Impbb

ATivx Aas: '

Let him speek, letiu •pedt, speak ye,

let them spedc.
Let htm believe, let ns believe, believe

Let him hetf , let vm hmr, hetf ye, let
themhflv.

Parli, parliamo, parlaU, parfino.
Creda, credlamo, cndHef credano.

2nd pen, Zrdpert,
Have thon, «c. Abbi, abbia.
Be thon, Ac. SU(sia), sia.

let p. pi. 2ndp.pL 3nip. pL
Abblamo, abbiate, abbiano.
Siamo, aiate, afaiio.

Obe. A. The seeond person singular of the imperative is rendsvtdby tfit
"nllnitive whenever it is preceded by the negative nmu Ex.

SBVBNTY-FIBST LESSON.

Sd5

Do noe do that.
Do not. Ba J that.
Do not deny that
Do not believe that.

HaTo patience.
Be (thoo) attentive.
Go (ye) thither.

Non £^ c
Non dir questo.
Non negar queeto.
Non credere cid.'

Abbiate pazienza.

Sii attento.

Andatevi (or andate U)

Ob§, B, The pronouns mi, <s ci, vi, m, nuh, edo, gHeto, Ac., are joiied to
Ihe imperative (the same aa to the infinitive, Lesson XVII., and to the preaent
participle, Lesson LVII.). Ex.

Datemi.

Datecene.

Patemelo.
j MandategUelo.
I Prestatemelo.
! Credimi.

Give me.

Give us some.

Giro it me.

Send it to him (to her).

Lend it to me.

Believe (thou) me.

Ob§. C. When the imperative is In the third person singular or plural, or
when it is negative, the pronouns are not joined to it. Ex.

Let him Relieve me. <

Let them believe us.
Do (thou) not believe me.
Do (ye) not tell it me.
Do (thou) not listen to him.
Let him not give it him.
Let us not believe her.
Do (ye) not believe me.
Let them not believe him. |

Have the goodness to reach me thatj
dish. '

Alicreda.
Ci credano.
Non mi credere.
Non me lo dite.

Non r ascoltaie. ^

Non glielo dia. V

Non le crediamo.
Non mi credete.
Non gli credano.

Abbiate. (abbia) la bont& dl por-
germi questo ptatto.

To borrow,

I will borrow some money of you.
I will borrow that money of you.

Borrow it of (or from) liim.
I borrow it from him.
Do not tell him or her.
Do not return it to ihemi

Chiedcre (riccvere) inprestito,

Voglio chiederle danaro in preetito.
Voglio chiederle In prestito questo

danaro.
Chiedeteglielo in prestito.
Glielo chiedo.
Non glielo dite (dies).
Non lo rendete (rends) loro.

1 This manner of rendering the imperative is elliptical, for there ia always ths
V^rb d«9h thou ougbtst or shouldst, understood, as if we said : Non denfarque$-
io^ thou shouldst not do that ; noii deri dir tptetto, non devi ereder eid, Ac

896

8RVENTV -FIRST LB8SON.

Patlsnet^ Impttienoe.

The Mlghboar, the uiiiff-boji.

B6(7«)good.
Know (ye) It

I La paslena, V impaslama.
II proidmo, la tabatehloiB

I Slatabuoni. .
Sappiatelo.

Obey your mastertt and never give
them any trenble.

Pay what you owe, comfort the af-
flicted, and do good to thoee that
have offended yoa.

Lore God and thy neighbour aa thy-

To obey.

To comfort. .
To offend.

Let ua always love and practlee virtue,
and we shall ^ happy both in this
lift and In the next.
Tb practise.

Let US ase which of us can shoot beat

fH To express.

To express one's se^.
To make one's se^ understood.
To have the hahii.

To accustom.

To aeenstom one's self to something.
Children most be accustomed early to
labour.

To he accustomed to a thing,

I am accustomed to it.

I cannot ejqirees myself in Italian, for
lam not in the habit of gM^B^^ng

ObbedJte ai vostrl raaeatrl e noa

date loro mai diapiaoere.
Pagate dd che dovete, conaolate gf

infelid e fate del bene a quelli chc

vi hanno ol&sL
Amate Iddio ed il prossimo come

vol steasl.

SUhhidire {yhhidisco).
Ohhedire 3 {ohhedisco).
Consolare 1.

Offendere * (is conjugated Kke
prendere *) 2.

Amiamo o pratlchiamo sempre la
virth, e saremo felici in queata vita
e nelP altra.

Praticare L

Vediamo chi di noi tireri magUo.

Esprimere * 2 (past part. f#«
presso y pret. def. espressiy

Esprimersi.

Farsi capire.

Aver V ahitudint. Essere
soUio.

AwcTosare 1» or assuefare *
(like/are •).

AvvezzarsI a qualche coaa.

Bisogna awezsar presto i fiucinlU
al lavoro.

Esser awezzato (assuefatto) a

qualche cosa.
lo son awezzato (avvezzoi assa^

&tto).
Non posso eepTimermi bene in iu-
liano, perchd non ho T abitudinc
di parlare.

SBVBNTY-FIRST LJtSSON.

391

Voo ipMk properly.

To talk (converse).

To chaUer.

To prate.

A 'prattler.
A chatterer.
To practise.
J proctiee speaking.

To permit, to allow.
The permission.
I permit you to go thither.

Ella parla (vol parlate) propria-
mente.

Parlare 1, discorrere {dUcor
so, discorsi) 2.
C Cicaiare 1.
( ChiaecMerare 1, ciarlare 1.

Cianciare 1.

Un cicalone, un darlone
Ufi ciarlatore.
£sercitare 1.
Mi esercito a parlare.

Permettere* (like mettete*),
{ 11 permesso.
l La permissione.

Vi permetto dl andarvi.

Do good to the poor, have cothpassion
on the nnfortunate, and Qod will!
take care of the rest.

To do good to some mie.

To have compassion on some one.
Compassion.
Pity
The rest-

Fate del bene ai poveri .ed abbiate
compassione degl' infelici; Dio
nyxi cara del resto.

Far del bene a qualcuno

Aver compassione di qualcuno.
La compassione.
La pieti.
II testo.

If he comes tell him that I am in the

garden.
Ask the merchant, whether he can let

ine have the horse at the price which

I have offered him.

Se viene dltegli cli' io sono nel giar

dino.
Domandate ai mercante, se pud dar-

mi IKeavallo al prezio che gll he

ofierto.

THE ACCENTS.
There arc in Italian two accents :

I. The grave ( ' ), and

II. The acute (').

I. Thk Gbave Accsmt.
This ia put, I. On nouns in th'^ and lii Such nouns have the singular ane
plural alike, as :
Beauty, goodness, virtue, youth. | J?«tt^, hanJUl, viHik, gwctrUil.

3 Many Italian nouns in M derive from the Latin nouns in tat, as: autU^
chastity ; maesth^ msjesty. Such nouns in a that are unaccented, are variahk

d98 8BVSNTT*FIEST LBSSOlf.

These nouiu ended Ibnnerlf in ode, aU, vde, icle, and are sllll need thus m
poetijr.

2. On the third person singular of the preterite definite of rerbe wlioee flrsc
person ends in two Yowels, as ;

He loved, he believed, he heard. ( Am6, cred^ tntt

From omat, I loved ; eredti^ I believed ; uaidU, I heard.
But write without an accent : Ftfu«, he vanquished ; prut, he took ; ditdt^ he
fsve, from : vuin, I vanquished ; prtai, 1 took-; dUdi^ I gave, Ac.

3. On the first and third persons singidar of every verb in the future, ast
I sliall speak, he will speak. ParUrd, paHeri.

I shall beUeve, he will believe. Crederb, ender^

I shall feel, he wUl feel. Smtirb, aenUr^

4. To make a distinction between words alike in orthogmphf , but dififaml
in signification, such as :

Xid, U, there, and /a, the, her ; H, be, they.

Diif he gives, and da (the ablative), from.

IH, day, and di (the genitive), o£

SI (the affirmation), yes, so, and ti (the pronoun), one's seH

£, he or she is (the verb), and e (conjunction), and.

5. There are some other words wliich lAso have the grave accent, such «s :

PUtf more.
Gid, below.
Co9tl and co§ttif there.
Cot^ thus.
' Qui, already.
Ctd, that which.
OAe. When a ward, having the grave accent, is joined to another word, tlic
eonsonant of the latter must be doubled, and the accent taken o^ as :

IH and ctd joined to mi become dimmi, tell (thou) me j dammi, give (tboo)

me.
F^b and to, become/oroOo, I will do it
PUl and io^ make ptuiftwto, Ac

II. Tim AcuTJi Aocnrr (')•
This is seldom used in Italian. Some authors employ it :

1. On the letter i of words ending in to or to, whenever «o or ia are prononnced
in two distinct syllables, such m :

Folly, gallery. i PazzSa, galleria.

Desire, adieu. | DesSo, addio.

2. On words which have a double signification to avoid an ambiguoos
meaning, as :

Tenire^ to hold, aid Unertt tender.
A3fie6ra, again, and Aneora, an anchor.
NlUare, nectar, and ntUdrt, to clean, Ac.

in the plural, as : una vmto, a visit ; plural, U vUUe, the visits : grosto, grace I
plur. grasU, graces : Mqn^nxa, wisdom j plnr. tapUnze: xmpotta, a poet ; piur

SBy£NTT.FlRST LBS80N. 380

EXERCISES.
218.
Have patience, my dear friend, and be not sad ; for sadnear
altera (cambiare) nothing, and impatience makes bad worse {peg
giarare U male)* Be not afiraid of your creditors ; be sure thai
they will do you no harm. They will wait, if you cannot pay
them yet-— When will you pay me ^hat you owe me ? — ^As soon
as I have money I wiH pay all that you have advanced {anUcipare)
for me. I have not forgotten it, for I think of it (m penso) every
day. I am yeur debtor (U dehitore), and I shall never deny
(negare) it.— -What a beautifbl inkstand you have there ! pray lend
it me.— What do you wish to do with it ? — ^I will show it to my
sister.— Take it, but take care of it, and do not break it. — Do not
fear {Non tema di rnente). — ^Wkat do you want of my brother ?
— I want to borrow money of kim. — ^Borrow some of somebody
else {ad un aUro), — ^If he will not lend me any, I will borrow
some of somebody else. — You wiH do well. — ^Do not wish for
{desiderare) what you cannot have,- but be contented with what
Providence {proMenxa) has given you, and consider {eotisiderare)
that there are many men who have not what you have. — Life
being short {breve), let us endeavour to make it as agreeable
(gradevo^) as possible {quanUrpossiiUe). But let us also consider
that the abuse {Pabuso) of pleasure {dei piaceri) makes it bitter
{afnaro). — Have you done your exercises ?-— I could not do them,
because my brother was not at home. — ^You must not get your
exercises done by your brother, but you must do them yourself. —
What are you doing there ? — I am reading the book which you
lent me. — ^You are wrong in always reading it. — What am I to
do ? — ^Draw this landscape, and when you have drawn it, you
shall decline some substantives with adjectives.

219.
What must we do in order to be happy ? — ^Always love and
practise virtue, and you will be happy both in this life and in the
next. — Since {giacchi) we wish to be happy, let us do good to the
poor, and let us have compassion with the unfortunate ; let us
obey our masters, and never give them any trouble ; let us com

400 81V£NTY-PIR8T LSSSON.

fort the unfortunate, love our neigbboum a« ouraelvea^ and M
hate thoee (e wm odiamo ^[ueUi) that have offended us ; in short
(in una parola), let us always fulfil our duty, and God will take
oare of the rest. — My son, in order to be loved you must be Ubo-
rious {iahoriato) and good. Thou art accused {U mcatsmio) of
having been idle and negligent (negHgenie) in thy afl&drs. Tboa
knowest, ho.wever (perd)^ that thy brother has been punished for
having beea naughty. Being lately- {PaUro giomo) in town, I
received a letter from thy tutor, in which he strongly (moUo)
complained of thee. Do not weep (piangerel^) ; now go into tby
room, learn thy lesson, and be a good boy (Mvio), otherwise
{alinmenH) thou wilt get nothing for dinner.(i2a|vaiuo).— I shall
be 80 good, my dear father, that you will certainly (certamatU)
be satisfied with me. — ^Haa thtf little boy kept his word [tener
parobi) 1 — ^Not quite (iVion del tuUo) ; for after having said thai,
he went into his room, took his books, sat down at the table (n
mue al loeo&i), and fell asleep (M^addormenio). — ^* He is a veiy
good boy when he sleeps," said his fiither, seeing him some time
after.'

Good morning, Miss N. Ah! here are you at last (eccok
dOafine)^ I have been waiting for you with impatience. — Yon
will pardon (perdonare) me, my dear, I could not come sooner.—
Sit down (n aecanunodi), if you please (La prego). How is youi
mother ?*— She is better to-day than she was yesterday. — ^I ^
glad of it (ne tono conienla). — ^Were you at the ball yesterday I—
I was there.-^Were you much amused (dherUrsi) ?— Only so so
(mediocremenU). — ^At what o'clock did you return (rUomare)
home ? — At a quarter past eleven.

220
Have you been learning Italian long ? — No, Sir, I have been
learning it only these six months. — ^Is it possible ! you speak
tolerably well (passdhilmente bene) for so short a time (per sipoeo
ten^), — ^You jest (seherzare) ; I do not know much of it yet.—
Indeed, you speak it well already.—- Ithink (credo) you flattcrine
a little. — Not at all (nuQa affatto) ; you speak it properly (c<w-
ven«uo/mente).«-*In 'order to speak it properly one must know more
of it than I know (ehe non so io). You know enough of H tfi

8BYBNTY-SEC0ND LESSON. 401

make yourself understood. — ^I still make many faults. — ^That is
DothiDg (rum fa nuUa) ; you must not be bashful (timido) ; besides
(d*altronfle), you have made no &ults in all you have said just
now. — I &m still timid {timido) because I am afraid of being laughed
at (che si hefino di me). — They would be {lisognerehhe essere) very
unpolite to laugh at you. Who would be so unpolite as to laugh
at you ? Do you not know the proverb {U proverhio) ? — What
proverb ? — He who wishes to speak well must begin (deve camm*
dare) by speaking badly (dalparlar tnale). — ^Do you undef^land
all I am telling you ?-^I understand (intendert^) and comprehend
(capire*) it very well ; but I cannot yet express myself well in
Italian, because I am not in the habit of speaking it. — That will
come in time {col tempo). — ^I wish {desiderare) it with all my
heart.

Do you sometimes see my brother ? — ^I see him sometimes ;
when I met him the other day he complained of you. " If he
had behaved better, and had been more economical {economo)^*^
said he, <* he would have no debts {il dehito), and I would not
have been angry with him." — ^I begged him to have compassion
on you, telling him that you had npt even money enough, to buy
bread .•^" Tell him when you see him,", replied he to me, "that
notwithstanding his bad behaviour {la condoUa) towards me, I
pardon him. Tell him also," continued he, " that one must not
laugh at those {ch6 non Ueogna leffarn di eoloro) to whom one is
under obligations. Have the goodness to do this, and I shall be
much obliged to you (ten«ft>«tiRo)," added he in going away
(jaJlonianandon).

SEVENTY-SECOND LESSON.
Lezione setiantesima sectmda.

To stand up. I f Star in piedi. Stare sit.

To remain up. f Restar in pte&.

Will you permit me to go to the Vuol Ella permettermi d' endare rf
market 1 ' mercato?

403

SBVENIY-SKCONO LBSSOlf.

To kastcMf to make haste. Sbrigarei 1.

Mtke hute, and ratnni won. . Sbricateri e ritomaie prato.

Oo mnd tell him that I euinot come to- AniUte a dlrgtt che oggi non pooe

daj. I Tcnire.

CM*. A, Always put a before the Infinitive, preceded by a rerb of modoa.
The oo^jonctlon «iid» which in Bngllah foUowa the Tarba g* and emu, Is not
rendered.
He came and told us he could notl Venne a dlrci che non poten ?••

come. I nlre.

Oo and see your friends. | Andate a Tedere 1 rostri amid.

To weep, to cry,
fhe least blow makes him cry.

To frighten.
To he frightened, to startle.
rhe least thing frightens him (her).

Be «ot frightened.

Ti> he frightened at something.
What are you frightened at 7

At my azpenae.
At hIS) her expense.
At our expense.
At other people's expense.
That man lives at every body'B ex-

To depend.

Th«t depends upon clreumstancea.
That doeattat depend upon me.
It dependa upon him to d^llmt
O! ys% it depends upon him*

To astonish, to surprise.

To he astonished, to teonder.
7b he surprised at something.

I am surprised at it
An extraordinary thing happened,
which surprised eveicy body.

Piangere * ; p. part, pianto ;

pret. def. piansi.
II menomo (11 pih piccolo) colpolo
la piangere.

Spaventare 1, atterrire (iico).
Spaventarsi, atterrirsi.

La piii piccola (la minima) oosb Jp

(la) spaventa.
Non si spaventi. Non si atterrisci

Non vi atterrite.

Spaventarsi di qualche cota,
Dl che si spaventa (vi spaventate)1

AUe mie spese (or a mle q)ese).
AUe sue spese {or a sue spese).
AUe nostre spese {or a postre spcae).
All' altrui apese (or ad altmi qM«>-
duest' uomo viva alio spese di tnttL

Dipendere da.
duesto dipende daU^ circostanWi
disato non dipende da me.
Dipende da luidi far dd.
Oh I ri, dipende da lul.

( Stupire 3 (iseo).
I Sorprendere ♦ 2.

Stupirsi, mararigUarsi.

Essere maravigliato {iorpit^)

di qualche cosa.
Ne sono sorpreso (maravigliato).
Accadde una ooaa straordintri* ^

sorprese ognl pf rsona.

SBTBNTY-SSCOND LESSON.

4oa

To take place.

Maoy things hare pasaod which will

mupriae you.
Uaoy days will pass before that

A man came in who ajiked me how I

'Averbicgo.
Awerdre *, Aceadere.
Sopraggiugnere * {soprag*
giunio (sopraggiunsi),

Avrennero molte coee che La sor

prenderanno.
Molti giorni paaaeranno prima dj

cid.
Entrd un uomo ohe ml domandO

comeioateeai

Then, thtu^ consequently.
Therefore.
The other day.
Lately.

In a short time.
In.

Dunque, adunque.

Ecco perchi.

V altro giorno.
( Ultimamente, poco fa.
c Non d gran tempo» non ha guarl.

Fra poco.

Fra {tra) in.

06«. B. When speaking of time, fra expresses the epoch, and in the
duration. Ex.
He will arrive in a week.
It took him, a week to make this

journey.
He will have finished his studies in

three months.
He finished his stndiea in a year.
He lias applied himself particularly to

geometry.

He has a good many firiends.
Ton have a great deal of patience.
They have a great deal of money.
Ton have a great deal of courage.

To make a present of something \

to some one.

Mr. Lambertini wrote to me lately, that ;
his sisters would be here in a short {
time, and requested me to tell you
so ; you will then be able to see them,
and to give them the books which'
you have bought. They hope that |
yon will m^ke them a present of {
them. Their brother has assured I
me that they esteem you, without I
knowing you personally. I

Egli arriveri/ra otto giorni. '

Ha iatto questo viaggio in otto

giorni.
Egli avr& iatto i suoi studii fra tre

mesi.
Ha finito i suoi studii in un anno.
Ha fatto uno studio particolare deUa

geometria.

Ha molti amid.
Ella hamolta pazienza.
Hanno molto danaro.
Ella ha diolto coraggio.

Far regalo di qualche cosa a
qualcuno.

II Signor Lambertini ml scrisse 1*
altro giorno che le sue signore
socelle verrebbero qu! fra poco,'e
mi pregd di dirglielo. Potra
dunque vederle e dar loro i llbri
che ha comprati. Sperano che ne
fwtk loro regalo. II loro fratello
m' ha aasicurato che La stimano
senza conosoerla personalmeiite.

404 SEVBXTy.5KCOND LESSON.

7b wani amusement*
To gel or he tired. '

How could I get tired in your com-
pany?

He geu tired erery wbeit.

! Awioiarsi 1.

(Come potrel annolanni pweio dl
Come potrei annoiarmi nella di Ld
compagnia.
S* annoia dappertutto.

Agreeable, pleasing. i Oraderole, piaeevole.

I { Raaer il ben Tenuto (ii ben anlTato)

To be welcome. { ^^^ ^ j^„ ^^j^^j^ q^ j^^ arri^ta).

Be welcome. i Siate il ben Tennto (la ben Yenuta).

You are welcome erery where. I EUa ^ dappertutto il ben Tenuto.

EXERCISES.

221.
Have yoQ already seen my son ? — I have not seen him yet , tiow
is he ? — He is very well ; you will not be able to recognize bim,
for he has grown very tall {si e fatto moUo grande) in a short
time. — ^Why does that man give nothing to the poor (aipoveri) ?
— ^He is too avaricious (avaro) ; he does not wish to open his
purse for fear of losing his money. — What sort of weather is it 1
•—It is very warm ; it is long (^ un petzo) since we had any rain :
r believe we shall have a storm (un temporaky — It may be {pud
darsi), — The wind rises {alxarsi), it thunders already ; do you
hear it ? — ^Yes, I hear it, but the storm is still far off {moito Ion-
tamo)* — ^Not so far as you think ; see how it lightens.— Bless me
{Dio mio) ! what a shower {che pioggia diroUa) I If we go into
some filaco (m qualche sUo)y we shall be sheltered {al coperto)
from Ihe storm.^Let us go into that cottage then {dunque) ; ve
•hall be aheltered there from the wind and the rain. — Where
shall we go to now ? — Which road shall we take ? — ^The shortest
{corto) will be the best. — -Wc have too much sun, and I am^ still
very tired ; let us sit down under the shade of that tree. — Who
is that man who is sitting under the tree ? — ^I do not know him.
— It seems he {pare ch* ei) wishes to be alone {solo) ; for when
we ofier to approach him {gU andiamo viemo), he pretends to be
aUeep. — He is like your sister : she understands Italian ver}

SEVENTY-SECOND LESSON. 405

f^ell (henissinu) ; but when I begin to speak to her, she pretends
not to understand me. — ^You have promised me to speak to the
captain ; why have you not done so ? — ^I have not seea him yet ;
but as soon as I see him, I shall speak to him.

222.

Will you drink a cup of tea? — ^I thank you ; I do not like tea.

— ^Would you drink coffee ? — With pleasure (vofenttm), but I

have just drunk som'e. — Do you not get tired here ? — ^How could

I get tired in this agreeable (gradiia) society? — ^As to me, I

always want amusement {nd annoio sempre). — ^If you did as I do

{came sogHcfar io)^ you would not want amusement; for I listen

to all those who tell me any thing. In this manner I learn a

thousand agreeable things, and I have no time to get tired ; but

you do nothing of that kind (di tuOo do), that is the reason why

you want amusement. — ^I would do every thing, like (come) you,

if I had no reason (ntoUvo) to be sad. — ^Have you seen Mr. Lam*

bertini ? — ^I have seen him ; he told me that his sisters would be

here in a short time, and desired me {pregare) to tell you so.

When they have arrived you may give them the gold rings (V

aneUo) which you have bought ; they flatter themselves that you

will make them a present of them, for they love you without

knowing you personally. — ^Has my sister already written to you ?

— She has written to me ; I am going to answer her. Shall I

{dehho io) tell her that you are here ? — ^Tell her.; but do not tell

her that I am waiting for her impatiently {con imfaxtenxay — Why

have you not brotight your sister along with you ? — Which ?

-—The one you always bring, the youngest. — She did not wish

to go out, because she has the tooth*ache.— I am very sorry

for it, fi>r she is a very good girl. — ^How M is she t---She is

nearly fifteen years old. — She is very tall {grandiuima) for

her age {T eta). How old are you ? — ^I am twenty.two.— *Is

k possible ! I thought you weio hot yet twenty.

SEVENTY-THIRD LESSON.
Leziane setianiesima ierza.

He i< too fond of ma not to do it.
I go away not to diapleaae him (di»-

plaaae her). i

One must be a fool not to peroeive

that.

Mi ama troppo per non lario.

Me ne Tado per non dlnilanwul

(diq>iacerle).
Biaogna eaaere adoeoo per non ae-

corgerai di qneato (or Biaogna aver

pocoo aenno per non aoooigeni

di questo).

To dare.
To be able.
To know (can).
You continually aak me for money.

She doea not ceaae complaining.
1 do not daie to aak you for it.
She doea no\ dare to tell you so.
I cannot go tMther.
1 cannot tell yon.
TottcanattbelieTe it.

Ceuare 1.

Ardire {ardiseo^)^ osare.

Potere*.

Sapere*.
t Non ceasate mai dal chiedermi da-

naro.
t Deaaa non si ata dal lagnant

Non ardiaco chiedeigUelo.

Eaaa non ardlsce dlrglielo.

Non posao andarrt.
t Non lapreidirle, or diivi.
t Non potrobbe erederlo.

Betides, moreover.
Sendee thai.
Betides.
Beaidea what I have juat told you.

In olire^ di piu.
OUre do, or oUre di dd.
AUronde.

Oltic dd che Le (vi) ho detio oc
oia»
Tliere la no means of finding money Adeeao nfin vi i mezzo di troTir
now. danaro.

1 Not to confound the Terb ardire, to dare, with anUre, to bum, its preaenl
participle, first person plural of the present tense indicative, first and aecond
persons plural of the present tense subjunctive, and fiitt peraon plural of the
imperative, are aubatituted by the verb osore, as : Present participle, omndot
daring : firat person plural indicative, Nai tmamo, or noi abbiamo P ardire, we
dare ; first and second persons plural subjunctive, Otiamo, oeiate, or cA« not o^
biamo V ardire, che voi abbiaU P ardire, that we may dare, that you may dan
first person plural of the imperative, Chiamo, let us dare.

sbventy-thihd lbsson.

4(rt

Topiuh.

Along,

Along the road.
Along the street
Along the coaet.

Along the river.

All along.

All the year round.

To enable to.

To he able to.

To the ri|^t On the right aide or
hand.

To the left On the left aide or band.

Conid you not tell me which la the
neareet way to the city-gate 7

Go to the bottom of this street, and
when you are there, turn to the
right, and you will find a cross-way, !
which you must take. I

And then? I

Ton will then enter a broad street, ■
which will bring you to a great;
eqnare, where you wiU see a blind
alley.
You mast leave the Ulnd-alley on yonr
left, and paas under ttie arcade that
la near it
Then you must ask again.
An arcade.
The cross-way.
The blind-alley.
The shore, the bank.

Spingere* 2 (p. part, spinto;
pret. def. spinsi),

SLungo il (or a2).
Rasente ily accanto di.
Lungo la via (lunghesso U camlno).
Lungo la strada.
Lungo 11 lido,
c Lungo il fiume.
\ Lunghesso U fiume.
Pel corso di.
Pel corso dell' anno.

t ileitere nel case (in isUdo)
di.
C f Essere in istato {nel caeo)

I Essere capace.
( A destra. A mano destra.
I A diritta.

{ A sinistra. Dal lato manoo.
{ A manca.
Non potrebbe dirmi qual d la via

la pift corta per arrivar alia porta

della citt&7
Segua tutta quests strada, e-quando

sari all' estremit^ giri a destra;

troverii una capocroce, or on cro-

cicchio che traverser^
Epoil
Pol lentreri in una strada discreta-

mente large, che La mener4 eopra

una gran piazza dove vedr& un

angiporta
Lascieri 1\ angiporto dal lato man-

co, e passeri aotto gli archl che

sono accfiito.
In seguito domanderiu
tfnarco.
La capocroce.
L' angiporto.
La Bpiaggia, 11 Hdo.

To get married^
nuOrmony.

to

enter into 1 Maritarsij ammogSard,

406

SBVBIITT-THIED LB8801I.

To marry somebody.
To marry (io give m marriage).
My oontin, baring given his titter in

marriage, married Hiaa DeibL
Is your couain married 7

No, lie is still a bachelor.
To be a bachelor.

Embarrassed, paxtkdf ai a loss.

An embanrassmest, a puzsle.
Tou embarrass (pnzxle) me.
You puxile (perplex) me.

The marriage.
Me asks my sister In marriage.

The measure.

To take meamuea.

I shall take other 1

Goodness ! how rapidly time passes in
your society.

The compliment.
7on make me a compliment which I
do not know how to answer.

The fauU,
It is not my &ult.
Do not lay It to my charge.

To Jay to one^s charge.
Who can help Itl
Wliose fault Ultl
I cannot he^ it

The delay.
He does it without delay.

I must go (must be off).
Go away f Begone!

Sposare ^ualamo..
Maritare,
Mio cugino avendo maritato sua

sorella, sposd la signorina DelbL
II di Lei signor cugino d egU am

mogliatol
No, Signore, d ancor celibe.
Esserecelibe, or sc^wlo.

ImbaraxxaiOy impacdalo

Un imbarazxo, nn imbroglio.
fiUa m' imbaraza.
Ella mi mette nell' imbarano.
II matrimonio.

Domanda mia sorella in matrlmo-
nia

La misura.
Prendere della mijure.
Prendeid altre misura.

Dio! qnanto presto passail tempc
neOa di Lei sodeta (nella di Lei
compagnia).

II compUmento.

Mi la un complimento al quale non
so cfae rispondere.

RfaUo, la colpa,

Non i mia colpa.
^ Non me lo Imputi.
c Non imputatemelo.

Imputare a qualcuM.

Dichiaia colpa?

( Non so che farvl.
( Non saprei che &nrt

ora me ne

I La dllaxione, 11 ritardo, V induglo.
t Lo fa senza ritardo.
I C Sto per iltararmi (or
! < andrd).

^ Sto per andarmene via.
; f Fu|?ga! S<aippl!

f Andatevene! Se ne vada!

SfiVCNTY-THIRD . BSSON.

409

The jest, the joke.
Seriously, in good earnest.

You are jesting.

He cannot take a joke, is no joker.
To take a-joke.

To heg same one's jHirdon,
To pardon.

I beg your pardon.''

Pardon me.

The pardon.

Buffonare, hurlarey scherxare.

Lo scherzo, la burla. -

Senza burleXsuI serio).
( Ella burla (scherza).
i EUa si burla.
t Non regge alia celia.
t Reggere * alia celia (retto, recit).

Domandar scusa a qualaaio.
Perd&nare, fnr graziaf sa^
sare,

rBIiperdoni. La mi.scuai- Le do-
< mando scusa.

V Perdonatemi. Vi domando scusa.
C Vossignoria mi scusi.
c Mi scusi. Scusatemi.
II perdono, la scusa.

To advance.

The watch goes too fast (gains). '
That clock goea too fast (gains).

To retard.
The watch goes too slow (loses).
My watch has stopped.

To stop.

Avanzare. Andare avaanU

{innanxi),

L' oriuolo avanza (va avanti).
Quest' orologio anticipa.

Ritardare 1.

L' oriuolo ritarda.
J II mio oriuolo si i fermato.
I U mio oriuolo sta (or i) fennot.

Fermarsi 1.

Wheredid westopl
We left off at the fortieth lesson, page
one hundred and thirty-six.

t Dove ne eravamo 1
t Eravamo alia lezione quarantedhnii
paginacent( trentasei.

To yrind up a vnUch,
To reguUUe a watch.

Voor watch is twenty minutes too
last, and mine a quarter of an hour
too slow.

Caricare un oriuolo^
Regolare un oriuolo (mettere a
segno un oriuolo).

II di Lei oduolo avanza venti ml-
outi, e 11 mio ritarda un quarto d*

18

410

SRVINTT-THIED LKSSON.

ItwIUttfiketwilTe.

Hm it alrMdy ttnick tweWe 1
It has tlretdy stnick three.

To Strike.

On condition, or prorided.

I will lend yon money, provided you
will heiieeforth be more eoonomical
than you have hitherto been.

Heraafter, for the futnre, henceforth.

Theftitvre.
EoonomicaL

To lenonnce gambling.
TofiUow advice {cmtn»eJ).\

Ton look ao melancholy.

Adien, fiurewell.

God be .with yon, good bye.
Till I aee yon agalif.
I hope to aee yoa again aoon;

( Sta per •oonare meno .

c Meuo giomo auoneril or on.
Son gii inonate le dodid 1 '
Le tre aond gii aonate.

Suonare 1. BaUere 2.

( A oondixione, aotto eonditioiie.

i Col patto.

Vi preaterft del danaro, a eondlilo*

ne che aarete d* or ionansl p(&

economo che non aiete stato aino

adesao (or che non lo foate finoia).

D* or innanil, d* oggji In avanti, in

awenire, ndP aTvealn.
L' awenire (mot.), 11 futnro.
Economo, eoonomico, riaparmlaata
{ Rinunciare al giuooo.
i Abbandonare il gtoooo. *

Seguire tm cansigUo {un pa-

rere).
EUa ha V aapetto cqA i
Addlo.

c Al plaeero di
i A rivederla.

EXERCISES.

223.

iVhy does my sister make no progress ?— She would make tome
if she were as assiduous as yoU. — ^You flatter me. — ^Not at all
(menfe affatto) ; I assure you that I should be highly satisfied {con^
Imltmmo), if all my pupils worked (Hudiare) like you. — Why do
y«a not go out lo-day ? — ^I would go out, if it wete fine weather.
— Shall I have the pleasure of seeing you to-mottow I— If you
wish it I will come. — Shall I stiH be here when ytm arrive {al di
Lei ritomo) ? — Will you have occasion (occasume) to go to town
this evening ?-^l do not -know, but I would go now, if I had an
opportunity (una buona occo^tontf). —>You would not have so mach
.pleasure, antl you would not bo so happy, if you had npt frienda

aBVBNY-THIRD LSSSON. 411

and book8.*-Man (P tiomo) would not ezperienoe (pravtart) so
much misery in his career {ia earriera)^ and he would not be so
unhappy, were he not so blinrtl (cfeco), — ^You would not have that
insensibility (quesla insensiMUd) towards the {pei) poor, and you
•would not be so deaf {sordo) to their supplications (aSe loro preg-
hiere)j if you had been yourself in misery for some time, (ijualehe
tempo), — ^You would not say that if you knpw me well, — Why
has your sister not done her. ezevcises ?i — She would have done
them if she had not been prevented.— If you worked more, slid
spoke oftener, you would speak better.— I assure you. Sir, that I
should learn better, if I had more time. — ^I do not complain of you,
but of your sister.— You would have no reason {Non avrehhe luo-
go) to complain of her, had she had time to do what you gave her
to do. — Would you be sorry (spiaeere^ad una) if your mother
were to arrive to-day 1 — ^I should not be sorry for it.-^Would
your sister be sorry if she were rich ? — She would «ot be sorry
fcr it. — Where were you when your sister went out ? — I was in
my room% — She, wished she had known it (EUa vorrehht averJo
tapulo) ; for, had she known it,, she would have called you in
order to take you along with her to the opera.— They say that
the house of our neighbour has been burnt down {std staia aibhru-
etoto).- Did you know it ? — ^I was quite ignorant of (ignoravo m-
Ueramente eke) his house being on fire {ilfuoco foa'se aUa eua
eaea) ; for had I known it, I would have run to his assistance (m
wo aiiUo). — ^What has my brother told you ? — ^He has told me
that he would be the happiest man in the world (cle/fiumdd), if he
knew th^ Italian language, the finest of all languages.

224.

I should like to know {vorret pur sapere) why I cannot speidk as
well as you. — I will tell you : if you did asl do you would apeak
well. You would speak as well as I, if yon were not baAfol
(timido). But if you had studied your lessons more carefully
(megUo), yoa would not be afraid to speak ; for, in order to speak
well one must know» and it is very natural (molio naturale) that he
who does not know wcV what he has learnt, should be (svhj.) timid.
You would not be so timid as you are, if you were suce to make
00 mistakes (ehagU).

412 aBVSirTY-THIKD LBSSOH.

I oome to wish you a good morning. — You are very kind (a
hUtssmo). — ^Would you do me a favour ? — ^Tell me {Dieondy or m
dice) what you wanty for I would do any thing to oblige you {per
renderk servigw), — ^I want five hundred crowns, and I beg you to
lend them to me. — ^I will return them to you as soon as I have
received my money. — ^You would oblige me much {rendere qwl
euno ohbUgaio)^ if you would render me this, service. — I would do
it with all my heart (dituUocuore)^ if I could ; but having lost all
my money, it is impossible ht me (mt e mpassibile) to render you
this service. — May I ask you for (aterei domandarle) a little water ?
— ^What do you want water for ?— -Because I wish (jperchi vorrd)
to wash my hoftids.— If you would also give me a towel to wipe
my hands after having washed them, I should be much obliged
to you {Le tarei ienutissmo. — ^Why have your brothers sold their
old horse- 1 — ^They would not have got rid of it, if they had not got
a better. — Why did not your sistef get a better carriage ? — If she
had got rid of her old carriage, she would have got a better. —
Would you execute (fare*) a commission for me ? — ^With much
pleasure. — ^If the merchant would be satisfied with the sum which
I offered for the horse, I would buy it. — I am sure that he would
besatisfied, if you would add (aggiungervi) a few czx>wns more.
— If I was sure of that I would add a few crowns more. — Children
(ragOtzi miei) ! have you done your task I — ^We must be ill {hi-
sognerebbe che fossimo ammalaii) not to do it. — ^Is this wine suffi-
cient for you (Le hatla, — )? — It would be sufficient for me if I
was not very thirsty. — If your sisters have done their tasks (U hr
dof>ere)y why do they hide themselves*? — ^They would not hide
themselves, if they did not fear to be seen by their {daUa lor)
governess (maestra), who would scold them for having gone a
walking without telling her {senza dirU nuZZa).

226.

What o'clock is it ? — ^It is half-past one. — ^You say it is half-
fast one, and by my watch {al mio ariuolo) it is but half-past
twelve. — ^Ifwill soon strtke two.' — Pardon me, it has %et struck
one. — ^I assure you it is fiVe-and-twenty minutes past one, for my
watch goes very well. — ^Bless me ! how rapidly time passes in
your society. You make me a compliment which I do not knoii

SXySNTT-FOURTH LES90N. 41d

bow to answer. Have you bought yonr watch in Paris ?»>I have
not* bought it, my uncle has made me a present of it. — What has
that woman intrusted you with ? — She has intrusted me with the
secret of a great count who is in great embarrassment about the
marriage (a cagione del mairwumio) of one of his daughters. —
Does any one ask her {La domandaforse qualcuno) in marriage ?
— The man who asks her in marriage is a nobleman of the
neighbourhood {la vicinanza). — Is he rich ? — ^No, he is a poor
devil, (t7 diavoh) who has not a sou {un quaittino), — ^You say you
have no friends among your school- fellows {il condiscepolo) } but
is it not your fault ? You have spoken ill (^ar/are) of them, and
they have not offended you. Believe me, he who has ne friends
deserves to {men/are di) have none.

226. '

A Dialogue {Dial4)go) between a Tailor and his Journeyman
{Ugarzone).

Charles {Carlo)^ have you taken the clothes to the CJount of
{deUa) Torre ? — Xes, Sir, I have taken them to him. — What did
he say ? — Nothing but {se non) that he had a great mind to give
me a box on the ear (uno schictff'o)^ because* I had not brought
them sooner. — What did you answer him ? — Sir, said I, I do not
understand {non tollero) that joke : pay me what you owe me ;
and if you do not do so instantly, I shall take other measures!
Scarcely had I said that, when he put his hanci lO his sword {eke
miee mano alia spada), and I ran away {prendere* lajitgay

SEVENTY-POURTH LESSON.
Lezione settantesima quarta.

To last {Ufwear well). Durare 1.

That cloth wiU wear well. I dueato panno durerd molto.

How long has that coat lasted jrou 7 { Quanto tempo Le ha dnrato quest

Sbitol «

414

UVBNty-FOUETH LS8901I.

Tom^Kkmg.

Td ew]r body*t Uklag.

Ifobody etn do any thing to hit
liking.

A mio grade (a mw gemoy m
Tpdomodoy,

A gfBdo di tuttL
r Noa 1^ va niento a genio.
< Non al pud hi nulla a auo grade
\ (a mode luo).

A boarding-houae. >

A boarding-achool. )

To kwp a boarding- houflo:

To board with any on^ or any where.

Unapenaione.

Tanere penaione, tenere a dbniBa.
.« Eaaere in penaione di, eaaeru a doi-
3 xlna.
C Metterai in penaione a.

Toexckam.
To make uneagy.
To get or ^010 uneasy.
To be uneaay.
Why do you ^t (are you uneaay) 7
I do not Iret (I am not uneaay).
That newa majcea me uneaay.
I am uneaay at not reoelTing any

She la uneaay about that afiair..
Dp not be uneaay.
Quiet

Toqidei.
Compoae youraelt

Esclamare 1.
Liftdeiare 1.
InquietarH,

Eaaer inquieto (/em, Inquieta).
Perchd mai a* inquieta 1
Non m' inquieto.
dueata nuova m' Inquieta.
Bono inquieto di non rloevera nuinpo.

fc inqulettiau queoto aflim.
Non 0* Inquieti.
TranquiUOi qnleto.

To aJier, to change.
That man haa altered agreat deal
laawhiuL

To he of use.
Of what uae ia that to you 1
That la of no uae to me.
Of what uae la that to your brother?
It la of no use to him.
Of what uae ia that aticic to yon ?
I uae it to beat my doga
Of what uae ia that horae to yotn-
brother)

TranquUIare 1.
Si tranqullll (tranquUlateTi).

Cambiare 1.

dueaf uomo ha molto cambfato da
che non V lio Tedtto.

Servtre 3.
t A che Le aenre (▼! aerre) ddl
t Non mi aarre a nlente.
t A che aeme cid al dl Lei fiateUol
t Non gli aenre a nlente.
t A che Le aenre queato baatonel •
t Mi aerre per batteiei miei canL
t A che aenre queato cavallo al dl Ld

fmteUo?

SBVENTY-FOUKTH I^SSOM.

415

He uses U to carry hit TegetaUea to

the 4narket.
Of what 1286 are those bottles to your

hmdlordl
They serve him to put his wine in.

To Hand instead^ to he as.
I use my gun as a stick.
This hole serves hfan as a house.
He used his cravat as a nightcap^

To avail.
What avails it to yon to cry 1
It avails me nothing.

Opposite to.

Opposite that house.
Opposite the garden.

Opposite the church.

Opposite to me.
Hight opposite.
He lives opposite the castle.
I live opposite the king's library.

To get hold ot >

To take jiossession o£ >
To witness. >

To show. >

To give evidence against some one.
He lias shown a great deal of friend-
ship to me.
To turn some one Into ridicule.
To become ridiculous.
To make one^s self ridiculous.

To he horthm
Where were you bom 1
I was bom in this country.
Where was your slater bom 1
0he was bom in the United States of
North America.

t G.i serve a porter i suoi Jsgwni a*

mercato.
t A che servono quests bottiglie al di

Leilocandierel
t Gli servono per mettervi' U suo

vino.

Servire di.
t II mio schioppo mi serve di bastone.
t Questo buco gU serve di case,
t La sua cravatta gU ha servito di

berretta da notte (di cuflla da

notte).

Servire {di before inf.).
t A %he Le serve di piangers «
t Non mi serve a nulla.

i IHrimpeUo a, m faccia a.
( Coniro a (di), di cotUro a.

Dirimpetto a quests case.

Dirimpetto algiardino.

In faccia (dirimpetto, di contro) alia

chiesa.
Dirimpetto a me.
Propiio in faccia.
Abita in faccia al castello. .
Abito in faccia alia biblioteca reale.

Impadronlrsi di.

Attestare 1, testimoniare 1, dimosi

trare 1.
Testimoniare contro qualcuno.
Mi ha dimostrato molta amidiia.

Porre in ridicolo qualcuno
Divenir ridicolo.
Rendersi ridicolo.

Esser naio,
t Dove d Ella nata 7
t €ono nato in questo paese.
t Dove d nata la di Lei sorsllal
t £ nata negli Stati-UnAti detf Am»
rica settentrionale.

416 SEVBNTY*FOURTH LESSON.

Whof wen your brothers bom? ; t Ore son nati 1 di Lei frmtaUlf

Thejr were born in Italy. I I Son nati in Italia.

The boarder.

The pouch.

llcarniere.

A pillow.

Un guandale, pinmaoda

Down.

Lapdttxia.

EXERCISES.
227.

What are you astonished at ? — I am astonished to find you still
in bed. — If you knew how (quanio) sick I am, you would not be
astonished. — Has it already struck twelve ? — ^Yes, madam, it is
already half-past twelve. — ^Is it so late ? Is it possible? — ^Tbat is
not late, it is still early. — ^Does your watch go well ? — ^No, Miss
N., it is a quarter of an. hour too fast. — And mine is half an hour
too slow.*— Perhaps it has stopped ? — In fact, you are right. — ^Is it
wound up ? — ^It is wound upj and yet (pure) it does not go. — ^Do
you hear ? it is striking one o'clock (swma V ora). — ^Then I will
regulate my watch and go home. — ^Pray {di graxia) stay a little
longer ( La resti ancor un poco) f-*I cannot, for we dine precisely
at one o'clock. — Adieu, then, till I see you again.-^What is the
matter with you, my dear friesd ? Why do you look so melan-
choly ? — Nothing ails me {turn ho mente). — Are you in any
trouble (Avresti a caso ^[ualche dispiacere) ? — I have nothing, and
even less than nothing, for I have not a penny (un quaitrino), and
owe a great deal to my creditors : am I not very unhappy ? —
When a man is well and has friends he is not unhappy. —
Dare I ask you a favour ? — ^What do you wish ? — ^Have the good-
ness to lend me fifly crowns. — ^I will lend them you with all my
heart, but on condition that you wiH renounce gambling (rmtm-
tmre algiuoco), and be more economical than you have hitherto
been. — ^I see now {Ora redo), that you are my friend, and I love
you too much not to follow your advice.— John (Giooanm)! —
What is your pleasuroiSir? — Bring some wine. — Presently, Sir.
— ^Menico ! — ^Madam ? — Make the fire (del fuoco). — The maid-
•ervant has made it already. — Bring me some paper, pens, and
ink. Bring me also ^r>me sand (deUu sahhia) or blotting.pfltf)ei

SEVENTY-fOUKTH LESSON. 417

(delia carta sugatUe o succhia), sealing-wax {della cera lacca), and
a light («n lume). — Go and tell my sister not to wait for me, ana
be back again (di ritomo) at twelve o'clock in order to carry my
letters to the post {la posta). — Very well (benissimo)^ Madam.

228.

Sir, may I (arcUro io) ask where the Eaxl of B. lives ? — ^He
lives near the castle on the ^other side of the river. — Could you
tell me which road I must {dehba) take to go thither ? — ^You must
go (^egua) along the shore, and you will oome to a little street
(qtuindo sard all' esiremUd prenda una corUradella) on the right,
which will lead you straight (cUretiamerUe) tq his house. It is a
fine house, you will find it easily. — I thank you, Sir. — Does Count
N. live here ? — ^Yes, Sir, walk in {favorUca di erUrare)^ if you
please.— Is the Count at home? I wish to have the -honour
(P onore) to sp^ak to him.^Tes, Sir, he is at home ; whom shall
I have the honour to announce (annunziare)! — ^I am from 3.,
and my name is {eMamarsi) F.

Which is the shortest {corto) way to the arsenal (T arsendle) ?
— Gro down {segua) this street, and when you oome to the bottom
{sard air esiremUd)^ turn to the left, and take the cross^way
(traverd una — che traverserd) ; you will then enter into a rather
narrow {siretto) street, which will lead you to a great square {la
piazza), where you will see a blind alley. — Through ( per) which
I must pass ? — No, for there is no outlet {P uscita). You must
leave it on the right, and pass under the arcade which is near it.
— ^And then ? — ^And then you myst inquire further. — ^I am very
much obliged {ienutissimo) to you. — ^Do not mention it {Non ne
vol la pena). — ^Are you able to translate an English letter into
Italian ? — ^I am. — Who has taught you ? — My Italian master haa
enabled me to do it. (See end of Lesson XXIV.)

18»

8EVBNTY-PIFTH LESSON.
litzume settaniesima quinia.

To hM-ngki c/.

The sight
I wetr ■peetedes becaiue my tight is

bad (or beektuse I have a bad sight).
I am Dear*sighted.
The ship is so fitf off that we shall '

soon lose sight of it. <

I have lost sight of that.
As it Is long since I was in England,
I have kwt sight of your brother.

As it is long since I hare read any
Italian, I have lost sight of lt.i

' f Perdere di vuta.
\ Dileguargi dagUocchi {daUa

vista.)
f Ltudare andare daUc

sguardQ {dagU sguardij ddl

guardo).

La vista.

Porto degli occhlali, perchd ho cat-

Uva vista,
t Ho la vista oorta.
t II bastimento ^ eoA lontano che si

dilegneri qtianto prima dalla noe-

tia vista (dai nostri oochi, del noa-

trosgnaido).
t Non 80 pHi nulla dkdd.
tSicoome d molto tempo che non

Bono stato in Inghllterra, ho per-

dutodivUtalldl Lei fratello.
t Come d longo tempo che non ho

letto V Italiano, P ho dimenticato

(non lo 80 plh).

You oiigft< or thmdd do that* \

Ofrff. A. Oi|f/U and aftoicM ara rendered
verb datere; to be obliged, to owe.

He 011^ not to qieak thus to his

ftther.
We oMgU to go thither earlier.

lliey thoidd listen to what you say.

Vou ahf&uld pay mote attention to what
I say.

You ought to haoe done that

He should hfoo^ managed the thing bet-
ter than he has done.

Vou skould ha9€ managed the thing
differently.

AwrtUs&r eld.

Into Italian by the oondiHonalB.of the

E^ non doonbU parlar ooiS a ano

padre,
Dovrtmmo andarvl pih per tempo

(plh di buon' ora).
Dovrebbero ascoltare cid che B3te

dice.
Do^rtHe hr plh attenilOBe (star pift

attento) a cid che dico.
Avrebbe doouio far cid.
Egli aerebbe doouto regolarai m^gflc

che non ha fiitto.
Avrebbe dovtUo pnBodersi in mode

diverso (or maneggiare la ooaa).

SSVENTT-FI9TH LBSSON.

4id

Tb»y oug^ to haoe n^aoagedlli* thing

Ml did.
We mi^ to have managed it diffetcntly

from what they did.

Von have managed the thing badly.

To bid or to wish.
I bid you good morning. >

I wiah yon a.good morning. >

I wiah you a good journey.

To play a game at billiards.

To play upon the flute.

A fall.
To have a fall.
A atay, a aojoum.
To make'a stay.
Do you intend to make a long stay in

the towBl
I do not intend to make a long stay
in it.

-t Aprthbero tUmUo agire in tal fiw*
cenda come mi vi son prsso io.

t Avranmo dontio oondurd in tal iur
cenda diTcrsamente di quello ens
hanno fatto.
Vi siete mal preso.

Augurare 1.
Le auguro il buon giomo

XXVI.).
Le augure un buon vlaggio

Far una partita al bigllaxdo (Las-
son LI.).

Suonare U flauto (Lesson LL)>

Una cadutiu
t Far una caduta.

Un soggiorno.

Far un soggiorno.

Pensa Ella fieur un lungo soggiorno
nellacittA?

Non penso farri un lungo sog-
giorno

To propose (meaning to intend).

1 propose going on that journey.
I propose (intend) joining a hunting
pwrty.

To suspect, to guess.
I suspect what he has done.
He does not suspect what is going to
happen to him.

To think of some one or of
something.
Of whom do you think Y
Of what do you think?

\

To turn upon.
To he the question.
It is the question it turns upon.
The qoesUon is not pleasure, but your
improTement.

i Far propostto )
Mi pTopongo di far questo viagglo.
Hi propongo d' andare ad una par
tita di caecia.

SospeUare 1.
Sospetlo cid cbe ha iatto.
Non sospetta cid ehe or ora gll to*

cadrA (gli arriteiAy.

Pensare a giiafouno, o a qual*
che cosa.
A ehi pensa EUa?
A che pensa Ella?

TraUarsidi.

Si tratta di.

Non si tratta del Tostro placerei i
dei voetrl progress!.

420

SKVENTT-FIFTH iBSSON.

Toa play, Sir{ bat playing is not the

thing, but studying.
Whst is going onl
Tfyd question is what we shall do to

pass the time agreeably.

GiuDcate, Slgnore ; ma Bon si tnlli
di giuoeare, si tzmtta di stndiava.

DicheaitntUi

Si tratta di sapera ci5 che tanmo
per passar il ten do piaoeYoimente.

On purpose.

i beg your pardon, I haye not done it
on purpose.

SApposta.
A heUaposla.

Le domando scusa, non ' ho &tto
apposu (a bella posts).

To hold one*s tongue.

To Mp speakings to he silent.

Tacere*; past part, tachiio ;
pret. def. tacqtd.

Ob§. B. Five irregular verbs hare their pei/elfo remoio in c^im, via.

InJbiUiM,

PrtLDif.

PiuiPaH.

To please, PiacSre*.

Piacqul, •

piadnto.

To be aituated, Giacftre*.

Oiacqui,

giaduto.

To be silent, Taoftra*.

Tacqui,

taciuto.

To hurt, Nu5cere».

Nocqui,

noduto.

To be bom, Niseere*.

Nacqui,

nato.

Do yon hold your tongue!

Tkcetel

I hold my tongue.

Taccio.

He holds his tongue.

Tace.

We are silent.

Tacciamo.

They are silent.

Tacdono.

After speaking half an hour, he held

Dopo aver

parlato

*meai* cm

his tongue.

que.

EXER

.CISES.

2

20.

Why does your mother fret ?-^he frets at receiving no news
from her son, who is with the army. — She need not be uneasy
about him, for whenever he gets into a scrape he knows how to
get out of it again. Last summer, when we were a hunting toge-
ther (ifisieme), night grew upon us (la notte ci sorptest) at least
ten leagues {la lego) from our country-seat {la casa di campagna).

SBVENTY-FIFTH LESSON. 421

— Well {Ebbene)t where cUd you pass the night? — ^1 was very
uneasy at first (da principim)^ but your brother not in the least
{non — affatto) ; on the contrary, he tranquillized me, so that I lost
my uneasiness. We found at last a peasant's hut, where we
passed the night. Here (m) I had an opportunity of seeing how
oleTer your brother is. A few benches and a truss of straw {un
fasUUo di paglia) served him to make a comfortable bed ; he
used a bottle as a candlestick, our pouches served us as' a pillow,
and our cravats as nightcaps. When we awoke in the morning
we were as fresh and healthy {sanq) as if we had slept on down '
and silk.

A candidate {un caruUdato) petitioned (domandare a) the king
of Prussia for an employment {un impiego). This prince asked
hioi where he was born. *' I was born at Berlin,'^ answered he.
« Begone," said the monarch {ilmonarca) "ell the men of Berlin
(i7 berUnese) are good for nothing." ** I beg your majesty's {ia
maesta) pardon," replied the candidate, " there are some good
ones, and I know two." " Which are those two ?" asked the
king. " The first," replied the candidate, " b your majesty, and
I am the second." The king could not help laughing {non pati
astenersi dal ridere) at this answer {la rispogta), and granted the
request {aecordare una domanda).

230.
A thief having one day entered a boarding-house stole three
cloaks {il manteUo). In going away he was met by one of the
boarders who had a fine laced {gdlUnaio) cloak. Seeing so many
cloaks, he asked the man where he had taken them. The thief
answered boldly {freddamenle) that they belonged to three gen-
tlemen of the house who had given them to be cleaned {dapuUre).
" Then you must also clean mine, for it is very much in need' of
it {aveme gran hisogno)" said the boarder ; ** but," added he,
^'you must return it to me at three o'clock." "I shall not fail
(mancare), Sir," answered the thief, as he carried off {portando
via) the four cloaks with which he has not yet returned {eke non
ha ancora riportati), — ^You are singing {caniare)^ gentlemen, but
it is not a time for {non si iraita di) singing : yo.u ought to be
silent, and to listen to what you are told. — We are at a loss. —

432 sgvBicTY-FirrH lsssor.

What are yoy at a loos about ? — ^I am gcnng to tell you : the
question is with us how we shall pass our lime agreeably (fielo-
menie). — ^Play a game at billiards or at chess. — ^We have pro-
posed joioing a hunting-party ; do you go with us (d EUa dei
nastri) ? — I cannot, for I have not done my task yet ; and if I ne-
gleet it, my master will soold me.— Every one according to his
liking i if you like staying at home better than goii^ a hunting
{ehe lum d' andare aUa auda) we cannot hinder you. — ^Does Mr.
B. go with us ? — ^Perhaps. — ^I should not like to go with him, ibr
he is too great a talker {trappo ctdr&m«), excepting that {da queBo
tn fum) he is an honest man. "^

What is the matter with you? you look' angry. — ^I have reason
to be {aver moUoo d* euere) angry, for there is no means of get*
ting money now. — ^Have you been to Mr. A's.— I have been to
his house ; but there is no possibility (turn c' ^ mexxo) of borrow,
ing from him.— -I suspected (pentare) that he would not lend me
any, that is the reason why I did not wish to ask hikn, and had
jou not told me to do so, I should not have subjected myself {nan
mi sart9 ^spr^lo) to a refusal (ilr^mio).

FOURTH MONTH.
Quarto me$e.

SEVENTY. SIXTH LESSON.
Leziane settantesima sesta.

Towards.

Be oomes towards me.

He hae behaved very well towards
me.

We moat alwaya behave weU towards
every body.

The bdiavioar of others is but an echo
of onr own. If we behave well to-
wards them, they will also behave
well towards us; bat if we nsethem
iD, we must not expect better from
them.

To treat ot to use somebody weU*

To use somebody iU.

As you have always .used me well, I
will not use yon ilL

As he has always need me well, I
have always used him In the same

To delay {fo tarry).

Do not be long before you return.
I shall not be long before I return.

Verso,
y iene verso dl me.
Si d condotto benisslmo verso dl

me.
Bisogna oondursi sempre bene verso

ditntti.
La condotta degfi altri non d che un
eoo della nostra. Se ci condu-
ciamo bene verso dl loro, si oon-
durranno pur bene verso dl noi;
ma se trattiamo male eon essia
non dobbiamo aspettare meglio da
loro.
( f Comportarsi ( bene eon
( f TraUare (usare) I fuakuno,
{^ Comportarsi imah con
\ f Trattare (usare) \ fuaJcuno,
t Come EUa si d sempre comportata
bene con me, non mi oomporteiO
male con Let
t Come sP d sempre comportato bene
meco, mi sono sempre comportato
. deUa stessa maniera con lui.

> Tardare 1 (a l>efore Inf.).

Non tardate a rltomare.
Non tarderd a rltomare.

J

424

SEVfiXTY SIXTH LBSSOlf.

To long for or io,

1 long to Me my brother.

He longs to recelre hit money.

Wo long for dinner, becaase we tre

▼ery hungry.
They long to deep, became ihey are

tired
Oh, how much I long that some one

may join me here!

' {Desiderare l.«
f Esser impadenU di (tar

dor t
' f Non veder P ora dL

Sono impadente di yedere mio fins*

teUo.
K impasiente di rioerera Q sno da-

naro. (Non vede 1' oia di licerwe

il suo danaro.)
Siamo impazienti di pranxareb

percbd abbiamo molto fame.
Deaiderano dl dormite, perchd sono

stanchL
Oh! quanto mi tarda ch' aM qui

ginnga t (jirt». tfike mdff.)

To he at one^s ease. )
To he eomforidble. \ '

To he uncomfortable*
I am very much at my ease upon this

Yom are uncomfortable upon your
(Mr.

Whatcanthatbe?

We are uncomfortable in that board-
ing-house.

Essere agiaio (comodo).

SEssere mal comodo.
Non essere agiaio.
Sono molto comedo su questa ts-

dia.
Ella d mal oomodo sulla di Ld
sedia.
t ChepudesQcrel
Siamo mal oomodi in questa pen-
sione.

That man is well off, for he has plenty Quest* uomo d agiato, perchd ha

of money. i molto danaro.

That man Is badly ofi; for he ia poor. ' Queat* uomo non d agiato, pmhd d

I povero.

To make one^s self comfortable.
Make yourself comfortable.

To he uncomfortable.
To inconvenience one's self. \
To put one's self oulcfthe>
way. }

Do not put yourself out of the way.

That roan never inconveniences him-
self; he never does it for any body.

Can you, without pntting yourself to
inconvenience, lend me your gun 7

f Accomodarsi.
La si sccomodi.

Essere incomodo.

Incomodarsi.

Non La si incomodl.

Quest' uomo non s* incomoda mail

non 8* incomoda mai per alcuno.
Pud Ella, senza incomodarsi, prea

tarmi 11 di Lei fucUe?

SEVENTY-SIXTH LESSON.

426

7& make entreaties.

To beg with entreaty,

I employed every kind of entreaty to t
engage him to it. !

To solicit^ to presBy to suCy to
entreat.

Far istanze.

Pregarc con istanza,

Ne 1' ho loUecitato con tutte
istanxe possibili.

SoUecitare 1.

Here and there.
Now and then.

From time to time.

Indifferently (good or bad).
I have made my composition tolerably
well.

Qua e U.

i Di distanza in distanza.
! Di tanto in tantor.
\ Di quando in quando.
! Di tempo in tempo.

Bene o male.

Bene o male ho fiitto la mia compo-
aizione.

To postpone^ to put off.
Let U8 put that ofi* until to-morrow.
Let lis put off that lesson until another
time.

To impart something to some one.

Have you imparted that to your

father?
I have imparted it to him.

iiimettere* a, differire (isco).
Rimettiamo questo a domani.
Rimettiamo questa lezione ad.un'
altra volta.

f Far parola di qualche ea$a a
quaicuno.

Ha EUa fatto parola di dd'al di Lei

padrp 1
Gliene ho fatto parola.

In vain.
In vain. I looked all around,. I saw

neither man nor house:
least sign of settlement

not the

A dwelling, habitation, settlement.
In vain I speak, for you do not listen

to me.
In vain I do my best, I cannot do any

thing to his liking.
Vou may say what you please, nobody

will believe you.
ft is in vain that they earn money,'j

they will never be rich.
VVc search in vain ; for what we have

lost we cannot find.

Invano.

lo avea bel guardare tutto all* intor-
no, io non vedeva nd uomini nd
case : non- la minima apparenza d'
abitazione.

Un' abitazione.

Ho bel parlare, Ella non m' ascolta.

Ho bel fare quanto so di meglio, non

posso &r niente a suo grade.
Ha bel dire, nessuno Le credera.

Invano si gtiaddgnan danaro, nOn

saranno mai ricchi.
Cerchiarao invano, non potrem mai

troyare ciu ch' abbiamo perduto.

496

8BVSNTT.8UTR LESSOR.

TosabOe.

I hftTe tiM honour to bid yoa adieu.
Present my eomplimente to Mm (to

her).
Remember me to blra (to he^).

Prey pieeeat my oompUmeiOa to your

Remember me (present my compli-
ments) to him (to her).

IshallnotfriL

ffii^^ oomott*

Salutare 1.

Ho r onoie di selntazla.

OU Oe), presento i
mentt

GU (le) dice molte eoee de mia
parte.

La prego di fiur imiei eompUmentI
alb di Lei signora sorella.

GU (le) preeend (effim) le mie dTtlti
(1 miel umiU riepetti), (dvUtlL ob-
solete).

Non mancherik

The present (the present time or Ilpresente.

0.

The past.
Thefoture.
The loss of time.
Eiyoy ail the pleasures that virtue per-
mits.

II passato.

L' ovtenlre, il futoio.
La perdita di tempo.
Goda (godete) di tntti i piaeeri ehe
la Tirtii permette.

EXERCISES.

281. •

I suspected (penman) that you would be thirsty, and that your
sister would be hungry ; that is the reason why I brought you
here. I am sorry, however (pero), not to see your mother. —
Why do you not drink your coffee ? — If I were not sleepy I would
drink it. — Sometimes {i>ra) you are sleepy, sometimes cold, some-
times warm, and sometimes something else b the mhtter with you
{ed ora quakhe alira cosa). I believe that you think too much
of the misfortune that has happened to your friend (Jem.). — ^If I
did not think about it, who would think about it ? — Of whom does
your brother think ?— He thinks of me, Tor we always think of
each other {F uno aJT aUro) when we are not tc^ether (iiuieme).
I have seen six players {il giuocaiore) to-day, who were all
winning (guadagnare) at the same time (nelT utesso Umpo). —
That cannot be (nan si da) ; for a player can only win when
andther loses. — ^You .would Ife right if I spoke of people that had
played at cards or billiards ; but I am speaking of flute and
violin players (di suonatori di fiauto e di vioKno). — ^Do you some

UVXtfTT-SIZTH LBSSdN. 427

limes practise {fare) music {deUa musica) 1 — ^Very ofteo, for I
like it much.-i-What instrument do you play (suonare) 1 — ^I play
the violin, and my sister plays the harpsichord. — My brother who
plays the bass (t7 contrabasso) accompanies {accompagnare) us,
and Miss Stolz sometimes applauds {applaudire — isco) us. — Does
she not also play some musical instrument {Ulrumenic di mu^
ska) ? — She plays the harp {T aTpa)^ but she is too proud (Jiera)
to practise musia with us. — A very poor town {una eiud alquanio
ffovera) went to considerable expense {far una spesa considered
voh) in feasts and illuminations {in feste ed iUuminazioni) on the
occasion of its prince passing through {del passaggio del sua — ).
The latter seemed {ne parve) himself astonished. " It has only
dcme," said a courtier (ten cartigiano), " what it owed (t7 suo de-
hiio) (to your majesty)."—" That is true," replied {r^endere*)
another, " but it owes all ^hat it has done."

282.

Have you made your Italian composition ? — ^I have made it. —
Has your tutor been pleased with It ? — ^He has not. In vain I
do my best, I cannot do any thing to his liking. — You may say
what you please, nobody will believe you.— <]!an you, without
putting yourself to inconvenience, lend me five hundred livres ?
— Ab you have always used me well, I will use you in the same
manner. I will lend you the money you want; but on condition
that you will return it to me next week. — ^You may depend upon
it {poterfame capilale). — How has my son behaved towards you ?
— ^He has behaved well towards me, for he behaves well towards
every body. His father often told him : — " The behaviour of
others is but an echo of our own. If we behave well towards
them, they will also {pur) behave well towards us ; but if we
use them ill, we must not expect better from them." — May I see
your brothers 1 — ^You will see them to-morrow. As they have
just arrived from a long journey {Uviaggio), they long for sleep,
for they are very tired. — What did my sbter say ? — She said
that she longed for dinner, because she was very hungry. — Are
you comfortable in .your boarding-house ? — ^I am very comfort-
able there. — ^Have you imparted to your brother what I told you 1

128 SEVENTr-SrXTH LESSON.

— As he was very lired, he longed for sleep ; so that I have put
off imparting it to him till to-morrow.

233.

I have the honour to wish you a good morning. How do you
do? — Very well at your service {per servirla). — ^And how are
all at home {E come stanno in €asa) ? — ^Tolerably well {pastdbU"
mente), thank God (grazic a Did) ! My sister was a little indis-
posed {indisposta)y but she is better {ristabilita) ; she told me to
give you her best (m* ha incaricato di moUi — fer Lei) compli-
ments.— I am glad {contentissimo) to hear that she is well. As
to you, you are health {la salute) itself {slessa) ; you cannot look
better {ha la miglior cera del moiwio).— I have no time to be ill ,
my business (t miei affari) would not permit me. — Please to sit
down {La si accomodi) ; here is a chair. — I will not detain {dis.
trarre) you from your business ; I know that a merchant's time
is precfous {che U tempo e prexioso per un ntgoxianie). — ^I have
nothing pressing {pressante) to do now, my courier is already
dbpatched {il mio corriere e gid spedito). — ^I shall not stay any
longer. I only wished in passing by {passando di qui) to inquire
about your health. — ^You do me much honour. — ^It is very fine
weather to-day. — If you allow me I shall have the pleasure of
seeing you again {rivedere) this afternoon {questo dopo pranzo),
and if you have time, we will take a little turn together. — ^With
the greatest pleasure. In that case I shall wait for you. — ^I will
Kxfme for you {verrd a prenderkt) about {verso) seven o'clock. —
Adieu then, till I see you again. — -1 have the honour to bid you
adieu.

SEVENTY. SEVENTH LESSON.
Lezione settantesima seitima. ,

To mean.

WhaX do yon mean?

I mean.

What does that man mean 1

Hemeana.

What doea that mean t

That doea not mean any thing.

I do not know what that meana.

r Volere *.

}Pretendere*.

( Intendere ***, ngnifeart I.

Che pretendete (intendete) 1
Pietendo (hitendo).
Che vuol quell' uomo 1
Vuole (pretende, intende).
Che aignifica queato 1
Noir aignifica niente.
Non 80 che old iiignlflca. (Noa i
eoaa aignifichi qneato).

To he particular.

I do not like to deal with that man,
for he la too particular.

To grow impatient, to freU
Do not fret about that.

f Biguardarvi da vidno.

t Non tratto volentieri con quell'
uomo, perchd ▼! riguarda troppo
da Yicino, (or perchd d troppo ain-
golare).

f Impaxientarsi di.
I Non aP impaiienti di ddi
I Non impazientateTi di ddb

To eit up, to watch,
I hare aat up all night.

To advise,. -

The dresa, the eoatnme.
An elegant dreaa.
Hia dreaa ia decent (elegant).

To dress one's se'tf.
That man alifraya dreaaes well.

TofindfauU with something »

That man alwaya finda iault with

every thing he aoea.
Do you find fault with that 1
t do not find fiiult with it

VegUare 1.
Ho Tegliato tutta la notta*

ConsigUare 1.
n veatire.

Un veatire elegante.
11 Buo veatire d deoente (elegante).

Vestirsi 8.
Queat' uomo ai veate aempro bene.

Troitare a ridire a quahhe

cosa,

Qneat' uomo trova aempre a lidlre a

tutto cid che vede.
Trova Ella a ridire a queato?
Non vi troTO niente a ridire.

4M

SBVENTY-SBTSNTH LB8S0R.

A trick.
To play « tiick.
To pby a trick on aome ona.

To take a turn.
I have taken a tarn round the garden.
He haa taken a couple of tuma round
the garden.

Una befia, «na liurla.

Fare una burla.

Fare una burla a qualcnao
t Fare un giro (una paaaegglnta).
t Ho &tto un giro nel giardino.
t EgUhalattoduegirinel glazdiM

To take a little turn.

To trarel thsoun^ Europe.

f Far un picool giro*

t Fare U giro dell' Europau

More (meaning besides).
Yon hate given me three booka, but I

Dipiu.

Ella mi ha dato traBbri^Bin om m
oooorrono tn di pitk.

LeM9.

Dimeno.

Three leaa.
Three too many.

Tn di meno.
Tro di iroppo.

TowMi.

Iwant

I want three hooka.

Occarrere ♦ ; p. part, occorwo;

pret. def. oecorn.
Miocooire.

My reach.
Within my reach.
Out of my reach.
llioae thinga are not within the reach

ofeTerybody. '
That ia not within the reach of my
Bight
Within gna-ahott
A gun-ahot (meaning diatanoe).
Twogun-ahot«( " " ).

How many ahota have you fired 1

La mia viata (capadti).

Alia mia viata.

Fuori della mia viaU {or eapadf A).

Queate coae non aono della capadti

di tutti, or alia poruto dl tutti
Cid d troppo lontano per la mia

viata.
A un tiro di fudle.
Un tiro di fuclle.
Duetiridl fucile.
C^uante rolte ha Ella tira» (I

XL VIII.) 1

I wooder why that man makea such a
noiaa.

So long as.

So long aa you behave wdl, people
win love you.

t Vorrei aapero perchi qoeat* aomo
fa un tale atrepito (un tal rumore).

^ Qtianto.

( Finehiffn taiUo che.

Finch^ (or fintanto che) vi eompor
terete bene, vi amennno.

SBVENTY-SEVBNTH LBSSd^.

481

Tocarryt^.
A mouthful/

To overwhelmy to heap, to load

To orerwhelm one with joy.
Generous.

Beneficent, charitable.
Vou have heaped benefita upon me.
Sincere.
Sincerely.
An advantage.
The dieadvantage, prejudice.
I ahall never eay.any thing to your die-
advantage.

Fortarma, rapire (isco).
Una boccata. Un boccone.

. Cobhare 1.

Colmare qualcuno di gioia.

GeneroBO.

Benefice, caritatevole.

Ella mi ha oolmato di >>^"*fi«t<

Sincero.

Sinceramente.

Vn vantaggio.

Lo avantaggio.

Non dirO mai nlente a avantaggio di

• Lei.

To surrender.
The enemies have surrendered.

To prefer*

I prefer the usefiil to the agreeable.

Renderai,
I nemici si sono real.

Preferire* (iseo) (past part.
prtferUo ; pret. def. preferU
or preferei).
Preferisco 1' utile al gradevole.

Ob§. All the infinitive moods of a verb used substantively are masenline.
The drinking. | II here (11 bevere).

The eating. I II mangiare.

To hehold.

Behold those beautiful flowers with
their colours so fresh and bright.

The colour.

The lily.

The/orget-me-not.

The rose.

An emblem.
Fresh verdure i» salutary to our eyes.

Guardare 1. ^iguardare 1.

Ouardate quel superbi fiorl d' «n
colore co^ freaoo e splendido vivo.

n colore, 11 colorito.

Ilgiglio.

Ucamedrio.

Larosa. t

Xki* emblema.

La verzura fi«scafii del bene ai no»*
til oochi (or d fii del bene agU
occhl).

EXERCISES.
234.
The lo6&o£time b an irreparable (irreparahiie) loss. A single
minute {un sol mmuto) cannot be recovered (riguadagnare) for all

482 SEVENTY-SEVSNTfl LESSON.

the gold in the {del) world. It is then (dunque) of the greatest
importance {della tnassima importanxa) to employ well the time
which consists (coruistere) only of minutes which we must make
good of {che hisogna mettere a profiio). We have but the present;
the past is no longer any thing (non 8 piu nuiZa), and the future is
uncertain {incerto). - A great many people (una hybutd <2' uommi)
ruin themselves (rovinarn) because they wish to indulge them-
selves too much {per voter a:t>wmiaggiarey If most men {Ja
maggior parte degU uomini) knew how to content themselves (ccn-
teniarsi) with what they have, they would be happy ; but their
greediness {la loro aviditd) very often makes {rendered) them un-
happy. — In order to be happy we must forget the past, not trouble
ourselves about the {non inquietarti deW) future, and enjoy the
present. — I was very much dejected {afiitiissimo) when my cousin
came to me. << What is the matter with you ?" he asked me.
** Oh {Ah) ! my dear cousin," replied I, '*' in losing that nooney
I have lost every thing." <<Do not fret," said he to me, *' for I
have found your money."

285.

Why have you played a trick upon that man 1 — ^Because he
finds fault with every thing he sees. — ^What does that mean. Sir ?
— *That means that I do not like to deal with you, because you
are too particular. — ^I wonder why your brother has not done his
task.*— It was too difficult. He sat up all night, and has not beon
able to do it, because it was out of his power {capacUdy — As soun
as Mr. Civilti sees me he begiQS to speak English, in order to
practise, and overwhelms me with politeness {lajinezxa), so that I
often do not know what to answer. His brothers do the same (ns
fanno aUreUatUo), However, they are very good people {sono
buonissime penane) ; they are not only {non solamenie) rich and
amiable, but they are also generous and charitable {henefid).
They love me sincerely, therefore I love them also {to pure), and
consequently {percid) shall never say any thing to their disad-
vantage {lo svantaggio). I should love them still more, if they
did not make so much ceremony {(ante cerimonie) i but everyone
has his faults, and mine is to speak too much of their ceremonies.

SSTENTY-SBVENTH LESSON. 485

236.

Have the enemies* surrendered ? — They have not surrendered,
for they did not prefer life (la vUa) to death {la morie). They
had neither bread, nor meat, nor water, Jior arms {ni armi), nor
money; notwithstanding they determined to die rather (Jianno
ffreferUo morire) than surrender. — Why are you so sad ? — You do
not know what makes me oneasy, my dear friend (fem.) — Tell
me, for I assure you that I share {dhidere* in egual modo) your
sufferings (la pena) as wdl as your pleasures. — I am sure that
you feel for me (prendere* parte aUe mie pene), but I cannot teli
you now (in guesto momenta) what makes me uneasy. I will,
however (pure)> tell you when an opportunity offers (al presentarai
delT occasione). Let us speak of something else now. ^ What do
you think of the man who spoke to us yesterday at the concert ?
— He IS a man of much understanding (di malto senno), and not
at all wrapped up in his own merits (e non ^ mica infatuaio del
9U0 meriio). But why do you ^k me that ?-i-To speak of some-
thing.— ^It is said: contentment surpasses (contento val meglio)
riches ; let us then always be content.' Let us share {dividere*)
(with each other) what we have, and remain {t r^tiamo) our life-
time (tutta la nostra vUa) inseparable (inseparahile) friends. You
will always be welcome at my house, and I hope to be equally so
(iopure) at yours. If Isaw you happy, I should be eq^ually so,
and we should be more contepted than the greatest princes. We
shall be happy (Saremo feUci) when we are perfectly {perfetn
tamente) contented with what we have ; and if we do our duty as
we ought {bene), God will take care of the rest. The past being
no longer any tiling, let ^ us not be uneasy about the future, f^nd
enjcv (repeat the imperative) the present. (See end of Lesson

xxiv.)

It

SEVENTY-EIGHTH LESSOJl.
Lezions seiianiesima Mava.

A gold watch.
A marble atatue.
A demniag aokUer.
A talentad jrouth.
Aailkgo^n.
A mahogany table.
A biick hoiue.
A atone honae.
A Yt\Yet bonnet.
A aUVer tankard.
A one-atory honae.
A two-atory honae.
A three-atory houae.

Un orinolo J oro.
Una atatna di mamax
^n aoldato (iinMrito.
Un gioTane di talentio.
Una veata di aeta.
Una tavola di* mogano.
Una caaa di mattonL
Una caaa <£ pietra.
Un cappeflo di veUute
Un boccale tf -argento.
Una caaa <f nn aol piano.
Una caaa di due pianL
Una caaa di tre piani.

Oba. A, Aa we have aeen (Leaaon II.), the prcpoaltion di ezpreaaea the
matter of which a thing ia made ; but to mark the uae of a thing, the prepoai-
tlon da muat be made uae of. (See Obi. C. Leeaon VIII.) Ex

A kitch^-table.

A nightcap. '

A powder-box.

A neck-handkerchief.

A baidkerchief (for the noae).

Witting-paper.

Awlne-giaaa.

A. princely magnificence.

A gallant action.

Ghinpowder.

Fire-aAna.

AwittdmUL

A cofle»-mill.

A water-miU.

A ateam-mill.

A one-horae waggon.

A foor-horse carriage.

A two-wlieeled waggon.

A four-wheeled waggon.

Th^garden-door.

Una taTola da cncina.

Una benetta da notte;

Una aeattdla da polyere.

Un fiosoletto da collo.

Un lazzoletto da naao.

Carta da acriVere.

Un bicchiere da vino.

Una magniflicenia da prindpe.

Un' axiona da cavaHere.

PoWere ca ca&none.

Armi da tnoeo.

Un mnlino a vento.

Un mulinello da cafi^

Un mollno ad acqna.

Un muUno a rapore.

Una carrozza ad nn csrallo.

Una carrozxa a quattro caTaUi.

Una carrozza a due mote.

Una caiTozEa a quattro mote.

Lai)orta dd giaridino.

VVaiter 1 bring aomethlng to drink, to |
•at, to 4t upon. I

Garzone t portate da bare, da man-
glare, da aedere.

SBVXVTY-XIGHTH l^ESSQN.
A thne*ooni6r hat. | Un cappeUo a tvepunta.

486

Ob§. B, The preposition a la made uae of when the determinating noon
ezpreaaea reeemMonce or tihapt.

A laahionable coat.
A pendulum-clock
An hour-glasa.
A sailing vessel '
A rowing vetseL

He entreated him with joined hands.
.Thon wantedst to act ac^rding to thy

wish.
To play at first sight
To drive with sis horses,
lliey will^me at the fized^tlme.
At twelve o'clock (mid-day).
At twelve o'ctock at night (midnight).
He came in time.

To play at a game

To exaggerate.

That man ezsggemtes sU that he says

snddoes.
That man eiaggerates his genero-
sity. .

To take the place of , to he m-
sieadqf.

That man is a father to me.

fliat nmbreOa serves him as a stick.

An inch.
On a small scale.
On a large scale.
Thereftbonts, nesrly.
Alternately, turn by turn.

Un abito alia moda.
Un orologio a pendolo.
Un orologio a polvere.
Una nave a vela.
Una nave a lemL

Lo pregd a mani glunte.
Volesti iare a tuo modo

Snonare a prima vista.
Andare a set cavallL
Verranno df ora stabilita.
A mezzo giprno (alle dodld).
A mezza notte.
Venne a tempo.
Oiuocare a un giuoco.

c Esagerare I
< t Spingere trqpp' oUre.
( t Andar off eceesso.
Quests uomo essgera qnanto dic6«

qnantofiu ^
Quest' uomo spinge tfipp' oUre k
sua generodti.

Servire di, iener luogo di.

e Qnest' uomo mi tiene luogo di padre.
\ Qmst* uomo mi serve di padre^ sf
i mii&da.
Quesf ombreilo gli tiene loogo dl
bastone.

Un poUice.

In pipcolo.

Ingrande.

Presso a poco, a nn di pressu.

Altemativamente.

4M

SBTBHTT-BIGHTH LB880N.

To emdeawnar^ to wtrwe,
T6gi»e me*» se^ 91^ to grief.

ThmeU.

To

In

Sfonarsif ttudiarri 1.
Atbandonarn al doitre,
^Fonderf^ ; past part, fum;
pret. def.yim.
Stmggerei*; p. part, jfmffo;
- pret def. 9truui.
t StniggenI In bfrime.

To give Urth to (meaning to
raife, to cauet).
To nite dii&cultiea.
To caoM qvamela.
To cauM ■utpitions.
Tho behavioiir of thnt mi
pldottt in my mind.

JPor fuucfre.

t Far naacere delle diffioolti.

t Far naaoers delle queationL

t Far naacere del aoepettL

t La oondotta dl quaat* nomo feee
naacere del ioapetti neUn mia
mente, or mi Iboe naaoera del aoo-
petU.

To ehake.
Shako that tree, and the fruit will laU

eeossoi

Scuoiere*; p. part.

pret. def. scoesi.
ScQotete (ecuota) qneaf alhero e nn
eadianao i fruttL

<ffto be ihort off

Tohe m\
to want*
That man Ib in want of OTory thing.
I am In want of notliin«(.

{Maneare di.
Aver numeanxa di.
Qneet' uomo manca di tatto.
Non manco di niente, er non
manca niente.

A plaop at table, indnding knift, fork,

andapoon.
A ubie for four persona..
A table for ten perM>na.
A writing-table or desk.
A dining*TOom. ^

A Bleeping or bed-ioonL
Arepoater.
AnoU-bottle.
A mnatird-pot.
A pitcher.

Boiled meat for dinner.
A fowttng-pieoe.
A milk-pot
A liahlng^line. *

Unapooata.

Una tavola da qnattro poaata.
Una taTola do. died poaata.
Una tavola da aeriTere.
Una aala da prsnio.
Una camera da letta
Un oriuolo a ripetitiona.
Unabottigliadaolio.
Una moataidiera.
Un Taio da aoqna.
f La pentola.
Un facile da caeda.
Un Taao da latta.
Unal

SBYBNTY.BIOHTH LBSSOH*' 437

. To exact, to want of. Esigere* ; p. part. esdUo.

WYutt do you want of me "l { CJhe esisfiste (ealge) da me 1 *

What did yon exact of me 1 * C Che vuole darnel

I exact nothing of you. i 5 N°° ''•'^ »'«■"« <«• '»1-

I c Non YOglio Diente da LeL

The rabbit-man. | L' nomo dot conigU.

The oyster-wopian. ' La donna ddife oatriche.

Dainties. . I buoni bocconi.
He is fond of dainties. Gli piacciono (ama) i bttoni boceo'Ji

At broad daylight. Di giomo.

To dt down to dinner. ' Mettersi a tavola.

EXERCISES.
287.

Behold, ladies (Signore), those beautiftil flowers, with their
colours so fresh and bright ; they drink nothing but water. The
white lily has the colour of innocence {V innocenza) ; die violet
indicates gentleness (indka la dolcezza); you may see it in
Louisa's eyes (negH occhi di Luigia). The forget-me-not has the
colour of heaven, bur futufla dwelling, and the rose, the queen of
flowers, is the emblem of beauty and of joy. You see (Miran)
all that personified (persomficato) in seeing the beautifel Amelia
(AmaUa), — How beautiful i? the fresh verdure (la v^rzura) I It
is salutary to qur eyes, and has the colour of hope (la speranxa),
our most faithful (fedele) friend (fern.), who never deserts (alf-
handonare) us, not even ih death (aUa morte). — One Word more,
my dear friend.— 'What is your pleasure ? — I forgot to tell you to
present my compliments to your mother. Tell her, if you please,
that I regret (che mi rincresce) not having been at home when she
lately honoured me with her visit. I thank you for her, I shall
not fail. Farewell then (State bene).

238.

Has your sister been out to-day ? — Sho^has been out to. buy
several things (per far deUe compre), — What has she bought ?—
She has bought (I^ n ^ comprata) a silk gown, a velvet bonnet,
and a laee veil (un velo di merleUi), — What have you done with

4M SBTBNTr-BlOBtB LBSSOH.

•

my flilTer tankard t— It is on the kitchen-table, together with the
(eoOa) oiUbottle, the milk.pot, the pitcher, the mti8tard.pot, and
the ooffee-mill. — ^Do you ask for a winc-bottle ? — ^No, I ask for a
bottle of wine, and not (e non mica) for a wine-bottle. — ^If you
will have the goodness to give nie the key of the wine-cellar 1
shall go for one. — What does that man want of me ?-r-He exacts
nothing ; but he will accept what you will give him, for he is in
want of every thing. — ^I will tell you that I am not fond of him,
for his behaviour raises suspicions in my mind. He exaggerates
all that he says and does. — ^You are wrong in having such a bad
opinion (im' opmume) of him, for he has been a father to you. —
I know what I say. He has cheated me on a small and on a
large scale, and whenever he calls he asks me for something.
In this manner he has alternately asked me for all I had : my
fowling-piece, my tishing-line, my repeater, and my golden can-
dlesticks.—Do not give your^lf up so tnu^h to grie( else (oAri-
mend) you will make me melt in tears.

Democritus (Dsmocrtto) and Heraclitus were two philosophers
of a very different character (d' wi indole moUo diferenU) : the
first laughed at the follies {la foUia) of men, and the other wept
at them. They were both righti for the follies of men deserve
to be laughed and wept at

389.

Have you seen your niece t — ^Yes ; she is a very good girl,
who writes well, and speaks Italian still better ; therefore she is
loved and honoured by every body. — ^And her brother, what is
he doing ?-:-Do not speak to me of him ; he is a naughty boy,
who writes always badly, and who speaks Italian still worse : he
is therefore (jpercio) loved by nobody. He is very fond of dain-
ties, but he does not like books. Sometime he goes to bed at
broad day-light, and pretends to be ill ; but when we sit down to
dinner (si va a tavola) he is generally better again. — He is to
study physic (la medicina), but he has not the slightest inclination
for it (alcuna voglia). He is almost always talking of his dogs,
which he loves passionately (t^tpassumaiamenie). His father is
extremely sorry for it. The young simpleton (P UnhedUe) said

SEV£NTy-NiNTH LESSON.

43%

lately to his sister, *^ I shall ealist as soon as a peaoa^ (la pace) is
proclaimed (pubpUcare)"

My dear father and my dear Qiother dined yesterday with
some friends at the king of Spain (aW insegna del re di Spagna).
— Why do you always speak English and never Italian ? — Be-
cause I am too hashful. — ^You are joking ; is an Englishman
ever bashful ? — ^I have a keen appetite (grand' appetiio) : give me
something good to eat. — Have you any money? — No, Sir. —
Then I have nothing to eat for you. — Will you not let me have
some {rum mi da EUa) on credit? ' I pledge {impegnare) my
honour. — ^That is too little. — What {cime)^ Sir !

SEVENTY-NINTH LESSON.
Lezione settantesima nana.

Juti a JUOe, ever so Uult.

Will you do me the finrour of giTing

me a piece of bread 1
Do you wish a great deal 7*
No, just a little.

( Alquanio,

< Unpoco,unpocheUo,unpochino.

V Un tantino.

Vuol iarmi 11 piacere dl darmi on

pezzodi panel
Neynolmoltol
No, un pochetto.

f Farvalere (trar prafiUo).

To turn to. account.
To make the lest of.
Thia man does not know how to make t Qneef uomo non ea fiur v^lere i buoI

the best of his talents. talentL

That man turns his money to account t Quesf uomo la valere 11 suo danaio
in trade. . i I nelcommerdo.

t Come U EUa valere U di Lei, da-
narol

How do you employ your money?
I turn it to account in the stocks.

To hoasty to brag.
I do not like that man, hscause he
boasts too mndw

t Lo foecio valere nei fond! pubblici.

f Farsi valere.

t Non mi place quest' uomo, perchd
si & troppo valere, cr perchd aj
vanta troppo.

440

SCVCNTY-NINTH LESSON.

Notwithstanding that. )
Far all that, aWwugh. \

That man ia a little bit of a rogne^ but

Dotwithatanding be paMea for an

honeat man.
Although that man ia not Tery well, he

notwithatanding worka a great deal.
jUthongh that woman la not very

pretty, atiU ahe ia very amiable.

Although that man haa not the leaat
talent, yet for all that he boaata a
great deal

Although the taTem-keeper'a wife ia
rather awarthy, yet for all that ahe
tuma the buaineaa to good account

I receired your letter on the fifth, on

the aixth, on the aeventh.
On the eighth.

To go iaekj to return.

The top.
The bottom.
Up to the top.

The eldeat brother.
The eldeat aiac^.
He ia the eldeat-

To ojpipear, to seem,

I appear, Ac
We appear, Ac.
Appeared.

To keep, to nuUntain.
Atfy keeping or maintenanca
My keeping costa me aix hundred
livrea a-year.

To drive in, to sink.

To converse vnik some one.
A conTersation.

Cid fum di mino (nuBameno)
Nondimeno, nuUadimeno.

Quest' uomo i alquanto biiccx>n^
cid non dimeno paaaa per un g^
antuomo.

Quantunqne costui non iatia bene
non tralaacia di lavorar molto.

Benchd queata donna non sla molto
leggiadra, non tralaacia (not ele-
gant) d' eaaer molto amabile {of
pure la d molto amabile).

Qnantimque costui non abhia alcun
talento, non tralaacia di farai mot-
to yalere.

Benchd la moglie di queat' oste ala
un tontino bruna, non tralaada di^
far valere 1* osteria, or pure £i bene
gU affari della aua osteiia.

Ho ricoTUto la di Lei letlera II

cinque, U aei, U aette.
L' otto.

Riiomare 1, tomare 1.

L' altOk la dma.
U baMO, 11 fondo.
Fino in alto.

II frat^io primogenitor

La aorella prlmogenita.

k il primogenito (U maggiovB).

Parere *, semlnrare 1.

Paio, pari, pare.

Paiamo (pariamo), parete, paionot
paot parL parao ; jrret. dtj. paril

Afontenere *.
n mio mantenimento.
II mio mantenimento mi coata Mi
cento lire T anno (air anno).

( Andar a fondo.
\ Affondare 1.
Conversar6 con qualcuno *•
Una conversazione.

» Coiwroar€ in un paese means : fretjueniarvi, to go often to a country.

SEVEMTy-NIMTH LESSON.

441

Thspane.
Spare yous money.

EispamUare 1.
Rispanniate ii vostro danaia

To get Ured.
To be tired.

Tohandie.

To lean against.
Lean against me:
Lean against the wall.

To aim at.

Short
To stop short.

Yirtne is amiable.
Vice is odioitf.

Stanearn 1, annoiqrsi 1.
Esser'stanco, lasso, annoiato.
'Maneggiare 1.
^Ppffggiarn.
Appoggiateyi a me.
Appoggiateyi c6ntro U muro.

{ Prender di ndra.
\ Metter in mira,

Gorto, snbito^ .

Fermarsi subito.

La virtii i amabile..
R yizio d odlpso*

' OAtf. A, Before substantives taken in a general sense, and in the whole extent
of their signification, no article is made use of in Englishj but in Italian it
cannot be dispensed with.

Men are mortal
Gold is piecious.
Com is sold a crown a bushel.

Beef costs four-pence a pound.

The horror of vice, and the lore of
virtue, are the delights of the' wise
man..
England is a fine country. '
Italy is the garden of Europe. ,
The dog is the friend and companion

of man.
Theesaly produces wine, oranges, le-
mons, olives, apd all sorts of fruit

He ate the bread, meat, apples, and
petty-patties ) he drank the winci.
beer, and cider.

Beauty, gracefulness, and wit, are valu-
able endowments when heightened
bgrBiodeaty.

OU uominS sono mortali.

I^ oro d prezioso.

M grano si vende uno scudo lo {or

alio) staio.
Jl manzo costa quattro soldi to (or

alia) Ubbra.

V ornMre -del vizio e P amore ddia
virti^ sono % diletti dd savio.

1/ Inghilterra d un bel paesa.

V Italia d 11 giardino dell' Europe.
Jl cane d 1' amico ed il cbmpagno

deiP uomo.
La Tessalia produce dd vino, dUle

melarancie, dei cedri, dtlU ulive ed

ogni sorta di frutti.
Mangid il pane, la came, U mele ed
• i pasticdni ;* bevette U vino, la

birra ed U cidro.
La bellezza, i grazie e 1* Ingegno

sono vantaggi prezlosisslmi, quan*

do la modestla lor d& rilievo (or

risaho).

' !©♦

441%

SEVBilTY-NlirrH LESSON.

I than go to Qeniiaay on my return

from Italy.
The balance of Europe.
He U?ea In Spain.

Andi^ in Aleraasn* al :

d* Italia.
L'eqaiUbriod*IhiiopiL
Vive in lapajpia.

OF PROPER NAMES.
They have generally no article in Italian, and are declined hy i
poaitionsi auch prepoaition la caUed the indefinite article, viz.

O.
D.

AhL

Peter,

of Peter,

to Peter,

from Peter,

Rome.

of Rome.

to Rome.

from Rome.

G.
D,

Abl,

lof pro-

PietTO,

di Pietro,

aPtetro,

da Fietro,

Roma.

di Roma.
' a RoDUL
da Roma.

The wife of Joseph or Joseph's wife.
I aald BO to Theresa.
I have received thia book from Alex-
ander.
He is from Vienna.
He goes to Venice.
He departs from London.

La moglie di OiOfeeppe.

Lo diesi a Teresa.

Ho riceruto questo libro da Ales

sandiD.
Egliddi Vienna.
Va a Venecia.
Parte da Londra.

Oba. B. The artido, however, is made uae of in the following Instanoaa:

a) When the name is preceded by an a4ioctive, as :

The brave Casar. I U valoroso Cesare.

The divine Raphael. I II diviao RafaeUo (or Raflbelle).

b) Some proper names of onen and godf take tiie article in the plural when
they stand as appellative nouns, as :

TheCloeros. I I Ciceroni.

The gods of the ancient Romans. | Gli del degll antlchi RomanL
Also in the singular, when they are used to mark another person, as :
The Solon of France. | B Solone della Francia.

c) When known personages, particularly learned or renowned men, are men-
tioned by their fiuaUy-names, as :

Tasso.

11 Tasso.

Petnrcfr

11 Petrarca.

Fiammetta.

La Fiammetta.

Obe, C When a whole part of the world is raewlooed, the article is generally
made use of, as :

Europe if more peopled than Africa.

The States of America.
Itkly is on three sides surrounded by
thesea.

L' Europa i pih pofpdata dell* if-

frica.
Gil Stati deir America.
U Italia d da tre parti drcondata da]

mare.

SBV*ENTT.NXNTH LESSON. 44^

Ob9, D, Somo eountrieg and iaianda have always the arUcie, such aa :

n Tirolo, la Svi^zeiB, la Moldavia.
La Horea, la Crimea, la China.

Tyrol, Switzerland, Mddavia.
Morea, Crimea, CMna.
J^HUi, Peru, India.
Brazil, Virginia, Sicily. .
Sardinia, Coraica, Ireland.
Iceland, Capri.

n Giappone, U Perh, le Indie.
n Brasile, la Virginia, la SicUia.
La Sardegna, la Coraica, f Irlanda.
jy Iaianda, la Capraia.

And a few othera.
(%9. E» The namea of conntriea which are called aftftr their capitals have
never the article as:

Naples, Venice, Geneva. | Napoli, Venezia, Qenova*, Ac.

Obt. F, The namea of the seaa, rivers, and mountains, liave lilways the
article, as:

The Atlantic oc^an, the Danube, the | U Atlantico, il Danubio, U Po, Ac.
Po.

EXERCISES.
240.
Will ypu relate {raccontare) somethiDg to me ? — What do you
wish me to relate to you ? — A little anecdote, if you like. — A
little boy one day at table (a iUvola) asked for some meat ; his
father said that it was not polite to ask for any, and that he should,
wait until some was given to him {ck$ gUene desero)^ The poor
little boy seeing every one eat, and that nothing was given to liim,
sidd to his father : '* My dear father, give me a little salt, if you
please." " What will you do with it ?" asked the father. " i
wish to eat it with the meat which you will give me/' replied
{repUcare) the child. Every body admired (amndrare) the little
boy's wit; and his father, perceiving that he had nothing, gave
him meat without hii> asking for it (senza ch' egU ne donumdasse),
—Who was thftt little boy that asked for meat at table 1 — He was
the son of one of my friends. — Why did he ask for some meat ?
—He ^ked for some beci^use he had a good appetite. — ^Why did
bb father not give him some immediately ? — ^Because he had for^
gotten it. — ^Was.the little boy wrong in asking for some 1 — ^He
wfts wrong, for he ought to have waited. — Why did he ask his

* Alao" the names of the following islands have no article : Cipro, Corf&,
Greta, Cerigo, Candia, Maiorca, Minorca, Malta, Ischia, Procida, Lipari, Rod!,
Scio, and a few others.

444 SF/BNTT-NJlfTH UM80H.

father for some nit ?-^« asked for some salt, that (i^mM) his
father might peroeive that he had no nieat^ and' that he might give
him some (e gUene desse).

Do you wish me to relate to you another anecdote ? — ^You will
greatly oblige me.— ^me one, purchasing some goods of a shop-
keeper (i/ meremUe)f said to him : '^ You ask too much ; you
should not sell so dear to me as to another, beoause I am a friend
{sono amico di casa),^^ The merchant replied, <' Sir, we must gain
something by {eoi) out friends, for our enemies will never come
to the shop."

241.

Where shall you go next year ? — I shall go to England, for it
is a fine kingdom (i/ regno)^ where I intend spending the summer
on my {al vdo) return from France.)— Whither shall you go in
the winter? — ^I shall go to Italy, and thence (<ft Id) to the West
Indies ; but before that I must go to Holland to take leave of my
friends.— What country do these people inhabit (^ah&are) ? — ^They
inhabit the south (t/ mexxo giomo) of Europe ; their countries are
called Italy, Spain, and Portugal, and they theixMsdves (ed esst
medesimi) are Italians, Spaniards, and Portuguese ; but the people
called Russians, Swedes, and Poles, inhabit the -north (t7 SeUm^
iritme) of Europe ; and the names of their countries are Russia,
Sweden, and Poland (Polonia). France and Italy are separated
(separarc) by the Alps (le A^), and France and Spain by the
Pyrenees (t Pirenei), — ^Though the Mahometans (U Maamettano)
are forbidden the use of wine ( proihire quakhe cosa ad ttno), yet
for all that 'some of them drink it. — ^Has your brother eaten any
thing this morning ? — ^He has eaten a great deal ; though he said
he had no appetite, yet for all that he ate all the hieat, bread, and
vegetables (e tutii i legttm)^ and drank all the wine, beer, and
cider. — ^Are the eggs {U uova plUr. of F uovo) dear at present ?—
They are sold at six livres a hundred^-^-Do you like grapes {k
uve or r ttva) ? — ^I do not only like grapes, but also plums (una
prugna), almonds^ nuts, and all sorts of fruit (di fruUi), — ^Though
modesty, candour, and an amiable disposition (V amabilUd) are
valuable endowments, yet /or all that there are some ladies that
are neither modest, nor candid (candido), nor amiable. — The fear

ISlCiHTlETH -LEfcJSOW. 440

cf death,'and the Fove of life, being natural to men {nelT uomo)j
they ought to ^hvm^fuggire) vice {il vvdo), and adhere to {aUenern
a) virtue.

EIGHTIETH LESSON.
Lezione ottaiitesima,-

To give occasion to.
Do not give him cause to' complain.

Dar motivo di.

Non dategli (non gU-dia) itootivo dl
lagnarsl.

To have it to one, Rimettersi al giudizio d* al'

I cuno,
I leave it to you. | Bli rimetto ol di Lei giudizio.

A good bargain. Un buon mercato.

To sticlc, or to fibide by a thing. t Tenerai a. Stare a.

1 abide by the offer you haye made
'me.

t Mi tengo {or ato) all' ofierta ch'
^lla mi ha &tta.

I do n6t doubt but you are my friend. | Non dubito ch' Ella non wia mio

I amico.
06>. A. The verb dubUare, negatively uaed, requl^a non before the sub-
junctive.

I do not donbt but he will do it. I Non dubiio che noti lo facda.

7 b s lifer J fa bear. ' Soffrire 3. Sopportare 1.

They were exposed to the whole fire ' Erano esposti a tutto il fuoco dells

of the place. piazza.

To examine one artfully y or to\ f Sorprendere il segrefo rti

draw a secret from one. qualctmo.

I examined him artfully, and by thi^t Ho sorpreso il suo segreto, e coai mi

means I have made myself acquaint- son messo bl fatto di' tutti 1 »uo»

ed with all his affairs. afiari.

€46

IIGBTISth' LM80N.

3b hear 9 iojmtup wUh.

Yon wUl be obliged Co put up ^ib all

'Sattoporn* .(oonjugated like

p&rre* {ponere)^ Leaariis

LXV.andLXXIV.).

Le Mrik fona (Ella mtk costretta) di

aottoporai a tutto aid ch rg^

▼orrA.

Thick.

Denao, apeaao, foko.

Athfckcload. .

Un nuTolo denao (or una nuTola

denaaj.

AthiekbeanL

Unabarbafblta.

AbttrtL

Uno acroado.

Abontoflangfalar.

Uno acroado di riaa.

To bunt out langhing.

( t Dar uno acroado di riaa.
( t Far uno teroedo di riaa.

To bunt out

ScroadareL

To bunt out a laugfaiag.

Scopplare dalle riaa.

Splendour, brightneea.

Lo aplendore.

To make a great ehow.

Farpompa.

To light.

lUuminare 1.

The noiae, the crack.

Lo atrepito, lo aooppio.

To aufier one'a aelf to be beaten.

Laadarai bettere.

To let or to auffer one'a aelf ttf ialL

To Buffer one'a aelf to be inaulted.

Laaciarai oltragglan.

To Buffer one*B aelf to die.

Laaciard moiira.

To let one'a aelf be atruck.

Laadard percnotflKf.

To aend beck, to aend away

RimandaraL

To extol, to praiae up.

Vantarel.

To boaat, to praise one'a aeiC

VantardL

Go thither.

Andatevi.

Let ua go thither.

AndiamVi.

Obf . 0. The letter oof the flrat and

third peraona plural of the impMuflv* fa

omitted before the adrerb of place» d, 9i

Let them go thither.

C YadanTi.
icifeglinoTlYadaiio.

Go thou.

Va.

Go (thou) thither.

Vacd.

Go (thou) away.

Vattene.

Let him go thither.

Ch' eaao d vada.

Go away, begone.

Andaterene.

I^ret ua begone.

Andiamcene.

Let him go away, let him b^ne.

Ch' egli ae no vid^

BIGHTIBTH LSS^OS,

447

GMte me.
GUYeittome.
Give it him.
Give him some
Get paid.
Let U8 set ont
Let UB breakfast
Lethipigiveitme.
Let him be here at twelve o'clock.
Let him send it me.
He may believe it
Make an end of it.
Let us finish.
Let him finish.
Let him take it
Let her say so.

The starling.
1^ I were to question you as I used to
do at the beginning of our lessons,
what would you answer 1

We found these questions at first rather
lidiculousi but, full of confidence in
your method, we answered' as well
as the small quantity of words and
rules we then possessed allowed us.

We were not long in finding out that
those questions were calciilated to
ground us in the rules, and to exer-
cise us in conversation, by the con-
tradictory answers we were obliged
to make.

We can now almost keep up a oonver-
sation In Italian.

This phrase does not seem to us
logically correct

We should be ungrateful, if we aOowed
such an opportunity to escape with-
out expressing our Jiveiiest gradtude
to you.

In all cases, «t all eventa.

The native.

The inaurmountable difficulty.

Datemi.

Datemelo.

Dategllelo.

Dat^gliene.

Fatevi pagare.

Partiamo.

Facdfuno oolazione.

Ch* egli me lo dla.

Ch' e^\ sia qui a mezzo glome.

Ch' egli me lo mandi.

Ch' egli lo creda.

Finite.

(Inlamb.

Ch' egli finlaca.

Ch' egli lo prenda.-

Ch* esse lo dice.

Lo stomello, lo stomo. '

Se vi presentassi adesso delle quee>
tioni come ve ne presental al prin*
dpiare delle nostre lezioni (come

. prima fo aveva V abitudine di fiur-
lo), phe riaponderastel

Abblamo trovato a prima vista tall-
questioni alquanto -ridicole; ma
pieni di confidenza nel dl Lei me-
todo, vi abbiamo rlsposto per
quanto ce lo permetteva il picciol
corredo di parole e di rogole che
avevamo allora.

Non abbiamo tardato ad accorgerd
che tali qttestioni miravano o ten-
desano ad inculcarci i prindpU ed
eserdtard dla eonveraazione coUe
■jlsposte contraddittorie che era-
vamo costretti di fard.

Adesso possiamo presso a pocq sos-
tfinere una conversazione«ln ita-
liano.

Questa frase non d paie loglcamente
corretta.

Saremmo ingrati, se lasclassimo

* siugglre una cod beOa occadone
^ senza dimostrvle la-piii viva gr^
tltudine.

In ogni caso.

II native.

La diffieoltA insupeiEbUe.

<48 BI6BTIBTH LBaSOlf.

£X6RCISES.
242.

A young prince (tm prmcipmo)^ aeyen years old, was admired
by every body for his wit (a cagione del sua spirito) ; being once
in the society of an old officer (J* ufixiale), the latter obsexred, in
speaking of the ^oung prince, that when children disoovered so
much genius (aver moUo epiriio) in their early years, they gene-
rally grew yery stupid (ne hanno ordinariamente poMseimo) when
they came to maturity (quando sono awanxad fn eta). " If that
is thd case," said the young prinoe, who had heard it, ''then you
must have been remarkable f)t your genius (acer molUtsmo
tpirito) when you were a child {neUa sua mfantia)."

An Englishman, on first visiting (al primo giugnere m) France,
met with {s^awenne — in) a very young child in the «treets of
, Calais, who spoke the French language with fluency and elegance
(eorrentemefUe t eon eZe^^onsa).-^" Good Heaven (jgran Dio) ! is it
possible," exclaimed he, " that even children here speak the
French language with purity {la purexxa) ?**

Let us seek {ricercare) the friendship of the good, and avoid
(emtare) thesociety of the wicked (dei cottjm) ; for bad company
corrupts (le caitxoe societd cprrompono) good manners (t huota
eostumi). — ^What sort of weather is it to-day I — ^It snows continu-
ally, as it snowed yesterday, and, accordifig to all appearances,
will also snow to-morrow.*— Let it snow ; I should like it to snow
still more, for I am always very well when it is very cold. — And
I am always very well when it is neither warm nor cold. — ^It is
too windy to-day, and we should do better if we stayed at home,
r— Wl^atever weatjier it may be, I must go out; for I promised to
be with my sister at a quarter past eleven, and I must keep my
word (tefiere* parola).

248.
Will you drink a cup of oofiee ? — ^I thank you, I do not like
coffee. — ^Then you will drink a glass of wine ? — I have just
drunk some. — Let us take a walk. — Willingly {con moHo piacere) ;
but where shall we go to ? — Come with me into the garden of my
aunt ; we shall find there very agreeable society. — I believe it ;

EIGHTIETH LESSON. 449

but the question is (resta a sapere) whether this agreeable society
will admit me (mi vorrd), — ^You are welcome every where. —
What ails you (che avete),^ my friend ? How do you like that
wine ? — I like it very well {aqtdsUo) ; but I have drunk enough
of it {hastantemetUe), — Drink once more. — ^No, too much is
unwholesome {ogni eccesso e nocivo) ; I know my constitution (t7
temperammio), — Do not fall. What is the matter with you ? — I
do not know ; but my head is giddy {migira la testa) \ I think I
am fainting (padere in deliqido^ or svenire), — I think so also {ic
pure), for you look almost like a dead person (un morto), — What
countryman are you ? — I am an Englishman. — ^You speak Italian
so well that I took you for an Italian by birth {un Italiano di na-
none), — You are jesting. — ^Pardon me ; I do not jest at all. —
How long have you been in Italy ?— A few days. — In earnest
{dawero)'i — ^You doubt.it, perhaps, because I speak Italian; I
knew it before I came to Italy. — How did you learn it so well ? —
I did like the prudent starling.

Tell me, why are you always on bad terms {essere sempre in
dissensUme) with your wife ? and why do you engage In unpro-
fitable trades {pecuparsi di mestieri inuiUi) ? It costs so much
trouble (si dura tanta pena) to get (ad ottenere) a situation (un
impiego) ; and you have a good one, and neglect it. Do you not
think of (pensare a) the future ? — ^Now allow 'me to speak also
(alia frua volia). All you have just said seems reasonable ; but
it is not my fault, if I have lost my reputation (la riputazione) ;
it is that of my wife : she has sold my finest clothes, my rings
(r aneUo), and my gold watch. I have a host of (esser carico di)
debts, and I do not know what to do. — ^I will not excuse (seolpare)
your wife ; but I know that you have also (pure) contributed
(cantrUniire) to your ruin (laperdita). Women are generall]f
good when they are left so (quando si laseiana buane),

244.

DIALOGUE.

The Master. — ^If I were now to ask you such questions- as I
did 11^ the beginning of our lessons, viz. (tali che): Have you the
hat which my brother has ? — Am I hungry ? Has he th^ tree of
my brother's garden ? &c., what would yo^ answer ?

450 BiGimr-PiBST lbssor.

TTie Pupib.—Vfe are obliged (essere cottretto) tQ confess thai
we feund these questions at first rather ridiculoos ; but, fall pf
ooniidenoe in your method, we answered as well sa the small
quantity of words and rules we then, possessed allowed us« We
were, in fact, not long in finding out. that these questicms were
calculated to ground us in the rules, and to exercise us in con-
▼ersation, by the contradictory ai^wers we were obliged to make.
But now that we can almost keep up a conyersation in the beau-
tiful language which you teach us, we should answer: It is
impossible that we should have the same hat which your brother
has, for two persons cannot have one and the same thing. To
the second question we should oSiswer, that it is impossible for
us to know whether you are hungry or not. As to the last, we
should say : that there is more than one tree in a garden ; and in
asking us whether he has the tree of the garden, the phrase does
not seem to us logically correct. At all events we should be
ungrateful (ingraio) if we allowed such an opportunity to escape
without expressing (dmostrare) our liveliest gratitude to you foi
the trouble you have taken. In arranging those wise combina-
tions (la combinaaone) you have succeeded in grounding uf
almost imperceptibly {impercettilrilmenU) in the rules, and exer-
cising us in the conversation of a language which, taught in any
ether way, presents to foreigners, and even to natives, almosr
iarannounuble difficulties. (See end of Lesson XXIV.)

EIGHTY-FIRST LESSON.
Lezione otiantesi$na prima

It lacks (wtnts) a quarter. i { t CI vuole un quarto.

I C t Manca un quarto.

Itwanta(laeka)ahaU: I J t « vuol la meti.

^ ' ' C t ]f anca la met^

How muah does it want 1 ' Quanto ci Tuole 1

It does not want much. . ^ Non ci vuol molto.

EI0HTY-FIB8T LESSON.

451

It wants but a trifle.

It wants but an inch of my being aa
tall aa yon.

It lacked a great deal of my being aa
rich aa you.
The half
The third part.
The fourth part.

Ton think you have retume<l me all •
a great deal is wanting.

The younger Is not so good as the
elder by far.

Our merchants are fiur from giving ua
an idea of the yirtue mentioned by
our miasionaries : they may be con-
sulted on the depredations of . the
mandarins.

He ia nearly as tall as hfs brother.

A discourse, impeded or embarrassed
by nothing, goes on and flows from
itself and aometimes^proceeds with
such rapidity that it is only with
difficulty that the mbid of the
speaker follows the words.

{ Ci mane% poea.
c Non ci manca se non poeo.
Ci vuole un pollioe perch' io sia de^

la sua stature.
Ci mancaYa molto porch' io foaai

ricoo quanto LeL
La meti^ il mezzo,
n terzo.
n quarto.
Ella crede forse (vol credete ibrse)

avermi tutto reso ; ci manca molto.
n cadetto d molto meno savio del

primogenitor
I nostri negozianti son ben lontani

dal fomirci 1* idea di quelle virt&

donde ci parlano i nostri mlssion-

arii : si pud conaultarli sui ladro-

D^ccl dei mandarini.
QB maaca ben poco ad esser grande

cove suo fratello.
TTn disoorao chiaro e aclolto precede

e fluisoe da ae stesso e taWolta

coai rapidamente ch' egli d aolo

con difficolta che il penaiero dell' .

ontore piu tenergli dictro.

In a foolish mannerf at random. - Sconsideratameiuef disawedu-

tatnerUe. .

Ha speaks at random like a crazy man. Parla soonsideratamente come un

, [ pazzo.

To resort to violence.

Afiict. ^

It is a fact

Elae, or else.

To make fun of.
To contradict, to give one the lie.
Shouki he aay B0| I would give him the

Ue.
Hia aotions belie his words. .

To scratch.

t Venime alle vie dl fiitto (agli atti di
violenza).
Un fatto.
'k un fatto.
Se non, altrlmenti
Befiarai, burlarai dL
Smentire qualcuno.
Se dicesse questo Io smentirai.

Le sue azioni smentiscono le sua
parole.
Grojfiare 1.

452

BIGHTY-F.RST LESSON.

7V> escape,
I fell from the top of the tree to the

bottom, but I did not hurt niyeelf

much.
1 escaped with a scratch.
The thief has been taken, but he will

eacape with a few months* imprison-

ment.

Scappare, Mcampare 1.
Sono caduto dalla cima delT albeio

(al basso) e non ml son fatto molto

male.
V ho scappata con una graflUtora.
U ladro i stato preso, ma aeampeii

opn alcuni mesi di prigione, or ma

sela passeracon.

By dint of.
By dint of labour.
By too much F^plog-
You wiH cry your eyes out.

1 obtained of him tliat favour by dint
of entreaty.

f Pel gran {aforxa4i).
t Pel gran lavoro.
t Pel gran piangere.
t Pd gran piangere ehe fa, perdera

H^ occhi.
tOttenni da Ini questo faTOro pel
gran pregare (a foisa di ptegaie).

That excepted.
nat fiTult azoepted, he is a good

Toiriewilh each aiher.

Those HMD ara trying to rival
other.

{ Da quello infuori.

\ Eccetluaio questo. -
I Da questo In fuori (eccettuato ques-
' to) d nn buon uomo.

i;

t A gara^ a prova (T mo
deir altro).
A eeneorrenxa.
t Qnesti uomini lavorano a gan.

Clean.
' Clssnlinen.

Thempre-'-HU.
The less^-as.
I am 1^ more discontented with his
conduct, a« he is under many obliga-
I to me.

Ivntht le»9 pleased with his conduct,
OS I had more right to his friend-
ship.

Netto, pullto.
; Delia lUncheria pnlita.
^ Delia biancheiia di buoato.

Tanto piu — ehe^

Tanio mena—^he,
Sono tanio ptd malcontento della

sua condotta eh* egli d molco ob-

bligato verso di me (egli mi ha

molt^ obbligazioni).
Sono tanto mcno soddis&tto della sua

condotta eh* lo aveva pii^ diritti alls

sua aroicizia di qualunque altro.

/ wish that.
A wish that house belonged to me.

t Varrei che.
t Vorrei che questa casa fosse i

EIORTY-FIBI^T LESSON.

453

To musBy tp if^.
I thought a long time on that affair.

MedHare I, star pensieraso

(or sopra penfiiero).
Ho meditato molto tempo bu qnesto

afiare (ho penaato molto tempo ra

questo afiare).

To he naked.
To haye the head uncoTered.
To have the ieet oncovered.
Torbe barefooted.
To be bareheaded.
To ride barebacked.

Esser nudo (ignudo).
Aver la teeiia ecoperta.
Ayot i piedi ecalzL *
Eseeie pid ecalzL
EesQre a capo scoperto.
Cavalcare a bardowo (or a lehieDa
nuda).

To heme Uke to, or to think to
have.

I had like to have lost my money.

I thought I had lost my life.

Wa hadiike to ha^e cut our fingers.

He waa very near filling.

He was withlna haix^s breadth of being
killed.

He had like to haye didd.

Mancare I, star per.

e Stetti per perdere 11 mio danaro.
<Pooo mancd ch' io npn perdeeai
( 11 mio danaro. -

Credei perdere la yita.

Poco mancd che non ol tagUaaaimo
ledita.

Stette quasi per cadere.

Poco mancd che non fosse ucdso.

Poco ci yoUe ch' egU non fosse uo-
ciso. '

Credd (pensd) essere ucdso.

Credd (credette) morire.

At, on, or upon your heels.
The enemy is at our heels.

Alls yostre spalle.

n nemico c* insegue alle spalle^

To strike (in speaking of lightning). •
The lightning has struck.
The lightning struck the ship.
While my brother was on the open sea,

a yiolent storm rose unexpectedly ;

the lightning struck the ship, which

it set on fire, and the whole -crew

jumped into the sea to saye thdfai-

seWes by swimming.
He was struck with firlght when he

saw that the fire was gaining on all

sides.
He did not know what to do.
He hesitated no longer.

Cascare 1, cadere*

U fulmine cadde.

II fulmine cadde sul bastlmento.

Troyandod mio firatello in alto mare,
soprayyenne fiera tempesta; il
fuhnine cadde sul bastlmento cht
mise in fuoco, e tutto 1' equipaggio
si gettd'al mare per salyarsi a nu-
oto.

Fu preso da spayento yedendo che
11 fuoco imperversaya da ogni lato.

Non sapeya a che appigUarsl.
Non istette pih la foiae.

454

si^nrr-FiBST uesson.

I have not heurd of him yet Non bo

An ugeL tTn uigelo.

A niMWr-pieoe. tin capo d» opera.

Maatcr-plecee. Capl d* opera.

Ob». Of a woid componadeJ by means of a prepoaiaoD, ezpraaaed or i
•uxkI, the first word only takes the mark of the plural.

Pour o*clock flowers. | Gebominl di notte.

His or her physiognomy.
His or hef shape.

tlie expression.
The look.
Contentment.

.Admiration.
Grace, charm.
DeUghtfully.
Fascinating.
Thin (slender).
Uncommonly welL
His er her look Inspires respect i
•dmirmtlon.

La sua fisonomla.

Le sue forme^ la mm

fignra.
L* espresaione.
L* aspetto, la ciera.
U contento.
U rispetto.
L' ammirazione.
Legrazie.
A maraWglia.
Attraente, lusinghiero.
STelto, asdutto, smilzo, i
Superiormente bene.
11 sno aspetto insplra deferenia ed

ammirazione.

EXERCISES.

245.

Will you be my guest (mangiare conftioZrnffio)? — ^I ihank you;
a friend of mine has invited me to dinner : taa has ordered (fare
apparecchiare) my favourite dish (tm cibo fgnarito). — What is it?
-^It is a dish of milk (dd laUidnu), — ^AJs to me, I do not like
milk-meat: there is nothing like {nienU di megUo che) a good
piece of roast beef or veal. — What has become of your youoger
brother? — ^He has suffered shipwreck (Jar naufragio) in going to
America. — ^You -must give me an accoimt of that (Lamiraecmti
quest* awenimfnto). — ^Very willingly (vohnUerissimoy — ^Being on
the open sea, a great storm arose. .The lightning struck the ship
and set it on fire. ^ The crew jumped into the sea to save them,
selves by swimming. My brother knew not what to do, having
never learnt to swim. He reflected In vain ; he found no means
to save hb life. He was struck with fright when he saw that
the fire was gaining on all sides. He hesitated no longer, and

BIGHTT-SBC0ND LBSSON. 456

jumped into the sea. Well {su via) what has become of him ? —
I do not know, having hot heard of him yet. — ^But who told you
all that ? — ^My nephew, who was there, and who saved himself.
— As you are talking of your nephew (a proposiio del — ) where
is he at present ? — He is in Italy. — ^Is it long since you heard of
him ? — 'I have received a letter from him to-day. — ^What does he
write to you ^'•-He writes to me that he is going to marry a
young woman who brings him a hundred thousand crowns. — Is
she pretty ? — Handsome as an angel ; she is a master-piece of
nature. Her physic^nomy is mild and full of expressioh ; her
eyes are the finest in the (del) world, and her mouth is charming
(e la sua Ipccai kggiadra). She is neither too tall nor too short;
her shape is slender ; all her actions are full of grace, and her
manners are engaging. Her Ijpoks inspire respect and admira-
tion. She has also a great deal of wit ; she speaks several lan-
guages, dances uncommonly well, and sings delightfully. My
nephew finds but bne defect in her {le trova che un difetto), — ^And
what is that defect ?-^he ' is affected {aver deUe preteTisiani).^-*
There is nothing perfect in the (al) world. — ^How happy you are !
you are rich, you have a good wife, pretty children, a fine house,
and. all you wish. — ^Not all, my friend. — ^What do you desire
more ? — Contentment {la cmUentezxa) ; for you know that he onl)
is happy who is contented {che quo dirsi conterOo).

EIQHTY-SEOOND LESSON.
Lezione otiantesima secanda.

7b unriddley to disentangle.
Tofndaut.

To diientan^ the bair.
To unriddle dlffictUtieB.
I have not been able to find out the
•enee of that phrase.

' SvUuppare 1, sciogUere *

{scioUa, sciolsi) 1.
Disirigare I, distmguere* 2

(p. part. dUUnio, pret. def.

disUnsi),

Pettinare i capelli.
SciogUere difficolti.
Non hopotuto distinguere ii aensc
di queata tnae.

450

EIGHTT-SICOND LBSSOlf.

Aqnarrel
To have dlflbreneet (aquanel) with
■omebodf.

Una qaenia, una liMa.

AVer delte qulstionroom qoalcdi^

To take good care,' to whun, to

beware.

I will take care not to do it.

Mind you do not lend that man

money.
He takae care not to anawer the quea-

tion which I aalced him. '.
To nak a queation.

If yon take it into your liead to do
that, I will puniah you.

To take into one'a head.

To become/ tojk well.

Ooea that beoonie me 1
That doea not become yon.
It doea not become you to do tliat.
That fita you wonderfully well.
Her head-dreaa did not becoiiie her.

It doea not become yon to reproach
me with it.

To reproach.
f
To follow from U.

It foUowa fnrn it that you ahould not

do that
How ia it tliat yon iiave come ao late 1

I de not Icnow how it la.

How is itihat he had not hia gnni

I do not Icnow how it happened.

To fast.
To be iaating.
To giTo notice to, to let any body >
know. (

To wan iome one of aomethlngr. j
Gire notice to that man of Us father'a
votnm.

Guardarsi da.

Mi gnarderd bene dal&rlo.
Gnaidatevi dal preatare daoaro a
* coatuL
Si gnarda bene dal riapondere alia

queatione che gli lio fatta.
Far una queatione {or una doman-

da). ^
Se Ti avviaate di larlo, li puniiO.

A? Tiaarai (metteral in capo).

Star bene, eanvemre *, of arm.

Mi ata bene queato 1

Non vi (Le) ala bene.

Non Ti (Le) conviene di br da.

Qtieato Le (Ti) eta a maravi^ia.

La ana acconciaturm di capo le atava

male.
Non Ti tta bene di rinlacdannekk

Rvifacciare I.

SeguirCf mccedere * ; p. part.
SMCcesso ; pret. def. succeesi.

^e aegue die non doTreate (do-

▼rebbe)lbr«id.
Col^ mai d Ella (aiete) 'venuta (ve-

noto)eo^tardi1
Non 80 come.

Come mai non ayera il auo ftidle 1
Non BO come.

Digiunare, far artiaenxa.

Eaaere a digiuno.

AvTertire (ayTiaare) qualcuno di
qnalche coaa.

Aryertite (ayyiaate) costui del rito^
no di Buo padre.

BIOHTY-SBCOND LE8SOM.

457

To dear, to elucidate, to clear up.
m weather is clearing up.

SeMarire 3 (Isco). Rischiararo 1.
II tempo sirischiara.

To refresh.
Refresh yourself^ and return to me im-
mediately.

To whiten, to bleach.

To blacken.

To turn pale, to grow pale.

To grow old.

To grow young.
That makes one look young again.

To blush, to redden.

Rinfrvscare I.

Rinfrescatevi e ritomate suUta

Imbiancare I.
Annerire (isco), abbnmare.
Impallidire (isco).
Invecchiare 1. -
Ringioyinlre (isco).
t Questo ringloTinisce il Tolto.
Arrossire (isco).

To make merry.
To make one's self merry.
He makes merry at my expense.

RaUegrare 1, diverUre d.
Rallegrarsi, diyertirsi.
Si diverts alle mie spese.

TofeigUy to dissemhle^ 0 pretend.

I

He knows the art of dissembling. >
To possess.

Fingere* ; past part, fnto;

j)ret. de^.Jinsu
Possiede 1' arte di fingere.

Possedere* (is conjugated like
sedere*^ Lesson LL).

To procrastinate, ta go slowly.

I do not like to transact bttsiness with
that man, for he always goes Tery
slowly about it.

f Mandar le cose in hmgo,

Non mi place fiir affiiri eon oostnl,
petchd manda lempre le cois in
lungo.

Aproo£
It is a proof.

UnaproTB.
Knnaprora.

To stray, to gel lost, to lose )
one's way, to lose one's self. )

Smarrirsi.

Through.

The cannon-ball went

wall.
I lan him through the body.

fA traverao.
Per mezzo.
Da banda a banda.
Da parte a parte,
through the La palla di cannone d passata a tra-
▼erso la muragUa.
Gli ho paanto la mia apada da parte
a parte.

20

458

SIQBTr-SBCOlfS LBSSOlf.

APOSTlft>PH£ AND ELISION.

Th0 apotciophe is iiMd,«» |

1. After tlMtftldeslo^ fa, Is ^tnd their obUqnacaaei, when they maet I
fore words beginning with « Toweli or when they are abbreviated, as :

The son], the honour. I L' anima, V onore.

Ofthebooks,tothefiahera. I M Ubil, a' padri, 4ke.
06f . J. The articles lo^ fa, are nerer abridged in the plural, unlesa the n»
following fa begins with an t <. Ex.
The friends^ tlie ooats.
The loves, tha honoua.
tlie ahades, tlis inventions.
Hie eminences^ the eieeutiona.

GU amici, gtt abitL
GHi amoil, gli onotL
Le ombre, le invenalonL
Le eminenie^ le esecu*lonL

fiat write.

Hie geniuses, ths English, the instm- I Gl' ingegni, gP Inglesi, gP istm-

ments. | mentL

Ob9, B. Whenever the prepositions : eon^ with ; in, in ; ni, upon ; per, for, hf ,
meet with the definite articlea, <l^ fa^ fa, they are bontracced : thus nd is said
instead oi-Jm ii^ luOo^ instead of in fa, ^kc. According to tliis contraction we
■ay and write:

SmeuLAB. Plueal.

, ^ . , A U

MaaevHiu, FemiidnA,

In the.
With the.
Upon tlie.
For the.

Nel,neUo
Col,collo
Sal,sal]o
Pe^pello

Nells.
Colla.
Snlla.
PeUa.

In the gardens^ In ths spirits, hi the

Neierne*, neglL Nolle.

Coi or 00*, oon gli or eogil. Gollo.

Su* or sni, sagtt. Salle.

Pelli,p6i or pe", per gU. Pel]0>.

In ths garden, in the spirit, in the Nel giardlno, nello spirito, neOa

qa>n«ra.
No* glardint, negU spiriti, neOs
camere, Ac

2. In the article il the letter i la somethnes cut of!( and an apostrophe put in
Its stead, after a word ending with a wwel, bat not the vowel of that word.
This, however, Is more frequently thff case in poetry than in prose. Ex.

The whole country. I Tutto '1 paese.

Let him tell me his name. I Ml ifica '1 suo noma. •

3.Jlfi,fSci,vi,fM^«e,si,ci^ receive the apostropitt before a

vowel. Ex*

Ton understand me.
He understands it
He will mistake.
If he likes.

Vol m' intendete.
El V intende.
' 8' inganneri.
S* egli vuole.

1 Words ending in gli and ei are never abridged, unless the following word
begins with i, asr qutgff iniervaOi, these intervals; doic* ingamd, sweet lUa-
sions. But write ^uegH amiei, those friends, and not qu^ taiueL

< The oontractiona contained In this last line are less generally made uee oC

BIGHTY-SBCOIfD LESSON.

459

05*. C. Cs however, is nerer abridged More a, o, u, to vuAd hanhnen.
Ex.

We want. Ci abbisogna.

We are in want o£ Ci occorre.

They unite ns. ' Ci uniscono.

4. The words uno, bdiOf grande^ taiUOf qtulio, bwmOf are often abridged before
maacoline nouns beginning with a consonant or a Yowel, but nerer before
feminine nouns (except when beginning with a yowel), or before « followed by
a consonant. (See Obt.O., £t,, /., Lesson X.) Ex.

Un Ubro, un bel libro, un gran ca-

vallo. • '

San Pietro, quel soldato, bwm pane.
Un amibo, un beff uomo, grantP in-

gegno.
Sanf Antonio, gudP amore, huan

oratore.
Gran barca, gramP armata.

A book, a fine book, a large horse.

Saint Peter, that soldier, good bread.
A filend, a fine man, great genius.

Holy Anthony, that love, good orator.

Large boat, great amty.

6. Words tn the singular, haying one (not two) of the liquid consonants, 2,
m^n^r^ before their final vowelr may lose this, unless before words beginning
with «, followed by a consonant. The vowels after m and n are not so often
dropped as those after I and r, except in verbs, where the vowel after m is fre-
quently dropped. Ex.

The rising sun.
Tour weliare.
The serene sky.
FnU

Light wind.

Let us wait.
Let ns go.
Let us feign.

II sol nascente (uiffeod qf sole na-

scente).
n ben vostro {inaieod qf bene vo»-

tro).
II del sereno {imiiad qf ddo se-

leno).
Pien Senate {intUad qf pieno se-

nato).
Leggier vento {in&tead qf leggiero

vento).
Attendiam ijnUead qf attendiamo).
/^nHiam {fnaUad qf andiamo).
Fingiam {jnaUad qf fingiamo), Ac.

OU, D, Cannot be abridged :— (a) The words, o^ro, clear; rort^ rarei
nero, black ; omuto, dark ; and-some others. (&) The first person dnguiar of
the present of the indicative, as : Jo-pcrdanot I pardon % io mi coMola^ I console
myself Ac, except miio, first person singular and third person plural of the
auxiliary efMre. Ex.

I am ready:. Io son pronto {for \o sono pronto).

They are come. Eglino son venuU (/or e^no sono

V venuti).

6. InfiniU veo, when joined Uiviii,H,fi,vi,9i,ne,hf,la,U,lsglsoi%xicf othet
#ord, drop their final e. Ex.

To see him.

To feel one's sdf.

To repent.

Per vedeno (/or per vedere Io).
Sentird (/or sentire d).
Pentird {Jar pentire dj.

460 EIGUTY*8BC0ND LESSOR. j

I
Ob9. ff. Words haYing tbo gnrt accent an nerer abridged, aa> dirh, I I

■haftaay t for^ I will make ; fitieU^ happineea, Ac., except ehe, with its com-
pQiifeda: JMrdtt, miyl htmM^ although; meekl, therefore, bo that, Ac, whiHi
aM aoMBtUoaa il>ridged. Ex.

Because hl^waa. I Perch' era.

Tliough he might go. I Bench' andsMft, Ac J

AUGMENTATIONS.
1. When words beginning with « followed bj a consonant are preceded by one
of the prepositions <», eoi^jMr, or by the negative lum, the fetter i la prefixed
to them for the sake of euphony. (See Obt. F. Lesson LV.) Ex.

In the street
In a state (able).
With terror.
With study.
By mistake.
Do not jeau
Not to Stay.

In istrada {for In strada).

In Istato {far in state).

Con IspaTento {for con spaTcnto).

Con istudio {Jor con atudlo).

Per isbaglio {for per sbaglio).

Non ischezTata {for non scherxate)

Non istare {for non stare).

2. The prepoaltlott o, and the conjunctions e, s^ fi2 are changed into od, cd^
ec^ ntdt before a Towel ; od and tud^ howerer, are less frequently made uae of
thaA oif and ed. Ex.

To Anthony.
Yon and i.
We and ha.
Neither thoa nor she.

Ac< Antonio.

Voiedio.

NoiedeglL

EXERCISES.

246.

The Emperor (Charles the Fifth being one day out a hunting,
loet his way in the forest, and having come to a house entered it
to refresh himself. There were in it four men, who pretended to
sleep. One of them rose, and apnroaching the Emperor, udd
iiim he had dreamt he should take his watch, and took it Then
another rose, and said he had dreamt tnat his surUnU fitted him
wonderfully, and took it. The third took his purse. At last the
fourth cam^ up, and said he hoped he would not take it ill if he
searched him, and iix doing it perceived around the emperor's
neck a small gold chain to which a whistle was attached which
he wished to rob him of. - But the Emperor said : " My good
friand, before depriving me of (spogUare qualeuno di qtialche eosa)

BIOHTT-SECOND LESSON. * 46)

this trinket (tlgioieUo), I must teach you its virtue.*' S»xing
this, he whistled. His attendants (t su9i t^ziah), who i^ere
seeking him, hastened to the house, and were thunderstcuok
(saprt^atti daUo stupore) to behold his majesty in such a staii.
But the Emperor, seeing himself out of danger {Jitor di pericolo),
said (/£ prevenne tUeendo) : « These men {Ecco degU uomini che)
liave dreamt all that they liked. I wish in my turn also to
dream." And aRer having mused a few nnoments, he said : " I
have dreamt that you alL four deserve to be hanged:" which
was no sooner spoken than executed before the house.

A certain king making one day his entrance into a town at
two o'clock in the afternoon {dopo mezzo giomo), the senate sent
some deputies (un deputato) to compliment him. The one who
was to speak (poriar la parola) began thus (m qutsU termtni) :
*< Alexander the Great, the great Alexander," and stopped short
{e iosio t' arresio). — The king, who was very hungry {aver moUa
fame\ said : " Ah ! my friend, Alexander the Great had dined,
and I am still fasting." Having said this, he proceeded to {pro^
tegidre verso) the hdtel de viUe {U palazzo della eiUd)^ where a
magnificent dinner had been prepared for him.

247.

A good old man (im vetckierelh\ being very ill, sent for his
wife, who was still very young, and said tocher : " My dear, you
see that my last hour is approaching, and that I am compelled to
leave you. If, therefore, you wish me to die in peace you must
do me a favour {una graxia). You are still young, and will,
without doubt, marry again (rimaritarsi) : knowing this, I request
of you not to wed {prendere) M. Lewis (Luigi) ; for I confess
that r have always been very jealous of him, and am so still. I
should, therefore, die in despair (duperato) if you do not promise
me that." The wife answered : " My dear husband {ndo caro
marito), I entreat you, let not this hinder you from dying peace-
ably ; for I assure you that, if even I wished to wed him I could
not do so, being already promised to another."

It was customary with Frederick (Federico) the Great, when-
ever a new soldier appeared in his guards, to ask him three quea-

•1H-2 EIGHT Y-THISD LESSOM.

tions; viz. ** How old mre you ? How long have you been in
my aervioe ? Are you satisfied with your pay and treatment V
It happened that a young soldier^ bom in Franoe, who had senred
in his own country, desired to enlist in the Prussian service.
His figure caused him immediately to be accepted ; but he was
totally ignorant of the Grerman dialect ; and hb captain giving
him notice that the king would question him in that tongue the
first time he should see him, cautioned him, at the same time, to
learn by heart the three answers that he was to make to the king.
Accordingly he learnt them by the next day ; and as soon as he
appeared in the ranks Frederick came up to interrogate him : but
he happened to begin upon him by the second question, and asked
him, " How long have you been in my service ? " Twenty-one
years,'' answered the soldier. The king, struck with his youth,
which plainly indicated that he had not borne a musket so long as
that, said to him, much astonished : *< How old are you ?" *' One
year, an't please your majesty {con huma grazia della Maestd
Vostra)." Frederick, more astonished still} cried, "You or I
must certainly be bereft of our senses." The soldier, who took
this for the third queftton^ replied firmly (eon moUo sangue fred*
do) : ** Both, an't please your majesty {quando piaeda a Vosira
Mautdy

EIGHTY-THIRD LESSON.
Lezione ottaniesima terza*

TbdoubU.

The double.
Four Bhare, your part.
That merchant asks twice as much as

he ought.
Tou must bargain with him ; he will

g*-e it you for the hal£
you have twice your share.
Von have three times your share.

( Addopfiart !•

( Doppiare 1, raddoppiarB I.

II doppio.

La Tostra parte.

Questo mercante domanda U doppio.

Bisogna mercantegglare con lui;

glielo dahi per la meta prexzo.
Ella ha due volte tanto. .
£Ua ha tre volte tanto.

£IGUTy-THIRD LESSON.

468

To ranew.

To Btun.

WUd, giddy.
To shake somebody'B hand
Open, frank, real.

I tell you yes.
I tell you no.
I told him yes.
Itold him no.

To lay up, to put by.
Put your money by.
As soon as I read my book I put it by.

I do not care much about going to the
play to-night.

Rinnovare, rinnovellare 1.

Stordire (isco).

Stordito.

Stringere la manoa qualcuno.

Franco, aperto, schietto.

t VidicoflKsJ.
t Vi dico tU no.
t GUdissidiBi.
t Gli diss! di no.

{

Serrare 1, riporre * (posto, post).
Chiudere, rinchiudere * (chiuflO,

chusi).
Chiuda (chiudete) il di Lei (il yos-

tro) danaro.-
Appena ho letto il mio libro, lo ri-

pongo.
Non mi do molta briga d* andare

alio spettacolo questa sera.
Non mi euro molto d' andare alio

spettacolo questa sera.

To care.
To satisfy one^s self tnih a
iJdng.

I have been eating an hour, and I can-
not satisfy my hunger.

To he satisfied.

To quench otitis thirst,

I have baen drinking this half hour,
but I cannot quench my thirst
To have one^s thirst quenched.

To thirst for^ to be thirsty or
dry.

He is a blood-thirsty fellow.

On both sides, on every side.

On all sides

Darsi hriga, curarsi,
Saziarsi 1. -

/ E un' ora che mangio e non posso
J saziarmi.

I Mangio da un* ora e non piaso
^ saziarmi.

Essere saxio,
Dissetarsi 1.

k una mezz* ora che bevo, ma non

posso dissetarml.
Esser dlssetato.

Esser asseiato, aver gran sete.

pj un uomo assetato di sangue.
E un uomo sitibondo di sangue.
Da un canto e dall' altro. D' ambs

1 lati.
Da tutti i lati.

464

SIGBTT-THIKD L£S80N.

Allow me, my tody, to introdooe to you
Mr. G^ tn old friend of oiir liuniiy.

I em delighted to become acquainted
with you.

I ehaU do all in. my power to deeene
your good opinion.

Allow me to introduce to you Mr. B^
whoae brother baa rendered anch
eminent aervicea to your oouain.

How happy we are to ate you at our

It ia the fineat country in Europe.
Candia ia one of the moat agreeable
lalanda in the Mediterranean.

He Uvea in hla retreat like a

philoaopher.
You liTe like a king.
He acta like a madman.
Td behave like a blunderbnaa.
Who knocka aa if he were

where I am?

GkK>d morning.
You are oat very early.
I wiah you a good morning.
You roee early (In good time, tote).

Had you a good night*8 reati

Gk>od evening.

Goodnight
I wiah you a good night'a reet
I wiah you a good appetite.
I wiah yon the aame.
May it do you good.
A happy new year.
A happy journey.
I wiah you good luck.

God bleaa you.

God preaerre you.
When ahall I have the pleaaure of »

ing you again ?
Soon. In a short time.
Adieu ! till we meet again.

Permetta, Signora, ch' io Le pro-

aenti il Signdr dl O. come un vec-

chio amicb della noatra famjgjia.
Sono eontentiesinia, Signore, (mi d

gratiaaimo, Signore) di &r to di Lei

conoacenza.
Fard tutto cid che aari in mio potera

per rendermi degno deUe di Lei

buone grazie.
Signore, permettano ch' io Lor pre-

aena il Signof di B. il cui fratello

ha reao coai emlnenti aervigi al

Loro cugino.
Ah, Signore, quanto aiamo content*

di riceverto in caaa noatra I

fe il pi^ bel paeae delT Europe.
Candto d una delle iaole piik
del Mediterraneo.

Yive nel auo ritiro come un vera

filoaofo (da vero filoaofo).
Yivote (Ella viva) da re.
Si cqmporta come un forioao.
Condorai come uno atordito.
Crhi picchia da padrone ove aon lot

Buon giomo. Ben lerato.
Coai di buon' ora in piedL
Le auguro U buon giomo..
Yoaaignorto (EUa) a* i levataabuon'

ora (per tempo, tardi).
HaEUadormito (ripoaato) benel
Bttona aera (lelioa aera).
Buona notte (felice notte).
Ripoai bene. Donna bene.
Le angnro on buon appetita.
Parimenti.
Boon pre Letoeda.
Buon capo d' anno.
Buon viaggiOb
Le auguro (Le deaidero) un pn»>

pero aucceaao.
II ciel La benedica. -
Oio la guardi.
Quando avru il placere di rivedertol

I'resto. Fra poco (tempo).
Addio, Signore ! a rivedcrci.

BtGHTY-THJSD LESSON.

4ad

Tour ni38t honfbto B^ant.

Vour most obedient senrant.

I BTD entirely youn.

Adieu.

How l8 your Lordship 1

How do you do?

Well, at your senrice.

I am glad of it.

How is your health 1 .

I am well, very well, tolerably, so 00,

unwell.
Not too well. Sow.
You do not look yexy well.
What is the matter with you 7
I am a little indlspoaed.
I am sorry for it

Welcome, Sir.

I am happy to see you.

It seems a century since I had the
pleasure of seeing you.

It is a good while since I had the plea-
sure of seeing yoa»

Give this gentleman a chair.

Please to sit down.

Sit down. Be seated.

Sit by my side.

Take a chair.

I thank you, I prefer to stand.

Do not trouble yourself.

Do as if you were at home.

Do not make any compliments.

I will not trouble yon any longer.

Do you wish to leare already 1

« Stay a little longer.
I must beg you to excuse me this time.

r Umilissimo servo. M' inchino a

< Lei.

C Le sono schlavo.

{ Servo divoto. Divotissiroo servo.

1 1 miei rispetti. Padron riverito.
Son tntto suo.
La riverisco.

Come sta Vosaignoria lUustrissima 7
Come va '? Come se la passa 7
Bene, per servirla (per ubbidirla).

( Ne godo. Me ne rallegro. Me ne

c consplo.

Come sta V. S. {t\l&) di salute 1
Sto bene, ottlmamente, passabil-

mente, mediocremente, male.
Non troppo bene. Cos^ cosi.
Ella non ha troppo buona ciera.
Checosaha?

Sono un poco Indisposto (a).
Me ne displace. Me ne rincresee.

Ben venuta, Vossignoria.

Ml rallegro di vederla.

MI pare cent' anni che non ho avuto

11 placer di vederja.
k gii lungo tempo (d gta un bel pez-

zo) che non ebbi il piacere di

vederla.
Date una sedia (date da sedere) a

qnesto Signore.
Si serva. S' accomodi, La prego.

La supplico, resti servita.
Si metta a sedere. Resti a sedere.
Segga accanto a me.
Prenda una aedia.

La ringrazio, voglio restare'in piedi.
Non s* incomodi^ La prego.
Faccia conto d' essere a casa sua.
Non fate cerimonle (complimenti).
Non voglio recarle incomodo pib a

lungo.
Voglio levarle V incomodo.
Or mai se ne vuol andare? Se ne

vuolegii andare 7
Si trattenga ancora uo poco.
Per quests volta convien (bisogna)

che La preghi dl dispensarmene.

20*

466

KIGHTT-TUIRD LESSON.

Are yon In such a hwry 1

Yon are in a great huiry,. Sir.

I must go.

I have prening bnalneea.

I epealc Iranlcly.

I hope then to have the honouraa^hv

Favour me oltener (with yonr visits).

Farewell.

Till we meet again.

Ha poi tanta premural

Ha moita fretta, Slgnora.

Btaogna ch' io oie ne vada.

Ho degli afiari di premura.

Io parlo schietto, senza suggexioiie

Spexo dunque d' aver Y onora on* al-

travoita.
Hi iavorisca piik speaao.
Si conaerri.
A buon rivederct

It is the prerogative of great men to
conquer envy ; merit gives it birth
and merit destroys it.

Vinoer 1* invidia « privUeglo del
grand! uomini ; il merito la &
nascere, il merito la fit moiirs

EXERCISES.
248.

A man had two acms, one of whom liked to sleep very late in
the morning {itUia la nuUtina)^ and the other was very industri-
ous, and always rose very early. The latter (costui), having one
day gone out very early found a purse well filled with money.
He ran t» his brother to inform him (a fargli parte) of his good
luck {la hwma fortuna), and said to him : << See, Luigi, what fs
got (jguadagnarsi), by (a) rising early." — "Faith {in fede mia)?*
answered his brother, " if the person to whom it belongs had not
risen earlier than I, he would not have lost it."

A lazy young fellow being asked what made him lie {start^)
in bed so long — " I am busied {essere occupaio)" said he, " in
hearing counsel every morning.. Industry {il lavoro) advises
me to get up ; sloth {la pigrizio) to lie still ; and so they give
me twenty reasons pro and con { pro e contro). It is my part
{tocca a me) to hear what is said on both sides ; and by the time
the cause {la causa) is over {intesa) dinner is ready."

A beautiful story is related of a great lady, who, being {si
racconia tin bel tratto <2' — ) asked where her husband was, when
he lay concealed {essere nascosto) for having been deeply con*
cerned in a conspiracy {per essere stato complice. d^ una conspira-
xione,) resolutely {coraggiosamente) answered, she had hid him. «
This confession drew her before the king, who told her that

•UaHTT-THIBD LBSSON. 467

nothing but her diflcoyering wh^re her lord was concealed could
save her &om the torture (che turn poteva emtare la lortura quando
nan iscoprisse H ritiro del tuo sposo)* " And will that do (^-
iare) V* said t!le lady. ^* Yes/' said the king, " I give you my
word for it." " Then," says she, **I have hid him in my heart,
where you will find him." Which surprising answer (questa

risposta ammirdbile) charmed her enemies.

«■

249.,

Cornelia, the illustrious (iUu9tre), mother of the Gracchi {dei
Gracchi)f after the death of her husband, who left her with twelve
children, applied herself (amsacrossi) to the care of her family,
with a wisdom {con tal saviexza) and prudence {la prudenxa) that
acquired for her {che si acquisto) imiversal esteem {la stima unu
versale). Only three out of {fra) the twelve lived to the years
of maturity (f eta maiura) ; one daughter, Sempronia, whom she
married to the second Scipio ^Africanus {Scipione F Africano) ;
and two sons, Tiberius {Tiberio) and Caius {Caio), whom she
brought up {educare) with so much care, that, though they were
generally acknowledged {henchd si sapesse generahnentf) to have
been born with the most happy dispositions {Ja dtsposizione)^ it
was judged that they were still more indebted {pure si ritenevano
dehiiori—piu) to education than nature. The answer she gave
{fare*) a Campanian lady {vna dama della Campania) concern-
ing them {su di essi) is very famous {celeberrima), and includes
in it {rinchiudere*) great instruction for ladies and mothers.

That lady, who was very rich, and fond of pomp and show
{essere appassionato pel fasto e lo splendore)^ having displayed
{esporre*) her diamonds {U diamante), pearls {la perla), and
richest jewels {U aumi/s), earnestly desired Cornelia to let her see -
her jewels also. Cornelia dexterously {destramente) turned the
conversation to another subject to wait the return of her sons, who
were gone to the public schools. When they returned {ArrivaU
ehefurono), and entered their mother's apartment, she said to the
Campanian lady, pointing to them {mostrandoU) : '< These are
ray jewels, and the only ornaments {V unico omamento) I prize
lapprezzare)V And sUch ornaments, which are the strength {la

M6

EIOHTY-FOnKTR LB8SOV.

fwna^ and support (t/ notAtgrni) of soctetjr, add a brighter lustre
(im jrftt gran Aufro) to the fair (la M2ena) than all the jewela of
the East {dM OrienU).

EIGHTY-FOURTH LESSON.
Lezione ottantesima quarta.

CONSTRUCTION, OR SYNTAX.

1. The ngultr construction baa this principle for basisi that the governing
wo|d or part of spalch has always its place before the governed.

According to this principle, the subject or nominative, with all the words that
dwiermine it, takes the first place in the sentence i then follows the verb, then
tim elijective case (accusative), with all iu determinations, then the indirect
object (genitive, dative, or ablative), with its determinations ; at last the modi-
ficationi^ sbovTing the different circumstances of place, time^ Ac. Bz.

ManderO domani senza laDo U pUk
fedele del mief servitor! da Lei, per
restituiiie i manoscritti affidatimi da
qualche tempo ; e ha scrivo quests
cartolina, or bigllettino, acciochd mi
&ccia sapere V ora alia quale ii mio
servo La troveri in <

I shall surely send to-morrow the most

laithful of my servdkts to you, in

Older to return you the manuscripts

with which you have intrusted

me not long sgo ; and I write this

note to yifu, that you may let me

know the hour at which my serrant

vriil find you at home.
I have the honour to return you the

Italian book which you had the

goodness to lend me. 4 have read it

with much pleasure, and am very

much obliged to you for it .1

2. As for the irregular construction or inversion, which the Italians, in imi-
tation of the Latins, use very freely, it is impossible to lay down any fixed
rules} it depends entirely on the particular stress the person who writes or
speaks wishes to lay on certain words, which he then puts at the head of the
sentenoe. The foUowing sentence, which may be rendered in Italian in seven
different ways, may stand as an instance :

r Rendo me a voi

Ho I V onore di rimandarle il libro
itaUano che EUa ebbe la bonti dt
prestarmi. L' ho letto con molto
piacere, e gliene sono tenutissimo.

I sabmlt to you.

A voi rendo me.
Hi raado a voi.
Refkdemi a voi.
A voi mi rendo.
Vireadome. (NoA elegant).
Rendomivi.

bightV-pourth lesson. 469

L Inversionsi however, when used properly, contribute uncommonly to
elegance, beauty, and harmony of language. This may be exemplified in the
following beautifully constructed expression of Boccaccio, which if construded
regularly^ would lose all its harmony, beauty, and Ii^terest.

O dearest heart, all my duties towards
thee are fulfilled; I hav« nothing
else to do, hut to go with rof soul to
keep thee company.

O molto amato cnore, ogni mio officio
verso te ^ fomito, nd pih altro ml
rest* a fare, se non di venire con
la mia anlma a fiire la tua com-
pagnia-*

EXPLETIVES AND LICENSES.
1. Expletives, which the Italians call ripieno, L e. full, filled, are employed
tor the purpose of giving more emphasis, fulness, harmony, and elegance, to
the sentence. The principal are :

BELLO.

I have paid a bundjred crowns. I Ho pagato cefito begU scudl. '

Your suit of clothes is finished. | li di Lei vestito ^beUc fiitto.

I asked'him, if he had the courage to
send him away, and he answered,
yes.

Gil.

I do not think that you will take it'ill.
i flhould not like him to go.

Gli domandai, se gli bastasse 1' ani-
mo di «acciailo via : ed egll
riapose, s^ bene.

He is always repeating the same

things.
Always.

HON.

He is more learned than I thought
Learning is of greater value than
riches.

POX.

What he told me is not true. | Non d poi vero quanto mi disse.

PT7EB.

They are now dispoaed to come. . | Ora sono pur disposti a venire.
Ob§, A. This expletive is often used to strengthen the imperative. Ex.

Non credo giii che V avrete a (or pei)

male.
Non vorrei gul ch' egll partisse.

Toma mai sempre a dire V istesse

cose.
Mai sempre.

Egli i piu dotto ch' io non credeva.
La dottrina i di p\h gran prezzo die
hon le richezze.

1 Re-establish the regular construction, all the beauty, harmony, and lively
interest which is fek in reading it, disappears : " O cuore amato molto, ogni
mio oflScio d fomito vflrao te, nd mi resta p\h altro a fiire, se non di venire a farti
conipagnia con la mia anima."

t^^^ EIGHTY -FOURTH LSS801I.

Say (i. e. yoa have only to ny) DItejwrt.

Go (i. e. yoo may go). i Andate pure.

Give (i. 0. you may give). ' Date pur<.

▼lA.

An yoo willing to do iti do it I Volete &rlo 7 ma latelo.

I«et ua make peace, I Via facdam la pace.

MI, Ti, CI, Tf , 6I» vs.

I tbooght you were an Italian. lo mi credeva che vol foate ItaUano.

I wiah thou wouldat stay with ua this Deeidero che tu con noi H limanga

evening. queata sera.

Sheleft. E88aMn< parti.

I do not know whether you know that

He leads a gay life.

Non so ae Toi vi conoadate qneat

m^o.

Egli M la paan aaaai Iletamente.

II. As to the Ucensesi they are very numeroua in Italian, and are chiefly per-
mitted and made uae of in poetry, tIz*

a) Thfp letter v is sometimee left out, chiefly in the imperftct of the Indicative^
aa:

Avea, potea, finia, dee, deono, bee, bea, Ac. for
Aveva, poteva, finiva, deve, devono, beve, beva, Ac

b) Th» letters g and gg are sometimes substituted for other letten^ aa :
Segglo, veggio, caggio, veggendo, cheggio, veglio, q>egUo, Ac, for
Siedo, vedo, c«do, vedendo, chiedo, vecchio, apeccUo, Ac

c) The third person plural of the preterite definite of the indicative, ending
In orono, la often abridged into aro, chiefly in poetry, aa :

Amaro, legaro, andaro, for
Amarono, legarono, andarono.
d^ Tlia syllable at is often Kjected In poetry In the past participle, aa :
Colmo, adomo, chino, domo, oao, for:
Colmato, adomato, chinato, domato, osato, Ac
•) The letter o Is often added in poetry to the preterite definite of verba eadluf
hi In, aa:

Rapio, finio, eropio, uacio, for
Rapi, fini, empi, usci.
/) TIk articles delloideUa, degH^ det, deUe, are by the poets often written.

Dtlo,dtla,degH, dcH^dcU,
Ob§. B. A great number of figurative, as well aa Latin vrorda, are also naad
by the Italian poets, which are hardly ever used in prose i thus you will find :

Air, sword.
Poem, food.
Ship, carriage.

Aer for aria ; hrando for apada,
CormeforMrM; eMS for ei&o.
Legno for mmiUo or corrocaa.

Eye8,hand. lAtmibiftocchitpabnafoimasia,

BeU.
Ever.

Poet, men, heroes, Ac
OU, GL No abridgment takes place /

SquUla for campana.

UnquOf unquandu, tm^uanes^ foi

mat.
VaU fbrpoetai viri for nnun^ Ac

EIGHTY-FOVBTH LESSON. 411

a) In die last word of a sentenoe, chiefly in prose.

b) In the words which have an accent on their last syllable, except the with
Its compounds, as : betiM^ perchif jtoiM^ Ac.

c) In words ending in a before a consonant, except the adverbB, aUora^ talora,
aneora, Ac., and the word •uora, sister, when used as an a4JectiTe. Say akuna
fiertonoy netnma peno, and not oZcim mtssno, newun pena,

d) In words terminating in a diphdong, as : oechio, tp^chWf eambio, dc. '

EXERCISES.
• 250.
JP0LITBNBS8 (Creohxa).

When the Earl of Stair was at the court of Louis tde Fourteenth,
his manners, address, and conversation, gained much on the
esteem and friendship, of that monarch. One day, in a circle of
his courtiers, talking of the advantage of good breeding and easy
manners, the king offered to lay a wager he would name an Eng-
lish nobleman that should excel in those particulars any French-
man of his court. The wager was jocularly accepted, and his
majesty was to choose his own time and place for the experiment.

To avoid suspicion, the king let the subject drop for some
months, till the courtiers thought {ande far credere) he had forgot-
ten it ; he then chose the following stratagem : he appomted Lord
Stair, and two of the most polished noblemen of his court, to take
an airing with him after the breaking |ip of the levee (aZT usdre
del grand lever) ; the king accordingly came down the great staiiv
case at Versailles, attended by those three lords, and coming up
to the side of the coach, instead of going in first as usual, he
pointed to the French lords, to enter; they, unaccustomed to the
ceremony, shrunk back, and submissively declined the honour ;
he then pointed to Lord Stair, who made his bow, and sprang into
the coach ; the kii^ and the French lords followed.

When they were seated, the king exclaimed : " Well, gentle-
men, I believe you will acknowledge I have won my wager."
" How so, Sire?" " Why," continued the king, " when I desired
you both to go into the coach, you declined it ; but this polite for-
eigner (pointing to Lord Stair) no sooner received the commands
of a king, though not his sovereign, than be instantly obeyed'

479 810BTY FOURTH LESSON.

The courtiers bung down their heads in oonfiisioD, and aoknow
lodged the justice of hb majesty's claim.

251.

• kildukss.

The mildness of Sir Isaac Newton's temper through the ccune
of his life commanded admiration from all who knew him ; but
in no instance perhaps more than the following. Sir Isaac had a
favourite little dog» which he calLed Diamond ; and 1>eilig one
day called out of his study into the next room, Diamond was left
behind. When Sir Isaac returned, having })een abeent but a
few minutes, he had the mortification to find that Diamond, hav-
ing thrown down a lighted candle among some papers, the nearly
finished labour of many years was in flames, and timost consumed
to ashes. This loss, as Sir Isaac Newton was .then very fiir
advanced in years, was irretrievable ; yet, without once striking
the dog, he only rebuked him with this exclamation : " O, Dia-
0K»id t Diamond ! thou little knowest the mischief thou hast
done."

Zeuzis (Zeusi) entered iato a contest of art with Panrhasius
(Parratioy The former paivted grapes so truly, that birds came
and peeked at them. The latter delineated a curtain so exactly,
that Zeuxis coming in said : << Take away the curtain that we
may see this piece." And finding his error, said : " Parrhasius,
thou hast conquered : I only deceived birds, thou an artist."

Zeuxis painted a boy carrying grapes ; the birds came again
and peoked. Some applauding, Zeuxis flew to the picture in a
passioA, saying : <' My boy must be (hisogna dire ehe^-e) very
ill paittted."

The inhabitants of a great town oflered to Marshal de Turenne
one hundred thousand crowns upon condition that he should take
another road, and not march his troops their way. He answered
them : " As your town is not on the road I intend to maroh, I
cannot accept the money you ofier me."

A corporal of the life-guards of Frederick the Great, who had
a great deal of vanity, but at the same lime uus n brave fellow.

tflOHTT-FIFTH LESSON. - 47$

firore a watch-chain, to which he affixed a musket- bullet instead of a
watch, which he was unable to buy. The king, being inclined
one day to rally him, said : " Apropos, corporal, you must have
been very frugal to buy a watch : it is six o'clock by mine ; tell
me what it is by yburs ?" The soldier, who guessed the king^'s
intention, instantly drew out the bullet from his fob, and said :
'< My watch neither marks five nor six o'clock ; but it tells me
every moment, that it is my duty to die for your majesty."
" Here, my friend," said the king, quite affected, " take this
watch, that you may be able to tell the hour also." And he gave
him liis watch, which was adorned with brilliants.

252.

My dear friend (catissima arnica), — As we have next Tuesday
several persons to dinner whose acquaintance, I am sure, you
would be delighted to make, I request you to add by your presence
to the pleasure, and by your brilliant and cultivated mind to the
mirth of our assembly. I hope you will accept my invitation,
and awaiting your answer I send you. a thousand compliments.

Dearest friend {amadssima arnica), — I accept the more readily
your very kind invitation for Tuesday next, as my disappoint-
ment at seeing so little of you latterly has been very great. I
thank you for your kind remembrwioe, and send you a thousand

EIGHTY-FIPTH LESSON.
Lezione ottantesima quinta.

TREATISE OF THE ITALIAN VERBS.

I. CONJUGATION OP THE AUXILIARY VERBS,

Essere, to be, and Avtre, lo have.

PrettrU of the Ir\finUive (Infinito Presente).
Avere, to iMve. ) Eaaere, to be.

474

fciGarir^fiFTH lesson.

Ptuiqf HU hyinUiv (Infintt* PuMto).
Aran Avuto^ to havo had. | Eaaere auto, to have been.

PrmaU PartiapU (Participio Preeente).
Aruido,^ haTing. I Eaaendo, betng.

Pati PartkipU (Partidpio Paaaato).
Mate Avato ; Jtm. aTota. I JMoac Slato ; fim. atata.

Phtr. ATUti ; fm, avute. I Pbir. Stad s fm, atata.

lo ho (i), aee Leaaon

Notel).
Ta hai (il),

r (3 !-■(*)

Not abbiarao,

Voi avete,

Egllno (eaai) ) hanno

KUeno(eaae)5(iimo),

Aveva (avea),

AyeTi,

Avera (avea),

ATenuDO,

Ayerate^

AtoYano (aveano),

mOICATIVE (IndlcatlTO).
Prwertf QPieaente).
VII^ I baV6.fIoaoDa|

thou hast

ihe haa.
ahehaa.
we have.,
you have.

have.

I they

Ttt 861(80*),

EgUfMao)^.

EUa(ea«a)j''

NoitlaBWi

Voiaieic,

RgUno (essi)

£UeD0(<

!!■

thou aft.
Chela,
(aheia.

we are.

you are.

they are.*

Jmptrjtfd (Imperfetto).

I had.
thotthadat.
he had.
we had.
yon had.
they had.

loer^
Tueri,
Egliera^
Nol eraTamo,
Vol eravate,
Eaaleraoo,

thonwasu
hewaa.

Ebll,

ATead,

Ebbey

Pr4itHU DeJfnUe (Ppsato Rimoto).

^feete,
Ebber0|

Ho
Hai

Abbiamo [
Avete
Hanno. J

I had.
thouhadat.
he had.
we had.
you had.
they had.

Fill,

POBti,

Fn (poet, fue),

Fummo,

Foste,

Furono (poet foro),

you were,
they ^

Iwas.

thou

hewaa.

we were.

you

they

PreUrpgrfeet (Paaaato Prosaimo).

{I have
thauhaat
yonlutve I
they'havo J

had.

Sono
Sei

Siamo.

Siete.

Sono

>Btato: [
i/effi.8tata,^

?«tati;
i/em. atate,

I have
I thon hast

he haa
r wehaye
) you have
( they have/

1 There ia another preaent participle, whieh ia aeldom uaed aa such, viz.
avente^ having (See Leaeon LYII.).

9 The peraonal pronouna : te^ I ; fu, thou ; egli^ he ; etto, ahe^ Ac, are not in-
dispensable in the Italian conjugation. You may as well say : asno, ««, 2 ;
aerii, avrai^ avri, aa: £o, wonOj tu Mt, egUi; io avrd, tu ovrat, egU ovrd. But
when there is a particular stress to be put on the person, or when an ambigu-
ous meaning ia lo be avoided, the pronouna muat be expreaeed. Ex. NoiHame
'" - »'«^ rot. Wo arp H*Hy»lved, not you.

EIGHTY-FIFTH LiwiSON.

171

Pikperfed (Trapaaaato).

IllBahad,Ac.

I had been, de.

Avera

Era \ ^

Avevi

Eri J«i»to8

-

AvevB

E„ ^/«ii.BtatiL

Avevamo

•ftyat*. .

Eravamo x

Avevate

Eravate (■'»** 8

•

Avevano

Erano K*^' •**•*

PreUriU Anterior (Paaaato Rimoto Composto).

Ibadhad,^. Ihadbad,4e.

Ebbi

AvesU

Ebbe

Avemmo

>ayuto.

Fummo j

Aveste

roste y^^i

Ebbero .

Furono i/«n-«t*t«-

FSOure (Futuro Imperfetto).

Avrd,

lahallhave.

Sard,

I shall be.

Avnd,

thou wilt have.

Sarai,

thouvdltbe.

AytI.

he will have.

Sara,

he wUl be.

Avremo,

we ahall have.

Saremo,

we ahall be.

Avreto,

you will have.

Sarete,

you will be.

ATranno,

they wiU have.

Saranno,

they WiU be.

' FSUure Pa»t (Futuro Peifetto).

ATTd ^

lahaUbavehad.

3ard \ atato;

I ahall have

AynX'

thou wilt have had,

Sarai { /em.

been.

AtA,

dc.

SarA > atata.

thou wilt have

Avremo

avuto,

9aremo ^ atati ;

been, de.

Aneto

Sarete V fm.

Avranno

.

Sarapno ) atate.

^ Coii<li<Mna{PreKfii(CondizionalePre8ente).

ATiel,

I should have. '

Sarei, I ahould be.

Avrasa,

thou wouldst baTe.

Sareati, thou wouldat be

A^ebbe(pc

let. he would have.

Sarebbe (poet. he would be.

afrta).

aaria, fora).

ATTemmOy

we ahould have.

Saremmoi we ahould be.

ATieate,

ywi would have.

Sareate, yon would be:

Avrebbero

they would have.

Sarebbero, they would be.

(poet avrl

ano).^

(poet, aaziano, aaricno, forano.)

jra$i CandUumal (Condizionale Paaaato).

ATiei

lahoiadhave

Sarei ^ atato ;

I ahould have

AvTeaU

had.

Saieati ( fan.

been.

Avrebbe

thou wouldst
^^^«^^- have had,

Sarebbe J atata.

thou wouldat

Ayremmo

Saiammo ^ atati;

have been,

ATreate

<ftc.

Sareste i fern.

Ac.

Ambbero

Sarebbero > atate.

476

KK.firY-FLKTH UCSSON.

Pretent of At SuhjuwHu (Congiqiptivo'Pi isente).

Che io Al^bia, tliat I may have.
" tuabbia(abbi), that thou mayest

. have.

•* egli abbla,
** noi abbiamo,
•' vol abbiate,
" easi abbiano,

that he may have,
that we may have,
that you may have,
that they may have.

Che io^sia,
" tu aia (aU),

" egU aia,
** noi aiamo,
" voi aiate,
" eaai aiano,

that I «nay la.
that thotf mayna

that tke may ha.
that we may be.
that yott may be
that they may bt

( Invptrftd iff tiu SubJunUict (Imperfetto del Congiantivo).

S* io aveaai, If I had. I S' io foaai, If I were.

Setciaveaai, ifthouhadat. | Se tu fosai, ifthoawert.

S* e^li afiaaae, if he had, \ S' egli foaao, if he were,
Se noi aveaaimo, dc. Sa noi fbasimo, Ac

Se voi aveate, Se voi fqate.

8' eaai aveeaero. S' eaai fosaero.

Petfeet of the Subjundwe (Paaaato Proasimo del Congiuntivo).

That I may have had, dc.
Ch* io abbia
Che tu abbla (abbi)
Ch' egli abbU
Che noi abbiamo
Che voi abbiate
Ch* eaai abbiano

avuto.

That I may have been, Ac.
Ch' io aia %

Che tu aia (all) i stato ; /em. atata
Ch' egU aU 3
Che Boi aiamo i
Che voi aiate > atati ; /et
Ch' eaai aiano 3

Pktperfeet qf th» SuijuneHM (Trapaaaato dd Congiuntivo).

IfIhadhad,Ac.
B'ioavead
Se tu avead
S'egli avesaa
Se noi aveaaimo
Se vol aveate
S'egUno

avuto.

If I had been, Ac
S* io foaai p

Se tu foaai > atato ; fnu aUta
S'egUfoaae >
Se noi foaaimo ^

Se voi foate V atati ; fern, atate.
S' eaai foaaero 3

Abbi,

Abbia,

Abbiamo,

Abbiate,

Abbiano,

IMPERATIVE (ImperaUvo).
(No* firat person lingular.)

Have (thou).
let him (her) have,
let UB have.
have (ye),
let thesi have.

SM (8ia)«,

Sip,

SianMH

S^ite.

Siano,

fie (thon).
let him (her) be.
, let ua be.
be (ye),
let them be

OBBSBVATIONS.

A. Thtrt i9f la in Italian rendered by euere, preceded by e» or vi. Ex.

* The second person alngular of the imperative la rendered by the in6nitiv«
when it is negative Ex. Non cutrt^ be thou not ; non avere^ huve thou Qu*
(Lesaon LXXI.).

EIGBTY-FIFTH LBS302t.

477

There ,* a groat quantity.

Ther««a0peopleu

There wm once a wioe Oreclao.

There were nations.

There has been a singer.

There wen princes.

Is there any physician here 'I

C hiv' h) una gran quantiti.
Ci «mo (in sono) delle persone.
C tra una volta un saTio Greco,
f* erono de* popoU.
C i Mtata una cantatrice.
Cimmostaii de* principi.
O (9* 2) or eeci (ervt) qi^ un quel-
che medico 1

B. Instead of emere, a9tr% ooold In some cases be used, and may stand In the
singular, though the substandve be in the plural Ex.

There are princes.

There are many things.
There are' many poor y^plo.

F' ha (instead of x^ htmno) de* prin-

elpL
IB ha molte cose.
V* ha (or Aorot) molta gente povenu

C. liqfU 01 if than is undentood, it is tendered by ne. Ex.

There is no more of Iti
There are many of them.
There were only two (of them).
There are no physicians here.
I do not think that there are any.

Noneen' dplii.

Cb 7U 9Cfno molti.

Non Mfi' erano che due.

Medici qui non ce nt §ono,

Non credo che ve n* abbia.

D, Sometimes it may be rendered by n <2d or «t cfonno. Ex.

There Is nothing worse In the world. | Non n (id al mondo cosa peggiore.
There are some who pretend. | Si danno dl qnelli che sostengono,

E. The adverbs e^ m, are left out when time Is spoken of. Ex.

It is a month. It is two yeare.

A few months ago.

It is a long while sinio 1 saw her.

This happened two nwuths ago.

^ un mese. Sono due annl.
Pochl meal oono (or pochi med/a).
is un bel pezzo, che non P ho ve-

duta.
Cld aeeatUU due mesi/o.

P, Avert and etftrt are followed by the preposition da before the infinitive,
when they are employed iB the signification of mutt or thaU. Ex.

Tou shall do It thus.

Avde da farlo coai (Instead oC doodo

/alio cost),
Egli ha da sapere.
Ahbiamo tuttl da morhre.
l£ da teroersl.
Egli non 2 da scusare.

He shall know.

We must all die.

It is to be feared.

He is not to be excused.

O. In other instances a precedes the infinitive. Ex.
I should like to ask a hvour of you. l Aorei a pregarla d' un favors.
She went to see her. | EUa/u a rtlrovorlok

11. CJONJUQATION OF THE REGULAR VERBS.

Present qfihe InjBiUive (Infinltlvo Presente).
Parlare, to speak. | Credere, to believe. | Nutrire, to nourish.

Pati qf the InJnUioe (Infinltivo Passato).
Aver parlato, to have I Aver creduto, to have I Aver nutrlto, to have
spoken. I believed. I nourished.

478

SIOHTT-JIFTH LSSSON.

Pre$eni PartidpU (Partioipio Pwsente).
•peaking. I beliering. I nonrishiiig.

Parkto, ipokeii.

Past ParHapU (Partidplo Patnto).

I Cnduto, beliered. | Nutiito, nouzidied.

Parl-o.

Li9eak,*e.

INDICATIVE (Indioitifo).
JPreBoU (Preaente).

I beliere, Ac.
Cred-o.

— i.

— ^

— iamo.

I ntfniiab, Ac
Notr-o, (mw).

— % (iwe).

— iamo.

— Ita.

Pail-sva.
— avL

— ttfata.

— ITaBO.

I ipoke, or did epflak,
Ac.
PftiNd.
— aatL

Imperfect (Imperfetto),

I beUeved, Ac.
Cred-eva (aa).

— evi.

— era («o).
^» cwno.

— erato.

— e?ano (aoiio).

PrdniU D^iU (Paaaato Rimoto).

I nouriahed, Ac
Nutr-iva {in).

— ItL
^iYa(ia).

— iTamo.

— ivata.

— Ivano.

— arono.

I belieyed, or did

beliere, Ac

Cred-el, (etU).

— eati.

— a, (ette).

I have qwken, Ac

Ho 1

Hai I

Ha

Abblamo

Avete

Hanno

— eate.

«^ erono, (attero)

FriUrperftd (Paasato Proaaimo)

I nooriahed, or did

nonriah, Ac
Natr-iL

— lad.
-t

— immo.

— iate.

— irono.

xparlato^

IhaTabaU«ved,Ac

eteduto^

I have nouriahed, At

nntritc

« There ia tfala difoence between the two piaaent participlea, that the firat in
aindo, endo applies to a person vhUt speaking, belieying, Ac. ; and the aecond in
9nU, mU to a peraon wAo speaks, believes, Ac. (See Lesson LVII.)

EIGDTY-FIFrH J.ESSON.

47d

Flupetfeet (T»apassatO).

1 had spoken, Ac.

Aveva
Avevi

IhadbeUeved,A&

1 had nourished, Ae.

Aveva '
Avevamo
Avevate
Avevano

>par]at<]^

creduto,

nutrita

FreieriU Anterior (Passato Rimoto oomposto).

Ihads
Ebbi
1 Avesti

poken, Ac.

I had believed, Ac.

I had nourished, Ae.

Cbbe
Avemmo
Aveste
i^bbero

>parlato,

•

creduto,

nutrito.

Puiure (Futuro Imperfetto).

I shaU speak, Ac
(arl-ei^..

— erA.
*. eremo.

— erete.

— eraono.

I shall beUeve, Ac
Cred-erd.

— end.

— crt

— eremo.

— erete.

— eranno.

I shall or will nourish, Ao
Nutr-ird.

— iral.

— irtu

— Iremo.

— irete.

— iranno.

PiOurcPaU (Futuro Perfetto).

I shall h

Avrd
Avnd

ave spoken,
Ac.

I shall have believed,
Ac

rshaUhavenqnriahad»
Ac

AvrA

Avremo

A

*parlato,

creduto.

nutrito.

Avranno

QmdUim

uU Pt uent (Condiiionale Preaente).

1 shottU
spet
Parl-erel.

— erestL
-^ erebbe

— ereste.

— erebbe

1 or would
Ik, Ac.

0.

ro

I should or would
beUeve, Ac.
Cred-ereL

— eiestL

— erebbe.

— eremroo.
~ ereste.

— erebbero

I should or would
nourish, Ac.
Nutr-irei.

— irestL

— irebbe.

— irenimo.

— ireste.

— irebbero

480

EIGHTY-PIFTH LESSON.

Cmdmoiud Pari (CoDdi^onale PaMsto).

I ahould or would ha?e
•pokgD, Ac

Avrestl
Avrebb .
ATremmo f P*n*to.
Aneste
ATrebbero

I ihonld or would hmve
believed, Ac

cnduto^

I sboold or would
DOttriabed, Ac.

nntrito.

PreaaU of tU Suiffynetive (CongiundYO Preaente).

That I may apeak, Ac. That I may beMoTe, Ac. That I may nourish, <
Ch' lo parM. crad-a.

— I.

-iaCb.
-ino.

— iate.

— ano.

(iiea).
(Uca)

— iate.

— ano (m

Imperftd qf ike Sul^^wuihe (Imperfetto del COngiuntiTo).

If lapoke^Ac.
^Mopari-aaaL

• aaalmo.
aate.
aaeero.

IfIbeUeved,Ac.
cred-eaal.

— eaaimo.

— eate. •

— eaaero.

IflDOuriahed, Ac
nutr-iaaL ^

— iael

— iaae.

— iaaimo.
^ iate.

— iaaeio.

Prderpeifcei tf the SubJuneHoe (Paaaato Pioaaimo dd CongiuntiTO).

That I may have
ipoken, Ac.
Cbf io abbU
Che tu abbia
Ch'egUabbia
Che noi abbiamo
Che vol abblate
Ch'eaaiabbiano.

par-
lato,

That I may have
believed, Ac

credttto,

That I may have
aouiiahed, Ac

nutrito.

Plupm^pKi 4(fihe SubfuneUve (Trapaasato del Congiuntivo).

If I had apoken, Ac,
S' lo aveasi
Setuaevesal
S' egll aveaae
So noi aveaalmo
Se vol aveate
S* eaai aveaaoro

parla
^ to.

If I had believed, Ac

creduto^

If I had nourished, Ao

nutrito.

SIGHTY-FIFTU LESSON.

481

IMPEaATIVE (ImperaUvo).

%eak (thou), see note

3,

Believe (thou),

1 NoTirlBh(thou),

p. 476, Ac

Ac.

Ac.

Pul-a.

Cred-i.

Nutr-i. (wet.)

— L

— a.

- a. (i«i.)

— imo.

— iamo.

— iamo.

— at&

— ete.

— Ite.

.— ino.

— ano.

— ano {iaemu

>.)

III. CONJUGATION- OP THE PASSIVE VJOICE.
Obff. Tofonn the pasaive voice the Italians use to place before the past par-
ticiple of the active verb the auxiliary Mtere, but often also, and mpre elegantly,
one of the verbs, ventre, to come ; aidare, to go ; reBtare, to rest ; rimanartf to
remain ; wtare, to stop, stay, to express with more emphasis a continuance of
action.* (See Lesson XLII. and XLIX.)

JPreaent of the InftnUiveJl\n&nito Presente).

Essere amato or amata, to be loved.

Poii qfAe Infinitive (Infinitb Passato).

Essere slato amato or stata amata, to have been loved.

PrtBrni PartiapU (Participio Presente).

Essendo amato, amata, amatl, amate, being loved.

PqH ParlieipU (Participio Passato) .

Stato amato, stata amata, stati amatl, state amate, been loved.

INDICATIVE (IndicaUvo).
PretaU (Presente).

losono

or

vengo amato, /em. a.

I am loved.

Tusei

II

vieni amato, " a,

thou art loved.

Eglld

II

viene amato.

he is loved.

Ellad

11

viene amata.

Noi alamo

II

veniamo amati, " e,

we are loved.

Voisiete

II

venlte amatl, " e.

you are loved.

Bssisono

If

vengono amati, )
vengono amate, i * *

they are loved.

Essesono

II

VUnlodaiodatutti,

Venne aeeutati,

VctURnobiastinate,

Qfieata voce va posta prima,

JV(8 reBtai (or rinuui^ maravigUato (in-
stead of ne/ui maravigUaio),

Emu non ne ruth (/u) perntoM,

/ cavoUi 9tanno \jKno) aUacoH alia car^
rozzOf

. He is praised by every body
' She was accused.
, They will be blamed.

This word must be placed at the hcao

iMras quite surprised 9$ it.

She wan not convinced ol it
The horses are put to the carriage.

21

KIOHTT-yiFTH LBSSON.

hnptaftd (Imperfetto).

lo en «• TenlTa amato, ftm. a, I wm IotwL

Ta«ri " ▼eniti »n»to, " a, thou wert lofad.

EgUara " vanlTa amato, he wallowed.

Bihera TenlTa amata, the wai loved.

Nol eivramo '* venivamo amati, *< e, we were 1

VWeiaTate •* Tenlfate amat^ " ^ you were - ^ lored.

Baalerano " ▼enlTano amatS, > theywere J .

BaaeeraHo " Teolvano amate S

PnUnUde/biiU (Paaaato Rimoto).

Afui

or

Tenni amato, /wi. a, Iwaa

Tafoaa

CI

TenlaU amato, " a, thouwert

figUfii

(C

venne amato, hewai

RUafii

M

venne amata, ahewai

u

Tenlmmo amati, " e, we wore

▼oLfoate

It

Teniate amati, " e, you were

EiBlfiiiQno

U

vemieio- amati, ?. .they were .
Tennero amate, >

Ene ftnoDo

CI

Fr§Urp§rfed (PaiMito Pronimo).

loaoDoatoto amato h haw been loved, dc
. lo iOBo eUta amaU >

Nol alamo rtatiamatl)^^,^^^,,^,^^^^
N<d alamo atate amate ^

Pluperftd (Trapaaaato).
lo ere auto amato, Ac I had been lomd, Ac

Obi The PrtUriU Anterior of the paaalTO voice: ioj^ m/UOo withmyia
pvtielple, li not used in Italian.

fVcfurt (Futuzo).

U nxd >r yerrd amato or a, Ac I ahall be loved, Ac

F\awrt Paid (Futuro Pei&tto).

lo and atalo amato, Ac I ahall have been loved, Ac

ConHUiomeA prueni (Condiiionalo preoente).

lo lanl or verrel amato or amata, I ahould be

Ta aareoti " venreati amato ** amata, thou wouldat 1
Egliaarebbe " verrebbe amato, he would b<

BUa aarebbe verrebbe amata, Ac ahe ahould I

ildatbe 1, ,

Ibe ?«<*^««i<

Id be J

OmdUianai Pott (Condizionale Paaaato).
lo aani atato amato, Ac I ahould have been lovnl

EIOHTy •FIFTH L£SSON.

489

— tuBia

— egtisia
«— ellaaia
^ DoisUmo
-» yoi state

— eaaisiaiio

that thou maytt be
that he may be
that she may be
that wo may be
that you may be

that they may be

1

^loTed.

Iflwereloredy Ae.

PftHni qf the SuJbjunetice (Congiuntivo Presente).
or Tenga amato or amata, that I may be
Tenga amato" amata,
yenga amato**
Tenga amata ^ '
yenlamo amati *
yeniate- amati"
yengano amati
yeogano amata
hniptiiftd qf iki SuJtjtmciive (Impexfetto del Ck>ngiQntiyo).
8e io foasi or yenisai amato or amata, ^

-> tn fbsai '* yenisai amato '< amata,

•» egli fosse " yenisse amato,
«- elia fosse ** yenisse amata,

— Boi foBsimo ** yenissimo amati " amate,

— yoiibste '* yeniste amati " amate,
^ esai fossero ** yenissero amati,

— esse fossero " yenissero amate^

Petfed qf the SutjtmeHivt (Paasato Profesimo del Qongiuativo).
Ch' io 9iA stato amato, ^

Ch' io sia stata amata, Ac. (That I may haye been lorod^

Che noi siamo stati amati, f Ac

Clie noi siamo state amate, Ac J

Phxperfod qf fk^ SubftmcUve (Trapassato del Congiuntifo).
Se io fossi stato amato, Ac If I had been loyed, Ac

ftV. MODEL OF THE CONJUGATION OF A REFLECrnVB

VERB GOVERNING THE ACCUSATIVE (See Lessons XLIU.

•adXLIV.).

If^lnUioe Prtoeni (Innnito Piesente).

Difendersi, to defend one's selt

h^fimSJUiot PoMt (Infinito Passato).
Essersi difeso, to haye defended one's self.
PrioaU PartidpU (Partidpio Preaente).

Difendenteai *, defffldtng one's sell

* * The partidple, joined to the difierent pronouns^ would be thus :

haying defended

myself,
haying defended

thyself:
haying defended

lilmselforhenelt
having defended

ourselyes.
having defended

youxselyec
haying defended

thamselfes

Difendendomi, defending myselt

DifendendoU,

M

thyselt

Difendendoci,

II

11

himself or

hersell

oarselyec

DUendendoyi,

II

yoniadvea.

DifendendosI,

U

themselyos.

Essendond'
Essendoti

Essendoyi
Essendosi

484

BIOHTT-nFTB LBSSOK.

PmrUeipU Pad (PirUdpio Pu^ato).
Dife«>Bl,1

5!?T?' Idefendedone'iieli:
Dlfedd, I

Di&Md,J

INDICATIVB (In<>icadT0).
PrcMtf (PrMente).

TaUdilendl, thov ^efendeit th]rM£

Vol vi diliBndete^ you defend jovntt/m.
^JBidlfendon<H they defend themaehree.

lOdlfendflTt.
TldlfiwderL
mdUeodeTa.

Imperfedil
I defended

jnpeifetto).
myaelf;Ac

CI difenderamo.

Yi difenderate.

Sidifenderano.

MidiM.

TldOuidMd.

SidUMe.

FrderiU D^bdU (Ptaeato Rimoto).
I defended myself; Ac.

ddifendemmo.

Vidlfeiitota.

SIdifeaero.

IhaTe defend
TtMl 1 difMO}/Mi.dlibtaV.

laaato Proaaimo).
ed myael^ Ac.

CI alamo %

Viaieto >dife8l|/Mi.difeM.

Si aono \

Ihaddefendf
10 em J

Tl^Vt dUMOi/Mi.dUeBa.
dlen)

rrapaaaato).
sdmyael^Ao.

Ci enTamo i

Vierayate ;difed|/<«i.dlfeM

Sierano. >

PnUriU Anterior {VnM
Ihaddefimdi

TllbMi (difMO;/Mi.dIieMU

Mlmyae](«c.
Clftunmo )
Vifoate [difeaii/em.dlfe8e.

Si ftirono )

V TIm reflective irerba in Italian being conaiderad aa paaalTe, take in thnir
CQPP<wPd tenaea the anziliary eaetrt, wUeli agieea in genider and number with

BI6HTT-F1FTH LESSON.

48^

Mi difendeid.
Ti difeoderaL
Si difendera.

Mi sard

Tlsarai ^ difeao ^ /em. difesa.
Si sari >

PuiuTe PreBOfU (Futuro Jmperfetto).
I shall defend myself Ac.

Ci difenderemo
Yi difenderet&
' Si difenderanno.
Future Past (Futuro Perfetto).

I shall hare defended myself, Ac.
Cisaremo ^
I Visarete >difesii.;%iii. difbM
Si saranno )

Conditional Present (Condizionale Presente).
I should defend myself Ac.
Mi difendereL | Ci dlfenderemmo.

Ti difenderesti. VI difendereste.

Si difenderebbe. I Si dlfenderebbero.

CondUUmalPatt (Condizionale Passato).
I should have defended myself Ac.

Misarei %

Tiaaresti > dileao ; /em. diiesa.

Sisarebbe )

Ci saremmo
Yi sareste
Si sarebbero

^difesi;/Mi.difiBM.

Cheiomidilenda.
— tn ti difeoda.

Present qfthe subJuneHoe (O>ngiuntivo Presente).
That I may defend myself; Ac.

:£l-

difenda.

Che noi ci difendiaino.

— TOi vi difendiata.

"~®^ ^sidifendano.

— esse )

Sa mi di&ndessi.

— UdUiendesaL

— si difendesse.

Impeifeet qfthe SvhfuneHve (Imperfetto del Crongiuntiro).
If I defiBDded myself; Ac

Se ci difendessimo.

— vi difendeste.

— si difendesserou

Prettrperfod qf the ^Jbjunetvoe (Passato Prossimo del Congfontivo).
That I may have defended myself Ac.

Chemist i

— tisia >difeso;yMii.dife0a.

— sisia >

Chedsiaaio

— Ti siate

— sisiaoo

dife8ii/em.difti8.

PUnptifoet qf ths Subjunethe (Tfapassato dpi CragtantiTo).
If I had defended myself Ac.

8e mi fossJ i

^ ti fossi >difeso;/em. difissa.

- si fosse )

Se ci fossimo

— vi foste

— si fossero

difesi;/em.di£M»

IMPERATIVE (ImperatiYo).
Difendia, Defend thyself.

Non ti difenderci do not defend thyself!

SI difionda sgU, let him defead himself:

4M

BIGBTT-FIFTH LESSON.

Diftodlamod,
Difimdetevl,

an

let Qt ddaod onnenw.

defend youneWet.

let them defend themeehree.

MODEL OF THE CONJUGATION OF A REFLECTIVE
GOVERNING THE DATIVE (See Le«on LIV.).

h^ftnUhe FremU ^nfinito Praeente).

Procuniwlo^ to get, procure It.

Ji^fbtUiM Pad (Infinlto Paeaeto).

EanrMle proenrmto, to haf e got It

Prmni PartieipU (Partidpio Pieaente).

ProcnrandoMto^ getting It.

PartSe^ Pad (Partidpio Paaaato).

Proeuratoaeb^ got it

INDICATIVE (IndicaUvo).

PrtMiil {tH^tenU).

I get It, Ac

Noi et lo proeudamo.

VERB

lo iM fe proenro.
Ta li fe proenrl.

[jefeproeBim.

I got It, <

IflOtlt,^

I

Vol ve lo proenimte.
jg^ ^Mlbprociiraiio^

Imptrfml (Imperfetto).

I lo nu lo pcocnraya, Ac
PnUriU DiJhUU (Paaaato Rimoto).

I lo me fe procnral, 4o.
PnUrpmfid (Paaaato Proaaimo).
I hare got it, Ac «

Noi et h aiam
Voi V io aiete

fe

1

lo iM lo aono

aCj***'* J Eaae

Plupcrftd (Trapaaaato).
I had procured it, Ac | Jlf« lo era procurato, Ac

PreUHU Anterior (Paaaato Rimoto compoato).
I had procured it, Ae. | Jll« lo fui pioeurmto, Ao«

F\dwe PrtteiU (Future Imperfetto).
I ahall procure i^ Ac | JIfe lo procurer^, Ac

F\aitr9 PaU (FnTvuro Perfetio).
I ahdiliaTe procured It, Ac | JIMo aard pro«iirato, Ac

•procaniA.

EIOHTT-FIFTH LESSON. 48**

CoindiiHmud Pretmt (Gondizfonale Preaenta).
A ■hould procure It, dke. | lo nu lo proeurerei, Ac.

CondUunud Past (Condizionale Passato).
I ahould haTC procured ii^ Jkc [ Me lo aarei procurato, Ac

FremU qf Ihe SubftmeHve (Conginntivo Preaente).
That I may procure it, Ac.
Che lomeh procuri. Che noi ee lo procuriamo.

— tu<e to procuri — volMtoprocuriate.

— cfia s ** ^ procuri. ^ 31 earn \**^ procurino.

Imperfed qf the SubJuneUce (Iroperfetto del CongluntWo).
' If I procured it, Ac. | S'io me lo procuraaai, Ac.

Preierperfed qf the Subjunctive (Paaaato Proaaimo del Congiuntivo).
That I may haye procured it, Ac
Che io 1IM fo aia

io 1IM fo aia ^ Che ooi ee lo aiamo "^

iJiUlo^ Iprocurato. - voiwtoaiate I

ZefiUH^"^-]

- siH'"^**"^ J

procuratc

Pluperftet of Vii Suibfuneiwe (Trapaaaato del CongtuntiTo).
If I had pfocured it, Ac | S* io me /o foaai procurato, Ac

IMPERATIVE {hnperaiwo).

Procvntelot Procure (thoti) it

Non telo procurare, do (thou) not procure It.

Se lo procuri egli, let him procure it

Procuriamoetfo^ let ua procure it

Procurateveto^ procure (ye) It.

8e lo procurino eaai, let them procure it

OBSERVATIONS ON THE CONJUGATION OF THE REGULAR
VERBS.

Z. The final a of the InfinitiTCS in are, ere, and ire, may be dropt before a
▼owel a»well aa before a conaonant (except before a followed by a conaonavt),
witnont an apoatrophe being put in ita atead. Ex.

Egli Tuol far qneato.
Voglio Ugger queato libro.
Non dormir punto.

He wiahea to do thia.
I wiah to read thia book.
Not to Bleep at all.

B, The dropping of the final vowel may alao take place before a consonant
in thoae peraona of the verba which end in mo, and have the accent on the laat
ayllable but one. Ex.

488 BIGRTV-FIFTH LEM>lf.

We an free.
We were ntiiAed.
We ehaU be pnieed.
We love sincerelj.

Siam liberi {huUad tftHamo),
Enfim content! (hiiChmI ^ eraTimo).
Sarem lodati {buUad qf aaremo).
Amiam ainoeramente (intUad ofuaiti-

mo).

But when the accent leeta on the laat ayllable bat two the laat vowel
be dropped. We could not aay :

F\f9Hm,for fltealnio colperoU. i Were we guilty.

AvtMmm^for av^aaimo veduto. I Had we aeen.

Amemim^ for amiaabno tntti. | Did we love alL

C The abbreriation may further take place In all the third peiwna ploral
that have no or re lor their endJ^ aa :

Aman, they love ; aenton, they feel ; tnalead <^ amano, aentona
Amavan, they loved 3 amaron, they loved ; tMltad 1^ amavano, amarono.
Amaaaer, did they love; potrebbe, they could; avrebber, they would have;
inatead of amaaaero, protrebbero, avrebbero.

Z>. The third peraon plural of the perfMto rimoto ia often abridged in more
than one manner^ aa :

hu/Us^ qf andaipno, they went ; you vfflptdi andaron, andaroi andlr.
" «* furono, they were; •« " foron, furo^ for.

B, The third peraon alngular of the preaent tenae of verba in ere often lows
the final a when it ia preceded by I, r, orn, aa :

81 auol dire, they nae to aay, instead of niofe.

8iciiioldiqaeato,theyaieaorryforit, ■* " dueKt.

Cid M< molto, this ia worth much, ** ** voU.

rwolfiue, he wiU do, « « vwbU

Also.
Per, M pera, sing, of pfrei^ to appear, Inatead of parr

Pan, " " ^piQfrrt (ponere), to put, «* " fwna

Tten, '< " Uxuri, to hold, « " liene.

FSen, " " ^adrty to come, " " went.

AKDion, ** *< rtmonere, to remain, " " rlnuma.

Sbn, let pera. aing. and 3rd pera. plur. of eaeere to be^ aona

I. oir THS vBKSa or ore.

1. Verba whoae InflnitlTea end in eore or gora inaert an A as often aa g^ or e
meeta with e or i. Ex.

JVeMfi/.—Ceroo, I'aeek; ca^ld (not eerci), thou aeekeat; eervAiama^ we
feek, Ac.

#Wtire.^CerdUrd, I ahall aeek ; eercAeroi, thou wilt aeek; cercAerA, he wiO
aeek ; ecreAeremo, we ahaU aeek, Ac.

Ptftmi SubJ,—Ch* lo eerehif that I may aeek, Ac. ; cenAuune, that we may
seek ; eerdiiaU, that you may aeek ; eerehino, that they may aeek.

2. When the infinitive enda in dare, giare, gliare, and aciorf, the letter 1
must be left out aa often aa it meeta with i or «. Ex.

BtQJBTT-FIFTH LESSON.

489

To threaten, to eat, to advise, to leave.

Thou threatenest, eateat, advisest,

leaveat.
1 shall threaten, eat, advise, leave.

ilwiaosiarc, numguwct conn^tortf &v*

dare,
TV minacci, mangif eoitngUf ktfcL

lo minaccerbt mangerb^ eonriglUrd^
loKerb,

I should threaten, eat, advise, leave. lo mtnaeeeret, numgereif conn^/teres,

I laacereL

3. But in verbs whose first person singular of the present tense indicative
has the accent upon the letter i, the second person singular must be written
with it. Ex.

I send, I spy.

Thou sendest, thou spiest.

InifSo, tpto.

II. ON THB vxass IS ere.

1. The greatest irregularity in the verbs in ere takes place in the perfetto r^
moto, and the past participle. Very £bw verbs in ere have In this tense the re-
gular ending in ei, and even those that have it, may take also the irregular ending
in etti, as may be seen above in the conjugation of credere^ which has credei
9nd eredeUi^.

2. To know, thwafcrc, the perletto rfinoto of those verbs which have not
the regular ending ei^ It is only necessary to know the first person singular.
That onc§ known, the thii^ person singular is formed from it by changing i
into e ; «iid from this again the third person plural is formed by joining to it ro.
The remaining three persons are always formed regularly. Er.

ThpUof. Preterite definite: I pleas-
ed.
He pleased, they pleased.

Thou pleasedst, jre pleased

You plesiMd.

To write. Pret. det I wrote.
He wrote, they wrote.

Tnou wrotest, we wroto.

You wrote.

Piaeere. Peri rimoto : piaoqul

3rd pers. sing, piacgue : 3rd. pers. pli& .

jnaequero,
2nd pers. sing. piaeesHi 1st pera. plur.

friaeemmo.
2nd pers. plur. jfiaeetie,
SeriBtre, TerL Rimoto : eerieei.
3rd pers. sing, scriite; 3rd pers. plur.

eeriAero,
2nd pers. sing, ecrhoeetii 1st pers. plur.

scriMffiYiio.
2nd pers. plur. ecrituU.

3. a) Of the verbs in ere the following have the doi^ form In the perfdio r»-
jMlOt i. e. the regular in d, and the irregular in eUi.

* Here die pronunciation renders the letter t again necessary.

• In Tua^y the ending in eUi seems to be preferred.

21*

400

noRTT-pirm ismom.

JHfMfiM.

I'ltrfttUt iMHoto*

Utform.

2Mifarm.

Anistert, to tMbt,

assistei,

assistetti.

MBittito.

T>etist6re, to decUt

Esistere, to exist.

insitten, to insist.

Resistera, to teslst

Sossisteie, to subsist

fisttere, to best,

battel,

battetU»,

battuto.

Combsttere, to fight.

Conviere, to sccomplisl^ oompiei,

' compietti,

complmo.

Empiere, to filL

Credere, to believe,

ciedel.

credetti.

credvto.

Eslgere^ to exact,

esigei.

esigetti,

esatto.

Fendere, to split,

BBOIlel,

fendetd.

fienduto (fiBSso).

Freinere,torosr,

fremei,

liemetti,

• fiemnto.

to shudder,

Gemere, togrosiii

gemei,

gexnetti,

gemuto.

Hietere, to mow.

mietei, '

mieietti.

ndetnto.

Pendere, to hang,

pendel,

peadsta,

pendnta

Perdere,tolose,

peidel,

penietti,

peniuto.

Preiiiere,topre8%

premei,

piemetti,

premuto.

Rieerere^ioreceite^

Ticevel,

riceretti,

rioenito.

Serpere, to creep,

serpei.

serpetti,

serputo.

SolTere, to dissolve,

soWei,

• solvetti.

soluto.

splendel.

q)lendettl.

spienduto.

Stildere,tocr8sk,

stridel,

stridetti,

stxidnto.

Vendeie, to sell,

▼endei,

yendetti,

Tondnto.

The fbllowbig with the acceot on the last syllable but one have also tfM per^
/rfloHBMto in «' and sM.*

Cadere, to &U, cadet, cadetti, eadnto.

Doveie^ to owe^ ddvei, dorettl, doTuto.

Godere, toei^oy, godei, godetti, goduto.

Potere, to be able (can), potel, potetti, potnto.

Sedere,tosit, sedel, sedetti, seduto.

Temere,tofiMr, temel, temetti, temnto.

Obff. Some have^ besides the two mentioned forms in m and ctta, a third form
in si. Of these three forms sometimes the one, sometimes the other, is em-
ployed. Tliey are the following :

AssolTere,toabaolTe, assolyei, assolvetti and ^assolnto,

assoisi, ' Cassolto.

RisolTere, to resoWe.
Chiudere,toshut, chiudel, chiudettl otuf chlaso.

chiusi,

» The ending in «tti is generally, for the sake of euphony, av(4ded in veibs
teving in thefar radicals one or two <'s. N. B. The greatest part in effi are now
inlte obsolete.

HqBTr-FirrH lbskhk.

491

Mi^UUko. •

PeifeUofi

imoto.

Part Pom.

•

Ittfmn.

2ndfom,

Cedere, to yield,'

cedei.

codBiti and

^oeduto^
Ccesso.

oeasi,

Conoederai to gnnt

Inoei,

luoettlomlhisai,

Indnta

Perdefe, to lose,

perdet.

perdetti and

|perduto,
<perso.

•

pend,

Peiliiadere,topennade, perraadei,

permsdettiaml

persnaso*

persnasi,

Di8Biuuiere» to disraade, diflsudd, 4c

•

Vnmuasn, to presume, premimei,

presametti and

presunto.

presnnsi.

Rendeie, to lender,

render

rendetaond

(rendntob
(reso.

leei.

Bpendere, to qMnd,

spendei,

speai.

apeso.

5^|todrlnk,

berei,

(beretUaml
I berri,

>beTnto.

b) ThefbUowiiigfiye,tnd*droQmpoimde,hRTethe;Mi/<ttoHm«<dind9ict

Piaoere, to please.

plaeqnl,

piaduto.

Giaoere, to Ib^ lo be situate, giacqni,

giaeittto

Taoere, to be silent,

tacqni,

Ucinto. •

Nuooere,toburt,

nocqni,

nociuto

Nasoere, to be bom,

nacqni,

nato.

c) Tlie following three in 6M .*^

ATere,toh8«%

ebbi.

amto.

Conoscere, to know,

conobbi,

Ciesoere, to grow,

crebbi.

, erssdnto.

4) The following tw«> in Aii .*—

Cadere, to fidl,-

caddi.

cadnto.

Vedere, to see,

JWdi,

i Teddi, {onHquatmi^

e) The following two in ppi ^-

▼edato,
Tisto.

Rompere, to break,

nippi.

rotto.

Sapete, to know.

seppi,

s^pnto.

f) The following two in vi :—

bevnto.

Paioie, to appear.

parri.

(pamto,
cparso.

g) Tlie following two in li and ti<f—

Volere, to be wilUng,

TOlli,

▼ofailo.

to wish,

Tenere, to hold,

tennl.

tenoto

403 KlffHTT-FirrR LMSOIC.

4) AO the odierTerbt in «re liaT» (li6pef:Att9 rciMtoi>tii «< or «•; and the pot
partldpk in m, io^ or <<a. The following le an alphabetical hat of them.

Obff. DeriTmtiTe and oompovnd yerbe follow the aame coigngatlon ae their
rimple. It ia lurtlier to be obaerved that the monoayllabical partidea a, e^ dlo,
yVo, fo, M, mi, double the following conaonant, when it ia not • impun (L e. t
followed by a conaonant), aa : oeepmcrc^ to nin np i eppemti to oppoae ; doUmc
honeat;/roiii]Mtfcr«, to put between; raggiungtrt, to n||oin; aoeMuItn^ to
ahnt up ; twrfrfi^^rffra, to aubdlTlde, Ae.

Prima permma

JnpuHto. deW Inditaii90 Peifdto

PrutnU, nmeCoL

Aeeendero, to light, aceendo^ ' aoceai,

MiaeeauUrt, to re-kindle (See abore Oba.).
Accofgetal, to percelTe, aeooigo, aocarai, aooortow

Scorgere, to notice (See the above Oba.).
AflUggere,! to aiflict, alliggOi ailUaai, alBitto.

Appendere, to hang up, appendo, 9PV^ appeao.

Soapendere, to deky (See the aboTe Oba.).
Ardere^ to burn, aido^ arai, araow

Aaoondere^ to conceal, . aaoondO) aacoai,

Naacondeie, to hide (See the above Oba.).
Aaaohrere, to abaolTe, aaaolvo, aaaolal, aaaolto.

Riaolvere, to reaolTe (See the aboTc Oba.).
Aaaorbere, to abaorts aaaorbo, aaaorai, aaaorta

Aaanmere, to aaanme, aaanmo, aaaunai, aaaunto.

Preaumere, to preaume (See the above Oba.).

Rtaaaumere, to re-aaaume (See the aame).
Chiedere, to aak, chiedo, chieai, ohiflBto.

Richiedere, to demand (See the above Oba.).
Chiudere, to ahnt, chiudo, . " diiuai, " chioMK

Conchiudere {or Concludere), to infor, '

Eadudere, to exclude,

Inchiudere (or Indudere), to indoae,

Richiudere, U include,
Rinchiudere, 3 ^

Schiudere^ to open, to ezdude,
Socphiudere, to ahnt up,

1 Verba having a vowel before gen^ double the letter g, aa: teggire, to nad.
Ii^gfo^lread; le^ thou readeat ; f^sra^ he reada ; i«gpiam^ we read; kggei^
you read s Uggmw, they read, Ac There is further to be remarked that verba
ending in gger€f vers, and arre, aa: qffiiggere, to afBlct; aerseere, to write |
Inorre, to draw, double in the p^^fiMo fimoio the latter a, and have in the past
oartidple tt, e. g. qffiimi, 9eri9»i, tramig aHlitto, acntto. tiatto.

(See the above Oba.)

EIGHTY -FIFTH LESSON.

403

Prinna ptTwmi
b^bMoo, ddP htdicoHoo

preaente,
Accingersi or accigneni, to prepare
one's self (See the nbove Olw.)*

^8^«^'^ I to gather, } ^?"^'

P$rf§Uo
rimcto.

cold,

PariieSpio
pataato.

Corre, ^ '" »- -» < colgo,

Accogliere or accorre, to rcceWe, " f (See the abofe

Kaccogllere or raccorre, to collect, to pick up, j

oolto.

(See the above Obe.).

(See the above Oba.)
difendo. diiiaei,

Connettere, to connect, . connetto, oonnesai,

Correre, to run, ^ corro, corali

Accorrerei to run np,

doncorrere, to concur,

Diflcorrere, to discourse,

Incorrere, to incur,

Percorrere, to run over,

Ricorrere, to have recourse,
Cuocere, to boil, to cook, ' cuoeo, cosai,

Deludere, to delude, deludo, delud,

Alludere, to allude,

Illudere, to delude,
Difendere, to defend,

Offendere, to offend (See the above Obs.).
Discutere, to examine, discuto, discuss!.

Distinguere, to distinguish, distingo, distinal,

Estinguere, to extinguish (See the above Obs.).
Dividere, to divide, divido, divisi,

Suddividere, to subdivide (See the above Obs.).

Dolere,toache, |do^, ^^^

Erigere, to erect, erigo, eressi,

Espellere, to expel, espello, espulai,

Impellere, to impel (See the above Obs.),

(See the above Obs.)

Obik).

connesBO
eono.

ootto.
deluao.

difeso.

disCUSBO

distinto.
divlso.

doluto.

espulso.

> (See Obs. above.)

[fitto.

Esprimere, to express, esprimo,

Opprimere, to oppress,

Gomprlmere, to compress,

Deprimere, to depress,

Imprimere, to impress,

Sopprimere, to suppress,*

iTlggere, to fix. ^ggo, flssi,

Affiggere, to post up,
Crocifiggere {or erucifig<

gere), to crucii'y,
Prefiggere, to prefix,
Sconfiggere, to conquer,
Trafiggere, to pierce,

> Verbs in gliere change this ending In the ptrfetto rimoio into ki, and In tho
cmst participle into tto, e. g. odogHtrt^ to untie— «c{oM, adoUo ; togHerCt to lay
hold of-~<oK toUo, dte.

494

BIGaTY-FIPTH LESSON.

totnlTe,

FinfBTB, tofbigii,

Ponden, to mdc,

Confondere, to eonfonnd,
DMIbndera, to poor out,
Infondere, to InfuM^
Rlfonden, torattore,
Tnifimdere, to pour from ono
TOMel to anotlier,

Pmigoro, to bnft|

Infrugera^ to brmk to piecM,
Rlfimiifera, torafloct,

PrigseiVi to fry,

Olangera, or
OUngnera,
Agginngere, to add,
Congiuiigwe, to join,
Di^ginngere, to d^join,
Raggtungwe, to rejoin,
Sogglangera, to add, raplf ,
Sopraggiungere, )
Somggiaiigen, J ^ t^P?^*

laddere, to make an Incldon,
Ciroonddere, to dreumdae,
Daddare^ to dedd^
Raddaie, to cut,

Intridan, to knead,

Laggw^ to nad,
EleggerOi to elect,
BUeggare, to read over again,

Her^e, to plimge^

Immefgere, toimmeige^
Sommergera, to anbmeige^

Mettere, to put,

Ammettere, to admit,
Gomaattere, to commit,
Comprometttte, to oompromiae,
Dimettere, to diacontiniieb
Dlamettere, to diamlaa,
Piammettere, T . ^,-
Inframmettew, J ^ *""" "^
Intromettere, to let in,
Ommettere, to omit,
Pennettere^ to permit,
Premettere, to put before,
Promettere, to promiae,
lUmettere, to remit,
ScommetterB, to lay a wager,

Pnmmpenona
<UW InkaOioo

flngci,
ibndo,

Pmf^Uo

Porttcifw

IMteSM.

foal,

(See Oba. abore.)

frango,
> (See Oba. abote.)
friggo, fried,

gluigo, glvnai,

(See Oba. abote.)

franto.

fritto.
giimto.

inddo,

Indai,

(See Oba. above.)
intzido, intrid,

> (See Oba. abofe.)

mergo,
I (See tke above Oba.)

intriao*

» (See Oba. abov«.)

BIOBTY-FITTH LESSON.

495

Mettere^ to put,

Smettere, to dismin^
Sommetteie, l^^^^^.
Sottomettere, J •»«""*>
Tnamettere, to tranBmit,

Mordere, to bite,

Iliiovere, to move^

GommuoTere, to disturb^
DismuoTere, to stir up,
PromuoTere, to promoto,
RimuoYere, to remove,
SinuoTere, \o penrert,

NegUgere, to neglect,

Opprimere, to oppress,

Pereuotere, to stiilLe,

Fnaui ptTBotUL
ddP IndUxOvoo

metto,

}

misi,

(See Obe. above.)

mordo^
^mimgok)
) mugno, 5

maoTO^

'(SeeObii.aboire.)

negllgo,

opprimo,

percuoto.

- uoni,
nunflif

munto.

Scuotere,tosbake, J (gee Obs. sbore).

Kiscuotere, to exact, >
Piangere, to weep, pianto,

pingere and Pignera^ to paint, . pingo,

Dipingere, to depict (See Obe. above).

1

Porgere^ to reach«— —
Prendere, to take,

Apprendere, to learn, to hear,

Comprendere, to comprehend,

Intraprendere,-to undertake^

Riprendere, to retake,

Sorprendere, to surpHse,
Proteggere, to protect,
Pnngeitt, to stingy
Radere, to shear,
Redimere, to redeem,
Reggere, to reign, to govern,

Correggere, to correct,

Ricorreggere, to correct again,

Dirigere, to direct, .

Erigere^ to erect, J

RIdere, to laugh, rido^

Deridere, to deride (See Obi. above).

Rimanere, to remain, rimango,-

Rlq>ondere^ to answer. rispondo,

Corrispondere, to sgree with (See Ob«. above).

Rodere, to gnaw, rodo^

Corrodere, to fret (See Obs. above).

poigo,
prendo,

(See Obs. above.)

proteggo,

pungo,

ra^o,

redimo,

roggo,

n«glessi, negletto.

oppressi,

peroossi.

piaiisi,
plnsi,

porsi,
prasi.

pisnto.
pinto.

porto.

protesid, ,
punsi,

4(8

lee Obs. above.)

rial,

rimasi,
risposi,

roai,

etto
punto.
raso.
redento*
retta

riso

[rimaato

496

BIGHTY-FIFTH LBSSOM.

Prima peraona
li^lmii99. dM JndicaJtwo Pmfdt^

fTuenU.

Scerre, ) ( scegUoi
PrMcegliere, to telect (S«e OIm. above).
Scendere, to descend, Mendo,

Ateendere, to ucend, -^

Coiidi.cei>de»,toooiideMend, ^g^e the ibow Ob..)

Diecendere, to deecend, f

^TFMcendere, to exceed. J

S«**«'**"'*^Jtooiitie, jidolgo, )

DiectogUere or dSeciorre, to dieeolve (See Obe. above).

Serivere, to write^

Aecriverei to ascribe,
Descrivere, to describe,
InsGrivera^ to inscribe,
Piescrivere, to prescribe,
Rsserivere, to txanscribe,
Sopraserivere, to sapetscribe,
Sottoscrivere, to snbscribe,
Tiascriver^ to copy,

SorgBfaor)^^^^
Snrgen, )

RlsoigerSi to Fssist,
Inseigere, to rise against,

Spargere, to spread,

Spenders, to ip«tad,

Spergere, to waste,

Aspergere, to sprinkle,
^spergere, to besprinkle,
Dispergera, to disperse,

1 '

scrivo^

(See Obs. above.)

sentui.

(sorgo,
(sargo,

\ (See Obs. above.)

jsonri.
Csurri,

spaigo,
spendo^

spaisi,

spaiso.

^(S.

lee Obs. above.)

spingo,
>(See Obi

(See Obs. above.)

stringo,

Sospignere,
Stringers ^\yf^ sqneeae,
Strignere, )

Astrbagere, ? to force,
Costringere, )

Sf*?****"' ? to restrain,
Rlstringere, )

Stmggere, to dissolve^

Dlstruggere, to destroy (See CMml above)

SveUere, to pull out, \ •^«"<>«

> svelgo,

strinai,

(See Obs. above.)

stmggo,

strussi,

splnta

stntio.

stmttQw

EIGHTY -FIFTH LESSON.

407

InfiiniHfXt, ,

Tendere, to tend,

Attendere, to wait,
Contendere, to contend,
Estendere, to stretcli,
Intendere, to understand,
Pretendere, to pretend,
Soprintendere, to superintend,
Sottintendere, to understand,

Tergere, to wipe,

Intingere, to steep,
Attingere, to reach,
Ritingere, to die again,

ddP Inaieaiivo
preaenU,

tendo.

PerfeUo
rimoto.

pautUo,

' (See above Obs.)

tergo,
tingo,

(See Obs. aboye.)

tersi,
tinsi,

C tolgo, I
i toglio, S

DistogUere or distorre, to divert ^
from, ( (See Obe. above.)

I (See Obs. above.)
valgo.

RitogUere or ritorre, to retake,
Torcere, to twist, torco,

Contorcere, to wring,

Rltorcere, to twist again,
Valere, to be Wortl),

Prevalere, to prevail (See Obs. above).
Ucddere, to Idll, uccido,

Ancidere (poefiooQ, to kill (See Obs. above).
Ungere, to anoint, ungo,

Vincer^ to vanquish, vinco,

Convlncere, to convince (See Obs. above.)
Vi?ere, to live,

Rivivere, to revive,

Soprawivere, to survive,
Volgere, to turn,

Avvolgere, ^

Rawolgere, ? to wrap up,

Rinvolgere, 3

Sconvolgere, to invert,

Stravolgere,^ ^

Travolgere, >

vivo,
> (See Obs. above.)

volgo.

> overturn,

toU,

torsi,

valei,
ucdsi,

unsi,
vinsi,

• vissi,
voisi.

terso.
tinto.

tolto.

torto.

C valsb,
( valuto.

uociso.

unto,
vinto.

Cvlvnto,
i vissuto

voUo.

»(See Obi. above.)

OBSSaVATfONS.

A. Verbs ending in ueeref glUrt^ sure, oerej-are contracted in the infinitive,
Ro that they have two infinitives, i. e, the ancient Latin, as : adduccr§, to ad-

406

BieHTT-FIFTH LB8S0N.

iiot; €Oglim% to gitlMrt pmur§, to put; iratr* {wad traggtrt\ to dnw; and
the modem eontnetod iuSiittiye, •■ : addmrr^, eorrt, perre, fnorrf. The«eooiid
ooatnetod inftniilTe to genenlly iiaed ; from it are formed the fntiireciid the
pneent conditioiie], w: addyrr&, eorrb, porr^ trarrd, and odUurre^ eorrei,
ptrrHf trarreL AH the other tenaee are formed from the aodeDt hifiaitiTe, as
from coiMiueerc, Proa. eoiidiMQ^ eoiuiiid; eondiiee^ Ac. Impedect : eonduccoo, Ac.
Impeft ea)q. eandunmif Ac.

In the foOowing verbs the InfinltiTe is oontmeted, and the oontiaetion main-
tabled for the fritme and present conditional »—

Mi^mtHvo. Mh'$§mit»

rimudo.

f» ..rfiTiif.irii

FuHtm.

Addmra, to addoee. *addiico»

addussi,

addotto^

addurr).

iMtaicl^addneera,

Condnm, imUmd ^ oondoeere^ to oondnct.

Dednne, " « deduoere, to deduce.

Introdorre, ** <* introdnoere^ to introduce.

Produne, *« " producere, to produce.

Ricondune, " " rlconducere, to reconduct

Riduireb •• « riducew, to reduce.

Riprodum, *' *' riproducere, to reproduce

Sedurre, " " seducer^ to seduce.

* Tradum, ** ** tradaoore, to transbite.

Bere, to drink, «i- > * ^
jtaKf^bevera, J ^

bervi,

betniob

berr6L

Pone, to put, In- !««««.
jtaKfqfponere. JP""*^

porf.

posto,

,as:

Anteporre, to prsfor.

Imporra, to

impose.

OpporrB,to

oppose.

Comporre, to compound.

Posporre,to

poetpone.

Contrapporre, to oppose.

Preporre, to

prefer.

Deporre, to depose.

Propone, to

propose.

Disporre, to dispose.

Soprappone, to put upon.

Eqwrre, to exposs.

Sottoporre, to subdue.

Frapporre, to interpose.

Suppone, to

suppose.

Trarre, to draw, inr ttacgo,

trassi.

timtto,

trarrd

«<M<< of traeie.

Animti

Astxarrs, to abstract

Detrarre, to detraicL

Attrane, to attract

Estrarre^ to extract

Contrarre, to oontnet

Sottrarre, to deliver.

Ck)rre> or K^^.v^ 5«>teOi
cogUere, \^^^^ JcogUo,]

J eoK

colto, \

condor
cogUerd.

ecegUere^j**'*'^'*^ I scegUo,

} •eeW,

scelto, {

scegllero

* In the verbe in g^trt !Rie contraclsd form is generally pnfoned in poetry

BIGHTT-FIFTH LB880N.

499

Bdontor
■ciogliere,

rone or
toglier0»

I to untie,
I to take,.

PetfiUo P»^apio l^hdtgn

rimoio.
(■dolgo, ) ^„
<8ciogUo, J ^

Ob», B, Be^des these, there are those verbe in er< that haTe (like aUri^ the
accent on the last syllable but one; they are not contracted In the infinitive,
bat in the future and conditional, where they reject the letter e of the last
syllable but one, as :

FutuTO, CandixUmaU.

-dolto, J"^^5^r.
c scios^erd.

tolto. i *®"* ^
* i togUerd.

Avere, to have.

Avrd,

avrel.

Dorere, to owe.

Dovrd^

doTieL

Potere, to be able (can).

Potrdi

potrtf.

Sapere, toknow.

Saprd,

saprei.

Yedere, to see.

Vedrd,

vedreL

Parere, to appear.

Parrd,

parrel.

Ob». C. But when the verbs in ere (with the accent on the last syllable but
one), end in nen and ler«, the letter n or I is in the contraction changed into

r, as:

FuJturo. Candufianoim

Rimanere, to remain.
Tenere, to hold.
Dolere, to hurt
yalere,tobeworth.
Volere,;to be willing.

JUmarrdk rimarrqi
Terrd, terrei.
Dorrdk dorrei.
Varrd, varreL
Yorrd, voneL

CONJUGATION OP A VERB WITH TWO INPINITIVB

PreuiUitrthelnJInUiiDe.
Addnire, to allege; formerly addueere.

PrtBoUParUe^
Addncendo, alleging.

Pa»iqfUuInJlnUb>e,
Avere addotto^ to have alleged.

PoMtPariieipU
Addotto, alleged.

Adduo^>t
Adduc-i,
Adduc-e.

miqfti
lallei

kelndkaiU^

je,Ac.

Adduc^iamo,

Adduo^te,

Adduc-ono.

Adduo-eva,
Adduc-evi,
Adduc-eva

lallag

fJhcL

ed,Ac

Adduc-evamo
Addnc-evatf,
Adduc-evano

i

PoMoto Riaudo.

Adduis,

Adduc-esti,

Adduflse.

laUeg

m!,Ac

Adduc-este,
Addussero

500

EIOHTY-FIFTH LESSON.

FreUrperfxt,

Ho addotto, Ac I have alloged, 4e.

PtupetfKi.

AveTa addotto, Ac. I had alleged, Ac

PreUHU AnUriar {Pas^ioRimcio Compmitf^

fibbi addotto^ Ac I had alleged, Ac

f\Uur€ Pretnt or Simpie,

I risaU allege, Ac

IddUT-d,

1 Addurr-emo,

Iddurr-ai,

Addurr-ete,

AdduT-a,

Addurr-aano.

Fuhwe Pott, (Futuro Perfetto).

iTTd addotto, ^. . I shall have alleged, Ac

Condiltimud PretmL

▲ddurr-ei,

Addurr^mmo,

Addun-eatl,

Addurr-este,

Addiirr-ebbe.

AdduiT-ebbeio.

▲▼lei addotto, Ac l8liouldhaTealkg8d,««

Pr€$aU iifHu Subjuneii9t.

That I may allege, Ac

Addtto-a,

Addttc^iamo,

Addao^

Adduc-late,

Addao-a

1 Addttc-ano.

Impnfid of tke Sutjundhe.

If I aUegdd, Ac

Addue-eMri,

Adduc-eaalmo,

Adduc-eari,

Addac-eate,

Preterpetfeet of tiu Sitbjuneihe.

Che abbia addotto, Ac That I may ha¥o alleged, Ac

Pluperftd qf the StibfuneHoe,

S* lo avatrl addotto, Ac. If I had alleged, Ac

JfHptTOtWt,

Addae-i, allege (thou),
rron addune, do not allege.
Addnc-a, let him allege

Addnc-Iamo, let iia allege.
Adduc-ete, allege (ye).
Addac-ano, let them allegs.

BIGHTY-FIFTB

[ LESSON.

\

UI. ON THE VERBS IN ire.

Of Ihg Terbs in irt only the following are entirely regular .

JiiMMi^

Pre$ente.

PerfeUonmoiQ. .

ParHeipiopat

Aprire, to open,

apro,

aprlKsperei),

aperto.

BoUire, to boll,

boUo,

boUii,

boUito.

Conveftire, to convert,

conyerto.

convertii,

oonTerttto.

copro,

coprii (copend),

coperto-

Cudre, toaew,

cucio,

cucil.

cncito.

Dormire, to sleep,

dormo.

dormi!,

dormito.

Fuggire, to flee.

fuggo,

fnggii,

fnggito.

Partire, to depart,

parto,

partil.

partlto.

Pentirri, to repent,

mipento,

mi pentil,

pentito.

Segnire, to follow,

eegao,

MguU,

eegnito.

Sentire^ to feel,

eemo,

aentU,

aentito.

Senrire, to aerre.

eerro,

■ervll, •

eenrito.

Sofllrire, to soffer.

sofiro,

soffirii (eoffersl),

Bofferto.

SoTtire, to choose,

sorto.

Bortil,

sortito.

Yestire, to el^the.

veato.

Teatil, '

veetito.

501

The remaining verba in tre differ from the above regular form in so much
that they end in the present tense in iaeo. This irregularity also takes place In
the present of the subjunctive and imperative, as has been shown heretofore in
the coqjugation of mUrire (p. 477).

There is, however, still some doubt existing with respect to the first and
second persona plural of these verbs; for in 'conversation, as well sa in some
Italian authors, JbiimAUano, ntUriaduama, 4kc., as well as: Jbiiamqt mdriamo,
are employed. Modem authors, however, seem to incline for the regular form
in the first and second persons plural (ss in mOrire^ p. 477), except, notwith-
standing^ where a double meaning is to be avoided ; as in the verbs ; arditt, to
dare; aUerryrt^ to frighten; mardtre^ to rot; tmalU^e^ to digest; 4e. where
ardiamo^ aOerriamo, mardamo^ tmaUiamo, are avoided, not to mistake them for
the first person plural of ardtre, to bum ; aUerrarei to throw down ; mardarii
to march ; •mottorfl^ to enamel.

The following verbs and their compounds terminate almost always in tMS.
Those marked with a cross (t) have also the regular form, as : abborrire— abbot'
ritoOf abborro : but the form in wco is pteSened in conversation, the other in
poetry and the didactic style.

Abolire, to abolish,
t Abborrfre, to abhor,
Arricdiire, lo enrich, .
Arrossfare^ to blush,
Bandire, to banish,
Capire, to understand,
Colpire, to strike,
Compatire, to pity,
Concepire, to conceive,
Dlgerh!c, to digest.

Pruente.

Perfdtofiauio.

PartidpiojHumOo

aboliaoo,

abolij.

abolito.

abborrii,

abborrito

arriccliiaco,

arricchii,

arricchito»

arrosdsco,

arroBsii,

arrossito.

bandisco,

bandit,

bandito.

capisoo.

capii.

capito.

colpisco.

colpii,

oolpito.

compatisco,

compatU,

. compatito.

concepisco.

conoepii,

concepito.

digerisco,

dlgerii,

digerito.

602

BIOBTT-FI^TB LBSSOIT.

lil^MM^

Pnmnit,

Parf4M9 Haute.

PorlieJptefMi

EMgvira, to eseealfl^

•tfga^MCih,

eaeguU,

eeegoito.

Piorire, to bloowm,

fioriaoo,

fiorli,

fioilto.

Oradire, toapprOTO,

gradiwM,

gradii,

gradito.

tlmptnire, to grow iimiI,

impaxiito.

Incrudetira, to grow cmel, Incmdelifco,

incrudelii.

incmdelito^

tLanguiie, to languiih,

languiaoo,

languii,

languito.

Paiire, to sofler,

paliaoo,

patii,

patito.

Perire, to perish,

petiico,

PWii.

perito.

Spodife, to di^Mteh,

aoediaco.

spedii.

apedito.

Tradire, to betny,

tradiaeo,

tiadii,

tradito.

UbUdiTB, to obef ,

QbbidiMSO, .

ubbidii,

ubbidito

Unlio, to unite,

uniaco,

unii,

unito.

06t. The Terba aprin, to open; ^aprirt, to cover; riopprin, to cover again ;
teoprin, to nncover ; o^«n(i^ to ofiqr ; aa ako d{ferir*^ to differ; frvferirt, to
otter; tefirin, to sufleri have a double perfeUo rimoiOf via. the regular, as :
fiprui ^$rii, Ac, and an irregular, aa operd; qfsni^ 4e. Ex.
I opened, tlioa openedst, he opened, AprU or aptrm^ aprUUt apH or

We, yon, they opened,

ilprtmtnfl^ aprisUf i^rirvne^ or optr-

06t. A. b^kArt (alao in^fcMrt), to influence, haa in the fierfetto jimoto only

Obt, B, The verb opjwirt, to appear, and Ita compound eomparvrt, to appear,
have in the perfetto xlmoto, beaidee the regular form In ti, another in m,« aa :

I appeared, thou appearadat, he ap-
peared.
We^ yon, they ^ipeared.

Apparii and apparvi, apparisti, ap-

parl, aand apparve.
Appailmmo, appariate, apparirono
Olid apparvenK

Ob9, C. Of the verbe in trt the following three are contracted in the futora
and conditional :

To die, f^MTtr^ ftitnre morrd^ conditional morrtL

To aaoend, mHtc, ** aarrd, " aarrel (poetical).

Onproae) aaUrd, " aallreL

Tocome^ venire^ verrd, '* rerrei.

•Obff. D. The only one of the verbs In irt that haa a contracted InfinitiTe ia
4lra, formerly dioeffl, to aaj.

I. IRRBOULAR VERBS IN ore.
There are onlf four irregular Terba of the first coigugation, viz.—
Ajndai^ to go ; fan (formerly./^ioire), to make, to do ; dan^ to give ; iton^ ta
stand.

« Thia double form in the perfdto rimoio is to be attributed to the double
infinitive of the rerbs ; for we find ako apparen, amparere, though the lattar
be not used.

N. B. The Italian language la very rich in the irerba la ima.

SIOHTT-FIFTH LESSON.
They are coiyugated in the following mannec :

603

iTifinUvK PreaerU,

AiinAW, to go.

Fau, to do.

Dabs, to give.

Stabs, to atand.

Pa»t.

Etieere andato, to

Aver iatto, to

Aver dato, to

Eaaere atato, to

have gone.

have done.

. have given.

have atood.

Part&ipU JPrcfeiU.

Andando, going.

Faoendo, doing.

Dando, giving.

Stando, atanding

PartieipUPaai,

Andato, gone.

Fatto, done.

Dato, given.

State, atood.

Pruent huUeaHoe,

.

I go, 4kc.

Ido,dc.

I give, Ac.

I atand, Ac

Vado(orYo),

Faccio (or fo),

Do,

Sto,

M

fiJ.

dai.

atai.

^■»

fii(fiice),

d&.

ata,

diamo,

atiamo,

andate,

&te.

dale,

atate.

▼anno,

fiEOino.

danno.

Imperfeet,

I went, ^.

I did, dc.

I gave, Ac.

1 atood, Ac

And-ava,

Fac-cva (/«a),

Da-va,

Sta-va,

and-avi,

fac-evi.

da-vi.

ata-jri,

and-ava,

&c-eva (/ea),

da-va.

ata-va,

lao-evamo.

da-vamo,

ata-vamo^

and-avate.

fac-evate.

da^vate.

ata-vate,

and-avano.

iac-evano.

da-vano.

ata-vano.

PrderUe DeJbiUe ( Paasato Rimoto).

1 went, did^.

I did, did do,

1 gave, did give, I atood, did atant

Ac

dc.

Ac.

Ac«

And-ai,

Feci(/e»),

Diedi (cletti),

Stetti,

and-asti,

fac^ati,

deatl, •

ateati,

and-d^

feceUy,yto),

diede(dd,<ie««), atette,

and-ammo,

fitc-emmo.

demmo,

atemmo.

and-aate,

iae-eate,

deate,

ateate,

and-arono.

diedero {^tUrmu^ atettero.

ferono), "

deiUro).

Prdtrptrftet (Paaaato ^roaaimo).

1 have gone,

I liave done

I have given.

I have atood, Ac.

Ae,

(made), Ac

Ac.

Sono andato, ^.

Ho fatto, «c.

Ho dato, Ac.

Sono atato, Ac.

Pluperfect

I had gone, ^.

I had done
(made),4ke.

I had given, Ac.

I had stood, Ac

Era andato, de.

Avevik&tto, Ac.

Aveva dato, Ac

Bra atato, Ac.

004

EIGHTY-FIFTH LKSSOM.

PrderUe AnieHor <Paa
I had gone, Ac. Ihad done, Ac

Fui tndAto, Ac Ebbi ftttoj ice

ftto Rimoto Compoeto).

I bad given, Ac I had stood, At.
EbbI dato, ^. Fui etato, Sc

PiOurg,

fahaUgo,^fte.

IshaUdoor

IshaUerwin

I shaU or wib

make, Ac.

give, Ac

stand, Ac

Aod-rd^

Pa-rd,

Da-rd,

Sta-rd,

and-imi,

iarai,

da-rai,

ata-iai,

and-i^

la-rt,

da.rt,

sta-ri,

and-remo,

&-remo,

da-temo,

ata-ramo,

and-rete.

fa-rate.

da-rate.

ata-rete^

and^nimo.

. la-nuino.

da-ianno.

sta-ranno.

PnhtrePaaL

lahaUluve

I shaUhave

I ahaUhave

I ahaU have

gone, Ac.

done, Ac.

given, Ac

stood, Ac

Airrd &tto, Ac

Avrddato,Ac.

Sard stato, stota,

andata, Ac. .

Ac.

OndUhmdPretenL

Iahonldgo,Ao.

I should do^ Ac.

l8houldgive,Ac I should stand, Ac

Ahd-ral,

Fa-rai,

Da-rei,

Sta-rei,

and-rettf,

la-iesti,

da-raati,

sta-raati.

and-rebbe.

la.rabbe(u.).

da-rabbe,

sta-rebbe.

nnd-remmo^

fii-iemmo,^

da-nmmo,

sta-rammo.

and-ieate.

fii-raste.

da-reste,

sta-Kste,

and-nbbero.

' &.iebbero {iano).

da-rabbero.

sta-rebbero.

OmdiHonal PaM.

I should \UM

lahouldhaTe

I should have

I ahottld have

gone, Ac.

done, Ac

given, Ac

stood, Ac

ATrei fiUto, Ac .

Avrei dato, Ac

Sarei stato, stata,

data.dte.

Ac

Pru^nt qftiu Subjundite.

Thatlmaygo,

do or make,

give,

stand,

♦c.

Ac

Ac

Ac

CheioTada,

beda,

die.

stia.

chetUTada,

faccia,

die,

stia,

che egU vada,

facda,

dia,

stia,

che noi andiamo.

fiu»damo, .

dlamo.

stiamo,

iaedal^

diate,

stiate,

che essi vadano.

foodano.

diano {dUno).

stiano («f£ene)

Mperftd qfOu Subjunctive.

rf I went, Ac.

made, Ac.

gave, Ac

stood, Ac

Se io and-aasi,

iao-easi.

d-eesi,

stress!,

se tu and-assi.

lao-essi,

d-cssi.

stnessi,

e*e«^i and-asee,

ftc-ease,

d-ess6^

■e not and-BSslmo,

ftc-esaimo,

d-easimo,

st-esaimo,

ae voi and-aste.

fto-este,

d-eote;

st-este.

s>efflinoand-aasen>.

ftc-essero.

d-essero.

st-essera.

EIGHTY-FIFTU LESSON.
Ptrfaet of the Skibfuneiive,

Ub

That I may have

may have done.

may have given.

may have stood,

. gone. Ac.

dc.

Ac.

Ac.

Che io eia andato,

abbia &tto, A«s,

abbia dato, Ac.

sia state, stata,

andata, Ac.

Ac.

Pbtpafed of the Suijunetwe,

If I had gone,

had gone,

had given,

had stood.

dkc

Ac.

Ac.

Ac.

Se fosai andato,

ayessl fatto, Ac.

avessi dato, Ac.

fossi state, ktata.

andata, Ac#

!>

Ac.

Imperative.

Va. go (thou),

Fa, do (thou),

DA, give (thou),

Sta, stand (thou).

non andare, go

non fare, do

non dare, give

non istare, do (thou)

(thou) not,

(thou) not,

thou (not),

not stand,

▼ada, let him

faccia, let him

dia,lethim

stia, let him stand,

•go,

do,

give,

andiamo, let us

facciamo, let us

diamo, let us

Btiamo, let us stand.

go,

do,

glTe,

andate, go (ye),

fate, do (ye).

date, give (ye).

state, stand (ye),

▼adano, let them

facciano, let them

diano, let them

stiano, let them

go.

do.

give.

stand.

06#. A* Verbs compounded of dare and store, such as : eeeondare^ to assist ;
sSreondaref to encompass ;— amwtore, to approach ; etmtrattare, to resist ; ottare^
to oppose i coetartt to cost ; redare, to rest, are regular ; except, ridare, to give
again, which is coqjugated like dare^ to give ; and eoproHare or «orrajtore, to
superintend, to threaten, which is conjugated like store, to stand.

Obs. B, Verbs compounded of /are, as: diqfare, to undo; rtfaret to repair |
•oddiffare^ to satisfy ; eoprtffort^ to overpower, Ac. are always irregular like
••'ire, to do.

II. IRREGULAR VERBS IN ere.

Preliminary ObeervatioTU.^U the learner has studied well all that we said on
the irregularity of the Italian verbs, he lias in the following irregular verbs only. .
to make himself acquainted with the present of the indicative and subjunctive,
and in order to know this he has only to remark tlie following : —

When an irregular verb has in the first person singular of the present tense
other consonants than those of the infinitive, as~in potere, where it has poem
instead ofpoto^ it retains those consonants also Iq the first and third persons plu-
ral, as : paeaiamo, we can ; poeeono, they can, and in all the persons of the pre-
sent of the subjunctive, as : poeea, I ma^ be able ; poteiy thou mayest be able i
posaa^ he may be able ; poeeiamOj poeeiate, poeeano. The imperfect of the indlca*
tlve and that of the subjunctive are always regularly formed from the Ihfinittra.
Ex. inf. pot-ere ; imperf. Ind pol-eva ; imperf. subj. pof-estt, Ac.

23

606

BIOHTT-FIFTH LtaSOll.

I rmaiovLAt tbsu batuio trb Aotmrr ow i

I LABT SVtLAnB BVI <

ii|f. j»r<9. Polfre» to be able (ten).
h^.pati. Aver potuto, to hare been

Poeeo, I can, Ac

PqoL

Pnd ifuoU),

Poeeiamo.

Potete.

Posaono (pomie).

Pret. part. Potendo, being able.
PaHpmt» Potato, been able.

t^e$0nt miJbf,
Cai' io poaaa, that I may be abb, Ac
Che to poaaa (poifO.
Ch' egli poaaa.
Che no! posalamo.
Che Tol poealate.
Ch' igUno poiaano.

fmptnf* Potera, Ac. I ooold, Ac.

pifftiio rimU^ Potei (poMM), poteati, poti, potemmo, poteate, potenmo {ptUtm

Uro\ I could, Ac.
tmptrf. 9ubJ, Be poteaal, Ac If I conkl, Ac
fWvra. Potrd, pdtrai, Ac I ahall be able, Ac
Cmd, jtrM, Potrei {potria), potreati, Ac I ahould be able, Ac

h^, pret. DoY€re, to be obliged

(moat).
A|/C patL Atst dovato^ to have been

obliged.

Davo (fUbbQ, d€ggio\ I muai,

Ac
Devi (do).

Dobbiamo {d^ggiamo).

IKnretei

Derono {dMcnu, dtggieno).

Prt», pari, Dovendo, being obliged.
Pott part, Doynto, been obUged.

Ch* io debba (d^gi^), that I may ba

obliged, Ac
Che tu debba {deggia),
Ch* egU debba {deggia).
Clie noi dobbiamo {d^ggiamo)*
Che Toi dobbiate {deggiaU).
Ch' eglino debbano {diggiano),

hufprnf. DoTera, Ac I waa obliged, Ac

Paif. Hm. Dovei {daotUS^ doveati, dovd (dovette), dovemmo, doreate, dovet-

teio, I waa obttgodi Ac
Hiptaf. mAi> Doveaai, Ac If I were obliged, Ac
FSOare. Dorrd^ donal, Ac I ahall be obliged, Ac
Cmd, pret, DoTiel, ^ I ahould be obliged, Ac

3.

b^,pru,
wilUng.

VoKre, to be wliling.
Aver Tolnto, to have been

Prta, part, Volendo, being willing.
Patt pari, Yoluto, been willing.

Prm, ind. Voglio (ae^), vnoj, Tnob^ vogliamo^ voletfl^ vogUono, I
willing^ Ac

EIGHTY-FIFTH LBSSQN. 507

Pre9, md(f Che io TogUa, tu voglia, egU vogna, vogUamo, vqgttato, vogKano.

thttt I may be wffllng, 4q.'
Fmpmf. Voleva, Ac. I was willing, Ac,

Per/, rim, VoUI| volesti, vollei Yoiemmo, voleste, vdllerOi I was willing^ Ac
imperf. mtj. Se Yoleasi, Ao^ if I were willing, A«.
PiUure, Yorrd, vorral, Ac. I shall be willing, Ac.
Coiui pret. Vorrei, Toireati, Ac I should be willing, Ac.

Inf. prtk Sol6re, to be accnstomed.
■/fl/*. pa9t. Essere solito, to have been
accustomed.

Pru.yart. Soiendo^ being aeeiw*

tomed.
Past pari, Solito, been accostomed.

Prt9. ind. Soglio, noB, suola^ sogliamo, solete, sogliono, I am accna-
tomod, Ac.

Pru, subj. Ch* io BOglia, che tu soglia, ch' egli soglia, sogliamo, sogliate^
eogliano, that I may be accustomedi Ac.

hnperf. Soleva, solevi, soleva, Ac. I was accustomed, Ac

hnperf. mdj. Se io solesai, tu solessi, egli solesse, Ac. If I was accus-
tomed, Ac.
Oba. This verb is delective, and the tenses wanting are generally made up

by means of the past participle with tf«er^ as : io sono, io era, I0 fui, io sard

solito, Ac.

Prew. part, Sapendo, knowing.
PoMt part, Saputo, known.

6.
h^. pru, Sap^re, to know.
h^, pad, ' Aver saputo, to have

known.

Pre9. indie. So, sai, sa, sappiamo, sapete, sanno, I know, Ac.
Pre9, $ubj, Ch' io esppia, tu sappia, egli sappia, noi sappiamo, voi sappiatSb

eesi sappiano, that I may know, Ac.
Imperf, Sapeva, sapevi, Ac. I knew, A&

Pmf, rim, Seppi, sapesti, seppe, sapemmo, 8apeste,.seppero, I knew, Ac
Imperf, euhj, Se io sapeMi, tu sapessi, egli sapesse, Ac If I knew, Ac
Ptihgre, Saprd, saprai, Ac I sluUl know, Ac.
Cand, pree. Saprei, sapresti, saprebbe, Ac. I should know, Ac.
Imperatbte, Sappi, sappia, sappiamo, sappiate, sappiano, know thou, Ac

Inf, prte, Ved^re, to see.

If\f. poet. Aver veduto, to have seen.

Pree. part. Vedendo {teggendo)^ 1

ing.
Poet part Veduto (vieto\ seen.

* The irregular verbs in Ure (with the accent on the last syllable but one), as
vcUre: doUre, to grieve; vaUre, to be worth, and their compounds, take in the
first person g^ which is retained in the persons mentioned in the Preliminary
Observations (p. 606). In doUre and voUre g may precede or follow the letter I,
except in the first and second persons plural, where the soft sound, dqgHame,
degUaU, is preferred to the hard, dolghiamOf dolghiaie.

608

B1GHTT-FI7TH LESSON.

Prm. imd, V«do (t^go^viggia), vedl, y%d% yeeflamo {9eggiaimo\ vedal^

▼edono {veggonOf veggitmo), I see, Ac
Pre*. mUfJ, Ch' lo, tu, egU veda {vegga^ w^^)» noi vediamo (v^ggiamo), *e^

that I may see, Ac*
Impetf, lo vedeva, ta Tederi, Ac. I saw, Ac
Ptrf. rim, VUli, vedeati, vide, Tedemmo, vedeste, videro, I nw, Ac
Jmpmf. nifrf. Se lo vedeaal, ttt Tedesal, Ac If I saw, Ac
PuJturt, Vedrdk Twlrai, Ac lahaUaee^Ac
Omd, pTit. V«drei, vedreati, vedrabbe, Ac I ahonld aea, Ac
imptrnHH, Tedl, veda {Hgg^t vediamo {ptggieam\ Tedete, Yedano (v^^ono),

aeetbon, Ac

h{f. fTf, Sed€re, to ait.
ii|f. pati. Aver (or eaaere) aedvto^ to
hare aat.

Prta. pari. Sedendo {Mggmdo), tAu

ttng. '
PaaiparL Sednto.

Fre§. intL Siedo {Mggo^ 9eggio), aiedi, aiede, aedlamo {•eggiamo)^ aedeto, ale-

dono {teggvno, Mggicmo), I ait, Ac
Fru, §ubj, Ch* io, tu, «gli alada {Mggth •tggia)^ eediamo {iteggiamo), sedlale

{aeggiaU)t aiedano {aegganOf Hggiano)^ that I may ait, Ac
hnp, Sedeva, ledeTi, Ac I aat, Ac
Pmf, rim, Sedal {9td€Ui\ aedead, ledd (aedeOe), aedemmo, aedeate, aaderono

(9etUiUro\ I aat
imperf,9uij, Se io aedeaal, ta ledeaai, Ac If I aat.
fSUure. Sederd (poet Mdrd), Ac lahallalt^Ac
Cond, pm, Sederei, Ac I ahoald ait, Ac
imperaihc Siedl, aieda (Mggs), aediamo {9eggiamo), aadete, aiedano {Hggotm\

alt thou, Ac

8.

P9e9. pari. Parendo, appearlni:.
Pad parL Paruto {parmf^ appeared.

hif. pru, Parire, to appear.
htf, paai» Avar parato (parto), to
have appaafed.

/Vm. ituL Paio^ pari, pare, paiamo (poriomo), parete, paiono, I appear, &c.
Pret, §ui>j, Ch* io paia, tu paU, egU paia, pariamo, pariate, paiano, tint I ma>

appear, Ac
fmpmf. PareTi, pareri, Ac I appeared, Ac

P^. rim. Parri, paieati, parve, paremmo, pareate, panreio, I appeared, dbe.
impmf. nifrf. Se pareaai, Ac If I appeared, dbc
AifuTi. Parrd, pairai, parr&, Ac I ahall appear, Ac
CoiuL pret. Panel, parreati, dbc I ahould appear, Ac

* Verba In dirt (with t^o accent on the laat ayllable but one) may in the firai
peraon of the preaent take inatead of d the letter^, which la doubled between
two Towela, and pronounced either hard, aa in ^ or aoft, aa the En^pUah j.
Only there is to be observed, that, aa here above (note>), in the firet and seoond
persons plural, the soft sound, aa veggiama, vtggiaU^ ia to be prelerred to tlM

EIGHTY-FIPTH LBSSOIf.

5dft

9.

Prtt, part. DolendOi gileviqg.
Peui pari, Dolttto, grieved.

h{f, prm. Dol6re (see note ', p. 607),

to grieve.
Inf. poBt, Eseere doluto, to have

grieved.

Pret. ind. Doglio {dolgo) duoU, daole, dogUamo {dolghiaino)^ dolete^ dogUono

{dotfi:ano)f I grieve, dbc.
Pres. wbj. Ch, lo' tu, egU doglia (dolga), dogliamo (dolghiamo), dogUate {dot^

ghiate)f dogliano (dolgano), that I may grievie, dkc.
Imperf. Doleva, dolevi, dkc. I grieved, dbc.

Per/, rim. Dolei, dolesti, dolse, dolemmo, doleate, dolsero, I grieved, Ac .
Imperf. wbj. Se dolessi, &c. If I grieved, dtc.
Future. Dorrd, dorral, d^. I shall grieve, 6lc.
Cond. pre*. Dorrei, dorresti, Ac I should grieve, &c.

10.

Ir\f. pret, Val^re (see note >, p. 607),

to be worth,
ifl/: poMt. Aver valuto, to have been

worth.

Prta. part Valendo^ being wonh.
PoMt part, Valato (fiaho)^ been worth.

Pres. ind. Vaglio {valgo)t vali, vale, vagllamo {vaigkiamo)^ valete, vagUono
{v€Ugono\ I am worth, dbc. . ^

Pret. 9ubj. Ch* lo, tu, egli vaglla (valga)^ vagUamo {vaighiamo), vagliate, vag-
liano {valgano)t diat I may be worth, &^.

Imperf Valeva, valevi, dbc. I was worth, Ac

Perf rim, Valsi, valesti, valse, valeniroo, valeste, valsero, I was worth, Ac.

Imperf tuij, Se io valessl, dbc. If I was worth, &e.

Puture. Varrdi.varral, varra, dbc. I shall be worth, &c.

Cond. prt9. Varrel, varresti, dkc. I should be worth, dkc.

Imperative. Vali, vagUa, vagliamo, valete, vagUano, be thou worth, Ao.

Pre*, part. Cadendo, falling.
Pagt part. Caduto, iaQen.

11.

Inf. pre*. Cad€re (see note*, p. 603),

to fall.
Ir^. pad. Essere caduto, to have

fallen.
Prea. ind. Cado {eaggio, poet.), cadi, cade, cadlamo (eaggiamo), eadete, oado

no {eaggiano\ I &11, dc.
Pre*, wubj. Ch' io, tu, egli cada {caggia^^ cadlamo {fagg%amo\ Ac, that I may

fall, Ac.
Imperf Cadeva, cadevl, dr«. 1 fell, &c
Perf rim. Caddi, cadesti, cadde, cademroo, cadeste, caddero, I fell, dbc

It also has : cadei or cadettl, &c.
Imperf tvbj. Se io cadessi, dbc. If 1 fell, dbc.
FuJtvare. Cadrd, cadrai, cadra, cadremo, cadrete, cadranno (better than cadei6)

dbc. I shall fall, du;.
€2and.pre». Cadrei, cadresti, dbc. I should fall.

510

SIOBTT-PIFTH LKSSOM.

11
h^'* f^w. Tonin, to hold. I PrtM, part, Teneodo, hokUn^

b^f. paaL Arm tennto, to have held. | PaH part. Tenuto, held.
Prat. ind. Tengo, tienl, tlene, tenlamo {tenghiamo)^ tenete, teogono, I hold, dbc
Prm. mibj. Ch* to, tti, egU, tengt, tenlamo {tafghiamo), teniate {iengkiaU), tm-

gmo, that I may hold, Ac.*
Impmf* Teoeva, teneri, Ac I held, Ac.

/'In/, rim, Teniii, teneatf, tenne, tenemmo, teneate, temiero, I held, Ac
Irnptrf. tvhj. 8e to teneni, Ac. If I held, Ac.

Futur*. Teird, terral, terri, terremo, tenete, terranno, I ahall hold, Ac.
Cand, pr0$, Tenei, temati, tenebbe, dbc. I should bold, Ac

Tieni, tenga, tenlamo, tenete, tengano, hold thou, Ac

13.

imf. prta, Rimanire (oee note \) to

remain.
/i|f. paat. Ewer liaaato (rimaao), to

hare remained.

Pre§. part. Rimanendo, remaining.

PaHpari, Kimaato or limaao^ remain-
ed.
Prm, md. Rimango, rimani, rimane, rlmanlamo (rimanghiamo), rimanete, ri-

mangono, I renudned, Ac.
Pru. mibj. Ch' io, tu, egU rimanga, noi rlmanlamo (rHmmgAiasno), vol rima-

niate {rimanghiaU)^ eeal rimangano, that I may remain, Ac
Impeff, Rimaneva, Ac I remained, Ac
P§rf. Km. Rimaai, rimaneatl, rimaae, rimanemmo, rimaneate, rimaaero^ I r»-

mained,dtc
Jmpttf. nJtj. Se lo rimaneaai, Ac. If I remained, Ac
f^Uure, Rimarrd^ rimanal, Ac I shall remain, Ac
ComL pru. Rimarrei, rimarreatl, rlmarrebbe, Ac I ahould remain, Ac
imperaiiM. Rlmanl, rimanga, rlmanlamo, rimanete, rimangano, remalD thoQi

Ac

14.

A/. pr$». PiaeCie, lo please. l /Vet. part Piaoendo, ]

Ji^.paat Aver piaeiuto,to have pleased. | PaHpart. Piacinto, pleaaed.
Prt9, ind. Piacdo, piad, place, placciamo, piaoete, piacciono, I pleaae, Ac
Pr€9. mibj. CV to, tn, egli placcia, piacclmo, piacciate, plaedano, that I may

please, Ac.
imperf, Piaoeva, plaeeTl, Ac I pleased, Ac
Perf. rim, Placqnl, placeatl, placque, piaoemmo, piaceate, piacquero, I plea»>

ed, Ac
imperf, subj. Se to plaeeaal, Ac. If I pleased, Ac
Future. Placard, piaoeral, dtc. I ahall please, dbc.
Cond, pret. Piacerei, Ac. I should please, Ac.

1 Verbs in nSre (with the accent on the last syllable but one), aa tenSre^ tc
hold ; rinumSre (also venire, to oome), may Uke in the first person of the pres-
ent tense after n the letter^, which Is retained in the persons mentioned in the
Preliminary Obsenrationa. In the first and second persons plural, teniamo, 9e-
itistno. teniaie, veniate^ are preferred to ienghiamo^ venghiama, tengkUUe, vengkiaU

Pre&. part. Ponendo, pattiDg.
PoMtpart PoBto, put.

EIGHTY-FIFTH LESSON. 04^

06«. In the eame manner are conjugated taeirt^ to be silent, and^ioe^tf, to
lie (be situate). The letter c is always doubled when it Is followed by two tow-
elS) except in the past participle.

II. IBBB«VLAB TmSlS, IIATX2f« THB ACCIirr OIT THX LAST STXXABUi DVT TWO

16.

/jlf. prn, Porre (fonnerly jHmer%\ to

put
t^f. pa»L Aver posto, to have pnt.
Pre*. uuL Pongo, poni, pone, poniamo (ponghiamo), ponete, pongono, I put,

&c.
Pre9. aubj. Ch' io, tu, egli ponga, poniamo {ponghiamo)^ poniate {pmghUUt)t

pongano, that 1 may put, dbc.
Imptrf. Poneva, ponevi, poneva, dbc. 1 did put, &c.
Per/, rim. Posi, ponesti, pose, ponemmo, poneste, posero, I did put, Ac
Imperf. aubj. S' io ponessi, &c. If I put, &.c.
Future. Porru, porrai, &c. 1 shall put, &c.

Cand prea. Io porrel, tu porrestl, egli porrebbe, dbc. I should put, dbc.
Imperative. Poni, ponga, poniamo, ponete, pongano, put thou, &c.

Oba. In the same manner are conjugated all its compounds, as : oomporre, to
compound ; preporre^ to prefer, dkc. (See Oba. 492, and Oba, A. 496.)

16.
Inf. prea. Dire (formerly dicere)^ to say. I Prea. part. Dicendo, saying.
h^f. paat. Aver detto, to have said. | Paat part, Detto, said.
Prea. indie, Dico, dici, dice, diciamo, dlte, dicono, I say, &c.
Prea. aubj. Ch* io, tu, egli dlca, diciamo, diciate, dicano, tliat 1 may my^ dk&
Imperf. Diceva, dicevi, 6lc. 1 said, dc.

Perf. rim, Oissi, dicesti, disss, dicemmo, diceste, disyiro, I said, Ac
Imperf. aubj. Se io dicessi, Ac. If I said, dc.
Future, Dird, dirai, dc. I shall say, Ac.
Cond, prea. Direi, diresti, Ac I should say, Ac.
Imperative. Di*, dica, diciamo, dlte, dicano, say thon, Ac

17.
If^f. pret Bevere or here, to drink. I Prea. part. Bevendo, drinking.
Inf. paat. Aver bevuto, to hare drunk, j Paat part. Bevuto, drunk.
Prea. ind. Bevo, bevi, beve, bevlaroo, berete, bevono, I drink, Ac
Prea aubj. Ch* io, tu, egli beva, beviamo, beviate, bevano, that 1 may drink,* Ac.
Imperf. Beveva (frevea), bevevi, Ac. I drank, Ac.
Perf. rim, Bcvetti (derri), beverti, bevette (beme), bevemmo, beveste, bevetterc

(6errero)8, I drank, Ac.
Imperf aubj. Se io bevessi, Ac. If | drank, Ac.
Future. Berd, berai, bora (better than beverd), Ac. I shall drink, Ac
Cand, prea, Berei, beresti, Ac. I should drink, Ac.
Imperative, Bevi, beva, beviamo, bevete, bevano, drink thou, Ac.

* The perf. rim. bebbi^ bebbe^ bebbero^ is used in poetry.

512 £IGHTY-FIFTH LES^lf.

la

b^, prtB. Spegnen, to extinguish.
Ifif. past Avere apento, to have extin-
guished.

Pru, pari, SpegnendOi ttxtlngalah

ing.
Pott part Spento, extinguished.

Pre§. tnd. Spegno (tpingo), spegni, spegne, spqpilamo (ipcnfUoMo), 8pei^

nete, spegnono («p«fi^ofu>), I extinguish, Ac
Pre». 9utj. Ch* lo, to, egli spegna {(ipenga)^ spegnismo (apenghiamo), spegmats

{9penghiaU\ spegnano (spengano), that I may extinguish, dbc
hnpcrf. Spegneva, Ac I extinguished, dbc

Pre/, rim, Spensl, spegnesti, spense, spcgnemmo, spegneste, ipenaero, I ex-
tinguished, &c
Imperf, mdj. Se io spegnessip &c. If I extingulsiied, dbc
/Vurt. Spegnerd, spegnerai, Ac I shall extinguish, A«.
Oond, pr«t. Spegnerei, spegneresti, Ac. I should extinguish, Ac.
JwptroH^t. Spegni, spenga, spegniamo, spegnete, spengano, extinguish thou,

Ac

Ob*. In the same manner are coi^ugated ilBtgtrt, to gird ; tpaigm^ to push ;
9tTmg«Tt^ to squeeie ; thtgtr^ to dye (colour) ; and their compounds.

19.
JNf. pre*. Soegliere {or scene), to I Pre*, part, ScegUendo, cho98ing.

choose. I

h{f, paU. Aver scelto, to have cYyomnA PaH pari, Scelto, chosen.
Pre*, ind, Sceglio {tcdgo)^ wes^, soegtte, scegjiamo, soe^te, scegUono

(soe/^ono), I choose.
Prt9, tubj, Gh' io, tu, egU sceglia (soefga), scegliamo, scegUate, acegfiano

(sBe^gono), that I may chooee, dbc
imperf, Soeglieva, Ac I chose, Ac.
Per/, rim, Scelsi, scegUestl, scelse, acegliemmo, sceglieste, scelseto, I

ehoae,Ac
Imperf, mabj. Se io scegUessI, &c. If I chose. Ac
Pttiurt. Sceglierd {and scerrd,) Ac I shall choose, Ac.
Cond. pru, Sceglierel and soerrel, Ac I should choose, Ac
imperatioe, ScegU, scelga, scegliamo, scegUete, scelgano, choose thou, Ac

OU, In the nme manner are coi^'ugated: aeiogUere or teiorrtt to untie*
kgHere or torr j^ to take away $ oo^liere or oorre, to gather, and their compound^
as : duiarre, to remove : raeoorre, to pick up ; duciorre, to dissolve, dbc

20.
Pre8, pari. Traendo, drawing.

Ir^. pret, Traire, fcrmtrljf tiaere, to

draw.
inf. pan. Aver trattp, to have drawn.

PoMi part. Tratto, drawn.

Prea. indie. Traggo, trai atrfiggi}^ tree {tragge), traiamo {traggiamo), tiaot^

traggono, I draw, Ac.
Pre*, ntbj, Ch' io, to, egli tragga, traiamo {traggiamo)y traiate {traggiat^ tragi

gano, that I may draw, Ac
Imperf. Traeva, traevi, Ac I drew^ Ac.

Perf, rim, Trassi, traesti, trssse, traemmo, traeate, trassero, I drew, Ac
imperf. ntbj. Se io traessi, Ac. If 1 drew, Ac

EI6BTY-FIFTH LSSSON. 5] 3

fhUwe, Trandk tnirai, trerri, &c. I shall draw, Ac.
CoruLprea, Trarrei, trarresti, trarrebbe, dbc. I should draw, Ac,
Imperaiiw, Trai, tragga, traiamo {traggiamo), tiaete, traggano, draw thou, dbc
Ob*. In the same manner are conjugated s aUrarre^ to attract ; owUmrri, 19
contracts deirarre, to detract

III. IRREGULAR VERBS IN ire.
2L

Inf. pret. Apparire, to appear sud-
denly.

li\f. pott. Essere apparito or apparso,
to have sppeared.

Pret. pari. Apparendo, appearing.

Pak part. Apparito and apparso, ap-
peared.
Pre». indie, Apparisco {appaio\ apparisci {appairC^^ apparisce {appart\

appariamo, apparite, appariscono {pppaiono\ I appear, dbc.
Pres, Mubj. Ch' io, tu, egli apparisca {appaia), appariamo, appariate, apparisca^

no {appaiano\ that I may appear, &.c.
Jmperf. Appariva, apparivi, dbc. I appeared, 6lc.
Peif. rim. Apparii {appaTvi)^ apparisti, appari {apparve\ apparimmo, apparista

apparirono (apparvero), I appeared, &>c
Jmperf, ntbj. Se io apparlssl, &c If I appeared, Ac
Future. Apparird, dbc. I shall appear, dbc.
Cond. pree. Apparirei, Ac. I should appear, dbc.
Imperative. Apparisci, apparisca, appariamo, apparite, appariscano, appear

Uiou, dbc

Obe. In the same manner are conjugated its compounds: eomparire^ to ap-
pear trarparvrtt to be transparent ; tpaHre^ to disappear, dbc

22,
h^. prte. /enire, to oome. | Pre». part, Venendo, {aUo veoente)

I coming.
h^. paM, E8ser»Teniito, to have come. | PomI part. Tenuto, come.
Pre». ind. Vengo, vleni, yiene, veniamo {vtnghMono)^ venlte, vengono, I come,

&c
Pru. eubj. ?h' io^ to, egli venga, Teniamo {vetighiaimo)^ venlate (venghiaU)

yengano, that I may come, &c.
imperf. Veniva, veniyi, Ac I came^ &o.

Perf, rim. Venni, yenisti, yenne, yenimmo, yeniste, yennero, I came, Ac.
hnpeif. ntbj, Se io yenlssi, &c. If I came, Ac

Future. Verro, yerrai, yerii, yerremo, yerrete, yerranno, I shall come, Ac
Cond. pree. Verrei, yerresti, verrebbe, dkc. I should come, dbc.
hnperative. Vieni, yenga, yeniamo, yenite, yengano, come thou, Ac.

23.
bif. pree. Morire, to die (expire). | Pree. part. Morendo, dying.
Al/: paat. Essere morto, to haye died. | Pattpart. Morto, died.
PrtB. ind. Muoio (fmioro), muori, mnore, morlamo {muoUano), morlta, muoio-
no imitorono)^ I die, Ac.

il4 KWHTY-PIFTH LKSSOIf.

Pre*, mibj, Ch' \% tu, egtl miioiii, moriamo {mumamo\ nuniata (flttiMlc)* miM>*

Iwo, that I may die, Ac.
Impmf. MortTa, Ac. I died, Ac
I'ei/. riM. Morii, niorbti, Ac I died, dbc.
Imperf. mJbj. 8e io morisai, dbc. If I died, dtc
Future. Morrd (mortrd), roorrai, morri, moneiiio, morrete, moiranno, I ahaU

die, Ac.
Cmd, pret. Horrei (marirei^, roorreati, 6lc. I ahould die, Ac
ImperoHwe, Muori, muoia, rouoiamo, morite, muoiano, die tliou, Ac

24.
it\f.frree. Salire, to ascend. | Pre«. pari. Salendo, ascending.

Inf. past. Esaere salito, to have as- Pa«/ part Saiito, ascended.

cended. I

Pree ind. Salgo {eaglio^ ealieco\ sail («a/i«rt), sale (raKace), aagUamo (aof^ftao^

mo)t aalite, salgono (ao^tiono, m/mcoko), I ascend, Ac
Pree. eubj. Ch' io, tu, egU saiga {eaglia, eatieca)^ sagliamo {eatgkiamo), aa^iaia

(aalgkiate), salgino («a^/uiiio, eaIiscano\ that I may aaoend, dtc
Imperf. Saliva, &c I aacended, Ac.
Perf. rim* Salii, Ac. I aacended, Ac.
Imperf. eubj. Se io, salissi, Ac If I ascended, Ac.
PuUere, Saiird, Ac. I shall aacend, dc.
ContL pree, Salirei, Ac I ahould ascend, Ac.
Imperaiive, Sali, aalga, sagliamo, salite, salgano, ascend thon, Ac

25.
/i|f. pree, Udire, to liear. | Pree. part. Udendo, hearing.

inf. paeL Aver udito, to have heard. | PaM part, Udito, heard.
Pree. tad. Odo, odi, ode, udiamo, udite, odono, 1 hear, Ac.
Pre*. euJtj. Ch* id, tu, egli oda, udiamo, udiate, odano, that I may hear, 4te.
Imperaiite. Odi, oda, udiamo, udite, odano, hear thou, Ac
Obe. The remaining tenses are regular.

26.

Pree, pari, Uacendo (eaeendo), going

out.
Paet pari. Uscito (eeeito), gone out

if\f. pree, Uadre, aleo esdra, to go

out.
Inf, paei, Baaere uscito {eeeito) to have

gone 'out
Pree. ind. Elaoo, eaid, esce, uaciamo (eseiomo), uscite (ean<e), escono, I go out,

Ac.
Pree, eubJ. Ch* io, tu, egli esca, usciamo (eaeiamd), uadate (eaeiaU\ eacano.

tliat I may go out, Ac
Imperative. Esci, esca, usciamo, uscite, escano, go thou out, Ac.

Oto. The remaining tenses are regular.

Ofta. Some verbs are only irregular in the perfetto rwnolo and past participle
B:

BIOBTY-FIFTH LESSON.

51&

Aprira, to open.
Coprire, to cover.
Offeilre, to offer.

Inflttire, to influence.

Dire^ to Bay.

Per/, rim.
April and apersi.
Copili and coperaL
Offerii and offeraL

Influii and influad.

Dlaai.

PadT^mi,
' Aperto.

Coperto.

Offerto.

Detto.

DEFECTIVE VERBS (Fer6idife(/{ri).

Tiny' are ao calledi becauae they are not uaed in all tenaea and peraonBi bnt
only in tboae which are met with in good authora. They are the following :
JnJ. pret. Gire, to go (only uaed in | PqmL parL Oito, gone.

poetry). i

Pret. indie Glte, ye go.
imperf, Oiva {gia), I, thou, he went; givamo, we w^nt; givate, you wenti

givano {giano\ they went.
Perf. rim, Giatl, thou wenteat; gi {gio\ he went; gimmo, we went; glate,

you went ; girono, they went.
Imptrf, ntbj, Se io giaai, tu giaai, egli giaae, giaaimo, glate, giaaero, If I went,

Ac,
PuOwt, Giro, I ahall go; giral, thou wilt go; gini, he will go; giremo, girete,

giranno, we, you, they will go.
Cond, pret, Girei, gireatl, girebbe, giremmo, gireate, girebbero, I ahould ga Ac.
Imperative. Gite, go ye.

It{f, prea. Ire, to go. I Poet, part, Ito, gona

Prea, ind. Ite, ye go. I Imperf, Iva, he went.

Future, Iremo, we ahall go; Jrete, you will go ; iranno, they will go.
Imperative. Ite, go ye.

Tt{f. pree, Riedere, to return. | Pree. part. Riedendo, returning.

Pru, ind. Riedo, I return ; riedi, thou retumeat; riede, he retuma.
Imperf. Riedera, I returned, Ac,
Imperative, Riedi, return thou ; rleda, let him return ; riedano, let them rtftun

fnf. prea. OUre, to amell.

Imperf. 01i*/i, I amelt; ollvi, thon amelteat; oHva, he amelt; oliTano, thef
amelt

Inf. prea. Galore, to care.

Prea. ind. Mi cale, I care.

Prea, aubj, Che mi ca^ia, that I may

care.
Imperf, auij, Se mi caleaae, if J/cared.

Poet part. Caluto, cared.
Imperf, Mi caleva, > j ^^^^
Perf, rim. Ml calae, )
Omd prea. Mi calerebbe wr eaiTCttM^
I would care.

Lidre or leclre, to be permitted,
Thia verb haa only Uee and lece, it ia permitted. Paat pdrt Mto and Nato
permitted. Even ita infinitive ia never uaed.

516 iiGBTT-Pirm lbssoii.

EXEEQISfi.
903.
THE POUR LANGUAGES.

A TALB.

We have all read in the Holy Scriptures the miracle of the
tongues of fire which descended from heaven upon the disciples
of Christ, and inunediately communicated to those men, who
were complete strangers to all human learning, the knowledge of
the several idioms they required in order to preach the gospel tc
the world.

What a miracle then did for the apostles, let us now do for our-
selves by our own labour:, for the study of languages is certainly
a most useful study ; it enables us to hold communication with all
nations ; it renders the whole world, as it were, our home.

Such was the opinion of young Edmund de Grancey's parents,
who, some fifty years ago, possessed one of the finest estates in
Dauphin^. Though unacquainted with foreign languages them-
selves, they were nevertheless sensible of the importance they
might be of to their son. ** No man on earth," would the Baron
de Grancey frequently say; "knows what may be his future
destiny. I therefore wish, shpuld Edmund have occasion to
travel, that he may never find himself a stranger in any country.
I remember well how much I was embarrassed for want of know,
ing the Grerman when I was a prisoner in Prussia during the
seven years' war."

Endowed with a happy facility, Edmund made rapid progress
under the able masters that were called in to instruct him. At
the age of twelve, he was already able to read the charming
fables of Lessing in Grerman, the History of England by Hume,
the beautiful lyric tragedies of Metastasio, that Italian poet whose
language is so harmonious. He could already express himself
with tolerable accuracy in these three idioms ; and, not to men-
tion his maternal tongue, which he knew very well, he could,
write a letter, almost without a mistake, in Italian, Grerman, and
Bnglish.

EIGHTY-FIFTH LESSON. 517

Meantime the revolution broke out. The Baron de Grancey,
whose fortune had always been employed in doing good, never
stispected that the political tempest could at all concern him ; but
the event soon proved that he was labouring under a fatal illusion.
He received information that sentence of proscription had been
pronounced against him, and orders issued for his being thrown
into prison. The baron was therefore obliged to fly with his wife
and son, and to gain with all speed the frontiers of Piedmont.
The fatal news reached him at a moment when he was visiting a
farm at some distance from his castle ; so that he could only carry
with him the little* money he had on his person, which amounted
to about twenty-five louis. They had not even the consolation of
bidding adieu to their native abode.

At Edmund's age, we feel a lively pleasure in hurrying for
the first time along the public roads; we look with amazement at
the new objects that present themselves on every side ; afler hav.
ing gone a few leagues, we think >ire have reached the utmost
extremities of the earth. Edmund would, however, have enjoyed
this pleasure with greater relish had it not been accompanied with
the exile of his family.

The Baron and Baroness de Grancey had at first betaken them-
selves to Turin. After having received a supply of money which
their friends had contrived to send them from France, they lefl
that city in order to go and settle at Rome, until better times.
But in order to do this, it was necessary to traverse a great part
of Italy. As their resources were but scanty, the exiles took the
ordinary conveyances from one town to another; a means of
travelling which is neither elegant nor expeditious, but which is
accompanied with but little expense. During this journey, at
well as on every other occasion since their arrival in Italy
Edmund served as interpreter to his parents. It was an interest
lag spectacle to see this child of thirteen thus repaying his fathe:
and mother for the education he had received from them. —
Edmund frequently heard those around him saying : " Do you
see that French lady and gentleman, with-their son? They have
reason to congratulate themselves on having such a child. Pooi
exiles! they do not understand a word of our language;
without him they would be much embarrassed — it is really

518 BIGUTY-FIFTH LBSSOIT.

admirable !" This importance, which events had given him, was
far from rendering Edmund proud ; but he congratulated himself
every moment on his having studied the Italian with so much
attention, and to such purpose.

The sort of car in which our emigrants were journeying, con-
tained, besides two other travellers, a composer of music, who
was going to Florence in order to get an opera represented ; he
was a good-natured juvenile maestro, and equally skilled in the
culinary as in the musical art : the other was an abb6. who, though
an excellent man and very pious to boot, loved music to the full
as much as nis neighbour the maestro. The coachman kept singing
on his box, endeavouring from time to time to mend the sluggish
pace of his horses : it was, as you may observe, a sort of musical
caravan. The sun was about to disappear from the horizon, and
the maestro, who had received from nature a vigorous appetite,
was beginning to long for supper, when the travellers perceived
the wished-for inn where they were to sup and pass the night.
It was already so full that the master and mistress found great
difficulty in answering all their guests. The arrival of the coach
increased their difficulties. The maestro in particular called
loudly for supper ; but finding that they were not preparing it
qoick enough to answer his impatience, he took possession of the
stove, threw off his coat, tucked up his sleeves, and set about
preparing himself the classic macaroni,

Madame de Grancey, who till lately had lived so comfortably
In her own castle, served by numerous domestics, surrounded by
all the accommodations which usually accompany riches and
security, had more difficulty than her husband in bringing her
mind to so sudden and so complete a change. But as she did not
want courage, she soon became resigned, and sat down with a
good grace to the homely supper of the inn. The nx>st conspicu-
ous dish was the macaroni prepared by the musician, who received
on that occasion almost as many compliments as he had eTerdone
for the best of his operas.

When the repast was finished, a still greater difficulty awaited
the host ; this was to find beds for so many guests : the first
comers had bespoke all the rooms in the house ; the maestro and
the ahh6 installed themselves the best way they could in the

EIGHTY-FIFTH LESSON. 510

trayellers' room ; so that the French emigrants were obliged to
take up their lodgings for the night in a small building attached
to the inn, where some sorry beds had been hastily prepared, the
matresses of which contained more straw than wool.

The room, in which the baron with his wife and son were
lodged, was separated from the neighbouring one by a very thin
partition. Scarcely had our travellers' gone to bed when they
heard some talking in the next room. They distinguished the
voices of two men conversing together ; but M. and Madame do
Grancey, fatigued by their journey, and besides not understanding
what was said, soon fell asleep. Edmund, on the contrary, lost
not a word ; and some expressions he heard uttered by those in
the neighbouring room sufficiently arrested his attention to keep
him awake.

.... "Don't speak too loud, Jacomo," said one of them to hin
companion.

" Poh !" replied the other, " what does it signify ? the French
travellers whom we have for neighbours don't understand a word
of Italian ; of that I am quite certain ; for, finding myself in the
court with the old gentleman and his wife, I asked them, merely
by way of conversation, where they came from ; they made me
a sign that they did not understand me. Set your mind at ease,
then, Battista ; we may talk over our intended expedition With
perfect freedom."

Edmund remained in bed quite motionless, and listened with an
attentive ear. He had guessed the intentions of these men from
the very first. He took care, however, not to give way to any
feeling of terror. Instead of crying out, and calling for assistance,
he commanded himself with a coolness above his years, being aware
of the signal service he might render, not only to his parents, but
to all that were in the inn. A noise of pots and bottles, which
accompanied their conversation, announced that they had had re-
course to the glass in order to heighten their courage ; in propor-
tion as they drank, their voices became louder and their expres-
sions less guarded.

" Hah ! " replied one of them, *• to-morrow morning, by break
9f day, the coach sets off again ; before reaching the next village
(here is a bend in the road quite close upon the wood : we could

530 EIGHTY- FIFTH LESSON.

not have a better place for taking our stand. — ^But shoitld tbey

defend themselves ? . . . ." — *^ Poh ! they have no arms,

besides, though they had, thoy will be taken by surprise— our pis-
tols are double charged ; we shall send in two or three shots
amongst them, which will settle the business.— And then all will
be ours ' ... . what a glorious windfall !"

The two robbers ceased speaking ; one of them lay down and
fell asleep ; the other began to walk about the room. E/imund
returned thanks to God that he had been able to understand the
conversation of these two wretches, and supplicated his aid in this
important crisis. He then groped his way to his father's bedside
and awoke hint — " Father," said he, in a low voice, " in that room
close by, there are two robbers ; they are to await our coach in
order to rob and murder us." — " What ! child, are you sure of
that? " — "Yes, yes, father, I am quite certain of it; not a word
of what they said has escaped me ; they did not know that I
understood Italian, so that they spoke without any disguise. It
is at a turn of the road, near some wood that they are to lie in
wait for us."

M. de Grancey thought for a moment, in order to consider what
plan it would be necessary to adopt ; then, without awaking his
wife, who might have been seized with terror, he got up.-— <<Ck>me
with me, my dear child," said he ; " you have saved us all ; come,
and make as little noise as possible."

The baron and his son directed their steps towards the inn, and
knocked at the door : the host, after having opened it, asked what
they wanted by coming and disturbing pec^le in ihe middle of the
night. Edmund, who performed the part of interpreter, told him
all he had heard. — " Good God, sir ! " cried the host, terrified at
the idea of having robbers in his house, ^< I could wager that these
are the very individuals who plundered one of my cousins, some
three weeks ago." — " Is there not," asked M. de Grancey, " a
troop of horse in the neighbourhood ? " — " Yes, sir, about two milea
from this." — " Well, then, cause some one to mount on horseback,
or rather ride yourself full speed, in order to give notice to the
armed force."

Some minutes aAer, the innkeeper galloped off for the nearest
own. and M.de Grancey returned with Bdmund to his apartment

EIGHTY-FIFTH LESSON. 521

both of them observing the strictest silence. About an hour after,
they heard their neighbours go down stairs. The two robbers
met the landlord in the court just as he returned from his journey ;
and, having discharged their bill, they set off.

Dawn at last appeared ; the coachman ordered the travellers to
get ready. He was just going to put the horses to, when the
tramp of horse was heard upon the road ; on looking in that direc-
tion, they saw four dragoons, who were conducting two men with
their hands bound, both of whom were wounded. In these two
prisoners they recognized Jacomo and Battista. Before reaching
their place of ambush, they had fallen into the midst of the armed
force which had been previously posted there. The soldiers im
mediately seized them, and discovered in their persons two robbers
whom thay had long been in search of, but had hitherto been un.
able to find.

The travellers had all learned from the landlord the name of
their deliverer. Madame de Grancey embraced her son with
great emotion : the good abb6 called him a new Daniel : the maes^
tro struck up, in honour of the little French boy, a s(fag of tri-
umph, which he took from his new opera. In the midst of all
these congratulations, Edmund thought only of the happiness he
felt in having saved his father and mother.

Some days after, the emigrant family entered the states of the
Church, where every step gives rise to recollections of former
greatness ; at last they descried, while yet at a great distance, the
cupola of St. Peter's, which announced to them their approach to
the ancient capital of the world.

During his stay at Rome, Edmund laboured with renewed zeal
in order to perfect himself in the knowledge of English and Ger-
man. His grammars and dictionaries, works which in our youth
frequently appear to us so dull and so dry, pleased him more than
books of the most amusing nature ; for he recollected how much
he was indebted to that sort of study.

It was while he was thus employed that an old companion of M.
de Grancey, who had taken refuge in Dresden, wrote in order to
induce him to come and settle in that city, giving him hopes that
he would be able to procure for hitn an honourable employment.

M. de Grancey decided upon ^oing : his resources were dimin-

622 BIGHTT -FIFTH LESSON.

ishbg ; his estates in France had been confiscated, and the future
gave no bigns of any favourable change. Having collected all his
remaining property, he left Rome, and set out on his journey to
Saxony. The exiles every where met with the most cordial re-
ception ; for there is nowhere to be found a better or more hospita-
ble people than the Grermans. • But, for want of knowing the
idiom of those that were speaking around them, M. and Madame
de Grancey would again have found themselves in the utmost
embarrassment, had it not been for their Edmund, their dear
nterpreter.

From his v«hry first entrance into Germany, he could make him-
self perfectly understood. Constant practice soon rendered him
quite familiar with the language of Goethe and Schiller, which is
reckoned so dificult. He, too, when he first began to study it,
was a little frightened at the strangeness of its Gothic characters,
and the apparant harshness of its words, which are, however, very
agreeable in the mouth of one who knows how to pronounce them ;
but he now perceived that the belief of its impossibiUly, which
then alarmed him, was altogether groundless.

At his arrival in Dresden, M. de Grancey experienced a cruel dis-
appointment ; that person high in office, upon whom his friend hod
courted, was no longer in place ; the friend himself had been sent
to another town in Saxony ; so that, after many useless endeavours,
M. de Grancey was obliged to give up all hope of success. This
was a terrible blow for the poor exiles : their resources were now
quite exhausted by their long journey ; and of the town in which
they found themselves they knew not a single individual. The
health of Madame de Grancey began to give way under so many
fatigues ; and M. de Grancey, who would have submitted with
courage even to manual labour, now felt the first symptoms of a
painful disease. By little and little the exiled family had sold for
their subsistence the few jewels that fortune had left them ; the
cross of Saint Louis, which M. de Grancey had gained by a heroic
action, was the only article of value which he wished to preserve
to the Ifi^st. When walking with his lady, more than one head
was uncovered on seeing the noble decoration which sparkled on
the threadbare coat of the French emigrant. Edmund saw but
too well the situation of his parents ; more than once he had sur.

EIOHTY-FIFTH LESSON. 528

prised his mother with tears in her eyes ; his inability to assist
that mother, that father whom he loved so dearly, overwhelmed
him with grief; he was constantly trying to find out some means oi
being useful to them, and this state of continual anxiety rendered
him sad and thoughtful. Mieantime the poverty of the exiles was
increasing every day.

Things had come to this extremity, when one evening, Edmund,
who had been allowed by his parents to take a turn through the
town, entered as thoughtful but less sad than usual. He seemed
to be absorbed by some important idea which every now and then
presented some rays of hope. When he embraced the baron, he
said to him, with a tone of greater animation than usual : " O fa-
ther, if I could but be useful to you ! "

Next morning he went out earlier than usual, and directed his
steps towards one of the principal streets of Dresden, in which
was the shop of Mr. Petrus Meyer, a bookseller well known in
the town. Edmund entered the shop, which contained an im-
mense collection of works in all known languages. He asked it
he could speak to the master of the house. A clerk having re-
ceived permission, introduced him into the private room of Mr.
Petrus Meyer. He was a man of about fifly, rather stout, wrapt
in a large dressing-gown, with a cloth cap on his head, and
seated before a table covered with ledgers. In one hand he held '
a pen with which he was writing, and' in the other an enormous
pipe, which surrounded him with a dense atmosphere of smoke.

Through the midst of that cloud Mr. Petrus cast his eyes upon
the youth, and was immediately struck with his fine features, and
the modest confidence with which he presented himself. Edmund
had stopped near the door, with his hat off; the bookseller hav-
ing taken the pipe from his moutli :

" Well, child," said he to him in the language of the country,
" what is it you want ? "

" Sfr,^ replied Edmund, " you will, I hope, excuse me for call-
uig upon you, though I have not the honour of either knowing or
being known to you."

" Certainly, certainly . . . you are a foreigner, I presume; are
you a Frenchman ?"

524 KJillV FIFTH UiSSON.

'^ Why, lam. Ah, sir, do you find my German bad? Have
I made any mistakes?"

** Not at all, my child .... only a slight accent • • • . Ix>w old
are you ?"

" Fourteen . • . ."

'< There are few so young who can speak a foreign language
so well as you do ours."

" Oh, how happy I am to hear you say that !"

"Why so?"

" Because, sir, as I was passing yesterday before your house,
an idea struck me ; I said to myself: Perhaps they may want
some one who can translate into German books written in French,
or else to draw up some letters of commerce .... and I have
taken the liberty to come and speak to you about it, sir."

Edmund's face, and the manner in which he expressed himself,
quite captivated Mr. Meyer's attention.

" Who are you, then, my child ? Are you alone in Dresden f *

** No, sir, I am here with my father and mother ; my fiither
is called the Baron de Grancey, knight of Saint Louis, and a
gentleman from the province of Dauphin6 ; he is an emigrant :
we were once rich ; but are so no longer. I am sure that mj
parents are in difficulty ; and I wish, young as I am, to gain some
money for them. You can make inquiry about us of Madame
Krantz, at the sign of the Golden Eagk, where we lodge.

" You are a noble youth, and God will bless you," said Mr.
Petrus Meyer, taking Edmund by the hand with an emotion
which belied his habitual phlegm : " yes .... I wiA give you
employment.'

" Oh, sir," crieJ Edmund, embracing him with ardour, *^ and
will you really give me employment ? Ck>uld I but gain any
thing, however little, I would be so obliged to you for it."

" Well, well, .... return to-morrow, don't forget, do you hear
me, don't forget . . . ."

After repeated thanks, Edmund left him, so delighted, that in
returning to, the Golden Eagh^ he bounded rather than walked.
He arrix^eii quite out of breath, ran up stairs, and entering,
embraocd his father and mother repeatedly, shedding tears of joy,
of which they could not comprehend the cause.

EIOHTT-FIFTH LESSON. 526

<< My dear parents/' said he, '< now ^ can labour, now I can be
of some use to you.''

"You, child, in what way V

" Yes, father, yes, mother ; thanks to the German which you
caused me to learn, I shall gain some money for you ; I have
found here a bookseller, an excellent man, who has promised 1o
employ me .... oh, how happy, how happy I am !"

Next day Edmund did not fail to call on Mr. Meyer : that
bookseller dictated to him several letters on commercial business,
which Edmund turned into French as fast as he heard them.
Besides this, he gave him ari elementary French work to translate,
which he wished to publish in German. For these different
labours, he allowed him a salary of one hundred florins a month:
this was quite sufficient to place his parents above want, and even
to enable them to save something. You may guess what was
Edmund's delight: scarcely a day passed on which he did not
exclaim with transport: "How fortunate it is that I learnt
German !"

At the end of ten months, this means of subsistence was over-
turned. Mr. Meyer fell ill and died, lamented by all his friends,
and particularly by Edmund, who looked upon him as a second
father. His commercial house was dissolved. So that with him
the exiles lost the only resource which enabled them to subsist ;
and Edmund could not find another. What was now to be done ?
What was to become of them ? Madame de Grancey was tor-
mented by an insupportable malady ; this was the continual, the
ardent desire of visiting France, or at least of getting near to it ;
that aoit of slow fever, in short, which is called the home sickness.
Their native land was shut against the exiles ; they could not
even think of settling near its frontiers, which were at that time
the theatre of war between France and the allied powers. Madame
de Grancey sometimes thought that if she could but live in
England, ia that country so near to their native land, she should
find herself better. Her imagination, acting upon her already
enfeebled body, rendered this belief with her what might truly be
called dk fixed idea.

The bason yielded to the desires of his wife ; they set ofl^ em-
barked at Hambiugh, and soon arrived in London. They bad

526 EIGHTY-FIPTH LBSSON.

been but a few days in that capital when one morning Edmond
and his father were passing through a populous quarter of the
town, where there were in particular a great number of sailors.
At that time there was a certain degree of agitation among the
people. The war between France and England was then at the
hottest. Spies sent bj the French republic were said to be at
that time in London. This rumour^ commented upon and exagger-
ated by the common people and sailors, produced a general excite-
ment. It appears that on that day, a man, pointed out as a
French spy, had been pursued, but in vain, by the infuriated
populace. M. de Grancey and his son knew nothing of this cir-
cumstance. They soon, however, remarked that the multitude
were looking at them and pointing to them with a threatening air.
They quickened their pace, but the crowd increased around them
until their path was completely stopped. The word, *' A spy !
spy ! " rang in their ears : four men started out from the multi-
tude, and advanced towards the baron with the intention of strik-
ing him. Some one had thought that he recognized in him that
French spy who had been pursued in vain. This was quite
enough to excite the blind fury of the populace against M. de
Grancey, who could neither understand nor speak their language.
Had he been alone, it would probably have ended fatally with
him; fortunately, however, he was accompanied by his son. At
the terrible word " spy," Edmund, who understood well what it
meant, threw himself before his father. " What do you want 1 "
cried he. — " To throw the French spy into the Thames," was
the reply from hundreds of voices. Edmund, transported by al-
most supernatural energy, covered his father's body by holding
him closely embraced. He then began in English to harangue
the furious populace. This he did with such energy, such logic,
as nothing but imminent peril could have inspired. He told them
who his father was, and where he lived. The people stopped, and
became uncertain. Some constables with truncheons, which are
the ensigns of those appointed to maintain order, had time to reach
the scene of tumult ; they then extricated M. de Grancey, and he
and his son at last got home in safety. This time it was, when
lis mother was not present, for fear of alarming her, that Edmiuid

EIORTT-FIFTH LESSON. 527

said, as he embraced his father : " Oh ! how I thank you for caus*
ing me to learn English ! "

But the trials of our exiles came at last to a close. A mildet
rule was established in France, and his friends had at last been
able to get the name of M. de Grancey erased from the list of emi-
grants. He received this happy information about a month ailer his
last adventure. They wrote to him at the same time that he
would recover a great part of his property which had not been
sold. We may imagine the joy of the whole family. They were
at last about to revisit their native country, after so many sufferings
and disappointments. The exiles returned all three to France, the
soil of which they trod with rapture. The baron and baroness
were never weary of telling again and again, how their son had
been their interpreter, their supporter, their deliverer ! — ^Eldmund
did not grow vain on that account, but we have been assured that,
at an after period, when married, and the father of a family, in
his turn, whenever his children became disheartened by the diffi-
culties they met with in the study of languages, he took pleasure
i« relating his history to them in order to renew their oourage

INDE^.

LIST OF TABLES

CONTAINED IN THIS TOLVSIB.

l>8CLKiraioH of the definite article in
che singnltr maseniine, 1 ; when the
word begins with • followed by a con-
sonant (or s)« 3 ; when the word be-
gins with a rowel, 3 ; in the plural,
96 ; when the word begins with $, fol-
lowed by a consonant, or with a vowel,
27 ; in the singnlar and plural femi-
nine, 979 ; contraction of the definite
articb masculine, 910; feminine, 979.

D£CiMmoK of the indefinite article
masmiUne, 49 ; feminine, 986 ; of the
partitive article masculine, 37 ; femi-
nine, 986.

DiCLmstoR of the personal pro-

AOUQs, 80 ; cX the demunst ative pro*
nouns, ftietfo (eotetto), qutHo, 99.

DfiCLUsiON of the interrogative pro-
nouns, 83.

CoirjuoATioiff of the auxiliaries
Avere and B§»ere, 473 ; of the regular
verbs, 477 ; of the passive voice, 481 ;
of a reflective verb governing the ac-
cusative, 484 ; of a reflective vcih
governing the dative, 486 ; of a verb
with two infinitives, 499 ; of the irre-
gular verbs in ore, 509 ; of the irregn-
lar verbs in ere, 505 ; of the iriegalar
verbs in ire, 513 ; of the defective
verbs, 515.

A, to, 111, 195, 173. Obs. B. 435

AccKiTTS. The grave accent (*),
397 ; the acnte accent (')> 398.

Adjsctivb agrees with its noun or
pronoun in number, Obs. A. B. 99.
Feminine adijectives, and their forma-
tion from masculine adjectives, C. D.
985, 986. Abridgment of the adjectives,
ttno, fraioiio, hello, grande, santo, quelle,
Obs. O. H. 1. 34,35. 459. Comparison
of adjectives, Obs. A. B. 198. Adjec-
tives that are irregular in the forma-
tion of the comparatives and snperla-
UvM, Obs. F. 199 ; Obs. G. 199.

Adverbs of quantity, 58, 59, 60. 1 98.
180. 199. 995. Adverbs of place, 69.
79. 78. 95. 153, 154. 160. 164. 173.

997. 939. 944. 407. Adverbs of qua^
lity and numner, 365. 404. 490. 430.
436. 439. 450, 451. Adverbs of nttm-
Ur, 149. 371. Adverbs of time, 89.
96. 105. 191. 139, 133. 138. 149. 164.
165. 168. 900. 997. 410. ComparaUve
adverbs, 59, 60. 191. Comparison of
adverbs, 130. Formation of superla-
tive adverbs, Obs. H. ibid.

Advice to professors. Note 1,1; to
pupils, Note 7, 4.

AFFnriTT between the Latin, Italian,
and French languages. Note 4, 6.

Apostbophe, 458.

Article (definite) : its declension
in the singular masculine, when the
word begins with any consonant, ex-
cept 0 followed by another consonant,
1 ; when tlie word begins with « fbl-

INDBX. 529

lowed b^ a coxudnant (or with "i, 2 ;
when the word begins with « Towel,
Obe. A. 3 ; in the plural when the
word begins with a consonant, except
• followed hj a consonant,'26 ; when
the word begins with « followed by a
consonant, or with a vY>welj27 ; femi-
nine. 279 ; contraction of the definite
article widi ceitain prepositions, mas-
cnline,210; feminine, 279. In Italian
the definite article precedes the pos-
sessive vprononn,^ except when it is
immediately followed by a noon of
quality or kindred, Obs. B. 3 ; Bule^
l^.—IntUi/inMU artieU: its declension
mascnline, 42 ; feminine, 286. — Far-
titive articU : mascnline, singalar and
plural, 37, 38 ; feminine, singalar and
plural, 286. — ^Use of the article before
proper names, 442.

AuOMSHTATIOirS, 460..

AuawBXTATPns, 32.

Atsbb, to have ; avuto, had, iD">
141. To he, rendered by sverev 8, 9.
4«er kimfgno, to be in want of, 96,
97. Aver pawa, vergogna, torte, ra-
gioM, tempo, eoraggie, deeiderio or vo-
glin, to be afraid, ashamed^ wrong,
rig^t, to have time, courage, a mind,
a wish, 63. Aver helh, in vain, 425.
Goiyagation of avere, 473 et eeqq.

Bs (to), translated by avere:* Are
yon hungry 1 Hh EUa/ame? Avete
fame ? 8. I am thirsty, ho eete ; I am
sleepy, ho eonno, 8. I am afraid, ho
paura ; I am warm, ho ealdo ; I am
cold, /b/r6i2<i0, 10. Are jwu ashamed ?
Sa EUa vergogria ? Avete vergogna 1 1
am wrong, ho tortos Yon are right,
EUa ha ragione, Avete ragione, 15.

BsLLO, fine, haiidsome, or beantifrd.
Before a consonant (not before e, fol-
lowed by a consonant^ hel is used.
Note 2, 5.

Buono, good. Note 1, 5.

Ck>LUi, il quale (or ehe), quelto, U
fuale (or ehe), him who. Plnr. Coloro,

i quali (or ehe),quMUif i qttali (or ehe),
those who. "When ought eolui, coloro,
and when quello, quelU, to be employ-
ed? Obs. 190.

ConnrrxoNAL tenses; their forma-
tion, and when they are employed,
387 et eeqq.

CoKJuncnoirs which govern the sub-
junctive, Bemarke, 378 et eeqq. Con-
junctions expressing certainty require
the indicative, Bern. J5. 379 et eeqq.
Cbi^nctions with the preterite ante-
rior, 329.

CioiiSTBUcnoir, or Syntax, 468.

D.

Da, from, Obs.'C. 23 ; Obs. C. 85 ;
Notes 1, 2. 68. 181. 197. 244. 255.
353. 368 ; Obs. A. 434.

Di, of, Obs. A. 6. Di, to, 63. Di
qud deUa via, on this side of the road ;
di Ui deUa via, on that side of the road,
174. Dsrimpetto, opposite to, 415
Qbs, A.434; Obs. 454.
. DiKiNunvxs, 33.

£.

Elision, 458 et eeqq,

Ella, she. See Way of Addressing
a person in Italian.

EssBBE*, to be, otato, fem. etata,
been, Obs. 137. Beeere impaziente di
(tardare), to long for; eeeere agiato
{comodo), to be comfortable; eeeere
mat eomodo, non er^ere agiato, to be
uncomfortable, 424 Coi^ngation of
eeeere, 473.

EZPLBTIVBS, 469.

F.

FuTUHS, its formation ; first or sun
pie foture, BuU, 220. Obs. A. 2S1.
Compound or past foture ; its forma-
tion, 306. The foture is used in Ita-
lian when the present is emplojFed in
English, Obs. 308. The conditional
conjunction ee, if, may in Italian be
followed by the foture, Obs. 269.

23

580

niDBX.

aunUar ezpreMi(»is> 96.

lowed by a conaoiiaiit, or with », li
preceded by another word, the article
IB no more 2o, bat U, Obs. C. 3. Is
(pronoun), it» 5.

Il (definite article, maacnlimi nn-
Mar, when the word begin» with a
roneonant, except # followed by an-
other conaooant), the, 1.

IirrsaATiTx: ita foimation, and
when it moat be employed, Obe. A.
394. Obs. B. C. 395. 446, 447. The
penonal pronouns and the relative ne
are joined to the imperative, Obs. B.
C. 395.

IiCrERFECT (the) of the Indicative :
its formation, Note 1,314: when it
must be employed, Obs. 314. Imper-
fect of the Sulganctive : its formation,
Obs. A. 385 ; when it must be em-
ployed, Bern. H. 385 et 9eqq.

Iw, in. 68, 69. 85. 89. Obs. A. 133.

Iir LUOGO Di, taeece di, instead of,
followed in Italian by the infinitive,
110.

IwruKiTi : means to distinguish the
infinitive of each conjugation, 63. The
personal pronouns and the relative ne
are joined to the infinitive, Obs. 64.
The infinitive, preceded by the prepo-
sition di, 63, Obs. 110. 125; by the
preposidon «, 111. Obs. A. 133 ; by
ptr, 76. The infinitive without a pre-
poaiUon, Oba. B. 134.

La, she. See Way of Addressing
a person in Italian.

LicBfcis,469,470,471.

I^MHO (t/)> the wood, and la Ugna,
the wood for fuel. Note 3, 5.

Lsx, you. See Way of Addressing
a person in Italian.

Lo (definite article, masculine sin-
gular, when the word begins with 8
followed by a consonant, or with x),
the, 9. Before a vowel the same ar-
ticle is changed into /*, Obs. A. 3.
When the word beginning with « fol- i

IfxHS, tl mao; of mine, deZ aris;
from mine, ddl atis, 11.

N.

Na, some of it, of it, some of them^
of them. Place of the relative ne,
with regard to the personal pronouna,
Obs. A. 78. Obs. B. 79 ; in conjunction
with the infinitive* Obs. 64 ; with the
present participle, Obs. G. 300 ; in
conjunction with the imperative, Obs.
B. C. 395. Ne, fit>m it, horn there,
thence, 164.

NsiTHEa — nor, won — mh, ni, 13.

No, no, 5. Non, not, ihid. Nom —
ni, ni, neither — nor, 13. Non — menU,
noil—- nflcila (or simply nulla, before a
verb), nothing or not any thing, Obs.
A. 8. 14. Non — mente di iuono, no-
thing good, Obs. B. 9.

No, no; not, man, 5. Nothing, or
not any thing, rum — niente, non — nulla
(or simply nulla before the verb), Oba.
A. 8. 14. Nothing, or not any thing
good, niente di huono, Obs B. 9.

NuxBXBs (C^ardinal), 43. 47. 51.
The cardinal numbers are employed
wh^n speaking of the days of the
month, 51. Ordinal numbers, 51, 52.
Distributive numbers, primieramentep
in prtmo Iwtgo, firsdy ; oeeondaria-
menu, in oeeondo luogo, dtc. 371.
The English ordinal number rendered
in Italian by the cardinal :. I received
your letter on the fifth, on the aizth.
&c. Ho rieenuto Im di Lei Uttara il
cinpu, il an, dtc 440.

. Of, di, Oba. A. 6.
I Of the, del (before a conaonant)
\dello (before a, followed by a e«
nant), dolF (before a vowol), 10.

niDBX.

, 581

Qv pupoee,
490.
0%, o» 11.

igppatti^a heUa potta.

Particifle past ; its fermationy
Notes 1, 2, 3, Obs. 137, 138. It agrees
with its object in number, II7141.
0-239. Obs. £. 987. O-304. It
tferves to form the passive voice, 196.
(rr239.

Participle present ; its. formation
and use, 299. The personal pronouns
and the relative ne are joined to the
present participle, Obs. G. 300.

Passato bimoto (or remoto) the
preterite definite ; its formation. Note
1, Obs. A. 318 ; Notes 2, 3, 4, Obs. B.
319. Wben it is employed, 320.

Per, to (in order to), 76. Per lo
tpaxio di, during, 165. Per iimore
(per titna), for fear of, 369. Pel eoreo
di, all along, 407. Per mexxo, through,
457.

Plttral : its formation in nouns and
ac^ectives. Rule, 26, ff eeqq., Obs. and
Rules, 279, £f eeqq.

Plutbrvxct (the) of the Indicative ;
its formation and its use, Obs. D. 320,
3^1. Pluperfect of the Subjunctive :
its formation, Obs. B. 385 ; its use,
388.

PRBFOsinoirs, which in Itahan are
followed by the infinitive, whilst in
English they are followed by the pre-
sent participle, CT 18^, Obs. C. 276.
The English preposition for with the
verbs to ask, domandare, ehiedere ; to
poy» pogore, is not rendered in Italian,
iD" 185. Use of the preposition a,
m. 124. 173. Obs. B. 435: of the
preposition da, Obs. C. 23. Obs. G. 85,
Notes 1, 2, 68. 181, 182. 197. 244,
245.' 353. 368. Obs. A. 434: of the
preposition di, Obs. A. 6. 63. Obs. A.
434. Obs. 454: of the preposition nr,
68, 69. 85. 89. Obs. A. 133 : of the
preposition fbr, to (meaning tit order
to), 76 ; (meaning during), 165 ;
(meaning for fear of), 369 ; (meaning
oU along), 407 ; (meaning through),
457. The infinitive without a prepo-
sition, Obs. B. 134.

PRZsurr (the) tense Indicative : its
formation. Note 1, 100. Obs. A. 101.
There is no distinction in Italian be-
tween / hfoe, do love, am loving, Obs.
B. 102. Verbs whose infinitive ends
in core or gore insert an & as often as
g or e meets with t or e, Obs. G. 103.
489. Present of the Subjunctive: its
formation, 377. When it must hn
employed, Bern, A. B. G. 376. ei
eeqq,

Prxteritb (the) definite. See Pae-
oato rimoto (or remoto) . Preterite an-
terior : its formation and its use, 3^1,
322,

PRBTERFERncT of the Indicative:
its formation and use, 146. Preter-
perfect of the Subjunctive : its forma-
tion and its use, Obs. B. 385 et eeqq.

Prima di, innanxi di (ehe), avanti
di, before, 125.

. pRoifOUR : Personal pronouns, 80,
283. Order of the personal pronouns
in the sentence, 79. Place of the rela-
tive fie with regard to the personal
pronoun, 79. Joining of the personal
pronouns* and the relative ne to the
infinitive (See Infinitive) ; to the pre-
sent participle (See Participle) ; to the
imperative (See Imperative). The
peraonal -pronouns are joined to eceo,
Obs. A. 325. Absolute posaesrive
pronouns, 29, 30. 92. 284. In Italian
the article precedes the possessive pro-
nouns, whether conjunctive or absolute,
Obs. B. 3. 29, 30. 92. 229. 273. 284.
292^. Obs. 348. In Italian the qualifi-
cations of iSignore, Mr., Signora, Mrs.,
Signorina, Miss, usually follow the
possessive pronouns, Obs. B. 273.
Demonstrative pronouns, 10. 16. Obs.
A. 22. Obs. B. 23. 29. 33,34. 147. 285.
287. Determinative pronouns, 33 ..109.
190. Interrogative pronouns, 3. 9. 16.
18. 29. 83. 97. 181. 229. 285. 347,348.
Relative pronouns, 23. 33. 41. 109.
190. 216, 217, 218. 287. Indefinite
pronouns, Obsv 20. 50. 56. 58, 59, 60.
Obs. G. 148. Use of the indefinite
pronoun st, they, the people, any one,
or one, 169, 170. In'definite pronouns
requiring the subjunctive, Obs. P. R.
390. Obs S. 391. Pronouns of reflec-
tive verbs, Obs. A. 203. The refiec-
tive pronouns mffoelf, thfHlf, Slo

Ml

OfPBZ*

rendered hf io Hum or io medenrno,
tu 9te999, or tu medenmo, &e., 356.
Pnmoime of addroei, fw, EUa, IM,
Vo98itiMria, and iHien they ate used,
90 tt9en.

QuALCHB COM (oletma com), eome'
thing or any thing, 7. QuaUJke eosa
di bwmo, eomething, or anything good,
01^. B. 9.

QuALi t or en T (interrogative pro-
noon) , which or what. When is qiutU
and when ehe (plnral quali eke) to be
employed! Oba. D. 3. Note 6, 4.

Quel, quMo, quelT, that, Oba. 10.
QueUo, that, or the one, ihid,

Quxaro {eoUHo), thia one ; qu$Uo,
that one. When nraat qutato, when
eafef(o,andwhen9iie/2ebieQ8edT Oba.
B.93.

8i, i£ 1^ ; reqnirea the imperfect
of the sotgnnctiTe, 385. Se may be
lbU<fwed by the fhtnre, Oba. B. 969.

8i, they, the people, any one, or one,
169, 170.

Smxiou, Sir. When onght thia
word to be written with an « at the
end, and when not t Note 3^ 9.

SoMREon or any thing, qwdehti
eo9a, or dlemnm eo$a, 7. Something,
or any thing good, fnoIcAe oeaa di
teoRe, Oba. B. 9.

SuBJuatTiva, 377 et M97., 384 el
§eqq. See PBxnKT, iMRBraoT, dtc.

SuBSTAxmn : formation of the pln-
ral, 36 et eeqq., 980 9t eeqq. Gender
of BubatantiTea, Notea and Oba. 98, 99.
980 et eeqq, SabatantiTea having a
diatinct form for indlTiduala of the
female aex, Oba. 993, 994.

Suo, hia. See Way of Addreasing
a person in Italian.

SuTFuasioir or vowels. When two
werda finish with the same vowel, that
of the first word is generally aap-
preased. Note 1,5. No vowel iasnp-

preaaed before • fi^lowed by (
nant, ibid. See Eliaion.

That, quel, queUo, quel^ ; nae of
eachof thnw pronoona, Oba. 10. Thai
or the one, quelio, ihid,

Tbs, definite arUcle, il, Io, la,i,gli,
le, 1, 9. See Avntxx.

Tbbbb -or thither, m or ei, 79, 73.
There ie, et m i (oi ha aeot). There
are, ei eene or ot mho, 160. 997.

Tu, thon. See Way of Addreaaing
a person in Italian.

V.

Vkrbs : the three conjngationa, 66.
Verba requiring the preposition di he-
forei the infinitive, 63. Oba. 110. 195.
Verbs requiring the preposition a (ad),
and those reqoiring the preposition in,
110. Oba. A. 133. Verbs requiring
the orepoaition per, 76. Verba which
«o not require a preposition before
the infinitive, Oba. B. 134. Treatise
of the Ittlian verbs, 473 et eeqq.
Compound and derivative verba are
conjugated like their primitives, Obs.
158. Auxiliary verba (aee Avkib*,
Esssix*). Verba which require eeeere
for their aujoliary, 908. Oba. F. 303.
The past participle of auch verba moat
agree in gender and number with dw
nominative of the verb eeeere, fCT 304.
Active verba, 146. Their coiyngatioD,
477 et eeqq. Neuter veibs, 159. Pna-
aive verba, 196, S7 939. Their con-
jugation, 489 et eeqq. Reflective verbs.
903. 908. Their conjugation, 483 et
eeqq., 486 et eeqq, ImperMmal verbo»
191. 199. 915. Way of rendering in
Italian the English interrogativea da
and am, 194. Irregular verba : in ore.
509 et eeqq. ; in ere, 505 et eeqq. ; in ire_
513 et eeqq. Defective verba, 5 15.

Vox, yon. See Way of Addreaaing
a person in Italian.

VossiOROBU (V. S.), your worship.
Voeeignoria lUuetrieeima, your lord •
ship. Sect Way of AddrMnnga per
aon in Italian.

INDEX.

583

VoBTRA ALmzA, joxff Highness.

— EocsLLSHZA, yoar Excel-
lency.

MAKSTi, ^onr Majesty. See

Way of Addressing a person In Ita-

W.

Watok : to wind np, fo regulate the
watch, and sunilar expressions, 409.

Wat (to ask one's), 407.

of Addressing a person in Ita-
lian, Note 3, 1 , 2. ' Note 3, 90 et teqq.^

What? ehe? ehe cosat eosa 9.

Wricb or What 7 quale or ehs (plu-
ral quali, ehe) ? When is quale, and
when ehe, to be employed T Obs. D. 3|
Note 6, 4.

YouBS, U voetro, U sue, U di Lei;
of yonrs, del voeiro, del fuo, del di Lei ;
from yours, dal voetro, dal euo, dal d»
Lei, 11.

<*•« i!fl>

D. Appletan S Co.^a Educational Publicat%on»i

First Lessons in French ;

Or, Elementa37 Fronoh GnaniDBr, Introductory to OUendorflTB Lvsm
Orammar. By G. W. Obxenb. 16mo 60 cents.

Hih HtHe Tolnine Is Intended as an Intn)dQet]on>to <* OLUSDomr^ oomplub Fbvcr
IfrooD," and to pnbUahed In aoeordanee with a Toy general demand ttada finr a mm
alamentaiy work than the larger Grammar.

" It to belieyed that the stadent who shall take the pains to go eareftilly chroofltb this
volume, In the manner somested in the Directions for skadyins it, wiU come to the atndy
if the * Complete MethodHrith a degree of preparation whi^ will render hto eatyi^
fpunt progress easy and sgreeabl&*'

■* It seems admirably suited in an ita parts for ita intended parpoea Inaaerifeaof
retsesj oombining voeabnlariea and mlea,it presents an elementary view of the
»Ie sntileot of the Trench Grammar, teaching and at the asme time iUostrakiqg ereiy
thine eosentlal, both in the forma and In the syntax of the laagoagew We haye been
partwnlarly strock with the nice and exact manner in which the rolea are stated, and
ttie dliforences pointed ont between the En^h and the French Idiom. The book la
parttcolarly designed Ibr yonnger schotors; bnt persons more advanced will do well to
use it before coming to the stndy of the * Complete Method' of Ollendorfll It Is tha
best of the kind with which we are acqoalnted, and, wa ionbt no^ will jooa win tta
way to general adoption.*'— iVovidence J&wmak

PROF. QEORGB ^7. OREBRB.

Companion to Ollendorff's New MeOuod of

Zeamiinff U Stad^ WriU^ and Speak VU F^eruS^ Languaff$, ISmo.
f 6 centB.

*The present work, as its name Imports, forms a yeiy appropriate oompanlatt to th»
Mw edition of OLLavDoavr by M. Yaluk It comprises a series of ninety-two dfa-
lognee^ carefhlly selected, so as to ftmillarlae the student with an extensile range of sab-
jeota^and to enable him to converse npon them with esse and Unency.

** The dial«raea are followed by a valuable ohu>ter on differences of idloma, in which
those pecuUarraea of the language which cannot be daislfled under geoend mle^ an
akarly exhibited, aooomnanied by grammatical hints and usefhl suggeraona

**Heariy one half of the book to taken up with a vocabulary of words arranged ae-
•oidlng to subjects, presenting at a single glanoe all the prindiMd terms relating to any

namea of men and women. These tablea are Indlqwnsable to the French atu*
and alone are worth the price of the book.

« In lir. Green*a reputation as ProAssor of Modem Laaannras In Brown Unlvenity,
. have a soffldent guaranty of the •oaamaj of the work.**-->uw}MiMre<al AdntfiU&t,
* ** We commend thto volume as a Fada-meoiMM to all studnts of the French tongue

«• have a soffldent guaranty of the •amnaj of the work.*^^bf}MiMre<al Adl«0riia&r,
* ** We commend thto volume as a Fada-meoiMM to all studnts of the French tongoi.
Ibe dtolognea are simple in eonsbuetloft— yet they embrace a wide range of sntjedSL
Tlie idiomatlo hints supply a dwtlderatnm ttiat has been long needed by the student aa
Ihoae who have attempted to render French colloquy aoeoralng to grammatloal rule^
know too well The vooabulaiy preceding each conversation to a convenience, If not a
aovelty ; itpredndea the neoesslfy of ftaquant reforenee to a more ponderooa woik."'^

OSTBRVAZiD'B FRBHCB TB8TAMBIIT.

La Nouveau Testamefnl de Notre Seigneur Jesus-

CkHtH. D'aprwlftTenionraviteiMarJ.F.ORKBrAU. Bditiotttfoo'
tiype«l'imprimeriedernnlvonitid*£denl)OiU]|[. aSmo.
%• ATttyartBdMaaafaqWoiniLeotimiatt
19

D. AppUt&n S Co:9 EiMioatumal PvhUMUmL
VBOT, GX78TAVB CHOUQUET.

The Yowng Ladies^ Guide to French Comp(h

poiiiion, 12mo. $1.

- TTitn t» k w«^) a^ewtsii^ roltuiu) of Sdf VH^ vrttleiit with ^e exHiiftoa of tb« tJtl^
pV? 41 »] THfctiiM^ mtln^ Id Um Ft^eh Uo^iuc^. U eiahntm two pBrL-L The Ont te

" TIm» iwM-urnl jiiirt I'Dibrecea cl|rht chai^torA w dlilxtom with tha fbillCFwlng tltJdA, tI*.
Ptvimrkiinrjr lit«ITl^*'^ ImltJiUoii^ NarmtUmflk D«cr|ptJai>a ind Hetunjs^ Pftrtnits mm

jM^ofClApOittlBOik Tb43 fttamptfs» ittd vueoHM to m^ 4A|)iutui<^t arte fUD ia4

Tiy«f^ T«ltati^ Clhitlc^iLbrlui4v V. Hugo, Corltr, &«, From « oirWtil cxMaLnatloD of
tttwbol* book, w« ttOnk It w«U UlciUAi^a t« ne^MupUib Um oti^t IndiuaiAd is \r»

PROF. aUBTAVB CHOUQUET.

QmverscUions and Dialogues upon Daily Oc-

Mipoiioiw, md t^tcKnofy 71^^; Deigned to FamilxariM the Stodant
with those Idiomatio ExpreuionB which meet frequently ocoor in French
Ck>nTerBatk>n. 16mo. 60 cents.

lilft Utile work liedmlnhljedApted to eid the Btiident*BprosreB In eoqaMiif Ike
FkenchkogiuM It Is yeiy oomplete, and presents the worai in most oommon oas 1&
a Ysnr desr sad distinct mannsr. As an ekmentsxr tsxt-boolc in Bhetoiiok it wiU be

MADAMB H. COUTAK.

Chmx de Poesies jpour Les Jeunes Personnes.

Umo. $1.

***GliolzdssPocrfsBpoarl€8 JeiDMsPenooneSj*lsthetK]eer a sdeetloa of jpoeiaa
in the Freneh tannsce, designed tat the nerosal or the young, by Kadame A. Cctataa.
It is a veiy efaanmnceoUaction of some or the sweetset snd mostnaoeftil ysnna in th*

icnageu we wars hardly aware, till we looked orer tUe book, that so many

, jdFreneh sathors had eontribnted to a class of prodnotiooSk so peonDsiij

to resders of sa ettfy sgei'^JRssnifia Post

** This is an admirable compilation. The seleCtloos hare been made with renrencA
to parity of sentiment and pocao flnidi} the larger portion of the eflftidons sre smooc
the btft of the best snthors, inolndtna the nsmes of Xamsrtine, Beraagsr, Victor Hiifs^
•ad other UTlng poets of wide celebri^.**— OMnmsroM ildesrNsir.

VOLTAZRB

HisUnre de Charles XIL, far VoUaire.

Par Oabbisl Subkhnb. One voLlimo. 60 oents.

"A very neat edition of YoltaIi«*B History of Ofaarlea the TwiUtfa, pnblkiiad i

the rapenrlsion of a distinnlshed soholar, and weU adqitod, M it aeema to be di4ga^
fcr the aae efsohooliLnZSbniAi^ Aif^M^.

34

jD. AppleUm S Co?9 Ed/ucatimal PublieaHon»»
PROF. CHAHIJEI8 EICHHOIW

The Practical German Grammar;

Or, a Natural Method of Learning to Bead, Write, and Speak the Qm

znan Langaage. 12mo. $1.

" The phut of this work oonslsta in teaching the pupil hy what Is Oilled the naianl
mode, in opposition to the Orammatloal method. A child is taught to speak its native
tongae by learning the words and the constmetion of sentences, without the assistanoe
of mlea. We have seen Grammars in other langoages formed on this system, hat thla
is the fliBt systematic attempt to introduce the plan into the stnay of the Oennan. We
have no donhtthe anther hM sneoeeded in proandng an excellent text-book. Ona of
the Ibatnxes which deeeryee praise, iPthe arrangement and constmetion of the sentenoee
or examples in snch a way as to take advantage of the analogies between the English
and Qermta, and thus fJacilitate the progreos of the stadent The new and poetic seleo
tions at the end of the Grammuy^are intended as aa IntrodnotioB to the' worka ef the
best German aotboiib**— Pre4L <

PROF. G. J. ADLER.

A Progressive Gerrrmn Reader ;

Prepared with reference to OUendorflTa German Grammar. With «0(ioi]i
Notea and a Vooabnlary. 12mo. $1.

The Ikyorable reception which OlIendorfTs German Grammar has received from the
American public, has indnced the Publishers and the Editor to comply with the veiy
general demand for a Oermcm Reader.

Theplan of this Header is as follows, viz.:

1 The pieces are both prose and poetry, selected from the best authors, and are so
arranged as to present sufficient variety to keep alive the interest of the scholar.

9L It is prcMoeaBive in its nature, the pieces oeing at first very short and eas^ and
increasing m Aficulty and length as the learner advances.

& At the bottom of the page, constant references to the Grammar are made, and the
difflcuH passages expUtfned and rendered. To encourage the ilrst attempt of the learner
as mneh as possible, the twenty<one pieces of the first section are analysed, and all the
necessary words given at the bottom of the page. The notes, which at first are ver>
abundant, diminish as the learner advances.

4 It contains >fM sections. The Jlrsi contains easy pieces, chiefly in prose, with sll
the words necessary for translatlnff them ; the tecondL short pieces in prose and poetiy
alternately, with copious notes and rendnings ; the thirds short popular tales of Gamii
and others ; ib»fgwth^ select ballads and other poems from Buaaoaa. GomnL SoBn.
Lxa. UoLAKD, 8GBWKB. GBAMiB80t tc \ th»1if(\ proso exttacts from the first ouusica

& At the end Is added a YooABiTLamT of all the words occurring In the book.

PROF. OBHLBGHIiAQBR.

A Pronouncing German Reader ;

To which ia added, Method of LeiKming to Bead and Underrfouid ttM
German Language, with or withont a Teacher. 12mo. $1.

. "The stody of the German for the purposes equally of Uteratnre, art, science, and
(ommerce, is making rapid advances In the United States. It would not be suiprldng
?f the German were eventually more stndied in this country than the French. It is
T herefore Important to note with some emphasis all improvements in the mode of teach*
ing the language. Among these we have seen npne— not excepting OIlendoriTs^-thal
I ffers more fiudlltlee for both teacher and learner, or that shows more practical tMsdono^
t ban Oehlschlager*s German Header, Just quoted. The author has been for many yearv
n suooessfhl teacher of the German, his nanve tongue, in Philadelphia, and he has given
la this book the fruits of an tntelligent experience. The time has come, when the old,
humdrum method of learning languages— living hmeuages certainly—should be aban'
doned, once and for ever. A Uving language should oe teamed by foreigners, Just ss it
Is by cfalldrsn. Pronunciation comes by imitation, phrases and idiams hy example and
repetition. The logic of hmguage is an afterthoo^t, something to be ^>p]ied after the
langosfs is learned, not ss a means of lesming \V*—U, & Ofuette.
26

2>. JppleUm S CoiU Educational FubUcaHtmi.
. OUiENDORFF.

New Method of Learning to Bead, Write, and

Sp«ak the German Zan^uoffe, To which ia added, b Systematio Oatiiii*
of the different Parta of Speech, their Inflection and Uae, with. fiiXt
Panidigma, and a complete liat of the Irregular Verbs. By GsoBes J.
Ablxb, a. B., Professor of Qerman in the Univenity of the City of
New-York. One volume 12mo. $1.
^^ A Kjt to thx Exxbodes, in a separate volume, ttcents.

* We have no hesitaflon In stating that the Onunmar before ua Is the best ^
the kind pabUBbed In any '

gtamman, T " "

^leB,andad^ „ _^ _ „ , ,.

ainblr exempliflol, and haying appronriate exerctaea appended to each nue^

"Oflendor(rB Qrammar has Bupeneaed OTerv other work of the kind thrdoghoac i£ii>
pope, and It Is in extensively Increasing demand in all parta of the United States. > As a
book of instniGtlon it presents Ihcilitles. which in all similar books are either entireljr
wanting or but imperfectly afforded. We eameetly beg all engaged in teaching or lean-
ing the German langoage, to nse this Grammar, for it will save them an immensitv ef
«aie and Ubor."

** Beginning with the Simplest phr&se^ Ollendorff gradnallv introdnces erery prind-
plo of Grammar; and he does it by interblending the rules with racfa copions exercisaa
and idiomatic expressions, thst by a few months' diligent application, and nnder tfaa
gnidance of a skilAil instmctor, any one may acanire every thing that is essential to
enable hllb to read, to write, and to convene in the language. A more complete an**
lyticel qfatem is not to be found in any department of sctenoei Each subject ofinibr-
mation, fh>m the more simple to the most difficult principles of the language, Is deariy
presented throughout the w))ole Grammar and its sapplemenl— the key to the <

**■ The idioms snd peculiarities of the German are tau^t In the same aatoial i
as they would be by a vemaeulsr use of the language. This feature or the Oil
system is sufficient to give it preference over every other."

" We have no hesitanon In stating that the Grammar before us is the best work «t
kind published in any language. Certainly, in oompailson with other Germaii.
Dunars, it has a vast superiority. The plan is admirable, conunenclng with princA*
sand advancing by slow gradations to the most abstruse and complex parts^all ad*

OZiIJBNDORFF.

New Method of Learning to Ready Write, and

Speak ihe En^Ueh Languagey through the Medium of the German : ar-

rsnged and adapted for Schools and Private Instruction, by P. Gakdi.

12mo. $1.

EBT A Est to thb EzzRcnis, in % eeparftte volume. ISmo. 75 eta.

**My oompllation of the French Grammar after the system of OUendorfl; hss made
the German public so thoroughly acquainted with this higfalv practical svstem of ior
■tmction, that it will not be necessary to add any fkuther recommendation l " ' ~~

alnthisplaosk
It was so univenally acknowledged and adopted, that I was induced to compile a simi-
lar Grammar for Germans to learn En^ish ; and I did thb the more willingqr beeanae X
was urged to do so by many from all •quarters.

**In carrying out the plan, I endeavored to introduee exserdses In questions aad
aaswers suited to fluniliar and social conversation, so as to do away with the antiquated
Phrase-books still in uscl The frequent application and repetition of the rules set forth
In this book, I have sought to make as free from dull monotony as possible, br glviac
the sentanoes a new turn, and by arranging them In dUEerent order, so as not to repeat
tile same over and over again.

** A practical routine of Instruction carried en for many yean^ has tsught me Cba
wants of the student; I feel therefore perfectly confident in bringtng this book befet*
the pnbtic"— JBrt/Md/rtwi Prtfap^

'^Tlils work will be found by Germans to be sn essy, simple, and expeditious i

of acquiring a knowledge of the Enrilsh language. The system of the great Unnist li
veiy popular with all who have made themselves aequalnted with It, and as applied te
the vaiiona languages in nB«L" '^ -w

95

•didon by Dr. Seoane; bat it needed still oieater impnyementB than Beoane has gtren
It and the l*pae of twenty yean has made Its deflcieneies painAilly i ~

D. Applstan A Co.U JESdueatumal PublieaUanM,

0BO auxx'b neuman and barstttl—by velazqubz.
A FranouT^Ginff Dictionary of the Spanish and

BngUih Lotukgvages ; oompoBod from the Spanish Diotiongnes of th«
Spanish Academ)^' Terreros, and Salva, upon the hasia of Beoone'a
XdiUon of Neaman and Baretti, and from the English Diodonariea of
Welwter, Woroeater, ind Walker; with the addition of jnore than
Eight Thonaaai New Woida, Idioms, and Faniiliar Phrases, the Irreg-
ularities of all the Verbe, and a Grammatioal Bjnopaia of both Langn*-
gea. By Maskako Vxtjowmz di La Gadkna, Profesaof of the Spanish
Langnage and Literatore in Colombia College, N. T., Ao., Ao. In Twol
Parte-— I. Spanish— English. 11. English— Spanish. One volume imp.*
8vo.» of about 1400 pages. Strongly and neatiy bound, price $6.

Hm giMt deetdentom of an accarate, eomnrahenstye, and well-digeated Dletfonaij
ef the SpanlA and Enf^h langnagea is now first realised In this work by Professor
Velasquez. The Taloe of Neuman and Baretti's Dictionary was greatly enhanced in the
,.., _ ^ -r^ « W-* .. — A^A -«ii *^- • *- *u-« t^oane has stren

lent ProfeM»r

VeUoquex h«i availed himself of all the valuable material aocumnlatea by his predecee>
sotBL ue has also enriched his pages from the latest edition of the Dictionary of the
Aoademy— published subeeqnentlv to 8eoane*B revislon—^nd fh>m the great work of
Cabrera, Terreros, and the mdefkucable 8alv4. Many flunHlar words not fbnnd in the
IMetlaoaries, but constantly in use m Cuba, in Mexico, and in South America, are now
first given, as well ss a long catalogue of mercantile te^m^ colleetedfrom reliable sourcesk
To these Professor Yelafl^uez has added the manv words an4 phrases, the much-needed
oorrections, and the thorough revision suggested bv his long experience as a teacher of
hjs mother tonpaek Besides these Improvements in the Vocabulary, the work is now
nuAm a Pronoundnff Dictionary. The pronunciation of every Spanish word is given In
a maAner which will enable an Engilsb scholar to pronounce tnem at sight The method
of pronouncing English words in this Dictionary merits the particular attention of evei/
eoe wrhose nu^er tongue is the Castilian. It is based upon the method so much ad*
mired and recommended by the learned Don Lorenao Hervas, in his ** OatAtogo de la%
Len(ptat .**' namelv, by giving to every elementary sound in the language a correspond
log alphabetical character, and by restricting each of these disracters to one singta
sound. By the help of this method, so superior to notation with figured vowels, no per*
son willing to devote half an hour to the dozen new alphabetic characters need be at a
loss to pronounce cofrectlv everv English word in the Dictionary. The new and im-
proved orthosraphv sanctioned Sy the latest edition of the Dictionary of the Academy-—
now universally adopted by the press— is here given for the first time in a Spanish snd
English Dictionsry. Another new and most useful feature of the work is an ** Outline
Grammar of the Spanish Language," and a ** Grammatical Synopsis of the English Lao*
guage,*' each containing a nammar in miniature^ and all the Irregular verM of both
Lnguages. The volume is thus rendered complete, aad mads to answer all the pwpoeM
ef a grammar and a Difltionaij.

Nearly ready ^ in one volume 12ma^

AN ABRIDOMBKT OF THE ABOVB.

niB Abridgment Is a miniature copy of the great oetavo work by FrcAssor Velaa
fees, and contains all its most Important addltiena and impiovemenia. Expurgated of
Oie antiquated orthography, and the manifold errors and absurdltlea so commoa la
Spanish and English Abrtdgmenta, it Is intended as a reliable worit of refereace lor
toslnessnaen, and for all the ordinary uses of a Dietiooary. The scholsr who wishes te
^ ,^.. .. . jg^jg,, ofiasica,!^" . ..-- -

beeome w«ll acouainted with the Spanish and English ouasica, wUl hanUv be satMlsd
with any tUng leas than the oetavo edition ; but as a podket companion for beginnen,
fat tnvelkaa, or for the use of those who consult a dictionary for praotieal puipoiM, thk

'"^^ 1 ^^ Y^ found superiflT to any other work yet pub||sb«L

91

J). AfpUUm S Co?^ EdueaUmisi PubUeatim^

PROF. AflHHTi C. XBNDRICK.

Greek Ollendorff;

'Btaxi!g%]^rogn»Af^ Ezhibitioii of th« Principlafl of tha Greelt Qfsmmat.
Designad for beghmen in Oreek^ and m » Book of £zerd8«« for AckI-
•mias and Colkgas. 12ido. $1.

** Among the mny •lementarf bool»T»ablMi«d ftir the qm of sehogita^ we haT» not
■Mt wlUi 000 that haa pleated na as mach aa Profeflaot Kendrtck's Greek QUevdorfl
It MWiM esMtlj fitted for tha Dorpote Intended, Tti.. by Insafllng into the mln^ of tha
/Wuif the more simple elementary prlndplea of tha langnage, tfaw to prepere them ftt
a mora axtanalTa ana fSimillar a«quabtanoe with the Ancient Greek ciSuuca. Ita rina
jMky le perfectly deliahtfhL The nnftmiliar character of the letten^ and tke loiy
•ooTBe ofatody reanired to ctTe a boy OTen a rery imperfiwt knowledn <^ the Gnuiv
aar, have deterred many abaginBer firom proeecotins the RQdy of Greek, who^ witk
fha attraetlTe rolnme before lui, #oald have tiken hold or it at onoe, and maaterwd al
' %dlfflcaltiaa lUs ia not only tha beat poeaible book to be pot into the banda c/boya
ImM it aatms to na, that any penon saota advanoad ia yaaiBi and wiahing to acqiuxa
loaM kwrnladge of Greek, aran withoat a taaeber, mi^, by^be aid of thia volnme, u,

**K|) fooiMBof the lettaia and dlphtfaonga, and the naa of tha bieathlnga and aeoanlv
are ao biliftf, yet so fomUiarly ezpUaned, that, althoogh the anthor leoomiutoda that ibti
aortian oftna work ahoold be daferrad by the yoongor pnpila to a aeoond, ore third pa
tiML yet Boefa a reoommendation seema to na to be hardly naoeeaary.

* A knowladga of the Greek Gnmmar baa generally been considered aa an iadlspf^
«ble qnalifloatiaa of the pnpll before he begina to read Greek. The doing away wia
the neoeaattr of thia at tha beginning; is very aneonracing to the learner, while at tb«
•ame Onia It giraa tha aatbor an opportonlty to introanoe aradnally, and' almoat imper
aeptibly, anffident grammar to aiastnta the esamplaa as taev oocor ; and then, X^r rs
Mating theae examples with yartatlona ahnoat fanmiwirable, the principle la Inddibl}
Bppresaed open the mind.

In the older Greek books Intended for ioboola, tha azamplel gitan haTo been fiuilt^
ftom their Inyolving too many prioeiplea at the beginning The mind of the popU can
act oomprehend ao many things at once ; be gets oonftaaad, aad becomea, after a whiles
diaeouragad. Wharaaa, in the Greek OUendorlT of Profosaot Kandrtok, erery prindpla
ef the Grammar la iatrodnoed by degree^ and only when tt la wanted for i^pUeatloB.
It teadiea mlea by examples, rattier than examplee by mlea.

** Another advantage of thia volume over the older sehocd booka of the kind, is the
examples of doable translation, introdooad at the very beginning, Aid made a part cf
the ranilar dally exercise.

**^e bookis well printed in good type, and on gold paper, for wiloh the Appletoai
diierve dae credit

** We ooDdada by rawmandlng thia woik to tha Ikvorable attaattJB of teaehaak'*
Si T. Recorder,

PROF. JAMUS R. BCiaXL

Exercises in Greek Prose ComposUion.

Adapted to the Fint Book of Xenophon'a Anabaaia. One toIobm
12mo. Price T5 oenta.

V F«r the oonvanienea of the leaner, aa Englisb^reek Yocabnlair, a Gatslogaa
«f the Trregolar Verba, and aa Index to the prindpal Grammatleal Notoa. have \>of
appended ^ ^

** A Bcbool-bodk of the hlghaat ocder, ountalnlng a earefcdly arnmged series of cm^
aiaas derived tmn. the first book of Xenophon'a Anabaaia (which is appended entJrsA
an English and Greek Voeabnlary, and a fist of the principal modlflcalions of f mgnisr
terbs. We regard it aa one peculiar exoellenoa of tnla book, that it presoppp^
both the diligent scholar and tba painstaking tcaoher; in othw handa ft woaM m
not only n8elee^ bat •nvaaUsL We like it alao, beeanae, instead of aiming to gf^fJS?
popO practice in a variety of styles, it places beibre him but a single model ^ Gratf
aompoBltion, and that the very anther who odmbinca in tha grsatest degree pnzi^ » Jf";
agiHMruid idiom, with a sfmpUdljy that both invltaa and wwsrda imitation.* W7»W«^"

* 33

r />. AFPLSTONdt CO:S PUBLIOATIOJSS, *

FRENCH.

BADOI8' Orammaire Anglaiie. 1 toL 12mo. $1 00 >

K«y to ditto. W (

OBOUQUX3T8 French Oonvenatloiui and Dialogues. ISmo. . 60

Toung Iiadiet' Ooide to French Oompoaitlon. \l

COIjIjOT'8 Bramatio French Reader. 12mo. 1 00 !

OOUTAN, A., Oholz de Poesies. 12ina 1 00 '

DE FIVA'8 Elementary French Reader. 16mo 60

Classic do. 12ma ....... 1 00

Z«e Nouveau Testament Par J. F. Osterrald. 82ino. 26

OZiIjfiNDORFF'8 New Method of I«eaming French. By Jiwrt. 1 00

Method of Iieazning French. Bj V. Value. 1 00

KEY to each voL 76

First Lessons in French. By G. W. Greene. ISmcn 60

COMPANION to Ollendorflf's French. Hy G. W. Gseknk. 12ma 76

ROEMER'S First French Reader. 12mo. 1 00 ,

Second do. 12mo. 1 26

ROWAN'S Modem French Reader. 12mo. < . • 76

SPIER'S and Surenne's Complete French and English and Eng-
lish and Frrnch Dictionary. TVith Fronunciatlon, Ao^f Ac. Om Urgtt 8to. toL of
1490 pi>. Half morocco. ....600

Thia it Ihn mmt CH>tnp!«>t«, aceonita wid r«li«bl« Dietiouuy of tkMe Lan^aref pabluhttd. Every Fmrh
wor«l \iv\i\^ AccoDifani«>d bv M aa Mxacl pranunciati .u a* caa Im rapn>a«utcd by eorraapoDdini^ Kmnda, aad
vice vi^riA. It coutauia a iuU yoi-AbuLarv of tho names of p«raofM and plaoea, mjrtbologioal kad olanir^'.
anciant aiid mod«ni, and tmlK-diea •« vara! diouaand n«w phruwa and tdionia.

SURENNE'S French and English Pronouncing Dictionary. 12nia 1 60

Abridged ditto. 16mo 90

VOIiTAIRE'S Histoire de Charles XIL Par Surenne. 18mo. . 60

SPANISH.
BUTLER'S Spanish Teacher and Colloquial Phrase Book. ISmo. 60

DON QUIXOTE, (in Spanish.) 12ma 186

QtVL BliAS, (in Spauish.)

OLLENDORFF'S New Method of Learning Spanish. By VL

Velasquez and T. 8imon6. 12mo. .....••^^

KEY to ditto W

MANDEVILLE'S Primary Reader, (in Spanish.) 12mo. . • . S^

Second do. do. 12ma . • . W

TOLON'S Elementary Spanish Reader. 12mo. ^

VELASQUEZ' New* Spanish Reader. With Lexicon. 12ma • • 1 8^

Spanish Phrase Book. 18mo. ....... ^

OLLENDORFF'S New Method of Leaning English applied to

the Spanish. B7 Professors Palenxuela and Oarennow lima ....... '^

KEY to ditto. '•

OLLENDORFF'S New Method of Learning French Tippliedto

the Sfuafsh. B7 Pro£ Bimon&

SEQANE'S Neuman and Baretti's Spanish and English and Eng-
lish and Spanish DIctlonsiy. By Telssqaet. With PronoDdsduo, A&, Ao. Ons
large 8vo. vol. of 14^)0 i>p. 6 w

Til* r>r«nnnf i«Unn of the CMtilmn Uuiirnar* «• •» drarly w>t fortti In thia DirtMoarjr M to r«id«r it well- <

Birb imp- Miblc for uv p«» a who can r««d EnKliah readily to fiul of ubtainijiit tha traa aoanda of th« Spuiah
won), at niiirhu ' It alB-'> c ntaina ui b»tb laniriia^rs th«> aiaet aquiTalaato and eamqpoodMiU «f (h* wolda <■ g«a>
•rnl uMi, txiib in tbt'tf literal and ottrtaphortcal aec«platloai.

\

Y AN Abridgment of the above nearly ready.
a MARSH'S BodEOCeeping, (in Spanish.)

\

ARNOLDS

Hy ^]H iiL'-^i

CHAMPLI
CICERO. *

KENDRICj
KUHNnm

Tinl-r Til
HORACE.
LIVY. Wrt
Oedtpns Ty^
TACITUS' 1

XENOPHq

K,!iLii.rL Id

QESENHJI

ADI^R'9 i

aiy, L'uvi]

OLLENDG

EET to ditt
OLLENBa

111 1 1 L&ripll

KEY to diti

i U £3 r c2Ui. »r ^ ^'t^~

-^->^^i^

TM8 book Hbo\ild be returned to
the Library on or before the laet date
fitamped below,

A fine of five cents a day is incurred
by retaining it beyond the specified
time.

FleasB return prompUy*

OEBLSOHt

ElCHHORIs

aecond Progr^saiyo a-ermau Header, {/it preu^)

Qtn&ftn Phrase Book. {In press.)

ITALIAN.!

PMtESTFS Italian Reader. 12mo.

OLLENDORFF'S New Method of Learning Italian.

by F. FoTMa lima

KEY to ditto.

BIEADOW8' New Italian and Bngliah DicUonary. IvoL
OLLENDORFF'S Pximary Leiaons in Italiaa. ISmo. .

16mo.

T5

X>
)0
)0
'5
'5
15
5
6
►0
6
0
0
0

iO
5
0
5
6

EdiUd

100

1 00
76

1 60
60

^^i-f<i^